diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 869062 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207-h/20207-h.htm | 12691 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207-h/images/1.jpg | bin | 0 -> 67640 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207-h/images/2.jpg | bin | 0 -> 48035 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207-h/images/3.jpg | bin | 0 -> 75660 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207-h/images/4.jpg | bin | 0 -> 64846 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207-h/images/5.jpg | bin | 0 -> 52488 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207-h/images/a.jpg | bin | 0 -> 26757 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207-h/images/b.jpg | bin | 0 -> 29382 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207-h/images/c.jpg | bin | 0 -> 23147 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207-h/images/d.jpg | bin | 0 -> 31925 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207-h/images/e.jpg | bin | 0 -> 28415 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207-h/images/f.jpg | bin | 0 -> 28016 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207-h/images/g.jpg | bin | 0 -> 29822 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207-h/images/h.jpg | bin | 0 -> 30962 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207-h/images/i.jpg | bin | 0 -> 35026 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207-h/images/j.jpg | bin | 0 -> 30306 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207.txt | 14584 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20207.zip | bin | 0 -> 265206 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
22 files changed, 27291 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/20207-h.zip b/20207-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a7f9333 --- /dev/null +++ b/20207-h.zip diff --git a/20207-h/20207-h.htm b/20207-h/20207-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bb131f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/20207-h/20207-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,12691 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="CONTENT-TYPE" content="text/html; charset=us-ascii" /> +<title>Under Wellington's Command:</title> + +<style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[*/ + body {background:#ffffff; + color:black; + font-family: "Times New Roman", serif; + font-size:14pt; + margin-top:70px; + margin-left:10%; + margin-right:10%; + text-align:justify} + caption { font-weight: bold; letter-spacing: 0.04em; font-family: "Arial"; + text-transform: uppercase; font-size: 18pt; } + div { text-align: center} + em {font-weight: bold} + h1 {text-align: center; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.05em} + h2 {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0.04em} + h3 {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0.04em} + hr {height: 5px} + p {text-indent: 4% } + pre {margin-left: 10%; font-size: 10pt;} + table {text-align: center} + td { font-family: "Arial"; text-align: left} + td.ltoc { letter-spacing: 0.04em; font-weight: bold; font-size: 18pt; + text-transform: uppercase; text-align: right; vertical-align: top } + td.rtoc { font-weight: bold; font-size: 18pt; text-align: left} + thead { font-weight: bold;} +/*]]>*/ +</style> +</head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Under Wellington's Command, by G. A. Henty + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Under Wellington's Command + A Tale of the Peninsular War + +Author: G. A. Henty + +Illustrator: Wal. Paget + +Release Date: December 29, 2006 [EBook #20207] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK UNDER WELLINGTON'S COMMAND *** + + + + +Produced by Martin Robb + + + + + +</pre> + +<h1>Under Wellington's Command:</h1> +<h2>A Tale of the Peninsular War<br /> +by G. A. Henty.<br /></h2> +<hr /> +<center> +<table summary="Table of Contents"> +<caption>Contents</caption> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"></td> +<td class="rtoc"><a href="#Preface">Preface</a>.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch1">Chapter 1</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Detached Force.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch2">Chapter 2</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Talavera.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch3">Chapter 3</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Prisoners.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch4">Chapter 4</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Guerillas.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch5">Chapter 5</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">An Escape.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch6">Chapter 6</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Afloat.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch7">Chapter 7</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A French Privateer.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch8">Chapter 8</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Smart Engagement.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch9">Chapter 9</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Rejoining.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch10">Chapter 10</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Almeida.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch11">Chapter 11</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The French Advance.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch12">Chapter 12</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Fuentes D'Onoro.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch13">Chapter 13</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">From Salamanca To Cadiz.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch14">Chapter 14</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Effecting A Diversion.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch15">Chapter 15</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Dick Ryan's Capture.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch16">Chapter 16</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Back With The Army.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch17">Chapter 17</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Ciudad Rodrigo.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch18">Chapter 18</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Sack Of A City.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch19">Chapter 19</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Gratitude.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch20">Chapter 20</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Salamanca.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch21">Chapter 21</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Home Again.</td> +</tr> +</table> +<br /> +<br /> +<br /> +<table summary="Illustrations"> +<caption>Illustrations<br /></caption> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicA">"You may as well make your report to me, +O'Connor."</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#Map1">Plan of the Battle of Talavera.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicB">"We surrender, sir, as prisoners of +war."</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicC">Stooping so that their figures should not show +against the sky.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicD">"She is walking along now."</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicE">"This is Colonel O'Connor, sir."</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#Map2">Plan of the Battle of Busaco.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicF">"Good news. We are going to take +Coimbra."</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#Map3">Plan of the Lines of Torres Vedras.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#Map4">Plan of the Battle of Fuentes d'Onoro.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicG">The men leapt to their feet, cheering +vociferously.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicH">"Search him at once."</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicI">The man fell, with a sharp cry.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#Map5">Plan of the Forts and Operations round +Salamanca.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicJ">A shell had struck Terence's horse.</a></td> +</tr> +</table> +</center> +<h2><a name="Preface" id="Preface">Preface</a>.</h2> +<p>As many boys into whose hands the present volume may fall will +not have read my last year's book, With Moore in Corunna, of which +this is a continuation, it is necessary that a few words should be +said, to enable them to take up the thread of the story. It was +impossible, in the limits of one book, to give even an outline of +the story of the Peninsular War, without devoting the whole space +to the military operations. It would, in fact, have been a history +rather than a tale; and it accordingly closed with the passage of +the Douro, and the expulsion of the French from Portugal.</p> +<p>The hero, Terence O'Connor, was the son of the senior captain of +the Mayo Fusiliers and, when the regiment was ordered to join Sir +Arthur Wellesley's expedition to Portugal, the colonel of the +regiment obtained for him a commission; although so notorious was +the boy, for his mischievous pranks, that the colonel hesitated +whether he would not get into some serious scrapes; especially as +Dick Ryan, one of the ensigns, was always his companion in +mischief, and both were aided and abetted by Captain O'Grady.</p> +<p>However, on the way out, the slow old transport, in which a wing +of the regiment was carried, was attacked by two French privateers, +who would have either taken or sunk her, had it not been for a +happy suggestion of the quick-witted lad. For this he gained great +credit, and was selected by General Fane as one of his +aides-de-camp. In this capacity he went through the arduous +campaign, under General Moore, that ended at Corunna.</p> +<p>His father had been so seriously wounded, at Vimiera, that he +was invalided home and placed on half pay; and in the same battle +Captain O'Grady lost his left arm but, on its being cured, returned +to his place in the regiment.</p> +<p>At Corunna Terence, while carrying a despatch, was thrown from +his horse and stunned; and on recovering found that the British had +already embarked on board the ships of the fleet. He made his way +to the frontier of Portugal, and thence to Lisbon. He was then +appointed to the staff of Sir John Craddock, who was now in +command; and sent in charge of some treasure for the use of the +Spanish General Romana, who was collecting a force on the northern +border of Portugal. Terence had orders to aid him, in any way in +his power, to check the invasion of Portugal from the north.</p> +<p>Of this order he took advantage when, on the way, the agents of +the junta of Oporto endeavoured to rob him; attacking the house +where he and his escort had taken up their quarters with a +newly-raised levy of two thousand five hundred unarmed peasants. By +a ruse he got their leaders into his hands, and these showed such +abject cowardice that the peasants refused further to follow them, +and asked Terence to take the command of the force.</p> +<p>He assented, formed them into two battalions, appointed two +British orderlies as majors, the Portuguese officer of his escort +lieutenant-colonel, and his troopers captains of companies; put +them in the way of obtaining arms and, by dint of hard drill and +kindness, converted them into an efficient body of soldiers. +Finding that little was to be expected from Romana's force, he +acted as a partisan leader and, in this capacity, performed such +valuable service that he was confirmed in the command of his force, +which received the name of the Minho regiment; and he and his +officers received commissions for the rank they held in the +Portuguese army.</p> +<p>At Oporto he rescued from a convent a cousin, who, at the death +of her father, a British merchant there, had been shut up by her +Portuguese mother until she would consent to sign away the property +to which she was entitled, and to become a nun. She went to England +to live with Terence's father, and came into possession of the +fortune which her father, foreseeing that difficulties might arise +at his death, had forwarded to a bank at home, having appointed +Captain O'Connor her guardian.</p> +<p>The present volume takes the story of the Peninsular War up to +the battle of Salamanca, and concludes the history of Terence +O'Connor. My readers will understand that, in all actions in which +the British army took part, the details are accurately given; but +that the doings of the Minho regiment, and of Terence O'Connor as a +partisan leader, are not to be considered as strictly historical, +although similar feats of daring and adventure were accomplished by +Trant, Pack, and other leaders of irregular forces.</p> +<p>G. A. Henty.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch1" id="Ch1">Chapter 1</a>: A Detached Force.</h2> +<h2><br /> +<br /></h2> +<p>"Be jabers, Terence, we shall all die of weariness with doing +nothing, if we don't move soon," said Captain O'Grady; who, with +Dick Ryan, had ridden over to spend the afternoon with Terence +O'Connor, whose regiment of Portuguese was encamped some six miles +out of Abrantes, where the division to which the Mayo Fusiliers +belonged was stationed.</p> +<p>"Here we are in June, and the sun getting hotter and hotter, and +the whisky just come to an end, though we have been mighty sparing +over it, and nothing to eat but ration beef. Begorrah, if it wasn't +for the bastely drill, I should forget that I was a soldier at all. +I should take meself for a convict, condemned to stop all me life +in one place. At first there was something to do, for one could +forage for food dacent to eat; but now I don't believe there is as +much as an old hen left within fifteen miles, and as for ducks and +geese, I have almost forgotten the taste of them."</p> +<p>"It is not lively work, O'Grady, but it is worse for me here. +You have got Dicky Ryan to stir you up and keep you alive, and +O'Flaherty to look after your health and see that you don't exceed +your allowance; while practically I have no one but Herrara to +speak to, for though Bull and Macwitty are excellent fellows in +their way, they are not much as companions.</p> +<p>"However, I think we must be nearly at the end of it. We have +got pretty well all the troops up here, except those who are to +remain at Lisbon."</p> +<p>"I see the men," O'Grady said, "but I don't see the victuals. We +can't march until we get transport and food, and where they are to +come from no one seems to know."</p> +<p>"I am afraid we shall do badly for a time in that respect, +O'Grady. Sir Arthur has not had time, yet, to find out what humbugs +the Spaniards are, and what wholesale lies they tell. Of course, he +had some slight experience of it when we first landed, at the +Mondego; but it takes longer than that to get at the bottom of +their want of faith. Craddock learnt it after a bitter experience, +and so did Moore. I have no doubt that the Spaniards have +represented to Sir Arthur that they have large disciplined armies, +that the French have been reduced to a mere handful, and that they +are only waiting for his advance to drive them across the frontier. +Also, no doubt, they have promised to find any amount of transport +and provisions, as soon as he enters Spain. As to relying upon +Cuesta, you might as well rely upon the assistance of an army of +hares, commanded by a pig-headed owl."</p> +<p>"I can't make out, meself," O'Grady said, "what we want to have +anything to do with the Spaniards for, at all. If I were in Sir +Arthur's place, I would just march straight against the French and +thrash them."</p> +<p>"That sounds well, O'Grady, but we know very little about where +the French are, what they are doing, or what is their strength; and +I think that you will allow that, though we have beaten them each +time we have met them, they fought well. At Rolica we were three to +one against them, and at Vimiera we had the advantage of a strong +position. At Corunna things were pretty well even, but we had our +backs to the wall.</p> +<p>"I am afraid, O'Grady, that just at present you are scarcely +qualified to take command of the army; except only on the one +point, that you thoroughly distrust the Spaniards.</p> +<p>"Well, Dick, have you been having any fun lately?"</p> +<p>"It is not to be done, Terence. Everyone is too disgusted and +out of temper to make it safe. Even the chief is dangerous. I would +as soon think of playing a joke on a wandering tiger, as on him. +The major is not a man to trifle with, at the best of times and, +except O'Flaherty, there is not a man among them who has a good +word to throw at a dog. Faith, when one thinks of the good time one +used to have at Athlone, it is heartbreaking."</p> +<p>"Well, come in and refresh yourselves. I have a bottle or two +still left."</p> +<p>"That is good news!" O'Grady said fervently. "It has been on the +tip of me tongue to ask you, for me mouth is like an oven; but I +was so afraid you would say it was gone that I dare n't open me +lips about it."</p> +<p>"To tell you the truth, O'Grady, except when some of you fellows +come over, there is not any whisky touched in this camp. I have +kept it strictly for your sergeants, who have been helping to teach +my men drill, and coaching the non-commissioned officers. It has +been hard work for them, but they have stuck to it well, and the +thought of an allowance at the end of the day's work has done +wonders with them.</p> +<p>"We made a very fair show when we came in, but now I think the +two battalions could work with the best here, without doing +themselves discredit. The non-commissioned officers have always +been our weak point, but now my fellows know their work very +fairly, and they go at it with a will. You see, they are all very +proud of the corps, and have spared no pains to make themselves +worthy of it.</p> +<p>"Of course, what you may call purely parade movements are not +done as they are by our infantry; but in all useful work, I would +back them against any here. They are very fair shots, too. I have +paid for a lot of extra ammunition; which, I confess, we bought +from some of the native levies. No doubt I should get into a row +over it, if it were known; but as these fellows are not likely ever +to fire a shot against the French, and it is of importance that +mine should be able to shoot well, I didn't hesitate to do it. +Fortunately the regimental chest is not empty, and all the officers +have given a third of their pay, to help. But it has certainly done +a lot of good, and the shooting has greatly improved since we came +here."</p> +<p>"I have been working steadily at Portuguese, Terence, ever since +you spoke to me about it. One has no end of time on one's hands +and, really, I am getting on very fairly."</p> +<p>"That is right, Dicky. If we win this campaign I will certainly +ask for you as adjutant. I shall be awfully glad to have you with +me, and I really do want an adjutant for each battalion.</p> +<p>"And you, O'Grady?"</p> +<p>"Well, I can't report favourably of meself at all, at all. I +tried hard for a week, and it is the fault of me tongue, and not of +meself. I can't get it to twist itself to the outlandish words. I +am willing enough, but me tongue isn't; and I am afraid that, were +it a necessity that every officer in your corps should speak the +bastely language, I should have to stay at home."</p> +<p>"I am afraid that it is quite necessary, O'Grady," Terence +laughed. "An adjutant who could not make himself understood would +be of no shadow of use. You know how I should like to have you with +me; but, upon the other hand, there would be inconveniences. You +are, as you have said many a time, my superior officer in our army, +and I really should not like to have to give you orders. Then +again, Bull and Macwitty are still more your juniors, having only +received their commissions a few months back; and they would feel +just as uncomfortable as I should, at having you under them. I +don't think that it would do at all. Besides, you know, you are not +fond of work by any means, and there would be more to do in a +regiment like this than in one of our own."</p> +<p>"I suppose that it must be so, Terence," O'Grady said +resignedly, as he emptied his tumbler; "and besides, there is a +sort of superstition in the service that an adjutant should be +always able to walk straight to his tent, even after a warm night +at mess. Now, although it seems to me that I have every other +qualification, in that respect I should be a failure; and I imagine +that, in a Portuguese regiment, the thing would be looked at more +seriously than it is in an Irish one; where such a matter occurs, +occasionally, among men as well as officers."</p> +<p>"That is quite true, O'Grady. The Portuguese are a sober people +and would not, as you say, be able to make the same allowance for +our weaknesses that Irish soldiers do; seeing that it is too common +for our men to be either one way or the other.</p> +<p>"However, Ryan, I do hope I shall be able to get you. I never +had much hopes of O'Grady; and this failure of his tongue to aid +him, in his vigorous efforts to learn the language, seems to quite +settle the matter as far as he is concerned."</p> +<p>At this moment an orderly rode up to the tent. Terence went +out.</p> +<p>"A despatch from headquarters, sir," the trooper said, +saluting.</p> +<p>"All right, my man! You had better wait for five minutes, and +see if any answer is required."</p> +<p>Going into the tent, he opened the despatch.</p> +<p>"Hooray!" he said, as he glanced at the contents, "here is a +movement, at last."</p> +<p>The letter was as follows:</p> +<p>"Colonel O'Connor will at once march with his force to +Plasencia; and will reconnoitre the country between that town and +the Tagus to the south, and Bejar to the north. He will ascertain, +as far as possible, the position and movements of the French army +under Victor. He will send a daily report of his observations to +headquarters. Twenty Portuguese cavalry, under a subaltern, will be +attached to his command, and will furnish orderlies to carry his +reports.</p> +<p>"It is desirable that Colonel O'Connor's troops should not come +in contact with the enemy, except to check any reconnoitring +parties moving towards Castello Branco and Villa Velha. It is most +necessary to prevent the news of an advance of the army in that +direction reaching the enemy, and to give the earliest possible +information of any hostile gathering that might menace the flank of +the army, while on its march.</p> +<p>"The passes of Banos and Periles will be held by the troops of +Marshal Beresford and General Del Parque, and it is to the country +between the mountains and Marshal Cuesta's force, at Almaraz, that +Colonel O'Connor is directed to concentrate his attention. In case +of being attacked by superior forces, Colonel O'Connor will, if +possible, retreat into the mountains on his left flank, maintain +himself there, and open communications with Lord Beresford's forces +at Banos or Bejar.</p> +<p>"Colonel O'Connor is authorized to requisition six carts from +the quartermaster's department, and to hand over his tents to them; +to draw 50,000 rounds of ball cartridge, and such rations as he may +be able to carry with him. The paymaster has received authority to +hand over to him 500 pounds, for the payment of supplies for his +men. When this sum is exhausted, Colonel O'Connor is authorized to +issue orders for supplies payable by the paymaster to the forces, +exercising the strictest economy, and sending notification to the +Paymaster General of the issue of such orders.</p> +<p>"This despatch is confidential, and the direction of the route +is, on no account, to be divulged."</p> +<p>"You hear that, O'Grady; and you too, Dicky. I ought not to have +read the despatch out loud. However, I know you will keep the +matter secret."</p> +<p>"You may trust us for that, Terence, for it is a secret worth +knowing. It is evident that Sir Arthur is going to join Cuesta, and +make a dash on Madrid. Well, he has been long enough in making up +his mind; but it is a satisfaction that we are likely to have hot +work, at last, though I wish we could have done it without those +Spaniards. We have seen enough of them to know that nothing, beyond +kind words, are to be expected of them and, when the time for +fighting comes, I would rather that we depended upon ourselves than +have to act with fellows on whom there is no reliance, whatever, to +be placed."</p> +<p>"I agree with you there, heartily, O'Grady. However, thank +goodness we are going to set out at last; and I am very glad that +it falls to us to act as the vanguard of the army, instead of being +attached to Beresford's command and kept stationary in the +passes.</p> +<p>"Now I must be at work. I daresay we shall meet again, before +long."</p> +<p>Terence wrote an acknowledgment of the receipt of the general's +order, and handed it to the orderly who had brought it. A bugler at +once sounded the field-officers' call.</p> +<p>"We are to march at once," he said, when Herrara, Bull, and +Macwitty arrived. "Let the tents be struck, and handed over to the +quartermaster's department. See that the men have four days' +biscuit in their haversacks.</p> +<p>"Each battalion is to take three carts with it. I will go to the +quartermaster's department, to draw them. Tell off six men from +each battalion to accompany me, and take charge of the carts. Each +battalion will carry 25,000 rounds of spare ammunition, and a chest +of 250 pounds. I will requisition from the commissariat as much +biscuit as we can carry, and twenty bullocks for each battalion, to +be driven with the carts.</p> +<p>"As soon as the carts are obtained, the men will drive them to +the ordnance stores for the ammunition, and to the commissariat +stores to load up the food. You had better send an officer in +charge of the men of each battalion.</p> +<p>"I will myself draw the money from the paymaster. I will go +there at once. Send a couple of men with me, for of course it will +be paid in silver. Then I will go to the quartermaster's stores, +and get the carts ready by the time that the men arrive. I want to +march in an hour's time, at latest."</p> +<p>In a few minutes the camp was a scene of bustle and activity. +The tents were struck and packed away in their bags, and piled in +order to be handed over to the quartermaster; and in a few minutes +over an hour from the receipt of the order, the two battalions were +in motion.</p> +<p>After a twenty-mile march, they halted for the night near the +frontier. An hour later they were joined by twenty troopers of a +Portuguese regiment, under the command of a subaltern.</p> +<p>The next day they marched through Plasencia, and halted for the +night on the slopes of the Sierra. An orderly was despatched, next +morning, to the officer in command of any force that there might be +at Banos, informing him of the position that they had taken up.</p> +<p>Terence ordered two companies to remain at this spot, which was +at the head of a little stream running down into an affluent of the +Tagus; their position being now nearly due north of Almaraz, from +which they were distant some twenty miles. The rest of the force +descended into the plain, and took post at various villages between +the Sierra and Oropesa, the most advanced party halting four miles +from that town.</p> +<p>The French forces under Victor had, in accordance with orders +from Madrid, fallen back from Plasencia a week before, and taken up +his quarters at Talavera.</p> +<p>At the time when the regiment received its uniforms, Terence had +ordered that twenty suits of the men's peasant clothes should be +retained in store and, specially intelligent men being chosen, +twenty of these were sent forward towards the river Alberche, to +discover Victor's position. They brought in news that he had placed +his troops behind the river, and that Cuesta, who had at one time +an advanced guard at Oropesa, had recalled it to Almaraz. Parties +of Victor's cavalry were patrolling the country between Talavera +and Oropesa.</p> +<p>Terence had sent Bull, with five hundred men, to occupy all the +passes across the Sierras, with orders to capture any orderlies or +messengers who might come along; and a day later four men brought +in a French officer, who had been captured on the road leading +south. He was the bearer of a letter from Soult to the king, and +was at once sent, under the escort of four troopers, to +headquarters.</p> +<p>The men who had brought in the officer reported that they had +learned that Wilson, with his command of four thousand men, was in +the mountains north of the Escurial; and that spies from that +officer had ascertained that there was great alarm in Madrid, where +the news of the British advance towards Plasencia was already +known; and that it was feared that this force, with Cuesta's army +at Almaraz and Venegas' army in La Mancha, were about to combine in +an attack upon the capital. This, indeed, was Sir Arthur's plan, +and had been arranged with the Supreme Junta. The Junta, however, +being jealous of Cuesta, had given secret instructions to Venegas +to keep aloof.</p> +<p>On his arrival at Plasencia, the English general had learned at +once the hollowness of the Spanish promises. He had been assured of +an ample supply of food, mules, and carts for transport; and had, +on the strength of these statements, advanced with but small +supplies, for little food and but few animals could be obtained in +Portugal. He found, on arriving, that no preparations whatever had +been made; and the army, thus early in the campaign, was put on +half rations. Day after day passed without any of the promised +supplies arriving, and Sir Arthur wrote to the Supreme Junta; +saying that although, in accordance with his agreement, he would +march to the Alberche, he would not cross that river unless the +promises that had been made were kept, to the letter.</p> +<p>He had, by this time, learned that the French forces north of +the mountains were much more formidable than the Spanish reports +had led him to believe; but he still greatly underrated Soult's +army, and was altogether ignorant that Ney had evacuated Galicia, +and was marching south with all speed, with his command. Del Parque +had failed in his promise to garrison Bejar and Banos, and these +passes were now only held by a few hundreds of Cuesta's +Spaniards.</p> +<p>A week after taking up his position north of Oropesa, Terence +received orders to move with his two battalions, and to take post +to guard these passes; with his left resting on Bejar, and his +right in communication with Wilson's force. The detachments were at +once recalled. A thousand men were posted near Bejar, and the rest +divided among the other passes by which a French army from the +north could cross the Sierra.</p> +<p>As soon as this arrangement was made, Terence rode to Wilson's +headquarters. He was received very cordially by that officer.</p> +<p>"I am heartily glad to see you, Colonel O'Connor," the latter +said. "Of course, I have heard of the doings of your battalions; +and am glad, indeed, to have your support. I sent a messenger off, +only this morning, to Sir Arthur; telling him that, from the +information brought in by my spies, I am convinced that Soult is +much stronger than has been supposed; and that, if he moves south, +I shall scarce be able to hold the passes of Arenas and San Pedro +Barnardo; and that I can certainly spare no men for the defence of +the more westerly ones, by which Soult is likely to march from +Salamanca. However, now you are there, I shall feel safe."</p> +<p>"No doubt I could hinder an advance, Sir Robert," Terence said, +"but I certainly could not hope to bar the passes to a French army. +I have no artillery and, though my men are steady enough against +infantry, I doubt whether they would be able to withstand an attack +heralded by a heavy cannonade. With a couple of batteries of +artillery to sweep the passes, one might make a fair stand for a +time against a greatly superior force; but with only infantry, one +could not hope to maintain one's position."</p> +<p>"Quite so, and Sir Arthur could not expect it. My own opinion is +that we shall have fifty thousand men coming down from the north. I +have told the chief as much; but naturally he will believe the +assurances of the Spanish juntas, rather than reports gathered by +our spies; and no doubt hopes to crush Victor altogether, before +Soult makes any movement; and he trusts to Venegas' advance, from +the south towards the upper Tagus, to cause Don Joseph to evacuate +Madrid, as soon as he hears of Victor's defeat.</p> +<p>"But I have, certainly, no faith whatever in either Venegas or +Cuesta. Cuesta is loyal enough, but he is obstinate and pig headed +and, at present, he is furious because the Supreme Junta has been +sending all the best troops to Venegas, instead of to him; and he +knows, well enough, that that perpetual intriguer Frere is working +underhand to get Albuquerque appointed to the supreme command. As +to Venegas, he is a mere tool of the Supreme Junta and, as likely +as not, they will order him to do nothing but keep his army +intact.</p> +<p>"Then again, the delay at Plasencia has upset all Sir Arthur's +arrangements. Had he pressed straight forward on the 28th of last +month, when he crossed the frontier, disregarding Cuesta +altogether, he could have been at Madrid long before this; for I +know that at that time Victor's force had been so weakened that he +had but between fourteen and fifteen thousand men, and must have +fallen back without fighting. Now he has again got the troops that +had been taken from him, and will be further reinforced before Sir +Arthur arrives on the Alberche; and of course Soult has had plenty +of time to get everything in readiness to cross the mountains, and +fall upon the British rear, as soon as he hears that they are +fairly on their way towards Madrid. Here we are at the 20th, and +our forces will only reach Oropesa today.</p> +<p>"Victor is evidently afraid that Sir Arthur will move from +Oropesa towards the hills, pass the upper Alberche, and so place +himself between him and Madrid; for a strong force of cavalry +reconnoitred in this direction, this morning."</p> +<p>"Would it not be as well, sir," said Terence, "if we were to +arrange some signals by which we could aid each other? That hill +top can be seen from the hill beyond which is the little village +where I have established myself. I noticed it this morning, before +I started. If you would keep a lookout on your hill, I would have +one on mine. We might each get three bonfires, a hundred yards +apart, ready for lighting. If I hear of any great force approaching +the defiles I am watching, I could summon your aid either by day or +night by these fires; and in the same way, if Soult should advance +by the line that you are guarding, you could summon me. My men are +really well trained in this sort of work, and you could trust them +to make an obstinate defence."</p> +<p>"I think that your idea is a very good one, and will certainly +carry it out. You see, we are really both of us protecting the left +flank of our army, and can certainly do so more effectually if we +work together.</p> +<p>"We might, too, arrange another signal. One fire might mean +that, for some reason or other, we are marching away. I may have +orders to move some distance towards Madrid, so as to compel Victor +to weaken himself by detaching a force to check me; you may be +ordered, as the army advances, to leave your defiles in charge of +the Spaniards, and to accompany the army. Two fires might mean, +spies have reported a general advance of the French coming by +several routes. Thus, you see, we should be in readiness for any +emergency.</p> +<p>"I should be extremely glad of your help, if Soult comes this +way. My own corps of 1200 men are fairly good soldiers, and I can +rely upon them to do their best; but the other 3000 have been but +recently raised, and I don't think that any dependence can be +placed upon them, in case of hard fighting; but with your two +battalions, we ought to be able to hold any of these defiles for a +considerable time."</p> +<p>Two days later, Terence received orders to march instantly with +his force down into the valley, to follow the foot of the hills +until he reached the Alberche, when he was to report his arrival, +wait until he received orders, and check the advance of any French +force endeavouring to move round the left flank of the British. The +evening before, one signal fire had announced that Wilson was on +the move and, thinking that he, too, might be summoned, Terence had +called in all his outposts, and was able to march a quarter of an +hour after he received the order.</p> +<p>He had learned, on the evening he returned from his visit to Sir +Robert, from men sent down into the plain for the purpose, that +Cuesta's army and that of Sir Arthur had advanced together from +Oropesa. He was glad at the order to join the army, as he had felt +that, should Soult advance, his force, unprovided as it was with +guns, would be able to offer but a very temporary resistance; +especially if the French Marshal was at the head of a force +anything like as strong as was reported by the peasantry. As to +this, however, he had very strong doubts, having come to distrust +thoroughly every report given by the Spaniards. He knew that they +were as ready, under the influence of fear, to exaggerate the force +of an enemy as they were, at other times, to magnify their own +numbers. Sir Arthur must, he thought, be far better informed than +he himself could be; for his men, being Portuguese, were viewed +with doubt and suspicion by the Spanish peasantry, who would +probably take a pleasure in misleading them altogether.</p> +<p>The short stay in the mountains had braced up the men and, with +only a short halt, they made a forty-mile march to the Alberche by +midnight. Scarcely had they lit their fires, when an Hussar officer +and some troopers rode up. They halted a hundred yards away, and +the officer shouted in English:</p> +<p>"What corps is this?"</p> +<p>Terence at once left the fire, and advanced towards them.</p> +<p>"Two Portuguese battalions," he answered, "under myself, Colonel +O'Connor."</p> +<p>The officer at once rode forward.</p> +<p>"I was not quite sure," he said, as he came close, "that my +question would not be answered by a volley. By the direction from +which I saw you coming, I thought that you must be friends. Still, +you might have been an advanced party of a force that had come down +through the defiles. However, as soon as I saw you light your +fires, I made sure it was all right; for the Frenchmen would not +likely have ventured to do so unless, indeed, they were altogether +ignorant of our advance."</p> +<p>"At ten o'clock this morning I received orders from headquarters +to move to this point at once and, as we have marched from Banos, +you see we have lost very little time on the way."</p> +<p>"Indeed, you have not. I suppose it is about forty miles; and +that distance, in fourteen hours, is certainly first-rate marching. +I will send off one of my men to report who you are. Two squadrons +of my regiment are a quarter of a mile away, awaiting my +return."</p> +<p>"Have you any reason to believe that the enemy are near?"</p> +<p>"No particular reason that I know of, but their cavalry have +been in great force along the upper part of the river, for the last +two days. Victor has retired from Talavera, for I fancy that he was +afraid we might move round this way, and cut him off from Madrid. +The Spaniards might have harassed him as he fell back, but they +dared not even make a charge on his rear guard, though they had +3000 cavalry.</p> +<p>"We are not quite sure where the French are and, of course, we +get no information from the people here; either their stupidity is +something astounding, or their sympathies are entirely with the +French."</p> +<p>"My experience is," Terence said, "that the best way is to get +as much information as you can from them, and then to act with the +certainty that the real facts are just the reverse of the +statements made to you."</p> +<p>As soon as the forces halted a picket had been sent out; and +Terence, when the men finished their supper, established a cordon +of advanced pickets, with strong supports, at a distance of a mile +from his front and flanks; so as to ensure himself against +surprise, and to detect any movement upon the part of the enemy's +cavalry, who might be pressing round to obtain information of the +British position. At daybreak he mounted and rode to Talavera, and +reported the arrival of his command, and the position where he had +halted for the night.</p> +<p>"You have wasted no time over it, Colonel O'Connor. You can only +have received the order yesterday morning, and I scarcely expected +that you could be here till this evening."</p> +<p>"My men are excellent marchers, sir. They did the forty miles in +fourteen hours, and might have done it an hour quicker, had they +been pressed. Not a man fell out."</p> +<p>"Your duty will now be to cover our left flank. I don't know +whether you are aware that Wilson has moved forward, and will take +post on the slopes near the Escurial. He has been directed to +spread his force as much as possible, so as to give an appearance +of greater strength than he has."</p> +<p>"I knew that he had left his former position," Terence said. "We +had arranged a code of smoke signals, by which we could ask each +other for assistance should the defiles be attacked; and I learned +yesterday morning, in this way, that he was marching away."</p> +<p>"Have you any news of what is taking place on the other side of +the hills, since you sent off word two days ago?"</p> +<p>"No, sir; at least, all we hear is of the same character as +before. We don't hear that Soult is moving, but his force is +certainly put down as being considerably larger than was supposed. +I have deemed it my duty to state this in my reports, but the +Spaniards are so inclined to exaggerate everything that I always +receive statements of this kind with great doubt."</p> +<p>"All our news--from the juntas, from Mr. Frere, and from other +quarters--is quite the other way," the officer said. "We are +assured that Soult has not fifteen thousand men in condition to +take the field, and that he could not venture to move these, as he +knows that the whole country would rise, did he do so.</p> +<p>"I have no specific orders to give you. You will keep in touch +with General Hill's brigade, which forms our left and, as we move +forward, you will advance along the lower slopes of the Sierra and +prevent any attempt, on the part of the French, to turn our +flank.</p> +<p>"I dare say you do not know exactly what is going on, Colonel +O'Connor. It may be of assistance to you, in taking up your +position, to know that the fighting is likely to take place on the +line between Talavera and the mountains. Cuesta has fallen back, in +great haste, to Talavera. We shall advance today and take up our +line with him.</p> +<p>"The Spaniards will hold the low marshy ground near the town. +Our right will rest on an eminence on his left flank, and will +extend to a group of hills, separated by a valley from the Sierra. +Our cavalry will probably check any attempt by the French to turn +our flank there, and you and the Spaniards will do your best to +hold the slope of the Sierra, should the French move a force along +there.</p> +<p>"I may say that Victor has been largely reinforced by +Sebastiani, and is likely to take the offensive. Indeed, we hear +that he is already moving in this direction. We are not aware of +his exact strength, but we believe that it must approach, if not +equal, that of ourselves and Cuesta united.</p> +<p>"Cuesta has, indeed, been already roughly handled by the French. +Disregarding Sir Arthur's entreaties, and believing Victor to be in +full retreat, he marched on alone, impelled by the desire to be the +first to enter Madrid; but at two o'clock on the morning of the +26th of July, the French suddenly fell upon him, drove the Spanish +cavalry back from their advanced position, and chased them hotly. +They fled in great disorder, and the panic would have spread to the +whole army, had not Albuquerque brought up 3000 fresh cavalry and +held the French in check, while Cuesta retreated in great disorder +and, had the French pressed forward, would have fled in utter rout. +Sherbrooke's division, which was in advance of the British army, +moved forward and took up its position in front of the +panic-stricken Spaniards, and then the French drew off.</p> +<p>"Cuesta then yielded to Sir Arthur's entreaties, recrossed the +Alberche, and took up his position near Talavera. Here, even the +worst troops should be able to make a stand against the best. The +ground is marshy and traversed by a rivulet. On its left is a +strong redoubt, which is armed with Spanish artillery; on the right +is another very strong battery, on a rise close to Talavera; while +other batteries sweep the road to Madrid. Sir Arthur has +strengthened the front by felling trees and forming abattis, so +that he has good reason to hope that, poor as the Spanish troops +may be, they should be able to hold their part of the line.</p> +<p>"Campbell's division forms the British right, Sherbrooke comes +next, the German legion are in the centre, Donkin is to take his +place on the hill that rises two-thirds of the way across the +valley, while General Hill's division is to hold the face looking +north, and separated from the Sierra only by the comparatively +narrow valley in which you have bivouacked. At present, however, +his troops and those of Donkin have not taken up their +position."</p> +<p>The country between the positions on which the allied armies had +now fallen back was covered with olive and cork trees. The whole +line from Talavera to the hill, which was to be held by Hill's +division, was two miles in length; and the valley between that and +the Sierra was half a mile in width, but extremely broken and +rugged, and was intersected by a ravine, through which ran the +rivulet that fell into the Tagus at Talavera.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch2" id="Ch2">Chapter 2</a>: Talavera.</h2> +<p>On leaving the Adjutant General, Terence--knowing that +Mackenzie's brigade was some two miles in advance on the Alberche +river, and that the enemy was not in sight--sent off one of the +orderlies who accompanied him, with a message to Herrara to fall +back and take up his station on the lower slopes of the Sierra, +facing the rounded hill; and then went to a restaurant and had +breakfast. It was crowded with Spanish officers, with a few British +scattered among them.</p> +<p>As he ate his food, he was greatly amused at the boasting of the +Spaniards as to what they would accomplish, if the French ventured +to attack them; knowing as he did how shamefully they had behaved, +two days before, when the whole of Cuesta's army had been thrown +into utter disorder by two or three thousand French cavalry, and +had only been saved from utter rout by the interposition of a +British brigade. When he had finished breakfast, he mounted his +horse and rode to the camp of his old regiment.</p> +<p>"Hooroo, Terence!" Captain O'Grady shouted, as he rode up, "I +thought you would be turning up, when there was going to be +something to do. It's yourself that has the knack of always getting +into the thick of it.</p> +<p>"Orderly, take Colonel O'Connor's horse, and lead him up and +down.</p> +<p>"Come on, Terence, most of the boys are in that tent over there. +We have just been dismissed from parade."</p> +<p>A shout of welcome rose as they entered the tent, where a dozen +officers were sitting on the ground, or on empty boxes.</p> +<p>"Sit down if you can find room, Terence," Colonel Corcoran said. +"Wouldn't you like to be back with us again, for the shindy that we +are likely to have, tomorrow?"</p> +<p>"That I should, but I hope to have my share in it, in my own +way."</p> +<p>"Where are your men, O'Connor?"</p> +<p>"They will be, in another hour, at the foot of the mountains +over there to the left. Our business will be to prevent any of the +French moving along there, and coming down on your rear."</p> +<p>"I am pleased to hear it. I believe that there is a Spanish +division there, but I am glad to know that the business is not to +be left entirely to them. Now, what have you been doing since you +left us, a month ago?"</p> +<p>"I have been doing nothing, Colonel, but watching the defiles +and, as no one has come up them, we have not fired a shot."</p> +<p>"No doubt they got news that you were there, Terence," O'Grady +said, "and not likely would they be to come up to be destroyed by +you."</p> +<p>"Perhaps that was it," Terence said, when the laughter had +subsided; "at any rate they didn't show up, and I was very pleased +when orders came, at ten o'clock yesterday, for us to leave Banos +and march to join the army. We did the forty miles in fourteen +hours."</p> +<p>"Good marching," Colonel Corcoran said. "Then where did you +halt?"</p> +<p>"About three miles farther off, at the foot of the hills. We saw +a lot of campfires to our right, and thought that we were in a line +with the army, but of course they were only those of Mackenzie's +division; but I sent off an orderly, an hour ago, to tell them to +fall back to the slopes facing those hills, where our left is to be +posted."</p> +<p>"You are a lucky fellow to have been away from us, Terence, for +it is downright starving we have been. The soldiers have only had a +mouthful of meat served out to them as rations, most days; and they +have got so thin that their clothes are hanging loose about them. +If it hadn't been for my man Doolan and two or three others, who +always manage, by hook or by crook, to get hold of anything there +is within two or three miles round, we should have been as badly +off as they are. Be jabers, I have had to take in my sword belt a +good two inches; and to think that, while our fellows are well-nigh +starving, these Spaniards we came to help, and who will do no +fighting themselves, had more food than they could eat, is enough +to enrage a saint.</p> +<p>"I wonder Sir Arthur puts up with it. I would have seized that +stuck-up old fool Cuesta, and popped him into the guard tent, and +kept him there until provisions were handed over for us."</p> +<p>"His whole army might come to rescue him, O'Grady."</p> +<p>"What if they had? I would have turned out a corporal's guard, +and sent the whole of them trotting off in no time. Did you hear +what took place two days ago?"</p> +<p>"Yes, I heard that they behaved shamefully, O'Grady; still, I +think a corporal's guard would hardly be sufficient to turn them, +but I do believe that a regiment might answer the purpose."</p> +<p>"I can tell you that there is nothing would please the troops +more than to attack the Spaniards. If this goes on many more days, +our men will be too weak to march; but I believe that, before they +lie down and give it up altogether, they will pitch into the +Spaniards, in spite of what we may try to do to prevent them," the +Colonel said. "Here we are in a country abounding with food, and we +are starving, while the Spaniards are feasting in plenty; and by +Saint Patrick's beard, Terence, it is mighty little we should do to +prevent our men from pitching into them. There is one thing, you +may be sure. We shall never cooperate with them in the future and, +as to relying upon their promises, faith, they are not worth the +breath it takes to make them."</p> +<p>As everything was profoundly quiet, Terence had no hesitation in +stopping to lunch with his old friends and, as there was no +difficulty in buying whatever was required in Talavera, the table +was well supplied, and the officers made up for their enforced +privation during the past three weeks.</p> +<p>At three o'clock Terence left them and rode across to his +command, which he found posted exactly where he had directed +it.</p> +<p>"It is lucky that we filled up with flour at Banos, before +starting, Colonel," Bull said, "for from what we hear, the soldiers +are getting next to nothing to eat; and those cattle you bought at +the village halfway, yesterday, will come in very handy. At any +rate, with them and the flour we can hold out for a week, if need +be."</p> +<p>"Still, you had better begin at once to be economical, Bull. +There is no saying what may happen after this battle has been +fought."</p> +<p>While they were talking, a sudden burst of firing, at a +distance, was heard.</p> +<p>"Mackenzie's brigade is engaged!" Terence exclaimed. "You had +better get the men under arms, at once. If the whole of Victor's +command is upon them, they will have to fall back.</p> +<p>"When the men are ready, you may as well come a few hundred feet +higher up the hill, with me. Then you will see all over the +country, and be in readiness to do anything that is wanted. But it +is not likely the French will attempt anything serious, today. They +will probably content themselves with driving Mackenzie in."</p> +<p>Terence went at once up the hill, to a point whence he could +look well over the round hills on the other side of the valley, and +make out the British and Spanish lines, stretching to Talavera. The +troops were already formed up, in readiness for action. Away to his +left came the roll of heavy firing from the cork woods near the +Alberche and, just as his three officers joined him, the British +troops issued pell mell from the woods. They had, in fact, been +taken entirely by surprise; and had been attacked so suddenly and +vigorously that, for a time, the young soldiers of some of the +regiments fell into confusion; and Sir Arthur himself, who was at a +large house named the Casa, narrowly escaped capture. The 45th, +however, a regiment that had seen much service, and some companies +of the 60th Rifles presented a stout front to the enemy.</p> +<p>Sir Arthur speedily restored order among the rest of the troops, +and the enemy's advance was checked. The division then fell back in +good order, each of its flanks being covered by a brigade of +cavalry. From the height at which Terence and his officers stood, +they could plainly make out the retiring division, and could see +heavy masses of French troops descending from the high ground +beyond the Alberche.</p> +<p>"The whole French army is on us!" Macwitty said. "If their +advance guard had not been in such a hurry to attack, and had +waited until the others came up, not many of Mackenzie's division +would have got back to our lines."</p> +<p>It was not long before the French debouched from the woods and, +as soon as they did so, a division rapidly crossed the plain +towards the allies' left, seized an isolated hill facing the spur +on to which Donkin had just hurried up his brigade, and at once +opened a heavy cannonade. At the same time another division moved +towards the right, and some squadrons of light cavalry could be +seen, riding along the road from Madrid towards the Spanish +division.</p> +<p>"They won't do much good there," Terence said, "for the country +is so swampy that they cannot leave the road. Still, I suppose they +want to reconnoitre our position, and draw the fire of the +Spaniards to ascertain their whereabouts. They are getting very +close to them and, when the Spaniards begin, they ought to wipe +them out completely."</p> +<p>At this moment a heavy rattle of distant musketry was heard, and +a light wreath of smoke rose from the Spanish lines. The French +cavalry had, in fact, ridden up so close to the Spaniards that they +discharged their pistols in bravado at them. To this the Spaniards +had replied by a general wild discharge of their muskets. A moment +later the party on the hill saw the right of the Spanish line break +up as if by magic and, to their astonishment and rage, they made +out that the whole plain behind was thickly dotted by +fugitives.</p> +<p>"Why, the whole lot have bolted, sir!" Bull exclaimed. "Horse +and foot are making off. Did anyone ever hear of such a thing!"</p> +<p>That portion of the Spanish line nearest to Talavera had indeed +broken and fled in the wildest panic, 10,000 infantry having taken +to their heels the instant they discharged their muskets; while the +artillery cut their traces and, leaving their guns behind them, +followed their example. The French cavalry charged along the road, +but Sir Arthur opposed them with some British squadrons. The +Spanish who still held their ground opened fire, and the French +drew back. The fugitives continued their flight to Oropesa, +spreading panic and alarm everywhere with the news that the allies +were totally defeated, Sir Arthur Wellesley killed, and all +lost.</p> +<p>Cuesta himself had for some time accompanied them, but he soon +recovered from his panic, and sent several cavalry regiments to +bring back the fugitives. Part of the artillery and some thousands +of the infantry were collected before morning, but 6000 men were +still absent at the battle, and the great redoubt on their left was +silent, from want of guns.</p> +<p>In point of numbers there had been but little difference between +the two armies. Prior to the loss of these 6000 men, Cuesta's army +had been 34,000 strong, with seventy guns. The British, with the +German Legion, numbered 19,000, with thirty guns. The French were +50,000 strong, with eighty guns. These were all veteran troops, +while on the side of the allies there were but 19,000 who could be +called fighting men.</p> +<p>"That is what comes of putting faith in the Spaniards!" Bull +said savagely. "If I had been Sir Arthur, I would have turned my +guns on them and given them something to run for. We should do a +thousand times better, by ourselves; then we should know what we +had to expect."</p> +<p>"It is evident that there won't be any fighting until tomorrow, +Macwitty. You will place half your battalion on the hillside, from +this point to the bottom of the slope. I don't think that they will +come so high up the hill as this; but you will, of course, throw +some pickets out above. The other wing of your battalion you will +hold in reserve, a couple of hundred yards behind the centre of the +line; but choose a sheltered spot for them, for those guns Victor +is placing on his heights will sweep the face of this hill.</p> +<p>"This little watercourse will give capital cover to your +advanced line, and they cannot do better than occupy it. Lying +down, they would be completely sheltered from the French artillery +and, if attacked, they could line the bank and fire without showing +more than their heads. Of course, you will throw out pickets along +the face of the slope in front of you.</p> +<p>"Do you, Bull, march your battalion down to the foot of the hill +and take up your post there. The ground is very uneven and broken, +and you should be able to find some spot where the men would be in +shelter; move a couple of hundred yards back, then Macwitty would +flank any force advancing against you. The sun will set in a few +minutes, so you had better lose no time in taking up your +ground.</p> +<p>"As soon as you have chosen a place go on, with the captains of +your companies, across the valley. Make yourselves thoroughly +acquainted with the ground, and mark the best spots at which to +post the men to resist any force that may come along the valley. It +is quite possible that Victor may make an attempt to turn the +general's flank tonight. I will reconnoitre all the ground in front +of you, and will then, with the colonel, join you."</p> +<p>The position Terence had chosen was a quarter of a mile west of +the spur held by Donkin's brigade. He had selected it in order +that, if attacked in force, he might have the assistance of the +guns there; which would thus be able to play on the advancing +French, without risk of his own men being injured by their +fire.</p> +<p>Bull marched his battalion down the hill and, as Terence and +Herrara were about to mount, a sudden burst of musketry fire, from +the crest of the opposite hill, showed that the French were +attempting to carry that position. Victor, indeed, seeing the force +stationed there to be a small one; and that, from the confusion +among the Spaniards on the British right, the moment was very +favourable; had ordered one division to attack, another to move to +its support, while a third was to engage the German division posted +on the plain to the right of the hill, and thus prevent succour +being sent to Donkin.</p> +<p>From the position where Terence was standing, the front of the +steep slope that the French were climbing could not be seen but, +almost at the same moment, a dense mass of men began to swarm up +the hill on Donkin's flank; having, unperceived, made their way in +at the mouth of the valley.</p> +<p>"Form up your battalion, Macwitty," he shouted, "and double down +the hill."</p> +<p>Then he rode after Bull, whose battalion had now reached the +valley and halted there.</p> +<p>"We must go to the assistance of the brigade on the hill, Bull, +or they will be overpowered before reinforcements can reach +them.</p> +<p>"Herrara, bring on Macwitty after us, as soon as he gets +down.</p> +<p>"Take the battalion forward at the double, Bull."</p> +<p>The order was given and, with a cheer, the battalion set out +across the valley and, on reaching the other side, began to climb +the steep ascent; bearing towards their left, so as to reach the +summit near the spot where the French were ascending. Twilight was +already closing in, and the approach of the Portuguese was +unobserved by the French, whose leading battalions had reached the +top of the hill, and were pressing heavily on Donkin's weak +brigade; which had, however, checked the advance of the French on +their front. Macwitty's battalion was but a short distance behind +when, marching straight along on the face of the hill, Bull arrived +within a hundred yards of the French. Here Terence halted them for +a minute, while they hastily formed up in line, and Macwitty came +up.</p> +<p>The din on the top of the hill, just above Bull's right company, +was prodigious, the rattle of musketry incessant, the exulting +shouts of the French could be plainly heard; and their comrades +behind were pressing hotly up the hill to join in the strife. There +was plainly not a moment to be lost and, advancing to within fifty +yards of the French battalions, struggling up the hill in confused +masses, a tremendous volley was poured in.</p> +<p>The French, astonished at this sudden attack upon their flank, +paused and endeavoured to form up, and wheel round to oppose a +front to it; but the heavy fire of the Portuguese, and the broken +nature of the ground, prevented their doing this and, ignorant of +the strength of the force that had thus suddenly attacked them, +they recoiled, keeping up an irregular fire; while the Portuguese, +pouring in steady volleys, pressed upon them. In five minutes they +gave way, and retired rapidly down the hill.</p> +<p>The leading battalions had gained the crest where, joining those +who had ascended by the other face of the hill, they fell upon the +already outnumbered defenders. Donkin's men, though fighting +fiercely, were pressed back, and would have been driven from their +position had not General Hill brought up the 29th and 48th, with a +battalion of detachments composed of Sir John Moore's stragglers. +These charged the French so furiously that they were unable to +withstand the assault, although aided by fresh battalions ascending +the front of the hill.</p> +<p>In their retreat the French, instead of going straight down the +hill, bore away to their right and, although some fell to the fire +of the Portuguese, the greater portion passed unseen in the +darkness.</p> +<p>The firing now ceased, and Terence ordered Bull and Macwitty to +take their troops back to the ground originally selected, while he +himself ascended to the crest. With some difficulty he discovered +the whereabouts of General Hill, to whom he was well known. He +found him in the act of having a wound temporarily dressed, by the +light of a fire which had just been replenished; he having ridden, +in the dark, into the midst of a French battalion, believing it to +be one of his own regiments. Colonel Donkin was in conversation +with him.</p> +<p>"It has been a very close affair, sir," he said; "and I +certainly thought that we should be rolled down the hill. I believe +that we owe our safety, in no small degree, to a couple of +battalions of Spaniards, I fancy, who took up their post on the +opposite hill this morning. Just before you brought up your +reinforcement, and while things were at their worst, I heard heavy +volley firing somewhere just over the crest. I don't know who it +could have been, if it was not them; for there were certainly no +other troops on my left."</p> +<p>"They were Portuguese battalions, sir," Terence said +quietly.</p> +<p>"Oh, is it you, O'Connor?" General Hill exclaimed. "If they were +those two battalions of yours, I can quite understand it.</p> +<p>"This is Colonel O'Connor, Donkin, who checked Soult's passage +at the mouth of the Minho, and has performed other admirable +services."</p> +<a id="PicA" name="PicA"></a> +<center><img src="images/a.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: 'You may as well make your report to me, O'Connor.'" /> +</center> +<p>"You may as well make your report to me, O'Connor, and I will +include it in my own to Sir Arthur."</p> +<p>Terence related how, just as he was taking up his position for +the night along the slopes of the Sierra, he heard the outbreak of +firing on the front of the hill and, seeing a large force mounting +its northern slope, and knowing that only one brigade was posted +there, he thought it his duty to move to its assistance. Crossing +the valley at the double, he had taken them in flank and, being +unperceived in the gathering darkness, had checked their advance, +and compelled them to retire down the hill.</p> +<p>"At what strength do you estimate the force which so retired, +Colonel?"</p> +<p>"I fancy there were eight battalions of them, but three had +gained the crest before we arrived. The others were necessarily +broken up, and followed so close upon each other that it was +difficult to separate them; but I fancy there were eight of them. +Being in such confusion and, of course, unaware of my strength, +they were unable to form or to offer any effectual resistance; and +our volleys, from a distance of fifty yards, must have done heavy +execution upon them."</p> +<p>"Then there is no doubt, Donkin, Colonel O'Connor's force did +save you; for if those five battalions had gained the crest, you +would have been driven off it before the brigade I brought up +arrived and, indeed, even with that aid we should have been so +outnumbered that we could scarcely have held our ground. It was hot +work as it was, but certainly five more battalions would have +turned the scale against us.</p> +<p>"Of course, O'Connor, you will send in a written report of your +reasons for quitting your position to headquarters; and I shall, +myself, do full justice to the service that you have rendered so +promptly and efficaciously. Where is your command now?"</p> +<p>"They will by this time have taken up their former position on +the opposite slope. One battalion is extended there. The other is +at the foot of the hill, prepared to check any force that may +attempt to make its way up the valley. Our line is about a quarter +of a mile in rear of this spur. I selected the position in order +that, should the French make an attempt in any force, the guns here +might take them in flank, while I held them in check in front."</p> +<p>The general nodded. "Well thought of," he said.</p> +<p>"And now, Donkin, you had better muster your brigade and +ascertain what are your losses. I am afraid they are very +heavy."</p> +<p>Terence now returned across the valley and, on joining his +command, told Herrara and the two majors how warmly General Hill +had commended their action.</p> +<p>"What has been our loss?" he asked.</p> +<p>"Fifteen killed, and five-and-forty wounded, but of these a +great proportion are not serious."</p> +<p>Brushwood was now collected and in a short time a number of +fires were blazing. The men were in high spirits. They were proud +of having overthrown a far superior force of the enemy, and were +gratified at the expression of great satisfaction, conveyed to them +by their captains by Terence's order, at the steadiness with which +they had fought.</p> +<a id="Map1" name="Map1"></a> +<center><img src="images/1.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Plan of the Battle of Talavera." /></center> +<p>At daybreak next morning the enemy was seen to be again in +motion, Victor having obtained the king's consent to again try to +carry the hills occupied by the British. This time Terence did not +leave his position, being able to see that the whole of Hill's +division now occupied the heights and, moreover, being himself +threatened by two regiments of light troops, which crossed the +mouth of the valley, ascended the slopes on his side, and proceeded +to work their way along them. The whole of Macwitty's battalion was +now placed in line, while Bull's was held in reserve, behind its +centre.</p> +<p>It was not long before Macwitty was hotly engaged; and the +French, who were coming along in skirmishing order, among the rocks +and broken ground, were soon brought to a standstill. For some time +a heavy fire was exchanged. Three times the French gathered for a +rush; but each time the steady volleys, from their almost invisible +foes, drove them back again, with loss, to the shelter they had +left.</p> +<p>In the intervals Terence could see how the fight was going on +across the valley. The whole hillside was dotted with fire, as the +French worked their way up, and the British troops on the crest +fired down upon them. Several times parties of the French gained +the brow, but only to be hurled back again by the troops held in +reserve, in readiness to move to any point where the enemy might +gain a footing. For forty minutes the battle continued; and then, +having lost 1500 men, the French retreated down the hill again, +covered by the fire of their batteries, which opened with fury on +the crest, as soon as they were seen to be descending the +slope.</p> +<p>At the same time the light troops opposed to Terence also drew +off. Seeing the pertinacity with which the French had tried to turn +his left, Sir Arthur Wellesley moved his cavalry round to the head +of the valley and, obtaining Bassecour's division of Spanish from +Cuesta, sent them to take post on the hillside a short distance in +rear of Terence's Portuguese.</p> +<p>The previous evening's fighting had cost Victor 1000 men, while +800 British had been killed or wounded; and the want of success +then, and the attack on the following morning, tended to depress +the spirits of the French and to raise those of the British. It was +thought that after these two repulses Victor would not again give +battle, and indeed the French generals Jourdan and Sebastiani were +opposed to a renewal of hostilities; but Victor was in favour of a +general attack. So his opinion was finally adopted by the king, in +spite of the fact that he knew that Soult was in full march towards +the British rear, and had implored him not to fight a battle till +he had cut the British line of retreat; when, in any case, they +would be forced to retire at once.</p> +<p>The king was influenced more by his fear for the safety of +Madrid than by Victor's arguments. Wilson's force had been greatly +exaggerated by rumour. Venegas was known to be at last approaching +Toledo, and the king feared that one or both of these forces might +fall upon Madrid in his absence, and that all his military stores +would fall into their hands. He therefore earnestly desired to +force the British to retreat, in order that he might hurry back to +protect Madrid.</p> +<p>Doubtless the gross cowardice exhibited by the Spaniards, on the +previous day, had shown Victor that he had really only the 19,000 +British troops to contend against; and as his force exceeded theirs +by two to one, he might well regard victory as certain, and believe +he could not fail to beat them.</p> +<p>Up to midday, a perfect quiet reigned along both lines. The +British and French soldiers went down alike to the rivulet that +separated the two armies, and exchanged jokes as they drank and +filled their canteens. Albuquerque, being altogether dissatisfied +with Cuesta's arrangements, moved across the plain with his own +cavalry and took his post behind the British and German horse; so +that no less than 6000 cavalry were now ready to pour down upon any +French force attempting to turn the British position by the valley. +The day was intensely hot and the soldiers, after eating their +scanty rations, for the most part stretched themselves down to +sleep; for the night had been a broken one, owing to the fact that +the Spaniards, whenever they heard, or thought they heard, anyone +moving in their front, poured in a tremendous fire that roused the +whole camp; and was so wild and ill directed that several British +officers and men, on their left, were killed by it.</p> +<p>Soon after midday the drums were heard to beat along the whole +length of the French line, and the troops were seen to be falling +in. Then the British were also called to arms, and the soldiers +cheerfully took their places in the ranks; glad that the matter was +to be brought to an issue at once, as they thought that a victory +would, at least, put an end to the state of starvation in which +they had for some time been kept. The French had, by this time, +learned how impossible it was to surmount the obstacles in front of +that portion of the allies' line occupied by the Spaniards. They +therefore neglected these altogether, and Sebastiani advanced +against the British division in the plains; while Victor, as +before, prepared to assail the British left, supported this time by +a great mass of cavalry.</p> +<p>The French were soon in readiness for the attack. Ruffin's +division were to cross the valley, move along the foot of the +mountain, and turn the British left. Villatte was to guard the +mouth of the valley with one brigade, to threaten Hill with the +other, and to make another attempt to carry it. He was to be aided +by half the division of Lapisse, while the other half assisted +Sebastiani in his attack on the British centre. Milhaud's dragoons +were placed on the main road to Talavera, so as to keep the +Spaniards from moving to the assistance of the British.</p> +<p>The battle began with a furious attack on the British right, but +the French were withstood by Campbell's division and Mackenzie's +brigade, aided by two Spanish columns; and was finally pushed back +with great loss, and ten of their guns captured; but as Campbell +wisely refused to break his line and pursue, the French rallied on +their reserve, and prepared to renew the attack.</p> +<p>In the meantime Lapisse crossed the rivulet and attacked +Sherbrooke's division, composed of the Germans and Guards. This +brigade was, however, driven back in disorder. The Guards followed +hotly in pursuit; but the French reserves came up, and their +batteries opened with fury and drove the Guards back, while the +Germans were so hotly pressed, by Lapisse, that they fell into +confusion. The 48th, however, fell upon the flank of the advancing +French; the Guards and the Germans rallied, the British artillery +swept the French columns, and they again fell back. Thus the +British centre and right had succeeded in finally repelling the +attacks made upon them.</p> +<p>On the left, as the French advanced, the 23rd Light Dragoons and +the 1st German Hussars charged the head of Ruffin's column. Before +they reached them, however, they encountered the ravine through +which the rivulet here ran. The Germans checked their horses when +they came upon this almost impassable obstacle. The 23rd, however, +kept on. Men and horses rolled over each other, but many crossed +the chasm and, forming again, dashed in between the squares into +which the French infantry had thrown themselves, and charged a +brigade of light infantry in their rear. Victor hurled two +regiments of cavalry upon them and the 23rd, hopelessly over +matched, were driven back with a loss of 207 men and officers, +being fully half the number that had ridden forward. The rest +galloped back to the shelter of Bassecour's division.</p> +<p>Yet their effort had not been in vain. The French, astonished at +their furious charge, and seeing four distinct lines of cavalry +still drawn up facing them, made no further movement. Hill easily +repulsed the attack upon his position, and the battle ceased as +suddenly as it had begun, the French having failed at every point +they had attacked.</p> +<p>Terence had, on seeing Ruffin's division marching towards him, +advanced along the slope until they reached the entrance to the +valley; and then, scattering on the hillside, had opened a heavy +and continuous fire upon the French, doing much execution among +their columns, and still more when they threw themselves into +square to resist the cavalry. He had given orders that, should +Ruffin send some of his battalions up the hill against them, they +were to retire up the slopes, taking advantage of every shelter, +and not to attempt to meet the enemy in close contact. No such +attack was, however, made. The French battalion most exposed threw +out a large number of skirmishers, and endeavoured to keep down the +galling fire maintained from the hillside; but as the Portuguese +took advantage of every stone and bush, and scarcely a man was +visible to the French, there were but few casualties among +them.</p> +<p>The loss of the British was in all, during the two days' +fighting, 6200, including 600 taken prisoners. That of the French +was 7400. Ten guns were captured by Campbell's division, and seven +left in the woods by the French as they drew off, the next morning +at daybreak, to take up their position behind the Alberche.</p> +<p>During the day Crauford's brigade came up, after a tremendous +march. The three regiments had, after a tramp of twenty miles, +encamped near Plasencia, when the alarm spread by the Spanish +fugitives reached that place. Crauford allowed his men two hours' +rest and then started to join the army, and did not halt until he +reached the camp; having in twenty-six hours, during the hottest +season of the year, marched sixty-two miles, carrying kit, arms, +and ammunition--a weight of from fifty to sixty pounds. Only +twenty-five men out of the three regiments fell out and, +immediately the brigade arrived, it took up the outpost duty in +front of the army.</p> +<p>Terence was much gratified by the appearance, in general orders +that day, of the following notice:</p> +<p>"The general commander-in-chief expresses his warm approbation +of the conduct of the two battalions of the Minho regiment of +Portuguese, commanded by Colonel O'Connor. This officer, on his own +discretion, moved from the position assigned to him, on seeing the +serious attack made on Colonel Donkin's brigade on the evening of +the 27th and, scaling the hill, opened so heavy a fire on the +French ascending it that five battalions fell back, without taking +part in the attack. This took place at the crisis of the +engagement, and had a decisive effect on its result."</p> +<p>At eight o'clock a staff officer rode up, with orders for the +Minho regiment to return at once to the pass of Banos, as the news +had come in that the enemy beyond the hills were in movement. +Terence was to act in concert with the Spanish force there, and +hold the pass as long as possible. If the enemy were in too great +strength to be withstood, he was given discretion as to his +movements; being guided only by the fact that the British army +would, probably, march down the valley of the Tagus.</p> +<p>If Soult crossed, "his force," the order added, "was estimated +as not exceeding 15,000 men."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch3" id="Ch3">Chapter 3</a>: Prisoners.</h2> +<p>On the 31st of July Terence reached the neighbourhood of Banos +and learned, from the peasantry, that a French army had passed +through the town early on the preceding day. No resistance, +whatever, had been offered to its passage through the pass of +Bejar; and the Spanish at Banos had retreated hastily, after +exchanging a few shots with the French advanced guard. The +peasantry had all deserted their villages, but had had some +skirmishes with small foraging parties of cavalry. Several French +stragglers had been killed in the pass.</p> +<p>Hoping to find some of these still alive, and to obtain +information from them, Terence continued his march for Banos; +sending on two of the best mounted of the Portuguese horsemen, to +ascertain if there was any considerable French force left there. He +was within half a mile of the town when he saw them returning, at +full speed, chased by a party of French dragoons; who, however, +fell back when they saw the advancing infantry.</p> +<p>"What is your news?" Terence asked, as the troopers rode up.</p> +<p>"Banos is full of French troops," one of them replied, "and +columns are marching down the pass. From what I can see, I should +think that there must be 16,000 or 20,000 of them."</p> +<p>In fact, this was Soult's second army corps--the first, which +had preceded it, having that morning reached Plasencia, where they +captured 400 sick in the hospitals, and a large quantity of stores +that had been left there, from want of carriage, when the British +army advanced. Terence lost no time in retreating from so dangerous +a neighbourhood, and at once made for the mountains he had just +left.</p> +<p>Two regiments of French cavalry set out in pursuit, as soon as +the party that had chased the Portuguese troopers entered Banos +with the news that a body of infantry, some 2000 strong, was close +at hand. They came up before the Portuguese had marched more than a +mile. The two battalions were halted, and thrown into square. The +French rode fearlessly down upon them, but were received with so +hot and steady a fire that they speedily drew off, with +considerable loss. Then the regiment ascended the hills and, half +an hour later, halted.</p> +<p>"The question is, what is to be done?" Terence said to Herrara +and his two majors. "It is evident that, for once, the information +we obtained from the Spaniards is correct, and that Soult must have +at least 30,000 men with him. Possibly his full strength is not up +yet. By this time the force that passed yesterday must be at +Plasencia, and by tomorrow may be on the Tagus, and Sir Arthur's +position must be one of great danger. Putting Cuesta and the +Spaniards altogether aside as worthless, he has, even with that +brigade we saw marching in soon after we started, only 22,000 or +23,000 men; and on one side of him is Victor, with some 40,000; on +the other is Soult, with perhaps as many more. With starving and +exhausted troops his chances are small, indeed, unless he can cross +the Tagus. He might beat one marshal or the other, but he can +hardly beat the two of them.</p> +<p>"The first thing to do is to send two troopers off, with +duplicate despatches, telling Sir Arthur of Soult's passage. He +might not otherwise hear of it for some time, and then it might be +too late. The peasantry and the village authorities will be too +busy carrying off their effects, and driving their animals to the +hills, to think for a moment of sending information. That is +evidently the first thing to be done.</p> +<p>"Until we see what is going to happen, I don't think we can do +better than cross the Sierra, and encamp at some spot where we can +make out the movements of the French on the plain. At the same time +we can keep an eye on the road to Plasencia, and be able to send +information to Sir Arthur, if any further bodies of French troops +come down into the valley. Our position is evidently a dangerous +one. If the news has reached Sir Arthur, he will have fallen back +from Talavera at once. Victor will no doubt follow on his heels, +and his cavalry and those of Soult will speedily meet each other. +Therefore it will be, in all ways, best to see how matters develop +themselves before moving down into the plain."</p> +<p>Accordingly two of the troopers were sent off with information +that 15,000 French were already in the valley, and that as many +more would be there on the following day. Then the regiment marched +across the Sierra and took post high up on the slope, with +Plasencia ten miles away on the right, and the spires of Oropesa +visible across the valley.</p> +<p>On the following day another army corps was seen descending from +Banos to Plasencia, while a large body of troops marched from that +town to Navalmoral, thus cutting off the retreat of the British by +the bridge of boats at Almaraz. Clouds of dust on the distant plain +showed that a portion, at least, of the Allied Army had arrived at +Oropesa; and bodies of French cavalry were made out, traversing the +plain and scattering among the villages. Two more troopers were +sent off with reports, and warned, like the others, to take +different routes, and make a wide circuit so as to avoid the +French, and then to come down upon Oropesa. If the troops there +were British, they were to deliver their reports to the general in +command. If it was occupied by Spaniards, they were to proceed to +Talavera and hand them in at headquarters.</p> +<p>On the following day, still another army corps marched down to +Plasencia, raising Soult's force to 54,000. On that day Cuesta, who +had undertaken to hold Talavera, retreated suddenly; alarmed by +Victor's army making an advance, and leaving to their fate the 1500 +British wounded in the hospital. These, however, were benefited by +the change. They had been dying of hunger for, although there was +an abundance of provisions in Talavera, the inhabitants refused to +sell any to the British, and jealously concealed their stores in +their houses. Nor would Cuesta do anything to aid them; and thus +the men who had fought and suffered for the Spanish cause were left +to perish, while there was abundance around them. The conduct of +the Spaniards, from the moment the British crossed the frontier to +the time of their leaving Spain, was never forgotten or forgiven by +the British troops, who had henceforth an absolute hatred for the +Spanish, which contributed in no small degree to the excesses +perpetrated by them upon the inhabitants of Badajos, and other +places, taken subsequently by storm.</p> +<p>The French, on entering Talavera, treated the British wounded +with the greatest kindness, and henceforth they were well fed and +cared for.</p> +<p>The first report sent by Terence reached Sir Arthur safely, ten +hours after it was sent out, and apprised him for the first time of +the serious storm that was gathering in his rear; and he had, +without an hour's delay, given orders for the army to march to +Oropesa, intending to give battle to Soult before Victor could come +up to join his fellow marshal. The second report informed him of +the real strength of the army towards which he was marching, and +showed him the real extent of his danger. So he at once seized the +only plan of escape offered to him, marching with all speed to +Arzobispo, and crossing the Tagus by the bridge there, Cuesta's +army following him. As soon as the Tagus was passed, Crauford's +brigade was hurried on to seize the bridge of boats at Almaraz, and +prevent the French from crossing there.</p> +<p>Fortunately, Soult was as ignorant of the position of the Allies +as Sir Arthur was of his and, believing that the British were +following Victor and pressing forward towards Madrid, he had +conducted his operations in a comparatively leisurely manner. +Therefore, it was not until the British were safely across the +Tagus that he ascertained the real state of affairs, and put +himself in communication with Victor.</p> +<p>On the morning following the crossing Terence was apprised, by a +note sent back by one of the troopers, of the movement that had +taken place. It was written upon a small piece of paper, so that it +could be destroyed at once, by the bearer, if he should be +threatened with capture, and contained only the following +words:</p> +<p>"Your report invaluable. The Allied Army moves to Arzobispo, and +will cross the Tagus there. You must act according to your +judgment. I can give no advice."</p> +<p>"Thank God the British army has escaped!" Terence said, after +reading the despatch to his officers; "now we have only to think of +ourselves. As to rejoining Sir Arthur, it is out of the question; +the valley is full of French troops. Ney has joined Soult, and +there are 100,000 Frenchmen between us and our army. If I had any +idea where Wilson is, we might endeavour to join him, for he must +be in the same plight as ourselves. Our only chance, so far as I +can see, is to cross their line of communications and to endeavour +to join Beresford, who is reported as marching down the frontier +from Almeida."</p> +<p>"Would you propose to pass through Banos, Colonel?" Herrara +asked. "The mountains there are almost, if not quite, impassable; +but we might get a peasant to guide us."</p> +<p>"I don't like going near Banos, Herrara. The French are almost +sure to have left a strong body there, and the chances are against +our finding a peasant; for the inhabitants of all the villages, for +ten miles round, have almost certainly fled and taken to the +hills.</p> +<p>"I think it would be safer to follow along this side of the +Sierra, cross the road a few miles above Plasencia, then make for +the mountains, and come down on the head of the river Coa. +Beresford is probably in the valley of that river. We are more +likely to find a guide, that way, than we are by going through +Banos. We shall have tough work of it whichever way we go, even if +we are lucky enough to get past without running against a single +Frenchman."</p> +<p>"Would it not be better to wait till nightfall, Colonel?" Bull +asked.</p> +<p>Terence shook his head.</p> +<p>"There is no moon," he said; "and as to climbing about among +these mountains in the dark, it would be worse than running the +risk of a fight with the French. Besides, we should have no chance +whatever of coming across a peasant. No, I think we must try it as +soon as it gets light, tomorrow morning. We had better dress up a +score of men in peasant clothes; and send them off, in couples, to +search among the hills. Whoever comes across a man must bring him +in, whether he likes it or not. The Spaniards are so desperately +afraid of the French that they will give us no information, +whatever, unless forced to do so; and we shall have even more +difficulty than the British. There must have been thousands of +peasants, and others, who knew that Soult had come down upon +Plasencia; and yet Sir Arthur obtained no news.</p> +<p>"There is one comfort: there can be little doubt that Soult is +just as much in the dark as to the position of the British +army."</p> +<p>By nightfall three peasants had been brought in. All shook their +heads stolidly, when questioned in Portuguese; but upon Terence +having them placed against a rock, and twelve men brought up and +ordered to load their muskets, one of them said, in Spanish:</p> +<p>"I know where a path across the mountains leaves the road, but I +have never been over the hills, and know nothing of how it +runs."</p> +<p>"Ah! I thought you could make out my question," Terence said. +"Well, you have saved the lives of yourself and your comrades. Take +us to the path, tomorrow, and set us fairly on it; and you shall be +allowed to go free, and be paid five dollars for your trouble."</p> +<p>Then he turned to Bull.</p> +<p>"Put four men to guard them," he said, "and let the guard be +changed once every two hours. Their orders will be to shoot the +fellows down, if they endeavour to make their escape. They are +quite capable of going down into Plasencia and bringing the French +upon us."</p> +<p>At daybreak they were on the march and, two hours later, came +down into the valley through which the road from Banos ran down to +Plasencia. They had just crossed it when the head of a column of +cavalry appeared, coming down the valley. It at once broke into a +gallop.</p> +<p>"How far is it to where the path begins to ascend the +mountains?" Terence asked, holding a pistol to the peasant's +head.</p> +<p>"Four miles," the man replied sullenly, looking with +apprehension at the French.</p> +<p>Terence shouted orders to Bull and Macwitty to throw their men +into square, and as they had been marching, since they reached +level ground, in column of companies, the movement was carried out +before the enemy arrived.</p> +<p>The French cavalry, believing that the battalions were Spanish, +and would break at once, charged furiously down upon them. They +were, however, received with so heavy a fire that they drew off +discomfited, leaving many men and horses on the ground.</p> +<p>"They are a strong body," Terence said quietly to Bull, in the +centre of whose square he had taken up his position. "I should say +there are 3000 of them, and I am afraid they are the head of +another division."</p> +<p>"Yes, there are the infantry coming down the valley. We must +press on, or we shall be caught before we get into the hills."</p> +<p>The battalions were soon in motion but, immediately they +started, the cavalry prepared to charge again.</p> +<p>"This will never do, Bull. If we form square every time, we +shall be delayed so much that the infantry will soon be up. You +must do it now, and quickly; but we will start next time in column, +eight abreast; and face the men round in lines, four deep either +way, if they charge again."</p> +<p>The French, this time, drew off without pressing their charge +home; and then, trotting on, took their place between the +Portuguese and the mountains.</p> +<p>"Form your leading company in line, four deep, Bull. The column +shall follow you."</p> +<p>The formation was quickly altered and, preceded by the line, to +cover them from the charge in front, the column advanced at a rapid +pace. The cavalry moved forward to meet them, but as the two +parties approached each other the line opened so heavy a fire that +the French drew off from their front, both to the right and left. +Bull at once threw back a wing of each company, to prevent an +attack in flank; and so, in the form of a capital T, the column +kept on its way. Several times the French cavalry charged down, +compelling them to halt; but each time, after repulsing the attack, +the column went on.</p> +<p>"It would be all right if we had only these fellows to deal +with," Terence said to Bull, "but their infantry are coming on +fast."</p> +<p>The plain behind was, indeed, covered with a swarm of +skirmishers, coming along at the double.</p> +<p>"We must go at the double, too, Bull," Terence said, "or they +will be up long before we get to the hills. We are not halfway yet. +Keep the men well in hand, and don't let them fall into confusion. +If they do, the cavalry will be down upon us in a minute."</p> +<p>The cavalry, however, were equally conscious of the importance +of checking the Portuguese, and again and again dashed down upon +them, with reckless bravery; suffering heavily whenever they did +so, but causing some delay each time they charged.</p> +<p>"I shall go back to the rear, Bull. Mind, my orders are precise +that, whatever happens behind to us, you are to push forward until +you begin to climb the hills."</p> +<p>Then, without waiting for an answer, he galloped back.</p> +<p>Although the column pressed on steadily at the double, the delay +caused by the cavalry, and the fact that the French infantry were +broken up--and able, therefore, to run more quickly--was bringing +the enemy up fast. Herrara was riding at the head of the second +battalion, and to him Terence repeated the instructions he had +given Bull.</p> +<p>"What are you going to do, Colonel?" the latter asked.</p> +<p>"There is some very broken ground, a quarter of a mile ahead," +he replied. "I intend to hold that spot with the rear company. It +will be some little time before the French infantry will be able to +form and attack us; and the ground looks, to me, too broken for +their cavalry to act. As soon as I can see that you are far enough +ahead to gain the hill, before they can overtake you again, I shall +follow you with the company; but mind, should I not do so, you must +take the command of the two battalions, cross the mountains, and +join Beresford."</p> +<p>He galloped on to Macwitty, who was riding in the rear, and +repeated the order to him.</p> +<p>"Well, Colonel, let me stop behind with the company, instead of +yourself."</p> +<p>"No, no, Macwitty. It is the post of danger and, as commanding +officer, I must take it. It is a question of saving the two +battalions at the cost of the company, and there is no doubt as to +the course to be taken. Do you ride on at once, and take your post +at the rear of the company ahead of this, and keep them steady. +Here come their cavalry down again on the flank."</p> +<p>There was another charge, three or four heavy volleys, and then +the French drew off again. The bullets of their infantry were now +whistling overhead.</p> +<p>"A hundred yards farther," Terence shouted, "and then we will +face them."</p> +<p>In front lay an upheaval of rock, stretching almost like a wall +across the line they were following. It was a sort of natural +outwork, pushed out by nature in front of the hill, and rose some +fifty feet above the level of the plain. There were many places at +which it could be climbed, and up one of these the track ran +obliquely. Hitherto it had been but an ill-defined path, but here +some efforts had been made to render it practicable, by cutting +away the ground on the upper side, to enable laden mules to pass +up.</p> +<p>Terence reined up at the bottom of the ascent, and directed the +men to take up their post on the crest; the leading half of the +company to the right, and the other half to the left of the path. +Before all were up the French light troops were clustering round, +but a rush was prevented by the heavy fire that opened from the +brow above, and the company were soon scattered along the crest, a +yard apart.</p> +<p>In five minutes some two thousand French infantry were +assembled. A mounted officer rode some distance to the right and +left, to examine the ground. It was evident that he considered that +the position, held by 200 determined men, was a formidable one. +Lying down, as they were, only the heads of the Portuguese could be +seen; while a force attacking them would have to march across level +ground, affording no shelter whatever from the defenders' fire, and +then to climb a very steep ascent. Moreover, the whole force they +had been pursuing might be gathered, just behind.</p> +<p>After another five minutes' delay, half a battalion broke up +into skirmishers; while the rest divided into two parties, and +marched parallel to the rocks, left and right. Terence saw that +these movements must be successful for, with 200 men, he could not +defend a line of indefinite length. However, his object had now +been achieved. The descent behind was even and regular, and he +could see the column winding up the hill, somewhat over half a mile +away. Of the French cavalry he could see nothing. They had, after +their last charge, ridden off, as if leaving the matter in the +hands of their infantry.</p> +<p>He ordered the bugler to sound the retreat, in open order; and +the Portuguese, rising to their feet, went down the gentle slope at +a trot. They were halfway to the hills when the long lines of the +French cavalry were seen, sweeping down upon them from the right; +having evidently ridden along the foot of the steep declivity, +until they came to a spot where they were able to ascend it.</p> +<p>At the sound of the bugle the rear company instantly ran +together and formed a square and, as the French cavalry came up, +opened a continuous fire upon them. Unable to break the line of +bayonets, the horsemen rode round and round the square, discharging +their pistols into it, and occasionally making desperate efforts to +break in. Suddenly the cavalry drew apart, and a battalion of +infantry marched forward, and poured their fire into the +Portuguese.</p> +<p>Terence felt that no more could be done. His main body was safe +from pursuit, and it would be but throwing away the lives of his +brave fellows, did he continue the hopeless fight. He therefore +waved a white handkerchief, in token of surrender; shouted to his +men to cease fire and, riding through them with sheathed sword, +made his way to the officer who appeared to be in command of the +cavalry.</p> +<a id="PicB" name="PicB"></a> +<center><img src="images/b.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: 'We surrender, sir, as prisoners of war.'" /></center> +<p>"We surrender, sir," he said, "as prisoners of war. We have done +all that we could do."</p> +<p>He could speak but a few words of French, but the officer +understood him.</p> +<p>"You have done more than enough, sir," he said. "Order your men +to lay down their arms, and I will guarantee their safety."</p> +<p>He ordered his cavalry to draw back and, riding up to the +infantry, halted them. Terence at once ordered his men to lay down +their arms.</p> +<p>"You have done all that men could do," he said. "You have saved +your comrades, and it is no dishonour to yield to twenty times your +own force. Form up in column, ready to march."</p> +<p>The commander of the cavalry again rode up, this time +accompanied by another officer.</p> +<p>"The general wishes to know, sir," the latter said in English, +"who you are, and what force this is?"</p> +<p>"I am Colonel O'Connor, holding that rank in Lord Beresford's +army; and have the honour to be on the staff of Sir Arthur +Wellesley, though at present detached on special service. The two +battalions that have marched up the hill are the Minho regiment of +Portuguese, under my command. We were posted on the Sierra and, +being cut off from rejoining the British by the advance of Marshal +Soult's army, were endeavouring to retire across the mountains into +Portugal, when you cut us off."</p> +<p>The officer translated the words to the general.</p> +<p>"Tell him," the latter said, "that if all the Portuguese fought +as well as those troops, there would have been no occasion for the +British to come here to aid them. I have never seen troops better +handled, or more steady. This cannot be the first time they have +been under fire."</p> +<p>Terence bowed, when the compliment was translated to him.</p> +<p>"They fought, General, in the campaign last year," he said, "and +the regiment takes its name from the fact that they prevented +Marshal Soult from crossing at the mouth of the Minho; but their +first encounter with your cavalry was near Orense."</p> +<p>"I remember it well," the general said, "for I was in command of +the cavalry that attacked you. Your men were not in uniform, then, +or I should have known them again. How did you come to be there? +For at that time, the British had not advanced beyond Cintra."</p> +<p>"I had been sent with a message to Romana and, happening to come +across this newly-raised levy, without officers or commander, I +took the command and, aided by two British troopers and a +Portuguese lieutenant, succeeded in getting them into shape; and +did my best to hold the pass to Braga."</p> +<p>"Peste!" the general exclaimed. "That was you again, was it? It +was the one piece of dash and determination shown by the +Portuguese, during our advance to Oporto, and cost us as many men +as all the rest of the fighting put together.</p> +<p>"And now, Colonel, we must be marching. Major Portalis, here, +will take charge of you."</p> +<p>In a few minutes the French cavalry and infantry were on their +march towards Plasencia, the Portuguese prisoners guarded on both +sides by cavalry marching with them; their captain being, like +Terence, placed in charge of an officer. The Portuguese marched +with head erect. They were prisoners, but they felt that they had +done well, and had sacrificed themselves to cover the retreat of +their comrades; and that, had it not been for the French infantry +coming up, they might have beaten off the attacks of their great +body of cavalry.</p> +<p>On their arrival at Plasencia, the troops were placed in a large +building that had been converted into a prison. Here were some +hundreds of other prisoners, for the most part Spaniards, who had +been captured when Soult had suddenly arrived.</p> +<p>Terence was taken to the quarters of General Foy, who was in +command there. Here he was again questioned, through the officer +who spoke English. After he translated his answers to the general, +the latter told him to ask Terence if he knew where Wilson was.</p> +<p>"I do not, sir," he replied; "we were together on the Sierra, a +fortnight ago, but he marched suddenly away without communicating +with me, and I remained at Banos until ordered to march to the +Alberche. We took part in the battle there, and were then ordered +back, again to support the Spaniards at Banos; but Marshal Soult +had marched through the pass, and the Spaniards had disappeared +before we got there. We remained among the mountains until +yesterday when, hearing that the British had crossed the Tagus, and +seeing no way to rejoin them, I started to cross the mountains to +join Lord Beresford's force, wherever I might find it."</p> +<p>"General Heron reports that the two battalions under your +command fought with extraordinary steadiness, and repulsed all the +attempts of his cavalry to break them; and finally succeeded in +drawing off to the mountains, with the exception of the two +companies that formed the rear guard. How is it that there is only +one officer?"</p> +<p>"They were, in fact, one company," Terence said. "My companies +are each about 200 strong, and the officer captured with me was its +captain."</p> +<p>"General Heron also reports to me that your retreat was +admirably carried out," General Foy said, "and that no body of +French veterans could have done better.</p> +<p>"Well, sir, if you are ready to give your parole not to escape, +you will be at liberty to move about the town freely, until there +is an opportunity of sending a batch of prisoners to France."</p> +<p>"Thank you, general. I am ready to give my parole not to make +any attempt to escape, and am obliged to you for your +courtesy."</p> +<p>Terence had already thought over what course he had best take, +should he be offered freedom on parole, and had resolved to accept +it. The probabilities of making his escape were extremely small. +There would be no chance whatever of rejoining the army; and a +passage, alone, across the all-but-impassable mountains, was not to +be thought of. Therefore he decided that, at any rate for the +present, he would give his promise not to attempt to escape.</p> +<p>Quarters were assigned to him in the town, in a house where +several French officers were staying. These all showed him great +courtesy and kindness. Between the English and French the war was, +throughout, conducted on honourable terms. Prisoners were well +treated, and there was no national animosity between either +officers or men.</p> +<p>When he went out into the town one of the French officers +generally accompanied him, and he was introduced to a number of +others. He set to work, in earnest, to improve the small knowledge +of French that he possessed and, borrowing some French newspapers, +and buying a dictionary in the town, he spent a considerable +portion of his time in studying them.</p> +<p>He remained three weeks at Plasencia. During that time he heard +that the army of Venegas had been completely routed by Victor, that +Cuesta had been badly beaten soon after crossing the Tagus, and +Albuquerque's cavalry very roughly treated. Five guns and 400 +prisoners had been taken. Ney had marched through Plasencia, on his +way back to Valladolid to repress an insurrection that had broken +out in that district; and on his way met Wilson, who was trying to +retreat by Banos, and who was decisively beaten and his command +scattered.</p> +<p>Terence was now told to prepare to leave, with a convoy of +prisoners, for Talavera. He was the only British officer and, being +on parole, the officer commanding the detachment marching with the +prisoners invited him to ride with him, and the two days' journey +was made very pleasantly.</p> +<p>At Talavera he remained for a week. The Portuguese prisoners +remained there, but the British who had been captured in Plasencia, +and the convalescents from the hospital at Talavera--in all 200 +strong, among whom were six British officers--were to march to the +frontier, there to be interned in one of the French fortresses.</p> +<p>The officer who had commanded the escort, on the march from +Plasencia, spoke in high terms of Terence to the officer in charge +of the two hundred men who were to go on with them. The party had +been directed not to pass through Madrid, as the sight of over two +hundred British prisoners might give rise to a popular +demonstration by the excitable Spaniards, which would possibly lead +to disorder. He was therefore directed to march by the road to the +Escurial, and then over the Sierra to Segovia, then up through +Valladolid and Burgos. The escort was entirely composed of infantry +and, as Terence could not therefore take his horse with him, he +joined the other officers on foot.</p> +<p>To his great surprise and joy he found that one of these was his +chum, Dick Ryan.</p> +<p>"This is an unexpected pleasure, Dicky!" he exclaimed.</p> +<p>"Well, yes, I am as pleased as you are at our meeting, Terence; +but I must own that the conditions might have been more +pleasant."</p> +<p>"Oh, never mind the conditions!" Terence said. "It is quite +enough, for the present, that we both are here; and that we have +got before us a journey that is likely to be a jolly one. I suppose +that you have given your parole, as I have; but when we are once in +prison there will be an end of that, and it is hard if, when we put +our heads together, we don't hit on some plan of escape.</p> +<p>"Do you know the other officers? If so, please introduce me to +them."</p> +<p>As soon as the introductions were completed, Terence asked Ryan +where he had been wounded.</p> +<p>"I was hit by a piece of a French shell," the latter replied. +"Fortunately it did not come straight at me, but scraped along my +ribs, laying them pretty well bare. As it was a month ago, it is +quite healed up; but I am very stiff still, and am obliged to be +very careful in my movements. If I forget all about it, and give a +turn suddenly, I regularly yell; for it feels as if a red-hot iron +had been stuck against me. However, I have learned to be careful +and, as long as I simply walk straight on, I am pretty well all +right.</p> +<p>"It was a near case, at first; and I believe I should have died +of starvation if the French had not come in. Those brutes of +Spaniards would do nothing whatever for me, and I give you my word +of honour that nothing passed my lips, but water, for three +days."</p> +<p>"Perhaps it was a good thing for you, Dicky, and kept down +fever."</p> +<p>"I would have run the chance of a dozen fevers, to have got a +good meal," Ryan said indignantly. "I don't know but that I would +have chanced it, even for a crust of bread. I tell you, if the +French had not come in when they did, there would not have been a +man alive in hospital at the end of another forty-eight hours. The +men were so furious that, if they could have got at arms, I believe +everyone who could have managed to crawl out would have joined in a +sally, and have shot down every Spaniard they met in the streets, +till they were overpowered and killed.</p> +<p>"Now, let us hear your adventures. Of course, I saw in orders +what good work you did, that day when you were in our camp, against +the French when they attacked Donkin. Some of our fellows went +across to see you, the morning after the big battle; but they could +not find you, and heard afterwards, from some men of Hill's +division, that you had been seen marching away in a body, along the +hills."</p> +<p>Terence then gave an account of the attack by the French upon +his regiment, and how he had fallen into their hands.</p> +<p>"That was well done, Terence. There is some pleasure in being +taken prisoner, in that sort of way. What will become of your +regiment, do you suppose?"</p> +<p>"I have no idea. Herrara may be appointed to the command. I +should think that most likely he would be, but of course Sir Arthur +may put another English officer at its head. However, I should say +that there is no likelihood of any more fighting, this year. Ney's +corps has gone north, which is a sign that there will be no +invasion of Portugal at present; and certainly Sir Arthur is not +likely to take the offensive again, now that his eyes have been +thoroughly opened to the rascality and cowardice of the Spaniards; +and by next spring we two may be back again. We have got into so +many scrapes together, and have always pulled through them, that I +don't think the French will keep us long.</p> +<p>"Have you stuck to your Portuguese, Dicky?"</p> +<p>"I have, and am beginning to get on very fairly with it."</p> +<p>"That is right. When we get back I will apply for you as my +adjutant, if I get the command of the regiment again."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch4" id="Ch4">Chapter 4</a>: Guerillas.</h2> +<p>The marches were short, as many of the prisoners were still weak +and, indeed, among their guard were many convalescents who had +recently been discharged from the hospital at Toledo, and who were +going back to France. The little column was accompanied by four +waggons, two of which were intended for the conveyance of any who +should prove unable to march; and the others were filled with +provisions for consumption by the way, together with a few tents, +as many of the villages that would be their halting places were too +small to afford accommodation for the 400 men, even if every house +was taken up for the purpose. Although the first day's march was +only twelve miles, the two empty waggons were quite full before +they reached their halting place; and many of the guard had placed +their guns and cartridge boxes on the other carts.</p> +<p>It was now the middle of August, and the heat in the valley of +the Tagus was overpowering. The convoy, however, had marched at six +in the morning; and halted at eight, in the shade of a large olive +wood; and did not continue its march until five in the afternoon. +The night was so warm that the English prisoners, and many of their +guards, preferred lying down in the open and throwing the blanket +(with which each had been furnished) over him to keep off the dew, +to going into the stuffy cottages, where the fleas would give them +little chance of rest.</p> +<p>On the third day they arrived at the village of Escurial. The +next morning they began to mount the pass over the Sierra, and +slept that night in an empty barracks, at Segovia. Here they left +the main road leading through Valladolid and took one more to the +east, stopping at small villages until they arrived at Aranda, on +the Douro. Thence they marched due north, to Gamonal.</p> +<p>They were now on the main road to the frontier, passed through +Miranda and Zadorra, and began to ascend the slopes of the +Pyrenees. The marches had, for some days, been considerably longer +than when they first started. The invalids had gained strength and, +having no muskets to carry, were for the most part able to march +eighteen or twenty miles without difficulty. Four had been left +behind in hospital at Segovia, but with these exceptions all had +greatly benefited by steady exercise, and an ample supply of +food.</p> +<p>"I could do a good deal of travelling, in this way," one of the +officers said, as they marched out from Miranda. "Just enough +exercise to be pleasant; no trouble about baggage or route, or +where one is to stop for the night; nothing to pay, and everything +managed for you. What could one want for, more?"</p> +<p>"We could do with a little less dust," Dick Ryan said, with a +laugh; "but we cannot expect everything."</p> +<p>"Unfortunately, there will be an end to our marching, and not a +very pleasant one," Terence said. "At present, one scarcely +recognizes that one is a prisoner. The French officers certainly do +all in their power to make us forget it; and their soldiers, and +ours, try their best to hold some sort of conversation together. I +feel that I am making great progress in French, and it is +especially jolly when we halt for the night, and get the bivouac +fires burning, and chat and laugh with the French officers as +though we were the best friends in the world."</p> +<p>The march was, indeed, conducted in a comfortable and easy +fashion. At starting, the prisoners marched four abreast, and the +French two abreast at each side; but before a mile had been passed +the order was no longer strictly observed, and the men trudged +along, smoking their pipes, laughing and talking, the French and +English alternately breaking into a marching song. There was no +fear of the prisoners trying to escape. They could, at night, have +got away from their guards easily enough; but there was nowhere for +them to go, if they had done so. The English, smarting from the +cruelty and ill faith of the inhabitants of Talavera and the +Spanish authorities, felt a burning hatred of the Spanish; while +the Spaniards, on their side, deceived by the lying representations +of their Juntas, had no love whatever for the English, though ready +enough to receive money and arms from them.</p> +<p>On leaving Zadorra, the French officer in command said to +Terence:</p> +<p>"Now, colonel, we shall have to be more careful during our +marches, keeping a sharp lookout at night. The country here is +infested by guerillas, whom all our efforts cannot eradicate. The +mountains of Navarre and Biscay are full of them. Sometimes they +are in bands of fifteen or twenty strong, sometimes they are in +hundreds. Some of them are at ordinary times goatherds, shepherds, +muleteers, and peasants; but a number of them are disbanded +soldiers--the remains of armies we have defeated and broken up, and +who prefer this wild life in the mountains to returning to their +homes. Our convoys are constantly attacked, and have always to be +accompanied by a strong guard."</p> +<p>"As we have no waggons with us, I should think that they would +hardly care to molest us," Terence said.</p> +<p>"That renders it less likely, certainly, colonel; but they fight +from hatred as much as for booty, and no French soldier who falls +into their hands is ever spared. Generally they are put to death +with atrocious tortures. At first there was no such feeling here +and, when my regiment was quartered at Vittoria, some three years +ago, things were quiet enough. You see, the feeling gradually grew. +No doubt some of our men plundered. Many of the regiments were +composed of young conscripts, with very slight notions of +discipline. Those from the country districts were, as a rule, quiet +lads enough; but among those from the towns, especially such places +as Toulouse, Lyons, and Marseilles, were young scoundrels ready for +any wickedness, and it is to these that the troubles we now have +are largely due.</p> +<p>"Of course the peasants, when they were able to do so, +retaliated upon these marauders. The feeling of hatred grew, on +both sides. Straggling parties of our men were surrounded, +captured, and then hung, shot, or burnt alive.</p> +<p>"Then, on our side, villages were destroyed and the peasants +shot down. Lately, that is, after the defeats of their armies, +numbers of fugitives took to the hills, threw away their uniforms, +obtained peasants' dresses, and set up as what they called +guerillas, which is only another term for bandits; for although +their efforts are chiefly directed against us, they do not hesitate +to plunder their own people, when they need provisions, and are a +perfect scourge to all the villages among the hills between the Bay +of Biscay and the Mediterranean. Of course, they are strongest +along the line of communication with France; but it may be said +that, roughly, where there are mountains there are guerillas, +though there are but few of them along the hills we crossed between +the valley of the Tagus and that of the Douro.</p> +<p>"This is for two reasons: in the first place, there are very few +villages, and they would have difficulty in maintaining themselves; +and in the second place, because hitherto Leon and Old Castile, on +the north of the Sierra, have always been under different commands +to that in the Tagus valley, and therefore there has been but small +communication between them, except by messengers with despatches +from Madrid. The passes have scarcely been used and, indeed, in +winter they are practically altogether impassable; except that +along the valley of the Ebro. We found that to our cost, when we +marched with Napoleon to cut off your British General Moore. We +lost nearly two days getting through them, and the delay saved your +army."</p> +<p>"Yes, it was a very close thing," Terence said. "As I have told +you, I was with Moore; and if the troops from the south had come up +but six hours earlier, it would have gone very hard with us."</p> +<p>"It was an awful time," the officer said, "and I think our army +must have suffered quite as much as yours did. Soult's force was +reduced fully to half its strength, when he first arrived on that +hill near Corunna. Of course the stragglers came in rapidly, but a +great number never returned to their colours again--some died of +cold and hardship, others were cut off and murdered by the +peasantry. Altogether, we had an awful time of it. Your men were, +in one respect, better off than ours; for your stragglers were not +regarded with hostility by the peasants, whereas no mercy was shown +to ours."</p> +<p>"Yes, major, one of the battalions that fought at Talavera was +entirely composed of men who had straggled in the retreat, and who +afterwards succeeded in gaining the Portuguese frontier."</p> +<p>That evening they halted, for the night, at a small village high +up in the passes. The French officer took every precaution against +surprise. Twenty sentries were placed at various points round the +village; and as many more were posted, in pairs, three or four +hundred yards farther out.</p> +<p>At three in the morning, several shots were fired. The troops +all got under arms, and parties were sent out to the outposts. At +two of these posts both the sentries were found stabbed to the +heart. At others men had been seen crawling up towards them, and +the shots that had aroused the troops had been fired. The outposts +were recalled to the village, and the soldiers remained under arms +until morning.</p> +<p>As soon as it was daybreak a scattered fire opened from the +hills on either side of the valley, and it was evident that these +were occupied by strong parties. The villagers, on being +questioned, denied all knowledge of these bands; but under threats +said that they had heard that Minas, with a very strong force, was +in the neighbourhood, and that the Impecinado had been reported to +be among the hills between the pass and that of Roncesvalles.</p> +<p>"What strength do you put them down at, colonel?" the major +asked Terence.</p> +<p>"I should say, from what we can see of them, that there must be +four or five hundred on each hill."</p> +<p>"They must have had information from their spies at Zadorra, +colonel, and half a dozen bands must have united to crush us.</p> +<p>"Diable, that was a good shot!" he exclaimed, as his shako was +struck from his head by a bullet. "That is the worst of these +fellows. They are uncommonly good shots. You see, almost all these +mountain men are accustomed to carry guns, and the charcoal burners +and shepherds eke out a living by shooting game and sending it down +to the towns."</p> +<p>"What are you thinking of doing, major?"</p> +<p>"I shall hold the village," the latter replied. "We might get +through the pass, but I doubt whether we should do so; and if we +did, my men and yours would suffer terribly. Can I rely upon your +fellows keeping quiet?"</p> +<p>"I think so. At any rate, we will all go round and order them to +do so."</p> +<p>There was, however, no necessity to impress this on the men. Two +of them had already been wounded by the guerillas' fire.</p> +<p>"Why, sir," one of them said, "if we had but muskets here, we +would turn out and help the French to drive those fellows off. The +French have behaved very well to us, while the Spaniards did their +best to starve us to death; and there ain't one of us who wouldn't +jump at the chance of paying them out."</p> +<p>"All right, men!" said Terence. "I agree with you, as to the +treatment you have received; however, we are not here to fight. We +are prisoners, and have nothing to do with the fray, one way or the +other; though I don't mean to say that I should not, myself, be +glad to see the French beat the guerillas off."</p> +<p>The other officers found the same spirit among the soldiers they +questioned.</p> +<p>"I quite agree with them," one of the officers said, "and if +there were muskets handy I would not mind leading them, myself, if +it were not for the uniform. Sir Arthur would scarcely be pleased +if, among all his other worries, he got a despatch from the central +Junta, complaining that a large number of innocent peasants had +been killed by English troops, fighting by the side of the +French."</p> +<p>Gradually the guerillas drew in towards the village, taking +advantage of every stone and bush, and rarely giving a chance to +the French infantry. Their aim was exceedingly accurate and, +whenever a French soldier showed himself from behind a hut to fire, +he was fortunate if he got back again without receiving a +bullet.</p> +<p>"This is getting serious," the French major said, coming into +the cottage where the English officers were gathered. "I have lost +thirty-eight killed and wounded, already. I have had the wounded +carried into the church, and some of your men are unloading the +provision waggons, and taking the contents inside. They have +requisitioned every utensil that will hold water in the village. No +doubt we shall be able to hold out there till some other detachment +comes along the road."</p> +<p>"I think that it is a very good plan, major," Terence said. +"They would hardly be able to carry it by assault, unless they +burnt down the door; and you ought to be able to prevent them from +doing that."</p> +<p>Half an hour later, the whole French force was collected in the +church. As soon as the Spaniards found what had happened, they +speedily entered the village; and opened fire from every window +giving a view of the church, and from loopholes that they quickly +made in the walls.</p> +<p>Terence noticed that, when the British soldiers entered the +church, most of them carried heavy staves. A sergeant came up, and +saluted.</p> +<p>"We have had four men killed and eight wounded, sir. The men +declare that they are not going to stand still and see the French +murdered by these fellows, and I doubt if any orders will keep them +back."</p> +<p>"Very well, sergeant. I will speak to them, presently.</p> +<p>"Now, gentlemen," he said, to the other officers, "three of you +are senior to me in our own army and, though I own that I don't +know how matters should stand, holding as I do Lord Beresford's +commission as colonel, I am perfectly willing to place myself under +the orders of whoever may be senior of you."</p> +<p>"I believe I am the senior," one of the captains said; "but I +should imagine that Lord Beresford's commission would, for the +time, rank just as if it had been signed by our own authorities. +Moreover, you are on Wellesley's staff. You have seen more service +out here than any of us, and I think that you are certainly +entitled to the command; though really, I don't see what we can do, +in our uniforms."</p> +<p>"I quite agree with you, Captain Travers, and therefore my +proposal is that we shall all take them off, and fight in our shirt +sleeves. The guerillas will then not be able to affirm that there +were any men in English uniforms assisting the French."</p> +<p>"I think the idea is an excellent one," Captain Travers +said.</p> +<p>"Then in that case I will act upon it;" and Terence went up to +the English soldiers, who were standing in a group in the middle of +the church.</p> +<p>"I am sure you quite understand, my men," he said, "that it +would never do for you to be fighting, in British uniforms, against +the Spaniards; otherwise, I leave the matter in your hands. But I +may mention that it is the intention of myself, and the other +officers, to defend this church without our coats and caps. If any +of you like to do the same, of course you can join us. I give no +orders whatever on the subject, but you see that it would get rid +of the inconvenience of soldiers, in British uniforms, fighting +against the Spaniards."</p> +<p>The men answered with a shout of satisfaction, mingled with +laughter and, in less than a minute, the scarlet uniforms had +disappeared. The muskets of the French killed and wounded were +appropriated, and the rest of the English prisoners seized their +clubs.</p> +<p>For some hours the fight continued and, from the roof of the +church belfry and windows, a hot fire answered the incessant +fusillade of the Spaniards. The French and English officers were +obliged, constantly, to impress upon the men that they must husband +their ammunition; as there was no saying how long they might be +besieged before a detachment, strong enough to turn the scale, +arrived.</p> +<p>"Maintain a fire heavy enough to make them keep at it. Their +ammunition is likely to run short as soon as ours, and there is not +much chance of their being able to replenish it. But don't fire at +random. Let every bullet tell. Take a steady aim at the windows +through which they are firing."</p> +<p>Late in the afternoon the fire of the guerillas slackened a good +deal, and it was evident that their leaders were enjoining them not +to waste their ammunition. As it became dark, the officers gathered +again in the body of the church. The total loss had risen to +thirty-two killed and fifty wounded, the English casualties being +about a third of the whole.</p> +<p>"It is a heavy loss," the major said, "and I have noticed that, +as the fire slackened, the proportion of men hit has been larger. I +suppose that they are only keeping their best shots at work."</p> +<p>"I should fancy," Terence said, "that if we were to make a +sortie, we could scatter them altogether. As soon as it is dark we +might get out by that sacristy door at the rear. They gave up the +attack on that side some time ago, as they could not get any +shelter; and when they found that was so, they betook themselves to +houses where they were better covered. If we were to go out +noiselessly and sweep round the village; so as to fall upon it in +two bodies, one at each end; they will take us for a body of troops +just arrived. Even if they do hear us, as we go out, we can go +straight at them; and should, I have no doubt, be able to clear the +place with a rush.</p> +<p>"The only thing is, major, I should be glad if your soldiers +would take off their coatees, too, so that there would be nothing +to distinguish our men from yours. What do you think?"</p> +<p>"I think that it will be much the best plan," Captain Travers +said. "In the first place, it is probable that they will try to +burn us out, tonight; and we could not hope to prevent their piling +faggots against the doors, in the dark. For that reason, alone, I +think that it will be much better to attack them than wait for them +to attack us.</p> +<p>"We need only leave some twenty of the less seriously wounded +men to guard the place. When we sally out, the guerillas will have +plenty to do without making an attack on the church. I certainly +think that we are not likely to lose so many lives in a sortie as +we should do in the defence, here, against a night attack."</p> +<p>"I certainly am of your opinion, colonel," the French major +said; "and if you and your men will join us, I have no doubt that +we shall be able to clear the village."</p> +<p>As soon as it became quite dark, the men on the roof were all +called down; with the exception of one or two, who were ordered to +continue to fire from various spots there and in the belfry, so +that the Spaniards should not discover that the garrison had been +withdrawn. Then the French were drawn up, and divided into two +parties. The English who had muskets were told off, in equal +numbers, to each of these parties; as were those who had nothing +but their clubs. The major then ordered his soldiers to take off +their coats, and to leave their shakos behind them.</p> +<p>The French major took the command of one party, and asked +Terence to take command of the other. This he declined.</p> +<p>"No, sir, it is better that one of your own officers should be +in command. We will divide ourselves between the two parties."</p> +<p>The major now impressed upon his men the necessity for absolute +quiet, and for marching as lightly and silently as possible. The +English officers gave similar instructions to their men. It was +arranged that, when the door was opened, the two parties should +issue out simultaneously, two abreast; so that if the alarm was +given before all were out, they would be able to turn right and +left, and attack in both directions at once. A French lieutenant +was appointed to remain in the church, and command the little +garrison of wounded men.</p> +<p>Those who sallied out were to stoop low as they went, and were +to keep a few paces apart. Some hangings in the church were pulled +down and torn up into strips, with which the men were directed to +muffle their boots.</p> +<p>There was no mistaking the ardour with which the soldiers +prepared for the sortie. Both English and French were indignant at +being pent up by a foe they thoroughly despised, and were eager to +be at the enemy. The casualties added to their wrath; one of the +French officers had been killed, and another hurt seriously; while +three of the English had also been wounded, though in each case but +slightly.</p> +<p>The bolts of the door were noiselessly drawn, and that of the +lock forced back; then the two little parties stole out, in the +order in which they had been directed. The guerillas had just begun +to fire heavily, as a prelude, Terence had no doubt, to a serious +attack upon the church. Fortunately there were no houses at the +back of the church, and no shout indicated that the party were +seen. They therefore kept together, until fifty or sixty yards from +the door; then they separated, and continued their way to the ends +of the village to which they had been, respectively, assigned.</p> +<p>Then at one end of the village a French trumpeter sounded the +charge, and two drummers at the other beat the same order, +vigorously, and with loud cheers they rushed down the street, the +French and English alike shouting. It had been arranged that, while +the French held their way straight on, shooting down the Spaniards +as they poured out into the street, the British should break up +into small detachments, burst their way into the houses, and +overpower the enemy there. They found the first houses they entered +deserted, and the soldiers uttered exclamations of impatience as +they heard the heavy roll of firing in the main street. As they +approached the centre of the village, however, they came upon a +number of the Spaniards rushing from their houses.</p> +<p>The men who had arms opened fire at once upon them, while those +with clubs dashed forward, levelling the panic-stricken guerillas +to the ground with their heavy blows, and arming themselves with +their muskets and bandoleers. Thus the firing soon became general, +and the Spaniards, struck with utter dismay, and believing that +they had been attacked by a heavy column that had just arrived, +speedily took to headlong flight, most of them throwing away their +arms as they fled. In some of the houses there were short but +desperate conflicts but, in a quarter of an hour after the first +shot was fired, there was not a guerilla remaining alive in the +village, upwards of a hundred and fifty having been killed; while +on the side of their assailants only some fifteen had been killed, +and twenty-eight wounded.</p> +<p>They soon formed up in the street, and were told off, in parties +of twelve, to the houses in the outskirts of the village. Three in +each party were to keep watch, by turns, while the rest slept. An +English officer was to remain in charge on one side of the street, +and a French officer on the other. The rest went back to the +church, whose doors were now thrown open.</p> +<p>"I thank you most heartily, gentlemen," the French officer said, +to Terence and to the other British officers, "for the immense +service that you have rendered us. Had it not been for your aid, +our position would have been a very precarious one, before morning. +As it is, I think we need fear no further interruption. We are now +all armed; and as, with the wounded fit for work, we are still +three hundred strong, we should beat off any force likely to attack +us; though indeed, I have no belief that they will rally again. At +any rate, their losses have been extremely heavy; and the streets +were completely strewn with guns, so that I doubt whether half of +those who got away have carried their weapons with them."</p> +<p>The next morning, indeed, it was found that in all about 400 +muskets had been left behind. All that remained over, after arming +the British soldiers, were broken up and thrown down the wells. +Enough provisions were collected, among the houses, to furnish the +whole with three or four days' rations. The dead were buried in a +field near the village, those wounded too severely to march were +placed in the waggons; and the rest, who had now resumed their +uniforms, set out in high spirits. They were in the same order as +before, but the prisoners were told to carry their muskets at the +trail, while the French shouldered theirs; so that, viewed from a +distance, the British should appear unarmed.</p> +<p>"That has been a grand bit of excitement, Terence," Dick Ryan +said gleefully to his friend, as they marched along together. +"Those fellows certainly fight a good deal more pluckily than the +regular troops do. It was a capital idea to make all the men take +off their uniforms, for I don't suppose the Spaniards, even for a +moment, dreamt that we were among their assailants; at any rate, +they have no proof that we were.</p> +<p>"You really must get me as your adjutant, Terence. I see there +is very much more fun to be got out of your sort of fighting than +there is with the regiment. I am very pleased, now, that I stuck to +Portuguese as you advised me; though it was a great bore, at +first."</p> +<p>"I hope, Dicky, we sha'n't find, when we get back in the spring, +that the corps has been turned over to Beresford as part of his +regular command; for I must say that I quite appreciate the +advantage of independence.</p> +<p>"Well, this business ought to do us some good. No doubt the +major will report, in warm terms, the assistance we have rendered +him; and we shall get good treatment. Of course, some of their +prisons must be better than others and, if they will confine us in +some place near the frontier, instead of marching us half through +France, it will make it all the easier for us to get away. It is +not the getting out of prison that is the difficulty, but the +travelling through the country. I am getting on well with my +French, but there is no hope of being able to speak well enough to +pass as a native. As for you, you will have to keep your mouth shut +altogether, which will be mightily difficult."</p> +<p>"You will manage it somehow, Terence. I have no fear of you +getting me through the country. It is getting out of the country +that seems, to me, the difficulty."</p> +<p>"There is one thing, Dicky. We need be in no hurry about it. +There is little chance of fighting beginning for another six or +seven months and, directly we come to the end of our march, +wherever it may be, we must begin to pick up as much French as we +can, from our guards. In three or four months I ought, at least, to +be able to answer questions; not perhaps in good French, but in +French as good as, say, a Savoyard workman or musician might be +able to muster."</p> +<p>"Oh, Lor'!" Dick Ryan said, with a deep sigh, "you don't mean to +say that I must begin to work on another language, just after I +have been slaving, for the last six months, at Portuguese?"</p> +<p>"Not unless you like, Dicky. I can either start alone, or with +someone else who has some knowledge of French; but I am not going +to run the risk of being recaptured by taking anyone with me who +cares so little for liberty that he grudges three or four hours' +work, a day, to get up the means of making his escape."</p> +<p>"Oh, of course I shall learn," Ryan said pettishly. "You always +get your own way, Terence. It was so at Athlone: you first of all +began by asking my opinion, and then carried out things exactly as +you proposed, yourself. Learning the language is a horrid nuisance, +but I see that it has to be done."</p> +<p>"I expect, Dicky, you will have to make up as a woman. You see, +you are not much taller than a tallish woman."</p> +<p>"Well, that would be rather a lark," Ryan said; "only don't you +think I should be almost too good-looking for a French woman?"</p> +<p>"You might be that, Dicky. It is certainly a drawback. If I +could get hold of a good-sized monkey's skin, I might sew you up in +it."</p> +<p>"A bear skin would be better, I should say," Dick laughed; "but +I don't think anyone would think that it was a real bear. I saw a +chap with one once, at Athlone: no man could open his mouth as wide +as that beast did; and as to its tongue, it would be four times as +long as mine. No, I think the woman idea would be best; but I +should have to shave very close."</p> +<p>"Shave!" Terence repeated, scornfully. "Why, I could not see any +hair on your face with a magnifying glass. If that were the only +drawback, the matter could be arranged without difficulty."</p> +<p>Without farther adventure, they crossed the mountains and came +down to Bayonne. At each halting place where French troops were +stationed, the British prisoners were received with warm +hospitality by them, when they learned from their comrades that the +British had fought side by side with the French against the +guerillas, and had saved them from what might have been a very +serious disaster. The French shook hands with them warmly, patted +them on the shoulders, with many exclamations of "Braves garcons!" +and they were led away to cafes, and treated as the heroes of the +day, while the officers were entertained by those of the +garrison.</p> +<p>At Bayonne they and their escort parted on the most cordial +terms, the French exclaiming that it was a shame such brave fellows +should be held as prisoners; and that they ought to be released at +once, and sent back in a ship, with a flag of truce, to +Portugal.</p> +<p>The major, after handing over the soldiers to the prison +authorities, took Terence and the other British officers to the +headquarters of the governor of the town; and introduced them to +him, giving him a lively account of the fight with the guerillas, +and the manner in which the prisoners, armed only with clubs and +the muskets of the soldiers no longer able to use them, had made +common cause with the French and, joining them in the sortie, +defeated the Spanish with heavy loss. The governor expressed, +courteously, his thanks to the officers for the part they had +taken.</p> +<p>"I shall forward Major Marcy's report to headquarters, +gentlemen, and shall be happy to give you the liberty of the town +on parole. I have no doubt that, if no other good comes of your +adventure, you will be placed among an early list of officers to be +exchanged."</p> +<p>"I am very much obliged to you, general," Terence said, "but I +and Lieutenant Ryan would prefer not to give our parole. I don't +say we are likely to make our escape but, at any rate, we should +like to be able to take any opportunity, if we saw one."</p> +<p>The general smiled.</p> +<p>"Of course, it must be as you like, sir; but I think that you +are wrong. However, at any time, if you like to change your minds, +I will give instructions to the officer in command of the prison to +release you, immediately you give your parole not to leave the +town."</p> +<p>The matter had been talked over on the march, and the others now +expressed their willingness to give their parole. They had told +Terence they thought he was wrong, and that it would be impossible +to make an escape, as it would be necessary to traverse either the +whole of Spain or the whole of France before he could find any +means of rejoining the army; and that, before long, they might be +exchanged.</p> +<p>"I don't think there is a prospect of an early exchange," +Terence said. "There cannot have been many prisoners taken, during +this short campaign; and I don't suppose there will be any talk of +exchanges, for some time to come. I am particularly anxious to get +back again, if I possibly can, as I am afraid that my regiment will +be broken up; and that, unless I get back before the campaign +begins in spring, I shall not get the command again. So I mean to +get away, if I can. Anyhow, I would just as soon be in prison as +walking about the streets of Bayonne. So I have quite made up my +mind not to give my parole."</p> +<p>The officers all returned to the prison quarters assigned to +them; the difference being that those on parole could go in and out +as they chose, and could, at will, take their meals in the town; +while Terence and Ryan were placed together in a room, with a +sentry at the door, whose instructions were to accompany them +whenever they wished to go beyond the door and to walk in the +prison yard, or on the walls surrounding it.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch5" id="Ch5">Chapter 5</a>: An Escape.</h2> +<p>"Well, here we are, Terence," Ryan said cheerfully, as the door +of their cell closed behind them; "and now, what next?"</p> +<p>"The next thing is to look round, Dick. Other matters can wait. +One cannot form the remotest idea as to the possibilities of an +escape, until one has found out everything about the place. I +should say that it will be quite soon enough to discuss it, in +another couple of months.</p> +<p>"Now, as to the room; there is nothing to grumble at here. Two +truckle beds, not altogether luxurious in appearance but, at any +rate, a good deal softer than the ground on which we have been +sleeping, for months past. A couple of chairs, designed for use +rather than comfort; but which will do to sit on, while we take our +meals, and at other times we can use the beds as sofas. A +good-sized piece of carpet, a table, and what looks like a pudding +dish to wash in.</p> +<p>"Things might have been better, and they might have been a great +deal worse. As to our food, we must reserve comment until they +bring us some.</p> +<p>"Now, as to funds, I had only twenty-five crowns on me when I +was captured. You were rather better off, as you had ten pounds in +gold and eight crowns in silver. You see, had we given our parole +like the others, and gone in for luxurious feeding outside, our +stock would soon have given out; and money is an essential for +carrying out an escape, when that escape involves perhaps weeks of +travelling, and certainly disguises of different kinds. We have not +a penny too much for that, and must resolve to eschew all luxuries +except tobacco, and perhaps a bottle of wine on Sundays."</p> +<p>"Our windows, as you observe, are very strongly barred. They +look westward, but that range of buildings opposite prevents our +getting a view of the sea. One thing is evident, at once: that it +is no manner of use for us to think of cutting through those bars, +or dislodging them; for we should only, on lowering ourselves, be +in the courtyard, and no nearer escape than we were before we began +the job. It is a good thing to get at least one point off our +mind.</p> +<p>"Now, Dick, before we go further, let us make an agreement that +we will always talk in French. I know enough of it to be able to +assist you, and it will be an amusement, as well as a help, to +accustom ourselves to talk in it."</p> +<p>"All right," Ryan said, resignedly; "but I bargain that, for an +hour a day, we drop it altogether. It will be an awful nuisance; +and one must give one's tongue a rest, occasionally, by letting it +straighten itself out a bit."</p> +<p>The door now opened, and one of the warders entered with two +large bowls of broth, a fair-sized piece of the meat from which it +was made, a dish of vegetables, a large piece of bread, and a +bottle of wine.</p> +<p>"This is your supper, messieurs. In the morning you have coffee +and a piece of bread; at twelve o'clock a meal like this, with a +bottle of wine between you."</p> +<p>"Thank you," Terence said cheerfully, "that will do extremely +well. Are there any other British officers here?"</p> +<p>"None, except your comrades. There were some naval officers here +last week, but they have been sent into the interior. We do not +have many prisoners here. Those captured at sea, by warships or +privateers, are generally taken to Brest and, so far, we have not +had many of your nation sent from Spain. There are Spaniards, +sometimes, but they do not count. Those that are taken are +generally drafted into the Spanish corps of our army."</p> +<p>"Can we buy tobacco?" Terence asked.</p> +<p>"Certainly, monsieur. There is a canteen in the courtyard. It is +open from eight till nine o'clock in the morning, and from five to +six in the evening. But you are not allowed to get things in from +the town; but nevertheless--" and he smiled, "--as your comrades +are on parole, doubtless, should you need anything beyond what is +sold in the canteen, it may chance that they may bring you just the +things you want."</p> +<p>"Thank you. You had better get something from the canteen for +yourself," Terence said, handing him a crown.</p> +<p>"Thank you, monsieur. I have heard, from the soldiers who came +in with you, that you fought bravely with them against the Spanish +brigands; and they think that it is very hard that you and your +companion should be shut up here, after having proved such good +comrades. I have a cousin among them. He, like myself, is a native +of Bayonne and, should it be in his power, I am sure that he and +his comrades would do anything they could for Monsieur--as far, of +course, as their duty as French soldiers will allow them."</p> +<p>"Thanks. By the way, what is your name?"</p> +<p>"Jean Monier, monsieur."</p> +<p>"Well, Jean, will you please tell your cousin that I am obliged +to him for his goodwill? It was a pleasure to fight side by side +with such brave soldiers and, should an occasion offer, I will +gladly avail myself of his services. The detachment is not going +farther, is it?"</p> +<p>"No, monsieur. They will remain here for perhaps two or three +months, till the good French air has invigorated them; then they +will join some column marching south again. There is nothing more +that you will want tonight, monsieur?"</p> +<p>"No, thank you, Jean. Good evening!"</p> +<p>"Good evening, good sleep!" and the warder retired.</p> +<p>"What is all that jabber about, Terence?"</p> +<p>"Very satisfactory jabber, and jabber that is likely to lead to +a very good result. A cousin of his is one of the guard that came +down with us. He has told this warder about our fight, and asked +him to say that he and his comrades were very angry at our being +shut up here; and as much as said that they would aid us to escape, +if it was in their power, so we may consider that our first +difficulty is as good as arranged. No doubt in a short time they +will be put on regular garrison duty, and will take their turn in +furnishing prison guards. This warder is evidently ready to do +anything he can, so that we may look upon our escape from prison as +a matter of certainty. I don't suppose that, in any case, the guard +is a very vigilant one; for they would not expect that prisoners of +war here would try to escape. At Verdun, and other prisons within a +few days' journey of the frontier, it would be different."</p> +<p>"Well, that is good news, Terence, though I see myself that our +difficulties will really begin only when we get out. There is no +doubt that the fight with the guerillas was a lucky thing for us. I +would not have missed it for anything, for I must say there was +much more excitement in it than in a battle, at least as far as my +experience of a battle goes. At Talavera we had nothing to do but +stick up on the top of a hill, watch the French columns climbing +up, and then give them a volley or two and roll them down the hill +again; and between times stand to be shelled by Victor's batteries +on the opposite hill. I cannot see that there is any fun about +that. This fight, too, has turned out a very good thing for us. I +expect we should not have been so well treated if it had not been +for it, and the fact that some of these French soldiers are ready +to give us a helping hand is first rate.</p> +<p>"You see, it is all your luck, Terence. There never was such a +fellow for luck as you are."</p> +<p>"There is no doubt about that," Terence agreed. "Now, Dick, you +must really break into French."</p> +<p>"Tomorrow morning will be time enough for that," Ryan said, in a +tone of determination. "I want to talk now, really talk; and I +can't do that in French, especially after what you have just told +me. By the way, I don't see, myself, why we should make this +journey through France. Why not try to get a boat, and land +somewhere on the coast of Spain?"</p> +<p>"I have been thinking of that, Dick; but it seemed to me, +before, altogether too difficult. Still, if we can get help from +outside, I don't know why we should not be able to manage it. We +should have to go some distance along the Spanish coast, for there +are sure to be French garrisons at Bilbao and Santander; but beyond +that I should think we might land at any little village. Galicia +must certainly have been evacuated by the French, for we know that +Ney's corps were down in the Tagus valley; and I should think that +they cannot have any great force in the Asturias. The worst of it +is, we have not got enough money to buy a boat; and if we had, the +soldiers could hardly bargain with a fisherman for one. Of course, +if we were free we might arrange with a man to go with us in his +boat, and pay him so much for its hire, for three or four +days."</p> +<p>"We might make our way down the river, and steal one, +Terence."</p> +<p>"Yes, we might do that, but it would be a heavy loss to some +poor fellow. Well, I shall look forward to the morning, when we can +go out and see all about the prison arrangements."</p> +<p>"Then you have given up the idea of waiting for two months +before you do anything, Terence?" Ryan remarked.</p> +<p>"Certainly. You see, these French convalescents may be marched +back again, in another month's time and, at present, our plans must +be formed upon the supposition that they are ready to help us. It +would never do to throw away such an opportunity as that. It would +be little short of madness to try and get out, unless we had +disguises of some sort. My staff officer's uniform, or your +scarlet, would lead to our arrest at the first village we came +to.</p> +<p>"Besides, before this news one was willing to wait contentedly, +for a time, till some good opportunity presented itself. Now that +we have such an unexpected offer of assistance, the sooner we get +out of the place the better."</p> +<p>The next morning they went out into the courtyard of the prison. +The soldiers who had been captured with them were walking about in +groups; but the sentry who accompanied the two British officers led +them through these, and took them up to the top of the wall +surrounding the prison.</p> +<p>"Messieurs," he said, "when the others are shut up you can go +where you please, but my orders are that you are not to communicate +with your soldiers."</p> +<p>He then fell back some distance, and left them free to wander +about on the wall.</p> +<p>From this point they had a view over the city. Bayonne was a +strongly fortified place, standing on the junction of the Nive and +Adour, and on the south side of the latter river, two miles from +its mouth. The Nive ran through the town, and its waters supplied +the ditches of the encircling wall and bastions. The prison was +situated on the Nive, at some three or four hundred yards from the +spot where it entered the Adour.</p> +<p>"I should say this quite decides it," Terence said, when they +had made the circuit of the walls, upon which sentries were placed +at short intervals. "Once out of the town the river would be open +to us, but it would be next to impossible to pass those semicircles +of fortifications on both sides of the town. You can see the masts +of the craft lying at the quays and, though I should not like to +rob a fisherman of his boat; I should not feel the smallest scruple +in taking a ship's boat, which would be, comparatively, a small +loss to the owner. The worst of it would be that, directly we were +found to be missing, and the owner of the boat reported its loss, +they might send out some of their gunboats in search of us, and we +should very soon be overtaken."</p> +<p>Discipline was not very strict in the French army, except when +in an enemy's country; and the sentries, knowing well that there +was really no occasion for watchfulness, answered willingly the +questions that Terence asked them as to the names of places within +sight.</p> +<p>"It must be rather tedious work for you, on the wall here," +Terence said to one whose post was shielded by a building close by, +from observation from below.</p> +<p>"Very dull," the soldier said, "and we shall be glad enough when +we are relieved and marched into Spain. Here we are doing no good. +There is no chance whatever of the prisoners attempting an escape, +for if they did get out of here they could get no further; but they +say that we shall not stop here long, and we shall be heartily glad +when the order comes. They say the convalescents who came in +yesterday will take over the prison duties next week."</p> +<p>Terence's motive for speaking to the men was to discover whether +they were forbidden to talk, and it was satisfactory to find that, +if there was such a rule, it was by no means strictly observed. +Leaning on the parapet, he and Ryan stood for some time looking at +the sea. There were many fishing boats dotting its surface, and the +tapering masts of two schooners could be seen near the mouth of the +river.</p> +<p>"I have no doubt that they are privateers," Terence said. "They +have just the appearance of that fellow we captured on the way out. +One would not have much chance of getting far in a boat, with those +fellows after us.</p> +<p>"It seems to me that, if it could possibly be managed, our +safest plan would be to lie quiet in the town for a week or so, +after we got out; then it would be comparatively safe to get hold +of a boat and make off in it."</p> +<p>"Yes, if that could be managed, it certainly would be the safest +plan. If we changed our minds about making off by sea, we might +then be able to pass out through the fortifications, without +question. Of course, they would be vigilant for a short time after +we were missing; but I suppose that, at ordinary times, the country +people would go in and out unquestioned, just as in any other town +for, with no enemy nearer than Portugal, there could be no occasion +whatever for watchfulness."</p> +<p>Terence and his companion had seen nothing of their friends on +parole, as these, they found, although lodged in prison for their +own convenience, were not permitted to have any communication with +the other prisoners. Ten days after they arrived at Bayonne, the +warder, who had, since he first spoke to them, said nothing beyond +the usual salutations, remarked carelessly:</p> +<p>"The soldiers who came down with you took up the prison duties +last night. My cousin told me to say that you will know him, and +four or five of his comrades of the 72nd of the line, all of whom +are thoroughly in agreement with him, by their saying as you pass +them:</p> +<p>"'The morning is fair, Colonel.'</p> +<p>"To any of them you can speak, when you find an opportunity of +doing so, unobserved."</p> +<p>"Thank you; but will it not be safer for them were you to carry +my messages?"</p> +<p>"No; I cannot do that," the warder said. "I think that it is +quite right that my cousin, and his comrades, should do anything in +their power to aid those who stood by them when attacked; but I +wish to know nothing about it. It must be between you and them, for +I must be able to swear that I had no hand in the matter, and that +I locked you up safely, at night."</p> +<p>"You are quite right, Jean. It is much the best plan that it +should be so. I certainly should not, myself, like to know that in +making my escape I might endanger the life of one who had acted +simply from kindness of heart; and trust that no suspicion, +whatever, will fall upon you. I thank you most heartily for having +brought me the message from your cousin, and for the goodwill that +you have shown us."</p> +<p>When Terence and Ryan went out as usual, after breakfast, all +the sentries they passed saluted, as if to one of their own +officers. They of course returned the salute, and made a cheery +remark to each, such as "Rather a change, this, from our work up in +the hills, lad," to which each gave some short and respectful +answer, three of them prefacing it with the words: "The morning is +fair, mon Colonel ".</p> +<p>Two of these had the number of their regiment on their shako. +The other, who had a deep and scarcely-healed scar over the ear, +only wore a forage cap, having evidently lost his shako when +wounded.</p> +<p>"What do you mean by saluting a prisoner," a French staff +officer, when he was passing, angrily asked an old soldier. "You +have been long enough in the service, surely, to know that +prisoners are not saluted."</p> +<p>The soldier stood at attention.</p> +<p>"Monsieur le Capitaine," he said, "I am not saluting a prisoner. +I am saluting a brave officer, whose orders I have obeyed in a hard +fight, and to whom I and my comrades probably owed our lives. A +mark of respect is due to a brave man, whether a prisoner of war or +not."</p> +<p>The officer passed on without answering and, arriving at +headquarters, reported the circumstances to the general.</p> +<p>"I am not surprised, Captain Espel," the latter replied, with a +slight smile. "A French soldier knows how to respect bravery, and +in this case there is little doubt that, but for the assistance of +their prisoners, it would have gone very hard with that detachment. +That young officer who, strangely enough, is a colonel, was a +prisoner when he fought side by side with these men; and it is but +natural that they scarcely regard him as one, now. He has refused +to give his parole, and I am afraid he means to try to make his +escape. I am sorry for, should he do so, he is sure to be captured +again."</p> +<p>The third one of the 72nd men, the one with a forage cap, +chanced to be posted at the point of the wall that was not +overlooked and, after he had repeated the formula agreed upon, +Terence said to him:</p> +<p>"You are one of those lads who sent me a message that you would +assist me, if you could."</p> +<p>"That is so, mon Colonel. You assisted us when we were somewhat +hotly pressed, and tis but good comradeship to repay such a +service, if one can. We have been thinking it over and, although it +would not be difficult for you to escape from here, we do not see +how you are to be got out of the town."</p> +<p>"That is the difficulty I see myself," Terence replied. "We +could not hope to pass through the circle of fortifications and, +were we to take a boat and make off, we should be pursued and +recaptured, to a certainty; for of course, as soon as our escape +was known, there would be a hot search made for us.</p> +<p>"There are two things needed. The first is disguises. The second +is a shelter, until the search for us slackens, after which it +would be comparatively easy for us to make off."</p> +<p>"What sort of disguises would you want, monsieur?"</p> +<p>"If we go by land, peasant dresses; if by water, those of +fishermen. We have money, which I can give you to purchase +these."</p> +<p>"That we could do for you, monsieur, but the hiding place is +more difficult. However, that we will see about. I am a native +here, and have of course many friends and acquaintances in the +town. When we have made our plans I will let you know. I will +manage that, when it is my turn for duty, I will always be posted +here; and then I can tell you what is arranged, and give you +whatever is necessary to aid you to make your escape. My cousin, +Jean Monier, will shut his eyes; but he will not do anything +himself, and I think that he is right, for of course he will be the +first to be suspected.</p> +<p>"As for us, it will be no matter. Everyone knows how you stood +by us, and they will guess that some of us have had a hand in it; +but they will never find out which of us was chiefly concerned. I +expect that soon we shall all be taken off this prison duty, for +which we shall not be sorry, and sent back to Spain with the first +detachment that comes along; but after all, one is not so badly off +in Spain, and certainly Madrid is a good deal more lively than +Bayonne."</p> +<p>"I suppose," Terence said, nodding towards their guard, who was +standing a few paces away gazing over the country, "he knows +nothing about this."</p> +<p>"No, monsieur, we have kept it to just the men of our own +regiment; but all feel the same about your being kept a prisoner, +and there is no fear of his telling anyone that you spoke to one +man more than another, when it is found out that you have escaped. +Still, it might be as well that you should not speak to me again, +until I tell you that it is a fine morning; for although all our +own men can be trusted, if any of the regular prison warders was to +notice anything he would not be slow in mentioning it, in hope of +getting promotion."</p> +<p>Accordingly Terence made a point of only passing along that part +of the wall once a day, and merely saying a word to the soldier, as +he did to others, on the occasions when he was on duty.</p> +<p>Ten days later the man replied to his salutation by remarking +that it was a "fair day." It happened that the man told off to +guard them on this occasion was another of the 72nd; there was +therefore nothing to be feared from him.</p> +<p>"I have arranged the matter, monsieur," the soldier said. "My +sister's husband, Jules Varlin, will shelter you. He is a +fisherman, and you can be safely hidden in the loft where he keeps +his nets and gear. He is an honest fellow, and my sister has talked +him over into lending his aid so far and, although he has not +promised it yet, I think we shall get him to go down the river with +you, so as to reply if you are challenged. You can put him ashore a +mile or two along the coast.</p> +<p>"Now as to the escape, monsieur. Here is a sharp saw. With it +you can cut round the lock of your door. There are two outside +bolts, whose position I dare say you have noticed; by cutting a +hole close to each of them, you can get your hand through and draw +them. Here is a short-handled augur, to make a hole for the saw to +go through.</p> +<p>"There are four sentries at night, in the courtyard. We shall +manage to get all our men on duty, tomorrow evening. Our sergeant +is a good fellow and, if he guesses anything, will hold his tongue; +for I have heard him say, more than once, that it is monstrous that +you should be kept a prisoner.</p> +<p>"Therefore you need not be afraid of them. They will take care +to keep their eyes shut. I shall be on sentry duty here, and will +get the disguises up, and a rope. When you have got down I shall +let the rope drop, and you will carry it off and take it away with +you; thus there will be no evidence where you descended.</p> +<p>"Here are two sharp files, with which you can cut through the +bars of your window, and remove some of them; then it will not be +known whether you escaped that way, or down the stairs; and the men +on sentry in the courtyard at the bottom cannot be blamed because, +for aught the governor will know, you may have gone out through +this window into the other courtyard, and got over the wall on that +side; so they would have no proof as to which set of men were +negligent.</p> +<p>"No doubt we shall all be talked to, and perhaps kept in the +guardroom a few days, but that won't hurt us; and soldiers are +scarce enough, so they will hardly keep ten or twelve men long from +duty. There are not enough in the town, now, to furnish all the +guards properly; so you need not worry about us.</p> +<p>"I will give you instructions how to find my sister's house, +tomorrow night. You must not escape until you hear the bell strike +midnight. Our party will relieve guard at that hour. You see, we +have four hours on duty and, as you may have gone either on the +first watch, the second, or the third, they will not be able to +pitch on us more than on the others; so that, in fact, the blame +will be divided between forty of us. You will, of course, put on +your disguises over your uniforms, and destroy your clothes, when +you get to Jules' house."</p> +<p>"I thank you very warmly, my good fellow, for running all this +risk for me. Here are two hundred francs to pay for the +disguises."</p> +<p>"That will be more than enough," the soldier said. "Jules put it +down at a hundred and fifty."</p> +<p>"Things may cost more than he expects. At any rate, please hand +these to him. I can arrange matters with him when I see him.</p> +<p>"Then at about a quarter past twelve we will sally out. We will +walk on now, lest any of the warders should happen to notice that +we have been a long time on this part of the wall."</p> +<p>Ryan had understood but little of what was happening and, when +Terence told him what had been arranged, he exclaimed:</p> +<p>"Well, after this, Terence, I will never say a word against a +Frenchman. Here are these soldiers going to run a lot of risk, and +a certainty of getting into a row for us, merely because we did the +best we could against those wretched Spaniards; and without getting +any reward whatever, for they must know that prisoners are not +likely to have any money to spare about them."</p> +<p>"Quite so, Ryan; and what is more, if I had a hundred pounds in +my pocket, I would not offer them a penny; for certainly they would +take it as an insult if I did so. They would feel that it would be +a sort of bribe and, though they are ready to help us as comrades, +I am sure they would not do it for money. I sincerely hope they +won't get into any serious row. As he said, authorities won't be +able to tell which party was on guard at the time we went, and they +could hardly put the whole of them under arrest--at least, not keep +them under arrest. No doubt there will be a close search in the +town for us, but there is little fear of our being discovered.</p> +<p>"Our dangers won't begin until we are fairly afloat. I know +nothing about sailing. I have rowed a boat many a time, at Athlone; +but as for sailing, I have never once tried it."</p> +<p>"Nor have I," Ryan said. "But I suppose there is no difficulty +about it. You put up the sail, and you take hold of the rope at the +corner, and off you go."</p> +<p>"It sounds all right, Dicky, and I dare say we shall manage to +get along, somehow; but these things are not half as easy as they +look. Now we had better have four or five hours' sleep this +afternoon, for I expect it will take us the best part of the night +to file through the bars. You must not cut quite through them, but +just leave them so that we can finish them off in a short time, +tomorrow night."</p> +<p>"But the warder might notice them?"</p> +<p>"He is not likely to look very sharply, Dicky; but at the same +time, it is just as well not to put too great a strain on his +loyalty. We will keep a piece of bread over from our supper, work +it up into a sort of paste, fill up any cuts we make, and rub it +over with dirt till it well matches the bars. Certainly they have +planned the affair capitally, so as to throw doubt as to which way +we descended, and so divide the blame between as many of the +sentries as possible."</p> +<p>It took four hours' work, that night, to get through the bars. +They were most careful not to let any of the filings fall outside +for, had any of them dropped into the courtyard below, they might +well catch the eye of a warder; and in that case an examination of +all the windows of the rooms above would certainly be made, at +once. Before the warder's visit the next morning, the holes had +been filled up with bread worked into a putty and smeared over with +dust; which so nearly matched the bars that it could not be +observed, except by a careful examination.</p> +<p>The next day they abstained from saying more than a passing word +to any of the French soldiers. They waited, after being locked up +for the night, for two or three hours; and then began their work at +the door. The saw was a very narrow one and, when they had made a +hole with the augur, they found no difficulty in cutting the wood; +therefore they thought it was well to leave that for the last +thing, and so betook themselves to their files, and soon removed +enough of the bars to enable a man to crawl through. Then they +returned to the door, and had cut round the lock, and made holes +through which they could pass their hands to draw back the bolts, a +short time before the clock struck twelve.</p> +<p>Then they went to the window, and listened. They heard the bells +strike midnight, and then a stir below, as the sentries were +relieved. Waiting for a few minutes, until all had become quiet +again, they drew back the bolts, took off their shoes, and went +noiselessly down the stairs.</p> +<p>The night was very dark and, although they could hear the tread +of the sentries in the courtyard, they could not make out their +figures. They crossed the yard, keeping as far as possible from the +sentries. They had no doubt that all would happen as arranged; but +there was, of course, the possibility that at the last moment some +change might have been made; and it was, in any case, as well that +the men there should be able to declare, honestly, that they had +seen no one.</p> +<a id="PicC" name="PicC"></a> +<center><img src="images/c.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Stooping so that their figures should not show against the sky." /> +</center> +<p>They were glad when they reached the archway leading to the +stairs that led to the top of the wall. Mounting, they kept along +by the parapet, stooping so that their figures should not show +against the sky for, dark as it was below, they might have been +noticed had they not done so. Presently they saw the sentry.</p> +<p>"Diable, messieurs!" he said in a low tone, as they came up to +him, "you gave me a start. I was expecting you, but I did not hear +your footsteps nor see you and, had you been enemies, you might +very well have seized and disarmed me before I could give the +alarm.</p> +<p>"Well, here are your clothes."</p> +<p>They soon pulled the blue canvas leggings over their breeches, +and over these the high boots, in which their feet felt lost. A +rough blouse and a fisherman's oilskin cap completed the disguise. +They put their boots into the capacious pockets in the blouses, and +were then ready to descend. They had left their shakos in their +cell when they started.</p> +<p>While they had been putting on their clothes, the sentry had +fastened the rope and lowered it down.</p> +<p>"We are ready now, Jacques," Terence said. "Goodbye, my good +friend. We shall never forget the kindness that you have shown us, +and shall remember with gratitude, all our lives, how a party of +French soldiers were ready to show themselves good comrades to men +who had fought by their sides, even though the two nations were at +war with each other. We shall always feel a kindness towards the +French uniform, in future; and if you or any of your comrades of +the 72nd should chance to fall into British hands, and you can send +word to me or to Mr. Ryan, I can promise you that we will do all we +can to have you released at once and sent back, or to aid you in +any other way."</p> +<p>"We have done but our duty to brave comrades," the soldier +said.</p> +<p>"Now, as to where to find my cousin. You will go down that +street below, and take the third turning on the right. That will +lead you down to the wharves. Keep along by the houses facing them +until you come to the fourth turning. It is a narrow lane, and +there is a cabaret at each corner of it. My cousin's house is the +twelfth on the left-hand side. He will be standing at the door. You +will say to him as you pass, 'It is a dark night,' and he will then +let you in.</p> +<p>"Don't walk as if you were in a hurry: fishermen never do that. +It is not likely that you will meet anyone, but if you do, and he +sees two fishermen hurrying, it will strike him as singular; and +when there came news of two prisoners having escaped, he might +mention the matter, which might lead to a search in the right +quarter."</p> +<p>"Will you go first, Ryan, or shall I?" Terence said.</p> +<p>"Just as you like."</p> +<p>"Well, then, you may as well go, as then I can talk with this +good fellow till it is my turn."</p> +<p>Ryan shook the soldier's hand heartily, took hold of the rope, +slung himself over the parapet, and began the descent. Terence and +the soldier leaned over, and watched him until they could no longer +make out the figure with certainty. As soon as the tension on the +rope slackened, Terence grasped Jacques' hand, said a few more +words of thanks, and then followed his companion. As soon as he +reached the ground he shook the rope and, a minute later, it fell +on the ground beside him.</p> +<p>He coiled it up, and then they started down the street. +Following the instructions that they had received, in ten minutes +they reached the end of the lane.</p> +<p>"We were to throw away the rope, were we not?" Ryan said.</p> +<p>"Yes, but now we are here, there can be no use in our doing so. +If a length of rope were found lying in the road, people would +wonder who had thrown it away; besides, it is a good stout piece of +new rope, and may be of use to the fisherman."</p> +<p>Counting the doors carefully as they went along, they came to +the twelfth where, before they reached it, the red glow from a pipe +showed that a man was standing outside.</p> +<p>"It is a dark night, mate," Terence said in a low tone, as he +came up to him.</p> +<p>"That is right," the man replied; "come in."</p> +<p>He stood aside as they entered, closed the door behind them, and +then lifted a piece of old canvas thrown over a lighted +lantern.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch6" id="Ch6">Chapter 6</a>: Afloat.</h2> +<p>Jules Varlin held the lantern above his head, and took a good +look at his visitors.</p> +<p>"You will pass very well for young fishermen, messieurs," he +said, "when you have dirtied your faces and hands a bit, and rubbed +your hair the wrong way, all over your head. Well, come in here. My +wife is waiting up to welcome you. It is her doing that you are +here. I should not have agreed, but what can one do when a woman +once sets her mind upon a thing?"</p> +<p>He opened a door. A woman rose from her seat. She was some years +younger than her husband.</p> +<p>"Welcome, messieurs," she said. "We are pleased, indeed, to be +able to return the kindness you showed to my brother."</p> +<p>The fisherman grunted.</p> +<p>"No, Jules," she said, "I won't have you say that you haven't +gone willingly into this. You pretended not to, but I know very +well that it was only because you like to be coaxed, and that you +would have done it for Jacques' sake."</p> +<p>"Jacques is a good fellow," her husband replied, "and I say +nothing against him; but I don't know that I should have consented, +if it had not been for you and your bothering me."</p> +<p>"Don't you believe him, monsieur. Jules has a good heart, though +he likes pretending that he is a bear.</p> +<p>"Now, monsieur, I have some coffee ready for you."</p> +<p>"I need not say, madam," Terence said, "how truly thankful we +both are for your and your husband's kindness, shown to us +strangers; and I sincerely hope that you will have no cause to +regret it. You may be sure of one thing: that if we are recaptured, +we shall never say how our escape was effected, nor where we were +sheltered afterwards; and if, after the war is over, we can find an +opportunity of showing how grateful we are for your kindness, we +shall not miss the chance."</p> +<p>"We are but paying the service you rendered to Jacques, +monsieur. He tells me that, if it had not been for the aid the +British prisoners gave them, that probably those Spanish bandits +would have captured the church during the night; and we know that +they never show mercy to prisoners."</p> +<p>The coffee was placed on the table and, after drinking it, the +fisherman led them to a low shed in the yard.</p> +<p>"We could have done better for you," he said apologetically, +"but it is likely that they may begin a search for you, early in +the morning. This yard can be seen from many houses round about, so +that, were you to sleep upstairs, you might be noticed entering +here in the morning; and it is better to run no risks. We have +piled the nets on the top of other things. You will find two +blankets for covering yourselves there. In the morning I will come +in and shift things, so as to hide you up snugly."</p> +<p>"We shall do just as well on the nets as if we were in bed," +Terence laughed. "We are pretty well accustomed to sleep on the +hard ground."</p> +<p>"I think we are going to have some bad weather," the man +remarked, as they settled themselves on the nets. "I hope it will +be so, for then none of the boats will put out; and there will be +no comments on my staying at home, instead of going out as +usual.</p> +<p>"And now, good night, and good sleep to you!"</p> +<p>"He is an honest-looking fellow," Terence said, when he had gone +out, "and I have no doubt what his wife says of him is true; but it +is not surprising that he held back at first. It is not everyone +that is prepared to run the risk of heavy punishment for the sake +of his wife's relations.</p> +<p>"This is not by any means bad; these nets make a very +comfortable bed."</p> +<p>The next morning, at daybreak, the fisherman came in with a can +containing hot coffee, two great slices of bread, and tin cups.</p> +<p>"Now, messieurs, when you have drank that I will stow you away. +We shifted most of the things yesterday, so as to make as +comfortable a bed for you as may be."</p> +<p>The nets were pulled off; and a mass of sails, ropes, and other +gear appeared underneath. One of the sails in the corner was pulled +away, and showed a vacant space, some six feet long and four feet +wide, extending down to the ground, which was covered by old +nets.</p> +<p>"Now, messieurs, if you will get down there, I shall pile a +couple of sacks over and throw the nets on the top, and there is no +fear of your being disturbed. I will bring your meals in to you, +and let you know what is doing in the town; but I shall not come in +oftener than I can help. I shall leave the doors open, as +usual."</p> +<p>They took their places in the hole, and the fisherman piled +sails and nets over the opening. There was no occasion to leave any +apertures for air, for the shed was roughly built, and there were +plenty of openings between the planks of which it was constructed. +They had, before he came in, divested themselves of their uniforms; +and these the fisherman put into a kit bag and carried indoors; +where his wife at once proceeded to cut them up, and thrust the +pieces into the fire.</p> +<p>"It is a pity," she said regretfully, "but it would never do to +leave them about. Think what a waistcoat I could have made for you, +Jules, out of this scarlet cloth. With the gold buttons it would +have been superb, and it would have been the envy of the quarter; +but it would never do."</p> +<p>"I should think not, Marie. Burn the clothes up, and give me the +buttons and gold lace. I will put them in a bag with some stones, +and drop them into the river. The sooner we get rid of them, the +better."</p> +<p>As soon as the things were put into a bag, he went out with with +them. The wind was blowing strongly and, as he had predicted the +night before, the clouds were flying fast, and there were many +signs of dirty weather. He returned a couple of hours later.</p> +<p>"There is quite an excitement in the town, Marie," he said. +"Everyone is talking about it. Two rascally English prisoners have +escaped, and the soldiers say that they must be somewhere in the +town, for that they could never have passed through the lines. Some +gendarmes have been along the quays, inquiring if a boat has been +missed during the night; but they all seem to be safe. Written +notices have been stuck up warning everyone, on pain of the +severest punishment, not to give shelter to two young men, in +whatever guise they may present themselves. The gendarmes say that +the military authorities are convinced that they must have received +assistance from without."</p> +<p>For the next three days, indeed, an active search was kept up. +Every house was visited by the gendarmes but, as there was no +reason for suspecting one person more than another, there was no +absolute search made of the houses; which indeed, in so large a +town as Bayonne, would have been almost impossible to carry out +effectually.</p> +<p>The fisherman reported each day what was going on.</p> +<p>"The soldiers are giving it up," he said, at the end of the +third day. "I saw Jacques today for the first time. He tells me +there was a tremendous row when your escape was discovered. The +warder, and every soldier who had been on duty that night, were +arrested and questioned. The warder was the one first suspected, on +the ground that you must have had assistance from without. He said +that if you had, he knew nothing about it; and that, as you knew +all the soldiers of the prison guard, and as he had heard many of +them say it was very hard, after fighting as you did on their +behalf, that you should be kept prisoner, any of them might have +furnished you with tools for cutting the door and filing the bars. +This was so clear that he was released at once. The soldiers were +kept for two days under arrest. This morning the governor himself +came down to the prison, and the men under arrest were drawn up. He +spoke to them very sharply, to begin with.</p> +<p>"'One or more of you is assuredly concerned in this matter. A +breach of trust of this kind is punishable with death.'</p> +<p>"Then he stopped, and looked fiercely up and down the line, and +went on in a different tone:</p> +<p>"'At the same time, I admit that some allowance is to be made +for the crime, and I can understand that as soldiers you felt +sympathy with soldiers who, although prisoners at the time, did not +hesitate to cast in their lot with you, and to fight side by side +with you. Still, a soldier should never allow private sentiments to +interfere with his duty. I myself should have been glad, when you +arrived here and I heard of what had happened, to have been able to +place these British officers and soldiers in a ship, and to have +sent them back to their own country; but that would have been a +breach of my duty, and I was forced to detain them here as +prisoners. Of course, if I could find out which among you have been +concerned in this affair, it would be my duty to punish them--for +there must have been more than one--severely. However, although I +have done my best to discover this, I am not sorry, men, that I +have been unable to do so; for although these men may have failed +in their duties as soldiers, they have shown themselves +true-hearted fellows to run that risk--not, I am sure, from any +thought of reward, but to help those who had helped them.</p> +<p>"'You can all return to your duty, and I hope that you will, in +future, remember that duty is the first thing with a soldier, and +that he should allow no other feeling to interfere with it.'</p> +<p>"Jacques and his comrades are all satisfied that, although the +general felt it was his duty to reprimand them, he was at heart by +no means sorry that you had got off.</p> +<p>"The gendarmes are still making inquiries, but of course they +have learned nothing. Nobody was about on the wharves at that time +of night, and I don't think that they will trouble themselves much +longer about it. They will come to believe that you must, somehow, +have managed to get through the line of fortifications, and that +you will be caught trying to make your way across the country.</p> +<p>"In another three or four days it will be quite safe for you to +go down the river. For the first two days every boat that went down +was stopped and examined, and some of the vessels were searched by +a gunboat, and the hatches taken off; but I hear that no boats have +been stopped today, so I fancy you will soon be able to go down +without fear."</p> +<p>Although at night Terence and Ryan were able to emerge from +their place of concealment, and walk up and down the little yard +for two or three hours, they were heartily glad when, a week after +their confinement, Jules told them that he thought they might start +at daybreak, the next morning.</p> +<p>"Now, messieurs, if you will tell me what you want, I will buy +the things for you."</p> +<p>They had already made out a list. It consisted of a nine-gallon +breaker for water, a dozen bottles of cheap wine, thirty pounds of +biscuits, and fifteen pounds of salt meat, which Jules's wife was +to cook. They calculated that this would be sufficient to last +them, easily, until they had passed along the Spanish coast to a +point well beyond the towns garrisoned by the French, if not to +Corunna itself.</p> +<p>"But how about the boat?" Terence asked, after all the other +arrangements had been decided upon. "As I told you, we don't wish +to take a boat belonging to anyone who would feel its loss; and +therefore it must be a ship's boat, and not one of the fishermen's. +If we had money to pay for it, it would be another matter; but we +have scarcely enough now to maintain us on our way through Spain, +and there are no means of sending money here when we rejoin our +army."</p> +<p>"I understand that, monsieur; and I have been along the quay +this morning taking a look at the boats. There are at least a dozen +we could choose from; I mean ships' boats. Of course, many of the +craft keep their boats hauled up at the davits or on deck, but most +of them keep one in the water, so that they can row off to another +ship or to the stairs. Some simply leave them in the water, because +they are too lazy to hoist them up. That is the case, I think, with +one boat that belongs to a vessel that came in, four days since, +from the West Indies. It's a good-sized ship's dinghy, such as is +used for running out warps, or putting a sailor ashore to bring off +anything required. The other boats are better suited for a voyage, +but they are for the most part too large and heavy to be rowed by +two oars and, moreover, they have not a mast and sail on board, as +this has. Therefore that is the one that I fixed my eye on.</p> +<p>"The ship is lying alongside, and there is not another craft +outside her. The boat is fastened to her bowsprit, and I can take +off my boots and get on board and drop into her, without +difficulty; and push her along to the foot of some stairs which are +but ten yards away. Of course, we will have the water and food and +that bundle of old nets ready, at the top of the stairs, and we can +be out into the stream five minutes after I have cut her loose. We +must start just before daylight is breaking, so as to be off before +the fishermen put out for, if any of these were about, they would +at once notice that I have not got my own boat. At the same time I +don't want to be far ahead of them, or to pass the gunboats at the +mouth of the river in the dark, for that would look +suspicious."</p> +<p>"And now, Jules, about yourself. Of course, I know well that no +money could repay you for the kindness you have shown us, and your +risking so much for strangers; and you know that we have not with +us the means of making any return, whatever, for your +services."</p> +<p>"I don't want any return, monsieur," the fisherman said. "I went +into the matter a good deal against my will, because my wife had +set her mind upon it; but since you came here I have got to have +just as much interest in the matter as she has. I would not take a +sou from you, now; but if, some day, when these wars are over, you +will send a letter to Marie with some little present to her, just +to show her that you have not forgotten us, it would be a great +pleasure to us."</p> +<p>"That I will certainly do, Jules. It may be some time before +there will be an opportunity of doing it, but you may be sure that +we shall not forget you and your wife, or cease to be grateful for +your kindnesses; and that, directly peace is made, or there is a +chance in any other way of sending a letter to you, we will do +so."</p> +<p>That evening Jacques paid a visit to his sister. He had +abstained from doing so before, because he thought that the +soldiers who were suspected of being concerned in the escape might +all be watched; and that if any of them were seen to enter a house, +a visit might be paid to it by the gendarmes. He did not come until +it was quite dark, and made a long detour in the town before +venturing to approach it. Before he entered the lane he took good +care that no one was in sight.</p> +<p>When, after chatting for an hour, he rose to leave, Terence told +him that when he wrote to his sister he should inclose a letter to +him; as it would be impossible to write to him direct, for there +would be no saying where he might be stationed. He begged him to +convey the heartiest thanks of himself and Ryan to his comrades for +the share they had taken in the matter.</p> +<p>On saying good night, Terence insisted on Marie accepting, as a +parting gift, his watch and chain. These were handsome ones, and of +French manufacture, Terence having bought them from a soldier who +had taken them from the body of a French officer, killed during +Soult's retreat from Portugal. They could, therefore, be shown by +her to her friends without exciting any suspicion that they had +been obtained from an English source. Marie accepted them very +unwillingly, and only after Terence declaring that he should feel +very grieved if she would not take the one present he was capable +of making.</p> +<p>"Besides," he added, "no one can tell what fortune may bring +about. Your husband might lose his boat, or have a long illness; +and it is well to have something that you can part with, without +discomfort, in such a time of need."</p> +<p>Jules, although desiring no pay for his services and risks, was +very much gratified at the present.</p> +<p>"I for my part do not say no, monsieur," he said. "What you say +is right. We are careful people, and I have laid by a little money; +but as you say, one cannot tell what may happen. And if the weather +were bad and there was a risk of never getting back home again, it +would be a consolation to me to know that, in addition to the few +hundred francs we have laid by since we were married, two years +ago, there is something that would bring Marie, I should say, seven +or eight hundred francs more, at least. That would enable her to +set up a shop or laundry, and to earn her own living. I thank you +from my heart, monsieur, for her and for myself."</p> +<p>Terence and Ryan slept as soundly as usual until aroused by +Jules. Then they put on their sea boots again, loaded themselves +with the nets and the bags with the provisions and wine, while +Jules took the water barrel and after saying goodbye to Marie, +started. There was not a soul on the wharf and, putting the stores +down at the top of the steps, they watched Jules who, after taking +off his boots, went across a plank to the ship, made his way +noiselessly out on to the bow, swinging himself down into the boat, +loosening the head rope before he did so. A push with the oar +against the ship's bow sent the boat alongside the quay, and he +then worked her along, with his hands against the wall, until he +reached the steps.</p> +<p>The stores were at once transferred to the boat, and they pushed +it out into the stream. The tide had but just turned to run out +and, for half a mile, they allowed her to drift down the river. By +this time the light was broadening out in the sky. Jules stepped +the mast and hoisted the sail, and then seated himself in the stern +and put an oar out in the hole cut for it to steer with. Terence +watched the operation carefully. The wind was nearly due aft, and +the boat ran rapidly through the water.</p> +<p>"We are just right as to time," Jules said, as he looked back +where the river made a bend. "There are two others coming down half +a mile behind us, so that we shall only seem to be rather earlier +birds than the rest."</p> +<p>Near the mouth of the river two gunboats were anchored. They +passed within a short distance of one of these, and a solitary +sailor, keeping anchor watch on deck, remarked:</p> +<p>"You are going to have a fine day for your fishing, +comrade."</p> +<p>"Yes, I think so, but maybe there will be more wind +presently."</p> +<p>Some time before reaching the gunboat, Ryan had lain down and +the nets were thrown loosely over him, as it would be better that +there should not seem to be more than the two hands that were +generally carried in the small fishing boats. Once out of the river +they steered south, laying a course parallel to the shore and about +a mile out. After an hour's sail Jules directed her head into a +little bay, took out an empty basket that he had brought with him, +and stepped ashore, after a cordial shake of the hand. He had +already advised them to bear very gradually to the southwest, and +had left a small compass on board for their guidance.</p> +<p>"They are things we don't often carry," he said, "in boats of +this size; but it will be well for you to take it. If you were +blown out of sight of land you would find it useful. Keep well out +from the Spanish coast, at any rate until you are well past Bilbao; +after that you can keep close in, if you like, for you will be +taken for a fishing boat from one of the small villages.</p> +<p>"I shall walk straight back now to the town. No questions are +asked at the gates and, if anyone did happen to take notice of me, +they would suppose I had been round peddling fish at the +farmhouses."</p> +<p>Coming along, he had given instructions to Terence as to sailing +the boat. When running before the wind the sheet was to be loose, +while it was to be tightened as much as might be necessary to make +the sail stand just full, when the wind was on the beam or forward +of it.</p> +<p>"You will understand," he said, "that when the wind is right +ahead you cannot sail against it. You must then get the sail in as +flat as you can, and sail as near as you can to the wind. Then when +you have gone some distance you must bring her head round, till the +sail goes over on the other side; and sail on that tack, and so +make a zigzag course: but if the wind should come dead ahead, I +think your best course would be to lower the sail and row against +it. However, at present, with the wind from the east, you will be +able to sail free on your proper course."</p> +<p>Then he pushed the boat off.</p> +<p>"You had better put an oar out and get her head round," he said, +"before hoisting the sail again. Goodbye; bon voyage!"</p> +<p>Since leaving the river, Terence had been sailing under his +instructions and, as soon as the boat was under way again he said +to his companion:</p> +<p>"Here we are, free men again, Dicky."</p> +<p>"I call it splendid, Terence. She goes along well. I only hope +she will keep on like this till we get to Corunna or, better still, +to the mouth of the Douro."</p> +<p>"We must not count our chickens before they are hatched, Dicky. +There are storms and French privateers to be reckoned with. We are +not out of the wood yet, by a long way. However, we need not bother +about them, at present. It is quite enough that we have got a stout +boat and a favouring wind."</p> +<p>"And plenty to eat and drink, Terence; don't forget that."</p> +<p>"No, that is a very important item, especially as we dare not +land to buy anything, for some days."</p> +<p>"What rate are we going through the water, do you think?"</p> +<p>"Jules said we were sailing about four knots an hour when we +were going down the river, and about three when we had turned south +and pulled the sail in. I suppose we are about halfway between the +two now, so we can count it as three knots and a half."</p> +<p>"That would make," Ryan said, after making the calculation, +"eighty-four miles in twenty-four hours."</p> +<p>"Bravo, Dicky! I doubted whether your mental powers were equal +to so difficult a calculation. Well, Jules said that it was about +four hundred miles to Corunna, and about a hundred and fifty to +Santander, beyond which he thought we could land safely at any +village."</p> +<p>"Oh, let us stick to the boat as long as we can!" Ryan +exclaimed.</p> +<p>"Certainly. I have no more desire to be tramping among those +mountains and taking our chance with the peasants than you have, +and if the wind keeps as it is now we should be at Corunna in +something like five days. But that would be almost too much to hope +for. So that it does but keep in its present direction till we are +past Santander, I shall be very well satisfied."</p> +<p>The mountains of Navarre and Biscay were within sight from the +time they had left the river, and it did not need the compass to +show them which way they should steer. There were many fishing +boats from Nivelle, Urumia, and Saint Sebastian to be seen, dotted +over the sea on their left. They kept farther out than the majority +of these, and did not pass any of them nearer than half a mile.</p> +<p>After steering for a couple of hours, Terence relinquished the +oar to his companion.</p> +<p>"You must get accustomed to it, as well as I," he said, "for we +must take it in turns, at night."</p> +<p>By twelve o'clock they were abreast of a town; which was, they +had no doubt, San Sebastian. They were now some four miles from the +Spanish coast. They were travelling at about the same rate as that +at which they had started, but the wind came off the high land, and +sometimes in such strong puffs that they had to loosen the sheet. +The fisherman had shown them how to shorten sail by tying down the +reef points and shifting the tack and, in the afternoon, the +squalls came so heavily that they thought it best to lower the sail +and reef it. Towards nightfall the wind had risen so much that they +made for the land, and when darkness came on threw out the little +grapnel the boat carried, a hundred yards or so from the shore, at +a point where no village was visible. Here they were sheltered from +the wind and, spreading out the nets to form a bed, they laid +themselves down in the bottom of the boat, pulling the sail partly +over them.</p> +<p>"This is jolly enough," Ryan said. "It is certainly pleasanter +to lie here and look at the stars than to be shut up in that hiding +place of Jules's."</p> +<p>"It is a great nuisance having to stop, though," Terence +replied. "It is a loss of some forty miles."</p> +<p>"I don't mind how long this lasts," Ryan said cheerfully. "I +could go on for a month at this work, providing the provisions +would hold out."</p> +<p>"I don't much like the look of the weather, Dicky. There were +clouds on the top of some of the hills and, though we can manage +the boat well enough in such weather as we have had today, it will +be a different thing altogether if bad weather sets in. I should +not mind if I could talk Spanish as well as I can Portuguese. Then +we could land fearlessly, if the weather was too bad to hold on. +But you see, the Spanish hate the Portuguese as much as they do the +French; and would, as likely as not, hand us over at once at the +nearest French post."</p> +<p>They slept fairly and, at daybreak, got up the grapnel and +hoisted the sail again. Inshore they scarcely felt the wind but, as +soon as they made out a couple of miles from the land, they felt +that it was blowing hard.</p> +<p>"We won't go any farther out. Dick, lay the boat's head to the +west again. I will hold the sheet while you steer, and then I can +let the sail fly, if a stronger gust than usual strikes us. Sit +well over this side."</p> +<a id="PicD" name="PicD"></a> +<center><img src="images/d.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: 'She is walking along now.'" /></center> +<p>"She is walking along now," Ryan said joyously. "I had no idea +that sailing was as jolly as it is."</p> +<p>They sped along all day and, before noon, had passed Bilbao. As +the afternoon wore on the wind increased in force, and the clouds +began to pass rapidly overhead, from the southeast.</p> +<p>"We had better get her in to the shore," Terence said. "Even +with this scrap of sail, we keep on taking the water in on that +lower side. I expect Santander lies beyond that point that runs out +ahead of us, and we will land somewhere this side of it."</p> +<p>But as soon as they turned the boat's head towards the shore, +and hauled in the sheet as tightly as they could, they found that, +try as they would, they could not get her to lie her course.</p> +<p>"We sha'n't make the point at all," Terence said, half an hour +after they had changed the course. "Besides, we have been nearly +over, two or three times. I dare say fellows who understood a boat +well could manage it but, if we hold on like this, we shall end by +drowning ourselves. I think the best plan will be to lower the sail +and mast, and row straight to shore."</p> +<p>"I quite agree with you," Ryan said. "Sailing is pleasant enough +in a fair wind, but I cannot say I care for it, as it is now."</p> +<p>With some difficulty, for the sea was getting up, they lowered +the sail and mast and, getting out the oars, turned her head +straight for the shore. Both were accustomed to rowing in still +water, but they found that this was very different work. After +struggling at the oars for a couple of hours, they both agreed that +they were a good deal farther away from the land than when they +began.</p> +<p>"It is of no use, Dick," Terence said. "If we cannot make +against the wind while we are fresh, we certainly cannot do so when +we are tired; and my arms feel as if they would come out of their +sockets."</p> +<p>"So do mine," Ryan said, with a groan. "I am aching all over, +and both my hands are raw with this rough handle. What are we to +do, then, Terence?"</p> +<p>"There is nothing to do that I can see, but to get her head +round and run before the wind. It is a nuisance, but perhaps the +gale won't last long and, when it is over, we can get up sail and +make for the northwestern point of Spain. We have got provisions +enough to last for a week.</p> +<p>"That is more comfortable," he added, as they got the boat in +the required direction. "Now, you take the steering oar, Dick, and +see that you keep her as straight as you can before the wind; while +I set to and bale. She is nearly half full of water."</p> +<p>It took half an hour's work, with the little bowl they found in +the boat, before she was completely cleared of water. The relief +given to her was very apparent, for she rose much more lightly on +the waves.</p> +<p>"We will sit down at the bottom of the boat, and take it by +turns to hold the steering oar."</p> +<p>They had brought with them a lantern in which a lighted candle +was kept burning, in order to be able to light their pipes. This +was stowed away in a locker in the stern, with their store of +biscuit and, after eating some of these, dividing a bottle of wine, +and lighting their pipes, they felt comparatively comfortable. They +were, of course, drenched to the skin and, as the wind was cold, +they pulled the sail partly over them.</p> +<p>"She does not ship any water now, Terence. If she goes on like +this, it will be all right."</p> +<p>"I expect it will be all right, Dick, though it is sure to be +very much rougher than this when we get farther out. Still, I fancy +an open boat will live through almost anything, providing she is +light in the water. I don't suppose she would have much chance if +she had a dozen men on board, but with only us two I think there is +every hope that she will get through it.</p> +<p>"It would be a different thing if the wind was from the west, +and we had the great waves coming in from the Atlantic, as we had +in that heavy gale when we came out from Ireland. As it is, nothing +but a big wave breaking right over her stern could damage us very +seriously. There is not the least fear of her capsizing, with us +lying in the bottom."</p> +<p>They did not attempt to keep alternate watches that night, only +changing occasionally at the steering oar, the one not occupied +dozing off occasionally. The boat required but little steering for, +as both were lying in the stern, the tendency was to run straight +before the wind. As the waves, however, became higher, she needed +keeping straight when she was in a hollow between two seas. It +seemed sometimes that the waves following behind the boat must +break on to her, and swamp her but, as time after time she rose +over them, their anxiety on this score lessened, and they grew more +and more confident that she would go safely through it.</p> +<p>Occasionally the baler was used, to keep her clear of the water +which came in in the shape of spray. At times they chatted +cheerfully, for both were blessed with good spirits and the faculty +of looking on the best side of things. They smoked their pipes in +turns, getting fire from each other, so as to avoid the necessity +of resorting to the lantern, which might very well blow out, in +spite of the care they had at first exercised by getting under the +sail with it when they wanted a light.</p> +<p>They were heartily glad when morning broke. The scene was a wild +one. They seemed to be in the centre of a circle of mist, which +closed in at a distance of half a mile or so, all round them. At +times the rain fell, sweeping along with stinging force but, wet as +they were, this mattered little to them.</p> +<p>"I would give something for a big glass of hot punch," Ryan +said, as he munched a piece of biscuit.</p> +<p>"Yes, it would not be bad," Terence agreed; "but I would rather +have a big bowl of hot coffee."</p> +<p>"I have changed my opinion of a seafaring life," Ryan said, +after a pause. "It seemed delightful the morning we started, but it +has its drawbacks; and to be at sea in an open boat, during a +strong gale in the Bay of Biscay, is distinctly an unpleasant +position."</p> +<p>"I fancy it is our own fault, Dicky. If we had known how to +manage the boat, I have no doubt that we should have been able to +get to shore. When the wind first began to freshen, we ought not to +have waited so long as we did, before we made for shelter."</p> +<p>"Well, we shall know better next time, Terence. I think that, +now that it is light, we had better get some sleep, by turns. Do +you lie down for four hours, and then I will take a turn."</p> +<p>"All right! But be sure you wake me up, and mind you don't go to +sleep; for if you did we might get broadside on to these waves, and +I have no doubt they would roll us over and over. So mind, if +before the four hours are up you feel you cannot keep your eyes +open, wake me at once. Half an hour will do wonders for me, and I +shall be perfectly ready to take the oar again."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch7" id="Ch7">Chapter 7</a>: A French Privateer.</h2> +<p>Terence went off into a deep sleep as soon as he had pulled the +sail over his head, but it seemed to him as if but a minute had +elapsed when his companion began to stir him up with his foot.</p> +<p>"What is it?" he asked.</p> +<p>"I am awfully sorry to wake you," Ryan shouted, "but you have +had two hours of it, and I really cannot keep my eyes open any +longer. I have felt myself going off, two or three times."</p> +<p>"You don't mean to say that I have been asleep for two +hours?"</p> +<p>"You have, and a few minutes over. I looked at my watch as you +lay down."</p> +<p>"All right! Give me the oar. I say, it is blowing hard!"</p> +<p>"I should think it is. It seems to me it is getting up, rather +than going down."</p> +<p>"Well, we are all right so far," Terence said cheerfully, for he +was now wide awake again. "Besides, we are getting quite skilful +mariners. You had better spend a few minutes at baling before you +lie down, for the water is a good three inches over the +boards."</p> +<p>All day the storm continued and, when darkness began to close +in, it seemed to them that it was blowing harder than ever. Each +had had two spells of sleep, and they agreed that they could now +keep awake throughout the night. It was bad enough having no one to +speak to all day, but at night they felt that companionship was +absolutely needed. During the day they had lashed together the +spars, sail, and the barrel of water--which was now nearly half +empty--so that if the boat should be swamped, they could cling to +this support.</p> +<p>It was a terrible night but, towards morning, both were of +opinion that the gale was somewhat abating. About eight o'clock +there were breaks in the clouds and, by noon, the sun was shining +brightly. The wind was still blowing strong, but nothing to what it +had been the evening before and, by nightfall, the sea was +beginning to go down. The waves were as high as before, but were no +longer broken and crested with heads of foam and, at ten o'clock, +they felt that they could both safely lie down till morning.</p> +<p>The steering oar was lashed in its position, the sail spread +over the whole of the stern of the boat, every drop of water was +baled out and, lying down side by side, they were soon fast asleep. +When they woke the sun was high, the wind had dropped to a gentle +breeze, and the boat was rising and falling gently on the smooth +rollers.</p> +<p>"Hurrah!" Ryan shouted, as he stood up and looked round. "It is +all over. I vote, Terence, that we both strip and take a swim, then +spread out our clothes to dry, after which we will breakfast +comfortably and then get up sail."</p> +<p>"That is a very good programme, Dicky; we will carry it out, at +once."</p> +<p>While they were eating their meal, Ryan asked:</p> +<p>"Where do you suppose we are, Terence?"</p> +<p>"Beyond the fact that we are right out in the Bay of Biscay, I +have not the most remote idea. By the way the water went past us, I +should say that we had been going at pretty nearly the same rate as +we did when we were sailing; say, four miles an hour. We have been +running for forty-eight hours, so that we must have got nearly two +hundred miles from Santander. The question is: would it be best to +make for England, now, or for Portugal? We have been going nearly +northwest, so I should think that we are pretty nearly north of +Finisterre, which may lie a hundred and twenty miles from us; and I +suppose we are two or three times as much as that from England. The +wind is pretty nearly due east again now, so we can point her head +either way. We must be nearly in the ship course, and are likely to +be picked up, long before we make land. Which do you vote for?"</p> +<p>"I vote for the nearest. We may get another storm, and one of +them is quite enough. At any rate, Spain will be the shortest, by a +great deal and, if we are picked up, it is just as likely to be by +a French privateer as by an English vessel."</p> +<p>"I am quite of your opinion, and am anxious to be back again, as +soon as I can. If we got to England and reported ourselves, we +might be sent to the depot and not get out again, for months; so +here goes for the south."</p> +<p>The sail was hoisted, and the boat sped merrily along. In a +couple of hours their clothes were dry.</p> +<p>"I think we had better put ourselves on short rations," Terence +said. "We may be farther off than we calculate upon and, at any +rate, we had better hold on to the mouth of the Tagus, if we can; +there are sure to be some British officials there, and we shall be +able to get money, and rejoin our regiment without loss of time; +while we might have all sort of trouble with the Spaniards, were we +to land at Corunna or Vigo."</p> +<p>No sail appeared in sight during the day.</p> +<p>"I should think we cannot have come as far west as we +calculated," Terence said, "or we ought to have seen vessels in the +distance; however, we will keep due south. It will be better to +strike the coast of Spain, and have to run along the shore round +Cape Finisterre, than to risk missing land altogether."</p> +<p>That night they kept regular watches. The wind was very light +now, and they were not going more than two knots an hour through +the water. Ryan was steering when morning broke.</p> +<p>"Wake up, Terence!" he exclaimed suddenly, "here is a ship +within a mile or so of us. As she is a lugger, I am afraid she is a +French privateer."</p> +<p>Terence sprang to his feet. The light was still faint, but he +felt sure that his companion was right, and that the vessel was a +French privateer.</p> +<p>"We have put our foot in it now, and no mistake," Ryan said. "It +is another French prison and, this time, without a friendly soldier +to help us to get out."</p> +<p>"It looks like it, Dicky. In another hour it will be broad +daylight, and they cannot help seeing us. Still, there is a hope +for us. We must give out that we are Spanish fishermen, who have +been blown off the coast. It is not likely they have anyone on +board that speaks Spanish, and our Portuguese will sound all right +in their ears; so very likely, after overhauling us, they will let +us go on our way. At any rate, it is of no use trying to escape; we +will hold on our course for another few minutes, and then head +suddenly towards her, as if we had only just seen her. I will hail +her in Portuguese, and they are sure to tell us to come on board; +and then I will try to make them understand by signs, and by using +a few French words, that we have been blown out to sea by the gale, +and want to know the course for Santander. As the French have been +there for some time, it would be natural enough for us to have +picked up a little of their language."</p> +<p>In a few minutes they altered their course and sailed towards +the lugger, which also soon turned towards them. When they +approached within the vessel's length, Terence stood up, and +shouted in Portuguese:</p> +<p>"What is the bearing of Santander?"</p> +<p>The reply was in French, "Come alongside!" given with a gesture +of the arm explaining the words. They let the sail run down as they +came alongside. Terence climbed up, by the channels, to the +deck.</p> +<p>"Espagnol," he said to the captain, who was standing close to +him as he jumped down on to the deck; "Espagnoles, Capitaine; +Poisson, Santander; grand tempete," and he motioned with his arms +to signify that they had been blown offshore at Santander. Then he +pointed in several directions towards the south, and looked +interrogatively.</p> +<p>"They are Spanish fishermen who have been blown off the coast," +the captain said to another officer. "They have been lucky in +living it out. Well, we are short of hands, having so many away in +prizes; and the boat will be useful, in place of the one we had +smashed up in the gale. Let a couple of men throw the nets and +things overboard, and then run her up to the davits."</p> +<p>Then he said to Terence: "Prisoners! Go forward and make +yourself useful;" and he pointed towards the forecastle.</p> +<p>Terence gave a yell of despair, threw his hat down on the deck +and, in a volley of Portuguese, begged the captain to let them go. +The latter, however, only waved his hand angrily; and two sailors, +coming up, seized Terence by the arms and dragged him forward. Ryan +was called upon deck, and also ordered forward. He too +remonstrated, but was cut short by a threatening gesture from the +captain.</p> +<p>For a time they preserved an appearance of deep dejection, +Terence tugging his hair as if in utter despair, till Ryan +whispered:</p> +<p>"For heaven's sake, Terence, don't go on like that, or I shall +break out in a shout of laughter."</p> +<p>"It is monstrous, it is inhuman!" Terence exclaimed, in +Portuguese. "Thus to seize harmless fishermen, who have so narrowly +escaped drowning; the sea is less cruel than these men. They have +taken our boat, too, our dear good boat. What will our mothers +think, when we do not return? That we have been swallowed up by the +sea. How they will watch for us, but in vain!"</p> +<p>Fortunately for the success of their story, the lugger hailed +from a northern French port and, as not one on board understood +either Spanish or Portuguese, they had no idea that the latter was +the language in which the prisoners were speaking. After an hour of +pretended despair, both rose from the deck on which they had been +sitting and, on an order being given to trim the sails, went to the +ropes and aided the privateersmen to haul at them and, before the +end of the day, were doing duty as regular members of the crew.</p> +<p>"They are active young fellows," the captain said to his first +mate, as he watched the supposed Spaniards making themselves +useful. "It was lucky for them that they had a fair store of +provisions and water in their boat. We are very short handed, and +they will be useful. I would have let them go if it had not been +for the boat but, as we have only one left that can swim, it was +too lucky a find to give up."</p> +<p>The craft had been heading north when Ryan had first seen her, +and she held that course all day. Terence gathered from the talk of +the sailors that they were bound for Brest, to which port she +belonged. The Frenchmen were congratulating themselves that their +cruise was so nearly over, and that it had been so successful a +one. From time to time a sailor was sent up into the cross trees, +and scanned the horizon to the north and west. In the afternoon he +reported that he could make out the upper sails of a large ship +going south. The captain went up to look at her.</p> +<p>"I think she is an English ship of war," he said, when he +descended to the deck, "but she is a long way off. With this light +wind we could run away from her. She will not trouble herself about +us. She would know well enough that she could not get within ten +miles of us, before it got dark."</p> +<p>This turned out to be the case, for the lookout from time to +time reported that the distant sail was keeping on her course, and +the slight feeling of hope that had been felt by Terence and Ryan +faded away. They were placed in the same watch, and were below +when, as daylight broke, they heard sudden exclamations, tramping +of feet overhead, and a moment later the watch was summoned on +deck.</p> +<p>"I hope that they have had the same luck that we had, and have +run into the arms of one of our cruisers," Terence whispered in +Portuguese to Ryan, as they ran up on deck together.</p> +<p>As he reached the deck the boom of a cannon was heard, and at +the same instant a ball passed through the mainsail. Half a mile +away was a British sloop of war. She had evidently made out the +lugger before the watch on board the latter had seen her. The +captain was foaming with rage, and shouting orders which the crew +hurried to execute. On the deck near the foremast lay the man who +had been on the lookout, and who had been felled with a handspike +by the captain when he ran out on deck, at the first alarm. +Although at first flurried and alarmed, the crew speedily recovered +themselves, and executed with promptitude the orders which were +given.</p> +<p>There was a haze on the water, but a light wind was stirring, +and the vessel was moving through the water at some three knots an +hour. As soon as her course had been changed, so as to bring the +wind forward of the beam, which was her best point of sailing, the +men were sent to the guns; the first mate placing himself at a long +eighteen pounder, which was mounted as a pivot gun aft, a similar +weapon being in her bows. All this took but four or five minutes, +and shot after shot from the sloop hummed overhead.</p> +<p>The firing now ceased, as the change of course of the lugger had +placed the sloop dead astern of her; and the latter was unable, +therefore, to fire even her bow chasers without yawing. It was now +the turn of the lugger. The gun in the stern was carefully trained +and, as it was fired, a patch of white splinters appeared in the +sloop's bulwarks. A cheer broke from the French. The effect of the +shot, which must have raked her from stem to stern, was at once +evident. The sloop bore off the wind, until her whole broadside +could be seen.</p> +<p>"Flat on your faces!" the captain shouted.</p> +<p>There was a roar of ten guns, and a storm of shot screamed +overhead. Four of them passed through the sails. One ploughed up +the deck, killing two sailors and injuring three others with the +splinters. Two or three ropes of minor importance were cut, but no +serious damage inflicted.</p> +<p>The crew, as they leapt to their feet, gave a cheer. They knew +that, with this light wind, their lugger could run away from the +heavier craft; and that the latter could only hope for success by +crippling her.</p> +<p>"Steady with the helm!" the captain went on, as the pivot gun +was again ready to deliver its fire. "Wait till her three masts +show like one.</p> +<p>"Jacques, aim a little bit higher. See if you cannot knock away +a spar."</p> +<p>The sloop was coming up again to the wind and, as she was nearly +stem on, the gun cracked out again. A cheer broke from the lugger +as her opponent's foretop mast fell over her side, with all its +hamper. Round the sloop came, and delivered the other broadside. +Two shots crashed through the bulwarks, one of them dismounting a +gun which, in its fall, crushed a man who had thrown himself down +beside it. Another shot struck the yard of the foresail, cutting it +asunder; and the lugger at once ran up into the wind.</p> +<p>"Lower the foresail!" the captain shouted. "Quick, men! and lash +a spare spar to the yard. They are busy cutting away their topmast, +but we shall be off again before they are ready to move. They have +lost nearly half a mile; we shall soon be out of range. Be sharp +with that gun again!"</p> +<p>The sloop had indeed fallen greatly astern while delivering her +broadsides; but her commander had evidently seen that, unless the +wind sprang up, the lugger would get away from him unless he could +cripple her; and that she might seriously damage him, and perhaps +knock one of the masts out of him by her stern chaser. His only +chance, therefore, of capturing her was to take a spar out of her. +He did not attempt to come about again, after firing the second +broadside; but kept up his fire as fast as his guns could be +loaded.</p> +<p>The lugger, however, was stealing rapidly away from him and, in +ten minutes, had increased her lead by another half mile, without +having suffered any serious damage; and the sloop soon ceased fire, +as she was now almost out of range. Seven or eight of the crew had +been more or less injured by splinters but, with the exception of +the three killed, none were badly hurt. The lugger was now put on +her former course, the guns lashed into their places again, and the +three men killed sewn up in hammocks and laid between two of the +guns, in order to be handed to their friends on arrival in +port.</p> +<p>"That is another slip between the cup and the lip," Terence +remarked to his companion, as the sloop ceased firing. "I certainly +thought, when we came on deck, that our troubles were over. I must +say for our friend, the French captain, he showed himself a good +sailor, and got out of the scrape uncommonly well."</p> +<p>"A good deal too well," Ryan grumbled; "it was very unpleasant +while it lasted. It is all very well to be shot at by an enemy, but +to be shot at by one's friends is more than one bargained for."</p> +<p>The coolness under fire displayed by the two Spaniards he had +carried off pleased the captain, who patted them on the shoulder as +he came along, his good temper being now completely restored by his +escape.</p> +<p>"You are brave fellows," he said, "and will make good +privateersmen. You cannot do better than stay with us. You will +make as much money, in a month, as you would in a year's +fishing."</p> +<p>Terence smiled vaguely, as if he understood that the captain was +pleased with them, but did not otherwise catch his meaning. They +arrived at Brest without further adventure. As they neared the +port, the captain asked Terence if he and his companion would enter +upon the books of the privateer and after much difficulty made, as +he believed, Terence understand his question. The latter affected +to consult Ryan, and then answered that they would be both willing +to do so. The captain then put the names they gave him down on the +ship's roll, and handed each of them a paper, certifying that Juan +Montes and Sebastian Peral belonged to the crew of the Belle +Jeanne, naming the rate of wages that they were to receive, and +their share in the value of the prizes taken. He then gave them +eighty francs each, as an advance on their pay from the date of +their coming on board, and signified to them that they must buy +clothes similar to those worn by the crew, instead of the heavy +fishermen's garments they had on.</p> +<p>"They will soon learn our language," he said to the mate, "and I +am sure they will make good sailors. I have put down their wages +and share of prize money at half that of our own men, and I am sure +they will be well worth it, when they get to speak the language and +learn their duties."</p> +<p>As soon as they were alongside, the greater portion of the men +went ashore and, in the evening, the boatswain landed with Terence +and Ryan, and proceeded with them to a slop shop, where he bought +them clothes similar to those worn by the crew. Beyond the fact +that these were of nautical appearance, there was no distinctive +dress. They then returned to the lugger and changed their clothes +at once, the boatswain telling them to stow away their boots and +other things, as these would be useful to them in bad weather.</p> +<p>The next day the privateer commenced to unload, for the most +valuable portions of the cargoes of the captured ships had been +taken on board when the vessels themselves, with the greater +portion of the goods they carried, had been sent into port under +the charge of prize crews. They remained on board for ten days, +going freely into the town, sometimes with the sailors and +sometimes alone. Terence pretended to make considerable progress in +French, and was able, though with some difficulty, to make himself +understood by the crew. The first mate had gone with them to the +mairie, where the official stamp had been affixed to their ship +papers.</p> +<p>They found that no questions were asked of persons entering or +leaving the town, on the land side; and twice strolled out and went +some distance into the country. They had agreed that it would be +better to defer any attempt to escape until the day before the +lugger sailed, as there would then be but little time for the +captain to make inquiries after them, or to institute a search. +They bought a pocket map of the north of France, and carefully +studied the roads.</p> +<p>"It is plain enough what our best course is, Dick. We must go +along this projecting point of Brittany through Dinan to Avranches, +and then follow the coast up till we get to Coutances. You see it +is nearly opposite Jersey, and that island does not look to be more +than fifteen miles away so that, if we can get hold of a boat +there, we should be able to run across in three hours or so, with +favourable wind."</p> +<p>"That looks easy enough," Ryan agreed. "It seems to be about one +hundred and twenty miles from here to Avranches, and another thirty +or forty up to Coutances, so we should do it in a week, easily. +What stories shall we make up, if we are questioned?"</p> +<p>"I don't suppose the peasants we may meet on the road are likely +to question us at all, for most of the Bretons speak only their own +language. We had better always sleep out in the open. If we do run +across an official, we can show our papers and give out that we +have been ill treated on board the lugger, and are going to Saint +Malo, where we mean to ship on another privateer. I know that is a +port from which lots of them sail. I don't think we shall have any +difficulty in buying provisions at small villages. My French will +pass muster very well in such places, and I can easily remark that +we are on our way to Saint Malo to join a ship there and, if any +village functionary questions us, these papers will be good enough +for him.</p> +<p>"Or we can say that we got left ashore by accident, when our +craft sailed from Brest, and are going to rejoin her at Saint Malo, +where she was going to put in. I think, perhaps, that that would be +a better story than that we had run away. I don't know that the +authorities interest themselves in runaway seamen from privateers +but, at any rate, it is a likely tale. Drunken seamen, no doubt, +often do get left ashore."</p> +<p>"Yes, that would be a very good story, Terence, and I think that +there would be no great fear, even if we were to go boldly into a +town."</p> +<p>"I don't think there would; still, it is better to be on the +safe side, and avoid all risks."</p> +<p>Accordingly, the afternoon before the Belle Jeanne was to sail +they went ashore, bought enough bread and cold meat to last them +for a couple of days; and two thick blankets, as it was now +November and the nights were bitterly cold; and then left the town +and followed the road for Dinan. On approaching the village of +Landerneau they left the road, and lay down until it was quite +dark. Then they made a detour through the fields, round the +village, came down on the road again, walked all night--passing +through Huelgoat--and then, as morning was breaking they left the +road again and, after going a quarter of a mile through the fields, +lay down in a dry ditch by the side of a thick hedge, ate a meal, +and went to sleep.</p> +<p>They did not start again until it was getting dusk, when they +returned to the road, which they followed all night. In the morning +they went boldly into a little village, and Terence went into a +shop and bought a couple of loaves. His French was quite good +enough for so simple an operation.</p> +<p>"I suppose you are going to Saint Malo," the woman said.</p> +<p>"Yes. We have had a holiday to see some friends at Brest, and +are going to rejoin."</p> +<p>This was the only question asked and, after walking another two +miles, they lay up for the day as before. They had met several +peasants on the road, and had exchanged salutations with them. They +found by their map that they were now within twenty miles of Dinan, +having made over thirty miles each night and, as both were somewhat +footsore from their unaccustomed exercise, they travelled only some +sixteen or seventeen miles the following night.</p> +<p>The next evening, at about ten o'clock, they walked boldly +through Dinan. Most of the inhabitants were already asleep, and the +few who were still in the streets paid no heed to two sailors; +going, they had no doubt, to Saint Malo. Crossing the river Rance +by the bridge, they took the road in the direction of the port but, +after following it for a mile or two, struck off to the east and, +before morning, arrived on the river running up from the bay of +Mount Saint Michaels. They lay down until late in the afternoon, +and then crossed the river at a ferry, and kept along by the coast +until they reached the Sebine river.</p> +<p>"We are getting on first rate," Ryan said, as they lay down for +a few hours' sleep. "We have only got Avranches to pass, now."</p> +<p>"I hope we sha'n't be questioned at all, Dick, for we have now +no good story to tell them; for we are going away from Saint Malo, +instead of to it. Of course, as long as they don't question us we +are all right. We are simply two sailors on our way home for a +time; but if we have to show our papers, with those Spanish names +on them, we should be in a fix. Of course, we might have run away +from our ship at Saint Malo, but that would not explain our coming +up this way. However, I hope my French is good enough to answer any +casual questions without exciting attention. We will cross by the +ferry boat, as soon as it begins to ply and, as Avranches stands +some little distance up the river, we can avoid it altogether by +keeping along the coastline."</p> +<p>A score of peasants had assembled by the time the ferry boat man +made his appearance from his cottage, and Terence and his +companion, who had been lying down 200 yards away, joined them just +as they were going down to the boat.</p> +<p>"You are from Saint Malo, I suppose?" an old peasant said to +Terence.</p> +<p>The latter nodded.</p> +<p>"We have got a month's leave from our ship," he said. "She has +been knocked about by an English cruiser, and will be in the +shipwright's hands for five or six weeks, before she is ready for +sea again."</p> +<p>"You are not from this part of the country," the peasant, who +was speaking in the patois of Normandy, remarked.</p> +<p>"No, we come from the south; but one of our comrades comes from +Cherbourg and, as he cannot get away, we are going to see his +friends and tell them that he is well. It is a holiday for us, and +we may as well go there as anywhere else."</p> +<p>The explanation was simple enough for the peasant, and Terence +continued chatting with him until they landed.</p> +<p>"You do not need to go through Avranches," the latter said. +"Take the road by the coast through Granville to Coutances."</p> +<p>"How far is it to Coutances?"</p> +<p>"About twenty miles. At least, so I have heard, for I have never +been there."</p> +<p>After walking a few miles, they went down on to the seashore and +lay down among some rocks until evening. At eight o'clock they +started again and walked boldly through Granville, where their +sailor's dress would, they felt sure, attract no attention. It was +about nine o'clock when they entered the place. Their reason for +doing so at this hour was that they wished to lay in a stock of +provisions, as they did not intend to enter Coutances until late at +night; when they hoped to be able to get hold of a boat, at once. +They had just made their purchases when they met a fat little man, +with a red sash--which showed him to be the Maire of the place, or +some other public functionary.</p> +<p>"Where are you going, and what ship do you belong to?" he asked +pompously.</p> +<p>"We are sailors on our way from Saint Malo to Cherbourg," +Terence replied.</p> +<p>"You have papers, of course?"</p> +<p>"Of course, Monsieur le Maire."</p> +<p>"I must see them," the Maire said. "Come with me to my house, +close by."</p> +<p>There were several persons near, and a man in civil uniform was +with the Maire. Therefore Terence gave an apparently willing assent +and, followed by the functionary, they went into a house close by. +A lamp was burning on the table in the hall.</p> +<p>"Light these candles in my office," the Maire said. "The women +have gone up to bed."</p> +<p>The man turned a key, went in and, bringing out two candles, +lighted them at the lamp; and they then went into the room. The +Maire seated himself in an armchair at the table. The minor +functionary placed the two suspected persons on the side facing +him, and took his place standing by their side.</p> +<p>As they were going in, Terence whispered:</p> +<p>"If there is trouble, I will take this fellow, and you manage +the Maire."</p> +<p>"Now," that functionary said, "let me see your papers.</p> +<p>"Why," he exclaimed, looking at the names, "you are not +Frenchmen!"</p> +<p>"No," Terence said quietly. "We do not pretend to be but, as you +see, we are sailors who have done service on board a French +privateer."</p> +<p>"But where is this privateer?"</p> +<p>"I don't know, Monsieur le Maire. We were not satisfied with our +treatment, so we left her at Brest."</p> +<p>"This is very serious," the Maire said. "You are Spaniards. You +have deserted your ship at Brest. You have travelled a hundred and +fifty miles through France, and now what are you doing here?"</p> +<p>"We are, as you say, monsieur, travelling through France. We +desire to see France. We have heard that it is the greatest country +in the world. Frenchmen visit Spain in large numbers. Why should +not Spaniards visit France?"</p> +<p>The tone of sarcasm in which Terence spoke was not lost upon the +Maire, who rose from his seat, purple with anger.</p> +<p>"You will take these men into custody," he said to his +assistant. "This is a very grave business."</p> +<p>"Now, Dick!" Terence exclaimed and, turning to the man who stood +next to him, he grasped him suddenly by the throat.</p> +<p>At the same moment Ryan caught up a heavy inkstand and threw it +across the table at the Maire, striking that functionary in the +stomach, and doubling him completely up. Then he ran round the +table and bound the man--who had not yet recovered his +breath--tightly in his chair, and thrust his handkerchief into his +mouth.</p> +<p>The man whom Terence was holding had scarcely struggled. +Terence, as he gripped him, had said, "Keep quiet or I will choke +you!" and the prisoner felt that his assailant could do so in a +moment, if he chose.</p> +<p>His hands were fastened tightly behind him, with his own belt, +by Ryan. A short ruler was thrust between his teeth, and fastened +there by a handkerchief going round the back of his head.</p> +<p>"So far so good, Dick. Now look round for something with which +we can bind them more firmly."</p> +<p>Several hanks of red tape lay upon the table. With a portion of +one of these, the back of the chair in which the Maire sat was +lashed to the handle of a heavy bureau. Then his feet were fastened +to the two legs of the chair, so that he could neither kick nor +upset himself. The other man was then fastened as securely. This +done they blew out the candles, left the room, locked the door +behind them--taking the key--and then sallied out into the +street.</p> +<p>"That was a good shot of yours with the inkstand," Terence +said.</p> +<p>"I had my eye on it, all the time he was speaking," Ryan +replied. "I saw that, if I were to move to get round the table at +him, the little man would have time to shout; but that if I could +hit him in the wind, it would be all right."</p> +<p>"Well, there must be no more stopping, now. I don't know whether +there is a Mrs. Maire; if not, there will certainly be no alarm +until morning. If there is, it depends upon what sort of woman she +is as to how long a start we shall get. If she is a sleepy woman +she is probably dreaming by this time, and may not discover until +morning that her lord and master is not by her side. If she is a +bad-tempered woman, she will probably lie for an hour or two, +thinking over what she shall say to him when he comes in. If she is +a nervous woman, she will get up and go downstairs.</p> +<p>"I left the lamp burning in the hall on purpose. Seeing it +there, she will naturally think that he has not come in, and will +go upstairs again for an hour or two; then she will probably call +up the servants, and may send them out to look for him; finally, +she may go to the police office and wake up a constable. It is not +probable there are any of them on night duty, in a quiet place like +this. Altogether, I calculate that it will be at least four hours +before they think of breaking open the door of the office, to see +if he is there; so at the worst we have got four hours' start; at +the best, ten hours.</p> +<p>"It is only half-past nine now. We shall be at the mouth of the +Sienne in three hours, or less. It does not look above nine or ten +miles on the map and, directly we get fairly out of the town, we +will go as quickly as we can, for every minute is of +importance.</p> +<p>"If we can get hold of a boat at once, we ought to be at Jersey +soon after daybreak; although I am not very sure of that, for I +believe there are all sorts of strong currents along this coast. I +remember one of the officers saying so, as we came down the Channel +on the voyage out. Of course, it will make a difference whether we +can get a boat with a sail, or not. If we cannot find a boat, we +shall have to hide up; but you may be sure that there will be a hot +search for us in the morning, and we must get off tonight, if we +can. Most likely there is a fishing village somewhere near the +mouth of the river."</p> +<p>As soon as they were out of the town they broke into a trot; +which they continued, with scarcely any intermission, until they +approached a small village.</p> +<p>"I expect this stands on the bank of the river," Terence said. +"There is no chance of anyone being up, so we can go through +fearlessly."</p> +<p>A couple of hundred yards farther they reached the river. A +large ferry boat was moored here. Keeping along the bank to the +left, they were not long before they came upon several boats hauled +up on the shore; while three or four others lay at their moorings, +a short distance out.</p> +<p>"Thank goodness," Terence exclaimed. "We shall have no +difficulty, now!"</p> +<p>They selected the boat lying nearest the water's edge. The moon +was half full, but was now sinking towards the west. Its light, +however, was of some assistance to them. There was a mast and sail +in the boat, as well as a pair of oars.</p> +<p>At first they were unable to move her down to the water but, +getting some oars out of the other boats, they laid them down as +rollers and, with these, managed after great exertions to get her +afloat.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch8" id="Ch8">Chapter 8</a>: A Smart Engagement.</h2> +<p>After pushing the boat out into the stream, Terence and his +companion allowed it to drift quietly for some distance; and then, +getting out the oars, rowed hard until they were beyond the mouth +of the river. The tide was, they thought, by the level of the water +where they had embarked, within an hour or two of flood. They +therefore determined to shape their course to the north of the +point where they believed Jersey to lie, so that when tide turned, +it would sweep them down upon it. The wind was too light to be of +any assistance, but the stars were bright, and the position of the +north star served as a guide to the direction they should take.</p> +<p>It had taken them some considerable time to launch the boat, and +they calculated that it was nearly midnight when they left the +mouth of the river. There was no occasion to row hard for, until it +became daylight and they could see the island of Jersey, they could +not shape their course with any certainty; and could only hope that +by keeping to the north of it they would not find, in the morning, +that the tide had taken them too far to the south.</p> +<p>"We are very lucky in our weather," Terence said as, after +labouring at the heavy oars for a couple of hours, they paused for +a few minutes' rest. "If it had been a strong wind, it would never +have done for us to have started. I believe in bad weather there +are tremendous currents about the islands, and desperately rough +water. A fog would have been even worse for us. As it is, it seems +to me we cannot go very far wrong. I suppose the tide is about +turning now; but if by daylight we find that we have been carried a +long way past the island, we shall soon have the tide turning +again, which will take us back to it.</p> +<p>"I am more afraid of falling in with a French privateer than I +am of missing the island. There are sure to be some of them at +Granville, to say nothing of Saint Malo. I don't suppose any of +those at Granville will put out in search of us, merely to please +the Maire; but if any were going to sea, they would be sure to keep +a lookout for us."</p> +<p>"If they did see us, we should have no chance of getting away, +Terence. This boat is not so big as the one we stole at Bayonne, +but it rows much heavier."</p> +<p>"There is one thing--even a privateer could not sail very fast +in this light wind and, if it freshens in the morning, we can get +up the sail."</p> +<p>"Then I hope it will get up a bit," Ryan said, "for after +another five or six hours' rowing, with these beastly oars, my +hands will be raw; and I am sure my back and arms will be nearly +broken."</p> +<p>"We must risk that, Dick. We calculated fifteen miles in a +straight line across to Jersey, so that we must jog along at the +rate of a couple of miles an hour to get far enough to the west. +Now then, let us be moving again."</p> +<p>The night seemed interminable to them; and they felt relieved, +indeed, when morning began to break. In another half hour it would +be light enough for them to see for a considerable distance. +Unshipping their oars, they stood up and looked round.</p> +<p>"That must be Jersey," Terence exclaimed, pointing to the north. +"The current must have taken us past it, as I was afraid it would. +What time is it, Dick?"</p> +<p>"Nearly eight."</p> +<p>"Then tide must be turning already. The island must be six miles +away now. If we row hard we shall know, in half an hour, whether we +are being carried north or south."</p> +<p>"But we must be going north if tide has turned, Terence?"</p> +<p>"I don't know--I remember that the mate of the Sea Horse said +that, in the Channel, the course of the current did not change at +high and low water; so there is no saying what way we are going, at +present. Well, there is a little more wind, and I suppose we had +better get up our sail. There is Jersey, and whether we get there a +little sooner or a little later cannot make much difference. I am +sure we are both too tired to row her much faster than we can +sail."</p> +<p>Terence agreed, and they accordingly stepped the mast and +hoisted the sail. At first the boat moved but slowly through the +water, but the wind was freshening and, in half an hour, she was +foaming along.</p> +<p>"Tide is against us, still," Terence said presently. "I don't +think we are any nearer Jersey that when we first saw it."</p> +<p>"Look there!" Ryan exclaimed, a few minutes later, "there is a +lugger coming out from the direction of Granville."</p> +<p>"So there is, Dick, and with the wind behind her, she won't be +very long before she is here. I should say that she is about six or +seven miles off, and an hour will bring her up to us."</p> +<p>"I will get out an oar, Terence. That will help us a bit. We can +change about, occasionally."</p> +<p>Terence was steering with the other oar, while he held the +sheet. The boat was travelling at a good rate, but the lugger was +fast running down towards them.</p> +<p>"There is a schooner coming out from Jersey!" Terence exclaimed, +joyously. "If she is a British privateer we may be saved yet. I had +just made up my mind that we were in for another French +prison."</p> +<p>Ryan looked over his shoulder.</p> +<p>"She is farther off than the lugger," he said.</p> +<p>"Yes, but the current that is keeping us back is helping her on +towards us. It will be a close thing; but I agree with you, I am +afraid that the lugger will be here first.</p> +<p>"Change seats with me. I will have a spell at the oar."</p> +<p>He was a good deal stronger than Ryan, and he felt comparatively +fresh after his hour's rest, so there was a perceptible increase in +the boat's speed after the change had been effected. When the +lugger was within a mile of them, and the schooner about double +that distance, the former changed her course a little, and bore up +as if to meet the schooner.</p> +<p>"Hurrah!" Ryan shouted. "The Frenchman is making for the +schooner and, if the Jersey boat don't turn and run, there will be +a fight."</p> +<p>"The lugger looks to me the bigger boat," Terence said, as he +stopped rowing for a moment. "However, we are likely to be able to +slip off while they are at it."</p> +<p>Rapidly the two vessels approached each other and, when within a +mile, a puff of smoke broke out from the lugger's bow; and was +answered almost instantly by one from the schooner. Running fast +through the water, the vessels were soon within a short distance of +each other. Terence had ceased rowing, for there was no fear that +the lugger, which was now abeam of them, would give another thought +to the small boat.</p> +<p>The fight was going on in earnest, and the two vessels poured +broadsides into each other as they passed; the lugger wearing round +at once, and engaging the schooner broadside to broadside.</p> +<p>"The Frenchman has the heavier metal," Terence said. "I am +afraid the schooner will get the worst of it. The lugger is crowded +with men, too. What do you say, Dick? Shall we do our best to help +the schooner?"</p> +<p>"I think we ought to," Ryan agreed, at once. "She has certainly +saved us, and I think we ought to do what we can."</p> +<p>Accordingly he brought the boat nearer to the wind. The two +vessels were now close-hauled, and were moving but slowly through +the water. The boat passed two or three hundred yards astern of the +lugger, sailed a little farther; and then, when able to lay her +course for the schooner, went about and bore down towards her. Just +as they did so, the halliards of the schooner's mainsail were shot +asunder, and the sail ran down the mast. There was a shout of +triumph from the lugger, and she at once closed in towards her +crippled adversary.</p> +<p>"They are going to try and carry the schooner by boarding," +Terence exclaimed. "Keep her as close as she will go, Dick," and, +seizing his oar again, he began to row with all his might.</p> +<p>By the time they came up, the two vessels were side by side. The +guns had ceased their fire, but there was a rattle of pistol shots, +mingled with the clash of arms and the shouts of the combatants. +Running up to the schooner's side, Terence and Ryan clambered on +the channel and sprung on to the deck of the schooner.</p> +<p>A desperate fight was going on forward, where the two vessels +touched each other. There was no one aft. Here some fifteen or +twenty feet of water separated the ships, and even the helmsmen had +left the wheel to join in the fight. About half of the lugger's +crew had made their way on to the deck of the schooner, but the +Jersey men were still fighting stoutly. The rest of the lugger's +crew were gathered in the bow of their own vessel, waiting until +there should be a clear enough space left for them to join their +comrades.</p> +<p>"Things look bad," Terence exclaimed. "The French crew are a +great deal stronger. Lend me a hand to turn two of these +eight-pounders round. There are plenty of cartridges handy."</p> +<p>They drew the cannon back from their places, turned them round, +loaded them with a charge of powder, and then rammed in two of the +bags of bullets that were lying beside them. The schooner stood +higher out of the water than the lugger, and they were able to +train the two cannon so that they bore upon the mass of Frenchmen +in the latter's bow.</p> +<p>"Take steady aim," Terence said. "We are only just in time; our +fellows are being beaten back."</p> +<p>A moment later the two pieces were fired. Their discharge took +terrible effect among the French, sweeping away more than half of +those gathered in the lugger's bow.</p> +<p>"Load again!" Terence exclaimed. "They are too strong for the +Jersey men, still."</p> +<p>For a moment the French boarders had paused; but now, with a +shout of fury, they fell upon the crew of the schooner, driving +them back foot by foot towards the stern. The cannon were now +trained directly forward and, when the crowd of fighting men +approached them, Terence shouted in French to the Jersey men to +fall back on either side.</p> +<p>The captain, turning round and seeing the guns pointing forward, +repeated the order in a stentorian shout. The Jersey men leapt to +one side or the other, and the moment they were clear the two +cannon poured their contents into the midst of the French; who had +paused for a moment, surprised at the sudden cessation of +resistance.</p> +<p>Two clear lanes were swept through the crowd; and then, with a +shout, the captain of the schooner and his crew fell upon the +Frenchmen. Ryan was about to rush forward, when Terence said:</p> +<p>"No, no, Ryan, load again; better make sure."</p> +<p>The heavy loss they had suffered, however, so discouraged the +French that many at once turned and, running back, jumped on to the +deck of the lugger; while the others, though still resisting, were +driven after them.</p> +<p>As soon as the guns were reloaded they were trained, as before, +to bear on the lugger's bow and, as the French were driven back, +they were again fired. This completed the discomfiture of the enemy +and, with loud shouts, the Jersey men followed them on to the deck +of their own ship.</p> +<p>Terence and Ryan now ran forward, snatched up a couple of +cutlasses, and joined their friends; and were soon fighting in the +front line. But the French resistance was now almost over. Their +captain had fallen and, in five minutes, the last of them threw +down their arms and surrendered; while a great shout went up from +the crew of the schooner. The French flag was hauled down and, as +soon as the prisoners had been sent below, an ensign was brought +from the schooner, fixed to the flag halliards above the tricolor, +and the two hoisted together.</p> +<p>The captain had already turned to the two men who had come so +opportunely to his assistance.</p> +<p>"I do not know who you are, or where you come from, men, but you +have certainly saved us from capture. I did not know it was the +Annette until it was too late to draw off, or I should not have +engaged her; for she is the strongest lugger that sails out of +Granville, and carries double our weight of metal, with twice as +strong a crew; but whoever you are, I thank you most heartily. I am +half owner of the schooner, and should have lost all I was worth, +to say nothing of perhaps having to pass the next five years in a +French prison."</p> +<p>"We are two British officers," Terence said. "We have escaped +from a French prison, and were making our way to Jersey when we saw +that lugger coming after us, and should certainly have been +captured had you not come up; so we thought the least we could do +was to lend you a hand."</p> +<p>"Well, gentlemen, you have certainly saved us. Jacques Bontemps, +the captain of the Annette, was an old acquaintance of mine. He +commanded a smaller craft before he got the Annette, and we have +had two or three fights together.</p> +<p>"So it was you whom I saw in that little boat! Of course, we +made out that the lugger was chasing you, though why they should be +doing so we could not tell; but we thought no more about you after +the fight once began, and were as astonished as the Frenchmen when +you swept their bow. I just glanced round and saw what looked like +two French fishermen, and thought that you must be two of the +lugger's crew who, for some reason or other, had turned the guns +against their own ship.</p> +<p>"It will be a triumph, indeed, for us when we enter Saint +Helier. The Annette has been the terror of our privateers. +Fortunately she was generally away cruising, and many a prize has +she taken into Granville. I have had the luck to recapture two of +them, myself; but when she is known to be at home we most of us +keep in port, for she is a good deal more than a match for any +craft that sails out from Saint Helier.</p> +<p>"She only went into Granville yesterday, and I thought that +there was no fear of her being out again, for a week or so. When I +saw her, I took her for a smaller lugger that sails from that port, +and which is no more than a match for us. The fact is, we were +looking at her chasing you, and wondering if we should be in time, +instead of noticing her size. It was not until she fired that first +broadside that we found we had caught a tartar. We should have run, +if there had been a chance of getting away; but she is a +wonderfully fast boat, and we knew that our only chance was to +knock away one of her masts.</p> +<p>"And now, we will be making sail again. You must excuse me for a +few minutes."</p> +<p>In half an hour the main halliards had been repaired, and the +sail hoisted. When other damages were made good the captain, with +half his crew, went on board the lugger; and the two vessels sailed +together for Jersey. Terence and his companion had accompanied the +captain.</p> +<p>"Now, gentlemen, you may as well come down with me into the +cabin. It is likely enough that you will be able to find some +clothes, in Bontemps' chest, that will fit you. He was a dandy, in +his way. At any rate, his clothes will suit you better than those +you have on."</p> +<p>They found, indeed, that the lugger's captain had so large a +store of clothing that they had no difficulty, whatever, in rigging +themselves out. While they were changing, the captain had left +them. He returned, presently, with a beaming face.</p> +<p>"She is a more valuable prize than I hoped for," he said. "She +is full almost to the hatches with the plunder she had taken in her +last cruise. I cannot make out what led her to come out of +Granville, unless it was in pursuit of you."</p> +<p>"I expect it was that," Terence said. "We were arrested by the +Maire of Granville, and had to tie him and one of his officials up. +He was a pompous little man; and no doubt, when he got free, went +down to the port and persuaded the captain of the lugger to put +out, at once, to endeavour to find us. I expect he told him that we +were prisoners of importance, either English spies or French +emigres.</p> +<p>"Well, Captain, I am glad that the capture has turned out well +for you."</p> +<p>"You certainly ought to share it," the captain said; "for if it +had not been for you, matters would have gone all the other way, +and we should have undoubtedly been captured."</p> +<p>"Oh, we don't want to share it! We have helped you to avoid a +French prison, but you have certainly saved us from the same thing, +so we are fairly quits."</p> +<p>"Well, we shall have time to talk about that when we get into +port. In the meantime we will search Jacques' lockers. Like enough +there may be something worth having there. Of course, he may have +taken it ashore, directly he landed; but it is hardly likely and, +as he has evidently captured several British merchantmen while he +has been out, he is sure to have some gold and valuables in the +lockers."</p> +<p>The search, indeed, brought to light four bags of money, each +marked with the name of an English ship. They contained, in all, +over 800 pounds; with several gold watches, rings, and other +valuables.</p> +<p>"Now, gentlemen," the captain said, "at least you will divide +this money with me. The Annette and the cargo below hatches are +certainly worth ten times as much, and I must insist upon your +going shares with me. I shall feel very hurt if you will not do +so."</p> +<p>"I thank you, Captain," Terence said, "and will not refuse your +offer. We shall have to provide ourselves with new uniforms, and +take a passage out to Portugal, which is where our regiments are, +at present; so the money will be very useful."</p> +<p>"And I see you have not a watch, monsieur. You had better take +one of these."</p> +<p>"Thanks! I parted with mine to a good woman, who helped me to +escape from Bayonne; so I will accept that offer, also."</p> +<p>In two hours the schooner entered the port of Saint Helier; the +lugger, under easy sail, following in her wake. They were greeted +with enthusiastic cheers by the crowd that gathered on the quays, +as soon as it was seen that the prize was the dreaded +Annette--which had, for some months past, been a terror to the +privateers and fishermen of the place--and that she should have +been captured by the Cerf seemed marvellous, indeed.</p> +<p>A British officer was on the quay when they got alongside. He +came on board at once.</p> +<p>"The governor has sent me to congratulate you, in his name, +Captain Teniers," he said, "on having captured a vessel double your +own size, which has for some time been the terror of these waters. +He will be glad if you will give me some particulars of the action; +and you will, when you can spare time afterwards, go up and give +him a full report of it."</p> +<p>"I owe the capture entirely to these two gentlemen, who are +officers in your army. They had escaped from a French prison, and +were making for this port when I first saw them this morning, with +the Annette in hot chase after them. It did not strike me that it +was her, for it was only last night that the news came in that she +had been seen, yesterday, sailing towards Granville; and I thought +that she was the Lionne, which is a boat our own size. I came up +before she had overhauled the boat and, directly the fight began, I +could see the mistake I had made. But as she was a good deal faster +than we were, it was of no use running. There was just a chance +that I might cripple her, and get away."</p> +<p>He then related the incidents of the fight.</p> +<p>"Well, I congratulate you, gentlemen," the officer said, +heartily. "You have indeed done a good turn to Captain Teniers. To +whom have I the pleasure of speaking?"</p> +<p>"My name is O'Connor," replied Terence. "I have the honour to be +on Sir Arthur Wellesley's staff; and have the rank of captain in +our army, but am a colonel in the Portuguese service. This is +Lieutenant Ryan, of His Majesty's Mayo Fusiliers."</p> +<p>The officer looked a little doubtful, while Terence was +speaking. It was difficult to believe that the young fellow, of one +or two and twenty, at the outside, could be a captain on Lord +Wellington's staff--for Sir Arthur had been raised to the peerage, +after the battle of Talavera--still less that he should be a +colonel in the Portuguese service. However, he bowed gravely, and +said:</p> +<p>"My name is Major Chalmers, of the 35th. I am adjutant to the +governor. If it will not be inconvenient, I shall be glad if you +will return with me, and report yourselves to him."</p> +<p>"We are quite ready," Terence said. "We have nothing to do in +the way of packing up, for we have only the clothes we stand in; +which were, indeed, the property of the captain of the lugger, who +was killed in the action."</p> +<p>Telling Captain Teniers that they would be coming down again, +when they had seen the governor, the two friends accompanied the +officer. Very few words were said on the way, for the major +entertained strong doubts whether Terence had not been hoaxing him, +and whether the account he had given of himself was not altogether +fictitious. On arriving at the governor's he left them for a few +minutes in the anteroom; while he went in and gave the account he +had received, from the captain, of the manner in which the lugger +had been captured; and said that the two gentlemen who had played +so important a part in the matter were, as they said, one of them +an officer on the staff of Lord Wellington and a colonel in the +Portuguese army, and the other a subaltern in the Mayo +Fusiliers.</p> +<p>"Why do you say, as they said, major? Have you any doubt about +it?"</p> +<p>"My only reason for doubting is that they are both young fellows +of about twenty, which would accord well enough with the claim of +one of them to be a lieutenant; but that the other should be a +captain on Lord Wellington's staff, and a colonel in the Portuguese +service, is quite incredible."</p> +<p>"It would seem so, certainly, major. However, it is evident that +they have both behaved extraordinarily well in this fight with the +Annette, and I cannot imagine that, whatever story a young fellow +might tell to civilians, he would venture to assume a military +title to which he had no claim, on arrival at a military station. +Will you please ask them to come in? At any rate, their story will +be worth hearing."</p> +<p>"Good day, gentlemen," he went on, as Terence and Ryan entered. +"I have to congratulate you, very heartily, upon the very efficient +manner in which you assisted in the capture of the French privateer +that has, for some time, been doing great damage among the islands. +She has been much more than a match for any of our privateers here +and, although she has been chased several times by the cruisers, +she has always managed to get away.</p> +<p>"And now, may I ask how you happened to be approaching the +island, in a small boat, at the time that the encounter took +place?"</p> +<p>"Certainly, sir. We were both prisoners at Bayonne. I myself had +been captured by the French, when endeavouring to cross the +frontier into Portugal with my regiment; while Lieutenant Ryan was +wounded at Talavera, and was in the hospital there when the +Spaniards left the town, and the French marched in."</p> +<p>"What is your regiment, Colonel O'Connor?"</p> +<p>"It is called the Minho regiment, sir, and consists of two +battalions. We have had the honour of being mentioned in general +orders more than once; and were so on the day after the first +attack of Victor upon Donkin's brigade, stationed on the hill +forming the left of the British position at Talavera."</p> +<p>The governor looked at his adjutant who, rising, went to a table +on which were a pile of official gazettes. Picking out one, he +handed it to the governor, who glanced through it.</p> +<p>"Here is the general order of the day," he said, "and assuredly +Lord Wellington speaks, in the very highest terms, of the service +that Colonel O'Connor and the Minho regiment, under his command, +rendered. Certainly very high praise, indeed.</p> +<p>"You will understand, sir, that we are obliged to be cautious +here; and it seemed so strange that so young an officer should have +attained the rank of colonel, that I was curious to know how it +could have occurred."</p> +<p>"I am by no means surprised that it should seem strange, to you, +that I should hold the rank I claim. I was, like my friend +Lieutenant Ryan, in the Mayo Fusiliers; when I had the good fortune +to be mentioned, in despatches, in connection with an affair in +which the transport that took us out to Portugal was engaged with +two French privateers. In consequence of the mention, General Fane +appointed me one of his aides-de-camp; and I acted in that capacity +during the campaign that ended at Corunna. I was left on the field, +insensible, on the night after that battle.</p> +<p>"When I came to myself, the army was embarking; so I made my way +through Galicia into Portugal and, on reaching Lisbon, was +appointed by Sir John Craddock to his staff; and was sent by him on +a mission to the northern frontier of Portugal.</p> +<p>"On the way I took the command of a body of freshly-raised +Portuguese levies, who were without an officer or leader of any +kind. With the aid of a small escort with me, I formed them into a +reliable regiment, and had the good fortune to do some service with +them. I was therefore confirmed in my command, and was given +Portuguese rank. Sir Arthur Wellesley, on succeeding Sir John +Craddock in the supreme command, still kept my name on the +headquarter staff, thereby adding greatly to my authority; and +continued me in the independent command of my regiment.</p> +<p>"After Talavera we were despatched to aid the Spaniards in +holding the pass of Banos but, before we arrived there, Soult had +crossed the pass and, being cut off by his force from rejoining the +army, I determined to cross the mountains into Portugal. In so +doing we came upon a French division, on its march to Plasencia, +and the company of my regiment with which I was were cut off, and +taken prisoners."</p> +<p>"Forgive me for having doubted you, Colonel O'Connor. I should, +of course, have remembered your name. In his report of his +operations, before and subsequent to the battle of Talavera, Lord +Wellington mentions, more than once, that his left during his +advance was covered by the partisan corps of Wilson and O'Connor; +and mentions, too, that it was by messengers from Colonel O'Connor +that he first learned how formidable a force was in his rear, and +was therefore able to cross the Tagus and escape from his perilous +position. Of course, it never entered my mind that the officer who +had rendered such valuable service was so young a man.</p> +<p>"There is only one mystery left. How was it, when you and Mr. +Ryan escaped from Bayonne, that you are found in a boat in the Bay +of Saint Malo?"</p> +<p>"It does seem rather a roundabout way of rejoining," Terence +said, with a smile. "We escaped in a boat and made along the north +coast of Spain but, when off Santander, were blown out to sea in a +gale, and were picked up by a French privateer. We were supposed to +be two Spanish fishermen and, as the privateer was short of boats, +they took ours and enrolled us among their crew. They were on their +way to Brest, and we took an opportunity to desert, and made our +way on foot until we reached the mouth of the river Sienne; and +made off in a boat, last night. This morning we saw the privateer +in chase of us, and should certainly have been recaptured had not +the Cerf come up and engaged her. While the fight was going on we +had gone on board the schooner, unperceived by either party, and +took what seemed to us the best way of aiding our friends; who were +getting somewhat the worst of it, the crew of the lugger being very +much stronger than the crew of the schooner."</p> +<p>"Well, I hope that you will both, at once, take up your quarters +with me as long as you stay here; and I shall then have an +opportunity of hearing of your adventures more in detail."</p> +<p>"Thank you very much, sir. We shall be very happy to accept your +kind invitation; but I hope we shall not trespass upon your +hospitality long, for we are anxious to be off, as soon as +possible, so as to rejoin without loss of time. I am particularly +so for, although it will be two or three months before there is any +movement of the troops, I am afraid of finding someone else +appointed to the command of my regiment; and I have been so long +with it, now, that I should be sorry indeed to be put to any other +work."</p> +<p>"That I can quite understand. Well, there is no regular +communication from here, but there is not a week passes without +some craft or other sailing from here to Weymouth."</p> +<p>"We would rather, if possible, be put on board some ship on her +way to Portugal," Terence said. "If we landed in England, we should +have to report ourselves, and might be sent to a depot, and be +months before we got out there again. I spoke to the captain of the +Cerf about it, this morning; and he was good enough to promise +that, as soon as he had repaired damages, he would run out into the +Bay, and put us on board the first ship he overhauled bound for the +Peninsula."</p> +<p>"That would be an excellent plan, from your point of view," the +governor said. "Teniers is one of the best sailors on the island, +and has several times carried despatches for me to Weymouth. You +could not be in better hands."</p> +<p>Four days later the schooner was ready to sail again.</p> +<p>"This will be my last voyage in her," the captain said. "I have +had an offer for her, and shall sell her as soon as I come back +again, as I shall take the command of the Annette. I ought to do +well in her, for her rig and build are so evidently French that I +shall be able to creep up close to any French vessel making along +the coast, or returning from abroad, without being suspected of +being an enemy. Of course, I shall have to carry a much stronger +crew than at present; and I hope to clip the wings of some of these +French privateers, before long."</p> +<p>They had, on the day of their landing, ordered new uniforms, and +had purchased a stock of underclothing. They were fortunate in +being able to pick up swords and belts, and all were now ready for +them and, on the fifth day after landing, they said goodbye to the +governor, and sailed on board the Cerf.</p> +<p>When twenty-four hours out the vessel lay to, being now on the +track of ships bound south. On the following day they overhauled +six vessels and, as the last of these was bound with military +stores for Lisbon, Terence and Ryan were transferred to her. With a +hearty adieu to the skipper, they took their places in the boat and +were rowed to the vessel; being greeted, on their departure, by a +loud and hearty cheer from the crew of the privateer. There were no +passengers on board the store ship, and they had an uneventful +voyage, until she dropped anchor in the Tagus.</p> +<p>After paying the captain the small sum he charged for their +passage, they landed. They first went to a hotel and put up. On +sallying out, Ryan had no difficulty in learning that the Mayo +Fusiliers were at Portalegre.</p> +<p>Terence took his way to headquarters. The first person he met, +on entering, was his old acquaintance Captain Nelson, now wearing +the equipments of a major. The latter looked at him inquiringly, +and then exclaimed:</p> +<p>"Why, it is O'Connor! Why, I thought you were a prisoner! I am +delighted to see you. Where have you sprung from?"</p> +<p>"I escaped from Bayonne and, after sundry adventures, landed an +hour ago. In the first place, what has been done with my +regiment?"</p> +<p>"It is with Hill's division, which is at Abrantes and +Portalegre."</p> +<p>"Who is in command?"</p> +<p>"Your friend Herrara. No British officer has been appointed in +your place. There was some talk of handing it over to Trant in the +spring but, as nothing can be done before that, no one has yet been +nominated."</p> +<p>"I am glad, indeed, to hear it. I have been fidgeting about it, +ever since I went away."</p> +<p>"Well, I will take you in to the adjutant general, at once. I +heard him speak, more than once, of the services you rendered by +sending news that Soult and Ney were both in the valley, and so +enabling Lord Wellington to get safely across the Tagus. He said it +was an invaluable service. Of course Herrara reported your capture, +and that you had sacrificed yourself, and one of the companies, to +secure the safety of the rest. Now, come in."</p> +<a id="PicE" name="PicE"></a> +<center><img src="images/e.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: 'This is Colonel O'Connor, sir.'" /></center> +<p>"This is Colonel O'Connor, sir," Major Nelson said, as he +entered the adjutant general's room. "I could not resist the +pleasure of bringing him in to you. He has just escaped from +Bayonne, and landed an hour ago."</p> +<p>"I am glad to see you, indeed," the adjutant general said, +rising and shaking Terence warmly by the hand. "The last time we +met was on the day when Victor attacked us, in the afternoon, after +sending the Spaniards flying. You rendered us good service that +evening, and still greater by acquainting the commander-in-chief of +the large force that had gathered in his rear--a force at least +three times as strong as we had reckoned on. A day later, and we +should have been overwhelmed. As it was, we had just time to cross +the Tagus before they were ready to fall upon us.</p> +<p>"I am sure Lord Wellington will be gratified, indeed, to hear +that you are back again. I suppose you will like to return to your +command of the Minho regiment?"</p> +<p>"I should prefer that to anything else," Terence said, "though, +of course, I am ready to undertake any other duty that you might +intrust to me."</p> +<p>"No, I think it would be for the good of the service that you +should remain as you are. The difficulty of obtaining anything like +accurate information, of the strength and position of the enemy, is +one of the greatest we have to contend with; and indeed, were it +not for Trant's command and yours, we should be almost in the +dark.</p> +<p>"Please sit down for a minute. I will inform Lord Wellington of +your return."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch9" id="Ch9">Chapter 9</a>: Rejoining.</h2> +<p>The adjutant general returned in two or three minutes.</p> +<p>"Will you please come this way, Colonel O'Connor," he said, as +he re-entered the room; "the commander-in-chief wishes to speak to +you."</p> +<p>"I am glad to see you back, Colonel O'Connor," Lord Wellington +said cordially, but in his usual quick, short manner; "the last +time I saw you was at Salamende. You did well at Talavera; and +better still afterwards, when the information I received from you +was the only trustworthy news obtained during the campaign, and was +simply invaluable. Sir John Craddock did me no better service than +by recognizing your merits, and speaking so strongly to me in your +favour that I retained you in command of the corps that you had +raised. I shall be glad to know that you are again at their head, +when the campaign reopens; for I know that I can rely implicitly +upon you for information. Of course, your name has been removed +from the list of my staff, since you were taken prisoner; but it +shall appear in orders tomorrow again. I shall be glad if you will +dine with me, this evening."</p> +<p>"I wish I had a few more young officers like that," he said to +the adjutant general, when Terence had bowed and retired. "He is +full of energy, and ready to undertake any wild adventure, and yet +he is as prudent and thoughtful as most men double his age. I like +his face. He has a right to be proud of the position he has won, +but there is not the least nonsense about him, and he evidently has +no idea that he has done anything out of the ordinary course. At +first sight he looks a mere good-tempered lad, but the lower part +of his face is marked by such resolution and firmness that it goes +far to explain why he has succeeded."</p> +<p>There were but four other officers dining with the +commander-in-chief that evening. Lord Wellington asked Terence +several questions as to the route the convoy of prisoners had +followed, the treatment they had received, and the nature of the +roads, and whether the Spanish guerillas were in force. Terence +gave a brief account of the attack that had been made on the French +convoy, and the share that he and his fellow prisoners had taken in +the affair; at which Lord Wellington's usually impassive face +lighted up with a smile.</p> +<p>"That was a somewhat irregular proceeding, Colonel +O'Connor."</p> +<p>"I am afraid so, sir; but after their treatment by the Spaniards +when in the hospital at Talavera, our men were so furious against +them that I believe they would have fought them, even had I +endeavoured to hold them back; which, indeed, being a prisoner, I +do not know that I should have had any authority to do."</p> +<p>"And how did you escape from Bayonne?" the general asked.</p> +<p>"Through the good offices of some of the soldiers who had been +our escort, sir. They were on duty as a prison guard and, being +grateful for the help that we had given them in the affair with the +guerillas, they aided me to escape."</p> +<p>"And how did you manage afterwards?"</p> +<p>Terence related very briefly the adventures that he and his +companion had had, before at last reaching Jersey.</p> +<p>On leaving, the adjutant general requested him to call in the +morning before starting to rejoin his regiment, as he expressed his +intention of doing. The talk was a long and friendly one, the +adjutant general asking many questions as to the constitution of +his corps.</p> +<p>"There is one thing I should like very much, sir," Terence said, +after he had finished, "it would be a great assistance to me if I +had an English officer, as adjutant."</p> +<p>"Do you mean one for each battalion, or one for the two?"</p> +<p>"I think that one for both battalions would answer the purpose, +sir. It would certainly be of great assistance to me, and take a +great many details off my hands."</p> +<p>"I certainly think that you do need assistance. Is there any one +you would specially wish to be appointed?"</p> +<p>"I should be very glad to have Lieutenant Ryan, who has been +with me on my late journey. We are old friends, as I was in the +Mayo regiment with him. He speaks Portuguese very fairly. Of +course, it would be useless for me to have an officer who did not +do so. I should certainly prefer him to anyone else."</p> +<p>"That is easily managed," the officer replied. "I will put him +in orders, today, as appointed adjutant to the Minho Portuguese +regiment, with the acting rank of captain. I will send a note to +Lord Beresford, stating the reason for the appointment for, as you +and your officers owe your local rank to him, he may feel that he +ought to have been specially informed of Ryan's appointment; +although your corps is in no way under his orders, but acting with +the British army."</p> +<p>"I am very much obliged to you, indeed, sir. It will be a great +comfort to me to have an adjutant, and it will naturally be much +more pleasant to have one upon whom I know I can depend absolutely. +Indeed, I have been rather in an isolated position, so far. The +majors of the two battalions naturally associate with their own +officers, consequently Colonel Herrara has been my only intimate +friend and, although he is a very good fellow, one longs sometimes +for the companionship of a brother Englishman."</p> +<p>Terence had not told Dick Ryan of his intention to ask for him +as his adjutant. When he joined him at the hotel, he saluted him +with:</p> +<p>"Well, Captain Ryan, have you everything ready for the +start?"</p> +<p>"I have, General," Dick replied with a grin, "or perhaps I ought +to say Field Marshal."</p> +<p>"Not yet, Dicky, not yet; and indeed, possibly I am premature +myself, in addressing you as Captain."</p> +<p>"Rather; I should say I have a good many steps to make, before I +get my company."</p> +<p>"Well, Dick, I can tell you that, when the orders come out +today, you will see your name among them as appointed adjutant to +the Minho Portuguese regiment, with acting rank as captain."</p> +<p>"Hurrah!" Ryan shouted. "You don't say that you have managed it, +old fellow? I am delighted. This is glorious. I am awfully obliged +to you."</p> +<p>"I think, Dick, we will make up our minds not to start until +this evening. You know we had arranged to hire a vehicle, and that +I should get a horse when I joined; but I think now we may as well +buy the horses at once, for of course you will be mounted, too. We +might pay a little more for them, but we should save the expense of +the carriage."</p> +<p>"That would be much better," Dick said. "Let us go and get them, +at once. There must be plenty of horses for sale in a place like +this and, as we are both flush of money, I should think that a +couple of hours would do it."</p> +<p>"I hope it will. As I told them at headquarters that I was going +to start today, I should not like any of them to run across me here +this evening. No doubt the landlord of the hotel can tell us of +some man who keeps the sort of animals we want. The saddlery we +shall have no difficulty about."</p> +<p>Two hours later a couple of serviceable horses had been bought; +with saddles, bridles, holsters, and valises. In the last named +were packed necessaries for the journey, and each provided himself +with a brace of double-barrelled pistols. The rest of their effects +were packed in the trunks they had bought at Jersey, and were +handed over to a Portuguese firm of carriers, to be sent up to the +regiment.</p> +<p>At two o'clock they mounted and rode to Sobral. The next day +they rode to Santarem, and on the following evening to Abrantes. +They here learned that their corps was in camp, with two other +Portuguese regiments, four miles higher up the river. As it was +dark when they arrived at Abrantes, they agreed to sleep there and +go on the next morning; as Terence wished to report himself to +General Hill, to whose division the regiment was attached, until +operations should commence in the spring.</p> +<p>They put up at an inn and, having eaten a meal, walked out into +the town, which was full of British soldiers. They were not long +before they found the cafe that was set apart for the use of +officers and, on entering, Terence at once joined a party of three, +belonging to a regiment with all of whose officers he was +acquainted, as they had been encamped next to the Mayo Fusiliers +during the long months preceding the advance up the valley of the +Tagus. Ryan was, of course, equally known to them; and the three +officers rose, with an exclamation of surprise, as the newcomers +walked up to the table.</p> +<p>"Why, O'Connor! How in the world did you get here? How are you, +Ryan? I thought that you were both prisoners."</p> +<p>"So we were," Terence said, "but as you see, we gave them the +slip, and here we are."</p> +<p>They drew up chairs to the little table.</p> +<p>"You may consider yourself lucky in your regiment being on the +river, O'Connor. You will be much better off than Ryan will be, at +Portalegre."</p> +<p>"I am seconded," Ryan said, "and have been appointed O'Connor's +adjutant, with the temporary rank of captain."</p> +<p>"I congratulate you. The chances are you will have a much better +time of it than if you were with your own regiment. I don't mean +now, but when the campaign begins in the spring. O'Connor always +seems to be in the thick of it, while our division may remain here, +while the fighting is going on somewhere else. Besides, he always +manages to dine a good deal better than we do. His fellows, being +Portuguese, are able to get supplies, when the peasants are all +ready to take their oath that they have not so much as a loaf of +bread or a fowl in their village.</p> +<p>"How will you manage to get on with them, Ryan, without speaking +their language? Oh! I remember, you were grinding up Portuguese all +the spring, so I suppose you can get on pretty well, now."</p> +<p>"Yes; O'Connor promised that he would ask for me, as soon as I +could speak the language, so I stuck at it hard; and now, you see, +I have got my reward."</p> +<p>"I can tell you that the troops, here, are a good deal better +off than they are elsewhere. There is a fearful want of land +carriage, but we get our supplies up by boats. That is why the +Portuguese regiments are encamped on the river.</p> +<p>"Well, how did you get away from the French? It is curious that +when I saw O'Grady last--which was a fortnight ago, when he came in +to get a conveyance to take over sundry cases of whisky that had +come up the river, for the use of his mess--he said:</p> +<p>"'I expect that O'Connor and Dick Ryan will turn up here, before +the spring. I am sure they will, if they have got together.'"</p> +<p>"It is too long a story to tell, here," Ryan said. "It is full +of hairbreadth escapes, dangers by sea and land, and ends up with a +naval battle."</p> +<p>The officers laughed.</p> +<p>"Well, will you come to our quarters?" one of them said. "We +have got some decent wine, and some really good cigars which came +up from Lisbon last week, and there are lots of our fellows who +will be glad to see you."</p> +<p>They accordingly adjourned to a large building where the +officers of the regiment were quartered and, in the apartment that +had been turned into a mess room, they found a dozen officers, all +of whom were known both to Terence and Ryan. After many questions +were asked and answered on both sides, Ryan was requested to tell +the story of their adventures after being taken prisoners. He told +it in an exaggerated style that elicited roars of laughter, making +the most of what he called The Battle of the Shirt Sleeves with the +guerillas; exaggerating the dangers of his escape, and the horrors +of their imprisonment, for a week, among the sails and nets.</p> +<p>"O'Connor," he said, "has hardly got back his sense of smell +yet. The stink of tar, mixed with fishy odours, will be vivid in my +remembrance for the rest of my life."</p> +<p>When he had at last finished, one of them said:</p> +<p>"And now, how much of all this is true, Ryan?"</p> +<p>"Every fact is just as I have told it," he replied gravely. "You +may think that I have exaggerated, for did an Irishman ever tell a +story, without exaggeration? But I give you my honour that never +did one keep nearer to the truth than I have done. I don't say that +the fisherman's wife took quite such a strong fancy to me as I have +stated, although she can hardly have been insensible to my personal +advantages; but really, otherwise, I don't know that I have +diverged far from the narrow path of truth. I tell you, those two +days that we were running before that gale was a thing I never wish +to go through again."</p> +<p>"And you really tied up the Maire of Granville, Ryan?"</p> +<p>"We did so," Dicky said, "and a miserable object the poor little +fat man looked, as he sat in his chair trussed up like a fowl."</p> +<p>"And now, about the sea fight, Ryan?"</p> +<p>"Every word was as it happened. O'Connor and I turned gunners, +and very decent shots we made, too; and a proof of it was that, if +we would have taken it, I believe the captain of the schooner would +have given us half the booty found in the lugger's hold; but we +were modest and self denying, and contented ourselves with a third, +each, of the cash found in the captain's cabin; which we could not +have refused if we wanted to, the captain made such a point of it. +It came to nearly three hundred pounds apiece; and mighty useful it +was, for we had, of course, to get new uniforms and rigs out, and +horses and saddlery at Lisbon. I don't know what I should have done +without it, for my family's finances would not have stood my +drawing upon them; and another mortgage would have ruined them, +entirely."</p> +<p>"Well, certainly, that is a substantial proof of the truth of +that incident in your story; but I think that, rather than have +passed forty-eight hours in that storm, I would have stopped at +Bayonne and taken my chance of exchange."</p> +<p>"Then I am afraid, Forester, that you are deficient in martial +ardour," Terence said gravely. "Our desire to be back fighting the +French was so great that no dangers would have appalled us."</p> +<p>There was a general laugh.</p> +<p>"Well, at any rate, you managed uncommonly well, Ryan, whether +it was martial ardour that animated you or not; and O'Grady was not +far wrong when he said that you and O'Connor would creep out +through a mouse's hole, if there was no other way of doing it."</p> +<p>"Now, what has been doing since we have been away?" Terence +asked.</p> +<p>"Well, to begin with, all Andalusia has been captured by Soult. +Suchet has occupied Valencia. Lerida was captured by him, after a +scandalously weak resistance; for there were over nine thousand +troops there, and the place surrendered after only 1000 had fallen. +Gerona, on the other hand, was only captured by Augereau after a +resistance as gallant as that of Saragossa.</p> +<p>"That is the extraordinary thing about these Spaniards. +Sometimes they show themselves cowardly beyond expression, at +others they fight like heroes. Just at present, even the Juntas do +not pretend that they have an army capable of driving the French +out of the Pyrenees; which is a comfort, for we shall have to rely +upon ourselves and not be humbugged by the Spaniards, the +worthlessness of whose promises, Lord Wellington has ascertained, +by bitter experience. The Portuguese government is as troublesome +and as truthless as that of Spain, but Wellington is able to hold +his own with them; and there is little doubt that the regular +regiments will fight, and be really of valuable assistance to us; +but these have been raised in spite of the constant opposition of +the Junta at Lisbon.</p> +<p>"There is no doubt that the next campaign will be a hot one for, +now that Spain has been as completely subdued as such vainglorious, +excitable people can be subdued, the French marshals are free to +join against us; and it is hard to see how, with but 30,000 men, we +are going to defend Portugal against ten times that number of +French. Still, I suppose we shall do it, somehow. The French have a +large army on the other side of the Aqueda, and there is no doubt +they will besiege Ciudad Rodrigo, as soon as winter is over. I +doubt whether we shall be strong enough to march to its relief, and +I fancy that in that direction the Coa will be about our limit. At +any rate, it is likely to be a stirring campaign.</p> +<p>"The absurdity of the thing is, that we have an army in Sicily +which might as well be at Jericho, for any use it is. If it joined +us here, it would make all the difference in the world; though +certainly till the campaign opens it would have to be quartered at +Lisbon, for it is as much as the wretched transport can do to feed +us. Now the truth is, Portugal is a miserably poor country at the +best of times, and does not produce enough for the wants of the +people. Of course, it has been terribly impoverished by the war. +The fields in most places have been untilled and, in fact, the +greater portion of the population, as well as our army, has to be +fed from England.</p> +<p>"Altogether, Wellington must have enough worry to drive an +ordinary man out of his mind. I never heard of such difficulties as +those he has to meet. We come to help a people who won't help +themselves, to fight for people who not only won't fight for +themselves, but want to dictate how we shall fight. Instead of +being fed by the country, we have to feed it; and the whole object +of the Juntas, both in Spain and Portugal, seems to be to throw +every difficulty in our way, and to thwart us at every turn. The +first step towards success would be to hang every member, of every +Junta, in every place we occupy."</p> +<p>A general chorus of "Hear, hear!" showed how deeply was the +feeling excited by the conduct of the Portuguese and Spanish +authorities.</p> +<p>After chatting until a late hour, Terence and his companion +returned to their inn. The next morning, Terence reported himself +to General Hill.</p> +<p>"I am glad to see you again, Colonel O'Connor," the general +said. "The last time we met was when the surgeons were dressing my +wounds, on the heights near Talavera. That was a hot business, for +a time."</p> +<p>"Yes, sir; and I have to thank you, very much, for the very kind +report you sent in as to the conduct of my regiment."</p> +<p>"They deserved it," the general said. "If they had not come up +at the time they did, we should have had hard work to retake that +hill.</p> +<p>"Your regiment has been behaving very well, since they have been +here. They, like the other Portuguese regiments, have often been on +short rations, and their pay is very much in arrear, but there has +been no grumbling. I know Herrara will be extremely glad to have +you back again in command. He has said as much, several times, when +he has been in here. He is a good man, but not strong enough for +his position; and I can see that he feels that, himself, and is +conscious that he is not equal to the responsibility. I intended to +recommend that a British officer should be placed in command of the +regiment, before the campaign opens in the spring. Your two majors +do their best, but they have scarcely sufficient weight; for their +men know that they were but troopers when the regiment was first +raised."</p> +<p>"I shall be glad to be back again, sir; and I am pleased to say +that I have been given an adjutant--Lieutenant Ryan, of the Mayo +Fusiliers. He has the acting rank of captain. He is an old friend +of mine, and is a good officer. He has just effected an escape from +Bayonne with me."</p> +<p>"Yes, that will be of great assistance to you," the general +said. "With two battalions to command, you must want a right-hand +man very much. I shall be glad if your regiment remains in my +division, when the campaign reopens; but I suppose that, as before, +you will be sent ahead. At present, it is only attached to my +command for convenience of rationing and pay. I have inspected it +twice, and it is by far the finest of the Portuguese regiments +here. But I can see a certain deterioration, and I am sure that +they want you back badly. Still, it is not your loss only that is +telling on them. No soldiers like to go without their pay. Lord +Wellington himself is always kept short of funds. The Portuguese +Ministry declare that they have none. Of course that is all a lie +but, true or false, it is certain that all the Portuguese regiments +are greatly in arrears of pay, ill-provided with clothes, and +indeed would be starved, were it not that they are fed by our +commissariat."</p> +<p>After his interview with the general, Terence went back to the +inn and, five minutes later, started with Ryan to join the +regiment. The two battalions were engaged in drill when they rode +up, but as the men recognized Terence there was a sudden movement, +then a tremendous cheer and, breaking their ranks, they ran towards +him, waving their shakos and shouting loudly; while Herrara, Bull, +and Macwitty galloped up to shake him by the hand.</p> +<p>"This is not a very military proceeding," Terence laughed, "but +I cannot help being gratified."</p> +<p>He held up his hands for silence.</p> +<p>"Form the men into a hollow square," he said to the majors.</p> +<p>In a very short time the order was carried out, and then Terence +addressed them.</p> +<p>"My men," he said, "I am deeply gratified by your hearty +reception, and I can assure you that I am quite as glad to be back +in the regiment as the regiment can be to have me with it again. +While I was a prisoner, one of the things that troubled me most was +that, when I returned, I might find that someone else had been +appointed your commander; and I was glad indeed when, upon landing +at Lisbon, I heard that this had not been the case, and that I +could resume my command of a body of men of whom I am proud; and at +no time more proud than when you beat off the attacks of a whole +brigade of French cavalry, and made good your escape to the +mountains. I regret that some of your comrades failed to do this, +but the manner in which they did their duty, and sacrificed +themselves to cover your retreat, was worthy of all praise, and +reflects the highest credit upon the regiment.</p> +<p>"I have been fortunate enough to make my escape from a French +prison, in company with my friend here, Captain Ryan; who has, at +my request, been appointed by the commander-in-chief to be your +adjutant. I am sorry to hear that there have been difficulties in +the way of rations, and that your pay is in arrears. However, I +know well that you are not serving for the sake of pay, but to +defend your country from invasion by the French; and that whether +you get your pay day by day, or receive it in a lump sum later on, +will make no difference to you; and indeed, in some respects, you +will be better off for the delay for, getting it daily, it is spent +as soon as obtained; whereas, if it comes in a lump sum, it will be +useful to you when you return to your homes, after your work is +done. I am confident that, in this regiment at least, which has +borne itself so well from the day that it was raised, there will be +neither grumbling nor discontent; but that you will suffer any +hardship or privation that may come in your way as trifling +incidents in the great work that you have undertaken: to defend, at +the cost of your lives if need be, your country from the invader. +The regiment is dismissed drill for the day."</p> +<p>Loud cheers at once broke from the men and, falling out, they +proceeded to their tents.</p> +<p>"Well, Terence, there is no doubt about the enthusiasm of your +fellows," Ryan remarked. "As you said, it was hardly military, but +it was better. It was real affection, and I am sure the men would +follow you anywhere."</p> +<p>Ryan shook hands with Herrara, Bull, and Macwitty; all of whom +he knew well, from his frequent visits to Terence in the +spring.</p> +<p>"I am very glad that you have come to us, Captain Ryan," Bull +said. "A regiment don't seem like a regiment without an adjutant, +and it will take a lot of work off the colonel's hands. I wish +there could have been one for each battalion."</p> +<p>"How has the regiment been going on, Bull?"</p> +<p>"Nothing much to grumble about, sir; but I must say that it has +been more slack than it was. We have all done our best, but we have +missed you terribly; and the men don't seem to take quite as much +pains with their drill as they used to do, when you were in +command. However, that will be all right now that you have come +back again. I have always found that when the battalion was not +working well, the men have pulled themselves together at once when +I said:</p> +<p>"'This won't do, lads. The colonel will be grievously +disappointed, when he comes back again, if he finds that you have +lost your smartness.'</p> +<p>"It was as much as we could do to hold them in hand, when they +saw you surrounded by the French. They would have rushed back +again, to a man, if we would have let them. I own I felt it hard, +myself, to be marching away and leaving you behind."</p> +<p>In a few minutes, a couple of tents were erected by the side of +that of Herrara and, while these were being got ready for +occupation, Terence and Ryan, with the two majors, entered that of +Herrara; and the latter produced two or three bottles of wine from +his private store, and a box of cigars. So for some time they sat +chatting, Terence giving an outline of the events that had happened +since he had been away from the regiment. He and Ryan had ordered +half a dozen small casks of wine, and two cases of whisky, to be +sent up with their trunks by water; and now asked regarding the +rations of the men.</p> +<p>"They get their bread regularly," Herrara said. "They have put +up some large bakeries at Abrantes and, as the flour is brought up +in boats, there is no difficulty that way. They get their meat +pretty regularly, and their wine always. There is no ground of +complaint, whatever, as to rations here; though, from what I hear, +it is very different at the stations where everything has to be +taken up by waggons or mules.</p> +<p>"The difficulty is with the uniforms. Not one has been served +out, and it is really difficult to get the men to look smart, when +many of them are dressed almost in rags. It is still worse in the +matter of boots. A great many of them were badly cut, when we were +in the mountains; and especially in the rough march we had over the +hills, after you left us. The men themselves would greatly prefer +sandals to boots, being more accustomed to them; and could +certainly march farther in them than in stiff English boots. But of +course, it would be of no use sending in any requisition for +them."</p> +<p>"I don't see why they should not wear sandals," Terence said; +"at any rate, until there is an issue of boots. I suppose the men +can make them, themselves."</p> +<p>"In most cases, no doubt, they could. At any rate, those who +could, would make them for the others. Of course they will all have +to wear them of one colour; but as most of the cattle are black, +there would be no difficulty about that. I have no doubt that we +could get any number of hides, at a nominal price, from the +commissariat. At any rate, I will see about it. I suppose they are +made a good deal like Indian moccasins. I noticed that many of the +Spanish troops wore them, but I did not examine them +particularly."</p> +<p>"They are very easily made," Herrara said. "You put your foot on +a piece of hide of the right size. It is drawn right up over the +foot, and laced. Another thickness of hide is sewn at the bottom, +to form the sole, and there it is. Of course, for work in the hills +it might be well to use a double thickness of hide for the sole. +The upper part is made of the thinnest portion of the hide and, if +grease is rubbed well inside, so as to soften the leather as much +as possible, it makes the most comfortable footgear possible."</p> +<p>"Well, we will try it, anyhow," Terence said. "It mayn't look so +soldierly but, at any rate, it would look as well as boots with the +toes out; and if any general inspects us, and objects to them, we +can say that we shall be perfectly ready to give them up, as soon +as boots are issued to us. But by using all black hides, I really +do not think that it will look bad; and there would certainly be +the advantage that, for a night attack, the tread would be much +more noiseless than that of a heavy boot.</p> +<p>"I really like the idea, very much. The best plan will be to +pick out two or three score of men who are shoemakers by trade, and +pay them a trifle for the making of each pair. In that way we could +get much greater uniformity than were each man to make his own.</p> +<p>"As to the clothes, I don't see that anything can be done about +it, beyond getting a supply of needles and thread, and seeing that +every hole is mended as well as possible. I daresay new uniforms +will be served out, before the spring. It does not matter much in +camp, and I suppose we are no worse than the other Portuguese +regiments."</p> +<p>The next week was spent in steady drill and, by the end of that +time, the exercises were all done as smartly as before. Terence had +already tried the experiment of sandals. The commissariat at +Abrantes were glad enough to supply hides, at a nominal price. He +began by taking a dozen. These were first handed to a number of men +relieved from other duties who, after scraping the under side, +rubbed them with fat, and kneaded them until they were perfectly +soft and pliable. The shoemakers then took them in hand and, after +a few samples of various shapes were tried, one was fixed upon, in +which the sandal was bound to the foot by straps of the same +material, with a double thickness of sole. Terence tried these +himself, and found them extremely comfortable for walking; and gave +orders that one company should be entirely provided with them. As +to appearance, they were vastly superior to the cracked and bulged +boots the men were wearing.</p> +<p>After a week of sharp drill Terence was satisfied, and proposed +to Ryan that they should now ride over to Portalegre, and pay a +visit to their friends of the Fusiliers and, accordingly, the next +day they went over. They were most heartily received.</p> +<p>"Sure, Terence, I knew well enough that you and Dicky Ryan would +be back here, before long. And so you have taken him from us! Well, +it is a relief to the regiment; and I only hope that now he is an +adjutant he will learn manners, and behave with a little more +discretion than he has ever shown before. How you could have +saddled yourself with such a hare-brained lad is more than I can +imagine."</p> +<p>"That is all very well, O'Grady," Ryan laughed, "but it is a +question of the pot calling the kettle black; only in this case the +pot is a good deal blacker than the kettle. There may be some +excuse for a subaltern like me, but none for a war-scarred veteran +like yourself."</p> +<p>"Dick will do very well, O'Grady," Terence said. "I can tell you +he sits in his tent, and does his office work, as steadily as if he +had been at it all his life; and if you had seen him drilling a +battalion, you would be delighted. It is just jealousy that makes +you run him down, O'Grady--you were too lazy to learn Portuguese, +yourself."</p> +<p>"Is it lazy you say that I am, Terence? There is no more active +officer in the regiment, and you know it. As for the heathen +language, it is not fit for an honest tongue. They ought to have +sent over a supply of grammars and dictionaries, and taught the +whole nation to speak English.</p> +<p>"When did you get back?"</p> +<p>"A week ago; but we have been too busy drilling the regiment to +come over, before.</p> +<p>"How are you getting on here, Colonel?"</p> +<p>"We are not getting on at all, O'Connor. It is worse than +stationary we are. They ought to put on double the number of carts +they allow us. Half the time we are on short rations; except wine +which, thank Heaven, the commissariat can buy in the country. It is +evil times that we have fallen upon, and how we shall do, when the +snow begins to fall heavily, is more than I can tell you."</p> +<p>"At any rate, Colonel, from what I hear you are a good deal +better off than the division at Guarda, for you are but a day's +march from the river."</p> +<p>"The carts take two days over it," the colonel said, "and then +bring next to nothing; for the poor bastes that draw them are half +starved, and it is as much as they can do to crawl along. They +might just as well keep the whole division at Abrantes, instead of +sticking half of them out here, just as if the French were going to +attack us now.</p> +<p>"There is the luncheon bugle. After we have done, you may tell +us how you and Ryan got out of the hands of the French, for I +suppose you were not exchanged."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch10" id="Ch10">Chapter 10</a>: Almeida.</h2> +<p>The winter was long and tedious but, whenever the weather +permitted, Terence set his men at work; taking them twice a week +for long marches, so as to keep their powers in that direction +unabated. The sandals turned out a great success. The men had no +greatcoats, but they supplied the want by cutting a slit in the +centre of their black blankets and passing the head through it. +This answered all the purposes, and hid the shabby condition of +their uniforms.</p> +<p>General Hill occasionally rode over to inspect this and the +other Portuguese regiments encamped near them.</p> +<p>"That is a very good plan of yours, Colonel O'Connor," he said, +the first time the whole regiment turned out in their sandals. "It +is a much more sensible footgear than the boots."</p> +<p>"I should not have adopted them, General, if the men had had any +boots to put on; but those they had became absolutely unwearable. +Some of the soles were completely off, the upper leathers were so +cut and worn that they were literally of no use and, in many cases. +they were falling to pieces. The men like the sandals much better, +and certainly march with greater ease. Yesterday they did thirty +miles, and came in comparatively fresh."</p> +<p>"I wish the whole army were shod so," the general said. "It +would improve their marching powers, and we should not have so many +men laid up, footsore. I should say that the boots supplied to the +army are the very worst that soldiers were ever cursed with. They +are heavy, they are nearly as hard as iron when the weather is dry, +and are as rotten as blotting paper when it is wet. It is quite an +accident if a man gets a pair to fit him properly. I believe it +would be better if they were trained to march barefooted. Their +feet would soon get hardened and, at any rate, it would be an +improvement on the boots now served out to them.</p> +<p>"I wish the other Portuguese regiments were as well drilled and +as well set up as your fellows. Of course, your men don't look +smart, at present, and would not make a good show on a parade +ground; but I hear that there are a large quantity of uniforms +coming out, shortly; and I hope, long before the campaign opens, +they will all be served out. The British regiments are almost as +badly off as the native ones. However, I suppose matters will right +themselves before the spring; but they are almost as badly off, +now, as they were when they marched into Corunna. The absurdity of +the whole thing is that all the newly-raised Portuguese levies, who +will certainly not be called upon to cross the frontier until next +year, have got uniforms; while the men who have to do the work are +almost in rags."</p> +<p>Two or three of the officers of the Fusiliers rode over +frequently, to stop for a night or so with Terence; and the latter +found time pass much more pleasantly than he had done before Ryan +had joined him. During the day both their hands were full; but the +evenings were very pleasant, now that he had Dick as well as +Herrara to talk to. The feeling of the responsibility on his +shoulders steadied Ryan a good deal, and he was turning out a far +more useful assistant than Terence had expected; but when work was +over, his spirits were as high as ever, and the conversation in +Terence's tent seldom languished.</p> +<p>Spring came, but there was no movement on the part of the +troops. Ney, with 50,000 men, began the siege of Ciudad Rodrigo in +earnest. The Agueda had now become fordable; and Crawford, with his +light brigade, 2500 strong, was exposed to a sudden attack at any +time. On the 1st of June Terence received orders to march with his +regiment to Guarda, where Wellington was concentrating the greater +portion of his army; leaving Hill, with 12,000 men, to guard the +southern portion of the frontier.</p> +<p>Both the Spanish and Portuguese urged the general to relieve +Ciudad Rodrigo; but Wellington refused, steadily, to hazard the +whole fortune of the campaign on an enterprise which was unlikely +to succeed. His total force was but 56,000 men, of whom 20,000 were +untried Portuguese. Garrisons had to be placed at several points, +and 8000 Portuguese were posted at Thomar, a day's march from +Abrantes, as a reserve for Hill.</p> +<p>It was not only the 50,000 infantry and 8000 cavalry of Massena, +who now commanded in front of Ciudad Rodrigo, that he had to reckon +with. Regnier's division was at Coria; and could, in three easy +marches, reach Guarda; or in four fall on Hill at Abrantes; and +with but 26,000 men in line, it would have been a desperate +enterprise, indeed, to attack 60,000 veteran French soldiers merely +for the sake of carrying off the 5000 undisciplined Portuguese +besieged at Ciudad.</p> +<p>The Minho regiment had only received their new uniforms a month +before the order came, and made a good show as they marched into +Guarda, where Wellington's headquarters were now established. When +Terence reported himself to the adjutant general, the latter +said:</p> +<p>"At present, Colonel O'Connor, you cannot be employed in your +former work of scouting. The French are altogether too powerful for +a couple of battalions to approach them and, with 8000 cavalry, +they would make short work of you. Crawford must soon fall back +behind the Coa. His position already is a very hazardous one. It +has therefore been decided to place 1500 of your men along on this +side of the Coa and, with half a battalion, you will march at once +to Almeida to strengthen the garrison of that place which, as soon +as Crawford retires, is certain to be besieged. It should be able +to offer a long and stout resistance.</p> +<p>"You will, of course, be under the general orders of the +commandant; but you will receive an authorization to take +independent action, should you think fit: that is to say, if you +find the place can be no longer defended, and the commandant is +intending to surrender, you are at liberty to withdraw your +command, if you find it possible to do so."</p> +<p>On the following morning the corps left Guarda and, leaving a +battalion and a half on the Coa, under Herrara; Terence, with 500 +men, after a long march, entered Almeida that night. The town, +which was fortified, was occupied only by Portuguese troops. It was +capable of repulsing a sudden attack, but was in no condition to +withstand a regular siege. It was deficient in magazines and bomb +proofs; and the powder, of which there was a large supply, was +stored in an old castle in the middle of the town. On entering the +place, Terence at once called upon Colonel Cox, who was in +command.</p> +<p>"I am glad that you have come, Colonel O'Connor," the latter +said. "I know that Lord Wellington expects me to make a long +defence, and to keep Massena here for at least a month but, +although I mean to do my best, I cannot conceal from myself that +the defences are terribly defective. Then, too, more than half my +force are newly-levied militia, in whom very little dependence can +be placed. Your men will be invaluable, in case of assault; but it +is not assault I fear, so much as having the place tumbling about +our ears by their artillery, which can be so placed as to command +it from several points. We are very short of artillery, and the +guns are well nigh as old as the fortifications."</p> +<p>"We will do our best, Colonel, in any direction you may point +out; and I think that we could defend a breach against any +reasonable force brought against it. I may say that I have been +ordered, if the worst comes to the worst, to endeavour to make my +way out of the town before it surrenders."</p> +<p>For a fortnight the place was left unmolested. Crawford's +division still kept beyond the Coa, and his cavalry had had several +engagements with French reconnoitring parties. On the 2nd of July, +however, the news came that, after a most gallant resistance, +Ciudad Rodrigo had surrendered; and it was now certain that the +storm would roll westward, in a very short time. Massena, however, +delayed strangely; and it was not until daylight on the 24th that a +sudden roll of musketry, followed almost immediately by a heavy +artillery fire, told the garrison of Almeida that the light +division was suddenly attacked by the enemy.</p> +<p>Crawford had received the strictest orders not to fight beyond +the Coa; but he was an obstinate man, and had so long maintained +his position across the river that he believed that, if attacked, +he should be able to withdraw over the bridge before any very +strong force could be brought up to attack him. In this he was +mistaken. The country was wooded, and the French march was +unsuspected until they were close upon Crawford's force. The light +division had, however, been well trained; indeed, it was composed +of veteran regiments, and had been practised to get under arms with +the least possible delay. They were, therefore, already drawn up +when the French fell upon them and, fighting hard and sternly, +repelled all the efforts of the enemy's cavalry to cut them off +from the bridge. Driving back the French light infantry, the Light +Division crossed in safety, although with considerable loss; and +repulsed, with great slaughter, every attempt of the French to +cross the bridge.</p> +<p>Almeida was now left to its fate. Again Massena delayed, and it +was not until the 18th of August that the siege was begun. On the +26th sixty-five heavy guns, that had been used in the siege of +Ciudad Rodrigo, opened fire upon the town. The more Terence saw of +the place, the more convinced was he that it could not long be +held, after the French siege guns had been placed in position. +Moreover, there was great lukewarmness on the part of several of +the Portuguese officers, while the rank and file were dispirited by +the fate of Ciudad Rodrigo, and by the fact that they had, as it +seemed to them, been deserted by the British army.</p> +<p>"I don't like the look of things, at all," he had said to Bull +and Ryan, the evening before the siege guns began their work. "In +the first place the defences will crumble, in no time, under the +French fire. In the second place, I don't think that the +Portuguese, with the exception of our own men, have any fight in +them. Da Costa, the lieutenant governor, openly declares that the +place is indefensible, and that it is simply throwing away the +lives of the men to resist. He is very intimate, I observe, with +Bareiros, the chief of the artillery. Altogether, things look very +bad. Of course, we shall stay here as long as the place resists; +but I am afraid that won't be for very long.</p> +<p>"I was speaking to Colonel Cox this afternoon. He is a brave +man, and with trustworthy troops would, I am sure, hold the town +until the last; but, unsupported as he is, he is in the hands of +these rascally Portuguese officers. I told him that, if he ordered +me to do so, I would undertake with my men to arrest the whole of +them; but he said that that would bring on a mutiny of all their +troops; and this, bad as the situation already was, would only make +matters much worse. I then suggested that, as the French are +driving their trenches towards those two old redoubts outside the +wall, I would, if he liked, place our force in them; and would +undertake to hold them, pointing out that if they fell into the +hands of the enemy they would soon mount their cannon there, and +bring down the whole wall facing in that direction.</p> +<p>"He quite agreed with that view of the case, but said that it +would be a very exposed position; still, as our fellows were +certainly the only trustworthy troops he had, he should be very +glad if I would undertake the defence at once, as the French were +pushing their approaches very fast towards them. I said that I was +sure we could hold them for some little time; and that, indeed, it +seemed to me that the French intended to bombard the town rather +than to breach the walls, knowing the composition of the garrison +and, perhaps, having intelligence that their courage would be so +shaken, by a heavy fire, that the place would surrender in a much +shorter time than it would take to breach the walls. Accordingly, +he has given me leave to march our men up there, at daybreak +tomorrow; taking with us ten days' provisions.</p> +<p>"I said that if he had trouble with the other Portuguese +regiments I would, on his hoisting a red flag on the church +steeple, march in at once to seize and shoot the leaders of the +mutiny, if he wished it. Of course, one of my reasons for wanting +to take charge of the redoubts was that we should have more chance +of withdrawing, from them, than we should of getting out of the +town, itself, in the confusion and panic of an approaching +surrender."</p> +<p>Bull and Ryan both agreed with Terence and, at daybreak the next +morning, the half battalion marched out, relieved the Portuguese +troops holding the two redoubts, and established themselves there. +They had brought with them a number of intrenching tools, and were +accompanied by an engineer officer. So, as soon as they reached the +redoubts, several parties of men were set to work, to begin to sink +pits for driving galleries in the direction of the approaches that +the French were pushing forward; while others assisted a party of +artillerymen to work the guns. Some of the best shots in the corps +took their places on the rampart, and were directed to maintain a +steady fire on the French working parties.</p> +<p>The roar of cannon, when the French batteries opened fire on the +town, was prodigious; and it was not long before it was evident +that there was no present design, on the part of the French, to +effect a breach.</p> +<p>"I expect they have lots of friends in the town," Terence said +to Dick Ryan, as they watched the result of the fire; "and they +make sure that the garrison will very soon lose heart. Do you see +how many shots are striking the old castle? That looks as if the +French knew that it was the magazine. They are dropping shell +there, too; and that alone is enough to cause a scare in the town, +for if one of them dropped into the magazine, the consequences +would be terrific. They are not pushing on the trenches against us +with anything like the energy with which they have been working for +the past week; and it is certainly curious that they should not +keep up a heavier fire from their batteries upon us, for it is +evident that they cannot make an assault, on this side of the town, +at any rate, until they have captured our redoubts."</p> +<p>"I wish we were well out of it," Ryan exclaimed. "It is quite +certain that the place must fall, sooner or later; and though we +might beat the French back several times, it must come to the same, +in the end. The thing I am most concerned about, at present, is how +we are to get away."</p> +<p>"I quite agree with you, Dick; and you know, we have had several +looks at the French lines, from the roof of the church. Their +batteries are chiefly on this side of the town; but most of their +troops are encamped on the other side, so as to be in readiness to +meet any attempt of Wellington to succour the place; and also to +show the garrison that there is no chance, whatever, of their being +able to draw off. We agreed that the chances would be much better +of getting out on this side than on the other."</p> +<p>"Yes; but we also agreed, Terence, that there would be a good +deal more difficulty in getting safely back; for practically the +whole of their army would be between us and Wellington."</p> +<p>"It will be a difficult business, Dicky, whichever way we go; +and I suppose that, at last, we shall have to be guided by +circumstances."</p> +<p>In a very short time, fires broke out at several points in the +town. The guns on the walls made but a very feeble reply to the +French batteries; and one or two bastions, where alone a brisk fire +was at first maintained, drew upon themselves such a storm of +missiles from the French guns that they were soon silenced.</p> +<p>"It is quite evident that the Portuguese gunners have not much +fight in them," Bull said.</p> +<p>"I am afraid it is the disaffection among their officers that is +paralysing them," Terence said. "But I quite admit that it may be +good policy to keep the men under cover. They really could do no +good against the French batteries; which have all the advantage of +position, as well as numbers and weight of metal; and it would +certainly be well to reserve the troops till the French drive their +trenches close up. If I thought that the silence of the guns on the +walls were due to that, I should be well content; but I am afraid +it is nothing of the sort. If the French keep up their fire, as at +present, for another forty-eight hours, the place will throw open +its gates. The inhabitants must be suffering frightfully. Of +course, if Colonel Cox had men he could thoroughly rely upon, he +would be obliged to harden his heart and disregard the clamour of +the townspeople for surrender; but as the garrison is pretty +certain to make common cause with them, it seems to me that the +place is lost, if the bombardment continues."</p> +<p>In a short time, seeing that the working parties in the enemy's +trenches made no attempt to push them farther forward, Terence +withdrew the men from their exposed position on the +ramparts--leaving only a few there on the lookout--and told the +rest to lie down on the inner slopes, so as to be in shelter from +the French fire. Bull was in command of the force in the other +redoubt, which was a quarter of a mile away. The redoubts were, +however, connected by a deep ditch, so that communication could be +kept up between them, or reinforcements sent from one to the other, +unobserved by the enemy, except by those on one or two elevated +spots.</p> +<p>All day the roar of the cannon continued. From a dozen points, +smoke and flame rose from the city, and towards these the French +batteries chiefly directed their fire, in order to hinder the +efforts of the garrison to check the progress of the +conflagration.</p> +<p>Just after dark, as Ryan and Terence were sitting down in an +angle of the bastion to eat their supper, there was a tremendous +roar; accompanied by so terrible a shock that both were thrown +prostrate upon the ground with a force that, for the moment, half +stunned them. A broad glare of light illuminated the sky. There was +the rumble and roar of falling buildings and walls; and then came +dull, crashing sounds as masses of brickwork, hurled high up into +the air, fell over the town and the surrounding country. Then came +a dead silence, which was speedily broken by the sound of loud +screams and shouts from the town.</p> +<p>"It is just as we feared," Terence said as, bruised and +bewildered, he struggled to his feet. "The magazine in the castle +has exploded."</p> +<p>He ordered the bugler to sound the assembly and, as the men +gathered, it was found that although many of them had been hurt +severely, by the violence with which they had been thrown down, +none had been killed either by the shock or the falling fragments. +An officer was at once sent to the other redoubt, to inquire how +they had fared; and to give orders to Bull to keep his men under +arms, lest the French should take advantage of the catastrophe, and +make a sudden attack.</p> +<p>"Ryan, do you take the command of the men, here, until I come +back. I will go into the town and see Colonel Cox. I fear that the +damage will be so great that the town will be really no longer +defensible and, even if it were, the Portuguese troops will be so +cowed that there will be no more fight left in them."</p> +<p>It was but five hundred yards to the wall. Terence was +unchallenged as he ran up. The gate was open and, on entering, he +saw that the disaster greatly exceeded his expectations. The castle +had been shattered into fragments, the church levelled to the +ground and, of the whole town, only six houses remained standing. +Five hundred people had been killed.</p> +<p>The wildest confusion prevailed. The soldiers were running about +without object or purpose, apparently scared out of their senses. +Women were shrieking and wringing their hands, by the ruins of +their houses. Men were frantically tugging at beams, and masses of +brickwork, to endeavour to rescue their friends buried under the +ruins. Presently he came upon Colonel Cox, who had just been joined +by Captain Hewitt, the only British officer with him; who had +instantly gone off to see the amount of damage done to the +defences, and had brought back news that the walls had been +levelled in several places, and the guns thrown into the ditch.</p> +<p>Da Costa, Bareiros, and several other Portuguese officers were +loudly clamouring for instant surrender and, the French shells +again beginning to fall into the town, added to the prevailing +terror. In vain the commandant endeavoured to still the tumult, and +to assure those around him that the defence might yet be continued, +for a short time; and better terms be obtained than if they were, +at once, to surrender.</p> +<p>"Can I do anything, Colonel?" Terence said. "My men are still +available."</p> +<p>The officer shook his head.</p> +<p>"Massena will see, in the morning," he said, "that he has but to +march in. If these men would fight, we could still, perhaps, defend +the breaches for a day or two. But it would only be useless +slaughter. However, as they won't fight, I must send a flag of +truce out, and endeavour to make terms. At any rate, Colonel +O'Connor, if you can manage to get off with your command, by all +means do so. Of course, I shall endeavour to obtain terms for the +garrison to march out; but I fear that Massena will hear of nothing +but unconditional surrender."</p> +<p>"Thank you, Colonel. Then I shall at once return to my corps, +and endeavour to make my way through."</p> +<p>On returning to the redoubt, Terence sent a message to Bull to +come to him at once and, when he arrived, told him and Ryan the +state of things in the town, and the certainty that it would +surrender, at once.</p> +<p>"The Portuguese are so clamorous," he said, "that a flag of +truce may be despatched to Massena, in half an hour's time. The +Portuguese are right so far that, if the place must be surrendered, +there is no reason for any longer exposing the troops and the +townsfolk to the French bombardment. Therefore it is imperative +that, if we are to make our way out, we must do so before the place +surrenders.</p> +<p>"We agreed, yesterday, as to the best line to take. The French +force here is by no means considerable, their main body being +between this and the Coa. Massena, knowing the composition of the +garrison here, did not deem it requisite to send a larger force +than was necessary to protect the batteries; and the major portion +of these are on the heights behind the city. Between the road +leading to Escalon and that through Fort Conception there is no +French camp, and it is by that line we must make our escape.</p> +<p>"We know that there are considerable forces, somewhere near +Villa Puerca; but when we reach the river Turones we can follow its +banks down, with very little fear. It is probable that they have a +force at the bridge near San Felices; but I believe the river is +fordable in many places, now. At any rate, they are not likely to +be keeping a sharp watch anywhere, tonight. They must all know that +that tremendous explosion will have rendered the place untenable +and, except at the batteries which are still firing, there will be +no great vigilance; especially on this side, for it would hardly be +supposed that, even if the garrison did attempt to escape, they +would take the road to the east, and so cut themselves off from +their allies and enter a country wholly French.</p> +<p>"Of course, with us the case is different. We can march farther +and faster than any French infantry. The woods afford abundant +places of concealment, and we are perfectly capable of driving off +any small bodies of cavalry that we may meet. Fortunately we have +eight days' provision of biscuit. Of course, it was with a view to +this that I proposed that we should bring out so large a supply +with us.</p> +<p>"Now, I think we had better start at once."</p> +<p>"I quite agree with you, Colonel," Bull said. "I will return to +the other redoubt, and form the men up at once. I shall be ready in +a quarter of an hour."</p> +<p>"Very well, Bull. I will move out from here, in a quarter of an +hour from the present time, and march across and join you as you +come out. We must move round between your redoubt and the town. In +that way we shall avoid the enemy's trenches altogether."</p> +<p>The men were at once ordered to fall in. Fortunately, none were +so seriously disabled as to be unfit to take their places in the +ranks. The necessity for absolute silence was impressed upon them, +and they were told to march very carefully; as a fall over a stone, +and the crash of a musket on the rocks, might at once call the +attention of a French sentinel. As the troops filed out through the +entrance to the redoubt, Terence congratulated himself upon their +all having sandals, for the sound of their tread was faint, indeed, +to what it would have been had they been marching in heavy +boots.</p> +<p>At the other redoubt they were joined by Bull, with his party. +There was a momentary halt while six men, picked for their +intelligence, went on ahead, under the command of Ryan. They were +to move twenty paces apart. If they came upon any solitary +sentinel, one man was to be sent back instantly to stop the column; +while two others crawled forward and surprised and silenced the +sentry. Should their way be arrested by a strong picket, they were +to reconnoitre the ground on either side; and then one was to be +sent back, to guide the column so as to avoid the picket.</p> +<p>When he calculated that Ryan must be nearly a quarter of a mile +in advance, Terence gave orders for the column to move forward. +When a short distance had been traversed, one of the scouts came +in, with the news that there was a cordon of sentries across their +path. They were some fifty paces apart, and some must be silenced +before the march could be continued.</p> +<p>Ten minutes later, another scout brought in news that four of +the French sentries had been surprised and killed, without any +alarm being given; and the column resumed its way, the necessity +for silence being again impressed upon the men. As they went +forward, they received news that two more of the sentries had been +killed; and that there was, in consequence, a gap of 350 yards +between them. A scout led the way through the opening thus formed. +It was an anxious ten minutes, but the passage was effected without +any alarm being given; the booming of the guns engaged in +bombarding the town helping to cover the sound of their +footsteps.</p> +<p>It had been settled that Ryan and the column were both to march +straight for a star, low down on the horizon, so that there was no +fear of either taking the wrong direction. In another half hour +they were sure that they were well beyond the French lines; whose +position, indeed, could be made out by the light of their bivouac +fires.</p> +<p>For three hours they continued their march, at a rapid pace, +without a check. Then they halted for half an hour, and then held +on their way till daybreak, when they entered a large village. They +had left the redoubts at about nine o'clock, and it was now five; +so that they had marched at least twenty-five miles, and were +within some ten miles of the Aqueda.</p> +<p>Sentries were posted at the edge of the wood, and the troops +then lay down to sleep. Several times during the day parties of +French cavalry were seen moving about; but they were going at a +leisurely pace, and there was no appearance of their being engaged +in any search. At nightfall the troops got under arms again, and +made their way to the Aqueda.</p> +<p>A peasant, whom they fell in with soon after they started, had +undertaken to show them a ford. It was breast deep, but the stream +was not strong, and they crossed without difficulty, holding their +arms and ammunition well above the water. They learned that there +was, indeed, a French brigade at the bridge of San Felices. +Marching north now, they came before daybreak upon the Douro. Here +they again lay up during the day and, that evening, obtained two +boats at a village near the mouth of the Tormes, and crossed into +the Portuguese province of Tras os Nontes.</p> +<p>The 500 men joined in a hearty cheer, on finding themselves safe +in their own country. After halting for a couple of days, Terence +marched to Castel Rodrigo and then, learning that the main body of +the regiment was at Pinhel, marched there and joined them; his +arrival causing great rejoicing among his men, for it had been +supposed that he and the half battalion had been captured, at the +fall of Almeida. The Portuguese regular troops at that place had, +at the surrender at daybreak after the explosion, all taken service +with the French; while the militia regiments had been disbanded by +Massena, and allowed to return to their homes.</p> +<p>From here Terence sent off his report to headquarters, and asked +for orders. The adjutant general wrote back, congratulating him on +having successfully brought off his command, and ordering the corps +to take post at Linares. He found that another disaster, similar to +that at Almeida, had taken place--the magazine at Albuquerque +having been blown up by lightning, causing the loss of four hundred +men.</p> +<p>The French army were still behind the Coa, occupied in restoring +the fortifications of Almeida and Ciudad Rodrigo, and it was not +until the 17th of September that Massena crossed the Coa, and began +the invasion of Portugal in earnest; his march being directed +towards Coimbra, by taking which line he hoped to prevent Hill, in +the south, from effecting a junction with Wellington.</p> +<p>The latter, however, had made every preparation for retreat and, +as soon as he found that Massena was in earnest, he sent word to +Hill to join him on the Alva, and fell back in that direction +himself.</p> +<p>Terence received orders to co-operate with 10,000 of the +Portuguese militia, under the command of Trant. Wilson and Miller +were to harass Massena's right flank and rear. Had Wellington's +orders been carried out, Massena would have found the country +deserted by its inhabitants and entirely destitute of provisions; +but as usual his orders had been thwarted by the Portuguese +government, who sent secret instructions to the local authorities +to take no steps to carry them out; and the result was that +Massena, as he advanced, found ample stores for provisioning his +army.</p> +<p>The speed with which Wellington fell back baffled his +calculations and, by the time he approached Viseu, the whole +British army was united, near Coimbra. His march had been delayed +two days, by an attack made by Trant and Terence upon the advanced +guard, as it was making its way through a defile. A hundred +prisoners were taken, with some baggage; and a serious blow would +have been struck at the French, had not the new Portuguese levies +been seized with panic and fled in confusion. Trant was, +consequently, obliged to draw off. The attack, however, had been so +resolute and well-directed that Massena, not knowing the strength +of the force opposing him, halted for two days until the whole army +came up; and thus afforded time for the British to concentrate, and +make their arrangements.</p> +<a id="Map2" name="Map2"></a> +<center><img src="images/2.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Plan of the Battle of Busaco." /></center> +<p>The ground chosen by Wellington to oppose Massena's advance was +on the edge of the Sierra Busaco; which was separated, by a deep +and narrow valley, from the series of hills across which the French +were marching. There were four roads by which the French could +advance. The one from Mortagao, which was narrow and little used, +passed through Royalva. The other three led to the position +occupied by the British force between the village of Busaco and +Pena Cova. Trant's command was posted at Royalva. Terence with his +regiment took post, with a Portuguese brigade of cavalry, on the +heights above Santa Marcella, where the road leading south to +Espinel forked; a branch leading from it across the Mondego, in the +rear of the British position, to Coimbra. Here he could be aided, +if necessary, by the guns at Pena Cova, on the opposite side of the +river.</p> +<p>While the British were taking up their ground between Busaco and +Pena Cova, Ney and Regnier arrived on the crest of the opposite +hill. Had they attacked at once, as Ney wished, they might have +succeeded; for the divisions of Spenser, Leith, and Hill had not +yet arrived. But Massena was ten miles in the rear, and did not +come up until next day, with Junot's corps; by which time the whole +of the British army was ranged along the opposite heights.</p> +<p>Their force could be plainly made out from the French position, +and so formidable were the heights that had to be scaled by an +attacking force that Ney, impetuous and brave as he was, no longer +advocated an attack. Massena, however, was bent upon fighting. He +had every confidence in the valour of his troops, and was averse to +retiring from Portugal, baffled, by the long and rugged road he had +travelled; therefore dispositions were at once made for the attack. +Ney and Regnier were to storm the British position, while Junot's +corps was to be held in reserve.</p> +<p>At daybreak on the 29th the French descended the hill; Ney's +troops, in three columns of attack, moving against a large convent +towards the British left centre; while Regnier, in two columns, +advanced against the centre. Regnier's men were the first engaged +and, mounting the hill with great gallantry and resolution, pushed +the skirmishers of Picton's division before them and, in spite of +the grape fire of a battery of six guns, almost gained the summit +of the hill--the leading battalions establishing themselves among +the rocks there, while those behind wheeled to the right. +Wellington, who was on the spot, swept the flank of this force with +grape; and the 88th and a wing of the 45th charged down upon them +furiously.</p> +<p>The French, exhausted by their efforts in climbing the hill, +were unable to resist the onslaught; and the English and French, +mixed up together, went down the hill; the French still resisting, +but unable to check their opponents who, favoured by the steep +descent, swept all before them.</p> +<p>In the meantime, the battalions that had gained the crest held +their own against the rest of the third division and, had they been +followed by the troops who had wheeled off towards their right, the +British position would have been cut in two. General Leith, seeing +the critical state of affairs had, as soon as he saw the third +division pressed back, despatched a brigade to its assistance. It +had to make a considerable detour round a ravine; but it now +arrived and, attacking with fury, drove the French grenadiers from +the rocks; and pursued them, with a continuous fire of musketry, +until they were out of range. The rest of Leith's division soon +arrived, and General Hill moved his division to the position before +occupied by Leith. Thus, so formidable a force was concentrated at +the point where Regnier made his effort that, having no reserves, +he did not venture to renew the attack.</p> +<p>On their right the French had met with no better success. In +front of the convent, but on lower ground, was a plateau; and on +this Crawford posted the 43rd and 52nd Regiments of the line, in a +slight dip, which concealed them from observation by the French. A +quarter of a mile behind them, on the high ground close to the +convent, was a regiment of German infantry. These were in full +sight of the enemy. The other regiment of the light division was +placed lower down the hill, and supported by the guns of a +battery.</p> +<p>Two of Ney's columns advanced up the hill with great speed and +gallantry; never pausing for a moment, although their ranks were +swept by grape from the artillery, and a heavy musketry fire by the +light troops. The latter were forced to fall back before the +advance. The guns were withdrawn, and the French were within a few +yards of the edge of the plateau, when Crawford launched the 43rd +and 52nd Regiments against them.</p> +<p>Wholly unprepared for such an attack, the French were hurled +down the hill. Only one of their columns attempted to retrieve the +disaster, and advanced against the right of the light division. +Here, however, they met Pack's brigade; while Crawford's artillery +swept the wood through which they were ascending. Finally, they +were forced to retire down the hill, and the action came to an end. +Never did the French fight more bravely; but the position, held by +determined troops, was practically impregnable. The French loss in +killed and wounded was 4500, that of the allies only 1300; the +difference being caused by the fact that the French ranks, +throughout the action, were swept with grape by the British +batteries; while the French artillery could do nothing to aid their +infantry.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch11" id="Ch11">Chapter 11</a>: The French +Advance.</h2> +<p>As there were no signs of any French force approaching the +position held by the Portuguese, Terence moved his regiment a short +distance forward, to a point which enabled them to obtain a view +right down the valley in which the conflict was taking place. He +then allowed them to fall out of their ranks; knowing that in less +than a minute from the call being sounded they would be under arms +again, and in readiness to move in any direction required. Then, +with Herrara and his three English officers, he moved a short +distance away and watched the scene.</p> +<p>As soon as Regnier's columns had crossed the bottom of the +ravine, their guns along the crest opened fire on the British +position facing them.</p> +<p>"They are too far off for grape," Terence said. "You remember, +Ryan, at Corunna, how those French batteries pounded us from the +crest, and how little real damage they did us. A round shot does +not do much more harm than a bullet, unless it strikes a column in +motion, or troops massed in solid formation.</p> +<p>"Those fellows are mounting the hill very fast."</p> +<p>"They are, indeed," Ryan agreed. "You can see how the line of +smoke of our skirmishers on the hillside gets higher and +higher."</p> +<p>"I wish our regiment was there, Colonel," Bull said. "We might +do some good; while here we are of no more use than if we were a +hundred miles away."</p> +<p>"No, no, Bull, that is not the case. If the French had not seen +that this position was strongly held, they might have moved a +division by this road and, if they had done so, they would have +turned the main position altogether, and forced Wellington to fall +back, at once. So you see, we are doing good here; though I do not +say that I should not like to be over there."</p> +<p>"The French will soon be at the top of the hill," Herrara +exclaimed. "See how they are pushing upwards."</p> +<p>"They certainly are gaining ground fast," Macwitty said. "They +are within a hundred yards of the top. Our men don't seem to be +able to make any stand against them at all.</p> +<p>"Colonel, the lower column is turning off more towards their +left."</p> +<p>"They had better have kept together, Macwitty. It is evident +that Picton's division is hard pressed, as it is and, if those two +columns had united and thrown themselves upon him, they would have +broken right through our line. As it is, the second party will have +Leith's division to deal with. Do you see one of his brigades +marching swiftly to meet them, and some guns sweeping the French +flank? I wish we were nearer."</p> +<p>The scene had become too exciting for further conversation, and +they watched almost breathlessly. The line of smoke on the top of +the crest showed that the head of the column had made good its +footing there; while the quick puffs of smoke, and the rattle of +musketry, denoted that the other column was also within a short +distance of the summit. But Leith's regiments were approaching the +spot at the double. Presently there was the crash of a tremendous +volley, and then the leading regiment disappeared over the brow of +the hill, and into brushwood. The roar of musketry was heavy and +continuous, and then Ryan gave a joyous shout, as it could be seen +that the two long smoke wreaths were becoming mixed together, and +that the movement was downwards and, ere long, the dark masses of +troops could be seen descending the hill even more rapidly than +they had climbed it. Leith's second brigade was now approaching the +scene of the struggle, and was near at hand; Hill's division was +seen in motion towards the same spot.</p> +<p>"That is all right now," Terence said; "but there is another big +fight going on, further up the valley."</p> +<p>It was too far off to make out the movements of the troops but, +even at that distance, the smoke rolling up from the hillside gave +some idea of the course of the fight. Here, too, after mounting +more than halfway up the slope, it could be seen that the tide of +war was rolling down again; though more slowly, and with harder +fighting than it had done in the struggle nearer to them. And when +at last the firing gradually ceased, they knew that the French had +been repulsed, all along the line.</p> +<p>"The men had better open their haversacks and eat a meal," +Terence said. "We may get an order to move, at any moment."</p> +<p>No orders came, however, and the troops remained in the +positions that they occupied until the following morning. Then a +heavy skirmishing fire broke out and, for some time, it seemed as +if the battle was to be renewed. No heavy masses of the French, +however, came down from the hill on their side to support the light +troops in the valley and, in the afternoon, the firing died away. +Towards evening a staff officer rode up, at full speed, and handed +a note to Terence.</p> +<p>"The French have turned our left by the Royalva Pass. Trant has +failed to check them, and the whole army must fall back. These are +your instructions."</p> +<p>The mishap had not been Trant's fault. He had been sent by the +Portuguese general on a tremendous detour and, when he arrived at +the position assigned to him, his troops were utterly exhausted by +their long and fatiguing march. A large proportion had deserted or +fallen out and, with but 1500 wearied and dispirited men, he could +offer but little resistance to the French advance and, being +attacked by their cavalry, had been driven away with loss. Terence +opened the note.</p> +<p>"You will march at once. Keep along on this side of the Mondego, +breaking up your command into small parties, who will visit every +village within reach. All of their inhabitants who have not obeyed +the proclamations, and retired, are to leave at once. Destroy all +provisions that you can find. Set fire to the mills and, where this +is not practicable, smash the machinery and, bearing south as you +go, spread out over the country between the Zezere and the sea, and +continue to carry on the duty assigned to you, compelling the +peasants to drive their animals before them, along the roads to +Lisbon."</p> +<p>"I understand, sir," Terence said, after reading the note, "and +will carry out the orders to the best of my ability."</p> +<p>Five minutes later the regiment was under arms. Terence called +the whole of the officers together, and explained the instructions +that he had received. The two battalions were broken up into half +companies which, as they marched along the Mondego, were to be left +behind, one by one; each party, when left, turning south, and +proceeding to carry out the orders received. In a few cases, only, +were companies to keep intact as, although a hundred men would be +ample for the duty at the large villages, two hundred would not be +too much in a town like Leiria.</p> +<p>On reaching Foz d'Aronce, half a battalion moved to the east, to +work down by the river Zezere. The rest turned to the right, to +follow the course of the Mondego down to the sea. For convenience, +and in order to keep the troops in hand, Bull, Macwitty, Ryan, and +Herrara each took the command of half a battalion; with orders to +supervise the work of the companies belonging to it, and to keep in +touch with the nearest company of the next battalion, so that the +two thousand men could advance, to a certain extent, abreast of +each other.</p> +<p>Foz d'Aronce had already been evacuated by its inhabitants, but +in all other villages the orders were carried out. By daybreak the +last company in the two battalions reached the sea coast and, after +two hours' rest, began its march south. The others had long been at +work.</p> +<p>It was a painful duty. The frightened villagers had to be roused +in the darkness, and told that the French were approaching, and +that they must fly at once, taking their animals and what they +could carry off in carts away with them. While the terrified people +were harnessing horses to their carts, piling their few valuables +into them, and packing their children on the top, the troops went +from house to house, searching for and destroying provisions, +setting fire to barns stored with corn, and burning or disabling +any flour mills they met with.</p> +<p>Then, as soon as work was done, they forced the villagers to +take the southern road. There was no difficulty in doing this for, +although they had stolidly opposed all the measures ordered by +Wellington, trusting that the French would not come; now that they +had heard they were near, a wild panic seized them. Had an orderly +retreat been made before, almost all their belongings might have +been saved. Now but little could be taken, even by the most +fortunate. The children, the sick, the aged had to be carried in +carts and, in their haste and terror, they left behind many things +that might well have been saved.</p> +<p>The peasantry in the villages suffered less than the +townspeople, as their horses and carts afforded means of transport: +but even here the scenes were most painful. In the towns, however, +they were vastly more so. The means for carriage for such a large +number of people being wanting, the greater number of the +inhabitants were forced to make their way on foot, along roads so +crowded with vehicles of every kind that the British divisions were +frequently brought to a standstill, for hours, where the nature of +the country prevented their quitting the road and making their way +across the fields.</p> +<p>On the 29th, the greater portion of the British troops passed +the Mondego. Hill retired upon Thomar, and the rest of the troops +were concentrated at Milheada. The commissariat stores followed the +coast road down to Peniche, and were embarked there. The light +division and the cavalry remained, after the main body had been +drawn across the Mondego, north of that river.</p> +<p>Soon after starting on his work, Terence learned that the +British troops had passed through Pombal, Leiria, and Thomar. It +was consequently unnecessary for him to endeavour to clear those +towns.</p> +<p>The delays caused at every village rendered the work slow, as +well as arduous. The French drove the light division through +Coimbra and, following, pressed so hotly that a number of minor +combats took place between their cavalry and the British rear +guards. Before Leiria the rear guards had to fight strongly, to +enable the guns to quit the town before the French entered it.</p> +<p>Terence presently received orders to collect his regiment again +and, crossing the Zezere, to endeavour to join Trant and the other +leaders of irregular bands, and to harass Massena's rear. He had +already, knowing that great bodies of French cavalry had crossed +the Mondego, called in the companies that were working Leiria and +the coast; as they might otherwise have been cut up, in detail, by +the French cavalry. With these he marched east, picking up the +other companies as he went and, on the same evening, the regiment +was collected on the Zezere.</p> +<p>Having followed the river up, he reached Foz d'Aronce and then, +finding that several bodies of French troops had already passed +through that village, he turned to the left and camped close to the +Mondego; sending ten of his men over the river, in peasants' +clothes, to ascertain the movements of the enemy. One of them +returned with news that he had come upon a party of Trant's men, +who told him that their main body were but two miles away, and that +there were no French north of Coimbra.</p> +<p>The regiment had made a march of upwards of forty miles that +day. Therefore, leaving them to rest, Terence forded the Mondego +and rode, with Ryan, to Trant's village.</p> +<p>"I am glad, indeed, to see you, O'Connor," the partisan leader +said, as Terence entered the cottage where he had established +himself. "Is your regiment with you?"</p> +<p>"Yes, it is three miles away, on the other side of the river. We +have marched something like eighty miles, in two days. We have been +busy burning mills and destroying provisions, but the French +cavalry are all over the country, so I was ordered to join you, and +aid you to harass the French line of communication, and to do them +what damage we could."</p> +<p>"There is not much to be done in the way of cutting their +communications; at least, there is nothing to be done to the north +and east of this place, for Massena brought all his baggage and +everything else with him; and cut himself loose, altogether, from +his base at Ciudad. If the people had but carried out Wellington's +orders, Massena would have suffered a fearful disaster. We have +learned, from stragglers we have taken, that the fourteen days' +provisions with which they marched were altogether exhausted; and +that they had been unable to obtain any here. They would have had +to retreat, instantly; but I hear that, in Coimbra alone, there is +enough food for their whole army, for at least two months."</p> +<p>"But could we not have destroyed it, as we retreated?"</p> +<p>"Of course, we ought to have done so," Trant said; "but from +what I hear, the affair was very badly managed. Instead of the +first division that went through burning all the magazines and +stores, it was left to Crawford to do so; and he, as usual, stopped +so long facing the enemy that, at last, he was regularly chased +through Coimbra and, the roads being blocked with carts, his +brigade would have been destroyed had the French infantry pushed +strongly after him.</p> +<p>"Things are just as bad, in the way of provisions, on the other +side of the river. We have done a great deal in the way of +destroying mills and magazines. I am afraid Massena will find +enough provisions to last his army all the winter."</p> +<p>"That is bad."</p> +<p>"Had it only been Coimbra, no very great harm would have been +done; for the French troops got altogether out of hand when they +entered, plundered the place and, as I hear, destroyed enough +provisions to have lasted them a month."</p> +<p>"Of course, they hold the town?"</p> +<p>"Oh yes! It is full of their sick and wounded."</p> +<p>"What force have you?" Terence asked.</p> +<p>"I have 1500 men of my own. Miller and Wilson, with some of the +Northern militias, will be here shortly; and I expect, in a few +days, we shall have eight thousand men."</p> +<p>"The great thing would be to act before the French know that +there is so strong a force in the neighbourhood," Terence said, +"because as soon as they hear that, they are sure to send a strong +force back to Coimbra."</p> +<p>"How do you mean, to act?" Trant asked in some surprise.</p> +<p>"I propose that we should capture Coimbra, at once. I have 2000 +men and you have 1500. I don't suppose they have left above a +couple of thousand in the town, perhaps even less and, if we take +them by surprise, I should think we ought to be able to manage that +number, without difficulty. I certainly consider my own men to be a +match for an equal number of French."</p> +<p>"It is a grand idea," Trant said, "and I don't see why we should +not carry it out. As you say, the sooner the better. They may know +that I am here, but they will never dream of my making such attempt +with a force which, I must own, is not always to be relied upon. +They are always shifting and changing. After a long march, half of +them will desert; then in a few days the ranks swell again. +Consequently, the men have little discipline and no confidence in +each other, and are little better than raw levies; but for rough +street fighting I have no doubt they would be all right, especially +when backed by good troops like yours.</p> +<p>"How would you proceed? As yours is the real fighting body, you +should have the command."</p> +<p>"Not at all," Terence said warmly. "You are my senior officer, +not only in rank but in age and experience. My orders were to +assist you as far as I could and, while we are together, I am ready +to carry out your orders in any way."</p> +<p>"Will your men be able to attack in the morning?"</p> +<p>"Certainly. They will have a good night's rest, and will be +quite ready for work, say, at four o'clock in the morning. It is +not more than two hours' march to Coimbra, so that we shall be +there by daybreak. Have they any troops between us and the +town?"</p> +<p>"They have a post at a village, a mile this side, O'Connor. Do +you know how far their army is, on the other side of the +river?"</p> +<p>"I know that they had a division close to Leiria, the day before +yesterday; but whether they have any large body just across the +Mondego, I cannot say."</p> +<p>"Then we will first surprise their post. I will undertake that. +Will you march your force down the river, close to the town? I have +a hundred cavalry and, as soon as I have captured the post, I will +send them on at a gallop; with orders to ride straight through to +the bridge, and prevent any mounted messengers passing across it. +As soon as you hear them come along the road, do you at once enter +the town. I will bring my men on at the double, and we shall not be +many minutes after you.</p> +<p>"It would be as well for you to enter it by several streets, as +that will cause greater confusion than if you were in a solid body. +The principal point is the great convent of Santa Clara, which has +been converted into a hospital. No doubt a portion of the garrison +are there; the rest will be scattered about in the public +buildings, and can be overpowered in detail.</p> +<p>"I think we are certain of success. I hope you will stop for a +time and take supper with me and, in the meantime, I will send down +orders for my men to be under arms, here, at half-past three."</p> +<a id="PicF" name="PicF"></a> +<center><img src="images/f.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: 'Good news. We are going to take Coimbra.'" /></center> +<p>Terence and Ryan remained for an hour, and then rode back to the +regiment. The men were all sound asleep, but Herrara and the two +majors were sitting round a campfire.</p> +<p>"What news, Colonel?" the former asked, as Terence rode up.</p> +<p>"Good news. We are going to take Coimbra, tomorrow morning. All +Massena's sick and wounded, and his heavy baggage are there. They +have no suspicion that any force is yet assembled in the +neighbourhood and, I expect, we shall have easy work of it. They +have a post a mile out of the town. Trant will surprise and capture +that, at five in the morning. Just before daybreak we shall enter +the town. We must march from here at half-past three."</p> +<p>"That is something like news, Colonel," Macwitty exclaimed. "It +will cut the French off from this line of retreat, altogether, and +they must either fall back by the line of the Tagus, or through +Badajoz and Merida."</p> +<p>Terence laughed.</p> +<p>"You are counting your chickens before they are hatched, +Macwitty. At the present moment, it seems more likely that +Wellington will have to embark his troops than that Massena will +have to retreat. He must have nearly a hundred thousand men, +counting those who fought with him at Busaco and the two divisions +that marched down through Foz d'Aronce; while Wellington, all told, +cannot have above 40,000. Certainly some of the peasants told me +they had heard that a great many men were employed in fortifying +the heights of Torres Vedras, and Wellington may be able to make a +stand there; but as we have never heard anything about them before, +I am afraid that they cannot be anything very formidable.</p> +<p>"However, just at present we have nothing to do with that. If we +can take Coimbra it will certainly hamper Massena and, if the worst +comes to the worst, we can fall back across the Douro.</p> +<p>"Don't let the bugles sound in the morning. It is not likely, +but it is possible that the French may send out cavalry patrols at +night. If a bugle were heard they might ride back and report that a +force was in the neighbourhood, and we should find the garrison +prepared for us. Now we had better do no more talking. It is past +eleven, and we have but four and a half hours to sleep."</p> +<p>At half-past three the troops were roused. They were surprised +at the early call, for they had expected two or three days' rest, +after the heavy work of the last eight days; but the company +officers soon learned the news from their majors and, as it quickly +spread through the ranks, the men were at once alert and ready. +Fording the river, they marched at a rapid pace by the road to +Coimbra and, soon after five o'clock, arrived within a few hundred +yards of the town. Then they were halted and broken up into four +columns, which were to enter the town at different points. The +signal for moving was to be the sound of a body of cavalry, +galloping along the road. Terence listened attentively for the +rattle of musketry in the distance, but all was quiet; and he had +little doubt that the French had been surprised, and captured, +without a shot being fired.</p> +<p>Soon after half-past five he heard a dull sound which, before +long, grew louder and, in five minutes, a body of horsemen swept +past at a gallop. The troops at once got into motion, and entered +the town. There was no longer any motive for concealment. The +bugles sounded and, with loud shouts, the Portuguese ran forward. +French officers ran out of private houses, and were at once seized +and captured. Several bodies of troops were taken, in public +buildings, before they were fairly awake. Some of the +inhabitants--of whom many, unable to make their escape, had +remained behind; or who had returned from the villages to which +they had at first fled--came out and acted as guides to the various +buildings where the French troops were quartered and, in little +over a quarter of an hour, the whole town, with the exception of +the convent of Santa Clara, was in their hands.</p> +<p>By this time Trant had come up, with his command. The troops +rapidly formed up again and, issuing from several streets, advanced +against the convent. The astonished enemy fired a few shots; then, +on being formally summoned to surrender, laid down their arms. +Thus, on the third day after Massena quitted the Mondego his +hospitals, depots, and nearly 6000 prisoners, wounded and +unwounded, among them a company of the Imperial Guard, fell into +the hands of the Portuguese.</p> +<p>The next day Miller and Wilson came up; and their men, crossing +the bridge and spreading over the country, gathered in 300 more +prisoners; while Trant marched, with those he had captured, to +Oporto.</p> +<a id="Map3" name="Map3"></a> +<center><img src="images/3.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Plan of the Lines of Torres Vedras." /></center> +<p>On the 10th of October the whole of Wellington's army was safely +posted on the tremendously strong position that he had, unknown to +the army, carefully prepared and fortified for the protection of +Lisbon. It consisted of three lines of batteries and intrenchments. +The second was the most formidable; but the first was so strong, +also, that Wellington determined to defend this, instead of falling +back to the stronger line. At the foot of the line of mountains on +which the army was posted, stretching from the Tagus to the sea, +ran two streams; the Zandre, a deep river, which extended nearly +halfway along the twenty-nine miles of lines, covered the left of +the position; while a stream running into the Tagus protected the +right. The centre, therefore, was almost the only part at which the +line could be attacked with any chance of success; and this was +defended by such tremendous fortifications as to be almost +impregnable.</p> +<p>Massena, who had only heard vague rumours of the existence of +these fortifications, four days before, was astounded at the +unexpected obstacle which barred his way. The British troops, as +soon as they arrived, were set to work to strengthen the +intrenchments. Trees were felled, and every accessible point was +covered by formidable abattis. The faces of the rocks were scarped, +so that an enemy who won his way partly up the hill would find his +farther progress arrested by a perpendicular wall of rock. Soon the +eminences on the crest bristled with guns; and Massena, after +carefully reconnoitring the whole position, came to the conclusion +that it could not be attacked; and disposed his troops in permanent +positions, facing the British centre and right, from Sobral to +Villafranca on the Tagus; and sent his cavalry out over the +country, to bring in provisions.</p> +<p>To lessen the district available for this operation, Wellington +sent orders for the northern militia to advance and, crossing the +Mondego, to drive in the foraging parties. Trant, Wilson and the +other partisan corps were also employed in the work. A strong force +took up its position between Castello Branco and Abrantes, while +the militia and partisans occupied the whole country north of +Leiria; and the French were thus completely surrounded. +Nevertheless, the store of provisions left behind in the towns and +villages was so large that the French cavalry were able to bring in +sufficient supplies for the army.</p> +<p>During the week that followed, the Minho regiment was engaged in +watching the defiles by which Massena might communicate with Ciudad +Rodrigo, or through which reinforcements might reach him. Wilson +and Trant were both engaged on similar service, the one farther to +the north; while the other, who was on the south bank of the Tagus +with a number of Portuguese militia and irregulars, endeavoured to +prevent the French from crossing the river and carrying off the +flocks, herds, and corn which, in spite of Wellington's entreaties +and orders, the Portuguese government had permitted to remain, as +if in handiness for the French foraging parties.</p> +<p>Owing to the exhausted state of both the British and Portuguese +treasuries, it was impossible to supply the corps acting in rear of +the French with money for the purchase of food. But Terence had +received authority to take what provisions were absolutely +necessary for the troops, and to give orders that would, at some +time or other, be honoured by the military chest. A comparatively +small proportion of his men were needed to guard the defiles, +against such bodies of troops as would be likely to traverse them, +in order to keep up Massena's communications. Leaving, therefore, a +hundred men in each of the principal defiles; and ordering them to +entrench themselves in places where they commanded the road, and +could only be attacked with the greatest difficulty; while the road +was barred by trees felled across it, so as to form an impassable +abattis, behind which twenty men were stationed; Terence marched, +with 1500 men, towards the frontier.</p> +<p>Five hundred of these were placed along the Coa, guarding the +roads and, with the remainder, he forded the river and placed +himself in the woods, in the plain between Almeida and Ciudad +Rodrigo. Here he captured several convoys of waggons, proceeding +with provisions for the garrison of the former place. A portion of +these he despatched, under guard, for the use of the troops on the +Coa, and for those in the passes; thus rendering it unnecessary to +harass the people, who had returned to their villages after Massena +had advanced against Lisbon.</p> +<p>Growing bolder with success, he crossed the Aqueda and, marching +round to the rear of Ciudad Rodrigo, cut off and destroyed convoys +intended for that town, causing great alarm to the garrison. These +were absolutely ignorant of the operations of Massena, for so +active were the partisans, in the French rear, that no single +messenger succeeded in getting through and, even when accompanied +by strong escorts, the opposition encountered was so determined +that the French were obliged to fall back, without having +accomplished their purpose. Thus, then, the garrison at Ciudad +Rodrigo were ignorant both of Massena's whereabouts, and of the +nature of the force that had thrown itself in his rear. Several +times, strong parties of troops were sent out. When these were +composed of cavalry only, they were boldly met and driven in. When +it was a mixed force of cavalry, infantry, and artillery, they +searched in vain for the foe.</p> +<p>So seriously alarmed and annoyed was the governor that 3000 +troops were withdrawn, from Salamanca, to strengthen the garrison. +In December Massena, having exhausted the country round, fell back +to a very strong position at Santarem; and Terence withdrew his +whole force, save those guarding the defiles, to the neighbourhood +of Abrantes; so that he could either assist the force stationed +there, should Massena retire up the Tagus; and prevent his +messengers passing through the country between the river and the +range of mountains, south of the Alva, by Castello Branco or Velha; +posting strong parties to guard the fords of the Zezere.</p> +<p>So thoroughly was the service of watching the frontier line +carried out, that it was not until General Foy, himself, was sent +off by Massena, that Napoleon was informed of the state of things. +He was accompanied by a strong cavalry force and 4000 French +infantry across the Zezere, and ravaged the country for a +considerable distance.</p> +<p>Before such strength, Terence was obliged to fall back. Foy was +accompanied by his cavalry, until he had passed through Castello +Branco; and was then able to ride, without further opposition, to +Ciudad Rodrigo.</p> +<p>Beresford was guarding the line of the Tagus, between the mouth +of the Zezere and the point occupied on the opposite bank by +Wellington, sending a portion of his force up the Zezere; and these +harassed the French marauding parties, extending their devastations +along the line of the Mondego.</p> +<p>Although the Minho regiment had suffered some loss, during these +operations, their ranks were kept up to the full strength without +difficulty. Great numbers of the Portuguese army deserted during +the winter, owing to the hardships they endured, from want of food +and the irregularity of their pay. Many of these made for the Minho +regiment, which they had learned was well fed, and received their +pay with some degree of regularity, the latter circumstance being +due to the fact that Terence had the good luck to capture, with one +of the convoys behind Ciudad Rodrigo, a considerable sum of money +intended for the pay of the garrison. From this he had, without +hesitation, paid his men the arrears due to them; and had still +30,000 dollars, with which he was able to continue to feed and pay +them, after moving to the line of the Zezere.</p> +<p>He only enrolled sufficient recruits to fill the gaps made by +war and disease; refusing to raise the number above 2000, as this +was as many as could be readily handled; for he had found that the +larger number had but increased the difficulties of rationing and +paying them.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch12" id="Ch12">Chapter 12</a>: Fuentes D'Onoro.</h2> +<p>In the early spring Soult, who was besieging Cadiz, received +orders from Napoleon to cooperate with Massena and, although +ignorant of the latter's plans, and even of his position, prepared +to do so at once. He crushed the Spanish force on the Gebora; +captured Badajoz, owing to the treachery and cowardice of its +commander; and was moving north, when the news reached him that +Massena was falling back. The latter's position had, indeed, become +untenable. His army was wasted by sickness; and famine threatened +it, for the supplies obtainable from the country round had now been +exhausted. Wellington was, as he knew from his agents in the +Portuguese government, receiving reinforcements; and would shortly +be in a position to assume the offensive.</p> +<p>The discipline in the French army under Massena had been greatly +injured by its long inactivity. The only news he received as to +Soult's movements was that he was near Badajoz; therefore, the +first week in March he began his retreat, by sending off 10,000 +sick and all his stores to Thomar. Then he began to fall back. +Thick weather favoured him, and Ney assembled a large force near +Leiria, as if to advance against the British position. Two other +corps left Santarem, on the night of the fifth, and retired to +Thomar. The rest of the army moved by other routes.</p> +<p>For four days Wellington, although discovering that a retreat +was in progress, was unable to ascertain by which line Massena was +really retiring. As soon as this point was cleared up, he ordered +Beresford to concentrate near Abrantes; while he himself followed +the line the main body of the French army seemed to be taking. It +was soon found that they were concentrating at Pombal, with the +apparent intention of crossing the Mondego at Coimbra; whereby they +would have obtained a fresh and formidable position behind the +Mondego, with the rich and untouched country between that river and +the Douro, upon which they could have subsisted for a long +time.</p> +<p>Therefore, calling back the troops that were already on the +march to relieve Badajos, which had not yet surrendered, he +advanced with all speed upon Pombal, his object being to force the +French to take the line of retreat through Miranda for the +frontier, and so to prevent him from crossing the Mondego.</p> +<p>Ney commanded the rear guard, and carried out the operation with +the same mixture of vigour, valour, and prudence with which he, +afterwards, performed the same duty to the French army on its +retreat from Moscow. He fought at Pombal and at Redinha, and that +so strenuously that, had it not been for Trant, Wilson, and other +partisans who defended all the fords and bridges, Massena would +have been able to have crossed the Mondego. Wellington however +turned, one by one, the positions occupied by Ney; and Massena, +believing that the force at Coimbra was far stronger than it really +was, changed his plans and took up a position at Cazal Nova.</p> +<p>Here he left Ney and marched for Miranda but, although Ney +covered the movement with admirable skill, disputing every ridge +and post of vantage, the British pressed forward so hotly that +Massena was obliged to destroy all his baggage and ammunition. Ney +rashly remained on the east side of the river Cerra, in front of +the village of Foz d'Aronce and, being attacked suddenly, was +driven across the river with a loss of 500 men; many being drowned +by missing the fords, and others crushed to death in the passage. +However, Ney held the line of the river, blew up the bridge, and +his division withdrew in good order.</p> +<p>Massena tarnished the reputation, gained by the manner in which +he had drawn off his army from its dangerous position, by the +ruthless spirit with which the operation was conducted; covering +his retreat by burning every village through which he passed, and +even ordering the town of Leiria to be destroyed, although +altogether out of the line he was following.</p> +<p>After this fight the British pursuit slackened somewhat, for +Wellington received the news of the surrender of Badajoz and, +seeing that Portugal was thus open to invasion by Soult, on the +south, despatched Cole's division to join that of Beresford; +although this left him inferior in force to the army he was +pursuing. The advance was retarded by the necessity of making +bridges across the Cerra, which was now in flood, and the delay +enabled Massena to fall back unmolested to Guarda; where he +intended to halt, and then to move to Coria, whence he could have +marched to the Tagus, effected a junction with Soult, and be in a +position to advance again upon Lisbon, with a larger force than +ever. He had, however, throughout been thwarted by the factious +disobedience of his lieutenants Ney, Regnier, Brouet, Montbrun, and +Junot; and this feeling now broke into open disobedience and, while +Ney absolutely defied his authority, the others were so disobedient +that fierce and angry personal altercations took place.</p> +<p>Massena removed Ney from his command. His own movements were, +however, altogether disarranged by two British divisions, marching +over the mountains by paths deemed altogether impassable for +troops; which compelled him to abandon his intention of marching +south, and to retire to Sabuga on the Coa. Here he was attacked. +Regnier's corps, which covered the position, was beaten with heavy +loss but, owing to the combinations--which would have cut Massena +off from Ciudad Rodrigo--failing, from some of the columns going +altogether astray in a thick fog, Massena gained that town with his +army. He had lost in battle, from disease, or taken prisoners, +30,000 men since the day when, confident that he was going to drive +Wellington to take refuge on board his ships, he had advanced from +that town.</p> +<p>Even now he did not feel safe, though rejoined by a large number +of convalescents; and, drawing rations for his troops from the +stores of the citadel, he retired with the army to Salamanca. +Having reorganized his force, procured fresh horses for his guns, +and rested the troops for a few days; Massena advanced to cover +Ciudad Rodrigo, and to raise the siege of Almeida--which Wellington +had begun without loss of time--and, with upwards of 50,000 men, +Massena attacked the British at Fuentes d'Onoro.</p> +<a id="Map4" name="Map4"></a> +<center><img src="images/4.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Plan of the Battle of Fuentes d'Onoro." /></center> +<p>The fight was long and obstinate, and the French succeeded in +driving back the British right; but failed in a series of desperate +attempts to carry the village of Fuentes. Both sides claimed the +battle as a victory, but the British with the greater ground; for +Massena fell back across the Aqueda, having failed to relieve +Almeida; whose garrison, by a well-planned night march, succeeded +in passing through the besieging force, and effected their retreat +with but small loss, the town falling into the possession of the +British.</p> +<p>Terence had come up, after a series of long marches, on the day +before the battle. His arrival was very opportune, for the +Portuguese troops with Wellington were completely demoralized, and +exhausted, by the failure of their government to supply them with +food, pay, or clothes. So deplorable was their state that +Wellington had been obliged to disband the militia regiments, and +great numbers of desertions had taken place from the regular +troops.</p> +<p>The regiment had been stationed on the British right. Here the +fighting had been very severe. The French cavalry force was +enormously superior to the British, who had but a thousand troopers +in the field. These were driven back by the French, and Ramsay's +battery of horse artillery was cut off. But Ramsay placed himself +at the head of his battery and, at full gallop, dashed through the +French infantry and cavalry, and succeeded in regaining his +friends.</p> +<p>The two battalions of the Minho regiment, who were posted in a +wood, defended themselves with the greatest resolution against an +attack by vastly superior numbers; until the French, advancing on +each side of the wood, had cut them off from the rest of the +division. Then a bugle call summoned the men to assemble at the +rear of the wood and, forming squares, the two battalions marched +out.</p> +<p>Twelve French guns played upon them and, time after time, masses +of cavalry swept down on them but, filling up the gaps in their +ranks, they pressed on; charged two French regiments, at the +double, that endeavoured to block their way; burst a path through +them, and succeeded in rejoining the retiring division, which +received them with a burst of hearty cheering. Two hundred had +fallen, in the short time that had elapsed since they left the +wood.</p> +<p>Terence had been in the centre of one of the squares but, just +as they were breaking through the French ranks, he had ridden to +the rear face; and called upon the men to turn and repulse a body +of French cavalry, that was charging down upon them. At this moment +a bullet struck his horse in the flank. Maddened with the sudden +pain, the animal sprang forward, broke through the ranks of the +Portuguese in front of it and, before Terence could recover its +command, dashed at full speed among the French cavalry. Before he +could strike a blow in defence, Terence was cut down. As he fell +the cavalry passed over him but, fortunately, the impetus of his +charge had carried him nearly through their ranks before he fell; +and the horses of the rear rank leapt over his body, without +touching him. It was the force of the blow that had felled him for, +in the hurry of striking, the trooper's sword had partly turned, +and it was with the flat rather than the edge that he was +struck.</p> +<p>Although half stunned with the blow and the heavy fall, he did +not altogether lose consciousness. He heard, as he lay, a crashing +volley; which would, he felt sure, repulse the horsemen and, +fearing that in their retreat they might ride over him, trampling +him to death, he struggled to his feet. The French, however, though +repulsed, did not retire far, but followed upon the retreating +regiment until it joined the British; when a battery opened upon +them, and their commander called upon them to fall back. This was +done in good order, and at a steady trot.</p> +<p>On seeing Terence standing in their path, an officer rode up to +him.</p> +<p>"I surrender," Terence said.</p> +<p>A trooper was called out, and ordered to conduct him to the +rear; where many other prisoners, who had been taken during the +French advance, were gathered. Here an English soldier bound up +Terence's wound, from which the blood was streaming freely, a +portion of the scalp having been shorn clean off.</p> +<p>"That was a narrow escape, sir," the man said.</p> +<p>"Yes; I don't know how it was that it did not sever my skull; +but I suppose that it was a hasty blow, and the sword must have +turned. It might have been worse, by a good deal. I am afraid +things are going badly with us."</p> +<p>"Badly enough, here," the soldier said; "but I think we are +holding our own, in the centre. There is a tremendous roar of fire +going on, round that village there. I was captured half an hour +ago, and it has been growing louder and louder, ever since."</p> +<p>For another two hours the battle continued and, as it still +centred round the village, the spirits of the prisoners rose; for +it was evident that, although the right had been driven back, the +centre was at least holding its position, against all the efforts +of the French. In the afternoon the fire slackened, and only a few +shots were fired.</p> +<p>The next morning at daybreak the prisoners, 300 in number, were +marched away under a strong escort. Both armies still occupied the +same positions they had held the day before, and there seemed every +probability of the battle being renewed. When, however, they had +marched several miles, and no sound of heavy firing was heard, the +prisoners concluded that either Wellington had retired; or that +Massena, seeing his inability to drive the British from their +position, intended himself to fall back upon Ciudad.</p> +<p>The convoy marched twenty miles, and then halted for the night. +Two hours after they did so a great train of waggons containing +wounded came up, and halted at the same place. The wounded were +lifted out and laid on the ground, where the surgeons attended to +the more serious cases.</p> +<p>"Pardon, monsieur," Terence said in French, to one of the +doctors who was near him, "are there any of our countrymen among +the wounded?"</p> +<p>"No, sir, they are all French," the doctor replied.</p> +<p>"That is a good sign," Terence said, to an English officer who +was standing by him when he asked the question.</p> +<p>"Why so, Colonel?"</p> +<p>"Because, if Massena intended to attack again tomorrow, he would +have sent the British wounded back, as well as his own men. The +French, like ourselves, make no distinction between friends and +foes; and that he has not sent them seems, to me, to show that he +intends himself to fall back, and to leave the British wounded to +the care of their own surgeons, rather than embarrass himself with +them."</p> +<p>"Yes, I have no doubt that is the case," the officer said. "It +seems, then, that we must have won the day, after all. That is some +comfort, anyhow, and I shall sleep more soundly than I expected. If +we had been beaten, there would have been nothing for it but for +the army to fall back again to the lines of Torres Vedras; and +Wellington would have had to fight very hard to regain them. If +Massena does fall back, Almeida will have to surrender."</p> +<p>"I was inside last time it surrendered," Terence said, "but I +managed to make my way out with my regiment, after the +explosion."</p> +<p>"I wonder whether Massena means to leave us at Ciudad, or to +send us on to Salamanca?"</p> +<p>"I should think that he would send us on," Terence replied; "he +will not want to have 300 men eating up the stores at Ciudad, +besides requiring a certain portion of the garrison to look after +them."</p> +<p>Terence's ideas proved correct and, without stopping at Ciudad, +the convoy of prisoners and wounded continued their march until +they arrived at Salamanca. Terence could not help smiling, as he +was marched through the street, and thought of the wild panic that +he and Dicky Ryan had caused, when he was last in that town. The +convent which the Mayo Fusiliers had occupied was now turned into a +prison, and here the prisoners taken at Fuentes d'Onoro were +marched, and joined those who had fallen into the hands of the +French during Massena's retreat. Among these were several officers +of his acquaintance and, as discipline was not very strict, they +were able to make themselves fairly comfortable together.</p> +<p>The French, indeed, along the whole of the Portuguese frontier, +had their hands full; and the force at Salamanca was so small that +but few men could be spared for prison duties and, so long as their +captives showed no signs of giving trouble, their guards were +satisfied to leave them a good deal to their own devices; watching +the gate carefully, but leaving much of the interior work of the +prison to be done by Spanish warders for, violent as the natives +were in their expressions of hatred for the French, they were +always ready to serve under them, in any capacity in which money +could be earned.</p> +<p>"There can be no difficulty, whatever, in making one's escape +from here," Terence said, to a party of four or five officers who +were lodged with him in a room, from whose window a view over the +city was obtainable. "It is not the getting out of this convent +that is difficult, but the making one's way across this country to +rejoin. I have no doubt that one could bribe one of those Spaniards +to bring in a rope and, even if that could not be obtained, we +might manage to make one from our blankets; but the question is, +what to do when we have got out? Massena lies between us and Ciudad +and, from what I hear the French soldiers say, the whole line is +guarded down to Badajoz, where Soult's army is lying. Victor is +somewhere farther to the south, and their convoys and cavalry will +be traversing the whole country. I speak Portuguese well, and know +enough of Spanish to pass as a Spaniard, among Frenchmen, but to +anyone who does not speak either language it would be next to +impossible to get along."</p> +<p>"I quite see that," one of the officers said, "and for my part I +would rather stay where I am, than run the risk of such an attempt. +I don't know a word of Spanish, and should be recaptured before I +had been out an hour. If I got away from the town I should be no +better off, for I could not obtain a disguise. As to making one's +way from here to Almeida, it would be altogether hopeless."</p> +<p>The others agreed, and one of them said:</p> +<p>"But don't let us be any hindrance to you, O'Connor. If you are +disposed to try, by all means do so and, if we can help you in any +way, we will."</p> +<p>"I shall certainly try," Terence said; "but I shall wait a +little to see how things go. It may be by this time Wellington has +fallen back again and, in that case, no doubt Massena will advance. +We heard as we came along that Marmont, with six divisions, is +approaching the frontier and, even if Wellington could maintain +himself on the Aqueda, Soult is likely to crush Beresford, and may +advance from Badajoz towards Lisbon, when the British will be +obliged to retire at once.</p> +<p>"To make one's way across the open country between this and +Ciudad would be easy enough; while it would be dangerous in the +extreme to enter the passes, while the French troops are pressing +through them on Wellington's rear. My Portuguese would, of course, +be a hindrance rather than a benefit to me on this side of the +frontier; for the Spaniards hate the Portuguese very much more +heartily than they do the French. You know that, when they were +supplying our army with grain, the Spanish muleteers would not +bring any for the use of the Portuguese brigades; and it was only +by taking it as if for the British divisions, and distributing it +afterwards to the Portuguese, that the latter could be kept alive. +As a British officer I should feel quite safe, if I fell into the +hands of Spanish guerillas; but as a Portuguese officer my life +would not be worth an hour's purchase."</p> +<p>Two days later came the news that a desperate battle had been +fought by Beresford at Albuera, near Badajoz. He had been attacked +by Soult but, after tremendous fighting, in which the French first +obtained great advantages, they had been at last beaten off by the +British troops; and it ended a drawn battle, the losses on both +sides being extraordinarily heavy. It was not until some time +afterwards that Terence learned the particulars of this desperate +engagement. Beresford had 30,000 infantry, 2000 cavalry, and 38 +guns; but the British infantry did not exceed 7000. Soult had 4000 +veteran cavalry, 19,000 infantry, and 40 guns.</p> +<p>The battle began badly. Blake with his Spaniards were soon +disposed of by the French and, in half an hour, the battle was all +but lost; a brigade of the British infantry being involved in the +confusion caused by the Spanish retreat, and two-thirds of its +number being destroyed. The whole brunt of the battle now fell upon +the small British force remaining. French columns pushed up the +hill held by them. The cannon on both sides swept the ground with +grape. The heavy French columns suffered terribly from the fire +from the English lines; but they pressed forward, gained the crest +of the rise and, confident of victory, were still advancing; when +Cole and Houghton's brigades came up and restored the battle, and +the British line, charging through a storm of grape and musketry, +fell upon the French columns and drove them down the hill again, in +confusion.</p> +<p>The Portuguese battalions had fought well, as had the German +regiment; but it was upon the British that the whole brunt of the +fight had fallen. In the four hours that the combat lasted, 7000 of +the allies and over 8000 of the French had been killed or wounded. +Of the 6000 British infantry, only 1800 remained standing when the +battle was over, 4200 being killed or wounded; 600 Germans and +Portuguese were placed hors de combat; while of the Spaniards, who +formed the great mass of the army, 2000 were killed or wounded by +the French artillery and musketry, or cut down while in disorder by +the French cavalry.</p> +<p>Never was the indomitable valour of British infantry more +markedly shown than at the battle of Albuera. The battle had been +brought on, in no small degree, by their anxiety for action. The +regiments had been disappointed that, while their comrades were +sharing in Wellington's pursuit of Massena, they were far away from +the scene of conflict; and when Beresford would have fallen back, +as it would have been prudent to do, they became so insubordinate +that he gave way to their desire to meet the French; and so fought +a battle where defeat would have upset all Wellington's plans for +the campaign, and victory would have brought no advantages with it. +Like Inkerman, it was a soldiers' battle. Beresford's dispositions +were faulty in the extreme and, tactically, the day was lost before +the fighting began.</p> +<p>The Spanish portion of the army did no real fighting and, in +their confusion, involved the loss of nearly the whole of a British +brigade; and it was only by the unconquerable valour of the +remainder of the British force that victory was gained, against +enormous odds, and that against some of the best troops of +France.</p> +<p>Terence was in the habit of often going down and chatting with +the French guard at the gate. Their duties were tedious, and they +were glad of a talk with this young British officer, who was the +only prisoner in their keeping who spoke their language fluently; +and from them he obtained what news they had of what was going on. +A fortnight later, he gathered that the British force on the Aqueda +had been greatly weakened, that there was no intention of laying +siege to Ciudad, and it was believed that Wellington's main body +had marched south to join Beresford.</p> +<p>This was, indeed, the only operation left open to the British +general. Regnier's division of Marmont's army had joined Massena, +and it would be impossible to besiege Ciudad while a force, greatly +superior to his own, was within easy striking distance. On the +other hand, Beresford was in no position to fight another battle +and, as long as Badajoz remained in the hands of the French, they +could at any time advance into Portugal; and its possession was +therefore of paramount importance.</p> +<p>Marmont had succeeded Massena in command, the latter marshal +having been recalled to France; and the great bulk of the French +army was now concentrated round Salamanca, from which it could +either march against the British force at Ciudad; or unite with +Soult and, in overwhelming strength, either move against Cadiz or +advance into Portugal. Wellington therefore left Spencer to guard +the line of the Coa, and make demonstrations against Ciudad; while +with the main body of his army he marched south.</p> +<p>The news decided Terence to attempt to make his escape in that +direction. He did not know whether his own regiment would be with +Spencer, or Wellington; but it was clear that more important events +would be likely to take place near Badajoz than on the Coa. The +French would be unlikely to choose the latter route for an advance +into Portugal. The country had been stripped bare by the two armies +that had marched across it. The roads were extremely bad, and it +would be next to impossible for an army to carry with it sustenance +for the march; still less for maintaining itself after it had +traversed the passes. Moreover Spencer, falling back before them, +would retire to the lines of Torres Vedras; and the invaders would +find themselves, as Massena had done, baffled by that tremendous +line of fortifications, where they might find also Wellington and +his army, who would have shorter roads to follow, established +before they arrived.</p> +<p>Some of the townspeople were allowed to pass in and out of the +convent, to sell fruit and other articles to the British prisoners; +and Terence thought it better to open negotiations with one of +these, rather than one of the warders in French pay. He was not +long in fixing upon one of them as an ally. She was a good-looking +peasant girl, who came regularly with grapes and other fruit. From +the first, Terence had made his purchases from her, and had stood +chatting with her for some time.</p> +<p>"I want to get away from here, Nita," he said, on the day he +received the news of Wellington's march to the south.</p> +<p>"I dare say, senor," she laughed. "I suppose all the other +prisoners want the same."</p> +<p>"No doubt; but you see, they would not have much chance of +getting away, because none of them understand Spanish. I talk it a +little, as you see. So if I got out and had a disguise, I might +very well make my way across the country."</p> +<p>"There are many brigands about," she said, "and it is not safe +for a single man to travel anywhere. What do you want me to +do?"</p> +<p>"I want a rope fifty feet long; not a very thick one, but strong +enough to bear my weight. That is the first thing. Then I want a +disguise; but that I could get, if a friend would be in readiness +to give it to me, after I had slid down the rope into the +street."</p> +<p>"How could I give you a rope, senor, with all these people +about?"</p> +<p>"You could put it into the bottom of your basket, and cover it +over with fruit. You could take your stand near the door, at the +foot of the stairs leading up to my room. Then I could, in the +hearing of the rest, say that it was my fete day; and that I was +going to give the others a treat, so that I would buy all your +grapes. After we had bargained for them, I could hand you the money +and say:</p> +<p>"'Give me your basket. I will run upstairs, empty it, and bring +it down to you.'</p> +<p>"As this would save my making five or six journeys upstairs, +there would be nothing suspicious about that."</p> +<p>"I will think it over," the girl said, gravely. "I do not see +that there would be much danger. I will give you an answer +tomorrow."</p> +<p>The next day she said, when Terence went up to her, "I will do +it, senor. I have a lover who is a muleteer. I spoke to him last +night, and he will help you. Tomorrow I will give you the rope. In +the afternoon you are to hang something out of your window; not +far, but so that it can be just seen from the street. That red sash +of yours will do very well. Do not let it go more than an inch or +two beyond the window sill, so that it will not attract any +attention.</p> +<p>"When the clock strikes ten, Garcia and I will be in the street +below that window. This is a quiet neighbourhood, and no one is +likely to be about. Garcia will have a suit of muleteer's clothes +for you, and you can change at once. I will carry those you have on +to our house, and destroy them. Garcia will take you to his +lodging. He starts at daybreak with his mules, and you can travel +with them."</p> +<p>"Thank you most heartily, Nita. Here are five gold pieces, for +the purchase of the ropes and clothes."</p> +<p>"Oh, they will not cost anything like as much as that!" the girl +said.</p> +<p>"If they don't, you must buy yourself a little keepsake, Nita, +in remembrance of me; but I will send you something better worth +having, by Garcia, when I reach our army, and am able to get money +with which I can pay him for his labour and loss of time."</p> +<p>"I don't want money," the girl said, drawing herself up proudly. +"I am helping you because I like you, and because you have come +here to drive the French away."</p> +<p>"I should not think of offering you money, Nita. I know that it +is out of pure kindness that you are doing it; but you could not +refuse some little trinket to wear, on your wedding day."</p> +<p>"I may never get married," the girl said, with a pout.</p> +<p>"Oh, I know better than that, Nita! A girl with as pretty a face +as yours would never remain single, and I should not be surprised +if you were to tell me that the day is fixed already."</p> +<p>"It is not fixed, and is not likely to be, senor. I have told +Garcia that I will never marry, as long as the French are here. He +may go out with one of the partisan forces. He often talks about +doing so, and might get shot any day by these brigands. When I am +married, I am not going to stay at home by myself, while he is away +among the mountains."</p> +<p>"Ah! Well, the war cannot last for ever. You may have Wellington +here before the year is out. Give me your address, so that when we +come, I may find you out."</p> +<p>"Callao San Salvador, Number 10. It is one of my uncles I am +living with there. My home is in Burda, six miles away. It is a +little village, and there are so many French bands ranging over the +country that, a month ago, my father sent me in here to stay with +my uncle; thinking that I should be safer in the city than in a +little village. He brings fruit in for me to sell, twice a +week."</p> +<p>"Very well. If we come here, I shall go to your uncle's and +inquire for you and, if you have left him, I will go out to your +village and find you."</p> +<p>All passed off as arranged, without the slightest hitch. Terence +took the girl's basket and ran upstairs with it, emptied the fruit +out on the table, thrust the rope under his bed, and ran down again +and gave Nita the basket. At ten o'clock at night he slung himself +from the window and after a hearty goodbye to his fellow +prisoners--several of whom, now that it was too late, would gladly +have shared in his adventure.</p> +<p>"I should be very glad if you were going with me, but at the +same time I own that I do not think we should get through. I +question, indeed, if the muleteer would take anyone who did not +understand enough Spanish to pass, if he were questioned by French +soldiers; and if he would do so, it would greatly increase the +risk. At the same time, if one of you would like to take my place, +I will relinquish it to you; and will, after you have gone off with +the muleteer, go in another direction, and take my chance of +getting hold of a disguise, somehow, and of making my way out."</p> +<p>None of the others would hear of this and, after extinguishing +the light, so as to obviate the risk of anyone noticing him getting +out of the window, Terence slipped down to the ground just as the +clock struck ten.</p> +<p>"Good evening, senor!" a voice said, as his feet touched the +ground. "Here is your disguise. Nita is watching a short distance +away, and will give us notice if anyone approaches. You had best +change, at once."</p> +<p>Terence took off his uniform and, with the assistance of the +muleteer, donned the garments that he had brought for him. Then he +rolled the others into a bundle, and the muleteer gave a low +whistle, whereupon Nita came running up.</p> +<p>"Thanks be to the saints that no one has come along!" she said, +as the rope, which Terence had forgotten, fell at their feet; his +companions having, as agreed, untied the upper end.</p> +<p>"That will come in useful," Garcia said, coiling it up on his +arm. "Now, senor, do not let us stand talking. Nita will take the +uniform and burn it."</p> +<p>"I will hide it, if you like," the girl said. "There can be no +reason for their searching our house."</p> +<p>"Thank you, Nita, but it would be better to destroy it, at once. +It may be a long time before I come this way again; besides, the +things have seen their best days, and I have another suit I can put +on, when I join my regiment. Thanks very much for your kindness, +which I shall always remember."</p> +<p>"Goodbye, senor! May the saints protect you!" and without giving +him time to say more, she took the bundle from Garcia's hand and +sped away down the street.</p> +<p>"Now, senor, follow me," he said, and turned to go in the other +direction.</p> +<p>"You had best call me Juan, and begin at once," Terence said. +"If by accident you were to say senor, in the hearing of anyone, +there would be trouble at once."</p> +<p>"I shall be careful, never fear," the man said. "However, there +would only be harm done if there happened to be a Frenchman--or one +of their Spaniards, who are worse--present. As to my own comrades, +it would not matter at all. We muleteers are all heart and soul +against the French, and will do anything to injure them. We are all +obliged to work for them; for all trade is at an end, and we must +live. Many have joined the partisans, but those who have good mules +cannot go away and give up their only means of earning a living; +for although the French pay for carriage by mules or carts, if they +come upon animals that are not being used, they take them without a +single scruple.</p> +<p>"Besides, there are not many partisans in this part of Spain. +The French have been too long in the valley here, and are too +strong in the Castiles for their operations. It is different in +Navarre, Aragon, and Catalonia; and in Valencia and Mercia. There +the French have never had a firm footing, and most of the strong +places are still in Spanish hands. In all the mountainous parts, in +fact, there are guerillas; but here it is too dangerous. There are +bands all over the country, but these are really but robbers, and +no honest man would join them.</p> +<p>"This is the house."</p> +<p>He turned in at a small doorway and unlocked the door, closing +it after them.</p> +<p>"Put your hand on my shoulder, Juan," he said. "I have a light +upstairs."</p> +<p>He led the way in darkness up a stone staircase, then unlocked +another door and entered a small room, where a candle was +burning.</p> +<p>"This is my home, when I am here," he said. "Most of us sleep at +the stables where our mules are put up; but I like having a place +to myself, and my mate looks after the mules."</p> +<p>Nothing could have been simpler than the furniture of the room. +It consisted of a low pallet, a small table, and a single chair. In +a corner were a pair of saddlebags and two or three coloured +blankets. A thick coat, lined with sheepskin, hung against the +wall. In a corner was a brightly-coloured picture of a saint, with +two sconces for candles by the side of it. The muleteer had crossed +himself and bowed to it as he came in, and Terence doubted not that +it was the picture of a saint who was supposed to take a special +interest in muleteers.</p> +<p>From a small cupboard, the man brought out a flask of wine and +two drinking cups.</p> +<p>"It is good," he said, as he placed them on the table. "I go +down to Xeres sometimes, and always bring up a half octave of +something special for my friends, here."</p> +<p>After pouring out the two cups, he handed the chair politely to +Terence, and sat himself down on the edge of the pallet. Then, +taking out a tobacco bag and a roll of paper, he made a cigarette +and handed it to Terence, and then rolled one for himself.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch13" id="Ch13">Chapter 13</a>: From Salamanca To +Cadiz.</h2> +<p>"Now, let us talk about our journey," the muleteer said, when he +had taken two or three whiffs at his cigarette. "Nita tells me that +you wish, if possible, to join your army near Badajoz. That suits +me well, for I have orders from a merchant here to fetch him twelve +mule loads of sherry from Xeres; and Badajoz is, therefore, on my +way. The merchant has a permit, signed by Marmont, for me to pass +unmolested by any French troops; saying that the wine is intended +for his use, and that of his staff. If it were not for that, there +would be small chance, indeed, of his ever getting it. There is so +little trade, now, that it is scarce possible to buy a flask of the +white wine of the south, here. Of course, the pass will be equally +useful going down to fetch it for, without it, my mules would be +certain to be impressed for service, by the French.</p> +<p>"So you see, nothing could have happened more fortunately for, +anywhere between the Tagus and Badajoz, we can turn off from +Estremadura into Portugal. It would not be safe to try near +Badajoz, for Soult's army is scattered all over there and, though +the pass would be doubtless respected by superior officers, if we +fell in with foraging parties they would have no hesitation in +shooting me, tearing up the pass, and carrying off my mules. For +your sake as well as my own, therefore, I would turn off and cross +the mountains--say, to Portalegre--and go down to Elvas. There you +would be with your friends; and I could cross again, further south, +and make my way down to Xeres."</p> +<p>"They say that two of Marmont's divisions started south, +yesterday."</p> +<p>"That is unfortunate, for they will leave little behind them in +the way of food and drink; and we shall find it better to travel by +by-roads. I should not mind being impressed, if it were only for +the march down to Badajoz; but once with an army, there is no +saying how long one may be kept."</p> +<p>"If we find any difficulty in crossing into Portugal this side +of Badajoz, I shall not mind going down to Cadiz. I should have no +difficulty, there, in getting a ship to Lisbon."</p> +<p>"Well, we shall see," the muleteer said. "We will go the short +way, if we can. I hate the Portuguese, and they are no fonder of +us; but with you with me, of course, I should not be afraid of +interference from them."</p> +<p>"But the Portuguese are fighting on our side, and aiding us to +help you."</p> +<p>"Yes, because they think it is better that the war should be +carried on here than in their own country. Besides, from what I +hear, it is with no goodwill that they fight under your British +general; but only because he tells them that, unless they furnish +so many troops, he will have nothing more to do with them, but will +sail away with his army to England."</p> +<p>"That may be true, Garcia; but you know that when we were +here--for I was with the British army that marched through +Salamanca--the Spanish authorities were no more willing to assist +than were the Portuguese; and not a single soldier--with the +exception of two or three thousand half-armed men under +Romana--joined, from the day we crossed the frontier to that on +which we embarked to Corunna."</p> +<p>"The authorities are all bad," Garcia said scornfully. "They +only think of feathering their own nests, and of quarrelling among +themselves. The people are patriots, but what can they do when the +Juntas keep the arms the English have sent us in their magazines, +and divide the money among themselves? Then our generals know +nothing of their business, and have their own ambitions and +rivalries. We are all ready to fight; and when the drum is beaten +and we are called out, we go willingly enough. But what do we do +when we go out? We are marched backwards and forwards without +motive; the officers are no good; and when at last we do see the +French we are always beaten, and the generals and the officers are +the first to run away.</p> +<p>"We ought in the first place to rise, not against the French, +but against the Juntas, and the councillors, and the hidalgos. +Then, when we have done with them, we ought to choose officers from +among ourselves, men that have done good service as leaders of +partisans. Then we could meet the French. We are brave enough, when +we are well led. See how the people fought at Saragossa, and since +then at Gerona, and many other places. We are not afraid of being +killed, but we have no confidence in our chiefs."</p> +<p>"I have no doubt that is so, Garcia; and that, if the regiments +were trained by British officers, as some of the Portuguese now +are, you would fight well. Unfortunately, as you say, your generals +and officers are chosen, not for their merits, but from their +influence with the Juntas, whose object is to have the army filled +with men who will be subservient to their orders.</p> +<p>"Then there is another thing against you: that is, the jealousy +of the various provinces. There is no common effort. When Valencia +is invaded, for example, the Valencians fight; but they have no +idea of going out from their homes to assist Castile or Catalonia +and so, one after another, the provinces are conquered by the +French."</p> +<p>"That is so," Garcia said thoughtfully. "If they were to rise +here I would fight, and take my chance of being killed; but I +should not care to risk my life in defence of Valencia, with which +I have nothing whatever to do. I don't see how you are to get over +that, so long as we are divided into provinces."</p> +<p>"Nor do I, Garcia. In times of peace these various governments +may work well enough; but nothing could be worse than the system, +when a country is invaded.</p> +<p>"What time do you start, tomorrow?"</p> +<p>"As soon as the gates are open. That will be at five o'clock. It +is eleven now, so we had better get some sleep. In the morning I +must see that your dress is all right. Nita has given me a bottle +of walnut juice, to stain your face and hands.</p> +<p>"Do you lie down on the bed, senor. I will wrap myself up in +this cloak. I am more accustomed to sleep on that than on the +bed."</p> +<p>Terence removed his outer garments and, in a few minutes, was +sound asleep. At four o'clock Garcia roused him. The morning was +breaking and, with the assistance of the muleteer, he made his +toilet and stained his face, neck, and hands, and darkened his +hair. Then they each ate a piece of bread with a bunch of grapes, +took a drink of red wine, and then sallied out; Garcia carrying his +sheepskin cloak, and Terence the three coloured blankets. A quarter +of a mile farther, they came to an inn frequented by muleteers.</p> +<p>"I have told my mate about you," Garcia said, "so you need not +be afraid of him; nor indeed of any of us. There is not a muleteer +who would not do what he could to aid the escape of a British +officer."</p> +<p>Most of the mules were already saddled, and Garcia went up with +Terence to a man who was buckling a strap.</p> +<p>"Sanchez," he said, "this is our new comrade, Juan, who I told +you would accompany us this journey."</p> +<p>The man nodded.</p> +<p>"It will be all the better," he said. "Twelve mules are rather +too much for two men to manage, when we get among the +mountains."</p> +<p>Garcia and Terence at once set to work to assist, and in ten +minutes the cavalcade started. Garcia rode the leading mule, three +others being tied in single file behind it. Terence came next, and +Sanchez brought up the rear. The animals were fine ones, and Garcia +was evidently proud of them; showing their good points to Terence, +and telling him their names. The mules were all very fond of their +master, turning their heads at once when addressed by name; and +flapping their long ears in enjoyment, as he rubbed their heads or +patted their necks.</p> +<p>The town was already astir and, as they reached the gates, +country carts were pouring in, laden with fruits and vegetables for +the market. Garcia stopped for a moment, as an old man came along +with a cart.</p> +<p>"How are you, father?"</p> +<p>"How are you, Garcia? Off again?"</p> +<p>"Yes; I am going to Xeres for wine, for the French general."</p> +<p>"I see that you have got a new comrade."</p> +<p>"Yes; the journey is a long one, and I thought that it was as +well to have another mate."</p> +<p>"Yes, it is dangerous travelling," the old man said. "Well, +goodbye, and good fortune to you!"</p> +<p>Garcia put his mules in motion again, and they passed through +the gate and soon left Salamanca behind. There was little +conversation on the way. The two Spaniards made and smoked +cigarettes continually; and Terence endeavoured to imitate them, by +addressing the endearing words they used to their animals, having +learned the names of the four of which he was in charge. At first +they did not respond to this strange voice but, as they became +accustomed to it, each answered, when its name was called, by +quickening its pace and by a sharp whisk of the tail, that showed +it understood that it was addressed.</p> +<p>Terence knew that his escape would not be discovered until eight +o'clock, when the doors were opened and the prisoners assembled in +the yard for the roll call. Should any pursuit be organized, which +was unlikely, it would be in the direction of Ciudad; as it might +be supposed that an escaped prisoner would naturally make for the +nearest spot where he could join his friends. One prisoner more or +less would, however, make but little difference; and the +authorities would probably content themselves with sending a +message by a trooper, to all the towns and villages on that road, +to arrest any suspicious persons travelling without proper +papers.</p> +<p>On the line they were pursuing, the risk of interference was +very small. The marshal's pass would be certainly respected by the +officers of the corps under his command; and it was not until they +fell in with parties of Soult's troops that any unpleasantness was +to be apprehended; though even here the worst that could be looked +for, if they met any large body of troops, would be that the mules +might be taken, for a time, for service in the army.</p> +<p>After a long day's journey they halted, for the night, at a +village. Here they found that the troops marching south had +encamped close at hand for the night, and the resources of the +place had been completely exhausted. This mattered but little, as +they carried a week's store of bread, black sausage, cheese, +onions, garlic, and capsicums. The landlord of the little inn +furnished them with a cooking pot; and a sort of stew, which +Terence found by no means unpalatable, was concocted. The mules +were hobbled and turned out on to the plain to graze; for the whole +of the forage of the village had been requisitioned, for the use of +the cavalry and baggage animals of the French column.</p> +<p>On the following morning they struck off from the road they had +been following and, travelling for sixteen hours, came down on it +again at the foot of the pass of Bejar; and learned from some +peasants that they had got ahead of the French column, which was +encamped two or three miles down the road. Before daybreak they +were on their way again, and reached Banos in the afternoon. There +were but few inhabitants remaining here; for the requisitions for +food and forage, made by the troops that had so frequently passed +through the defiles, were such that the position of the inhabitants +had become intolerable and, when they learned from Garcia that two +divisions of French troops would most probably arrive that evening, +and that Marmont's whole army would follow, most of the inhabitants +who remained hastily packed their most valuable belongings in +carts, and drove away into the hills.</p> +<p>The landlord of the largest inn, however, stood his ground. He +was doing well; and the principal officers of troops passing +through always took up their quarters with him, paid him fairly for +their meals and saw that, whatever exactions were placed upon the +town, he was exempted from them. Therefore the muleteers were able +to obtain a comfortable meal and, after resting their animals for +three hours, and giving them a good feed of corn, went on a few +miles farther; and then, turning off, encamped among the hills. +They were about to wrap themselves in their cloaks and blankets, +and to lie down for the night, when a number of armed men suddenly +appeared.</p> +<p>"Who are you, and whither are you going?" one, who appeared to +be their leader, asked.</p> +<p>"We are bound for Xeres," Garcia replied, rising to his feet. +"We are commissioned by Senor Moldeno, the well-known wine merchant +of Salamanca, to procure for him--as much good Xeres wine as our +mules will carry."</p> +<p>"It is a pity that we did not meet you on the way back, instead +of on your journey there. We should appreciate the wine quite as +thoroughly as his customers would do. But how do you propose to +bring your wine back, when the whole country south swarms with +Soult's cavalry?"</p> +<p>"Don Moldeno obtained a pass for us from Marmont; who, I +suppose, is one of his customers."</p> +<p>"We could not think of allowing wine to pass for the use of a +French marshal," the man said.</p> +<p>"It is not likely that he will drink it for some time," Garcia +said, carelessly; "for he is marching in this direction himself. +Two of his divisions have probably, by this time, reached Banos; +and we heard at Salamanca that he himself, with the rest of them, +will follow in a day or two."</p> +<p>"That is bad news," the man said. "There will be no travellers +along here, while the army is on its march. Are your mules carrying +nothing now?"</p> +<p>"Nothing at all. The mules would have been requisitioned two +days ago, as were most of the others in Salamanca; but Marmont's +pass saved us."</p> +<p>"Are you carrying the money to buy the wine with?"</p> +<p>"No, Don Moldeno knew better than that. I have only a letter +from him to the house of Simon Peron, at Xeres. He told me that +that would be sufficient, and they would furnish me with the wine, +at once, on my handing the letter to them."</p> +<p>"Well, comrades," the man said, to the others gathered round, +"it is evident that we shall get no booty tonight; and may as well +be off to our own fires, where supper is waiting for us; and move +away from here at daybreak. The French may have parties of horse +all over the hills, tomorrow, searching for provisions, cattle, and +sheep."</p> +<p>"That was a narrow escape," Garcia said, as the brigands moved +off. "I wonder they did not take our mules; but I suppose they had +as many as they want--three or four would be sufficient to carry +their food, and anything they may have stolen--more than that would +only be a hindrance to them in moving about, especially now they +know that the French may be in the neighbourhood in a few hours, if +they have not arrived already.</p> +<p>"Well, senor, what is the next thing to be done?"</p> +<p>Terence did not answer for some little time.</p> +<p>"It is not easy to say," he replied at length. "Seeing that +Marmont and Soult are practically united, there can be no doubt +that our troops will have to fall back again to Portugal. The whole +country is covered with French cavalry and, in addition, we have to +run risks from these brigands; who may not always prove so easy to +deal with as the men who have just left us. What do you think +yourself? You know the country, and can judge far better than I can +as to our chance of getting through."</p> +<p>"I don't think it will be possible, senor, to carry out the plan +of trying to cross into Portugal, in this direction. It seems to +me, now that Soult is engaged, and there can be no large bodies of +French near Seville, our best plan would be to make for that town; +whence, so far as we know, the country is clear of the enemy down +to Cadiz; and when we reach that port, you can take ship to +Lisbon."</p> +<p>"But in that case I shall not be able to get the money to pay +you, for I shall not be known; and although I could doubtless get a +passage, I do not think that I could obtain any funds."</p> +<p>"Do not speak of it, senor. The British will be in Salamanca one +of these days, and then you will be able to pay me; or, if I should +not be there at the time, you can leave the money for me with Nita, +or her father. It was for her sake that I undertook the business; +and I have no doubt, whatever, that you will discharge the debt +when you enter Salamanca."</p> +<p>"That I certainly will, and to make it more certain I will ask +one of the officers of my old regiment to undertake to find her +out, and to pay the money; in case I may be with my own men, in +some other part of the country."</p> +<p>"That will be quite enough, senor. Do not trouble yourself +further on the matter. We will start for Seville at daybreak."</p> +<p>Travelling rapidly, the little party kept along the range of the +sierras; and then proceeded by the valley of the Tagus and crossed +the river at Talavera; and then, keeping nearly due south, struck +the Guadiana at Ciudad Real and, crossing La Mancha, gained the +Sierra Morena; held west for some distance along the southern +slopes; and then turned south and struck the Guadalquivir between +Cordova and Seville, and arrived safely at the latter town. They +had been obliged to make a great number of detours, to avoid bodies +of the enemy; but the muleteer had no difficulty in obtaining +information, from the peasants, as to the whereabouts of the French +and, after reaching the plains, always travelled at night. They +fell in twice with large parties of guerillas; but these were not +brigands for, as the country was still unconquered, and the French +only held the ground they occupied, the bands had not degenerated +into brigandage; but were in communication with the local +authorities, and acted in conformity with their instructions, in +concert with the Spanish troops.</p> +<p>It was, however, nearly a month from the date of their leaving +Salamanca before they arrived at Cadiz. Terence had, during the +journey, greatly improved his knowledge of Spanish by his +conversation with the muleteers and, as the language was so similar +to the Portuguese, he soon acquired facility in speaking it. They +put up at a small fonda, or inn, frequented by muleteers; and +Terence at once made his way to the house where he heard that the +British agent resided. The latter, on hearing his story, was +surprised, indeed, that he should have made his way through Spain +from a point so far away as Salamanca; and occupied, for the +greater portion of the distance, by the French.</p> +<p>"A sloop-of-war is sailing tomorrow for the Tagus," he said, +"and I will give you a letter to her captain; who will, of course, +give you a passage."</p> +<p>Terence informed him of the great services the muleteer had +rendered him, and asked him if he could advance him sufficient +money to repay the man.</p> +<p>"I certainly have no funds at my disposal for such a purpose, +Captain O'Connor,"--for Terence had said nothing about his +Portuguese rank, finding that its announcement always caused a +certain amount of doubt--"but I will strain a point, and grant you +thirty pounds, on your bill upon your agent at Lisbon. I have no +doubt that it will be met on presentation. But should, for example, +your vessel be wrecked or captured, which I am by no means +contemplating as likely, the amount must go down among subsidies to +Spaniards who have rendered good service."</p> +<p>"Thank you, sir. That will be sufficient, not to reward the man +for the risk he has run and the fidelity that he has shown, but it +will at least pay him for the service of his mules. I do not +suppose that he would earn more, and it will be a satisfaction, to +me, to know that he is at least not out of pocket."</p> +<p>The agent at once handed him a bag of silver, together with a +letter to the officer in command of the Daphne. He hired a boat and +was rowed off to the ship; which was lying, with several other +small British warships, in the port. When he ascended the side the +officer on duty asked him somewhat roughly, in bad Spanish, what he +wanted.</p> +<p>"I have a letter for Captain Fry," he replied in English, to the +surprise of the lieutenant. "I am a British officer, who was taken +prisoner at the battle of Fuentes d'Onoro."</p> +<p>"You must not blame me for having taken you for a Spaniard," the +lieutenant said in surprise, as he handed the letter Terence held +out to the midshipman, with a request to deliver it to the captain. +"Your disguise is certainly excellent and, if you speak Spanish as +well as you look the part, I can quite understand your getting +safely through the country."</p> +<p>"Unfortunately, I do not. I speak it quite well enough for +ordinary purposes, but not well enough to pass as a native. I +travelled with a muleteer, who did all the talking that was +necessary. I have been a month on the journey, which has greatly +improved my Spanish. I knew little of it when I started, but I +should not have got on so quickly had I not been thoroughly up in +Portuguese; which, of course, helped me immensely."</p> +<p>The midshipman now came up and requested Terence to follow him +to the captain's cabin. The captain smiled as he entered.</p> +<p>"It is well that Mr. Bromhead vouched for you, Captain O'Connor; +for I certainly should have had difficulty in bringing myself to +believe that you were a British officer. I shall, of course, be +very glad to give you a passage; and to hear the story of your +adventures, which ought to be very interesting."</p> +<p>"I have had very few adventures," Terence replied. "The muleteer +knew the country perfectly; and had no difficulty in obtaining, +from the peasants, news of the movements of the French. When I +started I had no idea of making such a long journey; but had +intended to join Lord Beresford in front of Badajos, if I could not +manage to cross the frontier higher up; but Marmont's march south +rendered that impossible, and I thought that the safer plan would +be to keep well away from the frontier; as of course things are +much more settled in the interior, and two or three muleteers with +their animals would excite little attention, even if we passed +through a town with a large French garrison; except that the mules +might have been impressed and, as I had no means of recompensing my +guide in that case, I was anxious to avoid all risk.</p> +<p>"When do you sail, sir?"</p> +<p>"At eight o'clock tomorrow. You cannot very well go in that +attire," the captain said, smiling. "I shall be glad to advance any +sum that you may require to procure clothes. You can, no doubt, pay +me on your arrival at Lisbon."</p> +<p>Terence gladly accepted a loan of ten pounds and, with it, +returned to shore. On reaching the little inn, he at once handed +thirty pounds to Garcia. The man, however, absolutely refused to +accept it.</p> +<p>"No, senor; since you have got money, I will take fifty dollars +to pay for food and forage on my way back; although really you have +cost me nothing, for I had to make the journey on business. But +even did you owe me the money, I would not take it now. I may not +be so lucky on my way back as we have been in coming, and might be +seized by brigands; therefore I would, in any case, rather that you +left the matter until you come to Salamanca."</p> +<p>"But that may not be for a long time. It is quite as likely that +we may be obliged to quit Portugal, and embark for England, as that +we shall ever get to Salamanca."</p> +<p>"Who knows, senor! Luck may turn. However, I would rather that +it were so. I have had the pleasure of your having made the journey +with me, and I shall have pleased Nita. If you come, well and good. +If not, it cannot be helped, and I shall not grieve over it. If I +had money with me I might lose it, and it might cost me my +life."</p> +<p>Terence had again gone out, and purchased a suit of clothes +befitting a Spanish gentleman. He took the muleteer with him. They +had no longer any reason for concealing their identity and, should +he find it necessary to announce himself to be a British officer, +it might be useful to have corroboration of his story. He also laid +in a fresh stock of linen, of which he was greatly in need and, +next morning, after a hearty farewell to Garcia, he went down to +the port in his new attire and, carrying a small valise containing +his purchases, took a boat to the ship.</p> +<p>The evening before he had called in at the agent's, to thank him +again, when the latter told him that he had some urgent despatches +from the junta of Cadiz to that of Seville; and some despatches of +his own to persons at Cordova, and others in Madrid, who were in +communication with the British government; and he offered a sum, +for their safe delivery, that would recompense the muleteer for the +whole of his journey. This Garcia had gladly acceded to, on +condition that he might stop for a day, to get the wine at +Xeres.</p> +<p>The voyage to Lisbon lasted three days, and was a very pleasant +one to Terence. On his arrival there he at once repaid the captain +the loan he had received from him, having over thirty pounds still +in hand. He next saw the agent, and requested him to pay the bill +when presented and, after waiting three days to obtain a fresh +uniform, started up the country and rejoined Wellington, who had +been compelled to fall back again behind the Coa. He reported +himself to the adjutant general.</p> +<p>"You have just arrived in time, Captain O'Connor," the latter +said, "for your regiment is under orders to start, tomorrow, to +join the force of the guerilla Moras who, with two thousand men, is +in the mountains on our frontier near Miranda; and intends to +threaten Zamora, and so compel Marmont to draw off some of his +troops facing us here. Your regiment is at present on the Douro, +fifteen miles away. How have you come here?"</p> +<p>"I travelled by a country conveyance, sir. I am at present +without a horse, but no doubt I can pick one up, when I have +obtained funds from the paymaster."</p> +<p>"I will give you an order on him for fifty pounds," the adjutant +said. "Of course, there is a great deal more owing to you; but it +will save trouble to give you an order for that sum, on account. I +don't suppose you will want more. I will have inquiries made about +a horse. If you return here in an hour, I daresay I shall hear of +one for sale.</p> +<p>"Your regiment has not done much fighting since you left it, but +they behaved well at Banos, where we had a very sharp fight. They +came up just at the critical moment, and they materially assisted +us in beating off the attack of the French; who were in greatly +superior force, and nearly succeeded in capturing, or +exterminating, the light division."</p> +<p>On his return, Terence found that one of the officers on the +adjutant general's staff knew of a horse that had been captured, by +a trooper, in a skirmish with French dragoons three days before. It +was a serviceable animal and, as the soldier was glad to take ten +pounds for it, Terence at once purchased it. The adjutant told him +that, on mentioning his return, Lord Wellington had requested him +to dine with him; and to come half an hour before the usual time, +as he wished to question him with reference to the state of the +country he had passed through, and of the strength and probable +movements of the French troops in those districts.</p> +<p>"I am glad to see you back again, Colonel O'Connor," the general +said, when he entered. "Of course, I heard how you had been +captured, and have regretted your absence. Colonel Herrara is a +good officer in many ways, and the regiment has maintained its +state of efficiency; but he does not possess your energy and +enterprise, nor the readiness to assume responsibilities and to act +solely upon his own initiative--a most valuable quality," he said, +with one of his rare smiles, "when combined with sound judgment, +for an officer commanding a partisan corps like your own; but +which, if general, would in a very short time put an end to all +military combinations, and render the office of a +commander-in-chief a sinecure.</p> +<p>"Now, sir, will you be good enough to point out, on this map, +exactly the line you followed in travelling from Salamanca to +Cadiz: and give me any information you gained concerning the roads, +the disposition of the people, and the position and movements of +the French troops."</p> +<p>Terence had anticipated that such information would be required +of him; and had, every evening when they halted, jotted down every +fact that he thought could be useful and, on the voyage to Lisbon, +had written from them a full report, both of the matters which the +general now inquired about, and of the amount of supplies which +could probably be obtained in each locality, the number of houses +and accommodation available for troops, the state and strength of +the passes, and the information that Garcia had obtained for him of +mountain tracks by which these passes could be turned, by infantry +and cavalry in single file.</p> +<p>"I have brought my report, sir," he said, producing it. "I +endeavoured to make the most of my opportunities, to gain all the +information possible that might be useful to myself, or the +commander of any column moving across the same country. I fear that +it is far from being perfect but, as I wrote it from my notes, made +at the end of each day, I think it will answer its purpose, as far +as it goes."</p> +<p>Attached to each day's journey was a rough sketch map showing +the crossroads, rivers, bridges, and other particulars. The general +took the bulky report, sat down and read a page here and there, and +glanced at the maps. He looked up approvingly.</p> +<p>"Very good, indeed, Colonel O'Connor. If all officers would take +advantage of their opportunities, as you have done, the drudgery my +staff have to do would be very much lightened, and they would not +be constantly working in the dark."</p> +<p>He handed the report to the adjutant general.</p> +<p>"This may be of great utility when an advance begins," he said. +"You had better have two or three copies of it made. It will be +useful to the quartermaster's department, as well as to yourself; +and of great assistance to the officers in command of any detached +parties that may be despatched to gather in supplies, or to keep in +check an enemy advancing on our flank. Some day, when I can find +time, I will read the whole report myself.</p> +<p>"It will be well to have a dozen copies made of the first five +or six pages, and the maps, for the perusal of any officer sent out +with a detachment on scouting duty, as a model of the sort of +report that an officer should send in of his work, when on such +duty."</p> +<p>The party at dinner was a small one, consisting only of some +five or six officers of the headquarter staff, and two generals of +divisions. After dinner, Lord Wellington asked Terence how he +escaped from Salamanca, and the latter briefly related the +particulars of his evasion.</p> +<p>"This is the second time you have escaped from a French prison," +Lord Wellington said, when he had finished. "The last time, if I +remember rightly, you escaped from Bayonne in a boat."</p> +<p>"But you did not get to England in that boat, surely, Colonel +O'Connor?" one of the generals laughed.</p> +<p>"No, sir; we were driven off shore by a gale, and picked up by a +French privateer. We escaped from her as she was lying in port at +Brest, made our way to the mouth of the river Sienne, about nine +miles north of Granville; and then, stealing another boat, started +for Jersey. We were chased by a French privateer but, before she +came up to us, a Jersey privateer arrived and engaged her. While +the fight was going on we got on board the Jersey boat, which +finally captured the Frenchman, and took her into port."</p> +<p>"And from there, I suppose, you found your way to England, and +enjoyed a short rest from your labours?"</p> +<p>"No, sir. The captain of the privateer, who thought that we had +rendered him valuable assistance in the fight, sailed out with us +on to the ship track, and put us on board a transport bound for +Lisbon."</p> +<p>"Well, you are more heart and soul in it than I am," the general +laughed. "I should not have been able to deny myself a short run in +England."</p> +<p>"I was anxious to get back to my regiment, sir, as I was afraid +that, if I did not return before the next campaign opened, some +other officer might be appointed to its command."</p> +<p>"You need not trouble yourself on that score, in future, Colonel +O'Connor," Lord Wellington said. "If you have the bad luck to be +captured again, I shall know that your absence will be temporary +and, if it became necessary to appoint anyone else to your command, +it would only be until your return."</p> +<p>On leaving the commander-in-chief's quarters, the adjutant +general asked Terence when he thought of rejoining his +regiment.</p> +<p>"I am going to start at once, sir. I ordered my horse to be +saddled and in readiness, at ten o'clock."</p> +<p>"You must not think of doing so," the adjutant said. "The road +is very bad, and not at all fit to be traversed on a dark night +like this. Besides, you would really gain nothing by it. If you +leave at daybreak, you will overtake your regiment before it has +marched many miles."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch14" id="Ch14">Chapter 14</a>: Effecting A +Diversion.</h2> +<p>At twelve o'clock the next day Terence rode up to his regiment, +just as it had halted for two hours' rest. As soon as he was +recognized the men leapt to their feet, cheering vociferously, and +gathered round him; while, a minute or two later, Herrara, Ryan and +the two majors ran up to greet him.</p> +<a id="PicG" name="PicG"></a> +<center><img src="images/g.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: The men leapt to their feet, cheering vociferously." /> +</center> +<p>"I have been expecting you for the last month," Ryan exclaimed, +"though how you were to get through the French lines was more than +I could imagine. Still, I made sure you would do it, somehow."</p> +<p>"You gave me credit for more sharpness than I possess, Dick. I +felt sure it could not be done, and so I had to go right down to +Cadiz, and back to Lisbon by ship. It was a very much easier affair +than ours was, and I met with no adventures and no difficulties on +the way.</p> +<p>"Well, Herrara, I heard at headquarters that the regiment is +going on well, and they fought stoutly at Banos. Your loss was not +heavy, I hope?"</p> +<p>"We had fifty-three killed, and a hundred more or less seriously +wounded. More than half of them have rejoined. The vacancies have +been filled up, and the two battalions are both at their full +strength.</p> +<p>"Two of the captains, Fernandez and Panza, were killed. I have +appointed two of the sergeants temporarily, pending your +confirmation, on your return."</p> +<p>"It is well that it is no worse. They were both good men, and +will be a loss to us. Whom have you appointed in their places?"</p> +<p>"Gomes and Mendoza, the two sergeant majors. They are both men +of good family, and thoroughly know their duty. Of course I filled +their places, for the time, with two of the colour sergeants."</p> +<p>"I suppose you have ridden from headquarters, Terence," Ryan put +in, "and must be as hungry as a hunter. We were just going to sit +down to a couple of chickens and a ham, so come along."</p> +<p>While they were taking their meal, Terence gave them an account +of the manner in which he had escaped from Salamanca.</p> +<p>"So you were in our old quarters, Terence! Well, you certainly +have a marvellous knack of getting out of scrapes. When we saw your +horse carrying you into the middle of the French cavalry, I thought +for a moment that the Minho regiment had lost its colonel; but it +was not for long, and soon I was sure that, somehow or other, you +would give them the slip again. Of course I have been thinking of +you as a prisoner at Ciudad, and I was afraid that they would keep +a sharper watch over you, there, than they did at Bayonne. Still, I +felt sure that you would manage it somehow, even without the help +we had.</p> +<p>"What are your orders?"</p> +<p>"I have none, save that we are to march to Miranda, where we +shall find a guerilla force under Moras; and we are to operate with +him, and do all we can to attract the attention of the French. That +is all I know, for I have not had time to look at the written +instructions I received from the adjutant general when I said +goodbye to him, last night; but I don't think there are any precise +orders.</p> +<p>"What were yours, Herrara?"</p> +<p>"They are that I was to consult with Moras; to operate +carefully, and not to be drawn into any combat with superior or +nearly equal French forces; which I took to mean equal to the +strength of the regiment, for the guerillas are not to be depended +upon, to the smallest extent, in anything like a pitched +combat."</p> +<p>"There is no doubt about that," Terence agreed. "For cutting off +small parties, harassing convoys, or anything of that sort, they +are excellent; but for down-right hard fighting, the guerillas are +not worth their salt. The great advantage of them is that they +render it necessary for the French to send very strong guards with +their baggage and convoys; and occasionally, when they are +particularly bold and numerous, to despatch columns in pursuit of +them. If it were not for these bands, they would be able to +concentrate all their troops, and would soon capture Andalusia and +Valencia, and then turn their attention to other work. As it is, +they have to keep the roads clear, to leave strong garrisons +everywhere, and to keep a sufficient force in each province to make +head against the guerillas; for if they did not do so, all their +friends would be speedily killed, and the peasantry be constantly +incited to rise."</p> +<p>"Do you know anything of this Moras?"</p> +<p>"He is said to be a good leader," Herrara replied, "and to have +gathered under him a number of other bands. He has the reputation +of being less savage and cruel than the greater part of these +partisan leaders; and though, no doubt, he kills prisoners--for in +that he could hardly restrain his men--he does not permit the +barbarous cruelties that are a disgrace to the Spanish people. In +fact, I believe his orders are that no prisoners are to be +taken."</p> +<p>"I will look at my instructions," Terence said, drawing out the +paper he had received the night before.</p> +<p>"Yes," he said, when he had read them; "my instructions are a +good deal like yours, but they leave my hands somewhat more free. I +am to consult with Moras, to operate with him when I think it +advisable, and in all respects to act entirely upon my own judgment +and discretion; the main object being to compel the French to +detach as many men as possible from this neighbourhood, in order to +oppose me; and I am to take every advantage the nature of the +country may afford to inflict heavy blows upon them."</p> +<p>"That is all right," Ryan said cheerfully. "I had quite made up +my mind that we should always be dependent upon Moras; and be kept +inactive, owing to his refusal to carry out anything Herrara might +propose; but as you can act independently of him, we are sure to +have plenty of fun."</p> +<p>"We will make it as hot for them as we can, Dick; and if we +cannot do more, we can certainly oblige the French to keep +something like a division idle, to hold us in check. With the two +battalions, and Moras's irregulars, we ought to be able to harass +them amazingly; and to hold any of these mountain passes against a +considerable force."</p> +<p>After two hours' halt the march was renewed and, two days later, +the regiment arrived at Miranda. The frontier ran close to this +town, the Douro separating the two countries. They learned that +Moras was lying four miles farther to the north, and across the +frontier line; doubtless preferring to remain in Spain, in order to +prevent a quarrel between his followers and the Portuguese.</p> +<p>The next morning Terence, accompanied by Ryan and four mounted +orderlies, rode into the glen where he and his followers were +lying. They had erected a great number of small arbours of boughs +and bushes and, as Terence rode up to one of these, which was +larger and better finished than the rest, Moras himself came to the +entrance to meet them.</p> +<p>He did not at all correspond with Terence's ideas of a guerilla +chief. He was a young man, of three or four and twenty; of slim +figure and with a handsome, thoughtful face. He had been a student +of divinity at Salamanca, but had killed a French officer in a +duel, brought on by the insolence of the latter; and had been +compelled to fly. A few men had gathered round him, and he had at +once raised his standard as a guerilla chief.</p> +<p>At first his operations had been on a very small scale; but the +success that had attended these enterprises, and the reports of his +reckless bravery, had speedily swelled the number of his followers; +and although as a rule he kept only a hundred with him, he could at +any time, by sending round a summons, collect five times that +number, in a few hours.</p> +<p>When Terence introduced himself as the colonel of the two +battalions that had arrived, at Miranda, to operate in conjunction +with him, Moras held out his hand frankly.</p> +<p>"I am very glad indeed to meet you, Colonel O'Connor," he said. +"I received a despatch four days ago from your general, saying that +the Minho regiment would shortly arrive at Miranda, to act in +concert with me. I was glad indeed when I heard of this, for the +name of the regiment is well known, on this side of the frontier as +well as on the other, having been engaged in many gallant actions; +and your name is equally well known, in connection with it; but I +hardly expected to meet you, for the despatch said the Minho +regiment under Lieutenant Colonel Herrara."</p> +<p>"Yes. I only rejoined it two days ago, having been taken +prisoner at Fuentes d'Onoro, and having made my escape from +Salamanca."</p> +<p>"Your aid will be invaluable, senor. My own men are brave +enough, but they are irregulars in the full sense of the word;" and +he smiled. "And although they can be relied upon for a sudden +attack, or for the defence of a pass, they could not stand against +a French force of a quarter of their strength, in the plain. We +want a backbone, and no better one could be found than your +regiment.</p> +<p>"I am the more glad that you are in command, because you know, +unhappily, we and the Portuguese do not get on well together and, +while my men would hesitate to obey a Portuguese commander, and +would have no confidence in him, they would gladly accept your +leadership."</p> +<p>"I hope that there will be no difficulties on the ground of +race," Terence said. "We are fighting in a common cause, against a +common enemy; and dissensions between ourselves are as absurd as +they are dangerous.</p> +<p>"Let me introduce Captain Ryan, adjutant of the regiment."</p> +<p>Moras shook hands with Ryan; who had been looking on, with some +surprise, at the colloquy between him and Terence. Moras then asked +them into his arbour.</p> +<p>"I have little to offer you," he said, with a smile, "save black +bread and wine. The latter, however, is good. I obtained a large +supply of it from a convoy we captured, a few days since."</p> +<p>The wine was indeed excellent and, accustomed as they were to +the coarse bread of the country, Terence and Ryan were able to eat +it with satisfaction.</p> +<p>"Now, Colonel," Moras said, "beyond the fact that we are to act +in concert, I know nothing of the plans. Please to remember that, +while it is said that we are to discuss our plans of operations +together, I place myself unreservedly under your orders. Of +irregular warfare I have learned something; but of military +science, and anything like extensive operations, I am as ignorant +as a child; while you have shown your capacity for command. I may +be of advantage to you, from my knowledge of the country; and +indeed, there is not a village track that someone or other of my +followers is not well acquainted with."</p> +<p>"That, of course, will be of great advantage to us," Terence +replied courteously, "and I thank you much for what you have said; +but I am sure, from what I have heard, you underrate your +abilities. Beyond regimental drill, I knew very little of warfare +until I, quite by an accident, came to assume the command of my +regiment; and it was only because I drilled and disciplined it +thoroughly that I had the good fortune to obtain some successes +with it. Your acquaintance with the country will be fully a set off +to any superior knowledge that I may have of military matters, and +I have no doubt that we shall get on well together.</p> +<p>"The instructions that I have received are to the effect that we +are to make incursions and attacks in various directions; +concealing, as far as possible, our strength; and so to oblige the +French to detach a considerable number of troops to hold us in +check. This would relieve the pressure upon Lord Wellington's army, +and would deter the enemy from making any offensive movement into +Portugal; until our general has received the reinforcements +expected shortly, and is in a position to take the offensive."</p> +<p>"It will be just the work to suit us," the guerilla chief said. +"And as I received a subsidy from your political agent at Lisbon, a +few days since, I am in a position to keep the whole force I have +together; which is more than I can do generally for, even if +successful in an attack on a convoy, the greater portion of the men +scatter and return to their homes and, as long as their share of +the booty lasts, they do not care to come out again."</p> +<p>Terence now produced a map with which he had been supplied, and +a considerable time was spent in obtaining full particulars of the +country through which the troops might have to march; ascertaining +the best spots for resistance when retreating, or for attacking +columns who might be despatched in pursuit of them; and in +discussing the manner and direction in which their operations would +most alarm and annoy the enemy.</p> +<p>It was finally agreed that Terence should break up his +battalions into three parties. Two of these consisted each of half +a battalion, 500 strong, and would be under the command of Bull and +Macwitty. Each of them would be accompanied by 300 guerillas, who +would act as scouts and, in case opportunity should offer, join in +any fighting that might take place.</p> +<p>The other two half battalions formed the third body, under the +command of Terence, himself; and would, with the main force of the +guerillas, occupy the roads between Zamora, Salamanca, and +Valladolid. In this way the French would be harassed at several +points, and would find it so difficult to obtain information as to +the real strength of the foe that was threatening them, that they +would be obliged to send up a considerable force to oppose them; +and would hesitate to undertake any serious advance into Portugal +until the question was cleared up, and their lines of communication +assured again.</p> +<p>It was agreed, in the first place, that the forces should unite +in the mountains west of Braganza, between the river Esla on the +east and Tera on the north; affording a strong position from which, +in case of any very large force mustering against them, they could +retire across the frontier into Portugal. Terence had been supplied +with money, and an authority to give orders on the paymaster's +department for such purchases as were absolutely necessary. Moras +was also well supplied, having not only the money that had been +sent him, but the proceeds of a successful attack upon a convoy +proceeding to Salamanca; in which he had captured a commissariat +chest, with a considerable sum of money, besides a large number of +cattle and several waggon loads of flour. All these provisions, +with some that Terence had authority to draw from the stores at +Miranda, were to be taken to the spot they had chosen as their +headquarters in the hills.</p> +<p>"You beat me altogether, Terence," Ryan said as, after all these +matters had been arranged, they rode out from the guerilla's camp. +"It is only about three months since I saw you. Then you could only +just get along in Spanish. Now you are chattering away in it as if +you had never spoken anything else, all your life."</p> +<p>"Well, you see, Dick, I knew just enough, when I was taken +prisoner, to be able to, as you say, get along in it; and that made +all the difference to me. If I had known nothing at all of it, I +should not have been able to benefit by my trip with the muleteers +in Spain. As it was, I was able to talk with them and, as we rode +side by side all day; and sat together by a fire for hours, after +we had halted when the day's journey was over, we did a tremendous +lot of talking; and as you see, I came out, at the end of the +month, able to get along really fluently. I, no doubt, make a good +many mistakes, and mix a good many Portuguese words with my +Spanish; but that does not matter in the least, so long as one is +with friends; although it would matter a good deal if I were trying +to pass as a Spaniard, among people who might betray me if they +found out that I was English.</p> +<p>"I see that you have improved in Portuguese almost as much as I +have in Spanish. It is really only the first drudgery that is +difficult, in learning a language. When once one makes a start one +gets on very fast; especially if one is not afraid of making +mistakes. I never care a rap whether I make blunders or not, so +that I can but make myself understood."</p> +<p>Three days later the two bodies were assembled in a valley, +about equally distant from Miranda and Braganza. It had the +advantage of being entered, from the east, only through a narrow +gorge, which could be defended against a very superior force; while +there were two mountain tracks leading from it, by which the force +there could be withdrawn, should the entrance be forced. A day was +spent by the leaders in making their final arrangements; while the +men worked at the erection of a great wall of rocks, twelve feet +high and as many thick, across the mouth of the gorge; collecting +quantities of stones and rocks, on the heights on either side, to +roll down upon any enemy who might endeavour to scale them; while +another very strong party built a wall, six feet high, in a great +semicircle round the upper mouth of the gorge, so that a column +forcing its way through, thus far, would be met by so heavy a fire +that they could only debouch into the valley with immense loss.</p> +<p>Two hundred men of the Minho regiment, drawn from Terence's +party, were to occupy the valley; with three hundred of the +guerillas, who would be able to do good service by occupying the +heights, while the regular infantry held the newly-erected walls. +One of Moras' most trusted lieutenants was to command them while, +after some discussion, it was arranged that Herrara should be in +general command of the garrison.</p> +<p>The brave fellow was reluctant to remain inactive; but he had +been, for some time, seriously unwell, having been laid up for a +time with a severe attack of dysentery; and was really unfit for +any continued exertion, although he had made light of his illness, +and refused to go on the sick list. Terence pointed out to him that +the command was a very important one. Here all the plunder that +they might obtain from the enemy would be carried; and if, by means +of spies or traitors, the French obtained news of the situation of +the post, he might be attacked in great force before the other +detachments could arrive to his assistance.</p> +<p>As there were four thousand French troops at Zamora, it was +agreed that no direct attack could be made upon the town. Bull with +his force was to watch the garrison, attack any detachments that +might be sent out--leaving them severely alone when they sallied +out in force, and to content himself with outmarching their +infantry, and beating off any cavalry attacks. He was, if +necessary, to retreat in the direction of their stronghold.</p> +<p>Macwitty was to occupy the road between Zamora and Valladolid, +while the main body held the roads between both the latter town, +and Zamora, to Salamanca. Frequent communication was to be kept up +between them, so that either column might speedily be reinforced, +if necessary.</p> +<p>In the course of a week, the whole country was in a state of +alarm. Bridges were broken down, roads blocked by deep cuttings +across them, convoys attacked, small French posts at Tordesillas, +Fuentelapena, and Valparaiso captured--the French soldiers being +disarmed, and then taken under an escort to within ten miles of +Salamanca. Toro was entered suddenly, and a garrison of three +hundred men taken by surprise, and forced to lay down their arms. +The powder, bullocks, and waggons with their stores were sent, by +circuitous routes, to the bridge across the Douro at Miranda, and +then up to their stronghold.</p> +<p>So vigilant a watch was kept on the roads that no single courier +was able to make his way from Valladolid to Salamanca or Zamora +and, beyond the fact that the whole country seemed swarming with +enemies, the French commanders were in absolute ignorance of the +strength of the force that had so suddenly invaded Leon.</p> +<p>One day a messenger rode in from Macwitty to Fuentelapena, where +Terence had his headquarters; saying that a body of 4000 French +infantry, with 1000 cavalry, were on the march from Valladolid +towards Zamora. Strong positions had already been selected for the +defence, and a bridge broken down at a point where the road crossed +a tributary of the Douro.</p> +<p>Terence at once sent Ryan with 200 men to reinforce Macwitty, +and despatched several mounted messengers to find Bull, and to tell +him to join him on the road, four miles to the east of the point +where Macwitty was defending the passage of the river. He himself +marched directly on that point, crossing the river at Tordesillas. +He arrived there early in the morning, and found that the French +column had passed, late the evening before.</p> +<p>At this point the road ran between two hills, several times +crossing a stream that wound along the valley. A large number of +men were at once set to work, breaking down the bridges and +throwing up a breastwork along the bank, where the river made a +sharp bend, crossing the valley from the foot of the hills on one +side to that of those on the other. While this work was being done +cannon shots were heard, then a distant rattle of musketry.</p> +<p>Terence knew that by this time Ryan would have joined Macwitty; +and Moras at once started, with his men and 400 of the Portuguese, +to threaten the French rear, and make a dash upon their baggage. +Terence's orders to the officers in command of these two companies +were that they were to keep their men well together, and to cover +the retreat of the guerillas from cavalry attacks. The firing +continued for the next hour and a half, then it suddenly swelled in +volume, and amid the rattle could be heard the sound of heavy +volleys of musketry.</p> +<p>Terence had, half an hour before, ridden forward at full speed +with four mounted orderlies. When he arrived at a spot where he +could survey the scene of combat, he saw that it was more serious +than he had anticipated. The guerillas were falling back rapidly, +but as soon as they gained the high ground they halted and opened +fire upon the cavalry who, scattered over the plain, were pursuing +them. His own men were retreating steadily and in good order, +facing round and pouring heavy volleys into the French cavalry, as +they charged them.</p> +<p>The French attack on Macwitty had ceased, and Terence saw bodies +of infantry moving towards the right where, on rising ground, a +body of troops about a thousand strong were showing themselves +menacingly. He had no doubt for a moment that this was Bull's +command who, hearing the firing, and supposing that Terence was +engaged there, had led his command straight to the scene of +action.</p> +<p>He at once sent an orderly back, at full gallop, to order the +men in the valley to come on at the top of their speed; and then +rode along the hillside and joined Bull, who was now closely +engaged with the advancing columns of French. So hot was the fire, +from Bull's own men and the guerillas, that the two French +battalions wavered and came to a halt; and then, breaking into +skirmishing order, advanced up the hill.</p> +<p>"Don't wait too long, Bull," Terence said. "There is a steeper +slope behind you. However, I don't think they will come up very +far--not, at least, until they are reinforced. There is another +body just starting, and I think we can hold on here until they join +the skirmishing line. As soon as they do so, sound the order for +the men to fall back."</p> +<p>"Where are your men, sir?"</p> +<p>"They are four miles away, at the spot where I told you to join +me. However, the mistake is of no importance. I have sent off for +them and, as soon as they arrive and show themselves, I fancy the +French will retreat."</p> +<p>He tore out a leaf from his pocketbook, and wrote out an order +to Macwitty:</p> +<p>"Leave Captain Ryan with his command to hold the river; and +march at once, with the rest of your men, to the ford which we +heard of, a mile down the river. Cross there, and ascend the hills +on the French right; scattering your men so as to make as much show +as possible, and menacing the French with attack. Tell Captain Ryan +to redouble his fire, so as to prevent the French noticing the +withdrawal of your force."</p> +<p>This he gave to one of his orderlies, and told him to swim the +river and deliver it to Major Macwitty.</p> +<p>When Terence had done this, he was able to give his attention to +what was passing. Across the valley his men had now ascended the +hill, and joined the guerillas. The French cavalry, unable to +charge up the heights, had fallen back. A column of French, some +fifteen hundred strong, were marching in that direction.</p> +<p>As he had expected, the skirmishers in front of him were making +but little way; evidently halting for the arrival of the +reinforcement, which was still more than half a mile distant. The +French gunners had been withdrawn from the bank of the river, and +were taking up positions to cover the advance of their infantry; +and their shot presently came singing overhead--doing no harm, +however, to the Portuguese, who were lying down on the crest of the +swell, and keeping up a steady fire on the French skirmishers.</p> +<p>Ten minutes later the column was within a short distance of the +line of defenders. Terence gave the word, and his men retired up +another and steeper slope behind; while the guerillas were ordered +to remain to keep up a brisk fire, until the French were within +thirty yards of the crest, and were then to run back at full speed, +and join him above.</p> +<p>The Portuguese had scarcely taken up their position when a +tremendous fire broke out below. A minute later the guerillas were +seen rushing up the hill, and close behind them came the French +line, cheering loudly. As they appeared the Portuguese opened fire, +and with such steadiness and precision that the leading files of +the French were almost annihilated. But the wave swept upwards and, +encouraged by the shouts of their officers, they advanced against +the second position.</p> +<p>For half an hour an obstinate fight was maintained, the strength +of the position neutralizing the effect of the superior numbers of +the French. The Spaniards fought well, imitating the steadiness of +the Portuguese and, being for the most part good marksmen, their +fire was very deadly; and several determined attacks of the French +were beaten off with heavy loss.</p> +<p>Then, from the valley below, was heard the sound of a bugle. The +call was repeated by the bugles of the assailants and, slowly and +reluctantly, the French began to fall back.</p> +<p>Terence looked round. He had from time to time glanced across to +the hills opposite, and had seen his men there retiring steadily, +and in good order, before the assault of the French; and now he saw +that his force from the valley was marching rapidly along the +hilltop to their assistance; while away on the French right, +Macwitty's command, spread out to appear of much greater strength +than it really possessed, was moving down the slope, as if to the +assault.</p> +<p>Below, in the valley, a battalion of French infantry with their +cavalry and artillery were drawn up, and were evidently only +waiting for the return of the two assaulting columns, to join in +their retreat. The French commander doubtless supposed that he was +caught in a trap. Unable to effect the passage of the river, and +seeing the stubborn resistance his troops were meeting with on the +hills, the arrival of two fresh bodies of the enemy on the scene +induced him to believe that the foe were in great force; and that, +ere long, he might be completely surrounded. He moved forward +slowly, by the road he had come, and was presently joined by the +two detached parties.</p> +<p>As soon as they moved on, Terence sent an orderly at a gallop +across the valley, to order Macwitty and Moras to follow the French +along on the hills on their side of the valley, and to harass them +as much as possible; while he, with Bull's command, kept parallel +with them on his side.</p> +<p>The French cavalry kept ahead of their column. The leading +battalion was thrown out as skirmishers, on the lower slopes of the +hills; while the artillery, in the rear, kept up a heavy fire upon +the Portuguese and Spanish, as soon as they were made out on the +hills above them. Terence kept his men on the crest, and signalled +to Macwitty to do the same; but the guerillas swarmed down the +hillside, and maintained a galling fire on the French column. +Terence took his men along at the double and, heading the column, +descended into the valley at the point they had fortified.</p> +<p>Here there was a sharp fight. The French cavalry fell back, +after suffering heavily. Their infantry advanced gallantly and, +after a fierce fight, drove the Portuguese from their wall and up +the hillside. Here they maintained a heavy fire, until the column +opened out and the French artillery came to the front; when Terence +at once ordered the men to scatter, and climb the hill at full +speed.</p> +<p>Without attempting to repair the broken bridges, the French +infantry crossed the stream breast high, and the cavalry and +artillery followed; and Terence, seeing that their retreat could +not be seriously molested, and that if he attempted to do so, he +should suffer very heavily from their artillery, sounded a halt; +and the French continued their retreat to Valladolid, leaving +behind them all their baggage, which they had been unable to get +across the stream.</p> +<p>Terence's force came down from the hills and assembled in the +valley. Congratulations were exchanged on the success that had +attended their efforts. Then the roll was at once called, and it +was found that a hundred and three men of the Minho regiment were +missing. There was no roll among the guerillas; but Moras's +estimate, after counting the number assembled, was, that upwards of +two hundred were absent from the ranks, fully half of these having +been overtaken and killed by the French cavalry.</p> +<p>Terence at once sent off two parties of his own men, to the +points where the fight had been fiercest. They were to collect the +wounded, including those of the French, and to carry them down into +the valley; while parties of guerillas searched the hillsides, down +to the scene of action, for their comrades who had fallen from the +fire of the French artillery and musketry.</p> +<p>When the wounded were collected, it was found there were upwards +of two hundred French infantry, fifty-nine guerillas, and +twenty-four Portuguese. The smaller proportion of wounded of the +latter being accounted for by the fact that so many had been shot +through the head, while lying down to fire at the French as they +climbed the hill. Two hundred and thirty French soldiers had been +killed. Terence at once set his men to dig wide trenches, in which +the soldiers of the three nationalities were laid side by side.</p> +<p>A considerable amount of reserve ammunition being captured in +the waggons, the men's cartridge boxes were filled up again, and +the rest was packed in a waggon. Some of the drivers had cut their +traces, but others had neglected to do this, and there were +sufficient waggons to carry all the wounded, both friends and +enemies, together with a considerable amount of flour.</p> +<p>The French wounded were taken to the ford by which Macwitty had +crossed; and then some of them who had been wounded in the leg and, +although unable to walk, were fit to drive, were given the reins +and told to take the waggons to Zamora, a distance of twelve miles. +Fifty men were told off to march with them, until within sight of +the town; as otherwise they would have assuredly been attacked, and +the whole of the wounded massacred by the Spanish peasants.</p> +<p>The force then broke up again, each column taking as much flour +and meat as the men could carry. The remaining waggons and stores +were heaped together, and set on fire.</p> +<p>Long before this was done, they had been rejoined by Ryan and +his command. He had remained guarding the river until the French +had disappeared up the valley, and had then crossed at the ford +but, though using all haste, he did not rejoin the force until the +whole of the fighting was over.</p> +<p>"This has been a good day's work, Terence," he said when, that +evening, the force had entered Tordesillas and quartered themselves +there for the night. "You may be sure that the general at +Valladolid will send messengers to Salamanca, giving a greatly +exaggerated account of our force; and begging them to send down to +Marmont, at once, for a large reinforcement. If the couriers make a +detour, in the first place, we shall not be able to cut them +off."</p> +<p>"No, Dick, and we wouldn't, if we could. I have no doubt that he +will report the force with which his column was engaged as being +nearly double what it really is. Besides, sharp as we have been, I +expect some messengers will, by this time, have got through from +Zamora. The commandant there will report that a large force is in +the neighbourhood of that town; and that, without leaving the place +entirely undefended, he has not strength enough to sally out +against them. They cannot know that this force and ours have joined +hands in the attack on the Valladolid column, nor that this +represented anything like the whole of the force that have been +harrying the country and cutting off detached posts. The fact, too, +that this gathering was not a mere collection of guerillas, or of +the revolted peasantry; but that there were regular troops among +them, in considerable numbers, will have a great effect; and +Marmont will feel himself obliged, when he gets the news, to send +some fifteen or twenty thousand troops up here to clear the +country.</p> +<p>"Now, the first thing to do is to draw up a report of the +engagement, and to send it off to Wellington. I think that it will +be a good thing, Dick, for you to carry it yourself. I don't think +that there is any fear of your being interrupted on your way to +Miranda, and as an officer you will be able to get fresh horses, +and take the news quicker than an orderly could do; and it is of +great importance that the chief should know, as soon as possible, +what has taken place here. I shall speak very strongly of your +services during the past week, and it is always a good thing for an +officer selected to carry the news of a success; and lastly, you +can give a much better account of our operations, since we crossed +the frontier, than an orderly could do, and Wellington may want to +send orders back for our future work."</p> +<p>"I am game," Ryan said, "and thank you for the offer. How long +will you be?"</p> +<p>"Well, it is eight o'clock now, and if you start at midnight it +will be soon enough; so if you have finished your supper, you had +better lie down on that bed in the next room and get a sleep; for +you were marching all last night, and will want some rest before +starting on such a journey."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch15" id="Ch15">Chapter 15</a>: Dick Ryan's +Capture.</h2> +<p>Terence wrote two despatches, one giving a full account of the +engagement, the other a detail of the work that had been performed +since they crossed the frontier. He wrote them in duplicate, so +that he might send off another messenger, three hours later; in +case, by any chance, Ryan failed to reach Miranda. He carefully +abstained from giving any real account of the strength of the +various columns, in each case putting the number at five times +their actual strength so that, if the despatches should miscarry, +not only would no information be conveyed to the French, but they +would be led to believe that the invading force was vastly stronger +than they had hitherto supposed. Ryan was, of course, to explain, +when he delivered the despatches, that the figures must in all +cases be divided by five, and the reason why false numbers had been +inserted.</p> +<p>Terence let him sleep until one o'clock, and then roused him. +Several French horses had been found, straying riderless along the +valley; and the best of these was picked out for him. A few minutes +later, Dick was on his way to Miranda. The road by which he was to +travel would take him some six miles south of Zamora, and the +distance to be ridden was between fifty and sixty miles. He knew +that he could not do this at a gallop, and went along at a steady +pace, sometimes trotting and sometimes cantering. It was now late +in September and, at half-past five, it was still dark when Ryan +approached the spot where the road he was following crossed the +main road between Zamora and Salamanca.</p> +<p>He was riding at a canter, when suddenly, to his surprise and +consternation, he rode into the midst of a body of cavalry, halted +on the main road. The sound of his horse's feet had been heard and, +before he could even draw his sword, he was seized and taken +prisoner. A French officer rode down the line.</p> +<p>"What is the matter?" he asked.</p> +<p>"We have taken a prisoner, sir," the sergeant answered. "We +heard him coming by this crossroad, and seized him as he rode in +among us. He is a soldier--an officer, I should think, from what I +can see of him."</p> +<p>"Who are you, sir?" the French officer said to Ryan.</p> +<p>The latter saw that concealment was useless. It would soon be +light enough for his scarlet uniform to be seen. He therefore +replied, in broken French:</p> +<p>"My name is Ryan. I hold the rank of captain. I was riding to +Miranda when, unfortunately, I fell in with your troopers as they +were halted. I did not hear and, of course, could not see them +until I was among them."</p> +<a id="PicH" name="PicH"></a> +<center><img src="images/h.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: 'Search him at once.'" /></center> +<p>"Riding with despatches, no doubt," the officer said. "Search +him at once, men. He might destroy them."</p> +<p>"Here they are, sir," Ryan said, taking the despatches from +inside his jacket. "You need not have me searched. I give you my +word of honour, as a British officer, that I have no others on +me."</p> +<p>"Put him in the middle of the troop, sergeant," the officer +said. "Put a trooper in special charge of him, on each side. +Unbuckle his reins, and buckle them on to those of the troopers. Do +you ride behind him, and keep a sharp lookout upon him. It is an +important capture."</p> +<p>Five minutes later, the squadron again started on their way +south. Ryan, after silently cursing his bad luck at having arrived +at the spot just as this body of cavalry were crossing, wondered +what evil fortune had sent them there, at that precise moment. He +was not long in arriving at a conclusion. The convoy of the French +wounded had arrived at Zamora, late in the evening; and the +commandant, thinking it likely that the enemy, who had hitherto +blocked the roads, might have concentrated for the attack on the +column, had decided upon sending off a squadron of cavalry to carry +the important news he had learned, from the wounded, of the defeat +of the column, five thousand strong, coming to his relief from +Valladolid.</p> +<p>The party proceeded at a brisk trot, and, meeting with no +resistance, arrived at Salamanca by ten o'clock in the morning. The +officer in command at once rode with Ryan, the latter guarded by +four troopers, to the residence of the general. Leaving Dick with +his escort outside, he entered the house, and sent in his name, and +the duty with which he was charged, to the general. He was at once +shown into his room.</p> +<p>"I congratulate you on having got through, Captain D'Estrelles," +the general said, as he entered. "It is ten days since we heard +from Zamora. We have sent off six messengers, I don't know whether +any of them have arrived."</p> +<p>"No, sir, none of them. The commandant sent off one or two, +every day; and I suppose they, like those you sent, were all +stopped."</p> +<p>"The whole country seems on fire," the general said. "We have +had five or six parties come in here disarmed, who had been +captured by the enemy; and it would seem that all our posts on the +road to Zamora, and on that to Valladolid, have been captured. The +men could only report that they were suddenly attacked by such +overwhelming forces that resistance was impossible. They say that +the whole country seems to swarm with guerillas, but there are +certainly a considerable number of regular troops among them. What +has happened at Zamora?"</p> +<p>"These despatches will inform you, sir; but I may tell you that +we are virtually beleaguered. The country round swarms with the +enemy. Two or three reconnaissances in force met with the most +determined opposition."</p> +<p>"Are you in communication with Valladolid?"</p> +<p>"No, sir. Our communications were stopped at the same time as +those to this town; but I am sorry to say that you will see, by the +general's despatch, that a severe disaster has happened to the +column coming from Valladolid to our relief."</p> +<p>The general took the despatch and rapidly perused its +contents.</p> +<p>"A column five thousand strong, with cavalry and guns, repulsed! +The enemy must be in force, indeed. From the estimates we have +received from prisoners they released, I thought they must be fully +ten thousand strong. I see that the wounded who were sent by Moras +estimate those engaged with him at twelve thousand; and it is +hardly probable that they could, at such short notice, have +assembled in anything like their full strength."</p> +<p>"I have also to report, general, that we, this morning before +daybreak, captured a British officer on his way to Miranda, with +despatches. We were fortunately halted for the moment, so that he +was unaware of our presence until he rode into the midst of us. +These are his despatches. I have not opened them."</p> +<p>"It is an important capture, indeed," the general said; "that +is, if the report contains details of the fighting. Its contents +may enable us to form a clearer idea than we can, at present, of +their numbers."</p> +<p>He broke the seal and read the account of the battle.</p> +<p>"It is signed T. O'Connor, colonel," he said. "The name is +well-known to us as that of a very active partisan leader. Three of +the columns appear to have been commanded by British officers. Here +we have them: Major Bull, Major Macwitty, and Captain Ryan."</p> +<p>"It is Captain Ryan whom we have made prisoner, sir."</p> +<p>"Their dispositions appear to have been good, and ably worked +out. The bridge across the river had been destroyed, and our +crossing was opposed by one column. While we were attempting to +force the passage, three more columns attacked us, one on each +flank and rear; while a fourth, composed of a portion of the force +defending the passage who, as soon as we were fairly engaged with +the other columns, crossed the ford lower down, leaving a thousand +men to face us on the river bank, advanced against our left. +Finding themselves thus greatly outnumbered, the column fell back, +leaving behind them some five hundred dead and wounded. Their +passage was closed by the enemy, who had broken down some bridges +and thrown a breastwork across the valley; but after sharp fighting +they made their way through."</p> +<p>He then turned to the other despatch.</p> +<p>"This is still more useful," he said. "It is a general report of +their proceedings since they crossed the frontier, and gives the +number of each column. They total up to twenty-five thousand men; +of which some ten thousand seem to be regular troops, the rest +guerillas."</p> +<p>"Do you wish to see the prisoner, sir? He is waiting with the +guard, outside."</p> +<p>"Yes, I might as well see him though, as a point of fact, he can +give us no more information than that contained in these reports, +which are very full and detailed."</p> +<p>"So, sir," he said when Ryan was brought in, "you are a British +officer."</p> +<p>"I am, sir," Dick replied quietly. "At present on detached duty, +serving on the staff of Colonel O'Connor."</p> +<p>"Who is with the guerilla chief, Moras," the general said.</p> +<p>"Yes, sir. The troops under Colonel O'Connor have been acting in +concert with Moras, and other forces; much to the advantage of such +of your soldiers as fell into our hands, not one of whom has +suffered insult or injury; and all have been permitted to go free, +after being deprived of their arms. Colonel O'Connor also sent away +all the French wounded who fell into our hands after the battle, in +waggons, escorted by a strong body of his troops to within a mile +of Zamora; in order to protect them from massacre by the +peasants."</p> +<p>"He behaved, sir, as a British officer would be expected to +behave," the general said warmly. "Were the war always conducted on +the same principle, it would be better for both armies and for the +people of this country. I will place you on parole, if you +choose."</p> +<p>"I thank you, General, but I would rather have my hands free, +should I see any opportunity of escaping."</p> +<p>"That you are not likely to do," the general said, "for if you +refuse to be bound by your parole, I must take measures against +your having any of these opportunities that you speak of, until the +country is cleared and you can be sent with a convoy to France. I +am sorry that you refuse but, as I should do so myself, under +similar circumstances, I cannot blame you."</p> +<p>Accordingly, Ryan was taken to a strong prison in the heart of +the city; where, however, he was assigned comfortable quarters, a +sentry being placed at his door and, as the window that looked into +the courtyard was strongly barred, his chances of escape seemed +slight, indeed; and he was almost inclined to regret that he had +not accepted the general's offer, and given his parole not to +attempt to escape.</p> +<p>Two days later one of Moras's men, who belonged to Salamanca, +went into the town to see some friends, and brought back the news +that a British officer had been captured by a party of French +dragoons, coming from Zamora. He had been seen by many of the +townspeople as he sat on his horse, with four troopers round him, +at the door of the governor's house. He had been lodged in the city +prison. A comparison of dates showed that there could be no doubt +that the prisoner was Dick Ryan, and Terence was greatly vexed at +his loss.</p> +<p>"So far as the despatches go," he said to Herrara--who had, on +the day before, arrived from their stronghold, which was now safe +from attack, "there can be no doubt that it is fortunate rather +than otherwise that they have fallen into the hands of the French; +for they will give them an altogether exaggerated impression of our +strength, and I have no doubt that the orderly who left, two hours +later, has got through in safety. Still, I am greatly annoyed that +Ryan has been made prisoner. I miss his services and companionship +very much and, if I can possibly get him out, I will do so. I will +see Moras, and ask him to send the man who brought the news back +again, to gather further particulars. I would take the matter in +hand myself but, being in command here, I must consider the duty +with which I am intrusted before a question of private +friendship."</p> +<p>Moras presently came in to see Terence and, when the latter told +him what he wanted, he undertook at once to obtain every detail +possible as to the place of Ryan's confinement.</p> +<p>"A number of my men come from the town," he said, "and I will +cause inquiries to be made among them, at once; and choose half a +dozen, with connections who may be able to assist, and send them +into Salamanca; with instructions to act in concert, to ascertain +whether it is possible to do anything by bribery, to endeavour to +communicate with the prisoner, and to devise some plan for his +escape from the gaol.</p> +<p>"It was a strong place before the French came. It was the city +prison; but they took it over, and have used it not only for +prisoners of war, but for persons suspected of being in +communication with your people, and even for officers of their own +army who have been convicted of insubordination or disobedience of +orders, or other offences. One of the men I will send, and to whom +I shall intrust the general arrangement of the matter, is one of my +lieutenants, Leon Gonzales. He has been a friend of mine since +boyhood, and entered as a law student when I went into the college +for divinity. He is daring and fearless. He has an excellent head, +and a large acquaintance among the young men at the university and, +indeed, in all classes of society. He belongs to one of our best +families."</p> +<p>"Yes, of course I know him," Terence said. "He has several times +come with you, when you have ridden over; and was in command of the +detachment that was with me, when we captured the French garrison +at Tordesillas. I was much pleased with him and, although too +occupied to see much of him, I conceived a great liking for him. I +should say that he is just the man to manage this business +successfully, if it is possible to do so."</p> +<p>"At all events, I will despatch him with six other men, whom he +may choose himself, this afternoon," Moras said. "I had intended +him to remain in command of the party we leave here when we march, +tonight; but I will hand that over to another."</p> +<p>That night the force, with the exception of 500 guerillas and as +many of the Minho regiment, marched away from the station they +occupied to take up a new position, between Valladolid and +Valencia. Herrara was to remain behind, in command of the 500 +Portuguese. These, in conjunction with the guerillas, were to +occupy their old positions; stopping all lines of communication, +showing themselves in villages and towns hitherto unvisited and, +divided into parties of two or three hundred, march rapidly about +the country, so that the fact that the main body had moved +elsewhere should be unknown to the French authorities, who would +therefore believe that the force that was to cut the road north of +Valladolid was a newly-arrived one.</p> +<p>Thirty-six hours later Terence, with a battalion and a half of +his regiment and 1500 of Moras's guerillas, took up their position +in the mountains lying to the east of Valencia, between the rivers +Esqueva and Arlanza. From this position they could, with equal +facility, come down on the road between Valladolid and Valencia, or +between the latter town and Burgos. Here for some weeks they +maintained themselves, in the first place falling upon convoys from +Valladolid south and, when these only moved forward under escorts +too strong to be attacked, carrying on their operations on the road +to Burgos. In these raids they obtained an abundance of provisions, +a considerable number of arms and much ammunition and, in two or +three instances, a large amount of treasure that was being taken +forward for the payment of the troops.</p> +<p>The provisions and wine were amply sufficient for the support of +the force. Half the money was set aside for future needs, being +divided between the regimental chest of Moras and that of the Minho +regiment. The other half was similarly divided as prize money among +the men, a proportion being sent down to Herrara, for his +command.</p> +<p>The operations of the band caused immense annoyance and +difficulty to the French. It was no longer possible to travel by +the main road from France between Burgos and Valladolid, and thence +down to Salamanca or Zamora, without the convoys being accompanied +by strong bodies of troops. Several incursions into the mountains +were organized from Burgos, which was always a great military +centre, aided by detachments from Valencia; but these met with no +success whatever. On entering the passes they were assailed by a +heavy fire from invisible foes. Great rocks were rolled down upon +them; and when, after much loss, they succeeded in forcing their +way up to the hills, no traces of their foe could be +discovered.</p> +<p>As among Moras's guerillas were natives of both Burgos and +Valencia, and these had put themselves in communication with their +friends, the band was kept well informed of every movement of the +French, and received early intelligence when a convoy, or an +expedition into the hills, was on the point of setting out, and of +the exact strength of the military force employed. They were, +therefore, always prepared either to sally out for an attack on the +convoy, or to oppose an expedition as soon as it entered the +mountains. Their stores were hidden away among rocks, being divided +into several portions so that, should the French by fortune or +treachery discover one of these, the loss would not cripple +them.</p> +<p>Their greatest enemy was cold. It was now the end of October, +and several times snow had fallen, and it was necessary to keep up +large fires. This was a double inconvenience. In the first place, +the smoke by day and the flames by night might betray the position +of their camp; and in the second place, their tracks in the snow, +which would speedily cover the hills, would enable the enemy to +follow them wherever they moved. It was therefore determined that +they could no longer maintain their position there, but must return +to the plains.</p> +<p>Frequent communication had been kept up with Herrara, who +reported that Salamanca was now occupied by so large a force that +he was no longer able to maintain his position; and that he had +fallen back across the Douro, and had established himself in the +stronghold, from which he made frequent excursions towards Zamora +and Benavente.</p> +<p>To Dick Ryan, in his prison, the first fortnight had passed +slowly. That Terence would, as soon as he learned of his capture, +make every effort to free him he knew well; but he could not see +how he could give him any material aid. The French force at +Salamanca was far too strong to admit of a possibility of any +attempt to rescue him by force, and the barred windows and the +sentry seemed to close every chance of communication from without. +On the tenth day of his imprisonment, he noticed that the sergeant +who brought his food had been changed.</p> +<p>"What has become of Sergeant Pipon?" he asked the +non-commissioned officer who filled his place.</p> +<p>"He was killed yesterday evening, in the streets," the man +replied. "It was not an ordinary broil, for he had half-a-dozen +dagger stabs. It is some time since those dogs of Spaniards have +killed a French soldier in the town, and there is a great fuss over +it. The municipality will have to pay 10,000 dollars, if they +cannot produce his murderer. It is curious, too, for Pipon was not +a man to get drunk. He did not speak a word of the language, and +therefore could not have had a dispute with a Spaniard.</p> +<p>"We have been ordered to be more vigilant than before. I suppose +the authorities think that perhaps there was some attempt to bribe +him and, on his seizing the man who made it, some of the fellow's +comrades rushed upon him, and killed him."</p> +<p>Ryan wondered whether the supposition was a correct one, and +whether the men concerned had been set at work by Terence, in order +to effect his release. Two days later, on cutting the loaf that +formed his day's ration of bread, he found a small piece of paper +in its centre. It had evidently been put there before the bread was +baked for, although he examined it very closely, he could find no +sign in the crust of an incision by which the note might have been +inserted. It contained only the words:</p> +<p>"Keep your eyes open, and be in readiness. Friends are working +for your release."</p> +<p>So Terence was at work. Evidently the baker had been gained +over, but how it had been contrived that this special loaf should +have been handed to him he could not imagine; unless one of the men +in charge of the distribution of the prison rations had been +bribed. That something of the sort must have taken place he was +certain and, although he was still unable to imagine how he could +be got out of the prison, he felt that, in some way or another, +Terence would manage it. He thought over the means by which the +latter had escaped from the convent, but the laxity that had there +prevailed, in allowing people to come in to sell their goods to the +prisoners, was not permitted in the prison where he was confined. +The prisoners were, indeed, allowed to take exercise for an hour in +the courtyard, but no civilian ever entered it, and twelve French +soldiers watched every movement of those in the yard, and did not +permit a single word to be exchanged.</p> +<p>Another week passed, and Ryan began to fear that his friends +outside had abandoned the scheme as impossible, when one day he +received another message:</p> +<p>"Do not undress tonight. On reaching the courtyard, take the +first passage to the right. Follow it to the end. The bars of the +window there have been nearly sawn through. Inclosed with this is a +saw. Finish the work on the middle bars. You will find a cord +hanging down outside. Friends will be awaiting you."</p> +<p>With the note was a very fine steel saw, coiled round and round, +and a tiny phial of oil. Ryan gave a cry of delight as he read it; +and then hid the saw and the oil bottle in his bed, made up the +tiny note into a pellet, and swallowed it. As he ate his dinner, he +pondered over how so much could have been managed. The courtyard of +the prison was, he knew, some ten feet higher than the ground +outside. Some one must, after nightfall, have climbed up to the +passage window and sawn the bars almost asunder, with a saw as fine +as the one he had received. The cuts could hardly have been +perceptible, and had probably been filled in with dust or black +lead, each night, after the work was done. The difficulty must have +been great, for he had learned that sentries patrolled the street +outside the prison, and the work could only have been carried on +for two or three minutes at a time. How he was to get down to the +courtyard he knew not, but probably a sentry had been found more +amenable to a bribe than the old sergeant had been.</p> +<p>To his bitter disappointment the night passed without anything +unusual taking place, and the scheme had evidently failed. He broke +up his loaf eagerly the next morning; and found, as he expected, +another message:</p> +<p>"Authorities suspicions. Sentries changed. Must wait till +vigilance subsides. Keep yourself in readiness."</p> +<p>A fortnight passed; and then, in the middle of the night, he +leapt suddenly from the bed on which he had thrown himself, without +undressing, as he heard the key grating in the door. For a minute +or two the sound continued, and his heart sank again.</p> +<p>"They have got a key, but it won't fit," he muttered.</p> +<p>Suddenly he heard the bolt shoot back, and the door quietly +opened.</p> +<p>"Are you ready?" a voice asked in a whisper.</p> +<p>"Quite ready."</p> +<p>"Then follow me."</p> +<p>Ryan had caught up his boots as he leapt from the bed. The man +outside had evidently taken the precaution to remove his, for his +step was perfectly noiseless. Dick followed him downstairs and out +into the courtyard. He could then see that the man was not, as he +had expected, in uniform; but wore a long cloak and a sombrero, +like those in general use among the peasantry. He turned in at the +passage that had been indicated to Ryan, and stopped at the grated +opening at the end.</p> +<p>Ryan at once took out the saw, poured some oil on it, and passed +his nail down the bar until he found a fine nick. Clearing this out +with the saw, he began to cut. The task was far easier than he had +expected, for the bar had been already almost sawn through and, in +five minutes, the cut was completed. A couple of feet higher up he +found the other incision, and completed it as quietly as before. +Then he removed the piece cut out, and handed it to the man, who +laid it quietly down on the pavement of the passage.</p> +<p>In ten minutes the other bar was removed.</p> +<p>"I have the cord," the man said, and unwound some ten feet of +stout rope from his waist.</p> +<p>Ryan put his head out through the hole, and looked down. In the +darkness he could see nothing, but he heard the heavy tread of two +sentries. As the sound of their footsteps faded away in the +distance, he heard a sudden exclamation and a slight movement and, +a few seconds later, a voice below asked in a whisper:</p> +<p>"Are you there?"</p> +<p>"Yes," Ryan replied joyfully.</p> +<p>Putting a noose which was at one end of the rope over the stump +of one of the bars, he at once slid down. A moment later, the other +man descended after him.</p> +<p>"This way, senor," the voice said and, taking his hand, led him +across the street; and then, after a quarter of a mile's walk, +stopped at the door of a large house. He opened this with a key, +and led the way up the stairs to the second floor; opened another +door, and said:</p> +<p>"Enter, senor, you are at home."</p> +<p>Ryan had noticed that the man who had released him had not +followed them, but had turned away as soon as they left the +prison.</p> +<p>"You are most welcome, senor," his guide said as, opening +another door, he led the way into a handsome apartment, where a +lamp was burning on the table.</p> +<p>"First let me introduce myself," he said. "My name is Alonzo +Santobel, by profession an advocate. I am a friend of Don Leon +Gonzales, one of Moras's officers, whom I believe you know. He will +be here in a minute or two. He has followed us at a distance, to be +sure that we were not watched. He enlisted me in this enterprise, +and I have gladly given my assistance, which indeed was confined to +bringing you here. All the rest he has managed himself, with the +aid of six of his men who accompanied him here. He has been longer +over it than he had expected, but we had difficulties that we did +not anticipate."</p> +<p>He spoke in French, but added: "I understand sufficient +Portuguese to follow anything that you say, senor."</p> +<p>"I am indeed grateful to you all," Ryan said warmly. "It is good +of you, indeed, to run so great a risk for a stranger."</p> +<p>"Not exactly a stranger, senor, since you are a friend of my +friend, Leon Gonzales."</p> +<p>At this moment the door of the room opened, and the officer +named entered and warmly shook hands with Ryan, and congratulated +him cordially on his release.</p> +<p>"Thanks to you, senor," Dick said gratefully.</p> +<p>"It has been a matter of duty, as well as pleasure," the other +replied courteously; "for Moras committed the task of freeing you +to my hands."</p> +<p>"I have just been telling Senor Ryan," the other said, "that you +found it somewhat more difficult than you expected."</p> +<p>"Yes, indeed. In the first place, my face is known to so many +here and, unhappily, so many Spaniards are friends of the French, +that I dared not show myself in the streets, in the daytime. And +before I tell my story, Alonzo, please open a bottle of wine, and +produce a box of cigars. Our friend has not had a chance of a +decent smoke since he has been shut up.</p> +<p>"Now, senor, I will tell you all about it," he went on, as soon +as the glasses were filled and the cigars lighted. "In the first +place, one of the men with me has a cousin who works for the baker +who contracts for the supply of bread to the prison and, +fortunately, it was one of his duties to go with the bread, to hand +it over and see it weighed. That simplified affairs amazingly. In +the next place, it was necessary to get hold of the soldier who +usually handed the bread to the non-commissioned officers, who each +took the rations for the prisoners under their special charge. I +had been well provided with money and, when the soldier came out +one evening, I got into conversation with him. He assented +willingly enough to my offer to have a bottle of good wine +together. Then I opened the subject.</p> +<p>"'I believe you distribute the bread rations to the prisoners?" +I said.</p> +<p>"He nodded.</p> +<p>"'I want one special loaf which is rather better bread than the +rest, though it looks the same, to reach a prisoner who is a friend +of mine. It may be that I shall want two or three such loaves to +reach him, and I will not mind paying a hundred francs for each +loaf.'</p> +<p>"'A hundred francs is a good sum,' he said, 'especially as our +pay is generally some months in arrear; and there can be no harm in +a prisoner getting one loaf, more than another. But how am I to +know which is the loaf?'</p> +<p>"'It will be the last the baker's man will deliver to you, my +friend. He will give you a wink as he hands it to you, and you will +only have to put it on the tray intended for the English prisoner, +Ryan, when the sergeant comes down to the kitchen for it. But mind, +don't make any mistake and put it on the wrong tray.'</p> +<p>"'I will be careful,' the soldier said, 'and I don't mind how +many loaves you send in, at the same price.'</p> +<p>"'Very well,' I said. 'Here are the hundred francs for the first +loaf, which will come not tomorrow morning, but the day after.'</p> +<p>"So that part of the business was arranged easily enough; but +another attempt, which I had set on foot at the same time, had +already failed. My men had discovered who was the sergeant under +whose charge you were. He was an old soldier, and I had my doubts +whether he could be bribed. One of the men who spoke a little +French undertook it, but took the precaution of having three of the +others near him, when he attempted it. It was two or three evenings +before he could get speech with him in a quiet place, but he +managed at last to do so.</p> +<p>"'Sergeant,' he said, 'do you want to earn as much money, in a +day, as your pay would amount to in a year?'</p> +<p>"'It depends how it would have to be earned,' the sergeant said +cautiously.</p> +<p>"'We want to get a friend of ours out of that prison,' the man +said, 'and would pay a thousand francs for your assistance.'</p> +<p>"The sergeant at once grasped him by the throat.</p> +<p>"'You attempt to bribe me!' he exclaimed. 'Parbleu! we will hear +what the governor says about it;' and he began to drag him +along.</p> +<p>"There was nothing to be done, and the three other men, who had +been standing hidden in a doorway, ran out and poniarded the +Frenchman before he had time to give the alarm. It was unfortunate, +but it was unavoidable.</p> +<p>"However, two days later the loaf got safely to you; at least we +were assured that it had done so, by the soldier in the kitchen. In +the meantime I learned from a man who had been a warder in the +prison, before the French took possession of it, that the passage +close to the bottom of your staircase terminated at the barred +window in the street behind. Two of my men undertook to cut the +bars. It was no easy matter, for there were sentries outside, and +one came along the back every two or three minutes. The men had a +light ladder and, directly he had passed, ran across the street, +placed it in position, and fell to work. But the constant +interferences by the passing of the sentinel annoyed them, and +greatly hindered the work.</p> +<p>"You see, the sentry had to patrol the lane down one side of the +prison, then along behind, and back; so they had only the time +taken by him from the corner to the end of the lane, and back, to +work. They were so annoyed at this that one night, when the sentry +came to be relieved, he was found stabbed to the heart and, as this +misfortune happened just after he went on duty, the men managed to +file one of the bars that night. Curiously enough, the same +accident happened two nights later; just as I had arranged, with a +Spaniard who had enlisted in the French army, that he would aid you +to escape. He was a sharp fellow, and had managed to get the key of +your room from the peg where it hung, and to take an impression of +it in wax, from which we had a key made.</p> +<p>"Everything was now ready. The other bar was sawn on, the night +the accident happened to the second sentry. The next night the +Spaniard was to be on guard on your staircase, and I sent you a +loaf with a message to be in readiness. Unfortunately, the second +accident aroused the suspicion of the authorities that these +affairs had something to do with the escape of a prisoner. +Accordingly, the sentries outside were doubled, two men patrolling +together and, that evening, the guards were suddenly changed.</p> +<p>"It was evident that, for a time, nothing could be done. For +nearly a fortnight this dodging about of the guard continued; then, +as all was quiet, things went back to their old course. Four +sentries were taken off, the others going about two together, each +pair taking two sides of the prison. This morning my Spaniard who, +as he was on duty at night, was able to come out into the town +early, told the man who had arranged the affair with him that he +would be on night duty; and would manage to take his place among +the guards so that, when they arrived at your door, he should be +the one to be left there. As the bread had been already sent in, I +had no opportunity to warn you."</p> +<p>"I suppose the Spanish soldier you bribed has deserted?"</p> +<p>"Certainly. There was nothing else for him to do. He had that +long cloak under his military greatcoat, and the sombrero flattened +inside it so that, before opening your door, he had only to stand +his musket in the corner, laying his greatcoat and shako by it, and +he was in a position to go through the streets, anywhere, as a +civilian. He has been well paid and, as he was already heartily +tired of the French service, he jumped at the offer we made +him."</p> +<p>After chatting for some time longer, and obtaining some more +details of the proceedings of the rescue party, Ryan and Gonzales +lay down for a few hours' sleep on the couches in the room; while +their host turned into his bed, which he had vainly attempted to +persuade one or other to accept.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch16" id="Ch16">Chapter 16</a>: Back With The +Army.</h2> +<p>Ryan remained four days in the flat occupied by Don Alonzo +Santobel. Leon Gonzales had left, before daybreak, to regain the +house where he was staying, with one of his friends, before the +discovery of the escape of a prisoner was made. The affair was +certain to cause great excitement, and there was no doubt that +everyone leaving the town would be strictly examined at the gates +and, not improbably, every house would be searched, and an order +issued that no one would be allowed to be out at night, after ten +o'clock, without a military pass. Three soldiers had been in turn +assassinated, and one had deserted, a prisoner had been released; +and there were evidently several persons concerned in the matter, +and it would not improbably be guessed, by the authorities, that +the actors in the plot were agents of the British officer in +command of the troops that had given them such trouble over the +whole province between Burgos and Salamanca.</p> +<p>Don Alonzo gave his manservant, on whose fidelity he could rely, +permission to go into the country for ten days to visit his +relations; and Ryan was installed in his place, and dressed in a +suit of his clothes; but was not to open the door to visitors, the +Spaniard himself doing so, and mentioning to those who called that +his servant had gone on his holiday. The French, indeed, instituted +a strict search among the poorer quarters. But the men who had +accompanied Don Leon were all dressed as villagers, who had come +into the town from fear of being attacked by the guerillas and +their allies and, as the people with whom they stayed all vouched +for their story, and declared with truth that they were relatives, +none of them were molested. For four days all persons passing out +of the gates were examined but, at the end of that time, matters +resumed their ordinary course; and Don Leon and his followers all +quitted the town soon after the market closed, carrying with them +empty baskets, as if they were countrymen who had disposed of the +produce they had brought in.</p> +<p>Clothes of the same kind were procured for Ryan and, the day +after his friends had left he, too, went through the gate, going +out with several peasants who were returning home. One of Leon's +followers had taken out his uniform in his basket; with a cloth +thrown over it, on which were placed some articles of crockery +which he had apparently bought for his use at home. Ryan had been +carefully instructed as to the road he should follow and, four +miles out from the city, he turned down a by-path. He kept on for a +mile and a half, and then came to a farmhouse, standing alone. As +he approached, Leon came out to meet him, and shook him warmly by +the hand.</p> +<p>"I have been feeling very anxious about you," he said. "We got +through yesterday unquestioned, but the officer at the gate today +might have been a more particular sort of fellow, and might have +taken it into his head to question any of those who came out. The +others all went on at once, but we will keep quiet until nightfall. +I left my horse here when I came in; which I could do safely, for +the farm belongs to me, and the farmer has been our tenant for the +last thirty years. There is a horse for you here, also.</p> +<p>"I have got the latest intelligence as to where the French are +lying. They have a strong force at Tordesillas; but this won't +matter to us, for I got a message from Moras, yesterday, saying +that the hills are now all covered with snow, and that the whole +force would march, today, for their old quarters in the valley near +Miranda. So we sha'n't have to cross the river to the north, but +will keep on this side and cross it at Miranda, or at some ford +near. The column that was operating round Zamora fell back behind +the Esla, a fortnight since; for four thousand of the French +reinforcements from the south had reached Zamora, and strong +parties of their cavalry were scouting over the whole of the +country round."</p> +<p>Ryan had already heard how the road between Valladolid and +Burgos had been interrupted, and several convoys cut off and +captured. He was glad to find, however, that no serious fighting +had taken place while he had been a prisoner.</p> +<p>After nightfall they started on their journey. They travelled +sixty miles that night. The farmer's son, a young fellow of twenty, +who knew the country thoroughly, accompanied them on horseback for +the first twenty miles, to set them on their way. The road they +followed ran almost parallel to the Tormes, all the bridges over +that river being, as they learned, held by strong parties of French +troops; posted there to prevent any bodies of the Spaniards +crossing it, and placing themselves between Salamanca and Ciudad +Rodrigo.</p> +<p>When morning broke they were within five miles of the Douro, and +entered the wood where they intended to pass the day, as they were +unaware whether any French troops were stationed along the river. +Both were still dressed as countrymen, and Leon went in the +afternoon to a little hamlet, half a mile from the wood. There he +learned that 2000 French were encamped at a village, a mile from +the bridge at Miranda. But one of the peasants, on Leon's telling +him that he was a lieutenant of Moras, offered to guide them to a +ford, of whose existence he did not think the French were +aware.</p> +<p>It was seldom used, as it could only be forded in very dry +seasons; but as the water now was, it would only be necessary to +swim their horses a distance of a few yards. The two friends slept +a great part of the day and, as the sun set, finished the +provisions they had brought with them, and were ready to start +when, two hours later, their guide arrived from the village. His +information proved correct. He led them straight to the ford, which +they found unguarded and, rewarding him handsomely for his trouble, +swam across and, an hour later, entered Miranda and put up at a +small inn.</p> +<p>They mounted early the next morning and, in the afternoon, after +a three hours' ride across the mountains, came down into the +valley; where their arrival excited much enthusiasm among the +troops, the garrison having been joined by Macwitty's column.</p> +<p>"I cannot say that I was not expecting to see you, Captain +Ryan," Macwitty said, as he shook hands heartily; "for I heard, +from the colonel, that Don Leon had started with a party to try and +get you out of prison, and that he was sure he would accomplish it, +if it were at all possible. I am expecting him here in a day or +two, with the rest of the regiment; for I had a message two days +ago from him, saying that it was too cold to remain on the hills +any longer, and that he should start on the day after the messenger +left. Of course the messenger was mounted; but our men can march as +far, in a day, as a man can ride, and are sure to lose no time. +They would take the Leon road for some distance, then strike off +and cross the upper Esla at Maylorga, follow the road down, +avoiding Benavente, cross the Tera at Vega, take the track across +the mountains, and come down into the valley from above. He said +that he should only bring such stores as they would be able to +carry on the march, and that he hoped to get here before the French +were aware that he had left the mountains."</p> +<p>Late in the afternoon Leon's followers arrived. They had +travelled at night, so as to avoid being questioned by the French +cavalry, who were scattered all over the country. Ryan was glad to +see the men who had risked so much for him, and very pleased to be +able to exchange his peasant's clothes for his uniform. The next +morning, he and Leon mounted and rode by the track by which Terence +would arrive, and met him halfway between Vega and the camp. The +greeting was a hearty one, indeed and, as Ryan shook hands with +Moras, he said:</p> +<p>"I cannot tell you, senor, how much I am indebted to Don Leon +for the splendid way in which he managed my rescue. Nothing could +have been more admirably contrived, or better carried out. It +certainly seemed to me, after I had been there a day or two, that a +rescue was simply impossible; though I knew that Colonel O'Connor +would do his best to get me out, as soon as he learned that I was +captured."</p> +<p>"I gave you credit for better sense, Dick, than to ride right +into the hands of the French," Terence said, as he and Ryan rode on +together at the head of the column.</p> +<p>"I think you would have done it yourself, Terence. The night was +dark, and I could not see ten yards ahead of me. If they had been +on the march, of course, I should have heard them; but by bad luck +they had halted just across the road I was following. It was very +fortunate that you put all the numbers wrong in your despatches, +and I can tell you it was a mighty comfort to me to know that you +had done so; for I should have been half mad at the thought that +they had got at your real strength, which would have entirely +defeated the object of our expedition. As it was, I had the +satisfaction of knowing that the capture of the despatches would do +more good than harm.</p> +<p>"Did the man who followed me get through?"</p> +<p>"Yes, he kept his eyes open, Dicky," Terence said. "He returned +ten days later, with a letter from the adjutant general, saying +that the commander-in-chief was highly satisfied with my reports; +and that the forward movement of the French had ceased and, at +several points, their advanced troops had been called in. Spies had +brought news that ten thousand men, under General Drouet, had +marched for Salamanca; and that reports were current in the French +camp that a very large force had crossed the frontier, at the +northeastern corner of Portugal, with the evident design of +recovering the north of Leon, and of cutting the main line of +communication with France.</p> +<p>"He added that he trusted that I should be able to still further +harass the enemy, and cause him to send more reinforcements. He +said that, doubtless, I should be very shortly driven back into +Portugal again; but that he left the matter entirely to my +judgment, but pointed out that, if I could but maintain myself for +another fortnight, the winter would be at hand; when the passes +would be blocked with snow, and Marmont could no longer think of +invading Portugal in force. As it is now more than a month since +that letter was written, and certainly further reinforcements have +arrived, I think the chief will be well satisfied with what we have +done. I have sent off two letters since then, fully reporting on +the work we have been at between Burgos and Valladolid; but whether +they have reached him, I cannot tell."</p> +<p>"Macwitty has one despatch for you. He tells me it came nearly a +fortnight ago; but that he had, at that time, been compelled to +fall back behind the Esla; and that, as the country beyond swarmed +with parties of the French cavalry, he thought that no messenger +could get through, and that great harm might result were the +despatches to fall into the hands of the enemy."</p> +<p>"Well, I daresay it will keep, Dick, and that no harm will have +been done by my not receiving it sooner.</p> +<p>"Now, tell me all about your escape. Were you lodged in our old +convent?"</p> +<p>"I had no such luck, Terence. I was in the city prison, in the +centre of the town; and my window, instead of looking out into the +street, was on the side of the courtyard. The window was strongly +barred, no civilians were allowed to enter the prison, and I think +that even you, who have a sort of genius for escapes, would have +found it, as I did, simply impossible to get away."</p> +<p>"No, the lookout was certainly bad; and you had none of the +advantages we had, at Bayonne, of being guarded by friendly +soldiers. If I had, at Salamanca, not been able to make friends +with a Spanish girl--</p> +<p>"Well, tell me all about it."</p> +<p>Ryan gave full details of the manner in which Don Gonzales had +contrived his escape.</p> +<p>"That was well managed, indeed," Terence said. "Splendidly done. +Leon is a trump. He ought to have been born an Irishman, and to +have been in our regiment. I don't know that I can give him higher +praise than that."</p> +<p>On their arrival in the valley, they found that another courier +had returned, half an hour before. Both despatches expressed the +commander-in-chief's extreme satisfaction with the manner in which +Terence had carried out his instructions.</p> +<p>"The employment of your force in cutting the main road between +Valladolid and Valencia, and between the latter place and Burgos; +while at the same time you maintained a hold on the country south +of the Douro, thus blocking the roads from Salamanca both to Zamora +and Valladolid, was in the highest degree deserving of +commendation. The garrisons of all the towns named were kept in a +state of constant watchfulness, and so great was the alarm produced +that another division followed that of Drouet. This has paralyzed +Marmont. As snow has already begun to fall among the mountains, it +is probable that he will soon go into winter quarters. Your work, +therefore, may be considered as done and, as your position in the +mountains must soon become untenable, it would be well if you, at +once, withdraw all your forces into Portugal."</p> +<p>Moras also received a despatch signed by Lord Wellington +himself, thanking him warmly for the services he had rendered.</p> +<p>"I may say, sir, that yours is the first case, since I have had +the honour to command the British force in the Peninsula, that I +have received really valuable assistance from a body of irregular +troops; and that I am highly sensible of the zeal and ability which +you have shown in cooperating with Colonel O'Connor, a service +which has been of extreme value to my army. I must also express my +high gratification, not only with the conduct of the men under your +command when in action, but at the clemency shown to French +prisoners; a clemency, unfortunately, very rare during the present +war. I shall not fail to express, to the central Spanish +authorities, my high appreciation of your services. I have given +orders to the officer commanding the detachment of British troops +at Miranda that, should you keep your force together near the +frontier, he will, as far as possible, comply with any request you +may make for supplies for their use."</p> +<p>Moras was highly gratified with this despatch.</p> +<p>"I shall," he said, "stay in this valley for the winter; but I +shall not keep more than a hundred, or a hundred and fifty men with +me. The peasants will disperse to their homes. Those remaining with +me will be the inhabitants of the towns; who could not safely +return, as they might be denounced by the Spanish spies, in French +pay, as having been out with me. We have plenty of supplies stored +up here to last us through the winter."</p> +<p>Terence at once sent off a report of his return, and an +acknowledgment of the receipt of the despatches from headquarters +and, the next day, in obedience to his orders, marched with his +regiment across the frontier, and established himself in +Miranda.</p> +<p>The answer came in five days. It was brief.</p> +<p>"On receipt of this Colonel O'Connor will march, with the +regiment under his command, to Pinhel; and there report himself to +General Crawford."</p> +<p>Terence had ridden over, the afternoon before, to the valley; +where he found that but two hundred of the guerillas remained. +Fifty of these were on the point of leaving, the rest would remain +with Moras through the winter.</p> +<p>On arrival at Pinhel after three days' marching, he reported +himself to General Crawford. The general himself was absent but, +from the head of his staff, he received an order on the +quartermaster's department. Tents for his men were at once given +him, and a spot pointed out for their encampment. Six regiments +were, he heard, in the immediate neighbourhood; and among them he +found, to his great joy, were the Mayo Fusiliers. As soon as the +tents were erected, rations drawn, and a party despatched to obtain +straw for bedding from the quartermaster's department, Terence left +Herrara and the two majors to see that the troops were made +comfortable, and then rode over with Ryan to the camp of the +Fusiliers.</p> +<p>They were received with the heartiest welcome by the colonel and +officers; in whose ranks, however, there were several gaps, for the +regiment had suffered heavily at Fuentes d'Onoro.</p> +<p>"So you have been taken prisoner again, Terence!" Captain +O'Grady exclaimed; "sure, it must be on purpose you did it. Anyone +may get taken prisoner once; but when it happens twice, it begins +to look as if he was fonder of French rations than of French +guns."</p> +<p>"I didn't think of it in that light, O'Grady; but now you put it +so, I will try and not get caught for the third time."</p> +<p>"We heard of your return, of course, and that you had gone +straight with your regiment to Miranda. We had a line from Dicky, +the day before he started; and mighty unkind we have thought it +that neither of you have sent us a word since then, and you with +nothing to do at all, at all; while we have been marching and +countermarching, now here and now there, now backwards and now +forwards, ever since Fuentes d'Onoro, till one's legs were ready to +drop off one."</p> +<p>"Give someone else a chance to put in a word, O'Grady," the +colonel said. "Here we are, all dying to know how O'Connor slipped +through the hands of the French again; and sorra a word can anyone +get in, when your tongue is once loosened. If you are not quiet, I +will take him away with me to my own quarters; and just ask two or +three men, who know how to hold their tongue, to come up and listen +to his story."</p> +<p>"I will be as silent as a mouse, colonel dear," O'Grady said, +humbly; "though I would point out that O'Connor, being a colonel +like yourself, and in no way under your orders, might take it into +his head to prefer to stop with us here, instead of going with +you.</p> +<p>"Now, Terence, we are all waiting for your story. Why don't you +go on?"</p> +<p>"Because, as you see, I am hard at work eating, just at present. +We have marched twenty miles this morning, with nothing but a crust +of bread at starting; and the story will keep much better than +luncheon."</p> +<p>Terence did not hurry himself over his meal but, when he had +finished, he gave them particulars of his escape from Salamanca, +his journey down to Cadiz, and then round by Lisbon.</p> +<p>"I thought there would be a woman in it, Terence," O'Grady +exclaimed. "With a soft tongue, and a presentable sort of face, and +impudence enough for a whole regiment, it was aisy for you to put +the comhether on a poor Spanish girl, who had never had the good +luck to meet an officer of the Mayo Fusiliers before. Sure, I have +always said to meself that, if I was ever taken prisoner, it would +not be long before some good-looking girl would take a fancy to me, +and get me out of the French clutches. Sure, if a young fellow like +yourself, without any special recommendations except a bigger share +of impudence than usual, could manage it; it would be aisy, indeed, +for a man like meself, with all the advantages of having lost an +arm in battle, to get round them."</p> +<p>There was a shout of laughter round the table, for O'Grady had, +as usual, spoken with an air of earnest simplicity, as if the +propositions he was laying down were beyond question.</p> +<p>"You must have had a weary time at Miranda, since you came back, +O'Connor," the colonel said, "with no one there but a wing of the +65th."</p> +<p>"I don't suppose they were to be pitied, colonel," Doctor +O'Flaherty laughed. "You may be sure that they kept Miranda lively, +in some way or other. Trust them for getting into mischief of some +sort."</p> +<p>"There is no saying what we might have done if we had, as you +suppose, been staying for the last two months at Miranda; but in +point of fact that has not been the case. We have been across the +frontier, and have been having a pretty lively time of it--at least +I have, for Dick has spent a month of it inside a French +prison."</p> +<p>"What!" the major exclaimed, "were you with that force that has +been puzzling us all, and has been keeping the French in such hot +water that, as we hear, Marmont was obliged to give up his idea of +invading Portugal, and had to hurry off twenty thousand men, to +save Salamanca and Valladolid from being captured? Nobody has been +able to understand where the army sprung from, or how it was +composed. The general idea was that a division from England must +have landed, at either Oporto or Vigo, or that it must have been +brought round from Sicily; for none of our letters or papers said a +word about any large force having sailed from England. Not a soul +seemed to know anything about it. I know a man on Crawford's staff, +and he assured me that none of them were in the secret.</p> +<p>"A French officer, who was brought in a prisoner a few days +since, put their numbers down at twenty-five thousand, at least; +including, he said, a large guerilla force. He said that Zamora had +been cut off for a long time, that the country had been ravaged, +and posts captured almost at the gates of Salamanca; and that +communications had been interrupted, and large convoys captured +between Burgos and Valladolid; and that one column, five thousand +strong, had been very severely mauled, and forced to fall back. +This confirmed the statements that we had before heard, from the +peasantry and the French deserters. Now there is a chance of +penetrating the mystery, which has been a profound puzzle to us +here, and indeed to the whole army.</p> +<p>"The officer taken seemed to consider that the regular soldiers +were Portuguese; but of course that was nonsense. Beresford's +troops were all with him down south and, as to any other Portuguese +army, unless Wellington has got one together as secretly as he got +up the lines of Torres Vedras, the thing is absurd. Besides, who +had ever heard of Portuguese carrying on such operations as these, +without having a lot of our men to stiffen them, and to set them a +good example?"</p> +<p>Terence did not, at once, answer. Looking round the table he saw +that, in place of the expressions of amusement with which the +previous conversation had been listened to, there was now, on every +face, a deep and serious interest. He glanced at Ryan, who was +apparently absorbed in the occupation of watching the smoke curling +up from his cigar. At last he said:</p> +<p>"I fear, major, that I cannot answer your question. I may say +that I have had no specific orders to keep silence but, as it seems +that the whole matter has been kept a profound secret, I do not +think that, unless it comes out in some other way, I should be +justified in saying anything about it.</p> +<p>"I think that you will agree with me, Ryan."</p> +<p>Dick nodded.</p> +<p>"Yes, I agree with you that it would be best to say nothing +about it, till we hear that the facts are known. What has been done +once, may be done again."</p> +<p>"Quite so, Dick. I am glad that you agree with me.</p> +<p>"However, there can be no objection to your giving an account of +your gallant charge into the middle of the French cavalry, and the +story of your imprisonment and escape.</p> +<p>"I am sure, colonel, that it will be a source of gratification +to you, to know that one of your officers dashed, single handed, +right into the midst of a French squadron."</p> +<p>Ryan laughed.</p> +<p>"I am afraid the interest in the matter will be diminished, +colonel, when I mention that the charge was executed at night, and +that I was ignorant of the vicinity of the French until I rode into +the middle of them."</p> +<p>There was again a general laugh.</p> +<p>"I was on my way with despatches for Lord Wellington," he went +on, "when this unfortunate business happened."</p> +<p>"That was unfortunate, indeed, Ryan," the colonel said. "They +did not capture your despatches, I hope?"</p> +<p>"Indeed and they did, colonel. They had fast hold of me before I +could as much as draw my sword. They, however, gained very little +by them for, knowing that it was possible I might be captured, the +despatches had been so worded that they would deceive, rather than +inform, anyone into whose hands they might fall; though of course, +I had instructions to explain the matter, when I delivered them +safely."</p> +<p>Then he proceeded to give a full account of his rescue from the +prison of Salamanca. This was listened to with great interest.</p> +<p>"It was splendidly managed," the colonel said, when he had +brought his story to an end. "It was splendidly managed. Terence +himself could not have done it better. Well, you are certainly +wonderfully handy at getting into scrapes. Why, you have both been +captured twice, and both times got away safely.</p> +<p>"When I gave you your commission, Terence, I thought that you +and Ryan would keep things alive; but I certainly did not +anticipate that you would be so successful, that way, as you have +been."</p> +<p>"I have had very little to do with it, colonel," Ryan said.</p> +<p>"No, I know that at Athlone Terence was the ringleader of all +the mischief that went on. Still, you were a good second, Ryan; +that is, if that position does not really belong to O'Grady."</p> +<p>"Is it me, colonel?" O'Grady said, in extreme surprise, and +looking round the table with an air of earnest protest, "when I was +always lecturing the boys?"</p> +<p>"I think, O'Grady, your manner of lecturing was akin to the +well-known cry:</p> +<p>"'Don't throw him into the pond, boys.'"</p> +<p>At this moment there was a sound of horses drawing up in front +of the house.</p> +<p>"It is the general and his staff," one of the ensigns said, as +he glanced through the window.</p> +<p>The table had been cleared, but there was a sudden and instant +rush to carry away bottles and glasses to hiding places. Newspapers +were scattered along the table and, when the door opened half a +minute later and the general entered, followed by his staff, the +officers of the Mayo Fusiliers presented an orderly and even +studious appearance. They all rose and saluted, as the general +entered.</p> +<p>"I hope I am not disturbing you, gentlemen," General Crawford +said gravely, but with a sly look of amusement stealing across his +rugged face; "I am glad to see you all so well employed. There is +no doubt that the Irish regiments are greatly maligned. On two or +three occasions, when I have happened to call upon their officers, +I have uniformly found them studying the contents of the +newspapers. Your cigars, too, must be of unusually good quality, +for their odour seems mingled with a faint scent of--what shall I +say? It certainly reminds me of whisky though, as I see, that must +be but fancy on my part. However, gentlemen, I have not come in to +inspect your mess room, but to speak to Colonel O'Connor," and he +looked inquiringly round.</p> +<p>Terence at once stepped forward, and again saluted. The general, +whom Terence had not before met, looked him up and down, and then +held out his hand.</p> +<p>"I have heard of you many times, Colonel O'Connor. General Hill +has talked to me frequently of you and, not long since, when I was +at headquarters, Lord Wellington himself spoke to me for some time +about you, and from his staff I learned other particulars. That you +were young, I knew; but I was not prepared to find one who might +well pass as a junior lieutenant, or even as an ensign. This was +the regiment that you formerly belonged to; and as, on sending +across to your corps, I learned that you were here, I thought it as +well to come myself to tell you, before your comrades and friends, +that I have received from headquarters this morning a request from +the adjutant general to tell you personally, when you arrived, the +extreme satisfaction that the commander-in-chief feels at the +services that you have rendered.</p> +<p>"When I was at headquarters the other day, I was shown the +reports that you have, during the last six weeks, sent in; and am +therefore in a position to appreciate the work you have done. It is +not too much to say that you have saved Portugal from invasion, +have paralyzed the movements of the French, and have given to the +commander-in-chief some months in which to make his preparations +for taking the field in earnest, in the spring.</p> +<p>"Has Colonel O'Connor told you what he has been doing?" he said +suddenly, turning to Colonel Corcoran.</p> +<p>"No, general. In answer to our questions he said that, as it +seemed the matter had been kept a secret, he did not feel justified +in saying anything on the subject, until he received a distinct +intimation that there was no further occasion for remaining +silent."</p> +<p>"You did well, sir," the general said, again turning to Terence, +"and acted with the prudence and discretion that has, with much +dash and bravery, distinguished your conduct. As, however, the +armies have now gone into winter quarters; and as a general order +will appear, today, speaking of your services, and I have been +commissioned purposely to convey to you Lord Wellington's approval, +there is no occasion for further mystery on the subject.</p> +<p>"The force whose doings have paralyzed the French, broken up +their communications, and compelled Marmont to detach twenty +thousand men to assist at least an equal force in Salamanca, +Zamora, Valladolid, and Valencia, has consisted solely of the men +of Colonel O'Connor's regiment; and about an equal number of +guerillas, commanded by the partisan Moras. I need not tell you +that a supreme amount of activity, energy, and prudence, united, +must have been employed thus to disarrange the plans of a French +general, commanding an army of one hundred thousand men, by a band +of two battalions of Portuguese, and a couple of thousand +undisciplined guerillas. It is a feat that I, myself, or any other +general in the British army, might well be proud to have performed; +and too much praise cannot be bestowed upon Colonel O'Connor, and +the three British officers acting under his command; of all whose +services, together with those of his Portuguese officers, he has +most warmly spoken in his reports.</p> +<p>"And now, colonel, I see that there are on your mess table some +dark rings that may, possibly, have been caused by glasses. These, +doubtless, are not very far away, and I have no doubt that, when I +have left, you will very heartily drink the health of your former +comrade--I should say comrades, for I hear that Captain Ryan is +among you.</p> +<p>"Which is he?"</p> +<p>Ryan stepped forward.</p> +<p>"I congratulate you also, sir," he said. "Colonel O'Connor has +reported that you have rendered great services, since you were +attached to him as adjutant; and have introduced many changes which +have added to the efficiency and discipline of the regiment. My +staff, as well as myself, will be very pleased to make the personal +acquaintance of Colonel O'Connor and yourself, and I shall be glad +if you will both dine with me today--</p> +<p>"And if you, Colonel Corcoran, will accompany them.</p> +<p>"Tomorrow I will inspect the Minho regiment, at eleven o'clock; +and you will then introduce to me your lieutenant colonel and your +two majors, who have all so well carried out your +instructions."</p> +<p>So saying, he shook hands with the colonel, Terence, and Ryan +and, with an acknowledgment of the salutes of the other officers, +left the room with his staff.</p> +<p>"If a bullet does not cut short his career in some of his +adventures," he said to Colonel Corcoran, who had accompanied him, +"O'Connor has an extraordinary future before him. His face is a +singular mixture of good temper, energy, and resolute +determination. There are many gallant young officers in the army, +but it is seldom that reckless bravery and enterprise are joined, +as in his case, with prudence and a head to plan. He cannot be more +than one-and-twenty, so there is no saying what he may be, when he +reaches forty. Trant is an excellent leader, but he has never +accomplished a tithe of what has been done by that lad."</p> +<p>The general having left the room, the officers crowded round +Terence. But few words were said, for they were still so surprised, +at what they had heard, as to be incapable of doing more than shake +him warmly by the hand, and pat him on the shoulder. Ryan came in +for a share in this demonstration.</p> +<p>The colonel returned at once, after having seen the general ride +off.</p> +<p>"Faith, Terence," he said, "if justice were done, they would +make me a general for putting you into the army. I have half a mind +to write to Lord Wellington, and put in a claim for promotion on +that ground.</p> +<p>"What are you doing, O'Grady?" he broke off, as that officer +walked round and round Terence, scrutinizing him attentively, as if +he had been some unknown animal.</p> +<p>"I am trying to make sure, colonel, that this is really Terence +O'Connor, whom I have cuffed many a time when he was a bit of a +spalpeen, with no respect for rank; as you yourself discovered, +colonel, in the matter of that bird he fastened in the plume of +your shako. He looks like him, and yet I have me doubts.</p> +<p>"Is it yerself, Terence O'Connor? Will you swear to it on the +testiments?"</p> +<p>"I think I can do that, O'Grady," Terence laughed. "You see, I +have done credit to your instructions."</p> +<p>"You have that. I always told you that I would make a man of +you, and it is my instruction that has done it.</p> +<p>"How I wish, lad," he went on, with a sudden change of voice, +"that your dear father had been here this day! Faith, he would have +been a proud man. Ah! It was a cruel bullet that hit him, at +Vimiera."</p> +<p>"Ay, you may well say that, O'Grady," the colonel agreed.</p> +<p>"Have you heard from him lately, Terence?"</p> +<p>"No, colonel. It's more than four months since I have had a +letter from him. Of course, he always writes to me to headquarters +but, as I only stopped there a few hours, on my way from Lisbon to +join the regiment, I stupidly forgot to ask if there were any +letters for me; and of course there has been no opportunity for +them to be forwarded to me, since. However, they will know in a day +or two that I have arrived here, and will be sure to send them on, +at once."</p> +<p>"Now, let's hear all about it, O'Connor, for at present we have +heard nothing but vague rumours about the doings of this northern +army of yours, beyond what the general has just said."</p> +<p>"But first, colonel, if you will permit me to say so," O'Grady +put in, "I would propose that General Crawford's suggestion, as to +the first thing to be done, should be carried out; and that the +whisky keg should be produced again.</p> +<p>"We have a good stock, Terence, enough to carry us nearly +through the winter."</p> +<p>"Then it must be a good stock, indeed, O'Grady," Terence +laughed. "You see, the general was too sharp for us."</p> +<p>"That he was but, as a Scotchman, he has naturally a good nose +for whisky. He is a capital fellow. Hot tempered and obstinate as +he undoubtedly is, he is as popular with his division as any +general out here. They know that, if there is any fighting to be +done, they are sure to have their share and more and, except when +roused, he is cheery and pleasant. He takes a great interest in his +men's welfare, and does all that he can to make them as comfortable +as possible; though, as they generally form the advanced guard of +the army, they necessarily suffer more than the rest of us."</p> +<p>By this time the tumblers were brought out, from the cupboards +into which they had been so hastily placed on the general's +arrival. Half a dozen black bottles were produced, and some jugs of +water, and Terence's health was drunk with all the honours. Three +cheers were added for Dicky Ryan, and then all sat down to listen +to Terence's story.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch17" id="Ch17">Chapter 17</a>: Ciudad Rodrigo.</h2> +<p>"Before O'Connor begins," the colonel said, "you had better lay, +on the table in front of you, the pocket maps I got from Lisbon for +you last year, after O'Connor had lectured us on the advantages of +knowing the country.</p> +<p>"I can tell you, Terence, they have been of no small use to us +since we left Torres Vedras; and I think that even O'Grady could +pass an examination, as to the roads and positions along the +frontier, with credit to himself.</p> +<p>"I think, gentlemen, that you who have not got your maps with +you would do well to fetch them. You will then be able to follow +Colonel O'Connor's story, and get to know a good deal more about +the country where, I hope, we shall be fighting next spring, than +we should in any other way."</p> +<p>Several of the officers left the room, and soon returned with +their maps.</p> +<p>"I feel almost like a schoolmaster," Terence laughed. "But +indeed, as our work consisted almost entirely of rapid marching, +which you would scarcely be able to follow without maps, it may +really be useful, if we campaign across there, to know something of +the roads, and the position of the towns and villages."</p> +<p>Then he proceeded to relate all that had taken place, first +describing the incidents of the battle, and their work among the +mountains.</p> +<p>"You understand," he said, "that my orders were not so much to +do injury to the enemy, as to deceive him as to the amount of our +force, and to lead them to believe it to be very much stronger than +it really was. This could only be done by rapid marches and, as you +will see, the main object was to cut all his lines of +communication, and at the same time to show ourselves, in force, at +points a considerable distance apart. To effect this we, on several +occasions, marched upwards of sixty miles in a day; and upwards of +forty, several days in succession; a feat that could hardly be +accomplished except by men at once robust, and well accustomed to +mountain work, and trained to long marches; as those of my regiment +have been, since they were first raised."</p> +<p>Then taking out a copy of his report, he gave in much fuller +detail than in the report, itself, an account of the movements of +the various columns and flying parties, during the first ten days; +and then, more briefly, their operations between Burgos and +Valladolid, ending up by saying:</p> +<p>"You see, colonel, there was really nothing out of the way in +all this. We had the advantage of having a great number of men who +knew the country intimately; and the cutting of all their +communications, the exaggerated reports brought to them by the +peasants, and the maintenance of our posts round Salamanca and +Zamora while we were operating near Burgos and Valladolid, +impressed the commanders of these towns with such an idea of our +strength, and such uneasiness as to their communications that, +after the reverse to their column, none of them ever ventured to +attack us in earnest."</p> +<p>"That is no doubt true," the colonel said, "but to have done all +this when--with the reinforcements sent up, and the very strong +garrison at four of the towns, to say nothing of the division of +Burgos--they had forty thousand men disposable, is a task that +wanted a head well screwed on. I can see how you did it; but that +would be a very different thing to doing it, oneself.</p> +<p>"However, you have taught us a great deal of the geography of +the country between the frontier and Burgos, and it ought to be +useful. If I had received an order, this afternoon, to march with +the regiment to Tordesillas, for example, I should have known no +more where the place stood, or by what road I was to go to it, than +if they had ordered me to march to Jericho. Now I should be able to +go straight for it, by the shortest line. I should cross the roads +at points at which we were not likely to be attacked, and throw out +strong parties to protect our flanks till we had passed; and should +feel that I was not stumbling along in the dark, and just trusting +to luck."</p> +<p>"Now, colonel, we must be off to our own quarters," Terence +said. "We have been too long away now and, if I had not known that +Herrara and the majors were to be trusted to do their work--and in +fact they did it well, without my assistance, all the time I was +away prisoner--I could not have left them, as I did, half an hour +after they had encamped."</p> +<p>The next morning Terence received a copy of the orders of the +day of the division, at present, under General Crawford's command; +together with the general orders of the whole army, from +headquarters. In the latter, to which Terence first turned, was a +paragraph:</p> +<p>"Lord Wellington expresses his great satisfaction at the +exceptional services rendered by the Minho Portuguese regiment, +under its commander Captain T. O'Connor, of the headquarter staff, +bearing the rank of colonel in the Portuguese army. He has had +great pleasure in recommending him to the commander-in-chief for +promotion in the British army. He has also to report very +favourably the conduct of Lieutenant Ryan, of the Mayo Fusiliers, +and Ensigns Bull and Macwitty, all attached for service to the +Minho regiment; and shall bring before General Lord Beresford that +of Lieutenant Colonel Herrara, of the same regiment."</p> +<p>In the divisional orders of the day appeared the words:</p> +<p>"In noticing the arrival of the Minho Portuguese regiment, under +the command of Colonel Terence O'Connor, to join the division +temporarily under his command, General Crawford takes this +opportunity of congratulating Colonel O'Connor on the most +brilliant services that his regiment has performed, in a series of +operations upon the Spanish side of the frontier."</p> +<p>Four days later, Terence received two letters from home. These +were written after the receipt of that sent off by him on his +arrival at Cadiz, narrating his escape. His father wrote:</p> +<p>"My dear Terence,</p> +<p>"Your letter, received this morning, has taken a heavy load off +our minds. Of course, we saw the despatches giving particulars of +the battle of Fuentes d'Onoro--which, by the way, seems to have +been rather a confused sort of affair, and the enemy must have +blundered into it just as we did; only as they were all there, and +we only came up piecemeal, they should have thrashed us handsomely, +if they had known their business. Well, luck is everything and, as +you have had a good deal more than your share of it since you +joined, one must not grumble if the jade has done you a bad turn +this time.</p> +<p>"However, as you have got safely out of their hands, you have no +reason for complaint. Still, you had best not try the thing too +often. Next time you may not find a good-looking girl to help you +out. By the way, you don't tell us whether she was good looking. +Mention it in your next; Mary is very curious about it.</p> +<p>"We are getting on capitally here and, I can tell you, the old +place looks quite imposing, and I was never so comfortable in my +life. We have as much company as I care for, and scarce a day +passes but some young fellow or other rides over, on the pretence +of talking over the war news with me. But I am too old a soldier to +be taken in, and know well enough that Mary is the real +attraction.</p> +<p>"My leg has now so far recovered that I can sit a horse; but +though I ride with your cousin, when the hounds meet anywhere near, +I cannot venture to follow; for if I got a spill, it might bring on +the old trouble again, and lay me up for a couple of years. I used +to hope that I should get well enough to be able to apply to be put +on full pay again. But I feel myself too comfortable, here, to +think of it; and indeed, until I have handed Mary to someone else's +keeping, it would of course be impossible, and I have quite made up +my mind to be moored here for the rest of my life. But to +return.</p> +<p>"Of course, as soon as I saw you were missing, I wrote to an old +friend on the general staff at Dublin, and asked him to write to +the Horse Guards. The answer came back that it was known that you +had been taken prisoner, and that you were wounded, but not +severely. You were commanding the rear face of the square into +which your regiment had been thrown, when your horse, which was +probably hit by a bullet, ran away with you into the ranks of the +enemy's cavalry. After that we were, of course, more comfortable +about you, and Mary maintained that you would very soon be turning +up again, like a bad penny.</p> +<p>"I need not say that we are constantly talking about you. Now, +take care of yourself, Terence. Bear in mind that, if you get +yourself killed, there will be no more adventures for you--at +least, none over which you will have any control. Your cousin has +just expressed the opinion that she does not think you were born to +be shot; she thinks that a rope is more likely than a bullet to cut +short your career. She is writing to you herself; and as her tongue +runs a good deal faster than mine, I have no doubt that her pen +will do so, also. As you say, with your Portuguese pay and your +own, you are doing well; but if you should get pinched at any time, +be sure to draw on me, up to any reasonable amount.</p> +<p>"It seems to me that things are not going on very well, on the +frontier; and I should not be surprised to hear that Wellington is +in full retreat again, for Torres Vedras. Remember me to the +colonel, O'Driscoll, and all the others. I see, by the Gazette, +that Stokes, who was junior ensign when the regiment went into +action at Vimiera, has just got his step. That shows the changes +that have taken place, and how many good fellows have fallen out of +the ranks. Again I say, take care of yourself.</p> +<p>"Your affectionate Father."</p> +<p>His cousin's letter was, as usual, long and chatty; telling him +about his father, their pursuits and amusements, and their +neighbours.</p> +<p>"You don't deserve so long a letter," she said, when she was +approaching the conclusion, "for although I admit your letters are +long, you never seem to tell one just the things one wants to know. +For example, you tell us exactly the road you travelled down to +Cadiz, with the names of the villages and so on, just as if you +were writing an official report. Your father says it is very +interesting, and has been working it all out on the map. It is very +interesting to me to know that you have got safely to Cadiz but, as +there were no adventures by the way, I don't care a snap about the +names of the villages you passed through, or the exact road you +traversed.</p> +<p>"Now, on the other hand, I should like to know all about this +young woman who helped you to get out of prison. You don't say a +word about what she is like, whether she is pretty or plain. You +don't even mention her name, or say whether she fell in love with +you, or you with her; though I admit that you do say that she was +engaged to the muleteer Garcia. I think, if I had been in his +place, I should have managed to let you fall into the hands of the +French again. I should say a man was a great fool to help to rescue +anyone his girl had taken all sorts of pains to get out of +prison.</p> +<p>"At any rate, sir, I expect you to give me a fair and honest +description of her the next time you write, for I consider your +silence about her to be, in the highest degree, suspicious. +However, I have the satisfaction of knowing that you are not likely +to be in Salamanca again, for a very long time. Your father says he +does not think anything will be done, until the present Ministry +are kicked out here; and Wellington hangs the principal members of +all the Juntas in Portugal, and all that he can get at, in +Spain.</p> +<p>"He is the most bloodthirsty man that I have ever come across, +according to his own account, but in reality he would not hurt a +fly. He is always doing kind actions among the peasantry, and the +'Major' is quite the most popular man in this part of the +country.</p> +<p>"I have not yet forgiven you for having gone straight back to +Spain, instead of running home for a short time when you were so +close to us, at Jersey. I told you when I wrote that I should never +forgive you, and I am still of the same opinion. It was too +bad.</p> +<p>"Your father has just called to ask if I am going on writing all +night; and it is quite time to close, that it may go with his own +letter, which a boy is waiting to carry on horseback to the post +office, four miles away; so goodbye.</p> +<p>"Your very affectionate cousin, Mary."</p> +<p>The next two months passed quietly at Pinhel. Operations +continued to be carried on at various points but, although several +encounters of minor importance took place, the combatants were +engaged rather in endeavouring to feel each other's positions, and +to divine each other's intentions, than to bring about a serious +battle. Marmont believed Wellington to be stronger than he was, +while the latter rather underestimated the French strength. Thus +there were, on both sides, movements of advance and retirement.</p> +<p>During the time that had elapsed since the battles of Fuentes +d'Onoro and Albuera, Badajos had been again besieged by the +British, but ineffectually; and in August Wellington, taking +advantage of Marmont's absence in the south, advanced and +established a blockade of Ciudad Rodrigo. This had led to some +fighting. The activity of General Hill, and the serious menace to +the communications effected by Terence's Portuguese and the +guerillas, had prevented the French from gathering in sufficient +strength, either to drive the blockading force across the frontier +again, or from carrying out Napoleon's plans for the invasion of +Portugal. Wellington, on his part, was still unable to move; owing +to the absence of transport, and the manner in which the Portuguese +government thwarted him at every point: leaving all his demands +that the roads should be kept in good order, unattended to; +starving their own troops to such an extent that they were +altogether unfit for action; placing every obstacle to the calling +out of new levies; and in every way hindering his plans.</p> +<p>He obtained but little assistance or encouragement at home. His +military chest was empty. The muleteers, who kept up the supply of +food for the army, were six months in arrears of pay. The British +troops were also unpaid, badly supplied with clothes and shoes; +while money and stores were still being sent in unlimited +quantities to the Spanish Juntas, where they did no good whatever, +and might as well have been thrown into the sea. But in spite of +all these difficulties, the army was daily improving in efficiency. +The men were now inured to hardships of all kinds. They had, in +three pitched battles, proved themselves superior to the French; +and they had an absolute confidence in their commander.</p> +<p>Much was due to the efforts of Lord Fitzroy Somerset, +Wellington's military secretary who, by entering into communication +with the commanders of brigades and regiments, most of whom were +quite young men--for the greater part of the army was but of recent +creation--was enabled not only to learn something of the state of +discipline in each regiment, but greatly to encourage and stimulate +the efforts of its officers; who felt that the doings of their +regiment were observed at headquarters, that merit would be +recognized without favouritism, and that any failure in the +discipline or morale of those under their orders would be noted +against them. Twice, during the two months, Terence had been sent +for to headquarters, in order that he might give Lord Fitzroy +minute information concerning the various roads and localities, +point out natural obstacles where an obstinate defence might be +made by an enemy, or which could be turned to advantage by an +advancing army. The route maps that he had sent were frequently +turned to, and fully explained.</p> +<p>The second visit took place in the last week in November and, on +his arrival, the military secretary began the conversation by +handing a Gazette to him.</p> +<p>"This arrived yesterday, Colonel O'Connor; and I congratulate +you that, upon the very strong recommendation of Lord Wellington, +you are gazetted to a majority. Now that your position is so well +assured, there will be no longer occasion for you to remain +nominally attached to the headquarter staff. Of course, it was +before I came out that this was done; and I learned that the +intention was that you would not act upon the staff, but it was to +be merely an honorary position, without pay, in order to add to +your authority and independence, when you happen to come in contact +with Portuguese officers of a higher rank."</p> +<p>"That was so, sir. I was very grateful for the kindness that +Lord Wellington showed, in thus enabling me to wear the uniform of +his staff, which was of great assistance to me at the time; and +indeed, I am deeply conscious of the kindness with which he has, on +every occasion, treated me; and for his recommending me for +promotion."</p> +<p>"I should have been personally glad," Lord Fitzroy went on, "to +have had you permanently attached to our staff; as your knowledge +of the country might, at times, be of great value, and of your zeal +and energy you have given more than ample proofs. I spoke of the +matter to the general, this morning. He agreed with me that you +would be a great addition to the staff but, upon the other hand, +such a step would very seriously diminish the efficiency of the +regiment that you raised, and have since commanded. The regiment +has lately rendered quite exceptional services and, under your +command, we reckon it to be as valuable in the fighting line as if +it were one of our own; which is more than can be said for any +other Portuguese battalion, although some of them have, of late, +fought remarkably well.</p> +<p>"I do not say that Colonel Herrara, aided by his three English +officers--who, by the way, are all promoted in this Gazette, the +two ensigns to the rank of lieutenants, and Mr. Ryan to that of +captain--would not keep the regiment in a state of efficiency, so +far as fighting is concerned; but without your leading, it could +not be relied upon to act for detached service such as it has +performed under you."</p> +<p>"Thank you, sir. Of course, it would be a great honour to me to +be on the general's staff, but I should be very sorry to leave the +regiment and, frankly, I do not think that it would get on well +without me. Colonel Herrara is ready to bestow infinite pains on +his work, but I do not think that he would do things on his own +responsibility. Bull and Macwitty have both proved themselves +zealous and active, and I can always rely upon them to carry out my +orders to the letter; but I doubt if they would get on as well, +with Herrara, as they do with me. I am very glad to hear that they +and Mr. Ryan have got their steps. The latter makes an admirable +adjutant, and if I had to choose one of the four for the command I +should select him; but he has not been very long with the regiment, +is not known personally, and would not, I think, have the same +influence with the Portuguese officers and men. Moreover I am +afraid that, having been in command so long, I should miss my +independence, if I had only to carry out the orders of others."</p> +<p>"I can quite understand that," the military secretary said, with +a smile. "I can quite realize the fascination of the life of a +partisan leader; especially when he has, which Trant and the others +have not, a body of men whom he has trained himself, and upon whom +he can absolutely rely. You can still, of course, wear the uniform +of a field officer on the general's staff, and so will have very +little alteration to make, save by adding the proper insignia of +your rank. I will write you a line, authorizing you to do so.</p> +<p>"Now, let us have a turn at your maps. I may tell you in +confidence that, if an opportunity offers, we shall at once convert +the blockade of Ciudad into a siege; and hope to carry it before +the enemy can march, with sufficient force, to its relief.</p> +<p>"To do so he would naturally collect all his available forces +from Salamanca, Zamora, and Valladolid, and would probably obtain +reinforcements from Madrid and Estremadura; and I want to +ascertain, as far as possible, the best means of checking the +advance of some of these troops, by the blowing up of bridges, or +the throwing forward of such a force as your regiment to seize any +defile, or other point, that could be held for a day or two, and an +enemy's column thus delayed. Even twenty-four hours might be of +importance."</p> +<p>"I understand, sir. Of course, the passes between Madrid and +Avila might be retained for some little time, especially if the +defenders had a few guns; but they would be liable to be taken in +the rear by a force at Avila, where there were, when I went down +south, over five thousand men. As to the troops coming from the +north, they would doubtless march on Salamanca. From that town they +would cross the Huebra and Yeltes so near their sources that no +difficulty would be caused by the blowing up of bridges, if any +exist; but the pass over the Sierra de Gatta, on the south of +Ciudad, might be defended by a small force, without +difficulty."</p> +<p>The maps were now got out, and the matter gone into minutely. +After an hour's conversation, Lord Fitzroy said:</p> +<p>"Thank you, Colonel O'Connor. Some of the information that you +have given me will assuredly be very useful, if we besiege Ciudad. +From what we hear, there are a good many changes being made in the +French command. Napoleon seems about to engage in a campaign with +Russia, and is likely to draw off a certain portion of the forces +here and, while these changes are being made, it would seem to +offer a good opportunity for us to strike a blow."</p> +<p>On the last day of December, Terence received the following +order:</p> +<p>"Colonel O'Connor will draw six days' rations from the +commissariat and, at daybreak tomorrow, march to the river Aqueda +and, on the following day, will ford that river and will post +himself along the line of the Yeltes, from its junction with the +Huebra to the mountains; and will prevent any person or parties +crossing from this side. It is of the highest importance that no +intelligence of the movements of the army should be sent, either by +the garrison of Ciudad or by the peasantry, to Salamanca. When his +provisions are exhausted, he is authorized to hire carts and send +in to the army round Ciudad but, if possible, he should obtain +supplies from the country near him, and is authorized to purchase +provisions, and to send in accounts and vouchers, for such +purchases, to the paymaster's department."</p> +<p>"Hurrah, Ryan," he exclaimed on reading the order, "things are +going to move, at last! This means, of course, that the army is +going to besiege Ciudad at once; and that we are to prevent the +French from getting any news of it, until it is too late for them +to relieve it. For the last month, guns and ammunition have been +arriving at Almeida; and I thought that this weary time of waiting +was drawing to an end."</p> +<p>"I am glad, indeed, Terence. I must say that I was afraid that +we should not be moving until the spring. Shall we go in and say +goodbye to our fellows?"</p> +<p>"Yes, we may as well; but mind, don't say where we are going to, +only that we are ordered away. I don't suppose that the regiments +will know anything about it, till within an hour of the time they +march. There can be no doubt that it is a serious business. Ciudad +held out for weeks against Massena; and with Marmont within a few +days' march, with an army at least as strong as ours, it will be a +tough business, indeed, to take it before he can come up to its +relief; and I can well understand that it is all important that he +shall know nothing about the siege, till it is too late for him to +arrive in time."</p> +<p>"We have come in to say goodbye, colonel," Terence said, as he +and Ryan entered the mess room of the Mayo Fusiliers that +evening.</p> +<p>"And where are you off to, O'Connor?"</p> +<p>"Well, sir, I don't mind mentioning it in here, but it must go +no further. The chief, knowing what we are capable of, proposes +that I shall make a rapid march to Madrid, seize the city, and +bring King Joseph back a prisoner."</p> +<p>There was a roar of laughter.</p> +<p>"Terence, my boy," Captain O'Grady said, "that is hardly a +mission worthy of a fighting man like yourself. I expect that you +are hiding something from us, and that the real idea is that you +should traverse Spain and France, enter Germany, and seize Boney, +and carry him off with you to England."</p> +<p>"I dare not tell you whether you are right or not, O'Grady. +Things of this sort must not even be whispered about. It is a +wonderfully good guess that you have made and, when it is all over, +you will be able to take credit for having divined what was up; but +for mercy's sake don't talk about it. Keep as silent as the grave +and, if anyone should ask you what has become of us, pretend that +you know nothing about it."</p> +<p>"But you are going, O'Connor?" the colonel said, when the +laughter had subsided.</p> +<p>"Yes, colonel. We march tomorrow morning. I daresay you will +hear of us before many days are over; and may, perhaps, be able to +make even a closer guess than O'Grady as to what we are doing. I am +heartily glad that we are off. We are now at our full strength +again. Most of the wounded have rejoined, and I could have filled +up the vacancies a dozen times over. The Portuguese know that I +always manage to get food for my men, somehow; which is more than +can be said for the other Portuguese regiments, though those of +Trant and Pack are better off than Beresford's regulars. Then, too, +I think they like fighting, now that they feel that they are a +match for the French, man for man. They get a fair share of it, at +any rate. The three months that we have been idle have been useful, +as the new recruits know their work as well as the others."</p> +<p>"Then you don't know how much longer we are going to stop in +this bastely hole?" O'Grady asked.</p> +<p>"Well, I will tell you this much, O'Grady: I fancy that, before +this day week, you will all have work to do; and that it is likely +to be hot."</p> +<p>"That is a comfort, Terence. But, my dear boy, have a little +pity on us and don't finish off the business by yourselves. +Remember that we have come a long way, and that it will be mighty +hard for us if you were to clear the French out of Spain, and leave +nothing for us to do but to bury their dead and escort their army, +as prisoners, to the port."</p> +<p>"I will bear it in mind, O'Grady; but don't you forget the past. +You know how desperately you grumbled at Rolica, because the +regiment was not in it; and how you got your wish at Vimiera, and +lost an arm in consequence. So even if I do, as you say, push the +French out of Spain, you will have the consolation of knowing that +you will be able to go back to Ireland, without leaving any more +pieces of you behind."</p> +<p>"There is something in that, Terence," O'Grady said gravely. "I +think that when this is over I shall go on half pay, and there may +as well be as much of me left, as possible, to enjoy it. It's an +ungrateful country I am serving. In spite of all that I have done +for it, and the loss of my arm into the bargain; here am I, still a +captain, though maybe I am near the top of the list. Still, it is +but a captain I am, and here are two gossoons, like yourself and +Dick Ryan, the one of you marching about a field officer, and the +other a captain. It is heart-breaking entirely, and me one of the +most zealous officers in the service. But it is never any luck I +have had, from the day I was born."</p> +<p>"It will come some day, never fear, O'Grady; and perhaps it may +not be so far off as you fear.</p> +<p>"Well, colonel, we will just take a glass with you for luck, and +then say good night; for I have a good many things to see after, +and must be up very early, so as to get our tents packed and handed +over, to draw our rations, eat our breakfast, and be off by +seven."</p> +<p>It was close upon that hour when the regiment marched. It was +known that there were no French troops west of the Huebra but, +after fording the Aqueda, the force halted until nightfall; and +then moved forward and reached the Huebra at midnight, lay down to +sleep until daybreak, and then extended along the bank of the +Yeltes, as far as its source among the mountains; thus cutting the +roads from Ciudad to Salamanca and the North. The distance to be +watched was some twenty miles but, as the river was in many places +unfordable, it was necessary only to place patrols here; while +strong parties were posted, not only on the main roads, but at all +points where by-roads or peasants' tracks led down to the bank.</p> +<p>On that day a bridge was thrown across the Aqueda, six miles +below Ciudad, for the passage of artillery but, owing to the +difficulties of carriage, it was five days later before the +artillery and ammunition could be brought over; and this was only +done by the aid of 800 carts, which Wellington had caused to be +quietly constructed during the preceding three months.</p> +<p>On the 8th, the light division and Pack's Portuguese contingent +forded the Aqueda three miles above Ciudad and, making a long +detour, took up their position behind a hill called the Great +Teson. They remained quiet during the day and, the garrison +believing that they had only arrived to enable the force that had +long blockaded the town to render the investment more complete, no +measures of defence were taken; but at night the light division +fell suddenly on the redoubt of San Francisco, on the Great +Teson.</p> +<p>The assault was completely successful. The garrison was a small +one, and had not been reinforced. A few of them were killed, and +the remainder taken; with a loss, to the assailants, of only +twenty-four men and officers. A Portuguese regiment, commanded by +Colonel Elder, then set to work; and these--in spite of a heavy +fire, kept up all night by the French forts--completed a parallel, +600 yards in length, before day broke.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch18" id="Ch18">Chapter 18</a>: The Sack Of A +City.</h2> +<p>For the next four days the troops worked night and day, the +operations being carried on under a tremendous fire from the French +batteries. The trenches being carried along the whole line of the +Small Teson, on the night of the 13th the convent of Santa Cruz was +captured and, on the 14th, the batteries opened fire against the +town and, before morning, the 40th regiment carried the convent of +San Francisco; and thus established itself within the suburb, which +was inclosed by an entrenchment that the Spanish had thrown up +there, during the last siege. The French artillery was very +powerful and, at times, overpowered that of the besiegers. Some +gallant sorties were also made but, by the 19th, two breaches were +effected in the ramparts, and preparations were made for an +assault.</p> +<p>That evening Terence received an order to march at once to the +place, and to join Pack's Portuguese. The assault was to be made by +the 3rd and light divisions, aided by Pack's command and Colonel +O'Toole's Portuguese riflemen. The main British army lay along the +Coa, in readiness to advance at once and give battle, should +Marmont come up to the assistance of the besieged town.</p> +<p>On the 19th both the breaches were pronounced practicable and, +during the day, the guns of the besiegers were directed against the +artillery on the ramparts, while the storming parties prepared for +their work. The third division was to attack the great breach. The +light division was to make for the small breach and, upon entering +the inclosure known as the fausse braye, a portion were to turn and +enter the town by the Salamanca gate; while the others were to +penetrate by the breach.</p> +<p>Colonel O'Toole, with his Portuguese, was to cross the river and +to aid the right attack; while Pack's Portuguese were to make a +false attack on the San Jago gate, on the other side of the town, +and to convert this into a real assault if the defence should prove +feeble.</p> +<p>The French scarcely appeared conscious that the critical moment +was at hand, but they had raised breastworks along the tops of both +breaches, and were perfectly prepared for the assault. When the +signal was given, the attack was begun on the right. The 5th, 77th, +and 94th Regiments rushed from the convent of Santa Cruz, leapt +down into the fausse braye, and made their way to the foot of the +great breach; which they reached at the same moment as the rest of +the third division, who had run down from the Small Teson. A +terrible fire was opened upon them but, undismayed by shell, grape, +and musketry from the ramparts and houses, they drove the French +behind their new work.</p> +<p>Here, however, the enemy stood so stoutly that no progress could +be made. Unable to cross the obstacle, the troops nevertheless +maintained their position, although suffering terrible losses from +the French fire.</p> +<p>Equally furious was the attack on the small breach, by the light +division. After a few minutes' fighting, they succeeded in bursting +through the ranks of the defenders; and then, turning to the right, +fought their way along the ramparts until they reached the top of +the great breach. The French there wavered, on finding that their +flank was turned; and the third division, seizing the opportunity, +hurled themselves upon them, and this breach was also won.</p> +<p>O'Toole's attack was successful and, on the other side of the +town, Pack's Portuguese, meeting with no resistance, had blown open +the gate of San Jago, and had also entered the town. Here a +terrible scene took place, and the British troops sullied their +victory by the wildest and most horrible excesses. They had neither +forgotten nor forgiven the treatment they had experienced at the +hands of the Spanish, both before and after the battle of Talavera; +when they were almost starved, while the Spaniards had abundant +supplies, and yet left the British wounded unattended, to die of +starvation in the hospitals, when they evacuated the city. From +that time their animosity against the Spaniards had been vastly +greater than their feeling against the French, who had always +behaved as gallant enemies, and had treated their wounded and +prisoners with the greatest kindness.</p> +<p>Now this long-pent-up feeling burst out, and murder, rapine, and +violence of all sorts raged for some hours, wholly without check. +Officers who endeavoured to protect the hapless inhabitants were +shot down, all commands were unheeded, and abominable atrocities +were perpetrated.</p> +<p>Some share of the blame rests with Wellington and his staff, who +had taken no measures whatever for maintaining order in the town, +when possession should be gained of it--a provision which should +never be omitted, in the case of an assault. The Portuguese, whose +animosity against the Spaniards was equally bitter, imitated the +example of their British comrades. Fires broke out in several +places, which added to the horror of the scene. The castle was +still held by the French, the troops having retreated there as soon +as the breach had been carried. There was not, therefore, even the +excuse of the excitement of street fighting to be made for the +conduct of the victors.</p> +<p>In vain, Terence and his officers endeavoured to keep their men +together. By threes and fours these scattered down the side +streets, to join the searchers for plunder; until at last, he +remained alone with his British and Portuguese officers.</p> +<p>"This is horrible," he said to Ryan, as the shouts, shrieks, and +screams told that the work of murder, as well as plunder, was being +carried on. "It is evident that, single handed, nothing can be +done. I propose that we divide into two parties, and take these two +houses standing together under our protection. We will have two +English officers with each, as there is no chance of the soldiers +listening to a Portuguese officer. How many are there of us?"</p> +<p>There were the twelve captains, and twenty subalterns.</p> +<p>"Bull and Macwitty, do you take half of them; Colonel Herrara, +Ryan, and I will take the other half. When you have once obtained +admission, barricade the door and lower windows with furniture. +When the rioters arrive, show yourselves at the windows, and say +that you have orders to protect the houses from insult and, if any +attack is made, you will carry out your orders at whatever cost. +When they see four British officers at the windows, they will +suppose that special instructions have been given us with respect +to these two houses.</p> +<p>"If they attack we must each defend ourselves to the last, +holding the stairs if they break in. If only our house is attacked, +come with half your force to our assistance; and we will do the +same to you. We can get along by those balconies, without coming +down into the street."</p> +<p>The force was at once divided. Terence knocked at the door of +one house, and his majors at that of the other. No answer was +received but, as they continued to knock with such violence that it +seemed as if they were about to break down the doors, these were +presently opened. Terence entered. A Spanish gentleman, behind whom +stood a number of trembling servants, advanced.</p> +<p>"What would you have, senor?" he asked. "I see that you are an +officer. Surely you cannot menace with violence those who are your +allies?"</p> +<p>"You are right, senor; but unfortunately our troops have shaken +off all discipline, and are pillaging and, I am afraid, murdering. +The men of my own regiment have joined the rest, and I with my +officers, finding ourselves powerless, have resolved at least to +protect your mansion, and the next, from our maddened troops. I can +give you my word of honour that I and these gentlemen, who are all +my officers, have come as friends, and are determined to defend +until the last your mansion, which happened to be the first we came +to. A similar party is taking charge of the next house and, if +necessary, we can join forces."</p> +<p>"I thank you indeed, sir. I am the Count de Montego. I have my +wife and daughters here and, in their name as well as my own, I +thank you most cordially. I have some twenty men, sir. Alone we +could do nothing, but they will aid you in every way, if you will +but give orders."</p> +<p>"In the first place, count, we will move as many articles of +heavy furniture as possible against the doors. I see that your +lower windows are all barred. We had better place mattresses behind +them, to prevent shot from penetrating. I hope, however, that it +will not come to that; and that I shall be able to persuade any +that may come along that these houses are under special +protection."</p> +<p>The count at once ordered his servants to carry out the British +officer's instructions, and the whole party were soon engaged in +piling heavy furniture against the door. The count had gone up to +allay the fears of his wife and daughters who, with the female +servants, were gathered in terrible anxiety in the drawing room +above. As soon as the preparations were completed, Terence, Ryan, +and Herrara went upstairs and, after being introduced to the +ladies, who were now to some extent reassured, Terence went out on +to the balcony with Ryan; leaving Herrara in the drawing room, as +he thought it was best that only British officers should show +themselves.</p> +<p>Terrible as the scene had been before, it was even worse now. +The soldiers had everywhere broken into the cellars, and numbers of +them were already drunk. Many discharged their muskets recklessly, +some quarrelled among themselves as to the spoil they had taken, +and fierce fights occurred.</p> +<p>In two or three minutes Bull and Macwitty appeared on the +balcony of the next house.</p> +<p>"I see it is too far to get across," Terence said. "If you +cannot find a plank, set half a dozen men to prise up a couple from +the floor."</p> +<p>Presently a number of soldiers came running along down the +street.</p> +<p>"Here are two big houses," one shouted. "There ought to be +plenty of plunder here."</p> +<p>"Halt!" Terence shouted. "These houses are under special +protection and, as you see, I myself and three other British +officers are placed here, to see that no one enters. I have a +strong force under my orders, and anyone attempting to break down +the doors will be shot instantly, and all who aid him will be +subsequently tried and hung."</p> +<p>The men, on seeing the four British officers--three of them in +the dress of field officers, and one, the speaker, in the uniform +of the staff--at once drew back.</p> +<p>"Come on, mates," one said, as they stood indecisive; "we shall +only lose time here, while others are getting as much plunder as +they can carry. Let us go on."</p> +<p>But as the wine took effect, others who came along were less +disposed to listen to orders. Gradually gathering, until they were +in considerable numbers, several shots were fired at the officers; +and one man, advancing up the steps, began to hammer at the door +with the butt end of his musket. Terence leaned over the balcony +and, drawing his pistol and taking a steady aim, fired, and the man +fell with a sharp cry. A number of shots were fired from below, but +the men were too unsteady to take aim, and Terence was +uninjured.</p> +<a id="PicI" name="PicI"></a> +<center><img src="images/i.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: The man fell, with a sharp cry." /></center> +<p>Again he stood up.</p> +<p>"Men," he shouted, "you have shown yourselves to be brave +soldiers today. Are you now going to disgrace yourselves, by mutiny +against officers who are doing their duty, thereby running the risk +of being tried and hung? I tell you again that these houses are +both defended by a strong force, and that we shall protect them at +all hazard. Go elsewhere, where booty is to be more easily +obtained."</p> +<p>His words, however, were unheeded. Some more shots were fired, +and then there was a general rush at the doors; while another party +attacked that of the next house. The officers were all provided +with pistols, and Terence hurried below with Ryan.</p> +<p>"Do not fire," he said to the others, "until they break down the +door. It will take them some time and, at any moment, fresh troops +may be marched in to restore order."</p> +<p>The door was a strong one and, backed as it was, it resisted for +a considerable time. Those who first attacked it speedily broke the +stocks of their guns, and had to make way for others. Presently the +attack ceased suddenly.</p> +<p>"Run upstairs, Dicky, and see what they are doing, and how +things are going on next door."</p> +<p>Ryan soon returned.</p> +<p>"They are bringing furniture and a lot of straw from houses +opposite. They have broken down the next door, but they have not +got in yet."</p> +<p>"Let the servants at once set to work, to draw pails of water +from the well in the courtyard, and carry them upstairs.</p> +<p>"Ryan, you had better go into the next house and see if they are +pressed. Tell them that they must hold out without my help for a +short time. I am going to send six officers out by the back of the +house, to collect some of our men together. Another will be in +readiness to open the back door, as soon as they return.</p> +<p>"I shall keep them from firing the pile as long as I can. The +count has two double-barrelled guns. I don't want to use them, if I +can help it; but they shall not get in here. Do you stop, and help +next door. There can be no fighting here yet for, if they do burn +the door, it will be a long time before they can get in."</p> +<p>The native officers started at once. They were of opinion that +they would soon be able to bring in a good many of their men; for +the Portuguese are a sober race, and few would have got +intoxicated. Most of the men would soon find that there was not +much booty to be obtained, and that even what they got would +probably be snatched from them by the English soldiers; and would +consequently be glad to return to their duty again.</p> +<p>An officer took his place at the back door, in readiness to +remove the bars; another went up with Terence to the first floor; +and the remainder stopped in the hall, with six of the +menservants.</p> +<p>Terence went upstairs and looked down into the street. There was +a lot of furniture, with bundles of faggots and straw, piled +there.</p> +<p>"Now," he said to the officer, "empty these pails at once; the +servants will soon bring some more up. I will stand here with these +guns, and fire at any one who interferes with you. Just come out +into the balcony, empty your pails over, and go back at once. You +need scarcely show yourself, and there is not much chance of your +being hit by those drunken rascals."</p> +<p>Yells and shouts of rage were heard below, as the water was +thrown over. As fast as the pails were emptied, the servants +carried them off and refilled them. At last, two soldiers appeared +from a house opposite, with blazing torches.</p> +<p>The guns had been loaded by the count with small shot, as +Terence was anxious not to take life. As soon as the two men +appeared, he raised the fowling piece to his shoulder and fired +both barrels, in quick succession. With a yell of pain, the +soldiers dropped their torches. One fell to the ground, the other +clapped his hands to his face and ran down the street in an agony, +as if half mad. Half a dozen muskets were discharged, but Terence +had stepped back the moment he had fired, and handed the gun to the +count, who was standing behind him, to recharge.</p> +<p>Two other soldiers picked up the torches, but dropped them as +Terence again fired. Another man snatched up one of them, and flung +it across the street. It fell upon some straw that had been +thoroughly soaked by the water, and burned out there +harmlessly.</p> +<p>It was not long before the servants began to arrive with the +full buckets and, when these also had been emptied, Terence, +glancing over, had little fear that the pile could now be lighted. +The pails were sent down again, and he waited for the next +move.</p> +<p>The fighting had ceased at the other door. The soldiers having +drawn back from the barricade, to see the effect of the fire. Ryan +ran across the plank and rejoined Terence.</p> +<p>"Things are quiet there, for the present," he said. "There has +not been much harm done. When they had partly broken down the door, +they began firing through it. Bull and Macwitty kept the others +back from the line of fire, and not a pistol has been discharged +yet. Bull cut down one fellow who tried to climb over the +barricade, but otherwise no blood has been shed on either +side."</p> +<p>Help was coming now. One of the Portuguese officers was +admitted, with twenty-four men that he had picked up. The others +came in rapidly and, within a quarter of an hour, three hundred men +were assembled. All were sober, and looked thoroughly ashamed of +themselves as they were formed up in the courtyard.</p> +<p>Terence went down to them. He said no word of blame.</p> +<p>"Now, men," he said, "you have to retrieve your characters. Half +of you will post yourselves at the windows, from the ground floor +to the top of the house. You are not to show yourselves, till you +receive orders to do so. You are not to load your guns but, as you +appear at the windows, point them down into the street. The +officers will post you, five at each window.</p> +<p>"The rest of you are at once to clear away the furniture in the +hall; and, when you receive the order, throw open the door and pour +out, forming across the street as you do so. Captain Ryan will be +in command of you. You are not to load, but to clear the street +with your bayonets. If any of the soldiers are too drunk to get out +of your way, knock them down with the butt end of your muskets; but +if they rush at you, use your bayonets."</p> +<p>He went round the house, and saw that five men were in readiness +at each window looking into the street. He ordered them to leave +the doors open.</p> +<p>"A pistol will be fired from the first landing," he said; "that +will be the signal, then show yourselves at once."</p> +<p>He waited until Ryan's party had cleared away the furniture. He +then went out on to the balcony, and addressed the crowd of +soldiers who were standing, uncertain what step to take next, many +of them having already gone off in search of plunder elsewhere.</p> +<p>"Listen to me, men," he shouted. "Hitherto I have refrained from +employing force against men who, after behaving as heroes, are now +acting like madmen; but I shall do so no longer. I will give you +two minutes to clear off, and anyone who remains at the end of that +time will have to take his chance."</p> +<p>Derisive shouts and threats arose in reply. He turned round and +nodded to the count, who was standing at the door of the room with +a pistol in his hand. He raised it and fired and, in a moment, +soldiers appeared at every window, menacing the crowd below with +their rifles. At the same moment the door opened, and the +Portuguese poured out, with Ryan at their head, trampling over the +pile raised in front of it.</p> +<p>There was a moment of stupefied dismay amongst the soldiers. +Hitherto none had believed that there were any in the houses, with +the exception of a few officers; and the sudden appearance of a +hundred men at the windows, and a number pouring out through the +door, took them so completely by surprise that there was not even a +thought of resistance.</p> +<p>Men who had faced the terrors of the deadly breaches turned and +fled and, save a few leaning stupidly against the opposite wall, +none remained by the time Ryan had formed up the two lines across +the street. Each of these advanced a short distance, and were at +once joined by the defenders of the other house, and by those at +the windows.</p> +<p>"Do you take command of one line, Bull; and you of the other, +Macwitty. I don't think that we shall be meddled with but, should +any of them return and attack you, you will first try and persuade +them to go away quietly. If they still attack, you will at once +fire upon them.</p> +<p>"Herrara, will you send out all your officers, and bring the men +in at the back doors, as before. We shall soon have the greater +part of the regiment here, and with them we can hold the street, if +necessary, against any force that is likely to attack it."</p> +<p>In half an hour, indeed, more than fifteen hundred men had been +rallied and, while two lines, each a hundred strong, were formed +across the street, some eighty yards apart, the rest were drawn up +in a solid body in the centre; Terence's order being that, if +attacked in force, half of them were to at once enter the houses on +both sides of the street, and to man the windows. He felt sure, +however, that the sight of so strong a force would be sufficient to +prevent the rioters interfering with them; the soldiers being, for +the most part, too drunk to act together, or with a common +object.</p> +<p>This, indeed, proved to be the case. Parties at times came down +the street but, on seeing the dark lines of troops drawn up, they +retired immediately, on being hailed by the English officers, and +slunk off under the belief that a large body of fresh troops had +entered the town. An hour later a mounted officer, followed by some +five or six others and some orderlies, rode up.</p> +<p>"What troops are these?" the officer asked.</p> +<p>"The Minho Portuguese Regiment, general," Bull answered, +"commanded by Colonel O'Connor."</p> +<p>The general rode on, the line opened, and he and his staff +passed through. Terence, who had posted himself in the balcony so +as to have a view of the whole street, at once ran down. Two of the +men with torches followed him.</p> +<p>On approaching, he at once recognized the officer as General +Barnard, who commanded one of the brigades of the light +division.</p> +<p>"So your regiment has remained firm, Colonel O'Connor?" the +general said.</p> +<p>"I am sorry to say, sir, that it did not, at first, but +scattered like the rest of the troops. My officers and myself, for +some time, defended these two large houses from the attack of the +soldiery. Matters became very serious, and I then sent out some of +my officers, who soon collected three hundred men, which sufficed +to disperse the rioters without our being obliged to fire a shot. +The officers then again went out, and now between fifteen and +sixteen hundred men are here.</p> +<p>"I am glad that you have come, sir, for I felt in a great +difficulty. It was hard to stay here inactive, when I was aware +that the town was being sacked, and atrocities of every kind +perpetrated but, upon the other hand, I dared not undertake the +responsibility of attempting to clear the streets. Such an attempt +would probably end in desperate fighting. It might have resulted in +heavy loss on both sides, and have caused such ill feeling between +the British and Portuguese troops as to seriously interfere with +the general dispositions for the campaign."</p> +<p>"No doubt you have taken the best course that could be pursued, +Colonel O'Connor; but I must take on myself the responsibility of +doing something. My appearance, at the head of your regiment, will +have some effect upon the men of the light division; and those who +are sober will, no doubt, rally round me, though hitherto my +efforts have been altogether powerless. All the officers will, of +course, join us at once. I fear that many have been killed in +trying to protect the inhabitants but, now that we have at least +got a nucleus of good troops, I have no doubt that we shall be +successful.</p> +<p>"Have you any torches?"</p> +<p>"There is a supply of them in the house, sir."</p> +<p>"Get them all lighted, and divide them among the men. As soon as +you have done this, form the regiment into column."</p> +<p>"Are they to load, sir?"</p> +<p>"Yes," the general said shortly; "but instruct your officers +that no one is to fire without orders, and that the sound of firing +at the head of the column is not to be considered as a signal for +the rest to open fire; though it may be necessary to shoot some of +these insubordinate scoundrels. By the way, I think it will be best +that only the leading company should load. The rest have their +bayonets, and can use them if attacked."</p> +<p>Some forty torches were handed over, by the count. These were +lighted and distributed along the line, ten being carried by the +leading company.</p> +<p>"You have bugles, colonel?"</p> +<p>"Yes, sir. There is one to each company."</p> +<p>"Let them all come to the front and play the Assembly, as they +march on.</p> +<p>"Now, will you ride at their head by my side, sir? Dismount one +of my orderlies, and take his horse."</p> +<p>By the time all the preparations were completed, they had been +joined by nearly two hundred more men. Just before they started, +Terence said:</p> +<p>"Would it not be well, general, if I were to tell off a dozen +parties of twenty men, each under the command of a steady +non-commissioned officer, to enter the houses on each side of the +road as we go along, and to clear out any soldiers they may find +there?"</p> +<p>"Certainly. But I think that when they see the regiment marching +along, and hear the bugles, they will clear out fast enough of +their own accord."</p> +<p>With bugles blowing, the regiment started. Twenty men, with an +officer, had been left behind at each of the houses they had +defended; in case parties of marauders should arrive, and endeavour +to obtain an entrance.</p> +<p>As they marched by, men appeared at the windows. Most of these +were soldiers who, with an exclamation of alarm when they saw the +general, followed by two battalions in perfect order, hastily ran +down and made their escape by the backs of the houses; or came +quietly out and, forming in some sort of order, accompanied the +regiment. Several shots were heard behind, as the search parties +cleared out those who had remained in the houses and, presently, +the force entered the main square of the town and halted in its +centre, the bugles still blowing the Assembly. Numbers of officers +at once ran up, and many of the more sober soldiers.</p> +<p>"Form them up as they arrive," the general said to the +officers.</p> +<p>In a few minutes, some five hundred men had gathered.</p> +<p>"Do you break your regiment up into four columns, Colonel +O'Connor. A fourth of these men shall go with each, with a strong +party of officers. The soldiers will be the less inclined to +resist, if they see their own comrades and officers with your +troops, than if the latter were alone. I will take the command of +one column myself, do you take that of another.</p> +<p>"Colonel Strong, will you join one of the majors of Colonel +O'Connor's regiment; and will you, Major Hughes, join the +other?</p> +<p>"All soldiers who do not, at once, obey your summons to fall in +will be taken prisoners; and those who use violence you will shoot, +without hesitation. All drunken men are to be picked up and sent +back here. Place a strong guard over them, and see that they do not +make off again."</p> +<p>Five minutes later, the four columns started in different +directions. A few soldiers who, inflamed by drink, fired at those +who summoned them to surrender, were instantly shot and, in half an +hour, the terrible din that had filled the air had quietened +down.</p> +<p>Morning was breaking now. In the great square, officers were +busy drawing up the men who had been brought in, in order of their +regiments. The inhabitants issued from their houses, collected the +bodies of those who had been killed in the streets, and carried +them into their homes; and sounds of wailing and lamentation rose +from every house.</p> +<p>Lord Wellington now rode in, with his staff. The regiments that +had disgraced themselves were at once marched out of the town, and +their places taken by those of other divisions. But nothing could +repair the damage that had been done; and the doings of that night +excited, throughout Spain, a feeling of hostility to the British +that has scarcely subsided to this day; and was heightened by the +equally bad conduct of the troops at the storming of Badajoz.</p> +<p>Long before the arrival of Lord Wellington, the whole of the +Minho regiment had rejoined. Terence ordered that the late comers +should not be permitted to fall in with their companies, but should +remain as a separate body. He marched the regiment to a quiet spot +in the suburbs, and ordered them to form in a hollow square, with +the men who had last joined in the centre. These he addressed +sternly.</p> +<p>"For the first time," he said, "since this regiment was formed, +I am ashamed of my men. I had thought that I could rely upon you +under all circumstances. I find that this is not so, and that the +greed for plunder has, at once, broken down the bonds of +discipline. Those who, the moment they were called upon, returned +to their colours, I can forgive, seeing that the British regiments +set them so bad an example; but you men, who to the last remained +insubordinate, I cannot forgive. You have disgraced not only +yourselves, but your regiment, and I shall request Lord Wellington +to attach you to some other force. I only want to command men I can +rely upon."</p> +<p>A loud chorus of lament and entreaty rose from the men.</p> +<p>"It is as painful to me as it is to you," Terence went on, +raising his hands for silence. "How proud I should have been if, +this morning, I could have met the general and said that the +regiment he had been good enough to praise so highly, several +times, had proved trustworthy; instead of having to report that +every man deserted his officers, and that many continued the evil +work of pillage, and worse, to the end."</p> +<p>Many of the men wept loudly, others dropped upon their knees and +implored Terence to forgive them. He had already instructed his two +majors what was to be done, and they and the twelve captains now +stepped forward.</p> +<p>"Colonel," Bull said, in a loud voice that could be heard all +over the square, "we, the officers of the Minho regiment, +thoroughly agree with you in all that you have said, and feel +deeply the disgrace the conduct of these men has brought upon it; +but we trust that you will have mercy on them, and we are ready to +promise, in their name, that never again will they so offend, and +that their future conduct will show how deeply they repent of their +error."</p> +<p>There was a general cry from the men of:</p> +<p>"Indeed we do. Punish us as you like, colonel, but don't send us +away from the regiment!"</p> +<p>Terence stood as if hesitating, for some time; then he said:</p> +<p>"I cannot resist the prayer of your officers, men; and I am +willing to believe that you deeply regret the disgrace you have +brought upon us all. Of one thing I am determined upon; not one man +in the regiment shall be any the better for his share in this +night's work, and that this accursed plunder shall not be retained. +A blanket will be spread out here in front of me, and the regiment +will pass along before me by twos. Each man, as he files by, will +empty out the contents of his pockets, and swear solemnly that he +has retained no object of spoil, whatever. After that is over, I +shall have an inspection of kits and, if any article of value is +found concealed, I will hand over its owner to the provost marshal, +to be shot forthwith."</p> +<p>The operation took upwards of two hours. At Herrara's suggestion +a table was brought out, a crucifix placed upon it, and each man as +he came up, after emptying out his pockets, swore solemnly, laying +his hand upon the table, that he had given up all the spoil he had +collected.</p> +<p>Terence could not help smiling at the scene the regiment +presented, before the men began to file past. No small proportion +of the men stripped off their coats, and unwound from their bodies +rolls of silk, costly veils, and other stuffs of which they had +taken possession. All these were laid down by the side of the +blanket, on which a pile of gold and silver coins, a great number +of rings, brooches, and bracelets, had accumulated by the time the +whole had passed by.</p> +<p>"The money cannot be restored," Terence said to Herrara, +"therefore set four non-commissioned officers to count it out. Have +the jewels all placed in a bag. Let all the stuffs and garments be +made into bundles. I shall be obliged if you will take a sufficient +number of men to carry them, and go down yourself, with a guard of +twenty men, to the syndic, or whatever they call their head man, +and hand them over to him. Say that the Minho regiment returns the +spoil it had captured, and deeply regrets its conduct.</p> +<p>"Will you say that I beg him to divide the money among the +sufferers most in need of it, and to dispose the jewels and other +things where they can be seen, and to issue a notice to the +inhabitants that all can come and inspect them, and those who can +bring proof that any of the articles belong to them can take them +away."</p> +<p>The regiment was by this time formed up again, and Terence, +addressing them, told them of the orders that he had given; saying +that, as the regiment had made all the compensation in their power, +and had rid itself of the spoils of a people whom they had +professedly come to aid, it could now look the Spaniards in the +face again. Just as he had concluded, a staff officer rode up.</p> +<p>"Lord Wellington wishes to speak to you, colonel," he said. "We +have been looking about for you everywhere, but your regiment +seemed to have vanished."</p> +<p>"Then I must leave the work of inspecting the kits to you, +Herrara. You will see that every article is unfolded and closely +examined, and place every man in whose kit anything is discovered +under arrest, at once. I trust that you will not find anything but, +if you do, place a strong guard over the prisoners, with loaded +muskets, and orders to shoot any one of them who tries to +escape."</p> +<p>Walking by the side of the staff officer--for he had returned +the horse lent him by General Barnard--he accompanied him to a +house in the great square, where Lord Wellington had taken up his +quarters.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch19" id="Ch19">Chapter 19</a>: Gratitude.</h2> +<p>"Your regiment has been distinguishing itself again, Colonel +O'Connor, I have heard from three sources. First, General Barnard +reported to me that he, and the other officers, were wholly unable +to restrain the troops from their villainous work last night; until +he found you and your regiment drawn up in perfect order, and was +able, with it, to put an end to the disorder everywhere reigning. +In the second place, the Count de Montego and the Marquis de +Valoroso, two of the wealthiest nobles in the province, have called +upon me to return thanks for the inestimable service, as they +expressed it, rendered by Colonel O'Connor and his officers, in +defending their houses, and protecting the lives and honour of +their families, from the assaults of the soldiers. They said that +the defenders consisted entirely of officers. How was that?"</p> +<p>"I am sorry to say that my men were, at first, infected by the +general spirit of disorder. Left alone by ourselves, I thought that +we could not do anything better than save, from spoliation, two +fine mansions that happened to be at the spot where we had been +left. We had to stand a sharp siege for two or three hours; but we +abstained, as far as possible, from using our arms, and I think +that only two or three of the soldiers were wounded. However, we +should have had to use our pistols in earnest, in a short time, had +I not sent out several of my officers by the back entrance of the +house; and these were not long in finding, and persuading to return +to their duties, a couple of hundred men.</p> +<p>"As soon as we sallied out the affair was at an end, and the +soldiers fled. The officers were sent out again and when, an hour +later, General Barnard came up, we had some seventeen hundred in +readiness for action; and his arrival relieved me of the heavy +responsibility of deciding what course had better be adopted."</p> +<p>"Yes, he told me so, and I think that you acted very wisely in +holding your men back till he arrived; for nothing could have been +more unfortunate than a conflict in the streets between British and +Portuguese troops. There is no doubt that, had it not been for your +regiment, the disgraceful scenes of last night would have been very +much worse than they were. I should be glad if you will convey my +thanks to them."</p> +<p>"Thank you, sir; but I shall be obliged if you will allow me to +say that you regret to hear that a regiment, in which you placed +confidence, should have at first behaved so badly; but that they +had retrieved their conduct by their subsequent behaviour, and had +acted as you would have expected of them. I have been speaking very +severely to them, this morning; and I am afraid that the effect of +my words would be altogether lost, were I to report your +commendation of their conduct, without any expression of +blame."</p> +<p>Lord Wellington smiled.</p> +<p>"Do it as you like, Colonel O'Connor. However, your regiment +will be placed in orders, today, as an exception to the severe +censure passed upon the troops who entered the town last night. And +do you really think that they will behave better, another +time?"</p> +<p>"I am sure they will, sir. I threatened to have the three +hundred, who had not joined when General Barnard arrived, +transferred to another regiment; and it was only upon their solemn +promise, and by the whole of the officers guaranteeing their +conduct in the future, that I forgave them. Moreover, every article +taken in money, jewels, or dress has been given up; and I have sent +them to the syndic, the money for distribution among the sufferers, +the jewellery and other things to be reclaimed by those from whom +they were taken. Their kits were being examined thoroughly, when I +came away; but I think that I can say, with certainty, that no +single stolen article will be found in them."</p> +<p>"You have done very well, sir, very well, and your influence +with your men is surprising.</p> +<p>"Your regiment will be quartered in the convent of San Jose. +Other divisions will move in this afternoon, and take the place of +the 1st and 3rd brigades. Your regiment, therefore, may consider it +a high honour that they will be retained here.</p> +<p>"I daresay that it will not be long before I find work for you +to do again. Lord Somerset will give you an order, at once, to take +possession of the convent."</p> +<p>Terence returned to the regiment in high spirits. The work of +inspection was still going on. At its conclusion, Colonel Herrara +reported that no single article of plunder had been found.</p> +<p>"I am gratified that it is so, Herrara," he said; "now let the +regiment form up in hollow square, again.</p> +<p>"Men," he went on, "I have a message for you from Lord +Wellington;" and he repeated that which he had suggested. "Thus you +see, men, that the conduct of those who at once obeyed orders, and +returned to their ranks, has caused the misconduct of the others to +be forgiven; and Lord Wellington has still confidence that the +regiment will behave well, in future. The fact that all plunder has +been given up to be restored to its owners had, of course, some +effect in inducing him to believe this. I hope that every man will +take the lesson to heart, that the misdeeds of a few may bring +disgrace on a whole regiment; and that you will, in future, do +nothing to forfeit the name that the Minho regiment has gained, for +good conduct as well as for bravery."</p> +<p>A loud cheer broke from the regiment, who then marched to the +convent of San Jose, and took up its quarters there. Two hours +later, the two Spanish nobles called upon Terence. The Count de +Montego introduced his companion.</p> +<p>"We have only just heard where you were quartered," he went on. +"We have both been trying in vain, all the morning, to find you; +not a soldier of your regiment was to be seen in the streets and, +although we questioned many officers, none could say where you +were.</p> +<p>"You went off so suddenly, last night, that I had no opportunity +of expressing our gratitude to you and your officers."</p> +<p>"You said enough, and more than enough, last night, count," +Terence replied; "and we are all glad, indeed, that we were able to +protect both your houses. Lord Wellington informed me that you had +called upon him, and spoken highly of the service we had been able +to render you. Pray say no more about it. I can quite understand +what you feel, and I can assure you that no thanks are due to me, +for having done my duty as a British officer and a gentleman on so +lamentable and, I admit, disgraceful an occasion."</p> +<p>"My wife and daughters, and those of the Marquis of Valoroso, +are all most anxious to see you, and thank you and your officers. +They were too frightened and agitated, last night, to say aught +and, indeed, as they say, they scarcely noticed your features. Can +you bring your officers round now?"</p> +<p>"I am sorry to say I cannot do that, senor. They have to see +after the arrangements and comfort of the men, the getting of the +rations, the cooking, and so on. Tomorrow they will, I am sure, be +glad to pay you a visit."</p> +<p>"But you can come, can you not, colonel?"</p> +<p>"Yes, I am at liberty now, count, and shall be happy to pay my +respects to the senoras."</p> +<p>"The more I hear," the marquis said, as they walked along +together, "of the events of last night, the more deeply I feel the +service that you have rendered us. I am unable to understand how it +is that your soldiers should behave with such outrageous violence +to allies."</p> +<p>"It is very disgraceful, and greatly to be regretted, senor; but +I am bound to say that, as I have now gone through four campaigns, +and remember the conduct of the Spanish authorities to our troops +during our march to Talavera, our stay there, and on our retreat, I +am by no means surprised that among the soldiers, who are unable to +draw a distinction between the people and the authorities, there +should be a deep and lasting hatred. There is no such hatred for +the French.</p> +<p>"Our men fought the battle of Talavera when weak with hunger; +while the Spaniards, who engaged to supply them with provisions, +were feasting. Our men were neglected and starved in the hospitals, +and would have died to a man had not, happily for them, the French +arrived, and treated them with the greatest humanity and kindness. +Soldiers do not forget this sort of thing. They know that, for the +last three years, the promises of the Spanish authorities have +never once been kept, and that they have had to suffer greatly from +the want of transport and stores promised. We can, of course, +discriminate between the people at large and their authorities; but +the soldiers can make no such distinction and, deeply as I deplore +what has happened here, I must own that the soldiers have at least +some excuse for their conduct."</p> +<p>The two Spaniards were silent.</p> +<p>"I cannot gainsay your statement," the Count de Montego said. +"Indeed, no words can be too strong for the conduct of both the +central, and all the provincial juntas."</p> +<p>"Then, senor, how is it that the people do not rise and sweep +them away, and choose honest and resolute men in their place?"</p> +<p>"That is a difficult question to answer, colonel. It may be +said, why do not all people, when ill governed, destroy their +tyrants?"</p> +<p>"Possibly because, as a rule, the tyrants have armies at their +backs; but here such armies as there are, although nominally under +the orders of the juntas, are practically led by their own +generals, and would obey them rather than the juntas.</p> +<p>"However, that is a matter for the Spanish people alone. +Although we have suffered cruelly by the effects of your system, +please remember that I am not in the smallest degree defending the +conduct of our troops; but only trying to show that they had, at +least, some excuse for regarding the Spaniards as foes rather than +as allies; and that they had, as they considered, a long list of +wrongs to avenge."</p> +<p>"There is truth in all you say, colonel. Unfortunately, men like +ourselves, who are the natural leaders of the people, hold aloof +from these petty provincial struggles; and leave all the public +offices to be filled with greedy adventurers, and have been +accustomed to consider work of any kind beneath us. The country is +paying dearly for it, now. I trust, when the war is over, seeing +how the country has suffered by our abstention from politics, and +from the affairs of our provinces, we shall put ourselves forward +to aid in the regeneration of Spain."</p> +<p>By this time they had arrived at the door of the count's house. +The street had been to some extent cleared; but shattered doors, +broken windows, portions of costly furniture, and household +articles of all sorts still showed how terrible had been the +destruction of the previous night. Large numbers of the poorer +class were at work clearing the roads, as the city authorities had +been ordered, by Lord Wellington, to restore order in all the +thoroughfares.</p> +<p>The count led the way up to the drawing room. The countess and +her three daughters rose.</p> +<p>"I introduced our brave defender to you last night," the count +said, "but in the half-darkened room, and in the confusion and +alarm that prevailed, you could have had but so slight a view of +him that I doubt whether you would know him again."</p> +<p>"I should not, indeed," the countess said. "We have been +speaking of him ever since, but could not agree as to his +appearance.</p> +<p>"Oh, senor, no word can tell you how grateful we feel to you for +your defence of us, last night. What horrors we should have +suffered, had it not been for your interposition!"</p> +<p>"I am delighted to have been of service to you, senora. It was +my duty, and it was a very pleasurable one, I can assure you; and I +pray you to say no more about it."</p> +<p>"How is it that you speak Spanish so well, senor?" the countess +asked, after her daughters had shyly expressed their gratitude to +Terence.</p> +<p>"I owe it chiefly to a muleteer of Salamanca. I was a prisoner +there last year, and he accompanied me for a month, after I had +made my escape from the prison. Also, I owe much to the guerilla +chief Moras, with whom I acted for six weeks, last autumn. I had +learned a little of your language before and, speaking Portuguese +fluently, I naturally picked it up without any great +difficulty."</p> +<p>"Your name is not unknown to us, colonel," the count said. +"Living so close to the frontier as we do, we naturally know much +of what passes in Portugal; and heard you spoken of as a famous +leader of a strong Portuguese regiment, that seems to have been in +the thick of all the fighting. But we heard that you had been taken +prisoner by the French, at the battle of Fuentes d'Onoro."</p> +<p>"Yes, I had the misfortune to be captured by them, and was sent +to Salamanca; but I escaped by the aid of a girl who sold fruit in +the prison. A muleteer took me with him on a journey to Cadiz, and +thence I came round to Lisbon by ship."</p> +<p>"You seem very young to have seen so much service, if you will +excuse my saying so, colonel."</p> +<p>Terence smiled.</p> +<p>"I have had great luck, senor; extraordinary luck."</p> +<p>"Ah, colonel! We know how well you have deserved that luck, as +you call it; and you would never have been in command of such a +regiment if you had not done something very much out of the way to +attract the attention of your commanders."</p> +<p>"I was not appointed to the regiment. I raised it myself; that +is to say, I came upon a number of Portuguese who had been called +out for service, but who had neither leader nor arms. Being anxious +to fight for their country, they asked me to be their leader, and I +accepted the offer. I found them docile and obedient and, with the +aid of two British troopers with me, a Spanish officer, and twelve +of his troopers, I established something like order and discipline +and, as we were fortunate in our first affair with the enemy, they +had faith in me, and I was able to raise them to a point of +discipline which is, I think, now quite equal to that of our own +regiments. Seeing that I had made myself useful with my corps, I +was confirmed in my command, and obtained the rank of colonel in +the Portuguese service; and am now a major in our own."</p> +<p>"I hope, senor, that later on you will tell us the story of some +of your adventures. Be assured that the house and all in it are +yours, and that it is not for mere curiosity that we would hear +your story; but that, as we shall ever retain a grateful memory of +what you have done for us, everything relating to you is of deep +interest to us."</p> +<p>After chatting for another quarter of an hour, Terence went with +the Count de Montego to the house next door. Here he received an +equally warm welcome from the wife and son and daughter of the +marquis.</p> +<p>At both houses, he was warmly urged to take up his quarters +there during his stay at Ciudad; but explained that his place was +with his regiment. He promised that he would call frequently, when +his duties permitted him to do so.</p> +<p>The next day the two Spanish noblemen came to him and, after +parade was over, carried off the greater portion of the officers to +be also introduced to their families. From that time, three or four +of the officers were always invited to dinner at each house. +Terence and Ryan frequently spent their evenings there, and their +hosts introduced them to many of the leading people in the +town.</p> +<p>The Spanish general, Carlos d'Espagna, was appointed governor of +Ciudad. Papers having been discovered, showing that many of the +inhabitants had acted as French emissaries, these he executed +without mercy. So rigorous, however, were his measures that it was +felt that more than sufficient blood had been shed and, +accordingly, several British deserters found in the town were +pardoned. Many others of these men had fallen, fighting desperately +in the breach; believing that there was no hope of mercy being +extended to them, if taken prisoners.</p> +<p>In the siege the allies lost 1200 men and 90 officers; among +whom were Generals Crawford and MacKinnon, both killed, and General +Vandeleur, badly wounded. Lord Wellington was created Duke of +Ciudad Rodrigo by the Spaniards, and Earl of Wellington by the +English. The French loss was 300 killed and wounded, 1500 +prisoners, an immense store of ammunition, and 150 guns.</p> +<p>Thanks to the vigilance with which the Minho regiment had +guarded the line of the fords of the Yeltes, no news of the siege +was received by Marmont in time for him to interfere with it. The +bridge over the Aqueda had been thrown across on the 1st of +January, and the siege began on the 8th but, even on the 12th, +nothing was known at Salamanca of the advance of the British army; +and it was not until the 15th, three days after the town had +fallen, that news that the siege had begun reached Marmont at +Valladolid. He had ordered his army to concentrate on Salamanca, +but it was not until the 25th that 35,000 men were collected there +and, on the following day, the news arrived of the fall of +Ciudad.</p> +<p>In the meantime large numbers of labourers were being employed +in repairing and strengthening the fortifications of that town, +while Wellington laboured in making preparations for the siege of +Badajoz. These, however, progressed but slowly, owing to the +refusal of the Portuguese government to supply transport for the +guns; or to furnish any facilities, whatever, for the supply of +food for the army. Wellington maintained his headquarters on the +Coa until the first week in March, and then moved south with the +greater part of the army; Ciudad being left entirely in the hands +of the Spaniards, the general supplying the governor with +provisions and stores, and explaining to him the object and +intention of the new works.</p> +<p>A very strong force was left to guard the frontier of Portugal +from an invasion by Marmont; 50,000 men, of whom 20,000 were +Portuguese, being scattered along the line and guarding all the +passes--the Minho regiment being ordered to take post, again, at +Pinhel.</p> +<p>Terence left Ciudad with reluctance. He had all along been +treated as a dear friend, in the houses of the two Spanish +noblemen, and spent most of his evenings at one or other of them. +He had been obliged to tell, in full detail, all his adventures +since he joined the army. The rescue of his cousin from the convent +at Oporto had particularly excited the interest of the ladies, who +asked innumerable questions about her.</p> +<p>Ryan frequently accompanied him, but his very slight knowledge +of Spanish prevented him from feeling the same pleasure at the +familiar intercourse. Bull and Macwitty were absolutely ignorant of +the language and, although Herrara now and then accepted +invitations to dinner, Terence and Ryan were the only two officers +of the regiment who felt at home among the Spaniards.</p> +<p>Before the regiment marched off, each of the Portuguese officers +was presented with a handsome gold watch bearing an inscription +expressing the gratitude of the two Spanish noblemen, and their +families. Bull, Macwitty, and Herrara received, in addition, heavy +gold chains. Ryan received a splendid horse, with saddle, holsters, +and a brace of finely-finished pistols; and a similar present was +made to Terence.</p> +<p>On the day when he went to say goodbye, he found the ladies of +both families assembled at the Count de Montego's. His host +said:</p> +<p>"You must consider the horses and equipment as a special present +from myself and the marquis, Colonel O'Connor; but the ladies of +our two families wish to give you a little memorial of their +gratitude."</p> +<p>"They are memorials only," his wife said, "and are feeble +testimonies, indeed, of what we feel. These are the joint presents +of the marquise and her daughter, and of myself and my girls," and +she gave him a small case containing a superb diamond ring, of +great value; and then a large case containing a magnificent parure +of diamonds and emeralds.</p> +<p>"This, senor, is for your future wife. She will value it, I am +sure, not so much for what it may be worth; but as a testimony of +the gratitude, of six Spanish ladies, for the inestimable services +that you rendered them. Perhaps they will have a special value in +her eyes, inasmuch as the stones all formed a small part of the +jewels of the two families that you saved from plunder. We have, of +course, had them reset; and there was no difficulty in getting this +done, for at present ours are, I believe, the only jewels in +Ciudad."</p> +<p>"My dear countess," Terence said, much moved, "I do not like +taking so valuable a present."</p> +<p>"What is it, in comparison to what you have done for us, senor? +And please do not suppose that we have seriously diminished our +store. Nowhere, I believe, have ladies such jewels as they have in +Spain; and few families can boast of finer ones than those of the +marquise and myself. And I can assure you that we shall value our +jewels all the more, when we think that some of their companions +will be worn by the wife of the gentleman who has preserved more +than our lives."</p> +<p>"That is a royal gift, indeed," Herrara said, when Terence +showed him the jewels. "I should be afraid to say what they are +worth. Many of the old Spanish families possess marvellous jewels, +relics of the day when the Spaniards owned the wealth of the Indies +and the spoils of half Europe; and I should imagine that these must +have been among the finest stones in the possession of both +families. If I were you, colonel, I should take the very first +opportunity that occurs of sending them to England."</p> +<p>"You may be sure that I shall do so, Herrara. They are not the +sort of things to be carried about in a cavalry wallet, and I have +no other place to stow them. As soon as we arrive at Pinhel, I will +get a strong box made to hold the two cases, and hand them over to +the paymaster there, to be sent down to Lisbon by the next convoy. +He sent home all the money that I did not want to keep by me, when +we were at Pinhel last."</p> +<p>Two other Portuguese regiments, and a brigade of British +infantry, were stationed at Pinhel in readiness, at any moment, to +march to Almeida or Guarda, should Marmont make a forward movement; +which was probable enough, for it was evident, by the concentration +of his troops at Salamanca and Valladolid, that he had no intention +of marching south; but intended to leave it to Soult, with the +armies of Estremadura, Castile, and Andalusia, to relieve +Badajoz.</p> +<p>From time to time, news came from that town. The siege had begun +on the 17th of March, the attack being made on a fortified hill +called the Picurina; but at first the progress was slow. Incessant +rain fell, the ground became a swamp, and all operations had, +several times, to be suspended; while Phillipon, the brave officer +who commanded the garrison, made numerous sorties from the town, +with more or less success.</p> +<p>On the night of the 25th, an assault was made on the strong fort +on the Picurina; which was captured after desperate fighting, and +the loss of 19 officers and 300 men, killed and wounded. On the +following day the trenches were opened for the attack upon the town +itself. The assailants laboured night and day and, on the 6th, a +breach had been effected in the work called the Trinidad; and this +was to be attacked by the 4th and light divisions. The castle was +at the same time to be assailed by Picton's division, while General +Power's Portuguese were to make a feint on the other side of the +Guadiana, and San Roque was to be stormed by the forces employed in +the trenches.</p> +<p>The enterprise was well-nigh desperate. The breaches had not +been sufficiently cleared, and it was known that the enemy had +thrown up strong intrenchments behind them. Most of the guns were +still in position to sweep the breaches, and another week, at +least, should have been occupied in preparing the way for an +assault. But Wellington was forced here, as at Ciudad, to fight +against time. Soult was close at hand, and the British had not +sufficient force to give him battle, and at the same time to +continue the siege of the town; and it was therefore necessary +either to carry the place at once, at whatever cost of life, or to +abandon the fruits of all the efforts that had been made.</p> +<p>Had Wellington's instructions been carried out, there would have +been no occasion, whatever, for the assault to have been delivered +until the breaches were greatly extended, the intrenchments +destroyed, and the guns silenced. The Portuguese ministry, however, +had thwarted him at every turn; and the siege could not be +commenced until a fortnight after the date fixed by Wellington. +This fortnight's delay cost the lives of 4000 British soldiers.</p> +<p>Four of the assaults on the breaches failed. On the crest of +these Phillipon had erected a massive stockade, thickly bristling +with sabre blades. On the upper part of the breach, planks, +similarly studded, had been laid; while on either side a vast +number of shells, barrels of powder, faggots soaked in oil, and +other missiles and combustibles were piled, in readiness for +hurling down on the assailants; while the soldiers behind the +defences had been supplied with four muskets each.</p> +<p>Never did British soldiers fight with such dogged bravery as was +here evinced. Again and again they dashed up the breach, the centre +of a volcano of fire; shells burst among them, cannon poured +volleys of grape through their ranks, the French plied them with +musketry, fireballs lit up the scene as if by day, mines exploded +under their feet; yet again and again, they reached the terrible +breastwork. But all efforts to climb it were fruitless. Numbers of +those in front were pressed to death against the sabres, by the +eager efforts of those behind to get up and, for hours, the assault +continued. At last, seeing the impossibility of success, and +scorning to retreat, the men gathered at the foot of the breach, +and there endured, sternly and silently, the murderous fire that +was maintained by the enemy.</p> +<p>Picton, however, had gained possession of the castle. Walker, +with his command, had captured the bastion of San Vincenti; and +part of his command fought their way along the battlement towards +the breaches, while another marched through the town. Finding that +the town had been entered at several points, the defenders of the +breach gave way, and the soldiers poured into the town.</p> +<p>Here even more hideous scenes of murder and rapine were +perpetrated than at Ciudad Rodrigo, and went on for two days and +nights, absolutely unchecked. It has never been satisfactorily +explained why, after the events in the former town, no precautions +were taken, by the general commanding, to prevent the recurrence of +scenes that brought disgrace on the British army, and for which he +cannot be held blameless. Five thousand men and officers were +killed or wounded in the siege; of these, three thousand five +hundred fell in the assault.</p> +<p>The next three months passed without any action of importance. +The discipline of the army had, as might have been expected, +deteriorated greatly as a consequence of the unbridled license +permitted to the soldiers after the capture of the two fortresses, +and the absence of any punishment, whatever, for the excesses there +committed. Lord Wellington complained bitterly, in his letters +home, of the insubordination of the troops; of the outrages +committed upon the peasantry, especially by detached parties; and +of the general disobedience of orders. But he who had permitted the +license and excesses to be carried on, unchecked and unpunished, +cannot but be considered largely responsible for the natural +consequences of such laxity.</p> +<p>In May, heavy rains prevented any movement on either side; +except that the town of Almaraz, a most important position at the +bridge across the Tagus, permitting Soult and Marmont to join +hands, was captured by surprise by General Hill; the works, which +had been considered almost impregnable, being carried by assault in +the course of an hour. This was one of the most brilliant exploits +of the war.</p> +<p>Wellington had moved north, and was again on the Aqueda and, on +the 13th of June, rain having ceased, he crossed the river and, on +the 16th, arrived within six miles of Salamanca, and drove a French +division across the Tormes. On the 17th the river was crossed, both +above and below the town, and the forts defending it were at once +invested. Marmont had, that day, retired with two divisions of +infantry and some cavalry; and was followed immediately by a strong +British division.</p> +<p>The Minho regiment had been one of the first to take post on the +Aqueda, after Wellington's arrival on the Coa; and moved forward in +advance of the army, which was composed of 24,000 British troops, +with a Spanish division and several Portuguese regiments.</p> +<p>As soon as Marmont had retired, Salamanca went wild with joy; +although the circle of forts still prevented the British from +entering. The chief of these was San Vincenti, which stood on a +perpendicular cliff, overhanging the Tormes. It was flanked by two +other strong forts; from which, however, it was divided by a +ravine. The battering train brought with the army was altogether +inadequate--only four eighteen-pounders and three twenty-four-pound +howitzers were available--and the forts were far stronger than +Wellington had been led to expect.</p> +<p>A few guns had been sent forward by General Hill and, on the +18th, seven pieces opened fire on San Vincenti. The next day some +more howitzers arrived, and a breach was made in the wall of the +convent; but the ammunition was exhausted, and the fire ceased +until more could be brought up.</p> +<p>That day, however, Marmont, with a force of 20,000 men, was seen +advancing to the relief of the forts. The British army at once +withdrew from the neighbourhood of the convent, and took up its +position, in order of battle, on the heights of San Christoval.</p> +<p>On the 21st, three divisions of infantry and a brigade of +cavalry joined Marmont, raising his force to 40,000 men. The +French, the next night, sent a portion of their force across the +Tormes and, when daylight broke, the German cavalry, which had been +placed to guard the ford, was seen retiring before 12,000 French +infantry, with twenty guns. Graham was also sent across the Tormes +with his division, which was of about the same strength as the +French force and, as the light division was also following, the +French retired, recrossed the ford, and rejoined the main body of +their army.</p> +<p>The next night the batteries again opened fire on San Vincenti +and, on the 27th, the fort and convent were in a blaze. One of the +other forts was breached, and both surrendered, just as the +storming parties were advancing to the assault; and Marmont +retreated the same night across the Douro, by the roads to +Tordesillas and Toro.</p> +<p>As soon as it was possible to enter Salamanca, Terence rode down +into the town, accompanied by Ryan. The forts had not yet +surrendered, but their hands were so full that they had no time to +devote to annoying small parties of British officers passing into +the town. Terence had noted down the address that Nita had given +him, and at once rode there; after having, with some difficulty, +discovered the lane in which the house was situated. An old man +came to the door. Terence dismounted.</p> +<p>"What can I do for you, senor?"</p> +<p>"I wanted to ask you if your niece, Nita, is still staying with +you?"</p> +<p>The man looked greatly surprised at the question.</p> +<p>"She has done no harm, I hope?" he asked.</p> +<p>"Not at all, but I wish to speak to her. Is she married yet to +Garcia, the muleteer?"</p> +<p>The old man looked still more surprised.</p> +<p>"No, senor. Garcia is away, he is no longer a muleteer."</p> +<p>"Well, you have not answered me if your niece is here."</p> +<p>"She is here, senor, but she is not in the house at this moment. +She returned here from her father's, last autumn. The country was +so disturbed that it was not right that young women should remain +in the villages."</p> +<p>"Will you tell her that a British officer will call to see her, +in half an hour, and beg her to remain in until I come?"</p> +<p>"I will tell her, senor."</p> +<p>Terence went at once to a silversmith's, and bought the +handsomest set of silver jewelry, such as the peasants wore, that +he had in his shop; including bracelets, necklaces, large filigree +hairpin and earrings, and various other ornaments.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch20" id="Ch20">Chapter 20</a>: Salamanca.</h2> +<p>"She is a lucky girl, Terence," Ryan said, as they quitted the +shop. "She will be the envy of all the peasant girls in the +neighbourhood, when she goes to church in all that finery, to be +married to her muleteer."</p> +<p>"It has only cost about twenty pounds, and I value my freedom at +a very much higher price than that, Dick. If I had not escaped, I +should not have been in that affair with Moras that got me my +promotion and, at the present time, should be in some prison in +France."</p> +<p>"You would not have got your majority, I grant, Terence; but +wherever they shut you up, it is morally certain that you would +have been out of it, long before this. I don't think anything less +than being chained hand and foot, and kept in an underground +dungeon, would suffice to hold you."</p> +<p>"I hope that I shall never have to try that experiment, Dicky," +Terence laughed; "and now, I think you had better go into this +hotel, and order lunch for us both. It is just as well not to +attract attention, by two of us riding to that lane. We have not +done with Marmont, yet, and it may be that the French will be +masters of Salamanca again, before long, and it is just as well not +to get the old man or the girl talked about. I will leave my horse +here, too. See that both of them get a good feed; they have not had +overmuch since we crossed the Aqueda."</p> +<p>As there were a good many British officers in the town, no +special attention was given to Terence as he walked along through +the street, which was gay with flags. When he reached the house in +the lane, the old man was standing at the door.</p> +<p>"Nita is in now, senor. She has not told me why you wanted to +see her. She said it was better that she should not do so, but she +thought she knew who it was."</p> +<p>The girl clapped her hands, as he entered the room to which the +old man pointed.</p> +<p>"Then it is you, Senor Colonello. I wondered, when we heard the +English were coming, if you would be with them. Of course, I heard +from Garcia that you had gone safely on board a ship at Cadiz. Then +I wondered whether, if you did come here, you would remember +me."</p> +<p>"Then that was very bad of you, Nita. You ought to have been +quite sure that I should remember you. If I had not done so, I +should have been an ungrateful rascal, and should have deserved to +die in the next French prison I got into."</p> +<p>"How well you speak Spanish now, senor!"</p> +<p>"Yes; that was principally due to Garcia, but partly from having +been in Spain for six weeks, last autumn. I was with Moras, and we +gave the French a regular scare."</p> +<p>"Then it was you, senor! We heard that an English officer was in +command of the troops who cut all the roads, and took numbers of +French prisoners, and defeated 5000 of their troops and, as they +said, nearly captured Valladolid and Burgos."</p> +<p>"That was an exaggeration, Nita. Still, we managed to do them a +good deal of damage, and kept the French in this part of the +country pretty busy.</p> +<p>"And now, Nita, I have come to fulfil my promise," and he handed +her the box in which the jeweller had packed up his purchases.</p> +<p>"These are for your wedding, Nita, and if it comes off while we +are in this part of the country, I shall come and dance at it."</p> +<p>The girl uttered cries of delight, as she opened parcel after +parcel.</p> +<p>"Oh, senor, it is too much, too much altogether!" she cried, as +she laid them all out on the table before her.</p> +<p>"Not a bit of it," Terence said. "But for you, I should be in +prison now. If they had been ten times as many, and ten times as +costly, I should still have felt your debtor, all my life.</p> +<p>"And where is Garcia now?"</p> +<p>"He has gone to join Morillo," she said. "He always said that, +as soon as the English came to our help, he should go out; so, six +weeks ago, he sold all his mules and bought a gun, and went +off."</p> +<p>"I am sorry not to have seen him," Terence said. "And now, Nita, +when he returns you are to give him this little box. It contains a +present to help you both to start housekeeping, in good style. You +see that I have put your name and his both on it. No one can say +what may happen in war. Remember that this is your joint property; +and if, by ill fortune, he should not come back again, then it +becomes yours."</p> +<p>"Oh, senor, you are altogether too good! Oh, I am a lucky girl! +I am sure that no maid ever went to church before with such +splendid ornaments. How envious all the girls will be of me!"</p> +<p>"And I expect the men will be equally envious of Garcia, Nita. +Now, if you will take my advice, you will not show these things to +anyone at present; but will hide them in the box, in some very safe +place, until you are quite sure that the French will never come +back again. If your neighbours saw them, some ill-natured person +might tell the French that you had received them from an English +officer, and then it might be supposed that you had been acting as +a spy for us; so it is better that you should tell no one, not even +your uncle--that is, if you have not already mentioned it to +him."</p> +<p>"I have never told him," the girl said. "He is a good man and +very kind; but he is very timid, and afraid of getting into +trouble. If he asks me who you are and what you wanted, I shall +tell him that you are an English officer who was in prison, in the +convent; that you always bought your fruit of me, and said, if you +ever came to Salamanca again, you would find me out."</p> +<p>"That will do very well. Now I will say goodbye, Nita. If we +remain here after the French have retreated, I will come and see +you again; for there will be so many English officers here that I +would not be noticed. But there may be a battle any day; or Marmont +may fall back, and we should follow him; so that I may not get an +opportunity again."</p> +<p>"I hope you will come, I do hope you will come! I will bury all +these things, this evening, in the ground in the kitchen, after my +uncle has gone to bed."</p> +<p>"Well, goodbye, Nita. I must be off now, as I have a friend with +me. When you see Garcia, you can tell him that you have given me a +kiss. I am sure he won't mind."</p> +<p>"I should not care if he did," the girl said saucily, as she +held up her face. "Goodbye, senor. I shall always think of you, and +pray the Virgin to watch over you."</p> +<p>After Marmont fell back across the Douro there was a pause in +the operations and, as the British army was quartered in and around +Salamanca, the city soon swarmed with British soldiers; and +presented a scene exactly similar to that which it had worn when +occupied by Moore's army, nearly four years before.</p> +<p>"What fun it was, Terence," Ryan said, "when we frightened the +place out of its very senses, by the report that the French were +entering the town!"</p> +<p>"That is all very well, Dick; but I think that you and I were +just as much frightened as the Spaniards were, when we saw how the +thing had succeeded, and that all our troops were called out. There +is no saying what they would have done to us, had they found out +who started the report. The very least thing that would have +happened would have been to be tried by court martial, and +dismissed from the service; and I am by no means sure that worse +than that would not have befallen us."</p> +<p>"Yes, it would have been an awful business, if we had been found +out. Still, it was a game, wasn't it? What an awful funk they were +in! It was the funniest thing I ever saw. Things have changed since +then, Terence, and I am afraid we have quite done with jokes of +that sort."</p> +<p>"I should hope so, Dick. I think that I can answer for myself, +but I am by no means sure as to you."</p> +<p>"I like that," Ryan said indignantly. "You were always the +leader in mischief. I believe you would be, now, if you had the +chance."</p> +<p>"I don't know," Terence replied, a little more seriously than he +had before spoken. "I have been through a wonderful number of +adventures, since then; and I don't pretend that I have not enjoyed +them in something of the same spirit in which we enjoyed the fun we +used to have together; but you see, I have had an immense deal of +responsibility. I have two thousand men under me and, though Bull +and Macwitty are good men, so far as the carrying out of an order +goes, they are still too much troopers, seldom make a suggestion, +and never really discuss any plan I suggest; so that the +responsibility of the lives of all these men really rests entirely +upon my shoulders. It has been only when I have been separated from +them, as when I was a prisoner, that I have been able to enjoy an +adventure in the same sort of way that we used to do, +together."</p> +<p>"I little thought then, Terence, that in three years and a half, +for that is about what it is, I should be a captain and you a +major--for I don't count your Portuguese rank one, way or the +other."</p> +<p>"Of course, you have had two more years' regimental work than I +have had. It would have been much better for me if I had had a +longer spell of it, too. Of course, I have been extraordinarily +fortunate, and it has been very jolly; but I am sure it would have +been better for me to have had more experience as a subaltern, +before all this began."</p> +<p>"Well, I cannot say I see it, Terence. At any rate, you have had +a lot more regimental work than most officers; for you had to form +your regiment, teach them discipline, and everything else; and I +don't think that you would have done it so well, if you had been +ground down into the regular regimental pattern, and had come to +think that powder and pipe clay were actual indispensables in +turning out soldiers."</p> +<p>The quiet time at Salamanca lasted a little over a fortnight +for, in the beginning of July, Lord Wellington heard that, in +obedience to King Joseph's reiterated orders, Marmont, having +received reinforcements, was preparing to recross the Douro; that +Soult was on the point of advancing into Portugal; and that the +king himself, with a large army, was on the way to join +Marmont.</p> +<p>The latter, indeed, was not to have moved till the king joined +him but, believing that his own army was ample for the purpose; and +eager to gain a victory, unhampered by the king's presence, he +suddenly crossed at Tordesillas, and it was only by his masterly +movements, and a sharp fight at Castile, that Wellington succeeded +in concentrating his army on the Aqueda. The British general drew +up his army in order of battle, on the heights of Vallesa; but the +position was a strong one, Marmont knew the country perfectly and, +instead of advancing to the attack, he started at daybreak on the +20th, marched rapidly up the river, and crossed it before any +opposition could be offered, and then marched for the Tormes. By +this movement he had turned Wellington's right flank, was as near +Salamanca as were the British, and had it in his power, unless +checked, to place himself on the road between Salamanca and Ciudad, +and so to cut their line of retreat.</p> +<p>Seeing his position thus turned, Wellington made a corresponding +movement, and the two armies marched along lines of hills parallel +with each other, the guns on both sides occasionally firing. All +day long they were but a short distance apart and, at any moment, +the battle might have been brought on. But Wellington had no +opportunity for fighting, except at a disadvantage; and Marmont, +having gained the object for which he had manoeuvred, was well +content to maintain his advantage. At nightfall the British were on +the heights of Cabeca and Aldea Rubia, and so secured their former +position at San Christoval.</p> +<p>Marmont, however, had reached a point that gave him the command +of the ford at Huerta; and had it in his power to cross the Tormes +when he pleased, and either to recross at Salamanca, or to cut the +road to Ciudad. He had proved, too, that his army could outmarch +the British for, although they had already made a march of some +distance, when the race began, he had gained ground throughout the +day, in spite of the efforts of the British to keep abreast of him. +Moreover, Marmont now had his junction with the king's army, +approaching from Madrid, securely established; and could either +wait for his arrival, or give battle if he saw a favourable +opportunity.</p> +<p>Wellington's position was grave. He had not only to consider his +adversary's force, but the whole course of the war, which a +disaster would imperil. He had the safety of the whole Peninsula to +consider, and a defeat would not only entail the loss of the +advantage he had gained in Spain, but would probably decide the +fate of Portugal, also. He determined, however, to cover Salamanca +till the last moment, in hopes that Marmont might make some error +that would afford him an opportunity of dealing a heavy blow.</p> +<p>The next morning the allies occupied their old position at San +Christoval, while the French took possession of Alba; whence the +Spaniards had been withdrawn, without notice, to Wellington. The +evening before, the British general had sent a despatch to the +Spanish commander, saying that he feared that he should be unable +to hold his position. The messenger was captured by the French +cavalry; and Marmont, believing that Wellington was about to +retreat, and fearing that he might escape him, determined to fight +rather than wait for the arrival of the king.</p> +<p>The French crossed the Tormes by the fords of Huerta and Alba, +the British by other fords above Salamanca. This movement was +performed while a terrible storm raged. Many men and horses of the +5th Dragoon Guards were killed by the lightning; while hundreds of +the picketed horses broke their ropes, and galloped wildly +about.</p> +<a id="Map5" name="Map5"></a> +<center><img src="images/5.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Plan of the Forts and Operations round Salamanca." /> +</center> +<p>The position of the British army in the morning was very similar +to that occupied by a portion of it, when besieging the forts of +Salamanca; extending from the ford of Santa Marta to the heights +near the village of Arapiles. This line covered Salamanca; but it +was open to Marmont to march round Wellington's right, and so cut +his communications with Ciudad. During the night, Wellington heard +that the French would be joined, in the course of two days, by +twenty guns and 2000 cavalry; and resolved to retire before these +came up, unless Marmont afforded him some opportunity of fighting +to advantage.</p> +<p>The latter, however, was too confident of victory to wait for +the arrival of this reinforcement, still less for that of the king +and, at daybreak, he took possession of a village close to the +British, thereby showing that he was resolved to force on a +battle.</p> +<p>Near this were two detached hills, called the Arapiles or +Hermanitos. They were steep and rugged. As the French were seen +approaching, a Portuguese regiment was sent to seize them; and +these gained the one nearest to them, while the French took +possession of the second. The 7th division assailed the height +first, and gained and captured half of it.</p> +<p>Had Wellington now wished to retire, it would have been at once +difficult and dangerous to attempt the movement. His line was a +long one, and it would have been impossible to withdraw, without +running the risk of being attacked while in movement, and driven +back upon the Tormes. Ignorant of Marmont's precise intentions--for +the main body of the French army was almost hidden in the +woods--Wellington could only wait until their plans were developed. +He therefore contented himself with placing the 4th division on a +slope behind the village of Arapiles, which was held by the light +companies of the Guards. The 5th and 6th divisions were massed +behind the hill, where a deep depression hid them from the sight of +the enemy.</p> +<p>For some time things remained quiet, except that the French and +British batteries, on the top of the two Hermanitos, kept up a duel +with each other. During the pause, the French cavalry had again +crossed the Tormes, by one of the fords used in the night by the +British; and had taken post at Aldea Tejarda, thus placing +themselves between the British army and the road to Ciudad. This +movement, however, had been covered by the woods.</p> +<p>About twelve o'clock, fearing that Wellington would assail the +Hermanito held by him, Marmont brought up two divisions to that +point; and stood ready to oppose an attack which Wellington, +indeed, had been preparing--but had abandoned the idea, fearing +that such a movement would draw the whole army into a battle, on a +disadvantageous line. The French marshal, however, fearing that +Wellington would retreat by the Ciudad road, before he could place +a sufficient force on that line to oppose the movement, sent +General Maucune with two divisions, covered by fifty guns and +supported by cavalry, to move along the southern ridge of the basin +and menace that road; holding in hand six divisions, in readiness +to fall upon the village of Arapiles, should the British interfere +with Maucune's movement.</p> +<p>The British line had now pivoted round, until its position +extended from the Hermanito to near Aldea Tejarda.</p> +<p>In order to occupy the attention of the British, and prevent +them from moving, the French force attacked the village of +Arapiles, and a fierce struggle took place. Had Marmont waited +until Clausel's division, still behind, came up and occupied the +ridge, so as to connect the French main army with Maucune's +division, their position would have been unassailable; but the fear +that Wellington might escape had overcome his prudence and, as +Maucune advanced, a great gap was left between his division and +that of Marmont.</p> +<p>As soon as Wellington perceived the mistake, he saw that his +opportunity had come. Orders were despatched in all directions and, +suddenly, the two divisions, hidden from the sight of the French +behind the Hermanito, dashed down into the valley; where two other +divisions joined them. The 4th and 5th were in front, with +Bradford's Portuguese; and the 6th and 7th formed the second line; +while the Spanish troops marched between them and the 3rd division, +forming the extreme right at Aldea Tejarda. The light divisions of +Pack's Portuguese and the heavy cavalry remained in reserve, on +high ground behind them. In spite of a storm of bullets from +Maucune's guns, the leading divisions marched steadily forward and, +while the third division dashed across the valley and, climbing the +ridge, barred his progress, the main line advanced to attack his +flank.</p> +<p>Marmont, seeing the terrible danger in which Maucune was +involved, sent officer after officer to hasten up the troops from +the forest and, with his centre, prepared to attack the English +Hermanito, and to drive them from that portion of the village they +still held; but as he was hurrying to join Maucune a shell exploded +near him, hurling him to the ground with a broken arm, and two deep +wounds in his side. This misfortune was fatal to the French +chances. Confusion ensued, and the movements of the troops were +paralyzed.</p> +<p>It was about five o'clock when the 3rd division, under Pakenham, +fell upon Maucune's leading division; and two batteries of +artillery suddenly opened fire, on their flank, from the opposite +height. Having no expectation of such a stroke; and believing that +the British were, ere this, in full retreat along the Ciudad road, +the French were hurrying forward, lengthening out into a long, +straggling line.</p> +<p>The onslaught of Pakenham's division was irresistible, supported +as it was by guns and cavalry. Nevertheless, the French bore +themselves gallantly, forming line as they marched forward, while +their guns poured showers of grape into the approaching infantry. +Nothing, however, could stop them. Pressing forward, they broke the +half-formed lines into fragments, and drove them back in confusion +upon the columns behind. The French cavalry endeavoured to check +the British advance, by a charge on their flank; but were repulsed +by the infantry, and the British light horsemen charged, and drove +them off the field.</p> +<p>Pushing forward, Pakenham came upon the second half of the +division they had defeated, formed up on the wooded heights; one +face being opposed to him, and the other to the 5th division, +Bradford's Portuguese, and a mass of cavalry moving across the +basin. The French had been already driven out of Arapiles, and were +engaged in action with the 4th division; but the battle was to some +extent retrieved, for Clausel's division had arrived from the +forest and reinforced Maucune; and spread across the basin, joining +hands with the divisions massed near the French Hermanito.</p> +<p>Marmont had been carried off the field. Bonnet, who had +succeeded him, was disabled; and the chief command devolved on +Clausel, a general of talent, possessing great coolness and +presence of mind. His dispositions were excellent, but his troops +were broken up into lines, columns, and squares. A strong wind +raised the sandy soil in clouds of dust, the sinking sun shone full +in the faces of his troops and, at once, concealed the movements of +their enemies from them, and prevented them from acting with any +unity.</p> +<p>Suddenly, two heavy bodies of light and heavy cavalry broke from +the cloud of dust and fell upon them. Twelve hundred Frenchmen were +trampled down and, as the cavalry rode on, the third division ran +forward, at the double, through the gap that they had formed. Line +after line of the French infantry was broken and scattered, and +five of their guns captured by one of the squadrons. Two thousand +prisoners were taken, and the three divisions that Maucune had +commanded were a mass of fugitives.</p> +<p>In the meantime, a terrible battle was raging in the centre. +Here Clausel had gathered three fresh divisions and, behind these, +the fugitives from the left rallied. He placed three others, +supported by the whole of the cavalry, to cover the retreat; while +yet another remained behind the French Hermanito. Pack's Portuguese +were advancing against it, and arrived nearly at the summit, when +the French reserves leapt from the rocks and opened a tremendous +fire on their front and left flank; and the Portuguese were driven +down the hill, with much loss. Almost at the same moment, one of +the regiments of the 4th division were suddenly charged by 1200 +French soldiers, hidden behind a declivity, and driven back with +heavy loss.</p> +<p>For a moment, it seemed that the fate of the battle might yet be +changed; but Wellington had the strongest reserve, the sixth +division was brought up and, though the French fought obstinately, +Clausel was obliged to abandon the Hermanito; and the army began to +fall back, the movement being covered by their guns and the gallant +charges of their cavalry.</p> +<p>The whole of the British reserves were now brought into action, +and hotly pressed them; but, for the most part maintaining their +order, the French fell back into the woods and, favoured by the +darkness, and nobly covered by Maucune, who had been strongly +reinforced, they drew off with comparatively little loss, thanks to +the Spaniards' abandonment of the fort guarding the ford at +Alba.</p> +<p>Believing that the French must make for the ford of Huerta, +Wellington had greatly strengthened his force on that side and, +after a long march to the ford, was bitterly disappointed, on +arriving there at midnight, to find that there was no sign of the +enemy; although it was not until morning that he learned that they +had passed unmolested over the ford of Alba. Had it not been for +the Spanish disobedience and folly, Marmont's whole army would have +had no resource but to surrender.</p> +<p>Marmont's strength when the fight began was 42,000 infantry and +cavalry, and 74 guns. Wellington had 46,000 infantry and cavalry, +and 60 pieces; but this included a considerable Spanish force and +one of their batteries, and 10,000 Portuguese who, however, could +not be reckoned as good troops. The pursuit of the French was taken +up hotly next morning, and they were chased for forty miles that +day but, the next morning, they eluded their pursuers, marched to +Valladolid, drew off the garrison there, and left it to be occupied +by the British the following day.</p> +<p>The Minho regiment had been, two days before the battle, +attached to the 6th division. For a time, being in the second line, +they looked on, impatient spectators of the fight; but, at the +crisis of the battle, they were brought up to check Clausel's +impetuous counter attack, and nowhere was the struggle fiercer. +Hulse's brigade, to which they were attached, bore more than its +share of the fighting; and the 11th and the 61st, together, had but +160 men and officers left when the battle was over. The Portuguese +fought valiantly, and the fact that their countrymen had been +defeated, in their attempt to capture the French Hermanito, +inspired them with a fierce determination to show that Portuguese +troops could fight as well as their allies. They pushed forward +well abreast of the other regiments of the brigade, and suffered +equally.</p> +<p>In vain the French attempted to check their advance. Showers of +grape swept their ranks; volleys of musketry, at a distance of but +a few yards, withered up their front lines and, for a time, a +hand-to-hand fight with bayonets raged. In the terrible roar of +artillery and musketry, words of command were unheard; but the men +mechanically filled up the gaps in their ranks, and the one thought +of all was to press forward until, at length, the French yielded +and fell sullenly back, disputing every yard of the ground, and a +fresh division took up the pursuit.</p> +<p>The order to halt was given. The men looked round, confused and +dazed, as if waking from a dream. Grimed with powder, soaked with +perspiration, breathless and haggard, many seemed scarcely able to +keep their feet; and every limb trembled at the sudden cessation of +the terrible strain. Then, as they looked round their ranks and to +the ground they had passed over, now so thickly dotted with the +dark uniforms, hoarse sobs broke from them; and men who had gone +unflinchingly through the terrible struggle burst into tears. The +regiment had gone into action over 2000 strong. Scarce 1200 +remained unwounded. Of the officers, Bull had fallen, desperately +wounded; Macwitty had been shot through the head.</p> +<a id="PicJ" name="PicJ"></a> +<center><img src="images/j.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: A shell had struck Terence's horse." /></center> +<p>A shell had struck Terence's horse and, bursting, had carried +off the rider's leg above the knee. The men near him uttered a +simultaneous cry as he fell and, regardless of the fight, oblivious +to the storm of shot and shell, had knelt beside him. Terence was +perfectly sensible.</p> +<p>"Do one of you give me my flask out of my holster," he said, +"and another cut off the leg of my trousers, as high as you can +above the wound. That is right. Now for the bandages."</p> +<p>As every soldier in the regiment carried one in his hat, half a +dozen of these were at once produced.</p> +<p>"Is it bleeding much?" he asked.</p> +<p>"Not much, colonel."</p> +<p>"That is fortunate. Now find a smooth round stone. Lay it on the +inside of the leg, just below where you have cut the trousers.</p> +<p>"Now put a bandage round and round, as tightly as you can do it. +That is right.</p> +<p>"Now take the ramrod of one of my pistols, put it through the +bandage, and then twist it. You need not be afraid of hurting me; +my leg is quite numbed, at present. That is right.</p> +<p>"Put another bandage on, so as to hold the ramrod in its place. +Now fetch a flannel shirt from my valise, fold it up so as to make +a pad that will go over the wound, and bandage it there firmly.</p> +<p>"Give me another drink, for I feel faint."</p> +<p>When all was done, he said:</p> +<p>"Put my valise under my head, and throw my cloak over me. Thank +you, I shall do very well now. Go forward and join the +regiment.</p> +<p>"I am done for, this time," he thought to himself, when the men +left him. "Still, I may pull through. There are many who have had a +leg shot off and recovered, and there is no reason why I should not +do so. There has not been any great loss of blood. I suppose that +something has been smashed up, so that it cannot bleed.</p> +<p>"Ah, here comes the doctor!"</p> +<p>The doctor was one of several medical students who had enlisted +in the regiment, fighting and drilling with the rest but, when +occasion offered, acting as surgeons.</p> +<p>"I have just heard the news, Colonel. The regiment is +heartbroken but, in their fury, they went at the French facing them +and scattered them like sheep. Canovas, who told me, said that you +were not bleeding much, and that he and the others had bandaged you +up according to your instructions.</p> +<p>"Let me see. It could not have been better," he said.</p> +<p>He felt Terence's pulse.</p> +<p>"Wonderfully good, considering what a smash you have had. Your +vitality must be marvellous and, unless your wound breaks out +bleeding badly, I have every hope that you will get over it. Robas +and Salinas will be here in a minute, with a stretcher for you; and +we will get you to some quiet spot, out of the line of fire."</p> +<p>Almost immediately, four men came up with the stretcher and, by +the surgeon's orders, carried Terence to a quiet spot, sheltered by +a spur of the hill from the fire.</p> +<p>"There is nothing more you can do for me now, doctor?"</p> +<p>"Nothing. It would be madness to take the bandages off, at +present."</p> +<p>"Then please go back to the others. There must be numbers there +who want your aid far more than I do.</p> +<p>"You can stay with me, Leon; but first go back to where my horse +is lying, and bring here the saddle and the two blankets strapped +behind it. I don't feel any pain to speak of, but it seems to me +bitterly cold."</p> +<p>The man presently returned with the saddle and blankets. Two +others accompanied him. Both had been hit too seriously to continue +with the regiment. Their wounds had been already bandaged.</p> +<p>"We thought that we should like to be near you, colonel, if you +do not mind."</p> +<p>"Not at all. First, do each of you take a sip at my flask.</p> +<p>"Leon, I wish you would find a few sticks, and try to make a +fire. It would be cheerful, although it might not give much +warmth."</p> +<p>It was dark now. It was five o'clock when the 3rd division threw +itself across Maucune's line of march, and the battle had begun. It +was dark long before it ended but, during the three hours it had +lasted, the French had lost a marshal, seven generals, and 12,500 +men and officers, killed, wounded, or prisoners; while on the +British side a field marshal, four generals, and nearly 6000 +officers and soldiers were killed or wounded. Indeed, the battle +itself was concentrated into an hour's hard fighting; and a French +officer, describing it, said that 40,000 men were defeated in forty +minutes.</p> +<p>Presently the din of battle died out and, as soon as it did so, +Herrara and Ryan both hurried to the side of Terence.</p> +<p>"My dear Terence," Ryan said, dropping on his knees beside him, +"this is terrible. When I heard the news I was almost beside +myself. As to the men, terrible as their loss is, they talk of no +one but you."</p> +<p>"I think I shall pull through all right, Ryan. At any rate, the +doctor says he thinks I shall, and I think so myself. I am heartily +glad that you and Herrara have gone through it all right. What are +our losses?"</p> +<p>"I don't know, yet. We have not had time to count, but not far +from half our number. Macwitty is killed, Bull desperately wounded. +Fully half the company officers are killed."</p> +<p>"That is terrible indeed, Ryan. Poor fellows! Poor fellows!</p> +<p>"Well, I should say, Herrara, that if you get no orders to join +in the pursuit, you had best get all the wounded collected and +brought here, and let the regiment light fires and bivouac. There +is no chance of getting medical assistance, outside the regiment, +tonight. Of course, all the British surgeons will have their hands +full with their own men. Still, I only suggest this, for of course +you are now in command."</p> +<p>The wounded had all fallen within a comparatively short +distance, and many were able to walk in. The rest were carried, +each in a blanket, with four men at the corners. Under Ryan's +directions, the unwounded scattered over the hillside and soon +brought back a large supply of bushes and faggots. A number of +fires were lighted, and the four surviving medical students, and +one older surgeon, at once began the work of attending the wounded; +taking the more serious cases first, leaving the less important +ones to be bandaged by their comrades. Many wounded men from other +regiments, attracted by the light of the fires, came up; and these, +too, received what aid the Portuguese could give them.</p> +<p>The next morning Terence was carried down, at daybreak, on a +stretcher to Salamanca; where the town was in a state of the +wildest excitement over the victory. As they entered the gates, an +officer asked the bearers:</p> +<p>"Who is it?"</p> +<p>"Colonel O'Connor, of the Minho regiment."</p> +<p>The officer knew Terence personally.</p> +<p>"I am sorry, indeed, to see you here, O'Connor. Not very +serious, I hope?"</p> +<p>"A leg cut clean off above the knee, with the fragment of a +shell, Percival; but I fancy that I am going to get over it."</p> +<p>"Carry him to the convent of Saint Bernard," the officer said, +to the Portuguese captain who was in command of the party, which +consisted of 400 men carrying 100 wounded. "All officers are to be +taken there, the others to the San Martin convent.</p> +<p>"I will look in and see you as soon as I can, O'Connor; and hope +to find you going on well."</p> +<p>But few wounded officers had as yet been brought in and, as soon +as Terence was carried into a ward, two of the staff surgeons +examined his wound.</p> +<p>"You are doing wonderfully well, colonel," the senior officer +said. "You must have received good surgical attention, immediately +on being wounded. Judging by your pulse, you can have lost but +little blood."</p> +<p>"It hardly bled at all, Doctor, and I had it bandaged up by two +of my own men. I have seen a good many serious wounds, in the +course of the last four years; and know pretty well what ought to +be done."</p> +<p>"It has been uncommonly well done, anyhow. I think we had better +not disturb the bandages, for a few days. If no bleeding sets in by +that time, clots of blood will have formed, and you will be +comparatively safe.</p> +<p>"Your pulse is very quiet. Your men must have carried you down +very carefully."</p> +<p>"If I had been a basket of eggs, they could not have taken more +care of me. I was scarcely conscious of any movement."</p> +<p>"Well, you have youth and good health and good spirits in your +favour. If all our patients took things as cheerfully as you do, +there would not be so many of them slip through our hands."</p> +<p>Bull, who had been brought in immediately after Terence, was +next attended to. He was unconscious. He had been struck by a round +shot in the shoulder, which had not only smashed the bone, but +almost carried away the upper part of the arm.</p> +<p>"An ugly wound," the surgeon said to his colleague. "At any +rate, we may as well take off the arm while he is unconscious. It +will save him a second shock, and we can better bandage the wound +when it is removed."</p> +<p>A low moan was the only sign that the wounded man had any +consciousness that the operation was being performed.</p> +<p>"Will he get over it, Doctor?" Terence asked, when the surgeon +had finished.</p> +<p>"There is just a chance, but it is a faint one. Has he been a +sober man?"</p> +<p>"Very; I can answer for the last four years, at any rate. All +the Portuguese officers were abstemious men; and I think that Bull +felt that it would not do for him, commanding a battalion, to be +less sober than they were."</p> +<p>"That increases his chance. Men who drink have everything +against them when they get a severe wound; but he has lost a great +deal of blood, and the shock has, of course, been a terrible +one."</p> +<p>An orderly was told to administer a few spoonfuls of brandy and +water, and the surgeon then moved on to the next bed.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch21" id="Ch21">Chapter 21</a>: Home Again.</h2> +<p>The next morning, one of the surgeons brought a basketful of +fruit to Terence.</p> +<p>"There is a young woman outside, colonel," he said, with a +slight smile, "who was crying so bitterly that I was really obliged +to bring this fruit up to you. She said you would know who she was, +and was heartbroken that she could not be allowed to come up to +nurse you. She said that she had heard, from one of your men, of +your wound. I told her that it was quite impossible that any +civilian should enter the hospital, but said that I would take her +fruit up and, if she would come every day at five o'clock in the +afternoon, when we went off duty for an hour, I would tell her how +you were going on."</p> +<p>"She used to sell fruit to the prisoners here," Terence said, +"and it was entirely by her aid that I effected my escape, last +year; and she got a muleteer, to whom she is engaged, to take me +down from here to Cadiz. I bought her a present when we entered the +town and, the other day, told her I hoped to dance at her wedding +before long. However, that engagement will not come off. My dancing +days are over."</p> +<p>The surgeon felt his pulse.</p> +<p>"There is very little fever," he said. "So far you are going on +marvellously; but you must not be disappointed if you get a sharp +turn, presently. You can hardly expect to get through a wound like +this without having a touch, and perhaps a severe one, of +fever."</p> +<p>"Is there any harm in my eating fruit?"</p> +<p>"I would not eat any, but you can drink some of the juice, mixed +with water. I hope we shall have everything comfortable by tonight; +of course, we are all in the rough, at present. Although many of +the doctors of the town have been helping us, I don't think there +is one medical officer in the army who has taken off his coat since +the wounded began to come in, yesterday morning."</p> +<p>That night Terence's wound became very painful. Inflammation, +accompanied of course with fever, set in and, for a fortnight, he +was very ill. At the end of that time matters began to mend, and +the wound soon assumed a healthy appearance. An operation had been +performed, and the projecting bone cut off.</p> +<p>There were dire sufferings in Salamanca. Six thousand wounded +had to be cared for, the French prisoners and their guards fed; and +the army had no organization to meet so great a strain. Numbers of +lives that might have been saved, by care and proper attention, +were lost; and the spirit of discontent and insubordination, which +had its origin in the excesses committed in the sack of the +fortresses, rapidly increased.</p> +<p>The news from the front, after a time, seemed more satisfactory. +Clausel had been hotly pursued. Had the king with his army joined +him, as he might have done, he would have been in a position to +again attack the enemy with greatly superior numbers; but Joseph +hesitated, and delayed until it was no longer possible. The British +army crossed the mountains, and the king was obliged to retire from +Madrid and evacuate the capital; which was entered by Wellington on +the 25th of August.</p> +<p>Early in September, the chief surgeon said to Terence:</p> +<p>"There is a convoy of sick going down, at the end of the week. I +think that it would be best for you to go with them. In the first +place, the air of this town is not favourable for recoveries. In +some of the hospitals a large number of men have been carried off +by the fever, which so often breaks out when the conditions are +bad. In the next place, I am privately informed, by the governor, +that he has received orders from the general to send all who are +capable of bearing the journey across the frontier, as soon as +possible. Another battle may be fought, at any moment. The +reinforcements that have come from England are nothing like +sufficient to replace the gaps in the army.</p> +<p>"The French generals are collecting their forces, and it is +certain that Wellington will not be able to withstand their +combination and, if he should be compelled to retreat, it is all +important that he should not be hampered by the necessity of +carrying off huge convoys of wounded. The difficulties of transport +are already enormous; and it is, therefore, for many reasons +desirable that all who are sufficiently convalescent to march, and +all for whom transport can be provided, should start without +delay."</p> +<p>"I should be very glad, Doctor. I have not seemed to gain +strength, for the last week or ten days; but I believe that, if I +were in the open air, I should gain ground rapidly."</p> +<p>Nita had been allowed to come up several times to see Terence, +since his convalescence began; and the last time she had called had +told him that Garcia had returned, being altogether dissatisfied +with the feeble proceedings of the guerilla chief. She came up that +afternoon, soon after the doctor left, and he told her the news +that he had received. The next day she told Terence that Garcia had +arranged with her father for his waggon and two bullocks, and that +he himself would drive it to Lisbon, if necessary.</p> +<p>"They are fine bullocks, sir," she said, "and there is no fear +of their breaking down. Last night I was talking to one of your +sergeants, who comes to me every day for news of you. He says that +he and about forty of your men are going down with the convoy. All +are able to walk. It is so difficult to get carts that only +officers who cannot walk are to be taken, this time."</p> +<p>"It is very good of Garcia and your father, Nita, but I should +manage just as well as the others."</p> +<p>"That may be, senor, but it is better to have a friend with you +who knows the country. There may be difficulty in getting +provisions, and they say that there is a good deal of plundering +along the roads; for troops that have lately come up have behaved +so badly that the peasants declare they will have revenge, and +treat them as enemies if they have the opportunity. Altogether, it +is as well to have a friend with you."</p> +<p>Terence told the surgeon next morning what had been arranged, +and said:</p> +<p>"So we shall have room for one more, Doctor. Is Major Bull well +enough to go with me? He could travel in my waggon, which is sure +to be large enough for two to lie in, comfortably."</p> +<p>"Certainly he can. He is making a slow recovery, and I should be +glad to send him away, only I have no room for him. If he goes with +you, I can send another officer down, also, in the place you would +have had."</p> +<p>Accordingly, on the Saturday morning the convoy started. Bull +and Terence met for the first time, since the day of the battle; as +the former had been removed to another room, after the operation. +He was extremely weak, still, and had to be carried down and placed +in the waggon by the side of Terence. Garcia had been greatly +affected at the latter's appearance.</p> +<p>"I should scarce have known you again, senor."</p> +<p>"I am pulled down a bit, Garcia, but by the time we get to our +journey's end, you will see that I shall be a very different man. +How comfortable you have made the waggon!"</p> +<p>"I have done what I could, senor. At the bottom are six sacks of +corn, for it may be that forage will run short. Then I have filled +it with hay, and there are enough rugs to lie on, and to cover you +well over at night; and down among the sacks is a good-sized box +with some good wine, two hams of Nita's father's curing, and a +stock of sausages, and other things for the journey."</p> +<p>Nita came to say goodbye, and wept unrestrainedly at the +parting. She and Garcia had opened the little box, and found in it +fifty sovereigns; and had agreed to be married, as soon as Garcia +returned from his journey. As the train of thirty waggons--of which +ten contained provisions for use on the road--issued from the +gates, they were joined by the convalescents, four hundred in +number. All able to do so carried their arms, the muskets of the +remainder being placed on the provision waggons.</p> +<p>"Have you heard from the regiment, Bull?" Terence asked, after +they had talked over their time in hospital, and their comrades who +had fallen.</p> +<p>"No, sir. There is no one I should expect to write to me."</p> +<p>"I had a letter from Ryan, yesterday," Terence said. "He tells +me that they have had no fighting since we left. They form only one +battalion now, and he says the state of things in Madrid is +dreadful. The people are dying of hunger, and the British officers +have subscribed and started soup kitchens; and that he, with the +other Portuguese regiments, were to march the next day, with three +British divisions and the cavalry, to join General Clinton, who was +falling back before Clausel."</p> +<p>"'We all miss you horribly, Terence. Herrara does his best, but +he has not the influence over the men that you had. If we have to +fall back into Portugal again, which seems to me quite possible, +for little more than 20,000 men are fit to carry arms, I fancy that +there won't be a great many left round the colours by the +spring.</p> +<p>"'Upon my word, I can hardly blame them, Terence. More than half +of those who originally joined have fallen and, no doubt, the poor +fellows think that they have done more than their share towards +defending their country.'"</p> +<p>By very short marches, the convoy made its way to the frontier. +The British convalescents remained at Guarda, the Portuguese +marched for Pinhel, and the carts with the wounded officers +continued their journey to Lisbon. The distance travelled had been +over two hundred and fifty miles and, including halts, they had +taken five weeks to perform it. Terence gained strength greatly +during the journey, and Bull had so far recovered that he was able +to get out and walk, sometimes, by the side of the waggon.</p> +<p>Garcia had been indefatigable in his efforts for their comfort. +Every day he formed an arbour over their waggon, with freshly-cut +boughs brought in by the soldiers of the regiment; and this kept +off the rays of the sun, and the flies. At the villages at which +they stopped, most of the wounded were accommodated in the houses; +but Terence and Bull preferred to sleep in the waggon, the hay +being always freshly shaken out for them, in the evening. The +supplies they carried were most useful in eking out the rations, +and Garcia proved himself an excellent cook. Altogether, the +journey had been a pleasant one.</p> +<p>On arriving at Lisbon, they were taken to the principal +hospital. Here the few who would be fit for service again were +admitted, while the rest were ordered to be taken down, at once, to +a hospital transport lying in the river. At the landing place they +said goodbye to Garcia, who refused firmly any remuneration for his +services, or for the hire of the waggon; and then Terence was +lifted into a boat and, with several other wounded, was taken on +board the transport.</p> +<p>The surgeon came at once to examine him.</p> +<p>"Do you wish to be taken below, colonel?" he asked Terence.</p> +<p>"Certainly not," Terence said. "I can sit up here, and can enjoy +myself as much as ever I could; and the air from the sea will do +more for me than any tonics you can give me, Doctor."</p> +<p>He was placed in a comfortable deck chair, and Bull had another +beside him. There were many officers already on board, and Terence +presently perceived, in one who was stumping about on a wooden leg, +a figure he recognized. He was passing on without recognition, when +Terence exclaimed:</p> +<p>"Why, O'Grady, is it yourself?"</p> +<p>"Terence O'Connor, by the powers!" O'Grady shouted. "Sure, I +didn't know you at first. It is meself, true enough, or what there +is left of me. It is glad I am to see you, though in a poor plight. +The news came to me that you had lost a leg. There was, at first, +no one in the hospital knew where you were, and I was not able to +move about, meself, to make inquiries; and when I found out, before +I came away, they said you were very bad, and that even if I could +get to you--which I could not, for I had not been fitted with a new +leg, then--I should not be able to see you.</p> +<p>"It is just like my luck. I was hit by one of the first shots +fired, and lost all the fun of the fight."</p> +<p>"Where were you hit, O'Grady?"</p> +<p>"Right in the shin. Faith, I went down so sudden that I thought +I had trod in a hole; and I was making a scramble to get up again, +when young Dawson said:</p> +<p>"'Lie still, O'Grady, they have shot the foot off ye.'</p> +<p>"And so they had, and divil a bit could I find where it had gone +to. As I was about the first man hit, they carried me off the field +at once, and put me in a waggon and, as soon as it was full, I was +taken down to Salamanca. I only stopped there three weeks, and I +have been here now more than two months, and my leg is all right +again. But I am a lop-sided creature, though it is lucky that it is +my left arm and leg that have gone. I was always a good hopper, +when I was a boy; so that, if this wooden thing breaks, I think I +should be able to get about pretty well."</p> +<p>"This is Major Bull, O'Grady. Don't you know him?"</p> +<p>"Faith, I did not know him; but now you tell me who it is, I +recognize him. How are you, major?"</p> +<p>"I am getting on, Captain O'Grady."</p> +<p>"Major," O'Grady corrected. "I got my step at Salamanca; both +our majors were killed. So I shall get a dacent pension: a major's +pension, and so much for a leg and arm. That is not so bad, you +know."</p> +<p>"Well, I have no reason to grumble," Bull said. "If I had been +with my old regiment and got this hurt, a shilling a day would have +been the outside. Now I shall get lieutenant's pension, and so much +for my arm and shoulder."</p> +<p>"I have no doubt you will get another step, Bull. After the way +the regiment suffered, and with poor Macwitty killed, and you and I +both badly wounded, they are sure to give you your step," and +indeed when, on their arrival, they saw the Gazette, they found +that both had been promoted.</p> +<p>"I suppose it is all for the best," O'Grady said. "At any rate, +I shall be able to drink dacent whisky for the rest of me life, and +not have to be fretting meself with Spanish spirit; though I don't +say there was no virtue in it, when you couldn't get anything +better."</p> +<p>Three days later, the vessel sailed for England. At Plymouth +Terence, O'Grady, and several other of the Irish officers left her; +Bull promising Terence that, when he was quite restored to health, +he would come and pay him a visit.</p> +<p>Terence and his companion sailed the next day for Dublin. +O'Grady had no relations whom he was particularly anxious to see +and therefore, at Terence's earnest invitation, he took a place +with him in a coach--to leave in three days, as both had to buy +civilian clothes, and to report themselves at headquarters.</p> +<p>"What are you going to do about a leg, Terence?"</p> +<p>"I can do nothing, at present. My stump is a great deal too +tender, still, for me to bear anything of that sort. But I will buy +a pair of crutches."</p> +<p>This was, indeed, the first thing done on landing, Terence +finding it inconvenient in the extreme to have to be carried +whenever he wanted to move, even a few yards. He had written home +two or three times from the hospital, telling them how he was +getting on; for he knew that when his name appeared among the list +of dangerously wounded, his father and cousin would be in a state +of great anxiety until they received news of him; and as soon as +they had taken their places in the coach he dropped them a line, +saying when they might expect him.</p> +<p>They had met with contrary winds on their voyage home, but the +three weeks at sea had done great things for Terence and, except +for the pinned-up trousers leg, he looked almost himself again.</p> +<p>"Be jabers, Terence," O'Grady said, as the coach drove into +Athlone, "one might think that it was only yesterday that we went +away. There are the old shops, and the same people standing at +their doors to see the coach come in; and I think I could swear +even to that cock, standing at the gate leading into the stables. +What games we had here. Who would have thought that, when we came +back, you would be my senior officer!"</p> +<p>When fifteen miles beyond Athlone there was a hail, and the +coach suddenly stopped. O'Grady looked out of the window.</p> +<p>"It's your father, Terence, and the prettiest girl I have seen +since we left the ould country."</p> +<p>He opened the door and got out.</p> +<p>"Hooroo, major! Here we are, safe and sound. We didn't expect to +meet you for another eight miles."</p> +<p>Major O'Connor was hurrying to the door, but the girl was there +before him.</p> +<p>"Welcome home, Terence! Welcome home!" she exclaimed, smiling +through her tears, as she leaned into the coach and held out both +her hands to him, and then drew aside to make room for his +father.</p> +<p>"Welcome home, Terence!" the latter said, as he wrung his hand. +"I did not think it would have been like this, but it might have +been worse."</p> +<p>"A great deal worse, father. Now, will you and the guard help me +out? This is the most difficult business I have to do."</p> +<p>It was with some difficulty he was got out of the coach. As soon +as he had steadied himself on his crutches, Mary came up again, +threw her arms round his neck, and kissed him.</p> +<p>"We are cousins, you know, Terence," she said, "and as your arms +are occupied, I have to take the initiative."</p> +<p>She was half laughing and half crying.</p> +<p>The guard hurried to get the portmanteaus out of the boot. As +soon as he had placed them in the road he shouted to the coachman, +and climbed up on to his post as the vehicle drove on; the +passengers on the roof giving hearty cheers for the two disabled +officers. By this time, the major was heartily shaking hands with +O'Grady.</p> +<p>"I saw in the Gazette that you were hit again, O'Grady."</p> +<p>"Yes. I left one little memento of meself in Portugal, and it +was only right that I should lave another in Spain. It has been +worrying me a good deal, because I should have liked to have +brought them home to be buried in the same grave with me, so as to +have everything handy together. How they are ever to be collected +when the time comes bothers me entirely, when I can't even point +out where they are to be found."</p> +<p>"You have not lost your good spirits anyhow, O'Grady."</p> +<p>"I never shall, I hope, O'Connor; and even if I had been +inclined to, Terence would have brought them back again."</p> +<p>As they stood chatting, a manservant had placed the portmanteaus +on the box of a pretty open carriage, drawn by two horses.</p> +<p>"This is our state carriage, Terence, though we don't use it +very often for, when I go about by myself, I ride. Mary has a pony +carriage, and drives herself about.</p> +<p>"You remember Pat Cassidy, don't you?"</p> +<p>"Of course I do, now I look at him," Terence said. "It's your +old soldier servant," and he shook hands with the man. "He did not +come home with you, did he, father?"</p> +<p>"No, he was badly wounded at Talavera, and invalided home. They +thought that he would not be fit for service again, and so +discharged him; and he found his way here, and glad enough I was to +have him."</p> +<p>Aided by his father and O'Grady, Terence took his place in the +carriage. His father seated himself by his side, while Mary and +O'Grady had the opposite seat.</p> +<p>"There is one advantage in losing legs," O'Grady said. "We can +stow away much more comfortably in a carriage. Is this the nearest +point to your place?"</p> +<p>"Yes. It is four miles nearer than Ballyhovey, so we thought +that we might as well meet you here, and more comfortably than +meeting you in the town. It was Mary's suggestion. I think she +would not have liked to have kissed Terence in the public +street."</p> +<p>"Nonsense, uncle!" Mary said indignantly. "Of course I should +have kissed him, anywhere. Are we not cousins? And didn't he save +me from being shut up in a nunnery, all my life?"</p> +<p>"All right, Mary, it is quite right that you should kiss him; +still, I should say that it was pleasanter to do so when you had +not a couple of score of loafers looking on, who would not know +that he was your cousin, and had saved you from a convent."</p> +<p>"You are looking well, father," Terence said, to turn the +conversation.</p> +<p>"Never was better in my life, lad, except that I am obliged to +be careful with my leg; but after all, it may be that, though it +seemed hard to me at the time, it is as well that I left the +regiment when I did. Quite half the officers have been killed, +since then. Vimiera accounted for some of them. Major Harrison went +there, and gave me my step. Talavera made several more vacancies, +and Salamanca cost us ten officers, including poor O'Driscoll. I am +lucky to have come off as well as I did. It did not seem a very +cheerful lookout, at first; but since this young woman arrived, and +took possession of me, I am as happy and contented as a man can +be."</p> +<p>"I deny altogether having taken possession of you, uncle. I let +you have your way very much, and only interfere for your own +good."</p> +<p>"You will have another patient to look after now, dear, and to +fuss over."</p> +<p>"I will do my best," she said softly, leaning forward and +putting her hand on that of Terence. "I know that it will be +terribly dull for you, at first--after being constantly on the move +for the last five years, and always full of excitement and +adventure--to have to keep quiet and do nothing."</p> +<p>"I shall get on very well," he said. "Just as first, of course, +I shall not be able to get about very much, but I shall soon learn +to use my crutches; and I hope, before very long, to get a leg of +some sort; and I don't see why I should not be able to ride again, +after a bit. If I cannot do it any other way, I must take to a side +saddle. I can have a leg made specially for riding, with a crook at +the knee."</p> +<p>Mary laughed, while the tears came in her eyes.</p> +<p>"Why, bless me, Mary," he went on, "the loss of a leg is +nothing, when you are accustomed to it. I shall be able, as I have +said, to ride, drive, shoot, fish, and all sorts of things. The +only thing that I shall be cut off from, as far as I can see, is +dancing; but as I have never had a chance of dancing, since the +last ball the regiment gave at Athlone, the loss will not be a very +grievous one.</p> +<p>"Look at O'Grady. There he is, much worse off than I am, as he +has no one to make any particular fuss about him. He is getting on +capitally and, indeed, stumped about the deck so much, coming home, +that the captain begged him to have a pad of leather put on to the +bottom of his leg, to save the decks. O'Grady is a philosopher, and +I shall try to follow his example."</p> +<p>"Why should one bother oneself, Miss O'Connor, when bothering +won't help? When the war is over, I shall buy Tim Doolan, my +soldier servant, out. He is a vile, drunken villain; but I +understand him, and he understands me, and he blubbered so, when he +carried me off the field, that I had to promise him that, if a +French bullet did not carry him off, I would send for him when the +war was over.</p> +<p>"'You know you can't do without me, yer honour,' the scoundrel +said.</p> +<p>"'I can do better without you than with you, Tim,' says I. 'Ye +are always getting me into trouble, with your drunken ways. Ye +would have been flogged a dozen times, if I hadn't screened you. +Take up your musket and join your regiment. You rascal, you are +smelling of drink now, and divil a drop, except water, is there in +me flask.'</p> +<p>"'I did it for your own good,' says he. 'Ye know that spirits +always heats your blood, and water would be the best for you, when +the fighting began; so I just sacrificed meself.</p> +<p>"'For,' says I to meself, 'if ye get fighting a little wild, +Tim, it don't matter a bit; but the captain will have to keep cool, +so it is best that you should drink up the spirits, and fill the +flask up with water to quench his thirst.'"</p> +<p>"'Be off, ye black villain,' I said, 'or I will strike you.'</p> +<p>"'You will never be able to do without me, Captain,' says he, +picking up his musket; and with that he trudged away and, for aught +I know, he never came out of the battle alive."</p> +<p>The others laughed.</p> +<p>"They were always quarrelling, Mary," Terence said. "But I agree +with Tim that his master will find it very hard to do without him, +especially about one o'clock in the morning."</p> +<p>"I am ashamed of you, Terence," O'Grady said, earnestly; "taking +away me character, when I have come down here as your guest."</p> +<p>"It is too bad, O'Grady," Major O'Connor said, "but you know +Terence was always conspicuous for his want of respect towards his +elders."</p> +<p>"He was that same, O'Connor. I did me best for the boy, but +there are some on whom education and example are clean thrown +away."</p> +<p>"You are looking pale, cousin Terence," Mary said.</p> +<p>"Am I? My leg is hurting me a bit. Ireland is a great country, +but its by-roads are not the best in the world, and this jolting +shakes me up a bit."</p> +<p>"How stupid I was not to think of it!" she said and, rising in +her seat, told Cassidy to drive at a walk.</p> +<p>They were now only half a mile from the house.</p> +<p>"You will hardly know the old place again, Terence," his father +said.</p> +<p>"And a very good thing too, father, for a more tumble-down old +shanty I never was in."</p> +<p>"It was the abode of our race, Terence."</p> +<p>"Well, then, it says mighty little for our race, father."</p> +<p>"Ah! But it did not fall into the state you saw it in till my +father died, a year after I got my commission."</p> +<p>"I won't blame them, then; but, at any rate, I am glad I am +coming home to a house and not to a ruin.</p> +<p>"Ah, that is more like a home!" he said, as a turn of the road +brought them in sight of the building. "You have done wonders, +Mary. That is a house fit for any Irish gentleman to live in."</p> +<p>"It has been altered so that it can be added to, Terence; but, +at any rate, it is comfortable. As it was before, it made one feel +rheumatic to look at it."</p> +<p>On arriving at the house, Terence refused all assistance.</p> +<p>"I am going to be independent, as far as I can," he said and, +slipping down from the seat into the bottom of the chaise, he was +able to put his foot on to the ground and, by the aid of his +crutches, to get out and enter the house unaided.</p> +<p>"That is the old parlour, I think," he said, glancing into one +of the rooms.</p> +<p>"Yes. It is your father's snuggery, now. There is scarcely any +alteration there, and he can mess about as he likes with his guns +and fishing tackle and swords.</p> +<p>"This is the dining room, now."</p> +<p>And she led the way along a wide passage to the new part of the +house, where a bright fire was blazing in a handsome and +well-furnished room. An invalid's chair had been placed by the +fire, and opposite it was a large, cosy armchair.</p> +<p>"That is for your use, Major O'Grady," she said. "Now, Terence, +you are to lay yourself up in that chair. I will bring a small +table to your side, and put your dinner there."</p> +<p>"I will lie down until the dinner is ready, Mary. But I am +perfectly capable of sitting at the table. I did so the last week +before leaving the ship."</p> +<p>"You shall do that tomorrow. You may say what you like, but I +can see that you are very tired and, for today, you will take it +easy. I am going to be your nurse, and I can assure you that you +will have to obey orders. You have been in independent command +quite long enough."</p> +<p>"It is of no use, Terence; you must do as you are told," his +father said. "The only way to get on with this young woman is to +let her have her own way. I have given up opposing her, long ago; +and you will have to do the same."</p> +<p>Terence did not find it unpleasant to be nursed and looked +after, and even to obey peremptory orders.</p> +<p>A month later, Mary came into the room quietly, one afternoon, +when he was sitting and looking into the fire; as his father and +O'Grady had driven over to Killnally. Absorbed in his own thoughts, +he did not hear her enter.</p> +<p>Thinking that he was asleep, she paused at the door. A moment +later she heard a deep sigh. She came forward at once.</p> +<p>"What are you sighing about, Terence? Your leg is not hurting +you, is it?"</p> +<p>"No, dear, it has pretty well given up hurting me."</p> +<p>"What were you sighing about, then?"</p> +<p>He was silent for a minute, and then said:</p> +<p>"Well you see, one cannot help sighing a little at the thought +that one is laid up, a useless man, when one is scarce +twenty-one."</p> +<p>"You have done your work, Terence. You have made a name for +yourself, when others are just leaving college and thinking of +choosing a profession. You have done more, in five years, than most +men achieve in all their lifetime.</p> +<p>"This is the first time I have heard you grumble. I know it is +hard, but what has specially upset you, today?"</p> +<p>"I suppose I am a little out of sorts," he said. "I was +thinking, perhaps, how different it might have been, if it hadn't +been for that unlucky shell."</p> +<p>"You mean that you might have gone on to Burgos, and fallen in +the assault there; or shared in that dreadful retreat to the +frontier again."</p> +<p>"No. I was not thinking of Spain, nor even of the army. I was +thinking of here."</p> +<p>"But you said, over and over again, Terence, that you will be +able to ride, and drive, and get about like other people, in +time."</p> +<p>"Yes, dear. In many respects it will be the same, but not in one +respect."</p> +<p>Then he broke off.</p> +<p>"I am an ungrateful brute. I have everything to make me happy--a +comfortable home, a good father, and a dear little sister to nurse +me."</p> +<p>"What did I tell you, sir," she said, after a pause, "when I +said goodbye to you at Coimbra? That I would rather be your cousin. +You were quite hurt, and I said that you were a silly boy, and +would understand better, some day."</p> +<p>"I have understood, since," he said, "and was glad that you were +not my sister; but now, you see, things have altogether changed, +and I must be content with sistership."</p> +<p>The girl looked in the fire, and then said, in a low voice:</p> +<p>"Why, Terence?"</p> +<p>"You know why," he said. "I have had no one to think of but you, +for the last four years. Your letters were the great pleasures of +my life. I thought over and over again of those last words of +yours, and I had some hope that, when I came back, I might say to +you:</p> +<p>"'Dear Mary, I am grateful, indeed, that you are my cousin, and +not my sister. A sister is a very dear relation, but there is one +dearer still.'</p> +<p>"Don't be afraid, dear; I am not going to say so now. Of course, +that is over, and I hope that I shall come, in time, to be content +to think of you as a sister."</p> +<p>"You are very foolish, Terence," she said, almost with a laugh, +"as foolish as you were at Coimbra. Do you think that I should have +said what I did, then, if I had not meant it? Did you not save me, +at the risk of your life, from what would have been worse than +death? Have you not been my hero, ever since? Have you not been the +centre of our thoughts here, the great topic of our conversation? +Have not your father and I been as proud as peacocks, when we read +of your rapid promotion, and the notices of your gallant conduct? +And do you think that it would make any difference to me, if you +had come back with both your legs and arms shot off?</p> +<p>"No, dear. I am just as dissatisfied with the relationship you +propose as I was three years ago, and it must be either cousin +or--" and she stopped.</p> +<p>She was standing up beside him, now.</p> +<p>"Or wife," he said, taking up her hand. "Is it possible you mean +wife?"</p> +<p>Her face was a sufficient answer, and he drew her down to +him.</p> +<p>"You silly boy!" she said, five minutes afterwards. "Of course, +I thought of it all along. I never made any secret of it to your +father. I told him that our escape was like a fairy tale, and that +it must have the same ending: 'and they married, and lived happy +ever after.' He would never have let me have my way with the house, +had I not confided in him. He said that I could spend my money as I +pleased, on myself, but that not one penny should be laid out on +his house; and I was obliged to tell him.</p> +<p>"I am afraid I blushed furiously, as I did so, but I had to +say:</p> +<p>"'Don't you see, Uncle?'--of course, I always called him uncle, +from the first, though he is only a cousin--'I have quite made up +my mind that it will be my house, some day; and the money may just +as well be laid out on it now, to make it comfortable; instead of +waiting till that time comes.'"</p> +<p>"What did my father say?"</p> +<p>"Oh, he said all sorts of nonsense, just the sort of thing that +you Irishmen always do say! That he had hoped, perhaps, it might be +so, from the moment he got your letter; and that the moment he saw +me he felt sure that it would be so, for it must be, if you had any +eyes in your head."</p> +<p>When Major O'Connor came home he was greatly pleased, but he +took the news as a matter of course.</p> +<p>"Faith," he said, "I would have disinherited the boy, if he had +been such a fool as not to appreciate you, Mary."</p> +<p>O'Grady was loud in his congratulations.</p> +<p>"It is just like your luck, Terence," he said. "Luck is +everything. Here am I, a battered hero, who has lost an arm and a +foot in the service of me country, and divil a girl has thrown +herself upon me neck. Here are you, a mere gossoon, fifteen years +my junior in the service, mentioned a score of times in despatches, +promoted over my head; and now you have won one of the prettiest +creatures in Ireland and, what is a good deal more to the point, +though you may not think of it at present, with a handsome fortune +of her own. In faith, there is no understanding the ways of +Providence."</p> +<p>A week afterwards the whole party went up to Dublin, as Terence +and O'Grady had to go before a medical board. A fortnight later a +notice appeared, in the Gazette, that Lieutenant Colonel Terence +O'Connor had retired from the service, on half pay, with the rank +of colonel.</p> +<p>The marriage did not take place for another six months, by which +time Terence had thrown away his crutches and had taken to an +artificial leg--so well constructed that, were it not for a certain +stiffness in his walk, his loss would not have been suspected by a +casual observer. For three months previous to the event, a number +of men had been employed in building a small but pretty house, some +quarter of a mile from the mansion, intended for the occupation of +Majors O'Connor and O'Grady.</p> +<p>"It will be better, in every way, Terence," his father insisted, +when his son and Mary remonstrated against their thus proposing to +leave them. "O'Grady and I have been comrades for twenty years, and +we shall feel more at home, in bachelor quarters, than here. I can +run in three or four times a day, if I like, and I expect I shall +be as much here as over there; whereas if I lived here, I should +often be feeling myself in the way, though I know that you would +never say so. It is better for young people to be together and, +maybe some day, the house will be none too large for you."</p> +<p>The house was finished by the time the wedding took place, and +the two officers moved into it. The wedding was attended by all the +tenants, and half the country round; and it was agreed that the +bride's jewels were the most magnificent that had ever been seen in +that part of Ireland, though some objected that diamonds, alone, +would have been more suitable for the occasion than the +emeralds.</p> +<p>Terence, on his return, had heard from his father that his +Uncle, Tim M'Manus, had called very soon after the major had +returned to his old home. He had been very friendly, and had been +evidently mollified by Terence's name appearing in general orders; +but his opinion that he would end his career by a rope had been in +no way shaken. He had, however, continued to pay occasional visits; +and the rapid rise of the scapegrace, and his frequent mention in +despatches, were evidently a source of much gratification to him; +and it was not long after his return that his uncle again came +over.</p> +<p>"We will let bygones be bygones, Terence," he said, as he shook +hands with him. "You have turned out a credit to your mother's +name, and I am proud of you; and I hold my head high when I say +Colonel Terence O'Connor, who was always playing mischief with the +French, is my great nephew, and the good M'Manus blood shines out +clearly in him."</p> +<p>There was no one who played a more conspicuous part at the +wedding than Uncle Tim. At his own request, he proposed the health +of the bride and bridegroom.</p> +<p>"I take no small credit to myself," he said, "that Colonel +Terence O'Connor is the hero of this occasion. Never was there a +boy whose destiny was so marked as his, and it is many a time I +predicted that it was not either by flood, or fire, or quietly in +his bed that he would die. If, when the regiment was ordered +abroad, I had offered him a home, I firmly believe that my +prediction would be verified before now; but I closed my doors to +him, and the consequence was that he expended his devilment upon +the French; and it is a deal better for him that it is only a leg +that he has lost, which is a much less serious matter than having +his neck unduly stretched. Therefore, ladies and gentlemen, I can +say with pride that I have had no small share in this matter, and +it is glad I am that, when I go, I can leave my money behind me, +feeling that it won't all go to the dogs before I have been twelve +months in my grave."</p> +<p>Another old friend was present at the wedding. Bull had made a +slow recovery, and had been some time before he regained his +strength. When he was gazetted out of the service, he secured a +step in rank, and retired as a major. In after years he made +frequent visits to Terence; to whom, as he always declared, he owed +it that, instead of being turned adrift on a nominal pension, he +was now able to live in comfort and ease.</p> +<p>When, four months later, Tim M'Manus was thrown out of his trap +when driving home late at night, and broke his neck, it was found +that he had left the whole of his property to Terence and, as the +rents of his estate amounted to 600 pounds a year, no +inconsiderable proportion of which had, for many years past, been +accumulating, the legacy placed Terence in a leading position among +the gentry of Mayo.</p> +<p>For very many years the house was one of the most popular in the +county. It had been found necessary to make additions to it, and it +had now attained the dignity of a mansion. The three officers +followed, with the most intense interest, the bulletins and +despatches from the war and, on the day when the allies entered +Paris, the services of Tim Doolan, who had been invalided home a +year after the return of his master, and had been discharged as +unfit for further service, were called into requisition, for the +first time since his return, to assist his master back to the +house.</p> +<p>O'Grady, however, explained most earnestly to Mary O'Connor, the +next day, that it was not the whisky at all, at all, but his wooden +leg that had got out of order, and would not carry him +straight.</p> +<p>Dick Ryan went through the war unscathed and, after Waterloo, +retired from the service with the rank of lieutenant colonel; +married, and settled at Athlone; and the closest intimacy, and very +frequent intercourse, were maintained between him and his comrades +of the Mayo Fusiliers.</p> +<p>Terence, in time, quite ceased to feel the loss of his leg; and +was able to join in all field sports, becoming in time master of +the hounds, and one of the most popular sportsmen in the county. +His wife always declared that his wound was the most fortunate +thing that ever happened to him for, had it not been for that, he +would most likely have fallen in some of the later battles in the +Peninsula.</p> +<p>"It is a good thing to have luck," she said, "and Terence had +plenty of it. But it does not do to tempt fortune too far. The +pitcher that goes too often to the well gets broken, in the +end."</p> + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Under Wellington's Command, by G. A. Henty + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK UNDER WELLINGTON'S COMMAND *** + +***** This file should be named 20207-h.htm or 20207-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/0/2/0/20207/ + +Produced by Martin Robb + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/20207-h/images/1.jpg b/20207-h/images/1.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8a3c45e --- /dev/null +++ b/20207-h/images/1.jpg diff --git a/20207-h/images/2.jpg b/20207-h/images/2.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8812485 --- /dev/null +++ b/20207-h/images/2.jpg diff --git a/20207-h/images/3.jpg b/20207-h/images/3.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..077da9c --- /dev/null +++ b/20207-h/images/3.jpg diff --git a/20207-h/images/4.jpg b/20207-h/images/4.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a287445 --- /dev/null +++ b/20207-h/images/4.jpg diff --git a/20207-h/images/5.jpg b/20207-h/images/5.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3438c8d --- /dev/null +++ b/20207-h/images/5.jpg diff --git a/20207-h/images/a.jpg b/20207-h/images/a.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..bae6601 --- /dev/null +++ b/20207-h/images/a.jpg diff --git a/20207-h/images/b.jpg b/20207-h/images/b.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..39a3a0a --- /dev/null +++ b/20207-h/images/b.jpg diff --git a/20207-h/images/c.jpg b/20207-h/images/c.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3bb1366 --- /dev/null +++ b/20207-h/images/c.jpg diff --git a/20207-h/images/d.jpg b/20207-h/images/d.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1bc355a --- /dev/null +++ b/20207-h/images/d.jpg diff --git a/20207-h/images/e.jpg b/20207-h/images/e.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e63fcef --- /dev/null +++ b/20207-h/images/e.jpg diff --git a/20207-h/images/f.jpg b/20207-h/images/f.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ccc1bc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/20207-h/images/f.jpg diff --git a/20207-h/images/g.jpg b/20207-h/images/g.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..abd0ddf --- /dev/null +++ b/20207-h/images/g.jpg diff --git a/20207-h/images/h.jpg b/20207-h/images/h.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0aae819 --- /dev/null +++ b/20207-h/images/h.jpg diff --git a/20207-h/images/i.jpg b/20207-h/images/i.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e0a1872 --- /dev/null +++ b/20207-h/images/i.jpg diff --git a/20207-h/images/j.jpg b/20207-h/images/j.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..593f1e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/20207-h/images/j.jpg diff --git a/20207.txt b/20207.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..499fbdd --- /dev/null +++ b/20207.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14584 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Under Wellington's Command, by G. A. Henty + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Under Wellington's Command + A Tale of the Peninsular War + +Author: G. A. Henty + +Illustrator: Wal. Paget + +Release Date: December 29, 2006 [EBook #20207] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK UNDER WELLINGTON'S COMMAND *** + + + + +Produced by Martin Robb + + + + +Under Wellington's Command: +A Tale of the Peninsular War +by G. A. Henty. + +Contents + +Preface. +Chapter 1: A Detached Force. +Chapter 2: Talavera. +Chapter 3: Prisoners. +Chapter 4: Guerillas. +Chapter 5: An Escape. +Chapter 6: Afloat. +Chapter 7: A French Privateer. +Chapter 8: A Smart Engagement. +Chapter 9: Rejoining. +Chapter 10: Almeida. +Chapter 11: The French Advance. +Chapter 12: Fuentes D'Onoro. +Chapter 13: From Salamanca To Cadiz. +Chapter 14: Effecting A Diversion. +Chapter 15: Dick Ryan's Capture. +Chapter 16: Back With The Army. +Chapter 17: Ciudad Rodrigo. +Chapter 18: The Sack Of A City. +Chapter 19: Gratitude. +Chapter 20: Salamanca. +Chapter 21: Home Again. + +Illustrations + +"You may as well make your report to me, O'Connor." +Plan of the Battle of Talavera. +"We surrender, sir, as prisoners of war." +Stooping so that their figures should not show against the sky. +"She is walking along now." +"This is Colonel O'Connor, sir." +Plan of the Battle of Busaco. +"Good news. We are going to take Coimbra." +Plan of the Lines of Torres Vedras. +Plan of the Battle of Fuentes d'Onoro. +The men leapt to their feet, cheering vociferously. +"Search him at once." +The man fell, with a sharp cry. +Plan of the Forts and Operations round Salamanca. +A shell had struck Terence's horse. + + + +Preface. + + +As many boys into whose hands the present volume may fall will not +have read my last year's book, With Moore in Corunna, of which this +is a continuation, it is necessary that a few words should be said, +to enable them to take up the thread of the story. It was +impossible, in the limits of one book, to give even an outline of +the story of the Peninsular War, without devoting the whole space +to the military operations. It would, in fact, have been a history +rather than a tale; and it accordingly closed with the passage of +the Douro, and the expulsion of the French from Portugal. + +The hero, Terence O'Connor, was the son of the senior captain of +the Mayo Fusiliers and, when the regiment was ordered to join Sir +Arthur Wellesley's expedition to Portugal, the colonel of the +regiment obtained for him a commission; although so notorious was +the boy, for his mischievous pranks, that the colonel hesitated +whether he would not get into some serious scrapes; especially as +Dick Ryan, one of the ensigns, was always his companion in +mischief, and both were aided and abetted by Captain O'Grady. + +However, on the way out, the slow old transport, in which a wing of +the regiment was carried, was attacked by two French privateers, +who would have either taken or sunk her, had it not been for a +happy suggestion of the quick-witted lad. For this he gained great +credit, and was selected by General Fane as one of his aides-de-camp. +In this capacity he went through the arduous campaign, under General +Moore, that ended at Corunna. + +His father had been so seriously wounded, at Vimiera, that he was +invalided home and placed on half pay; and in the same battle +Captain O'Grady lost his left arm but, on its being cured, returned +to his place in the regiment. + +At Corunna Terence, while carrying a despatch, was thrown from his +horse and stunned; and on recovering found that the British had +already embarked on board the ships of the fleet. He made his way +to the frontier of Portugal, and thence to Lisbon. He was then +appointed to the staff of Sir John Craddock, who was now in +command; and sent in charge of some treasure for the use of the +Spanish General Romana, who was collecting a force on the northern +border of Portugal. Terence had orders to aid him, in any way in +his power, to check the invasion of Portugal from the north. + +Of this order he took advantage when, on the way, the agents of the +junta of Oporto endeavoured to rob him; attacking the house where +he and his escort had taken up their quarters with a newly-raised +levy of two thousand five hundred unarmed peasants. By a ruse he +got their leaders into his hands, and these showed such abject +cowardice that the peasants refused further to follow them, and +asked Terence to take the command of the force. + +He assented, formed them into two battalions, appointed two British +orderlies as majors, the Portuguese officer of his escort +lieutenant-colonel, and his troopers captains of companies; put +them in the way of obtaining arms and, by dint of hard drill and +kindness, converted them into an efficient body of soldiers. +Finding that little was to be expected from Romana's force, he +acted as a partisan leader and, in this capacity, performed such +valuable service that he was confirmed in the command of his force, +which received the name of the Minho regiment; and he and his +officers received commissions for the rank they held in the +Portuguese army. + +At Oporto he rescued from a convent a cousin, who, at the death of +her father, a British merchant there, had been shut up by her +Portuguese mother until she would consent to sign away the property +to which she was entitled, and to become a nun. She went to England +to live with Terence's father, and came into possession of the +fortune which her father, foreseeing that difficulties might arise +at his death, had forwarded to a bank at home, having appointed +Captain O'Connor her guardian. + +The present volume takes the story of the Peninsular War up to the +battle of Salamanca, and concludes the history of Terence O'Connor. +My readers will understand that, in all actions in which the +British army took part, the details are accurately given; but that +the doings of the Minho regiment, and of Terence O'Connor as a +partisan leader, are not to be considered as strictly historical, +although similar feats of daring and adventure were accomplished by +Trant, Pack, and other leaders of irregular forces. + +G. A. Henty. + + + +Chapter 1: A Detached Force. + + +"Be jabers, Terence, we shall all die of weariness with doing +nothing, if we don't move soon," said Captain O'Grady; who, with +Dick Ryan, had ridden over to spend the afternoon with Terence +O'Connor, whose regiment of Portuguese was encamped some six miles +out of Abrantes, where the division to which the Mayo Fusiliers +belonged was stationed. + +"Here we are in June, and the sun getting hotter and hotter, and +the whisky just come to an end, though we have been mighty sparing +over it, and nothing to eat but ration beef. Begorrah, if it wasn't +for the bastely drill, I should forget that I was a soldier at all. +I should take meself for a convict, condemned to stop all me life +in one place. At first there was something to do, for one could +forage for food dacent to eat; but now I don't believe there is as +much as an old hen left within fifteen miles, and as for ducks and +geese, I have almost forgotten the taste of them." + +"It is not lively work, O'Grady, but it is worse for me here. You +have got Dicky Ryan to stir you up and keep you alive, and +O'Flaherty to look after your health and see that you don't exceed +your allowance; while practically I have no one but Herrara to +speak to, for though Bull and Macwitty are excellent fellows in +their way, they are not much as companions. + +"However, I think we must be nearly at the end of it. We have got +pretty well all the troops up here, except those who are to remain +at Lisbon." + +"I see the men," O'Grady said, "but I don't see the victuals. We +can't march until we get transport and food, and where they are to +come from no one seems to know." + +"I am afraid we shall do badly for a time in that respect, O'Grady. +Sir Arthur has not had time, yet, to find out what humbugs the +Spaniards are, and what wholesale lies they tell. Of course, he had +some slight experience of it when we first landed, at the Mondego; +but it takes longer than that to get at the bottom of their want of +faith. Craddock learnt it after a bitter experience, and so did +Moore. I have no doubt that the Spaniards have represented to Sir +Arthur that they have large disciplined armies, that the French +have been reduced to a mere handful, and that they are only waiting +for his advance to drive them across the frontier. Also, no doubt, +they have promised to find any amount of transport and provisions, +as soon as he enters Spain. As to relying upon Cuesta, you might as +well rely upon the assistance of an army of hares, commanded by a +pig-headed owl." + +"I can't make out, meself," O'Grady said, "what we want to have +anything to do with the Spaniards for, at all. If I were in Sir +Arthur's place, I would just march straight against the French and +thrash them." + +"That sounds well, O'Grady, but we know very little about where the +French are, what they are doing, or what is their strength; and I +think that you will allow that, though we have beaten them each +time we have met them, they fought well. At Rolica we were three to +one against them, and at Vimiera we had the advantage of a strong +position. At Corunna things were pretty well even, but we had our +backs to the wall. + +"I am afraid, O'Grady, that just at present you are scarcely +qualified to take command of the army; except only on the one +point, that you thoroughly distrust the Spaniards. + +"Well, Dick, have you been having any fun lately?" + +"It is not to be done, Terence. Everyone is too disgusted and out +of temper to make it safe. Even the chief is dangerous. I would as +soon think of playing a joke on a wandering tiger, as on him. The +major is not a man to trifle with, at the best of times and, except +O'Flaherty, there is not a man among them who has a good word to +throw at a dog. Faith, when one thinks of the good time one used to +have at Athlone, it is heartbreaking." + +"Well, come in and refresh yourselves. I have a bottle or two still +left." + +"That is good news!" O'Grady said fervently. "It has been on the +tip of me tongue to ask you, for me mouth is like an oven; but I +was so afraid you would say it was gone that I dare n't open me +lips about it." + +"To tell you the truth, O'Grady, except when some of you fellows +come over, there is not any whisky touched in this camp. I have +kept it strictly for your sergeants, who have been helping to teach +my men drill, and coaching the non-commissioned officers. It has +been hard work for them, but they have stuck to it well, and the +thought of an allowance at the end of the day's work has done +wonders with them. + +"We made a very fair show when we came in, but now I think the two +battalions could work with the best here, without doing themselves +discredit. The non-commissioned officers have always been our weak +point, but now my fellows know their work very fairly, and they go +at it with a will. You see, they are all very proud of the corps, +and have spared no pains to make themselves worthy of it. + +"Of course, what you may call purely parade movements are not done +as they are by our infantry; but in all useful work, I would back +them against any here. They are very fair shots, too. I have paid +for a lot of extra ammunition; which, I confess, we bought from +some of the native levies. No doubt I should get into a row over +it, if it were known; but as these fellows are not likely ever to +fire a shot against the French, and it is of importance that mine +should be able to shoot well, I didn't hesitate to do it. +Fortunately the regimental chest is not empty, and all the officers +have given a third of their pay, to help. But it has certainly done +a lot of good, and the shooting has greatly improved since we came +here." + +"I have been working steadily at Portuguese, Terence, ever since +you spoke to me about it. One has no end of time on one's hands +and, really, I am getting on very fairly." + +"That is right, Dicky. If we win this campaign I will certainly ask +for you as adjutant. I shall be awfully glad to have you with me, +and I really do want an adjutant for each battalion. + +"And you, O'Grady?" + +"Well, I can't report favourably of meself at all, at all. I tried +hard for a week, and it is the fault of me tongue, and not of +meself. I can't get it to twist itself to the outlandish words. I +am willing enough, but me tongue isn't; and I am afraid that, were +it a necessity that every officer in your corps should speak the +bastely language, I should have to stay at home." + +"I am afraid that it is quite necessary, O'Grady," Terence laughed. +"An adjutant who could not make himself understood would be of no +shadow of use. You know how I should like to have you with me; but, +upon the other hand, there would be inconveniences. You are, as you +have said many a time, my superior officer in our army, and I +really should not like to have to give you orders. Then again, Bull +and Macwitty are still more your juniors, having only received +their commissions a few months back; and they would feel just as +uncomfortable as I should, at having you under them. I don't think +that it would do at all. Besides, you know, you are not fond of +work by any means, and there would be more to do in a regiment like +this than in one of our own." + +"I suppose that it must be so, Terence," O'Grady said resignedly, +as he emptied his tumbler; "and besides, there is a sort of +superstition in the service that an adjutant should be always able +to walk straight to his tent, even after a warm night at mess. Now, +although it seems to me that I have every other qualification, in +that respect I should be a failure; and I imagine that, in a +Portuguese regiment, the thing would be looked at more seriously +than it is in an Irish one; where such a matter occurs, +occasionally, among men as well as officers." + +"That is quite true, O'Grady. The Portuguese are a sober people and +would not, as you say, be able to make the same allowance for our +weaknesses that Irish soldiers do; seeing that it is too common for +our men to be either one way or the other. + +"However, Ryan, I do hope I shall be able to get you. I never had +much hopes of O'Grady; and this failure of his tongue to aid him, +in his vigorous efforts to learn the language, seems to quite +settle the matter as far as he is concerned." + +At this moment an orderly rode up to the tent. Terence went out. + +"A despatch from headquarters, sir," the trooper said, saluting. + +"All right, my man! You had better wait for five minutes, and see +if any answer is required." + +Going into the tent, he opened the despatch. + +"Hooray!" he said, as he glanced at the contents, "here is a +movement, at last." + +The letter was as follows: + +"Colonel O'Connor will at once march with his force to Plasencia; +and will reconnoitre the country between that town and the Tagus to +the south, and Bejar to the north. He will ascertain, as far as +possible, the position and movements of the French army under +Victor. He will send a daily report of his observations to +headquarters. Twenty Portuguese cavalry, under a subaltern, will be +attached to his command, and will furnish orderlies to carry his +reports. + +"It is desirable that Colonel O'Connor's troops should not come in +contact with the enemy, except to check any reconnoitring parties +moving towards Castello Branco and Villa Velha. It is most +necessary to prevent the news of an advance of the army in that +direction reaching the enemy, and to give the earliest possible +information of any hostile gathering that might menace the flank of +the army, while on its march. + +"The passes of Banos and Periles will be held by the troops of +Marshal Beresford and General Del Parque, and it is to the country +between the mountains and Marshal Cuesta's force, at Almaraz, that +Colonel O'Connor is directed to concentrate his attention. In case +of being attacked by superior forces, Colonel O'Connor will, if +possible, retreat into the mountains on his left flank, maintain +himself there, and open communications with Lord Beresford's forces +at Banos or Bejar. + +"Colonel O'Connor is authorized to requisition six carts from the +quartermaster's department, and to hand over his tents to them; to +draw 50,000 rounds of ball cartridge, and such rations as he may be +able to carry with him. The paymaster has received authority to +hand over to him 500 pounds, for the payment of supplies for his +men. When this sum is exhausted, Colonel O'Connor is authorized to +issue orders for supplies payable by the paymaster to the forces, +exercising the strictest economy, and sending notification to the +Paymaster General of the issue of such orders. + +"This despatch is confidential, and the direction of the route is, +on no account, to be divulged." + +"You hear that, O'Grady; and you too, Dicky. I ought not to have +read the despatch out loud. However, I know you will keep the +matter secret." + +"You may trust us for that, Terence, for it is a secret worth +knowing. It is evident that Sir Arthur is going to join Cuesta, and +make a dash on Madrid. Well, he has been long enough in making up +his mind; but it is a satisfaction that we are likely to have hot +work, at last, though I wish we could have done it without those +Spaniards. We have seen enough of them to know that nothing, beyond +kind words, are to be expected of them and, when the time for +fighting comes, I would rather that we depended upon ourselves than +have to act with fellows on whom there is no reliance, whatever, to +be placed." + +"I agree with you there, heartily, O'Grady. However, thank goodness +we are going to set out at last; and I am very glad that it falls +to us to act as the vanguard of the army, instead of being attached +to Beresford's command and kept stationary in the passes. + +"Now I must be at work. I daresay we shall meet again, before +long." + +Terence wrote an acknowledgment of the receipt of the general's +order, and handed it to the orderly who had brought it. A bugler at +once sounded the field-officers' call. + +"We are to march at once," he said, when Herrara, Bull, and +Macwitty arrived. "Let the tents be struck, and handed over to the +quartermaster's department. See that the men have four days' +biscuit in their haversacks. + +"Each battalion is to take three carts with it. I will go to the +quartermaster's department, to draw them. Tell off six men from +each battalion to accompany me, and take charge of the carts. Each +battalion will carry 25,000 rounds of spare ammunition, and a chest +of 250 pounds. I will requisition from the commissariat as much +biscuit as we can carry, and twenty bullocks for each battalion, to +be driven with the carts. + +"As soon as the carts are obtained, the men will drive them to the +ordnance stores for the ammunition, and to the commissariat stores +to load up the food. You had better send an officer in charge of +the men of each battalion. + +"I will myself draw the money from the paymaster. I will go there +at once. Send a couple of men with me, for of course it will be +paid in silver. Then I will go to the quartermaster's stores, and +get the carts ready by the time that the men arrive. I want to +march in an hour's time, at latest." + +In a few minutes the camp was a scene of bustle and activity. The +tents were struck and packed away in their bags, and piled in order +to be handed over to the quartermaster; and in a few minutes over +an hour from the receipt of the order, the two battalions were in +motion. + +After a twenty-mile march, they halted for the night near the +frontier. An hour later they were joined by twenty troopers of a +Portuguese regiment, under the command of a subaltern. + +The next day they marched through Plasencia, and halted for the +night on the slopes of the Sierra. An orderly was despatched, next +morning, to the officer in command of any force that there might be +at Banos, informing him of the position that they had taken up. + +Terence ordered two companies to remain at this spot, which was at +the head of a little stream running down into an affluent of the +Tagus; their position being now nearly due north of Almaraz, from +which they were distant some twenty miles. The rest of the force +descended into the plain, and took post at various villages between +the Sierra and Oropesa, the most advanced party halting four miles +from that town. + +The French forces under Victor had, in accordance with orders from +Madrid, fallen back from Plasencia a week before, and taken up his +quarters at Talavera. + +At the time when the regiment received its uniforms, Terence had +ordered that twenty suits of the men's peasant clothes should be +retained in store and, specially intelligent men being chosen, +twenty of these were sent forward towards the river Alberche, to +discover Victor's position. They brought in news that he had placed +his troops behind the river, and that Cuesta, who had at one time +an advanced guard at Oropesa, had recalled it to Almaraz. Parties +of Victor's cavalry were patrolling the country between Talavera +and Oropesa. + +Terence had sent Bull, with five hundred men, to occupy all the +passes across the Sierras, with orders to capture any orderlies or +messengers who might come along; and a day later four men brought +in a French officer, who had been captured on the road leading +south. He was the bearer of a letter from Soult to the king, and +was at once sent, under the escort of four troopers, to +headquarters. + +The men who had brought in the officer reported that they had +learned that Wilson, with his command of four thousand men, was in +the mountains north of the Escurial; and that spies from that +officer had ascertained that there was great alarm in Madrid, where +the news of the British advance towards Plasencia was already +known; and that it was feared that this force, with Cuesta's army +at Almaraz and Venegas' army in La Mancha, were about to combine in +an attack upon the capital. This, indeed, was Sir Arthur's plan, +and had been arranged with the Supreme Junta. The Junta, however, +being jealous of Cuesta, had given secret instructions to Venegas +to keep aloof. + +On his arrival at Plasencia, the English general had learned at +once the hollowness of the Spanish promises. He had been assured of +an ample supply of food, mules, and carts for transport; and had, +on the strength of these statements, advanced with but small +supplies, for little food and but few animals could be obtained in +Portugal. He found, on arriving, that no preparations whatever had +been made; and the army, thus early in the campaign, was put on +half rations. Day after day passed without any of the promised +supplies arriving, and Sir Arthur wrote to the Supreme Junta; +saying that although, in accordance with his agreement, he would +march to the Alberche, he would not cross that river unless the +promises that had been made were kept, to the letter. + +He had, by this time, learned that the French forces north of the +mountains were much more formidable than the Spanish reports had +led him to believe; but he still greatly underrated Soult's army, +and was altogether ignorant that Ney had evacuated Galicia, and was +marching south with all speed, with his command. Del Parque had +failed in his promise to garrison Bejar and Banos, and these passes +were now only held by a few hundreds of Cuesta's Spaniards. + +A week after taking up his position north of Oropesa, Terence +received orders to move with his two battalions, and to take post +to guard these passes; with his left resting on Bejar, and his +right in communication with Wilson's force. The detachments were at +once recalled. A thousand men were posted near Bejar, and the rest +divided among the other passes by which a French army from the +north could cross the Sierra. + +As soon as this arrangement was made, Terence rode to Wilson's +headquarters. He was received very cordially by that officer. + +"I am heartily glad to see you, Colonel O'Connor," the latter said. +"Of course, I have heard of the doings of your battalions; and am +glad, indeed, to have your support. I sent a messenger off, only +this morning, to Sir Arthur; telling him that, from the information +brought in by my spies, I am convinced that Soult is much stronger +than has been supposed; and that, if he moves south, I shall scarce +be able to hold the passes of Arenas and San Pedro Barnardo; and +that I can certainly spare no men for the defence of the more +westerly ones, by which Soult is likely to march from Salamanca. +However, now you are there, I shall feel safe." + +"No doubt I could hinder an advance, Sir Robert," Terence said, +"but I certainly could not hope to bar the passes to a French army. +I have no artillery and, though my men are steady enough against +infantry, I doubt whether they would be able to withstand an attack +heralded by a heavy cannonade. With a couple of batteries of +artillery to sweep the passes, one might make a fair stand for a +time against a greatly superior force; but with only infantry, one +could not hope to maintain one's position." + +"Quite so, and Sir Arthur could not expect it. My own opinion is +that we shall have fifty thousand men coming down from the north. I +have told the chief as much; but naturally he will believe the +assurances of the Spanish juntas, rather than reports gathered by +our spies; and no doubt hopes to crush Victor altogether, before +Soult makes any movement; and he trusts to Venegas' advance, from +the south towards the upper Tagus, to cause Don Joseph to evacuate +Madrid, as soon as he hears of Victor's defeat. + +"But I have, certainly, no faith whatever in either Venegas or +Cuesta. Cuesta is loyal enough, but he is obstinate and pig headed +and, at present, he is furious because the Supreme Junta has been +sending all the best troops to Venegas, instead of to him; and he +knows, well enough, that that perpetual intriguer Frere is working +underhand to get Albuquerque appointed to the supreme command. As +to Venegas, he is a mere tool of the Supreme Junta and, as likely +as not, they will order him to do nothing but keep his army intact. + +"Then again, the delay at Plasencia has upset all Sir Arthur's +arrangements. Had he pressed straight forward on the 28th of last +month, when he crossed the frontier, disregarding Cuesta +altogether, he could have been at Madrid long before this; for I +know that at that time Victor's force had been so weakened that he +had but between fourteen and fifteen thousand men, and must have +fallen back without fighting. Now he has again got the troops that +had been taken from him, and will be further reinforced before Sir +Arthur arrives on the Alberche; and of course Soult has had plenty +of time to get everything in readiness to cross the mountains, and +fall upon the British rear, as soon as he hears that they are +fairly on their way towards Madrid. Here we are at the 20th, and +our forces will only reach Oropesa today. + +"Victor is evidently afraid that Sir Arthur will move from Oropesa +towards the hills, pass the upper Alberche, and so place himself +between him and Madrid; for a strong force of cavalry reconnoitred +in this direction, this morning." + +"Would it not be as well, sir," said Terence, "if we were to +arrange some signals by which we could aid each other? That hill +top can be seen from the hill beyond which is the little village +where I have established myself. I noticed it this morning, before +I started. If you would keep a lookout on your hill, I would have +one on mine. We might each get three bonfires, a hundred yards +apart, ready for lighting. If I hear of any great force approaching +the defiles I am watching, I could summon your aid either by day or +night by these fires; and in the same way, if Soult should advance +by the line that you are guarding, you could summon me. My men are +really well trained in this sort of work, and you could trust them +to make an obstinate defence." + +"I think that your idea is a very good one, and will certainly +carry it out. You see, we are really both of us protecting the left +flank of our army, and can certainly do so more effectually if we +work together. + +"We might, too, arrange another signal. One fire might mean that, +for some reason or other, we are marching away. I may have orders +to move some distance towards Madrid, so as to compel Victor to +weaken himself by detaching a force to check me; you may be +ordered, as the army advances, to leave your defiles in charge of +the Spaniards, and to accompany the army. Two fires might mean, +spies have reported a general advance of the French coming by +several routes. Thus, you see, we should be in readiness for any +emergency. + +"I should be extremely glad of your help, if Soult comes this way. +My own corps of 1200 men are fairly good soldiers, and I can rely +upon them to do their best; but the other 3000 have been but +recently raised, and I don't think that any dependence can be +placed upon them, in case of hard fighting; but with your two +battalions, we ought to be able to hold any of these defiles for a +considerable time." + +Two days later, Terence received orders to march instantly with his +force down into the valley, to follow the foot of the hills until +he reached the Alberche, when he was to report his arrival, wait +until he received orders, and check the advance of any French force +endeavouring to move round the left flank of the British. The +evening before, one signal fire had announced that Wilson was on +the move and, thinking that he, too, might be summoned, Terence had +called in all his outposts, and was able to march a quarter of an +hour after he received the order. + +He had learned, on the evening he returned from his visit to Sir +Robert, from men sent down into the plain for the purpose, that +Cuesta's army and that of Sir Arthur had advanced together from +Oropesa. He was glad at the order to join the army, as he had felt +that, should Soult advance, his force, unprovided as it was with +guns, would be able to offer but a very temporary resistance; +especially if the French Marshal was at the head of a force +anything like as strong as was reported by the peasantry. As to +this, however, he had very strong doubts, having come to distrust +thoroughly every report given by the Spaniards. He knew that they +were as ready, under the influence of fear, to exaggerate the force +of an enemy as they were, at other times, to magnify their own +numbers. Sir Arthur must, he thought, be far better informed than +he himself could be; for his men, being Portuguese, were viewed +with doubt and suspicion by the Spanish peasantry, who would +probably take a pleasure in misleading them altogether. + +The short stay in the mountains had braced up the men and, with +only a short halt, they made a forty-mile march to the Alberche by +midnight. Scarcely had they lit their fires, when an Hussar officer +and some troopers rode up. They halted a hundred yards away, and +the officer shouted in English: + +"What corps is this?" + +Terence at once left the fire, and advanced towards them. + +"Two Portuguese battalions," he answered, "under myself, Colonel +O'Connor." + +The officer at once rode forward. + +"I was not quite sure," he said, as he came close, "that my +question would not be answered by a volley. By the direction from +which I saw you coming, I thought that you must be friends. Still, +you might have been an advanced party of a force that had come down +through the defiles. However, as soon as I saw you light your +fires, I made sure it was all right; for the Frenchmen would not +likely have ventured to do so unless, indeed, they were altogether +ignorant of our advance." + +"At ten o'clock this morning I received orders from headquarters to +move to this point at once and, as we have marched from Banos, you +see we have lost very little time on the way." + +"Indeed, you have not. I suppose it is about forty miles; and that +distance, in fourteen hours, is certainly first-rate marching. I +will send off one of my men to report who you are. Two squadrons of +my regiment are a quarter of a mile away, awaiting my return." + +"Have you any reason to believe that the enemy are near?" + +"No particular reason that I know of, but their cavalry have been +in great force along the upper part of the river, for the last two +days. Victor has retired from Talavera, for I fancy that he was +afraid we might move round this way, and cut him off from Madrid. +The Spaniards might have harassed him as he fell back, but they +dared not even make a charge on his rear guard, though they had +3000 cavalry. + +"We are not quite sure where the French are and, of course, we get +no information from the people here; either their stupidity is +something astounding, or their sympathies are entirely with the +French." + +"My experience is," Terence said, "that the best way is to get as +much information as you can from them, and then to act with the +certainty that the real facts are just the reverse of the +statements made to you." + +As soon as the forces halted a picket had been sent out; and +Terence, when the men finished their supper, established a cordon +of advanced pickets, with strong supports, at a distance of a mile +from his front and flanks; so as to ensure himself against +surprise, and to detect any movement upon the part of the enemy's +cavalry, who might be pressing round to obtain information of the +British position. At daybreak he mounted and rode to Talavera, and +reported the arrival of his command, and the position where he had +halted for the night. + +"You have wasted no time over it, Colonel O'Connor. You can only +have received the order yesterday morning, and I scarcely expected +that you could be here till this evening." + +"My men are excellent marchers, sir. They did the forty miles in +fourteen hours, and might have done it an hour quicker, had they +been pressed. Not a man fell out." + +"Your duty will now be to cover our left flank. I don't know +whether you are aware that Wilson has moved forward, and will take +post on the slopes near the Escurial. He has been directed to +spread his force as much as possible, so as to give an appearance +of greater strength than he has." + +"I knew that he had left his former position," Terence said. "We +had arranged a code of smoke signals, by which we could ask each +other for assistance should the defiles be attacked; and I learned +yesterday morning, in this way, that he was marching away." + +"Have you any news of what is taking place on the other side of the +hills, since you sent off word two days ago?" + +"No, sir; at least, all we hear is of the same character as before. +We don't hear that Soult is moving, but his force is certainly put +down as being considerably larger than was supposed. I have deemed +it my duty to state this in my reports, but the Spaniards are so +inclined to exaggerate everything that I always receive statements +of this kind with great doubt." + +"All our news--from the juntas, from Mr. Frere, and from other +quarters--is quite the other way," the officer said. "We are +assured that Soult has not fifteen thousand men in condition to +take the field, and that he could not venture to move these, as he +knows that the whole country would rise, did he do so. + +"I have no specific orders to give you. You will keep in touch with +General Hill's brigade, which forms our left and, as we move +forward, you will advance along the lower slopes of the Sierra and +prevent any attempt, on the part of the French, to turn our flank. + +"I dare say you do not know exactly what is going on, Colonel +O'Connor. It may be of assistance to you, in taking up your +position, to know that the fighting is likely to take place on the +line between Talavera and the mountains. Cuesta has fallen back, in +great haste, to Talavera. We shall advance today and take up our +line with him. + +"The Spaniards will hold the low marshy ground near the town. Our +right will rest on an eminence on his left flank, and will extend +to a group of hills, separated by a valley from the Sierra. Our +cavalry will probably check any attempt by the French to turn our +flank there, and you and the Spaniards will do your best to hold +the slope of the Sierra, should the French move a force along +there. + +"I may say that Victor has been largely reinforced by Sebastiani, +and is likely to take the offensive. Indeed, we hear that he is +already moving in this direction. We are not aware of his exact +strength, but we believe that it must approach, if not equal, that +of ourselves and Cuesta united. + +"Cuesta has, indeed, been already roughly handled by the French. +Disregarding Sir Arthur's entreaties, and believing Victor to be in +full retreat, he marched on alone, impelled by the desire to be the +first to enter Madrid; but at two o'clock on the morning of the +26th of July, the French suddenly fell upon him, drove the Spanish +cavalry back from their advanced position, and chased them hotly. +They fled in great disorder, and the panic would have spread to the +whole army, had not Albuquerque brought up 3000 fresh cavalry and +held the French in check, while Cuesta retreated in great disorder +and, had the French pressed forward, would have fled in utter rout. +Sherbrooke's division, which was in advance of the British army, +moved forward and took up its position in front of the panic-stricken +Spaniards, and then the French drew off. + +"Cuesta then yielded to Sir Arthur's entreaties, recrossed the +Alberche, and took up his position near Talavera. Here, even the +worst troops should be able to make a stand against the best. The +ground is marshy and traversed by a rivulet. On its left is a +strong redoubt, which is armed with Spanish artillery; on the right +is another very strong battery, on a rise close to Talavera; while +other batteries sweep the road to Madrid. Sir Arthur has +strengthened the front by felling trees and forming abattis, so +that he has good reason to hope that, poor as the Spanish troops +may be, they should be able to hold their part of the line. + +"Campbell's division forms the British right, Sherbrooke comes +next, the German legion are in the centre, Donkin is to take his +place on the hill that rises two-thirds of the way across the +valley, while General Hill's division is to hold the face looking +north, and separated from the Sierra only by the comparatively +narrow valley in which you have bivouacked. At present, however, +his troops and those of Donkin have not taken up their position." + +The country between the positions on which the allied armies had +now fallen back was covered with olive and cork trees. The whole +line from Talavera to the hill, which was to be held by Hill's +division, was two miles in length; and the valley between that and +the Sierra was half a mile in width, but extremely broken and +rugged, and was intersected by a ravine, through which ran the +rivulet that fell into the Tagus at Talavera. + + + +Chapter 2: Talavera. + + +On leaving the Adjutant General, Terence--knowing that Mackenzie's +brigade was some two miles in advance on the Alberche river, and +that the enemy was not in sight--sent off one of the orderlies who +accompanied him, with a message to Herrara to fall back and take up +his station on the lower slopes of the Sierra, facing the rounded +hill; and then went to a restaurant and had breakfast. It was +crowded with Spanish officers, with a few British scattered among +them. + +As he ate his food, he was greatly amused at the boasting of the +Spaniards as to what they would accomplish, if the French ventured +to attack them; knowing as he did how shamefully they had behaved, +two days before, when the whole of Cuesta's army had been thrown +into utter disorder by two or three thousand French cavalry, and +had only been saved from utter rout by the interposition of a +British brigade. When he had finished breakfast, he mounted his +horse and rode to the camp of his old regiment. + +"Hooroo, Terence!" Captain O'Grady shouted, as he rode up, "I +thought you would be turning up, when there was going to be +something to do. It's yourself that has the knack of always getting +into the thick of it. + +"Orderly, take Colonel O'Connor's horse, and lead him up and down. + +"Come on, Terence, most of the boys are in that tent over there. We +have just been dismissed from parade." + +A shout of welcome rose as they entered the tent, where a dozen +officers were sitting on the ground, or on empty boxes. + +"Sit down if you can find room, Terence," Colonel Corcoran said. +"Wouldn't you like to be back with us again, for the shindy that we +are likely to have, tomorrow?" + +"That I should, but I hope to have my share in it, in my own way." + +"Where are your men, O'Connor?" + +"They will be, in another hour, at the foot of the mountains over +there to the left. Our business will be to prevent any of the +French moving along there, and coming down on your rear." + +"I am pleased to hear it. I believe that there is a Spanish +division there, but I am glad to know that the business is not to +be left entirely to them. Now, what have you been doing since you +left us, a month ago?" + +"I have been doing nothing, Colonel, but watching the defiles and, +as no one has come up them, we have not fired a shot." + +"No doubt they got news that you were there, Terence," O'Grady +said, "and not likely would they be to come up to be destroyed by +you." + +"Perhaps that was it," Terence said, when the laughter had +subsided; "at any rate they didn't show up, and I was very pleased +when orders came, at ten o'clock yesterday, for us to leave Banos +and march to join the army. We did the forty miles in fourteen +hours." + +"Good marching," Colonel Corcoran said. "Then where did you halt?" + +"About three miles farther off, at the foot of the hills. We saw a +lot of campfires to our right, and thought that we were in a line +with the army, but of course they were only those of Mackenzie's +division; but I sent off an orderly, an hour ago, to tell them to +fall back to the slopes facing those hills, where our left is to be +posted." + +"You are a lucky fellow to have been away from us, Terence, for it +is downright starving we have been. The soldiers have only had a +mouthful of meat served out to them as rations, most days; and they +have got so thin that their clothes are hanging loose about them. +If it hadn't been for my man Doolan and two or three others, who +always manage, by hook or by crook, to get hold of anything there +is within two or three miles round, we should have been as badly +off as they are. Be jabers, I have had to take in my sword belt a +good two inches; and to think that, while our fellows are well-nigh +starving, these Spaniards we came to help, and who will do no +fighting themselves, had more food than they could eat, is enough +to enrage a saint. + +"I wonder Sir Arthur puts up with it. I would have seized that +stuck-up old fool Cuesta, and popped him into the guard tent, and +kept him there until provisions were handed over for us." + +"His whole army might come to rescue him, O'Grady." + +"What if they had? I would have turned out a corporal's guard, and +sent the whole of them trotting off in no time. Did you hear what +took place two days ago?" + +"Yes, I heard that they behaved shamefully, O'Grady; still, I think +a corporal's guard would hardly be sufficient to turn them, but I +do believe that a regiment might answer the purpose." + +"I can tell you that there is nothing would please the troops more +than to attack the Spaniards. If this goes on many more days, our +men will be too weak to march; but I believe that, before they lie +down and give it up altogether, they will pitch into the Spaniards, +in spite of what we may try to do to prevent them," the Colonel +said. "Here we are in a country abounding with food, and we are +starving, while the Spaniards are feasting in plenty; and by Saint +Patrick's beard, Terence, it is mighty little we should do to +prevent our men from pitching into them. There is one thing, you +may be sure. We shall never cooperate with them in the future and, +as to relying upon their promises, faith, they are not worth the +breath it takes to make them." + +As everything was profoundly quiet, Terence had no hesitation in +stopping to lunch with his old friends and, as there was no +difficulty in buying whatever was required in Talavera, the table +was well supplied, and the officers made up for their enforced +privation during the past three weeks. + +At three o'clock Terence left them and rode across to his command, +which he found posted exactly where he had directed it. + +"It is lucky that we filled up with flour at Banos, before +starting, Colonel," Bull said, "for from what we hear, the soldiers +are getting next to nothing to eat; and those cattle you bought at +the village halfway, yesterday, will come in very handy. At any +rate, with them and the flour we can hold out for a week, if need +be." + +"Still, you had better begin at once to be economical, Bull. There +is no saying what may happen after this battle has been fought." + +While they were talking, a sudden burst of firing, at a distance, +was heard. + +"Mackenzie's brigade is engaged!" Terence exclaimed. "You had +better get the men under arms, at once. If the whole of Victor's +command is upon them, they will have to fall back. + +"When the men are ready, you may as well come a few hundred feet +higher up the hill, with me. Then you will see all over the +country, and be in readiness to do anything that is wanted. But it +is not likely the French will attempt anything serious, today. They +will probably content themselves with driving Mackenzie in." + +Terence went at once up the hill, to a point whence he could look +well over the round hills on the other side of the valley, and make +out the British and Spanish lines, stretching to Talavera. The +troops were already formed up, in readiness for action. Away to his +left came the roll of heavy firing from the cork woods near the +Alberche and, just as his three officers joined him, the British +troops issued pell mell from the woods. They had, in fact, been +taken entirely by surprise; and had been attacked so suddenly and +vigorously that, for a time, the young soldiers of some of the +regiments fell into confusion; and Sir Arthur himself, who was at a +large house named the Casa, narrowly escaped capture. The 45th, +however, a regiment that had seen much service, and some companies +of the 60th Rifles presented a stout front to the enemy. + +Sir Arthur speedily restored order among the rest of the troops, +and the enemy's advance was checked. The division then fell back in +good order, each of its flanks being covered by a brigade of +cavalry. From the height at which Terence and his officers stood, +they could plainly make out the retiring division, and could see +heavy masses of French troops descending from the high ground +beyond the Alberche. + +"The whole French army is on us!" Macwitty said. "If their advance +guard had not been in such a hurry to attack, and had waited until +the others came up, not many of Mackenzie's division would have got +back to our lines." + +It was not long before the French debouched from the woods and, as +soon as they did so, a division rapidly crossed the plain towards +the allies' left, seized an isolated hill facing the spur on to +which Donkin had just hurried up his brigade, and at once opened a +heavy cannonade. At the same time another division moved towards +the right, and some squadrons of light cavalry could be seen, +riding along the road from Madrid towards the Spanish division. + +"They won't do much good there," Terence said, "for the country is +so swampy that they cannot leave the road. Still, I suppose they +want to reconnoitre our position, and draw the fire of the +Spaniards to ascertain their whereabouts. They are getting very +close to them and, when the Spaniards begin, they ought to wipe +them out completely." + +At this moment a heavy rattle of distant musketry was heard, and a +light wreath of smoke rose from the Spanish lines. The French +cavalry had, in fact, ridden up so close to the Spaniards that they +discharged their pistols in bravado at them. To this the Spaniards +had replied by a general wild discharge of their muskets. A moment +later the party on the hill saw the right of the Spanish line break +up as if by magic and, to their astonishment and rage, they made +out that the whole plain behind was thickly dotted by fugitives. + +"Why, the whole lot have bolted, sir!" Bull exclaimed. "Horse and +foot are making off. Did anyone ever hear of such a thing!" + +That portion of the Spanish line nearest to Talavera had indeed +broken and fled in the wildest panic, 10,000 infantry having taken +to their heels the instant they discharged their muskets; while the +artillery cut their traces and, leaving their guns behind them, +followed their example. The French cavalry charged along the road, +but Sir Arthur opposed them with some British squadrons. The +Spanish who still held their ground opened fire, and the French +drew back. The fugitives continued their flight to Oropesa, +spreading panic and alarm everywhere with the news that the allies +were totally defeated, Sir Arthur Wellesley killed, and all lost. + +Cuesta himself had for some time accompanied them, but he soon +recovered from his panic, and sent several cavalry regiments to +bring back the fugitives. Part of the artillery and some thousands +of the infantry were collected before morning, but 6000 men were +still absent at the battle, and the great redoubt on their left was +silent, from want of guns. + +In point of numbers there had been but little difference between +the two armies. Prior to the loss of these 6000 men, Cuesta's army +had been 34,000 strong, with seventy guns. The British, with the +German Legion, numbered 19,000, with thirty guns. The French were +50,000 strong, with eighty guns. These were all veteran troops, +while on the side of the allies there were but 19,000 who could be +called fighting men. + +"That is what comes of putting faith in the Spaniards!" Bull said +savagely. "If I had been Sir Arthur, I would have turned my guns on +them and given them something to run for. We should do a thousand +times better, by ourselves; then we should know what we had to +expect." + +"It is evident that there won't be any fighting until tomorrow, +Macwitty. You will place half your battalion on the hillside, from +this point to the bottom of the slope. I don't think that they will +come so high up the hill as this; but you will, of course, throw +some pickets out above. The other wing of your battalion you will +hold in reserve, a couple of hundred yards behind the centre of the +line; but choose a sheltered spot for them, for those guns Victor +is placing on his heights will sweep the face of this hill. + +"This little watercourse will give capital cover to your advanced +line, and they cannot do better than occupy it. Lying down, they +would be completely sheltered from the French artillery and, if +attacked, they could line the bank and fire without showing more +than their heads. Of course, you will throw out pickets along the +face of the slope in front of you. + +"Do you, Bull, march your battalion down to the foot of the hill +and take up your post there. The ground is very uneven and broken, +and you should be able to find some spot where the men would be in +shelter; move a couple of hundred yards back, then Macwitty would +flank any force advancing against you. The sun will set in a few +minutes, so you had better lose no time in taking up your ground. + +"As soon as you have chosen a place go on, with the captains of +your companies, across the valley. Make yourselves thoroughly +acquainted with the ground, and mark the best spots at which to +post the men to resist any force that may come along the valley. It +is quite possible that Victor may make an attempt to turn the +general's flank tonight. I will reconnoitre all the ground in front +of you, and will then, with the colonel, join you." + +The position Terence had chosen was a quarter of a mile west of the +spur held by Donkin's brigade. He had selected it in order that, if +attacked in force, he might have the assistance of the guns there; +which would thus be able to play on the advancing French, without +risk of his own men being injured by their fire. + +Bull marched his battalion down the hill and, as Terence and +Herrara were about to mount, a sudden burst of musketry fire, from +the crest of the opposite hill, showed that the French were +attempting to carry that position. Victor, indeed, seeing the force +stationed there to be a small one; and that, from the confusion +among the Spaniards on the British right, the moment was very +favourable; had ordered one division to attack, another to move to +its support, while a third was to engage the German division posted +on the plain to the right of the hill, and thus prevent succour +being sent to Donkin. + +From the position where Terence was standing, the front of the +steep slope that the French were climbing could not be seen but, +almost at the same moment, a dense mass of men began to swarm up +the hill on Donkin's flank; having, unperceived, made their way in +at the mouth of the valley. + +"Form up your battalion, Macwitty," he shouted, "and double down +the hill." + +Then he rode after Bull, whose battalion had now reached the valley +and halted there. + +"We must go to the assistance of the brigade on the hill, Bull, or +they will be overpowered before reinforcements can reach them. + +"Herrara, bring on Macwitty after us, as soon as he gets down. + +"Take the battalion forward at the double, Bull." + +The order was given and, with a cheer, the battalion set out across +the valley and, on reaching the other side, began to climb the +steep ascent; bearing towards their left, so as to reach the summit +near the spot where the French were ascending. Twilight was already +closing in, and the approach of the Portuguese was unobserved by +the French, whose leading battalions had reached the top of the +hill, and were pressing heavily on Donkin's weak brigade; which +had, however, checked the advance of the French on their front. +Macwitty's battalion was but a short distance behind when, marching +straight along on the face of the hill, Bull arrived within a +hundred yards of the French. Here Terence halted them for a minute, +while they hastily formed up in line, and Macwitty came up. + +The din on the top of the hill, just above Bull's right company, +was prodigious, the rattle of musketry incessant, the exulting +shouts of the French could be plainly heard; and their comrades +behind were pressing hotly up the hill to join in the strife. There +was plainly not a moment to be lost and, advancing to within fifty +yards of the French battalions, struggling up the hill in confused +masses, a tremendous volley was poured in. + +The French, astonished at this sudden attack upon their flank, +paused and endeavoured to form up, and wheel round to oppose a +front to it; but the heavy fire of the Portuguese, and the broken +nature of the ground, prevented their doing this and, ignorant of +the strength of the force that had thus suddenly attacked them, +they recoiled, keeping up an irregular fire; while the Portuguese, +pouring in steady volleys, pressed upon them. In five minutes they +gave way, and retired rapidly down the hill. + +The leading battalions had gained the crest where, joining those +who had ascended by the other face of the hill, they fell upon the +already outnumbered defenders. Donkin's men, though fighting +fiercely, were pressed back, and would have been driven from their +position had not General Hill brought up the 29th and 48th, with a +battalion of detachments composed of Sir John Moore's stragglers. +These charged the French so furiously that they were unable to +withstand the assault, although aided by fresh battalions ascending +the front of the hill. + +In their retreat the French, instead of going straight down the +hill, bore away to their right and, although some fell to the fire +of the Portuguese, the greater portion passed unseen in the +darkness. + +The firing now ceased, and Terence ordered Bull and Macwitty to +take their troops back to the ground originally selected, while he +himself ascended to the crest. With some difficulty he discovered +the whereabouts of General Hill, to whom he was well known. He +found him in the act of having a wound temporarily dressed, by the +light of a fire which had just been replenished; he having ridden, +in the dark, into the midst of a French battalion, believing it to +be one of his own regiments. Colonel Donkin was in conversation +with him. + +"It has been a very close affair, sir," he said; "and I certainly +thought that we should be rolled down the hill. I believe that we +owe our safety, in no small degree, to a couple of battalions of +Spaniards, I fancy, who took up their post on the opposite hill +this morning. Just before you brought up your reinforcement, and +while things were at their worst, I heard heavy volley firing +somewhere just over the crest. I don't know who it could have been, +if it was not them; for there were certainly no other troops on my +left." + +"They were Portuguese battalions, sir," Terence said quietly. + +"Oh, is it you, O'Connor?" General Hill exclaimed. "If they were +those two battalions of yours, I can quite understand it. + +"This is Colonel O'Connor, Donkin, who checked Soult's passage at +the mouth of the Minho, and has performed other admirable +services." + +[Illustration: 'You may as well make your report to me, O'Connor.'] + +"You may as well make your report to me, O'Connor, and I will +include it in my own to Sir Arthur." + +Terence related how, just as he was taking up his position for the +night along the slopes of the Sierra, he heard the outbreak of +firing on the front of the hill and, seeing a large force mounting +its northern slope, and knowing that only one brigade was posted +there, he thought it his duty to move to its assistance. Crossing +the valley at the double, he had taken them in flank and, being +unperceived in the gathering darkness, had checked their advance, +and compelled them to retire down the hill. + +"At what strength do you estimate the force which so retired, +Colonel?" + +"I fancy there were eight battalions of them, but three had gained +the crest before we arrived. The others were necessarily broken up, +and followed so close upon each other that it was difficult to +separate them; but I fancy there were eight of them. Being in such +confusion and, of course, unaware of my strength, they were unable +to form or to offer any effectual resistance; and our volleys, from +a distance of fifty yards, must have done heavy execution upon +them." + +"Then there is no doubt, Donkin, Colonel O'Connor's force did save +you; for if those five battalions had gained the crest, you would +have been driven off it before the brigade I brought up arrived +and, indeed, even with that aid we should have been so outnumbered +that we could scarcely have held our ground. It was hot work as it +was, but certainly five more battalions would have turned the scale +against us. + +"Of course, O'Connor, you will send in a written report of your +reasons for quitting your position to headquarters; and I shall, +myself, do full justice to the service that you have rendered so +promptly and efficaciously. Where is your command now?" + +"They will by this time have taken up their former position on the +opposite slope. One battalion is extended there. The other is at +the foot of the hill, prepared to check any force that may attempt +to make its way up the valley. Our line is about a quarter of a +mile in rear of this spur. I selected the position in order that, +should the French make an attempt in any force, the guns here might +take them in flank, while I held them in check in front." + +The general nodded. "Well thought of," he said. + +"And now, Donkin, you had better muster your brigade and ascertain +what are your losses. I am afraid they are very heavy." + +Terence now returned across the valley and, on joining his command, +told Herrara and the two majors how warmly General Hill had +commended their action. + +"What has been our loss?" he asked. + +"Fifteen killed, and five-and-forty wounded, but of these a great +proportion are not serious." + +Brushwood was now collected and in a short time a number of fires +were blazing. The men were in high spirits. They were proud of +having overthrown a far superior force of the enemy, and were +gratified at the expression of great satisfaction, conveyed to them +by their captains by Terence's order, at the steadiness with which +they had fought. + +[Illustration: Plan of the Battle of Talavera.] + +At daybreak next morning the enemy was seen to be again in motion, +Victor having obtained the king's consent to again try to carry the +hills occupied by the British. This time Terence did not leave his +position, being able to see that the whole of Hill's division now +occupied the heights and, moreover, being himself threatened by two +regiments of light troops, which crossed the mouth of the valley, +ascended the slopes on his side, and proceeded to work their way +along them. The whole of Macwitty's battalion was now placed in +line, while Bull's was held in reserve, behind its centre. + +It was not long before Macwitty was hotly engaged; and the French, +who were coming along in skirmishing order, among the rocks and +broken ground, were soon brought to a standstill. For some time a +heavy fire was exchanged. Three times the French gathered for a +rush; but each time the steady volleys, from their almost invisible +foes, drove them back again, with loss, to the shelter they had +left. + +In the intervals Terence could see how the fight was going on +across the valley. The whole hillside was dotted with fire, as the +French worked their way up, and the British troops on the crest +fired down upon them. Several times parties of the French gained +the brow, but only to be hurled back again by the troops held in +reserve, in readiness to move to any point where the enemy might +gain a footing. For forty minutes the battle continued; and then, +having lost 1500 men, the French retreated down the hill again, +covered by the fire of their batteries, which opened with fury on +the crest, as soon as they were seen to be descending the slope. + +At the same time the light troops opposed to Terence also drew off. +Seeing the pertinacity with which the French had tried to turn his +left, Sir Arthur Wellesley moved his cavalry round to the head of +the valley and, obtaining Bassecour's division of Spanish from +Cuesta, sent them to take post on the hillside a short distance in +rear of Terence's Portuguese. + +The previous evening's fighting had cost Victor 1000 men, while 800 +British had been killed or wounded; and the want of success then, +and the attack on the following morning, tended to depress the +spirits of the French and to raise those of the British. It was +thought that after these two repulses Victor would not again give +battle, and indeed the French generals Jourdan and Sebastiani were +opposed to a renewal of hostilities; but Victor was in favour of a +general attack. So his opinion was finally adopted by the king, in +spite of the fact that he knew that Soult was in full march towards +the British rear, and had implored him not to fight a battle till +he had cut the British line of retreat; when, in any case, they +would be forced to retire at once. + +The king was influenced more by his fear for the safety of Madrid +than by Victor's arguments. Wilson's force had been greatly +exaggerated by rumour. Venegas was known to be at last approaching +Toledo, and the king feared that one or both of these forces might +fall upon Madrid in his absence, and that all his military stores +would fall into their hands. He therefore earnestly desired to +force the British to retreat, in order that he might hurry back to +protect Madrid. + +Doubtless the gross cowardice exhibited by the Spaniards, on the +previous day, had shown Victor that he had really only the 19,000 +British troops to contend against; and as his force exceeded theirs +by two to one, he might well regard victory as certain, and believe +he could not fail to beat them. + +Up to midday, a perfect quiet reigned along both lines. The British +and French soldiers went down alike to the rivulet that separated +the two armies, and exchanged jokes as they drank and filled their +canteens. Albuquerque, being altogether dissatisfied with Cuesta's +arrangements, moved across the plain with his own cavalry and took +his post behind the British and German horse; so that no less than +6000 cavalry were now ready to pour down upon any French force +attempting to turn the British position by the valley. The day was +intensely hot and the soldiers, after eating their scanty rations, +for the most part stretched themselves down to sleep; for the night +had been a broken one, owing to the fact that the Spaniards, +whenever they heard, or thought they heard, anyone moving in their +front, poured in a tremendous fire that roused the whole camp; and +was so wild and ill directed that several British officers and men, +on their left, were killed by it. + +Soon after midday the drums were heard to beat along the whole +length of the French line, and the troops were seen to be falling +in. Then the British were also called to arms, and the soldiers +cheerfully took their places in the ranks; glad that the matter was +to be brought to an issue at once, as they thought that a victory +would, at least, put an end to the state of starvation in which +they had for some time been kept. The French had, by this time, +learned how impossible it was to surmount the obstacles in front of +that portion of the allies' line occupied by the Spaniards. They +therefore neglected these altogether, and Sebastiani advanced +against the British division in the plains; while Victor, as +before, prepared to assail the British left, supported this time by +a great mass of cavalry. + +The French were soon in readiness for the attack. Ruffin's division +were to cross the valley, move along the foot of the mountain, and +turn the British left. Villatte was to guard the mouth of the +valley with one brigade, to threaten Hill with the other, and to +make another attempt to carry it. He was to be aided by half the +division of Lapisse, while the other half assisted Sebastiani in +his attack on the British centre. Milhaud's dragoons were placed on +the main road to Talavera, so as to keep the Spaniards from moving +to the assistance of the British. + +The battle began with a furious attack on the British right, but +the French were withstood by Campbell's division and Mackenzie's +brigade, aided by two Spanish columns; and was finally pushed back +with great loss, and ten of their guns captured; but as Campbell +wisely refused to break his line and pursue, the French rallied on +their reserve, and prepared to renew the attack. + +In the meantime Lapisse crossed the rivulet and attacked +Sherbrooke's division, composed of the Germans and Guards. This +brigade was, however, driven back in disorder. The Guards followed +hotly in pursuit; but the French reserves came up, and their +batteries opened with fury and drove the Guards back, while the +Germans were so hotly pressed, by Lapisse, that they fell into +confusion. The 48th, however, fell upon the flank of the advancing +French; the Guards and the Germans rallied, the British artillery +swept the French columns, and they again fell back. Thus the +British centre and right had succeeded in finally repelling the +attacks made upon them. + +On the left, as the French advanced, the 23rd Light Dragoons and +the 1st German Hussars charged the head of Ruffin's column. Before +they reached them, however, they encountered the ravine through +which the rivulet here ran. The Germans checked their horses when +they came upon this almost impassable obstacle. The 23rd, however, +kept on. Men and horses rolled over each other, but many crossed +the chasm and, forming again, dashed in between the squares into +which the French infantry had thrown themselves, and charged a +brigade of light infantry in their rear. Victor hurled two +regiments of cavalry upon them and the 23rd, hopelessly over +matched, were driven back with a loss of 207 men and officers, +being fully half the number that had ridden forward. The rest +galloped back to the shelter of Bassecour's division. + +Yet their effort had not been in vain. The French, astonished at +their furious charge, and seeing four distinct lines of cavalry +still drawn up facing them, made no further movement. Hill easily +repulsed the attack upon his position, and the battle ceased as +suddenly as it had begun, the French having failed at every point +they had attacked. + +Terence had, on seeing Ruffin's division marching towards him, +advanced along the slope until they reached the entrance to the +valley; and then, scattering on the hillside, had opened a heavy +and continuous fire upon the French, doing much execution among +their columns, and still more when they threw themselves into +square to resist the cavalry. He had given orders that, should +Ruffin send some of his battalions up the hill against them, they +were to retire up the slopes, taking advantage of every shelter, +and not to attempt to meet the enemy in close contact. No such +attack was, however, made. The French battalion most exposed threw +out a large number of skirmishers, and endeavoured to keep down the +galling fire maintained from the hillside; but as the Portuguese +took advantage of every stone and bush, and scarcely a man was +visible to the French, there were but few casualties among them. + +The loss of the British was in all, during the two days' fighting, +6200, including 600 taken prisoners. That of the French was 7400. +Ten guns were captured by Campbell's division, and seven left in +the woods by the French as they drew off, the next morning at +daybreak, to take up their position behind the Alberche. + +During the day Crauford's brigade came up, after a tremendous +march. The three regiments had, after a tramp of twenty miles, +encamped near Plasencia, when the alarm spread by the Spanish +fugitives reached that place. Crauford allowed his men two hours' +rest and then started to join the army, and did not halt until he +reached the camp; having in twenty-six hours, during the hottest +season of the year, marched sixty-two miles, carrying kit, arms, +and ammunition--a weight of from fifty to sixty pounds. Only +twenty-five men out of the three regiments fell out and, +immediately the brigade arrived, it took up the outpost duty in +front of the army. + +Terence was much gratified by the appearance, in general orders +that day, of the following notice: + +"The general commander-in-chief expresses his warm approbation of +the conduct of the two battalions of the Minho regiment of +Portuguese, commanded by Colonel O'Connor. This officer, on his own +discretion, moved from the position assigned to him, on seeing the +serious attack made on Colonel Donkin's brigade on the evening of +the 27th and, scaling the hill, opened so heavy a fire on the +French ascending it that five battalions fell back, without taking +part in the attack. This took place at the crisis of the +engagement, and had a decisive effect on its result." + +At eight o'clock a staff officer rode up, with orders for the Minho +regiment to return at once to the pass of Banos, as the news had +come in that the enemy beyond the hills were in movement. Terence +was to act in concert with the Spanish force there, and hold the +pass as long as possible. If the enemy were in too great strength +to be withstood, he was given discretion as to his movements; being +guided only by the fact that the British army would, probably, +march down the valley of the Tagus. + +If Soult crossed, "his force," the order added, "was estimated as +not exceeding 15,000 men." + + + +Chapter 3: Prisoners. + + +On the 31st of July Terence reached the neighbourhood of Banos and +learned, from the peasantry, that a French army had passed through +the town early on the preceding day. No resistance, whatever, had +been offered to its passage through the pass of Bejar; and the +Spanish at Banos had retreated hastily, after exchanging a few +shots with the French advanced guard. The peasantry had all +deserted their villages, but had had some skirmishes with small +foraging parties of cavalry. Several French stragglers had been +killed in the pass. + +Hoping to find some of these still alive, and to obtain information +from them, Terence continued his march for Banos; sending on two of +the best mounted of the Portuguese horsemen, to ascertain if there +was any considerable French force left there. He was within half a +mile of the town when he saw them returning, at full speed, chased +by a party of French dragoons; who, however, fell back when they +saw the advancing infantry. + +"What is your news?" Terence asked, as the troopers rode up. + +"Banos is full of French troops," one of them replied, "and columns +are marching down the pass. From what I can see, I should think +that there must be 16,000 or 20,000 of them." + +In fact, this was Soult's second army corps--the first, which had +preceded it, having that morning reached Plasencia, where they +captured 400 sick in the hospitals, and a large quantity of stores +that had been left there, from want of carriage, when the British +army advanced. Terence lost no time in retreating from so dangerous +a neighbourhood, and at once made for the mountains he had just +left. + +Two regiments of French cavalry set out in pursuit, as soon as the +party that had chased the Portuguese troopers entered Banos with +the news that a body of infantry, some 2000 strong, was close at +hand. They came up before the Portuguese had marched more than a +mile. The two battalions were halted, and thrown into square. The +French rode fearlessly down upon them, but were received with so +hot and steady a fire that they speedily drew off, with +considerable loss. Then the regiment ascended the hills and, half +an hour later, halted. + +"The question is, what is to be done?" Terence said to Herrara and +his two majors. "It is evident that, for once, the information we +obtained from the Spaniards is correct, and that Soult must have at +least 30,000 men with him. Possibly his full strength is not up +yet. By this time the force that passed yesterday must be at +Plasencia, and by tomorrow may be on the Tagus, and Sir Arthur's +position must be one of great danger. Putting Cuesta and the +Spaniards altogether aside as worthless, he has, even with that +brigade we saw marching in soon after we started, only 22,000 or +23,000 men; and on one side of him is Victor, with some 40,000; on +the other is Soult, with perhaps as many more. With starving and +exhausted troops his chances are small, indeed, unless he can cross +the Tagus. He might beat one marshal or the other, but he can +hardly beat the two of them. + +"The first thing to do is to send two troopers off, with duplicate +despatches, telling Sir Arthur of Soult's passage. He might not +otherwise hear of it for some time, and then it might be too late. +The peasantry and the village authorities will be too busy carrying +off their effects, and driving their animals to the hills, to think +for a moment of sending information. That is evidently the first +thing to be done. + +"Until we see what is going to happen, I don't think we can do +better than cross the Sierra, and encamp at some spot where we can +make out the movements of the French on the plain. At the same time +we can keep an eye on the road to Plasencia, and be able to send +information to Sir Arthur, if any further bodies of French troops +come down into the valley. Our position is evidently a dangerous +one. If the news has reached Sir Arthur, he will have fallen back +from Talavera at once. Victor will no doubt follow on his heels, +and his cavalry and those of Soult will speedily meet each other. +Therefore it will be, in all ways, best to see how matters develop +themselves before moving down into the plain." + +Accordingly two of the troopers were sent off with information that +15,000 French were already in the valley, and that as many more +would be there on the following day. Then the regiment marched +across the Sierra and took post high up on the slope, with +Plasencia ten miles away on the right, and the spires of Oropesa +visible across the valley. + +On the following day another army corps was seen descending from +Banos to Plasencia, while a large body of troops marched from that +town to Navalmoral, thus cutting off the retreat of the British by +the bridge of boats at Almaraz. Clouds of dust on the distant plain +showed that a portion, at least, of the Allied Army had arrived at +Oropesa; and bodies of French cavalry were made out, traversing the +plain and scattering among the villages. Two more troopers were +sent off with reports, and warned, like the others, to take +different routes, and make a wide circuit so as to avoid the +French, and then to come down upon Oropesa. If the troops there +were British, they were to deliver their reports to the general in +command. If it was occupied by Spaniards, they were to proceed to +Talavera and hand them in at headquarters. + +On the following day, still another army corps marched down to +Plasencia, raising Soult's force to 54,000. On that day Cuesta, who +had undertaken to hold Talavera, retreated suddenly; alarmed by +Victor's army making an advance, and leaving to their fate the 1500 +British wounded in the hospital. These, however, were benefited by +the change. They had been dying of hunger for, although there was +an abundance of provisions in Talavera, the inhabitants refused to +sell any to the British, and jealously concealed their stores in +their houses. Nor would Cuesta do anything to aid them; and thus +the men who had fought and suffered for the Spanish cause were left +to perish, while there was abundance around them. The conduct of +the Spaniards, from the moment the British crossed the frontier to +the time of their leaving Spain, was never forgotten or forgiven by +the British troops, who had henceforth an absolute hatred for the +Spanish, which contributed in no small degree to the excesses +perpetrated by them upon the inhabitants of Badajos, and other +places, taken subsequently by storm. + +The French, on entering Talavera, treated the British wounded with +the greatest kindness, and henceforth they were well fed and cared +for. + +The first report sent by Terence reached Sir Arthur safely, ten +hours after it was sent out, and apprised him for the first time of +the serious storm that was gathering in his rear; and he had, +without an hour's delay, given orders for the army to march to +Oropesa, intending to give battle to Soult before Victor could come +up to join his fellow marshal. The second report informed him of +the real strength of the army towards which he was marching, and +showed him the real extent of his danger. So he at once seized the +only plan of escape offered to him, marching with all speed to +Arzobispo, and crossing the Tagus by the bridge there, Cuesta's +army following him. As soon as the Tagus was passed, Crauford's +brigade was hurried on to seize the bridge of boats at Almaraz, and +prevent the French from crossing there. + +Fortunately, Soult was as ignorant of the position of the Allies as +Sir Arthur was of his and, believing that the British were +following Victor and pressing forward towards Madrid, he had +conducted his operations in a comparatively leisurely manner. +Therefore, it was not until the British were safely across the +Tagus that he ascertained the real state of affairs, and put +himself in communication with Victor. + +On the morning following the crossing Terence was apprised, by a +note sent back by one of the troopers, of the movement that had +taken place. It was written upon a small piece of paper, so that it +could be destroyed at once, by the bearer, if he should be +threatened with capture, and contained only the following words: + +"Your report invaluable. The Allied Army moves to Arzobispo, and +will cross the Tagus there. You must act according to your +judgment. I can give no advice." + +"Thank God the British army has escaped!" Terence said, after +reading the despatch to his officers; "now we have only to think of +ourselves. As to rejoining Sir Arthur, it is out of the question; +the valley is full of French troops. Ney has joined Soult, and +there are 100,000 Frenchmen between us and our army. If I had any +idea where Wilson is, we might endeavour to join him, for he must +be in the same plight as ourselves. Our only chance, so far as I +can see, is to cross their line of communications and to endeavour +to join Beresford, who is reported as marching down the frontier +from Almeida." + +"Would you propose to pass through Banos, Colonel?" Herrara asked. +"The mountains there are almost, if not quite, impassable; but we +might get a peasant to guide us." + +"I don't like going near Banos, Herrara. The French are almost sure +to have left a strong body there, and the chances are against our +finding a peasant; for the inhabitants of all the villages, for ten +miles round, have almost certainly fled and taken to the hills. + +"I think it would be safer to follow along this side of the Sierra, +cross the road a few miles above Plasencia, then make for the +mountains, and come down on the head of the river Coa. Beresford is +probably in the valley of that river. We are more likely to find a +guide, that way, than we are by going through Banos. We shall have +tough work of it whichever way we go, even if we are lucky enough +to get past without running against a single Frenchman." + +"Would it not be better to wait till nightfall, Colonel?" Bull +asked. + +Terence shook his head. + +"There is no moon," he said; "and as to climbing about among these +mountains in the dark, it would be worse than running the risk of a +fight with the French. Besides, we should have no chance whatever +of coming across a peasant. No, I think we must try it as soon as +it gets light, tomorrow morning. We had better dress up a score of +men in peasant clothes; and send them off, in couples, to search +among the hills. Whoever comes across a man must bring him in, +whether he likes it or not. The Spaniards are so desperately afraid +of the French that they will give us no information, whatever, +unless forced to do so; and we shall have even more difficulty than +the British. There must have been thousands of peasants, and +others, who knew that Soult had come down upon Plasencia; and yet +Sir Arthur obtained no news. + +"There is one comfort: there can be little doubt that Soult is just +as much in the dark as to the position of the British army." + +By nightfall three peasants had been brought in. All shook their +heads stolidly, when questioned in Portuguese; but upon Terence +having them placed against a rock, and twelve men brought up and +ordered to load their muskets, one of them said, in Spanish: + +"I know where a path across the mountains leaves the road, but I +have never been over the hills, and know nothing of how it runs." + +"Ah! I thought you could make out my question," Terence said. +"Well, you have saved the lives of yourself and your comrades. Take +us to the path, tomorrow, and set us fairly on it; and you shall be +allowed to go free, and be paid five dollars for your trouble." + +Then he turned to Bull. + +"Put four men to guard them," he said, "and let the guard be +changed once every two hours. Their orders will be to shoot the +fellows down, if they endeavour to make their escape. They are +quite capable of going down into Plasencia and bringing the French +upon us." + +At daybreak they were on the march and, two hours later, came down +into the valley through which the road from Banos ran down to +Plasencia. They had just crossed it when the head of a column of +cavalry appeared, coming down the valley. It at once broke into a +gallop. + +"How far is it to where the path begins to ascend the mountains?" +Terence asked, holding a pistol to the peasant's head. + +"Four miles," the man replied sullenly, looking with apprehension +at the French. + +Terence shouted orders to Bull and Macwitty to throw their men into +square, and as they had been marching, since they reached level +ground, in column of companies, the movement was carried out before +the enemy arrived. + +The French cavalry, believing that the battalions were Spanish, and +would break at once, charged furiously down upon them. They were, +however, received with so heavy a fire that they drew off +discomfited, leaving many men and horses on the ground. + +"They are a strong body," Terence said quietly to Bull, in the +centre of whose square he had taken up his position. "I should say +there are 3000 of them, and I am afraid they are the head of +another division." + +"Yes, there are the infantry coming down the valley. We must press +on, or we shall be caught before we get into the hills." + +The battalions were soon in motion but, immediately they started, +the cavalry prepared to charge again. + +"This will never do, Bull. If we form square every time, we shall +be delayed so much that the infantry will soon be up. You must do +it now, and quickly; but we will start next time in column, eight +abreast; and face the men round in lines, four deep either way, if +they charge again." + +The French, this time, drew off without pressing their charge home; +and then, trotting on, took their place between the Portuguese and +the mountains. + +"Form your leading company in line, four deep, Bull. The column +shall follow you." + +The formation was quickly altered and, preceded by the line, to +cover them from the charge in front, the column advanced at a rapid +pace. The cavalry moved forward to meet them, but as the two +parties approached each other the line opened so heavy a fire that +the French drew off from their front, both to the right and left. +Bull at once threw back a wing of each company, to prevent an +attack in flank; and so, in the form of a capital T, the column +kept on its way. Several times the French cavalry charged down, +compelling them to halt; but each time, after repulsing the attack, +the column went on. + +"It would be all right if we had only these fellows to deal with," +Terence said to Bull, "but their infantry are coming on fast." + +The plain behind was, indeed, covered with a swarm of skirmishers, +coming along at the double. + +"We must go at the double, too, Bull," Terence said, "or they will +be up long before we get to the hills. We are not halfway yet. Keep +the men well in hand, and don't let them fall into confusion. If +they do, the cavalry will be down upon us in a minute." + +The cavalry, however, were equally conscious of the importance of +checking the Portuguese, and again and again dashed down upon them, +with reckless bravery; suffering heavily whenever they did so, but +causing some delay each time they charged. + +"I shall go back to the rear, Bull. Mind, my orders are precise +that, whatever happens behind to us, you are to push forward until +you begin to climb the hills." + +Then, without waiting for an answer, he galloped back. + +Although the column pressed on steadily at the double, the delay +caused by the cavalry, and the fact that the French infantry were +broken up--and able, therefore, to run more quickly--was bringing +the enemy up fast. Herrara was riding at the head of the second +battalion, and to him Terence repeated the instructions he had +given Bull. + +"What are you going to do, Colonel?" the latter asked. + +"There is some very broken ground, a quarter of a mile ahead," he +replied. "I intend to hold that spot with the rear company. It will +be some little time before the French infantry will be able to form +and attack us; and the ground looks, to me, too broken for their +cavalry to act. As soon as I can see that you are far enough ahead +to gain the hill, before they can overtake you again, I shall +follow you with the company; but mind, should I not do so, you must +take the command of the two battalions, cross the mountains, and +join Beresford." + +He galloped on to Macwitty, who was riding in the rear, and +repeated the order to him. + +"Well, Colonel, let me stop behind with the company, instead of +yourself." + +"No, no, Macwitty. It is the post of danger and, as commanding +officer, I must take it. It is a question of saving the two +battalions at the cost of the company, and there is no doubt as to +the course to be taken. Do you ride on at once, and take your post +at the rear of the company ahead of this, and keep them steady. +Here come their cavalry down again on the flank." + +There was another charge, three or four heavy volleys, and then the +French drew off again. The bullets of their infantry were now +whistling overhead. + +"A hundred yards farther," Terence shouted, "and then we will face +them." + +In front lay an upheaval of rock, stretching almost like a wall +across the line they were following. It was a sort of natural +outwork, pushed out by nature in front of the hill, and rose some +fifty feet above the level of the plain. There were many places at +which it could be climbed, and up one of these the track ran +obliquely. Hitherto it had been but an ill-defined path, but here +some efforts had been made to render it practicable, by cutting +away the ground on the upper side, to enable laden mules to pass +up. + +Terence reined up at the bottom of the ascent, and directed the men +to take up their post on the crest; the leading half of the company +to the right, and the other half to the left of the path. Before +all were up the French light troops were clustering round, but a +rush was prevented by the heavy fire that opened from the brow +above, and the company were soon scattered along the crest, a yard +apart. + +In five minutes some two thousand French infantry were assembled. A +mounted officer rode some distance to the right and left, to +examine the ground. It was evident that he considered that the +position, held by 200 determined men, was a formidable one. Lying +down, as they were, only the heads of the Portuguese could be seen; +while a force attacking them would have to march across level +ground, affording no shelter whatever from the defenders' fire, and +then to climb a very steep ascent. Moreover, the whole force they +had been pursuing might be gathered, just behind. + +After another five minutes' delay, half a battalion broke up into +skirmishers; while the rest divided into two parties, and marched +parallel to the rocks, left and right. Terence saw that these +movements must be successful for, with 200 men, he could not defend +a line of indefinite length. However, his object had now been +achieved. The descent behind was even and regular, and he could see +the column winding up the hill, somewhat over half a mile away. Of +the French cavalry he could see nothing. They had, after their last +charge, ridden off, as if leaving the matter in the hands of their +infantry. + +He ordered the bugler to sound the retreat, in open order; and the +Portuguese, rising to their feet, went down the gentle slope at a +trot. They were halfway to the hills when the long lines of the +French cavalry were seen, sweeping down upon them from the right; +having evidently ridden along the foot of the steep declivity, +until they came to a spot where they were able to ascend it. + +At the sound of the bugle the rear company instantly ran together +and formed a square and, as the French cavalry came up, opened a +continuous fire upon them. Unable to break the line of bayonets, +the horsemen rode round and round the square, discharging their +pistols into it, and occasionally making desperate efforts to break +in. Suddenly the cavalry drew apart, and a battalion of infantry +marched forward, and poured their fire into the Portuguese. + +Terence felt that no more could be done. His main body was safe +from pursuit, and it would be but throwing away the lives of his +brave fellows, did he continue the hopeless fight. He therefore +waved a white handkerchief, in token of surrender; shouted to his +men to cease fire and, riding through them with sheathed sword, +made his way to the officer who appeared to be in command of the +cavalry. + +[Illustration: 'We surrender, sir, as prisoners of war.'] + +"We surrender, sir," he said, "as prisoners of war. We have done +all that we could do." + +He could speak but a few words of French, but the officer +understood him. + +"You have done more than enough, sir," he said. "Order your men to +lay down their arms, and I will guarantee their safety." + +He ordered his cavalry to draw back and, riding up to the infantry, +halted them. Terence at once ordered his men to lay down their +arms. + +"You have done all that men could do," he said. "You have saved +your comrades, and it is no dishonour to yield to twenty times your +own force. Form up in column, ready to march." + +The commander of the cavalry again rode up, this time accompanied +by another officer. + +"The general wishes to know, sir," the latter said in English, "who +you are, and what force this is?" + +"I am Colonel O'Connor, holding that rank in Lord Beresford's army; +and have the honour to be on the staff of Sir Arthur Wellesley, +though at present detached on special service. The two battalions +that have marched up the hill are the Minho regiment of Portuguese, +under my command. We were posted on the Sierra and, being cut off +from rejoining the British by the advance of Marshal Soult's army, +were endeavouring to retire across the mountains into Portugal, +when you cut us off." + +The officer translated the words to the general. + +"Tell him," the latter said, "that if all the Portuguese fought as +well as those troops, there would have been no occasion for the +British to come here to aid them. I have never seen troops better +handled, or more steady. This cannot be the first time they have +been under fire." + +Terence bowed, when the compliment was translated to him. + +"They fought, General, in the campaign last year," he said, "and +the regiment takes its name from the fact that they prevented +Marshal Soult from crossing at the mouth of the Minho; but their +first encounter with your cavalry was near Orense." + +"I remember it well," the general said, "for I was in command of +the cavalry that attacked you. Your men were not in uniform, then, +or I should have known them again. How did you come to be there? +For at that time, the British had not advanced beyond Cintra." + +"I had been sent with a message to Romana and, happening to come +across this newly-raised levy, without officers or commander, I +took the command and, aided by two British troopers and a +Portuguese lieutenant, succeeded in getting them into shape; and +did my best to hold the pass to Braga." + +"Peste!" the general exclaimed. "That was you again, was it? It was +the one piece of dash and determination shown by the Portuguese, +during our advance to Oporto, and cost us as many men as all the +rest of the fighting put together. + +"And now, Colonel, we must be marching. Major Portalis, here, will +take charge of you." + +In a few minutes the French cavalry and infantry were on their +march towards Plasencia, the Portuguese prisoners guarded on both +sides by cavalry marching with them; their captain being, like +Terence, placed in charge of an officer. The Portuguese marched +with head erect. They were prisoners, but they felt that they had +done well, and had sacrificed themselves to cover the retreat of +their comrades; and that, had it not been for the French infantry +coming up, they might have beaten off the attacks of their great +body of cavalry. + +On their arrival at Plasencia, the troops were placed in a large +building that had been converted into a prison. Here were some +hundreds of other prisoners, for the most part Spaniards, who had +been captured when Soult had suddenly arrived. + +Terence was taken to the quarters of General Foy, who was in +command there. Here he was again questioned, through the officer +who spoke English. After he translated his answers to the general, +the latter told him to ask Terence if he knew where Wilson was. + +"I do not, sir," he replied; "we were together on the Sierra, a +fortnight ago, but he marched suddenly away without communicating +with me, and I remained at Banos until ordered to march to the +Alberche. We took part in the battle there, and were then ordered +back, again to support the Spaniards at Banos; but Marshal Soult +had marched through the pass, and the Spaniards had disappeared +before we got there. We remained among the mountains until +yesterday when, hearing that the British had crossed the Tagus, and +seeing no way to rejoin them, I started to cross the mountains to +join Lord Beresford's force, wherever I might find it." + +"General Heron reports that the two battalions under your command +fought with extraordinary steadiness, and repulsed all the attempts +of his cavalry to break them; and finally succeeded in drawing off +to the mountains, with the exception of the two companies that +formed the rear guard. How is it that there is only one officer?" + +"They were, in fact, one company," Terence said. "My companies are +each about 200 strong, and the officer captured with me was its +captain." + +"General Heron also reports to me that your retreat was admirably +carried out," General Foy said, "and that no body of French +veterans could have done better. + +"Well, sir, if you are ready to give your parole not to escape, you +will be at liberty to move about the town freely, until there is an +opportunity of sending a batch of prisoners to France." + +"Thank you, general. I am ready to give my parole not to make any +attempt to escape, and am obliged to you for your courtesy." + +Terence had already thought over what course he had best take, +should he be offered freedom on parole, and had resolved to accept +it. The probabilities of making his escape were extremely small. +There would be no chance whatever of rejoining the army; and a +passage, alone, across the all-but-impassable mountains, was not to +be thought of. Therefore he decided that, at any rate for the +present, he would give his promise not to attempt to escape. + +Quarters were assigned to him in the town, in a house where several +French officers were staying. These all showed him great courtesy +and kindness. Between the English and French the war was, +throughout, conducted on honourable terms. Prisoners were well +treated, and there was no national animosity between either +officers or men. + +When he went out into the town one of the French officers generally +accompanied him, and he was introduced to a number of others. He +set to work, in earnest, to improve the small knowledge of French +that he possessed and, borrowing some French newspapers, and buying +a dictionary in the town, he spent a considerable portion of his +time in studying them. + +He remained three weeks at Plasencia. During that time he heard +that the army of Venegas had been completely routed by Victor, that +Cuesta had been badly beaten soon after crossing the Tagus, and +Albuquerque's cavalry very roughly treated. Five guns and 400 +prisoners had been taken. Ney had marched through Plasencia, on his +way back to Valladolid to repress an insurrection that had broken +out in that district; and on his way met Wilson, who was trying to +retreat by Banos, and who was decisively beaten and his command +scattered. + +Terence was now told to prepare to leave, with a convoy of +prisoners, for Talavera. He was the only British officer and, being +on parole, the officer commanding the detachment marching with the +prisoners invited him to ride with him, and the two days' journey +was made very pleasantly. + +At Talavera he remained for a week. The Portuguese prisoners +remained there, but the British who had been captured in Plasencia, +and the convalescents from the hospital at Talavera--in all 200 +strong, among whom were six British officers--were to march to the +frontier, there to be interned in one of the French fortresses. + +The officer who had commanded the escort, on the march from +Plasencia, spoke in high terms of Terence to the officer in charge +of the two hundred men who were to go on with them. The party had +been directed not to pass through Madrid, as the sight of over two +hundred British prisoners might give rise to a popular demonstration +by the excitable Spaniards, which would possibly lead to disorder. +He was therefore directed to march by the road to the Escurial, and +then over the Sierra to Segovia, then up through Valladolid and +Burgos. The escort was entirely composed of infantry and, as Terence +could not therefore take his horse with him, he joined the other +officers on foot. + +To his great surprise and joy he found that one of these was his +chum, Dick Ryan. + +"This is an unexpected pleasure, Dicky!" he exclaimed. + +"Well, yes, I am as pleased as you are at our meeting, Terence; but +I must own that the conditions might have been more pleasant." + +"Oh, never mind the conditions!" Terence said. "It is quite enough, +for the present, that we both are here; and that we have got before +us a journey that is likely to be a jolly one. I suppose that you +have given your parole, as I have; but when we are once in prison +there will be an end of that, and it is hard if, when we put our +heads together, we don't hit on some plan of escape. + +"Do you know the other officers? If so, please introduce me to +them." + +As soon as the introductions were completed, Terence asked Ryan +where he had been wounded. + +"I was hit by a piece of a French shell," the latter replied. +"Fortunately it did not come straight at me, but scraped along my +ribs, laying them pretty well bare. As it was a month ago, it is +quite healed up; but I am very stiff still, and am obliged to be +very careful in my movements. If I forget all about it, and give a +turn suddenly, I regularly yell; for it feels as if a red-hot iron +had been stuck against me. However, I have learned to be careful +and, as long as I simply walk straight on, I am pretty well all +right. + +"It was a near case, at first; and I believe I should have died of +starvation if the French had not come in. Those brutes of Spaniards +would do nothing whatever for me, and I give you my word of honour +that nothing passed my lips, but water, for three days." + +"Perhaps it was a good thing for you, Dicky, and kept down fever." + +"I would have run the chance of a dozen fevers, to have got a good +meal," Ryan said indignantly. "I don't know but that I would have +chanced it, even for a crust of bread. I tell you, if the French +had not come in when they did, there would not have been a man +alive in hospital at the end of another forty-eight hours. The men +were so furious that, if they could have got at arms, I believe +everyone who could have managed to crawl out would have joined in a +sally, and have shot down every Spaniard they met in the streets, +till they were overpowered and killed. + +"Now, let us hear your adventures. Of course, I saw in orders what +good work you did, that day when you were in our camp, against the +French when they attacked Donkin. Some of our fellows went across +to see you, the morning after the big battle; but they could not +find you, and heard afterwards, from some men of Hill's division, +that you had been seen marching away in a body, along the hills." + +Terence then gave an account of the attack by the French upon his +regiment, and how he had fallen into their hands. + +"That was well done, Terence. There is some pleasure in being taken +prisoner, in that sort of way. What will become of your regiment, +do you suppose?" + +"I have no idea. Herrara may be appointed to the command. I should +think that most likely he would be, but of course Sir Arthur may +put another English officer at its head. However, I should say that +there is no likelihood of any more fighting, this year. Ney's corps +has gone north, which is a sign that there will be no invasion of +Portugal at present; and certainly Sir Arthur is not likely to take +the offensive again, now that his eyes have been thoroughly opened +to the rascality and cowardice of the Spaniards; and by next spring +we two may be back again. We have got into so many scrapes +together, and have always pulled through them, that I don't think +the French will keep us long. + +"Have you stuck to your Portuguese, Dicky?" + +"I have, and am beginning to get on very fairly with it." + +"That is right. When we get back I will apply for you as my +adjutant, if I get the command of the regiment again." + + + +Chapter 4: Guerillas. + + +The marches were short, as many of the prisoners were still weak +and, indeed, among their guard were many convalescents who had +recently been discharged from the hospital at Toledo, and who were +going back to France. The little column was accompanied by four +waggons, two of which were intended for the conveyance of any who +should prove unable to march; and the others were filled with +provisions for consumption by the way, together with a few tents, +as many of the villages that would be their halting places were too +small to afford accommodation for the 400 men, even if every house +was taken up for the purpose. Although the first day's march was +only twelve miles, the two empty waggons were quite full before +they reached their halting place; and many of the guard had placed +their guns and cartridge boxes on the other carts. + +It was now the middle of August, and the heat in the valley of the +Tagus was overpowering. The convoy, however, had marched at six in +the morning; and halted at eight, in the shade of a large olive +wood; and did not continue its march until five in the afternoon. +The night was so warm that the English prisoners, and many of their +guards, preferred lying down in the open and throwing the blanket +(with which each had been furnished) over him to keep off the dew, +to going into the stuffy cottages, where the fleas would give them +little chance of rest. + +On the third day they arrived at the village of Escurial. The next +morning they began to mount the pass over the Sierra, and slept +that night in an empty barracks, at Segovia. Here they left the +main road leading through Valladolid and took one more to the east, +stopping at small villages until they arrived at Aranda, on the +Douro. Thence they marched due north, to Gamonal. + +They were now on the main road to the frontier, passed through +Miranda and Zadorra, and began to ascend the slopes of the +Pyrenees. The marches had, for some days, been considerably longer +than when they first started. The invalids had gained strength and, +having no muskets to carry, were for the most part able to march +eighteen or twenty miles without difficulty. Four had been left +behind in hospital at Segovia, but with these exceptions all had +greatly benefited by steady exercise, and an ample supply of food. + +"I could do a good deal of travelling, in this way," one of the +officers said, as they marched out from Miranda. "Just enough +exercise to be pleasant; no trouble about baggage or route, or +where one is to stop for the night; nothing to pay, and everything +managed for you. What could one want for, more?" + +"We could do with a little less dust," Dick Ryan said, with a +laugh; "but we cannot expect everything." + +"Unfortunately, there will be an end to our marching, and not a +very pleasant one," Terence said. "At present, one scarcely +recognizes that one is a prisoner. The French officers certainly do +all in their power to make us forget it; and their soldiers, and +ours, try their best to hold some sort of conversation together. I +feel that I am making great progress in French, and it is +especially jolly when we halt for the night, and get the bivouac +fires burning, and chat and laugh with the French officers as +though we were the best friends in the world." + +The march was, indeed, conducted in a comfortable and easy fashion. +At starting, the prisoners marched four abreast, and the French two +abreast at each side; but before a mile had been passed the order +was no longer strictly observed, and the men trudged along, smoking +their pipes, laughing and talking, the French and English +alternately breaking into a marching song. There was no fear of the +prisoners trying to escape. They could, at night, have got away +from their guards easily enough; but there was nowhere for them to +go, if they had done so. The English, smarting from the cruelty and +ill faith of the inhabitants of Talavera and the Spanish +authorities, felt a burning hatred of the Spanish; while the +Spaniards, on their side, deceived by the lying representations of +their Juntas, had no love whatever for the English, though ready +enough to receive money and arms from them. + +On leaving Zadorra, the French officer in command said to Terence: + +"Now, colonel, we shall have to be more careful during our marches, +keeping a sharp lookout at night. The country here is infested by +guerillas, whom all our efforts cannot eradicate. The mountains of +Navarre and Biscay are full of them. Sometimes they are in bands of +fifteen or twenty strong, sometimes they are in hundreds. Some of +them are at ordinary times goatherds, shepherds, muleteers, and +peasants; but a number of them are disbanded soldiers--the remains +of armies we have defeated and broken up, and who prefer this wild +life in the mountains to returning to their homes. Our convoys are +constantly attacked, and have always to be accompanied by a strong +guard." + +"As we have no waggons with us, I should think that they would +hardly care to molest us," Terence said. + +"That renders it less likely, certainly, colonel; but they fight +from hatred as much as for booty, and no French soldier who falls +into their hands is ever spared. Generally they are put to death +with atrocious tortures. At first there was no such feeling here +and, when my regiment was quartered at Vittoria, some three years +ago, things were quiet enough. You see, the feeling gradually grew. +No doubt some of our men plundered. Many of the regiments were +composed of young conscripts, with very slight notions of +discipline. Those from the country districts were, as a rule, quiet +lads enough; but among those from the towns, especially such places +as Toulouse, Lyons, and Marseilles, were young scoundrels ready for +any wickedness, and it is to these that the troubles we now have +are largely due. + +"Of course the peasants, when they were able to do so, retaliated +upon these marauders. The feeling of hatred grew, on both sides. +Straggling parties of our men were surrounded, captured, and then +hung, shot, or burnt alive. + +"Then, on our side, villages were destroyed and the peasants shot +down. Lately, that is, after the defeats of their armies, numbers +of fugitives took to the hills, threw away their uniforms, obtained +peasants' dresses, and set up as what they called guerillas, which +is only another term for bandits; for although their efforts are +chiefly directed against us, they do not hesitate to plunder their +own people, when they need provisions, and are a perfect scourge to +all the villages among the hills between the Bay of Biscay and the +Mediterranean. Of course, they are strongest along the line of +communication with France; but it may be said that, roughly, where +there are mountains there are guerillas, though there are but few +of them along the hills we crossed between the valley of the Tagus +and that of the Douro. + +"This is for two reasons: in the first place, there are very few +villages, and they would have difficulty in maintaining themselves; +and in the second place, because hitherto Leon and Old Castile, on +the north of the Sierra, have always been under different commands +to that in the Tagus valley, and therefore there has been but small +communication between them, except by messengers with despatches +from Madrid. The passes have scarcely been used and, indeed, in +winter they are practically altogether impassable; except that +along the valley of the Ebro. We found that to our cost, when we +marched with Napoleon to cut off your British General Moore. We +lost nearly two days getting through them, and the delay saved your +army." + +"Yes, it was a very close thing," Terence said. "As I have told +you, I was with Moore; and if the troops from the south had come up +but six hours earlier, it would have gone very hard with us." + +"It was an awful time," the officer said, "and I think our army +must have suffered quite as much as yours did. Soult's force was +reduced fully to half its strength, when he first arrived on that +hill near Corunna. Of course the stragglers came in rapidly, but a +great number never returned to their colours again--some died of +cold and hardship, others were cut off and murdered by the +peasantry. Altogether, we had an awful time of it. Your men were, +in one respect, better off than ours; for your stragglers were not +regarded with hostility by the peasants, whereas no mercy was shown +to ours." + +"Yes, major, one of the battalions that fought at Talavera was +entirely composed of men who had straggled in the retreat, and who +afterwards succeeded in gaining the Portuguese frontier." + +That evening they halted, for the night, at a small village high up +in the passes. The French officer took every precaution against +surprise. Twenty sentries were placed at various points round the +village; and as many more were posted, in pairs, three or four +hundred yards farther out. + +At three in the morning, several shots were fired. The troops all +got under arms, and parties were sent out to the outposts. At two +of these posts both the sentries were found stabbed to the heart. +At others men had been seen crawling up towards them, and the shots +that had aroused the troops had been fired. The outposts were +recalled to the village, and the soldiers remained under arms until +morning. + +As soon as it was daybreak a scattered fire opened from the hills +on either side of the valley, and it was evident that these were +occupied by strong parties. The villagers, on being questioned, +denied all knowledge of these bands; but under threats said that +they had heard that Minas, with a very strong force, was in the +neighbourhood, and that the Impecinado had been reported to be +among the hills between the pass and that of Roncesvalles. + +"What strength do you put them down at, colonel?" the major asked +Terence. + +"I should say, from what we can see of them, that there must be +four or five hundred on each hill." + +"They must have had information from their spies at Zadorra, +colonel, and half a dozen bands must have united to crush us. + +"Diable, that was a good shot!" he exclaimed, as his shako was +struck from his head by a bullet. "That is the worst of these +fellows. They are uncommonly good shots. You see, almost all these +mountain men are accustomed to carry guns, and the charcoal burners +and shepherds eke out a living by shooting game and sending it down +to the towns." + +"What are you thinking of doing, major?" + +"I shall hold the village," the latter replied. "We might get +through the pass, but I doubt whether we should do so; and if we +did, my men and yours would suffer terribly. Can I rely upon your +fellows keeping quiet?" + +"I think so. At any rate, we will all go round and order them to do +so." + +There was, however, no necessity to impress this on the men. Two of +them had already been wounded by the guerillas' fire. + +"Why, sir," one of them said, "if we had but muskets here, we would +turn out and help the French to drive those fellows off. The French +have behaved very well to us, while the Spaniards did their best to +starve us to death; and there ain't one of us who wouldn't jump at +the chance of paying them out." + +"All right, men!" said Terence. "I agree with you, as to the +treatment you have received; however, we are not here to fight. We +are prisoners, and have nothing to do with the fray, one way or the +other; though I don't mean to say that I should not, myself, be +glad to see the French beat the guerillas off." + +The other officers found the same spirit among the soldiers they +questioned. + +"I quite agree with them," one of the officers said, "and if there +were muskets handy I would not mind leading them, myself, if it +were not for the uniform. Sir Arthur would scarcely be pleased if, +among all his other worries, he got a despatch from the central +Junta, complaining that a large number of innocent peasants had +been killed by English troops, fighting by the side of the French." + +Gradually the guerillas drew in towards the village, taking +advantage of every stone and bush, and rarely giving a chance to +the French infantry. Their aim was exceedingly accurate and, +whenever a French soldier showed himself from behind a hut to fire, +he was fortunate if he got back again without receiving a bullet. + +"This is getting serious," the French major said, coming into the +cottage where the English officers were gathered. "I have lost +thirty-eight killed and wounded, already. I have had the wounded +carried into the church, and some of your men are unloading the +provision waggons, and taking the contents inside. They have +requisitioned every utensil that will hold water in the village. No +doubt we shall be able to hold out there till some other detachment +comes along the road." + +"I think that it is a very good plan, major," Terence said. "They +would hardly be able to carry it by assault, unless they burnt down +the door; and you ought to be able to prevent them from doing +that." + +Half an hour later, the whole French force was collected in the +church. As soon as the Spaniards found what had happened, they +speedily entered the village; and opened fire from every window +giving a view of the church, and from loopholes that they quickly +made in the walls. + +Terence noticed that, when the British soldiers entered the church, +most of them carried heavy staves. A sergeant came up, and saluted. + +"We have had four men killed and eight wounded, sir. The men +declare that they are not going to stand still and see the French +murdered by these fellows, and I doubt if any orders will keep them +back." + +"Very well, sergeant. I will speak to them, presently. + +"Now, gentlemen," he said, to the other officers, "three of you are +senior to me in our own army and, though I own that I don't know +how matters should stand, holding as I do Lord Beresford's +commission as colonel, I am perfectly willing to place myself under +the orders of whoever may be senior of you." + +"I believe I am the senior," one of the captains said; "but I +should imagine that Lord Beresford's commission would, for the +time, rank just as if it had been signed by our own authorities. +Moreover, you are on Wellesley's staff. You have seen more service +out here than any of us, and I think that you are certainly +entitled to the command; though really, I don't see what we can do, +in our uniforms." + +"I quite agree with you, Captain Travers, and therefore my proposal +is that we shall all take them off, and fight in our shirt sleeves. +The guerillas will then not be able to affirm that there were any +men in English uniforms assisting the French." + +"I think the idea is an excellent one," Captain Travers said. + +"Then in that case I will act upon it;" and Terence went up to the +English soldiers, who were standing in a group in the middle of the +church. + +"I am sure you quite understand, my men," he said, "that it would +never do for you to be fighting, in British uniforms, against the +Spaniards; otherwise, I leave the matter in your hands. But I may +mention that it is the intention of myself, and the other officers, +to defend this church without our coats and caps. If any of you +like to do the same, of course you can join us. I give no orders +whatever on the subject, but you see that it would get rid of the +inconvenience of soldiers, in British uniforms, fighting against +the Spaniards." + +The men answered with a shout of satisfaction, mingled with +laughter and, in less than a minute, the scarlet uniforms had +disappeared. The muskets of the French killed and wounded were +appropriated, and the rest of the English prisoners seized their +clubs. + +For some hours the fight continued and, from the roof of the church +belfry and windows, a hot fire answered the incessant fusillade of +the Spaniards. The French and English officers were obliged, +constantly, to impress upon the men that they must husband their +ammunition; as there was no saying how long they might be besieged +before a detachment, strong enough to turn the scale, arrived. + +"Maintain a fire heavy enough to make them keep at it. Their +ammunition is likely to run short as soon as ours, and there is not +much chance of their being able to replenish it. But don't fire at +random. Let every bullet tell. Take a steady aim at the windows +through which they are firing." + +Late in the afternoon the fire of the guerillas slackened a good +deal, and it was evident that their leaders were enjoining them not +to waste their ammunition. As it became dark, the officers gathered +again in the body of the church. The total loss had risen to +thirty-two killed and fifty wounded, the English casualties being +about a third of the whole. + +"It is a heavy loss," the major said, "and I have noticed that, as +the fire slackened, the proportion of men hit has been larger. I +suppose that they are only keeping their best shots at work." + +"I should fancy," Terence said, "that if we were to make a sortie, +we could scatter them altogether. As soon as it is dark we might +get out by that sacristy door at the rear. They gave up the attack +on that side some time ago, as they could not get any shelter; and +when they found that was so, they betook themselves to houses where +they were better covered. If we were to go out noiselessly and +sweep round the village; so as to fall upon it in two bodies, one +at each end; they will take us for a body of troops just arrived. +Even if they do hear us, as we go out, we can go straight at them; +and should, I have no doubt, be able to clear the place with a +rush. + +"The only thing is, major, I should be glad if your soldiers would +take off their coatees, too, so that there would be nothing to +distinguish our men from yours. What do you think?" + +"I think that it will be much the best plan," Captain Travers said. +"In the first place, it is probable that they will try to burn us +out, tonight; and we could not hope to prevent their piling faggots +against the doors, in the dark. For that reason, alone, I think +that it will be much better to attack them than wait for them to +attack us. + +"We need only leave some twenty of the less seriously wounded men +to guard the place. When we sally out, the guerillas will have +plenty to do without making an attack on the church. I certainly +think that we are not likely to lose so many lives in a sortie as +we should do in the defence, here, against a night attack." + +"I certainly am of your opinion, colonel," the French major said; +"and if you and your men will join us, I have no doubt that we +shall be able to clear the village." + +As soon as it became quite dark, the men on the roof were all +called down; with the exception of one or two, who were ordered to +continue to fire from various spots there and in the belfry, so +that the Spaniards should not discover that the garrison had been +withdrawn. Then the French were drawn up, and divided into two +parties. The English who had muskets were told off, in equal +numbers, to each of these parties; as were those who had nothing +but their clubs. The major then ordered his soldiers to take off +their coats, and to leave their shakos behind them. + +The French major took the command of one party, and asked Terence +to take command of the other. This he declined. + +"No, sir, it is better that one of your own officers should be in +command. We will divide ourselves between the two parties." + +The major now impressed upon his men the necessity for absolute +quiet, and for marching as lightly and silently as possible. The +English officers gave similar instructions to their men. It was +arranged that, when the door was opened, the two parties should +issue out simultaneously, two abreast; so that if the alarm was +given before all were out, they would be able to turn right and +left, and attack in both directions at once. A French lieutenant +was appointed to remain in the church, and command the little +garrison of wounded men. + +Those who sallied out were to stoop low as they went, and were to +keep a few paces apart. Some hangings in the church were pulled +down and torn up into strips, with which the men were directed to +muffle their boots. + +There was no mistaking the ardour with which the soldiers prepared +for the sortie. Both English and French were indignant at being +pent up by a foe they thoroughly despised, and were eager to be at +the enemy. The casualties added to their wrath; one of the French +officers had been killed, and another hurt seriously; while three +of the English had also been wounded, though in each case but +slightly. + +The bolts of the door were noiselessly drawn, and that of the lock +forced back; then the two little parties stole out, in the order in +which they had been directed. The guerillas had just begun to fire +heavily, as a prelude, Terence had no doubt, to a serious attack +upon the church. Fortunately there were no houses at the back of +the church, and no shout indicated that the party were seen. They +therefore kept together, until fifty or sixty yards from the door; +then they separated, and continued their way to the ends of the +village to which they had been, respectively, assigned. + +Then at one end of the village a French trumpeter sounded the +charge, and two drummers at the other beat the same order, +vigorously, and with loud cheers they rushed down the street, the +French and English alike shouting. It had been arranged that, while +the French held their way straight on, shooting down the Spaniards +as they poured out into the street, the British should break up +into small detachments, burst their way into the houses, and +overpower the enemy there. They found the first houses they entered +deserted, and the soldiers uttered exclamations of impatience as +they heard the heavy roll of firing in the main street. As they +approached the centre of the village, however, they came upon a +number of the Spaniards rushing from their houses. + +The men who had arms opened fire at once upon them, while those +with clubs dashed forward, levelling the panic-stricken guerillas +to the ground with their heavy blows, and arming themselves with +their muskets and bandoleers. Thus the firing soon became general, +and the Spaniards, struck with utter dismay, and believing that +they had been attacked by a heavy column that had just arrived, +speedily took to headlong flight, most of them throwing away their +arms as they fled. In some of the houses there were short but +desperate conflicts but, in a quarter of an hour after the first +shot was fired, there was not a guerilla remaining alive in the +village, upwards of a hundred and fifty having been killed; while +on the side of their assailants only some fifteen had been killed, +and twenty-eight wounded. + +They soon formed up in the street, and were told off, in parties of +twelve, to the houses in the outskirts of the village. Three in +each party were to keep watch, by turns, while the rest slept. An +English officer was to remain in charge on one side of the street, +and a French officer on the other. The rest went back to the +church, whose doors were now thrown open. + +"I thank you most heartily, gentlemen," the French officer said, to +Terence and to the other British officers, "for the immense service +that you have rendered us. Had it not been for your aid, our +position would have been a very precarious one, before morning. As +it is, I think we need fear no further interruption. We are now all +armed; and as, with the wounded fit for work, we are still three +hundred strong, we should beat off any force likely to attack us; +though indeed, I have no belief that they will rally again. At any +rate, their losses have been extremely heavy; and the streets were +completely strewn with guns, so that I doubt whether half of those +who got away have carried their weapons with them." + +The next morning, indeed, it was found that in all about 400 +muskets had been left behind. All that remained over, after arming +the British soldiers, were broken up and thrown down the wells. +Enough provisions were collected, among the houses, to furnish the +whole with three or four days' rations. The dead were buried in a +field near the village, those wounded too severely to march were +placed in the waggons; and the rest, who had now resumed their +uniforms, set out in high spirits. They were in the same order as +before, but the prisoners were told to carry their muskets at the +trail, while the French shouldered theirs; so that, viewed from a +distance, the British should appear unarmed. + +"That has been a grand bit of excitement, Terence," Dick Ryan said +gleefully to his friend, as they marched along together. "Those +fellows certainly fight a good deal more pluckily than the regular +troops do. It was a capital idea to make all the men take off their +uniforms, for I don't suppose the Spaniards, even for a moment, +dreamt that we were among their assailants; at any rate, they have +no proof that we were. + +"You really must get me as your adjutant, Terence. I see there is +very much more fun to be got out of your sort of fighting than +there is with the regiment. I am very pleased, now, that I stuck to +Portuguese as you advised me; though it was a great bore, at +first." + +"I hope, Dicky, we sha'n't find, when we get back in the spring, +that the corps has been turned over to Beresford as part of his +regular command; for I must say that I quite appreciate the +advantage of independence. + +"Well, this business ought to do us some good. No doubt the major +will report, in warm terms, the assistance we have rendered him; +and we shall get good treatment. Of course, some of their prisons +must be better than others and, if they will confine us in some +place near the frontier, instead of marching us half through +France, it will make it all the easier for us to get away. It is +not the getting out of prison that is the difficulty, but the +travelling through the country. I am getting on well with my +French, but there is no hope of being able to speak well enough to +pass as a native. As for you, you will have to keep your mouth shut +altogether, which will be mightily difficult." + +"You will manage it somehow, Terence. I have no fear of you getting +me through the country. It is getting out of the country that +seems, to me, the difficulty." + +"There is one thing, Dicky. We need be in no hurry about it. There +is little chance of fighting beginning for another six or seven +months and, directly we come to the end of our march, wherever it +may be, we must begin to pick up as much French as we can, from our +guards. In three or four months I ought, at least, to be able to +answer questions; not perhaps in good French, but in French as good +as, say, a Savoyard workman or musician might be able to muster." + +"Oh, Lor'!" Dick Ryan said, with a deep sigh, "you don't mean to +say that I must begin to work on another language, just after I +have been slaving, for the last six months, at Portuguese?" + +"Not unless you like, Dicky. I can either start alone, or with +someone else who has some knowledge of French; but I am not going +to run the risk of being recaptured by taking anyone with me who +cares so little for liberty that he grudges three or four hours' +work, a day, to get up the means of making his escape." + +"Oh, of course I shall learn," Ryan said pettishly. "You always get +your own way, Terence. It was so at Athlone: you first of all began +by asking my opinion, and then carried out things exactly as you +proposed, yourself. Learning the language is a horrid nuisance, but +I see that it has to be done." + +"I expect, Dicky, you will have to make up as a woman. You see, you +are not much taller than a tallish woman." + +"Well, that would be rather a lark," Ryan said; "only don't you +think I should be almost too good-looking for a French woman?" + +"You might be that, Dicky. It is certainly a drawback. If I could +get hold of a good-sized monkey's skin, I might sew you up in it." + +"A bear skin would be better, I should say," Dick laughed; "but I +don't think anyone would think that it was a real bear. I saw a +chap with one once, at Athlone: no man could open his mouth as wide +as that beast did; and as to its tongue, it would be four times as +long as mine. No, I think the woman idea would be best; but I +should have to shave very close." + +"Shave!" Terence repeated, scornfully. "Why, I could not see any +hair on your face with a magnifying glass. If that were the only +drawback, the matter could be arranged without difficulty." + +Without farther adventure, they crossed the mountains and came down +to Bayonne. At each halting place where French troops were +stationed, the British prisoners were received with warm +hospitality by them, when they learned from their comrades that the +British had fought side by side with the French against the +guerillas, and had saved them from what might have been a very +serious disaster. The French shook hands with them warmly, patted +them on the shoulders, with many exclamations of "Braves garcons!" +and they were led away to cafes, and treated as the heroes of the +day, while the officers were entertained by those of the garrison. + +At Bayonne they and their escort parted on the most cordial terms, +the French exclaiming that it was a shame such brave fellows should +be held as prisoners; and that they ought to be released at once, +and sent back in a ship, with a flag of truce, to Portugal. + +The major, after handing over the soldiers to the prison +authorities, took Terence and the other British officers to the +headquarters of the governor of the town; and introduced them to +him, giving him a lively account of the fight with the guerillas, +and the manner in which the prisoners, armed only with clubs and +the muskets of the soldiers no longer able to use them, had made +common cause with the French and, joining them in the sortie, +defeated the Spanish with heavy loss. The governor expressed, +courteously, his thanks to the officers for the part they had +taken. + +"I shall forward Major Marcy's report to headquarters, gentlemen, +and shall be happy to give you the liberty of the town on parole. I +have no doubt that, if no other good comes of your adventure, you +will be placed among an early list of officers to be exchanged." + +"I am very much obliged to you, general," Terence said, "but I and +Lieutenant Ryan would prefer not to give our parole. I don't say we +are likely to make our escape but, at any rate, we should like to +be able to take any opportunity, if we saw one." + +The general smiled. + +"Of course, it must be as you like, sir; but I think that you are +wrong. However, at any time, if you like to change your minds, I +will give instructions to the officer in command of the prison to +release you, immediately you give your parole not to leave the +town." + +The matter had been talked over on the march, and the others now +expressed their willingness to give their parole. They had told +Terence they thought he was wrong, and that it would be impossible +to make an escape, as it would be necessary to traverse either the +whole of Spain or the whole of France before he could find any +means of rejoining the army; and that, before long, they might be +exchanged. + +"I don't think there is a prospect of an early exchange," Terence +said. "There cannot have been many prisoners taken, during this +short campaign; and I don't suppose there will be any talk of +exchanges, for some time to come. I am particularly anxious to get +back again, if I possibly can, as I am afraid that my regiment will +be broken up; and that, unless I get back before the campaign +begins in spring, I shall not get the command again. So I mean to +get away, if I can. Anyhow, I would just as soon be in prison as +walking about the streets of Bayonne. So I have quite made up my +mind not to give my parole." + +The officers all returned to the prison quarters assigned to them; +the difference being that those on parole could go in and out as +they chose, and could, at will, take their meals in the town; while +Terence and Ryan were placed together in a room, with a sentry at +the door, whose instructions were to accompany them whenever they +wished to go beyond the door and to walk in the prison yard, or on +the walls surrounding it. + + + +Chapter 5: An Escape. + + +"Well, here we are, Terence," Ryan said cheerfully, as the door of +their cell closed behind them; "and now, what next?" + +"The next thing is to look round, Dick. Other matters can wait. One +cannot form the remotest idea as to the possibilities of an escape, +until one has found out everything about the place. I should say +that it will be quite soon enough to discuss it, in another couple +of months. + +"Now, as to the room; there is nothing to grumble at here. Two +truckle beds, not altogether luxurious in appearance but, at any +rate, a good deal softer than the ground on which we have been +sleeping, for months past. A couple of chairs, designed for use +rather than comfort; but which will do to sit on, while we take our +meals, and at other times we can use the beds as sofas. A +good-sized piece of carpet, a table, and what looks like a pudding +dish to wash in. + +"Things might have been better, and they might have been a great +deal worse. As to our food, we must reserve comment until they +bring us some. + +"Now, as to funds, I had only twenty-five crowns on me when I was +captured. You were rather better off, as you had ten pounds in gold +and eight crowns in silver. You see, had we given our parole like +the others, and gone in for luxurious feeding outside, our stock +would soon have given out; and money is an essential for carrying +out an escape, when that escape involves perhaps weeks of +travelling, and certainly disguises of different kinds. We have not +a penny too much for that, and must resolve to eschew all luxuries +except tobacco, and perhaps a bottle of wine on Sundays." + +"Our windows, as you observe, are very strongly barred. They look +westward, but that range of buildings opposite prevents our getting +a view of the sea. One thing is evident, at once: that it is no +manner of use for us to think of cutting through those bars, or +dislodging them; for we should only, on lowering ourselves, be in +the courtyard, and no nearer escape than we were before we began +the job. It is a good thing to get at least one point off our mind. + +"Now, Dick, before we go further, let us make an agreement that we +will always talk in French. I know enough of it to be able to +assist you, and it will be an amusement, as well as a help, to +accustom ourselves to talk in it." + +"All right," Ryan said, resignedly; "but I bargain that, for an +hour a day, we drop it altogether. It will be an awful nuisance; +and one must give one's tongue a rest, occasionally, by letting it +straighten itself out a bit." + +The door now opened, and one of the warders entered with two large +bowls of broth, a fair-sized piece of the meat from which it was +made, a dish of vegetables, a large piece of bread, and a bottle of +wine. + +"This is your supper, messieurs. In the morning you have coffee and +a piece of bread; at twelve o'clock a meal like this, with a bottle +of wine between you." + +"Thank you," Terence said cheerfully, "that will do extremely well. +Are there any other British officers here?" + +"None, except your comrades. There were some naval officers here +last week, but they have been sent into the interior. We do not +have many prisoners here. Those captured at sea, by warships or +privateers, are generally taken to Brest and, so far, we have not +had many of your nation sent from Spain. There are Spaniards, +sometimes, but they do not count. Those that are taken are +generally drafted into the Spanish corps of our army." + +"Can we buy tobacco?" Terence asked. + +"Certainly, monsieur. There is a canteen in the courtyard. It is +open from eight till nine o'clock in the morning, and from five to +six in the evening. But you are not allowed to get things in from +the town; but nevertheless--" and he smiled, "--as your comrades +are on parole, doubtless, should you need anything beyond what is +sold in the canteen, it may chance that they may bring you just the +things you want." + +"Thank you. You had better get something from the canteen for +yourself," Terence said, handing him a crown. + +"Thank you, monsieur. I have heard, from the soldiers who came in +with you, that you fought bravely with them against the Spanish +brigands; and they think that it is very hard that you and your +companion should be shut up here, after having proved such good +comrades. I have a cousin among them. He, like myself, is a native +of Bayonne and, should it be in his power, I am sure that he and +his comrades would do anything they could for Monsieur--as far, of +course, as their duty as French soldiers will allow them." + +"Thanks. By the way, what is your name?" + +"Jean Monier, monsieur." + +"Well, Jean, will you please tell your cousin that I am obliged to +him for his goodwill? It was a pleasure to fight side by side with +such brave soldiers and, should an occasion offer, I will gladly +avail myself of his services. The detachment is not going farther, +is it?" + +"No, monsieur. They will remain here for perhaps two or three +months, till the good French air has invigorated them; then they +will join some column marching south again. There is nothing more +that you will want tonight, monsieur?" + +"No, thank you, Jean. Good evening!" + +"Good evening, good sleep!" and the warder retired. + +"What is all that jabber about, Terence?" + +"Very satisfactory jabber, and jabber that is likely to lead to a +very good result. A cousin of his is one of the guard that came +down with us. He has told this warder about our fight, and asked +him to say that he and his comrades were very angry at our being +shut up here; and as much as said that they would aid us to escape, +if it was in their power, so we may consider that our first +difficulty is as good as arranged. No doubt in a short time they +will be put on regular garrison duty, and will take their turn in +furnishing prison guards. This warder is evidently ready to do +anything he can, so that we may look upon our escape from prison as +a matter of certainty. I don't suppose that, in any case, the guard +is a very vigilant one; for they would not expect that prisoners of +war here would try to escape. At Verdun, and other prisons within a +few days' journey of the frontier, it would be different." + +"Well, that is good news, Terence, though I see myself that our +difficulties will really begin only when we get out. There is no +doubt that the fight with the guerillas was a lucky thing for us. I +would not have missed it for anything, for I must say there was +much more excitement in it than in a battle, at least as far as my +experience of a battle goes. At Talavera we had nothing to do but +stick up on the top of a hill, watch the French columns climbing +up, and then give them a volley or two and roll them down the hill +again; and between times stand to be shelled by Victor's batteries +on the opposite hill. I cannot see that there is any fun about +that. This fight, too, has turned out a very good thing for us. I +expect we should not have been so well treated if it had not been +for it, and the fact that some of these French soldiers are ready +to give us a helping hand is first rate. + +"You see, it is all your luck, Terence. There never was such a +fellow for luck as you are." + +"There is no doubt about that," Terence agreed. "Now, Dick, you +must really break into French." + +"Tomorrow morning will be time enough for that," Ryan said, in a +tone of determination. "I want to talk now, really talk; and I +can't do that in French, especially after what you have just told +me. By the way, I don't see, myself, why we should make this +journey through France. Why not try to get a boat, and land +somewhere on the coast of Spain?" + +"I have been thinking of that, Dick; but it seemed to me, before, +altogether too difficult. Still, if we can get help from outside, I +don't know why we should not be able to manage it. We should have +to go some distance along the Spanish coast, for there are sure to +be French garrisons at Bilbao and Santander; but beyond that I +should think we might land at any little village. Galicia must +certainly have been evacuated by the French, for we know that Ney's +corps were down in the Tagus valley; and I should think that they +cannot have any great force in the Asturias. The worst of it is, we +have not got enough money to buy a boat; and if we had, the +soldiers could hardly bargain with a fisherman for one. Of course, +if we were free we might arrange with a man to go with us in his +boat, and pay him so much for its hire, for three or four days." + +"We might make our way down the river, and steal one, Terence." + +"Yes, we might do that, but it would be a heavy loss to some poor +fellow. Well, I shall look forward to the morning, when we can go +out and see all about the prison arrangements." + +"Then you have given up the idea of waiting for two months before +you do anything, Terence?" Ryan remarked. + +"Certainly. You see, these French convalescents may be marched back +again, in another month's time and, at present, our plans must be +formed upon the supposition that they are ready to help us. It +would never do to throw away such an opportunity as that. It would +be little short of madness to try and get out, unless we had +disguises of some sort. My staff officer's uniform, or your +scarlet, would lead to our arrest at the first village we came to. + +"Besides, before this news one was willing to wait contentedly, for +a time, till some good opportunity presented itself. Now that we +have such an unexpected offer of assistance, the sooner we get out +of the place the better." + +The next morning they went out into the courtyard of the prison. +The soldiers who had been captured with them were walking about in +groups; but the sentry who accompanied the two British officers led +them through these, and took them up to the top of the wall +surrounding the prison. + +"Messieurs," he said, "when the others are shut up you can go where +you please, but my orders are that you are not to communicate with +your soldiers." + +He then fell back some distance, and left them free to wander about +on the wall. + +From this point they had a view over the city. Bayonne was a +strongly fortified place, standing on the junction of the Nive and +Adour, and on the south side of the latter river, two miles from +its mouth. The Nive ran through the town, and its waters supplied +the ditches of the encircling wall and bastions. The prison was +situated on the Nive, at some three or four hundred yards from the +spot where it entered the Adour. + +"I should say this quite decides it," Terence said, when they had +made the circuit of the walls, upon which sentries were placed at +short intervals. "Once out of the town the river would be open to +us, but it would be next to impossible to pass those semicircles of +fortifications on both sides of the town. You can see the masts of +the craft lying at the quays and, though I should not like to rob a +fisherman of his boat; I should not feel the smallest scruple in +taking a ship's boat, which would be, comparatively, a small loss +to the owner. The worst of it would be that, directly we were found +to be missing, and the owner of the boat reported its loss, they +might send out some of their gunboats in search of us, and we +should very soon be overtaken." + +Discipline was not very strict in the French army, except when in +an enemy's country; and the sentries, knowing well that there was +really no occasion for watchfulness, answered willingly the +questions that Terence asked them as to the names of places within +sight. + +"It must be rather tedious work for you, on the wall here," Terence +said to one whose post was shielded by a building close by, from +observation from below. + +"Very dull," the soldier said, "and we shall be glad enough when we +are relieved and marched into Spain. Here we are doing no good. +There is no chance whatever of the prisoners attempting an escape, +for if they did get out of here they could get no further; but they +say that we shall not stop here long, and we shall be heartily glad +when the order comes. They say the convalescents who came in +yesterday will take over the prison duties next week." + +Terence's motive for speaking to the men was to discover whether +they were forbidden to talk, and it was satisfactory to find that, +if there was such a rule, it was by no means strictly observed. +Leaning on the parapet, he and Ryan stood for some time looking at +the sea. There were many fishing boats dotting its surface, and the +tapering masts of two schooners could be seen near the mouth of the +river. + +"I have no doubt that they are privateers," Terence said. "They +have just the appearance of that fellow we captured on the way out. +One would not have much chance of getting far in a boat, with those +fellows after us. + +"It seems to me that, if it could possibly be managed, our safest +plan would be to lie quiet in the town for a week or so, after we +got out; then it would be comparatively safe to get hold of a boat +and make off in it." + +"Yes, if that could be managed, it certainly would be the safest +plan. If we changed our minds about making off by sea, we might +then be able to pass out through the fortifications, without +question. Of course, they would be vigilant for a short time after +we were missing; but I suppose that, at ordinary times, the country +people would go in and out unquestioned, just as in any other town +for, with no enemy nearer than Portugal, there could be no occasion +whatever for watchfulness." + +Terence and his companion had seen nothing of their friends on +parole, as these, they found, although lodged in prison for their +own convenience, were not permitted to have any communication with +the other prisoners. Ten days after they arrived at Bayonne, the +warder, who had, since he first spoke to them, said nothing beyond +the usual salutations, remarked carelessly: + +"The soldiers who came down with you took up the prison duties last +night. My cousin told me to say that you will know him, and four or +five of his comrades of the 72nd of the line, all of whom are +thoroughly in agreement with him, by their saying as you pass them: + +"'The morning is fair, Colonel.' + +"To any of them you can speak, when you find an opportunity of +doing so, unobserved." + +"Thank you; but will it not be safer for them were you to carry my +messages?" + +"No; I cannot do that," the warder said. "I think that it is quite +right that my cousin, and his comrades, should do anything in their +power to aid those who stood by them when attacked; but I wish to +know nothing about it. It must be between you and them, for I must +be able to swear that I had no hand in the matter, and that I +locked you up safely, at night." + +"You are quite right, Jean. It is much the best plan that it should +be so. I certainly should not, myself, like to know that in making +my escape I might endanger the life of one who had acted simply +from kindness of heart; and trust that no suspicion, whatever, will +fall upon you. I thank you most heartily for having brought me the +message from your cousin, and for the goodwill that you have shown +us." + +When Terence and Ryan went out as usual, after breakfast, all the +sentries they passed saluted, as if to one of their own officers. +They of course returned the salute, and made a cheery remark to +each, such as "Rather a change, this, from our work up in the +hills, lad," to which each gave some short and respectful answer, +three of them prefacing it with the words: "The morning is fair, +mon Colonel ". + +Two of these had the number of their regiment on their shako. The +other, who had a deep and scarcely-healed scar over the ear, only +wore a forage cap, having evidently lost his shako when wounded. + +"What do you mean by saluting a prisoner," a French staff officer, +when he was passing, angrily asked an old soldier. "You have been +long enough in the service, surely, to know that prisoners are not +saluted." + +The soldier stood at attention. + +"Monsieur le Capitaine," he said, "I am not saluting a prisoner. I +am saluting a brave officer, whose orders I have obeyed in a hard +fight, and to whom I and my comrades probably owed our lives. A +mark of respect is due to a brave man, whether a prisoner of war or +not." + +The officer passed on without answering and, arriving at +headquarters, reported the circumstances to the general. + +"I am not surprised, Captain Espel," the latter replied, with a +slight smile. "A French soldier knows how to respect bravery, and +in this case there is little doubt that, but for the assistance of +their prisoners, it would have gone very hard with that detachment. +That young officer who, strangely enough, is a colonel, was a +prisoner when he fought side by side with these men; and it is but +natural that they scarcely regard him as one, now. He has refused +to give his parole, and I am afraid he means to try to make his +escape. I am sorry for, should he do so, he is sure to be captured +again." + +The third one of the 72nd men, the one with a forage cap, chanced +to be posted at the point of the wall that was not overlooked and, +after he had repeated the formula agreed upon, Terence said to him: + +"You are one of those lads who sent me a message that you would +assist me, if you could." + +"That is so, mon Colonel. You assisted us when we were somewhat +hotly pressed, and tis but good comradeship to repay such a +service, if one can. We have been thinking it over and, although it +would not be difficult for you to escape from here, we do not see +how you are to be got out of the town." + +"That is the difficulty I see myself," Terence replied. "We could +not hope to pass through the circle of fortifications and, were we +to take a boat and make off, we should be pursued and recaptured, +to a certainty; for of course, as soon as our escape was known, +there would be a hot search made for us. + +"There are two things needed. The first is disguises. The second is +a shelter, until the search for us slackens, after which it would +be comparatively easy for us to make off." + +"What sort of disguises would you want, monsieur?" + +"If we go by land, peasant dresses; if by water, those of +fishermen. We have money, which I can give you to purchase these." + +"That we could do for you, monsieur, but the hiding place is more +difficult. However, that we will see about. I am a native here, and +have of course many friends and acquaintances in the town. When we +have made our plans I will let you know. I will manage that, when +it is my turn for duty, I will always be posted here; and then I +can tell you what is arranged, and give you whatever is necessary +to aid you to make your escape. My cousin, Jean Monier, will shut +his eyes; but he will not do anything himself, and I think that he +is right, for of course he will be the first to be suspected. + +"As for us, it will be no matter. Everyone knows how you stood by +us, and they will guess that some of us have had a hand in it; but +they will never find out which of us was chiefly concerned. I +expect that soon we shall all be taken off this prison duty, for +which we shall not be sorry, and sent back to Spain with the first +detachment that comes along; but after all, one is not so badly off +in Spain, and certainly Madrid is a good deal more lively than +Bayonne." + +"I suppose," Terence said, nodding towards their guard, who was +standing a few paces away gazing over the country, "he knows +nothing about this." + +"No, monsieur, we have kept it to just the men of our own regiment; +but all feel the same about your being kept a prisoner, and there +is no fear of his telling anyone that you spoke to one man more +than another, when it is found out that you have escaped. Still, it +might be as well that you should not speak to me again, until I +tell you that it is a fine morning; for although all our own men +can be trusted, if any of the regular prison warders was to notice +anything he would not be slow in mentioning it, in hope of getting +promotion." + +Accordingly Terence made a point of only passing along that part of +the wall once a day, and merely saying a word to the soldier, as he +did to others, on the occasions when he was on duty. + +Ten days later the man replied to his salutation by remarking that +it was a "fair day." It happened that the man told off to guard +them on this occasion was another of the 72nd; there was therefore +nothing to be feared from him. + +"I have arranged the matter, monsieur," the soldier said. "My +sister's husband, Jules Varlin, will shelter you. He is a +fisherman, and you can be safely hidden in the loft where he keeps +his nets and gear. He is an honest fellow, and my sister has talked +him over into lending his aid so far and, although he has not +promised it yet, I think we shall get him to go down the river with +you, so as to reply if you are challenged. You can put him ashore a +mile or two along the coast. + +"Now as to the escape, monsieur. Here is a sharp saw. With it you +can cut round the lock of your door. There are two outside bolts, +whose position I dare say you have noticed; by cutting a hole close +to each of them, you can get your hand through and draw them. Here +is a short-handled augur, to make a hole for the saw to go through. + +"There are four sentries at night, in the courtyard. We shall +manage to get all our men on duty, tomorrow evening. Our sergeant +is a good fellow and, if he guesses anything, will hold his tongue; +for I have heard him say, more than once, that it is monstrous that +you should be kept a prisoner. + +"Therefore you need not be afraid of them. They will take care to +keep their eyes shut. I shall be on sentry duty here, and will get +the disguises up, and a rope. When you have got down I shall let +the rope drop, and you will carry it off and take it away with you; +thus there will be no evidence where you descended. + +"Here are two sharp files, with which you can cut through the bars +of your window, and remove some of them; then it will not be known +whether you escaped that way, or down the stairs; and the men on +sentry in the courtyard at the bottom cannot be blamed because, for +aught the governor will know, you may have gone out through this +window into the other courtyard, and got over the wall on that +side; so they would have no proof as to which set of men were +negligent. + +"No doubt we shall all be talked to, and perhaps kept in the +guardroom a few days, but that won't hurt us; and soldiers are +scarce enough, so they will hardly keep ten or twelve men long from +duty. There are not enough in the town, now, to furnish all the +guards properly; so you need not worry about us. + +"I will give you instructions how to find my sister's house, +tomorrow night. You must not escape until you hear the bell strike +midnight. Our party will relieve guard at that hour. You see, we +have four hours on duty and, as you may have gone either on the +first watch, the second, or the third, they will not be able to +pitch on us more than on the others; so that, in fact, the blame +will be divided between forty of us. You will, of course, put on +your disguises over your uniforms, and destroy your clothes, when +you get to Jules' house." + +"I thank you very warmly, my good fellow, for running all this risk +for me. Here are two hundred francs to pay for the disguises." + +"That will be more than enough," the soldier said. "Jules put it +down at a hundred and fifty." + +"Things may cost more than he expects. At any rate, please hand +these to him. I can arrange matters with him when I see him. + +"Then at about a quarter past twelve we will sally out. We will +walk on now, lest any of the warders should happen to notice that +we have been a long time on this part of the wall." + +Ryan had understood but little of what was happening and, when +Terence told him what had been arranged, he exclaimed: + +"Well, after this, Terence, I will never say a word against a +Frenchman. Here are these soldiers going to run a lot of risk, and +a certainty of getting into a row for us, merely because we did the +best we could against those wretched Spaniards; and without getting +any reward whatever, for they must know that prisoners are not +likely to have any money to spare about them." + +"Quite so, Ryan; and what is more, if I had a hundred pounds in my +pocket, I would not offer them a penny; for certainly they would +take it as an insult if I did so. They would feel that it would be +a sort of bribe and, though they are ready to help us as comrades, +I am sure they would not do it for money. I sincerely hope they +won't get into any serious row. As he said, authorities won't be +able to tell which party was on guard at the time we went, and they +could hardly put the whole of them under arrest--at least, not keep +them under arrest. No doubt there will be a close search in the +town for us, but there is little fear of our being discovered. + +"Our dangers won't begin until we are fairly afloat. I know nothing +about sailing. I have rowed a boat many a time, at Athlone; but as +for sailing, I have never once tried it." + +"Nor have I," Ryan said. "But I suppose there is no difficulty +about it. You put up the sail, and you take hold of the rope at the +corner, and off you go." + +"It sounds all right, Dicky, and I dare say we shall manage to get +along, somehow; but these things are not half as easy as they look. +Now we had better have four or five hours' sleep this afternoon, +for I expect it will take us the best part of the night to file +through the bars. You must not cut quite through them, but just +leave them so that we can finish them off in a short time, tomorrow +night." + +"But the warder might notice them?" + +"He is not likely to look very sharply, Dicky; but at the same +time, it is just as well not to put too great a strain on his +loyalty. We will keep a piece of bread over from our supper, work +it up into a sort of paste, fill up any cuts we make, and rub it +over with dirt till it well matches the bars. Certainly they have +planned the affair capitally, so as to throw doubt as to which way +we descended, and so divide the blame between as many of the +sentries as possible." + +It took four hours' work, that night, to get through the bars. They +were most careful not to let any of the filings fall outside for, +had any of them dropped into the courtyard below, they might well +catch the eye of a warder; and in that case an examination of all +the windows of the rooms above would certainly be made, at once. +Before the warder's visit the next morning, the holes had been +filled up with bread worked into a putty and smeared over with +dust; which so nearly matched the bars that it could not be +observed, except by a careful examination. + +The next day they abstained from saying more than a passing word to +any of the French soldiers. They waited, after being locked up for +the night, for two or three hours; and then began their work at the +door. The saw was a very narrow one and, when they had made a hole +with the augur, they found no difficulty in cutting the wood; +therefore they thought it was well to leave that for the last +thing, and so betook themselves to their files, and soon removed +enough of the bars to enable a man to crawl through. Then they +returned to the door, and had cut round the lock, and made holes +through which they could pass their hands to draw back the bolts, a +short time before the clock struck twelve. + +Then they went to the window, and listened. They heard the bells +strike midnight, and then a stir below, as the sentries were +relieved. Waiting for a few minutes, until all had become quiet +again, they drew back the bolts, took off their shoes, and went +noiselessly down the stairs. + +The night was very dark and, although they could hear the tread of +the sentries in the courtyard, they could not make out their +figures. They crossed the yard, keeping as far as possible from the +sentries. They had no doubt that all would happen as arranged; but +there was, of course, the possibility that at the last moment some +change might have been made; and it was, in any case, as well that +the men there should be able to declare, honestly, that they had +seen no one. + +[Illustration: Stooping so that their figures should not show +against the sky.] + +They were glad when they reached the archway leading to the stairs +that led to the top of the wall. Mounting, they kept along by the +parapet, stooping so that their figures should not show against the +sky for, dark as it was below, they might have been noticed had +they not done so. Presently they saw the sentry. + +"Diable, messieurs!" he said in a low tone, as they came up to him, +"you gave me a start. I was expecting you, but I did not hear your +footsteps nor see you and, had you been enemies, you might very +well have seized and disarmed me before I could give the alarm. + +"Well, here are your clothes." + +They soon pulled the blue canvas leggings over their breeches, and +over these the high boots, in which their feet felt lost. A rough +blouse and a fisherman's oilskin cap completed the disguise. They +put their boots into the capacious pockets in the blouses, and were +then ready to descend. They had left their shakos in their cell +when they started. + +While they had been putting on their clothes, the sentry had +fastened the rope and lowered it down. + +"We are ready now, Jacques," Terence said. "Goodbye, my good +friend. We shall never forget the kindness that you have shown us, +and shall remember with gratitude, all our lives, how a party of +French soldiers were ready to show themselves good comrades to men +who had fought by their sides, even though the two nations were at +war with each other. We shall always feel a kindness towards the +French uniform, in future; and if you or any of your comrades of +the 72nd should chance to fall into British hands, and you can send +word to me or to Mr. Ryan, I can promise you that we will do all we +can to have you released at once and sent back, or to aid you in +any other way." + +"We have done but our duty to brave comrades," the soldier said. + +"Now, as to where to find my cousin. You will go down that street +below, and take the third turning on the right. That will lead you +down to the wharves. Keep along by the houses facing them until you +come to the fourth turning. It is a narrow lane, and there is a +cabaret at each corner of it. My cousin's house is the twelfth on +the left-hand side. He will be standing at the door. You will say +to him as you pass, 'It is a dark night,' and he will then let you +in. + +"Don't walk as if you were in a hurry: fishermen never do that. It +is not likely that you will meet anyone, but if you do, and he sees +two fishermen hurrying, it will strike him as singular; and when +there came news of two prisoners having escaped, he might mention +the matter, which might lead to a search in the right quarter." + +"Will you go first, Ryan, or shall I?" Terence said. + +"Just as you like." + +"Well, then, you may as well go, as then I can talk with this good +fellow till it is my turn." + +Ryan shook the soldier's hand heartily, took hold of the rope, +slung himself over the parapet, and began the descent. Terence and +the soldier leaned over, and watched him until they could no longer +make out the figure with certainty. As soon as the tension on the +rope slackened, Terence grasped Jacques' hand, said a few more +words of thanks, and then followed his companion. As soon as he +reached the ground he shook the rope and, a minute later, it fell +on the ground beside him. + +He coiled it up, and then they started down the street. Following +the instructions that they had received, in ten minutes they +reached the end of the lane. + +"We were to throw away the rope, were we not?" Ryan said. + +"Yes, but now we are here, there can be no use in our doing so. If +a length of rope were found lying in the road, people would wonder +who had thrown it away; besides, it is a good stout piece of new +rope, and may be of use to the fisherman." + +Counting the doors carefully as they went along, they came to the +twelfth where, before they reached it, the red glow from a pipe +showed that a man was standing outside. + +"It is a dark night, mate," Terence said in a low tone, as he came +up to him. + +"That is right," the man replied; "come in." + +He stood aside as they entered, closed the door behind them, and +then lifted a piece of old canvas thrown over a lighted lantern. + + + +Chapter 6: Afloat. + + +Jules Varlin held the lantern above his head, and took a good look +at his visitors. + +"You will pass very well for young fishermen, messieurs," he said, +"when you have dirtied your faces and hands a bit, and rubbed your +hair the wrong way, all over your head. Well, come in here. My wife +is waiting up to welcome you. It is her doing that you are here. I +should not have agreed, but what can one do when a woman once sets +her mind upon a thing?" + +He opened a door. A woman rose from her seat. She was some years +younger than her husband. + +"Welcome, messieurs," she said. "We are pleased, indeed, to be able +to return the kindness you showed to my brother." + +The fisherman grunted. + +"No, Jules," she said, "I won't have you say that you haven't gone +willingly into this. You pretended not to, but I know very well +that it was only because you like to be coaxed, and that you would +have done it for Jacques' sake." + +"Jacques is a good fellow," her husband replied, "and I say nothing +against him; but I don't know that I should have consented, if it +had not been for you and your bothering me." + +"Don't you believe him, monsieur. Jules has a good heart, though he +likes pretending that he is a bear. + +"Now, monsieur, I have some coffee ready for you." + +"I need not say, madam," Terence said, "how truly thankful we both +are for your and your husband's kindness, shown to us strangers; +and I sincerely hope that you will have no cause to regret it. You +may be sure of one thing: that if we are recaptured, we shall never +say how our escape was effected, nor where we were sheltered +afterwards; and if, after the war is over, we can find an +opportunity of showing how grateful we are for your kindness, we +shall not miss the chance." + +"We are but paying the service you rendered to Jacques, monsieur. +He tells me that, if it had not been for the aid the British +prisoners gave them, that probably those Spanish bandits would have +captured the church during the night; and we know that they never +show mercy to prisoners." + +The coffee was placed on the table and, after drinking it, the +fisherman led them to a low shed in the yard. + +"We could have done better for you," he said apologetically, "but +it is likely that they may begin a search for you, early in the +morning. This yard can be seen from many houses round about, so +that, were you to sleep upstairs, you might be noticed entering +here in the morning; and it is better to run no risks. We have +piled the nets on the top of other things. You will find two +blankets for covering yourselves there. In the morning I will come +in and shift things, so as to hide you up snugly." + +"We shall do just as well on the nets as if we were in bed," +Terence laughed. "We are pretty well accustomed to sleep on the +hard ground." + +"I think we are going to have some bad weather," the man remarked, +as they settled themselves on the nets. "I hope it will be so, for +then none of the boats will put out; and there will be no comments +on my staying at home, instead of going out as usual. + +"And now, good night, and good sleep to you!" + +"He is an honest-looking fellow," Terence said, when he had gone +out, "and I have no doubt what his wife says of him is true; but it +is not surprising that he held back at first. It is not everyone +that is prepared to run the risk of heavy punishment for the sake +of his wife's relations. + +"This is not by any means bad; these nets make a very comfortable +bed." + +The next morning, at daybreak, the fisherman came in with a can +containing hot coffee, two great slices of bread, and tin cups. + +"Now, messieurs, when you have drank that I will stow you away. We +shifted most of the things yesterday, so as to make as comfortable +a bed for you as may be." + +The nets were pulled off; and a mass of sails, ropes, and other +gear appeared underneath. One of the sails in the corner was pulled +away, and showed a vacant space, some six feet long and four feet +wide, extending down to the ground, which was covered by old nets. + +"Now, messieurs, if you will get down there, I shall pile a couple +of sacks over and throw the nets on the top, and there is no fear +of your being disturbed. I will bring your meals in to you, and let +you know what is doing in the town; but I shall not come in oftener +than I can help. I shall leave the doors open, as usual." + +They took their places in the hole, and the fisherman piled sails +and nets over the opening. There was no occasion to leave any +apertures for air, for the shed was roughly built, and there were +plenty of openings between the planks of which it was constructed. +They had, before he came in, divested themselves of their uniforms; +and these the fisherman put into a kit bag and carried indoors; +where his wife at once proceeded to cut them up, and thrust the +pieces into the fire. + +"It is a pity," she said regretfully, "but it would never do to +leave them about. Think what a waistcoat I could have made for you, +Jules, out of this scarlet cloth. With the gold buttons it would +have been superb, and it would have been the envy of the quarter; +but it would never do." + +"I should think not, Marie. Burn the clothes up, and give me the +buttons and gold lace. I will put them in a bag with some stones, +and drop them into the river. The sooner we get rid of them, the +better." + +As soon as the things were put into a bag, he went out with with +them. The wind was blowing strongly and, as he had predicted the +night before, the clouds were flying fast, and there were many +signs of dirty weather. He returned a couple of hours later. + +"There is quite an excitement in the town, Marie," he said. +"Everyone is talking about it. Two rascally English prisoners have +escaped, and the soldiers say that they must be somewhere in the +town, for that they could never have passed through the lines. Some +gendarmes have been along the quays, inquiring if a boat has been +missed during the night; but they all seem to be safe. Written +notices have been stuck up warning everyone, on pain of the +severest punishment, not to give shelter to two young men, in +whatever guise they may present themselves. The gendarmes say that +the military authorities are convinced that they must have received +assistance from without." + +For the next three days, indeed, an active search was kept up. +Every house was visited by the gendarmes but, as there was no +reason for suspecting one person more than another, there was no +absolute search made of the houses; which indeed, in so large a +town as Bayonne, would have been almost impossible to carry out +effectually. + +The fisherman reported each day what was going on. + +"The soldiers are giving it up," he said, at the end of the third +day. "I saw Jacques today for the first time. He tells me there was +a tremendous row when your escape was discovered. The warder, and +every soldier who had been on duty that night, were arrested and +questioned. The warder was the one first suspected, on the ground +that you must have had assistance from without. He said that if you +had, he knew nothing about it; and that, as you knew all the +soldiers of the prison guard, and as he had heard many of them say +it was very hard, after fighting as you did on their behalf, that +you should be kept prisoner, any of them might have furnished you +with tools for cutting the door and filing the bars. This was so +clear that he was released at once. The soldiers were kept for two +days under arrest. This morning the governor himself came down to +the prison, and the men under arrest were drawn up. He spoke to +them very sharply, to begin with. + +"'One or more of you is assuredly concerned in this matter. A +breach of trust of this kind is punishable with death.' + +"Then he stopped, and looked fiercely up and down the line, and +went on in a different tone: + +"'At the same time, I admit that some allowance is to be made for +the crime, and I can understand that as soldiers you felt sympathy +with soldiers who, although prisoners at the time, did not hesitate +to cast in their lot with you, and to fight side by side with you. +Still, a soldier should never allow private sentiments to interfere +with his duty. I myself should have been glad, when you arrived +here and I heard of what had happened, to have been able to place +these British officers and soldiers in a ship, and to have sent +them back to their own country; but that would have been a breach +of my duty, and I was forced to detain them here as prisoners. Of +course, if I could find out which among you have been concerned in +this affair, it would be my duty to punish them--for there must +have been more than one--severely. However, although I have done my +best to discover this, I am not sorry, men, that I have been unable +to do so; for although these men may have failed in their duties as +soldiers, they have shown themselves true-hearted fellows to run +that risk--not, I am sure, from any thought of reward, but to help +those who had helped them. + +"'You can all return to your duty, and I hope that you will, in +future, remember that duty is the first thing with a soldier, and +that he should allow no other feeling to interfere with it.' + +"Jacques and his comrades are all satisfied that, although the +general felt it was his duty to reprimand them, he was at heart by +no means sorry that you had got off. + +"The gendarmes are still making inquiries, but of course they have +learned nothing. Nobody was about on the wharves at that time of +night, and I don't think that they will trouble themselves much +longer about it. They will come to believe that you must, somehow, +have managed to get through the line of fortifications, and that +you will be caught trying to make your way across the country. + +"In another three or four days it will be quite safe for you to go +down the river. For the first two days every boat that went down +was stopped and examined, and some of the vessels were searched by +a gunboat, and the hatches taken off; but I hear that no boats have +been stopped today, so I fancy you will soon be able to go down +without fear." + +Although at night Terence and Ryan were able to emerge from their +place of concealment, and walk up and down the little yard for two +or three hours, they were heartily glad when, a week after their +confinement, Jules told them that he thought they might start at +daybreak, the next morning. + +"Now, messieurs, if you will tell me what you want, I will buy the +things for you." + +They had already made out a list. It consisted of a nine-gallon +breaker for water, a dozen bottles of cheap wine, thirty pounds of +biscuits, and fifteen pounds of salt meat, which Jules's wife was +to cook. They calculated that this would be sufficient to last +them, easily, until they had passed along the Spanish coast to a +point well beyond the towns garrisoned by the French, if not to +Corunna itself. + +"But how about the boat?" Terence asked, after all the other +arrangements had been decided upon. "As I told you, we don't wish +to take a boat belonging to anyone who would feel its loss; and +therefore it must be a ship's boat, and not one of the fishermen's. +If we had money to pay for it, it would be another matter; but we +have scarcely enough now to maintain us on our way through Spain, +and there are no means of sending money here when we rejoin our +army." + +"I understand that, monsieur; and I have been along the quay this +morning taking a look at the boats. There are at least a dozen we +could choose from; I mean ships' boats. Of course, many of the +craft keep their boats hauled up at the davits or on deck, but most +of them keep one in the water, so that they can row off to another +ship or to the stairs. Some simply leave them in the water, because +they are too lazy to hoist them up. That is the case, I think, with +one boat that belongs to a vessel that came in, four days since, +from the West Indies. It's a good-sized ship's dinghy, such as is +used for running out warps, or putting a sailor ashore to bring off +anything required. The other boats are better suited for a voyage, +but they are for the most part too large and heavy to be rowed by +two oars and, moreover, they have not a mast and sail on board, as +this has. Therefore that is the one that I fixed my eye on. + +"The ship is lying alongside, and there is not another craft +outside her. The boat is fastened to her bowsprit, and I can take +off my boots and get on board and drop into her, without +difficulty; and push her along to the foot of some stairs which are +but ten yards away. Of course, we will have the water and food and +that bundle of old nets ready, at the top of the stairs, and we can +be out into the stream five minutes after I have cut her loose. We +must start just before daylight is breaking, so as to be off before +the fishermen put out for, if any of these were about, they would +at once notice that I have not got my own boat. At the same time I +don't want to be far ahead of them, or to pass the gunboats at the +mouth of the river in the dark, for that would look suspicious." + +"And now, Jules, about yourself. Of course, I know well that no +money could repay you for the kindness you have shown us, and your +risking so much for strangers; and you know that we have not with +us the means of making any return, whatever, for your services." + +"I don't want any return, monsieur," the fisherman said. "I went +into the matter a good deal against my will, because my wife had +set her mind upon it; but since you came here I have got to have +just as much interest in the matter as she has. I would not take a +sou from you, now; but if, some day, when these wars are over, you +will send a letter to Marie with some little present to her, just +to show her that you have not forgotten us, it would be a great +pleasure to us." + +"That I will certainly do, Jules. It may be some time before there +will be an opportunity of doing it, but you may be sure that we +shall not forget you and your wife, or cease to be grateful for +your kindnesses; and that, directly peace is made, or there is a +chance in any other way of sending a letter to you, we will do so." + +That evening Jacques paid a visit to his sister. He had abstained +from doing so before, because he thought that the soldiers who were +suspected of being concerned in the escape might all be watched; +and that if any of them were seen to enter a house, a visit might +be paid to it by the gendarmes. He did not come until it was quite +dark, and made a long detour in the town before venturing to +approach it. Before he entered the lane he took good care that no +one was in sight. + +When, after chatting for an hour, he rose to leave, Terence told +him that when he wrote to his sister he should inclose a letter to +him; as it would be impossible to write to him direct, for there +would be no saying where he might be stationed. He begged him to +convey the heartiest thanks of himself and Ryan to his comrades for +the share they had taken in the matter. + +On saying good night, Terence insisted on Marie accepting, as a +parting gift, his watch and chain. These were handsome ones, and of +French manufacture, Terence having bought them from a soldier who +had taken them from the body of a French officer, killed during +Soult's retreat from Portugal. They could, therefore, be shown by +her to her friends without exciting any suspicion that they had +been obtained from an English source. Marie accepted them very +unwillingly, and only after Terence declaring that he should feel +very grieved if she would not take the one present he was capable +of making. + +"Besides," he added, "no one can tell what fortune may bring about. +Your husband might lose his boat, or have a long illness; and it is +well to have something that you can part with, without discomfort, +in such a time of need." + +Jules, although desiring no pay for his services and risks, was +very much gratified at the present. + +"I for my part do not say no, monsieur," he said. "What you say is +right. We are careful people, and I have laid by a little money; +but as you say, one cannot tell what may happen. And if the weather +were bad and there was a risk of never getting back home again, it +would be a consolation to me to know that, in addition to the few +hundred francs we have laid by since we were married, two years +ago, there is something that would bring Marie, I should say, seven +or eight hundred francs more, at least. That would enable her to +set up a shop or laundry, and to earn her own living. I thank you +from my heart, monsieur, for her and for myself." + +Terence and Ryan slept as soundly as usual until aroused by Jules. +Then they put on their sea boots again, loaded themselves with the +nets and the bags with the provisions and wine, while Jules took +the water barrel and after saying goodbye to Marie, started. There +was not a soul on the wharf and, putting the stores down at the top +of the steps, they watched Jules who, after taking off his boots, +went across a plank to the ship, made his way noiselessly out on to +the bow, swinging himself down into the boat, loosening the head +rope before he did so. A push with the oar against the ship's bow +sent the boat alongside the quay, and he then worked her along, +with his hands against the wall, until he reached the steps. + +The stores were at once transferred to the boat, and they pushed it +out into the stream. The tide had but just turned to run out and, +for half a mile, they allowed her to drift down the river. By this +time the light was broadening out in the sky. Jules stepped the +mast and hoisted the sail, and then seated himself in the stern and +put an oar out in the hole cut for it to steer with. Terence +watched the operation carefully. The wind was nearly due aft, and +the boat ran rapidly through the water. + +"We are just right as to time," Jules said, as he looked back where +the river made a bend. "There are two others coming down half a +mile behind us, so that we shall only seem to be rather earlier +birds than the rest." + +Near the mouth of the river two gunboats were anchored. They passed +within a short distance of one of these, and a solitary sailor, +keeping anchor watch on deck, remarked: + +"You are going to have a fine day for your fishing, comrade." + +"Yes, I think so, but maybe there will be more wind presently." + +Some time before reaching the gunboat, Ryan had lain down and the +nets were thrown loosely over him, as it would be better that there +should not seem to be more than the two hands that were generally +carried in the small fishing boats. Once out of the river they +steered south, laying a course parallel to the shore and about a +mile out. After an hour's sail Jules directed her head into a +little bay, took out an empty basket that he had brought with him, +and stepped ashore, after a cordial shake of the hand. He had +already advised them to bear very gradually to the southwest, and +had left a small compass on board for their guidance. + +"They are things we don't often carry," he said, "in boats of this +size; but it will be well for you to take it. If you were blown out +of sight of land you would find it useful. Keep well out from the +Spanish coast, at any rate until you are well past Bilbao; after +that you can keep close in, if you like, for you will be taken for +a fishing boat from one of the small villages. + +"I shall walk straight back now to the town. No questions are asked +at the gates and, if anyone did happen to take notice of me, they +would suppose I had been round peddling fish at the farmhouses." + +Coming along, he had given instructions to Terence as to sailing +the boat. When running before the wind the sheet was to be loose, +while it was to be tightened as much as might be necessary to make +the sail stand just full, when the wind was on the beam or forward +of it. + +"You will understand," he said, "that when the wind is right ahead +you cannot sail against it. You must then get the sail in as flat +as you can, and sail as near as you can to the wind. Then when you +have gone some distance you must bring her head round, till the +sail goes over on the other side; and sail on that tack, and so +make a zigzag course: but if the wind should come dead ahead, I +think your best course would be to lower the sail and row against +it. However, at present, with the wind from the east, you will be +able to sail free on your proper course." + +Then he pushed the boat off. + +"You had better put an oar out and get her head round," he said, +"before hoisting the sail again. Goodbye; bon voyage!" + +Since leaving the river, Terence had been sailing under his +instructions and, as soon as the boat was under way again he said +to his companion: + +"Here we are, free men again, Dicky." + +"I call it splendid, Terence. She goes along well. I only hope she +will keep on like this till we get to Corunna or, better still, to +the mouth of the Douro." + +"We must not count our chickens before they are hatched, Dicky. +There are storms and French privateers to be reckoned with. We are +not out of the wood yet, by a long way. However, we need not bother +about them, at present. It is quite enough that we have got a stout +boat and a favouring wind." + +"And plenty to eat and drink, Terence; don't forget that." + +"No, that is a very important item, especially as we dare not land +to buy anything, for some days." + +"What rate are we going through the water, do you think?" + +"Jules said we were sailing about four knots an hour when we were +going down the river, and about three when we had turned south and +pulled the sail in. I suppose we are about halfway between the two +now, so we can count it as three knots and a half." + +"That would make," Ryan said, after making the calculation, +"eighty-four miles in twenty-four hours." + +"Bravo, Dicky! I doubted whether your mental powers were equal to +so difficult a calculation. Well, Jules said that it was about four +hundred miles to Corunna, and about a hundred and fifty to +Santander, beyond which he thought we could land safely at any +village." + +"Oh, let us stick to the boat as long as we can!" Ryan exclaimed. + +"Certainly. I have no more desire to be tramping among those +mountains and taking our chance with the peasants than you have, +and if the wind keeps as it is now we should be at Corunna in +something like five days. But that would be almost too much to hope +for. So that it does but keep in its present direction till we are +past Santander, I shall be very well satisfied." + +The mountains of Navarre and Biscay were within sight from the time +they had left the river, and it did not need the compass to show +them which way they should steer. There were many fishing boats +from Nivelle, Urumia, and Saint Sebastian to be seen, dotted over +the sea on their left. They kept farther out than the majority of +these, and did not pass any of them nearer than half a mile. + +After steering for a couple of hours, Terence relinquished the oar +to his companion. + +"You must get accustomed to it, as well as I," he said, "for we +must take it in turns, at night." + +By twelve o'clock they were abreast of a town; which was, they had +no doubt, San Sebastian. They were now some four miles from the +Spanish coast. They were travelling at about the same rate as that +at which they had started, but the wind came off the high land, and +sometimes in such strong puffs that they had to loosen the sheet. +The fisherman had shown them how to shorten sail by tying down the +reef points and shifting the tack and, in the afternoon, the +squalls came so heavily that they thought it best to lower the sail +and reef it. Towards nightfall the wind had risen so much that they +made for the land, and when darkness came on threw out the little +grapnel the boat carried, a hundred yards or so from the shore, at +a point where no village was visible. Here they were sheltered from +the wind and, spreading out the nets to form a bed, they laid +themselves down in the bottom of the boat, pulling the sail partly +over them. + +"This is jolly enough," Ryan said. "It is certainly pleasanter to +lie here and look at the stars than to be shut up in that hiding +place of Jules's." + +"It is a great nuisance having to stop, though," Terence replied. +"It is a loss of some forty miles." + +"I don't mind how long this lasts," Ryan said cheerfully. "I could +go on for a month at this work, providing the provisions would hold +out." + +"I don't much like the look of the weather, Dicky. There were +clouds on the top of some of the hills and, though we can manage +the boat well enough in such weather as we have had today, it will +be a different thing altogether if bad weather sets in. I should +not mind if I could talk Spanish as well as I can Portuguese. Then +we could land fearlessly, if the weather was too bad to hold on. +But you see, the Spanish hate the Portuguese as much as they do the +French; and would, as likely as not, hand us over at once at the +nearest French post." + +They slept fairly and, at daybreak, got up the grapnel and hoisted +the sail again. Inshore they scarcely felt the wind but, as soon as +they made out a couple of miles from the land, they felt that it +was blowing hard. + +"We won't go any farther out. Dick, lay the boat's head to the west +again. I will hold the sheet while you steer, and then I can let +the sail fly, if a stronger gust than usual strikes us. Sit well +over this side." + +[Illustration: 'She is walking along now.'] + +"She is walking along now," Ryan said joyously. "I had no idea that +sailing was as jolly as it is." + +They sped along all day and, before noon, had passed Bilbao. As the +afternoon wore on the wind increased in force, and the clouds began +to pass rapidly overhead, from the southeast. + +"We had better get her in to the shore," Terence said. "Even with +this scrap of sail, we keep on taking the water in on that lower +side. I expect Santander lies beyond that point that runs out ahead +of us, and we will land somewhere this side of it." + +But as soon as they turned the boat's head towards the shore, and +hauled in the sheet as tightly as they could, they found that, try +as they would, they could not get her to lie her course. + +"We sha'n't make the point at all," Terence said, half an hour +after they had changed the course. "Besides, we have been nearly +over, two or three times. I dare say fellows who understood a boat +well could manage it but, if we hold on like this, we shall end by +drowning ourselves. I think the best plan will be to lower the sail +and mast, and row straight to shore." + +"I quite agree with you," Ryan said. "Sailing is pleasant enough in +a fair wind, but I cannot say I care for it, as it is now." + +With some difficulty, for the sea was getting up, they lowered the +sail and mast and, getting out the oars, turned her head straight +for the shore. Both were accustomed to rowing in still water, but +they found that this was very different work. After struggling at +the oars for a couple of hours, they both agreed that they were a +good deal farther away from the land than when they began. + +"It is of no use, Dick," Terence said. "If we cannot make against +the wind while we are fresh, we certainly cannot do so when we are +tired; and my arms feel as if they would come out of their +sockets." + +"So do mine," Ryan said, with a groan. "I am aching all over, and +both my hands are raw with this rough handle. What are we to do, +then, Terence?" + +"There is nothing to do that I can see, but to get her head round +and run before the wind. It is a nuisance, but perhaps the gale +won't last long and, when it is over, we can get up sail and make +for the northwestern point of Spain. We have got provisions enough +to last for a week. + +"That is more comfortable," he added, as they got the boat in the +required direction. "Now, you take the steering oar, Dick, and see +that you keep her as straight as you can before the wind; while I +set to and bale. She is nearly half full of water." + +It took half an hour's work, with the little bowl they found in the +boat, before she was completely cleared of water. The relief given +to her was very apparent, for she rose much more lightly on the +waves. + +"We will sit down at the bottom of the boat, and take it by turns +to hold the steering oar." + +They had brought with them a lantern in which a lighted candle was +kept burning, in order to be able to light their pipes. This was +stowed away in a locker in the stern, with their store of biscuit +and, after eating some of these, dividing a bottle of wine, and +lighting their pipes, they felt comparatively comfortable. They +were, of course, drenched to the skin and, as the wind was cold, +they pulled the sail partly over them. + +"She does not ship any water now, Terence. If she goes on like +this, it will be all right." + +"I expect it will be all right, Dick, though it is sure to be very +much rougher than this when we get farther out. Still, I fancy an +open boat will live through almost anything, providing she is light +in the water. I don't suppose she would have much chance if she had +a dozen men on board, but with only us two I think there is every +hope that she will get through it. + +"It would be a different thing if the wind was from the west, and +we had the great waves coming in from the Atlantic, as we had in +that heavy gale when we came out from Ireland. As it is, nothing +but a big wave breaking right over her stern could damage us very +seriously. There is not the least fear of her capsizing, with us +lying in the bottom." + +They did not attempt to keep alternate watches that night, only +changing occasionally at the steering oar, the one not occupied +dozing off occasionally. The boat required but little steering for, +as both were lying in the stern, the tendency was to run straight +before the wind. As the waves, however, became higher, she needed +keeping straight when she was in a hollow between two seas. It +seemed sometimes that the waves following behind the boat must +break on to her, and swamp her but, as time after time she rose +over them, their anxiety on this score lessened, and they grew more +and more confident that she would go safely through it. + +Occasionally the baler was used, to keep her clear of the water +which came in in the shape of spray. At times they chatted +cheerfully, for both were blessed with good spirits and the faculty +of looking on the best side of things. They smoked their pipes in +turns, getting fire from each other, so as to avoid the necessity +of resorting to the lantern, which might very well blow out, in +spite of the care they had at first exercised by getting under the +sail with it when they wanted a light. + +They were heartily glad when morning broke. The scene was a wild +one. They seemed to be in the centre of a circle of mist, which +closed in at a distance of half a mile or so, all round them. At +times the rain fell, sweeping along with stinging force but, wet as +they were, this mattered little to them. + +"I would give something for a big glass of hot punch," Ryan said, +as he munched a piece of biscuit. + +"Yes, it would not be bad," Terence agreed; "but I would rather +have a big bowl of hot coffee." + +"I have changed my opinion of a seafaring life," Ryan said, after a +pause. "It seemed delightful the morning we started, but it has its +drawbacks; and to be at sea in an open boat, during a strong gale +in the Bay of Biscay, is distinctly an unpleasant position." + +"I fancy it is our own fault, Dicky. If we had known how to manage +the boat, I have no doubt that we should have been able to get to +shore. When the wind first began to freshen, we ought not to have +waited so long as we did, before we made for shelter." + +"Well, we shall know better next time, Terence. I think that, now +that it is light, we had better get some sleep, by turns. Do you +lie down for four hours, and then I will take a turn." + +"All right! But be sure you wake me up, and mind you don't go to +sleep; for if you did we might get broadside on to these waves, and +I have no doubt they would roll us over and over. So mind, if +before the four hours are up you feel you cannot keep your eyes +open, wake me at once. Half an hour will do wonders for me, and I +shall be perfectly ready to take the oar again." + + + +Chapter 7: A French Privateer. + + +Terence went off into a deep sleep as soon as he had pulled the +sail over his head, but it seemed to him as if but a minute had +elapsed when his companion began to stir him up with his foot. + +"What is it?" he asked. + +"I am awfully sorry to wake you," Ryan shouted, "but you have had +two hours of it, and I really cannot keep my eyes open any longer. +I have felt myself going off, two or three times." + +"You don't mean to say that I have been asleep for two hours?" + +"You have, and a few minutes over. I looked at my watch as you lay +down." + +"All right! Give me the oar. I say, it is blowing hard!" + +"I should think it is. It seems to me it is getting up, rather than +going down." + +"Well, we are all right so far," Terence said cheerfully, for he +was now wide awake again. "Besides, we are getting quite skilful +mariners. You had better spend a few minutes at baling before you +lie down, for the water is a good three inches over the boards." + +All day the storm continued and, when darkness began to close in, +it seemed to them that it was blowing harder than ever. Each had +had two spells of sleep, and they agreed that they could now keep +awake throughout the night. It was bad enough having no one to +speak to all day, but at night they felt that companionship was +absolutely needed. During the day they had lashed together the +spars, sail, and the barrel of water--which was now nearly half +empty--so that if the boat should be swamped, they could cling to +this support. + +It was a terrible night but, towards morning, both were of opinion +that the gale was somewhat abating. About eight o'clock there were +breaks in the clouds and, by noon, the sun was shining brightly. +The wind was still blowing strong, but nothing to what it had been +the evening before and, by nightfall, the sea was beginning to go +down. The waves were as high as before, but were no longer broken +and crested with heads of foam and, at ten o'clock, they felt that +they could both safely lie down till morning. + +The steering oar was lashed in its position, the sail spread over +the whole of the stern of the boat, every drop of water was baled +out and, lying down side by side, they were soon fast asleep. When +they woke the sun was high, the wind had dropped to a gentle +breeze, and the boat was rising and falling gently on the smooth +rollers. + +"Hurrah!" Ryan shouted, as he stood up and looked round. "It is all +over. I vote, Terence, that we both strip and take a swim, then +spread out our clothes to dry, after which we will breakfast +comfortably and then get up sail." + +"That is a very good programme, Dicky; we will carry it out, at +once." + +While they were eating their meal, Ryan asked: + +"Where do you suppose we are, Terence?" + +"Beyond the fact that we are right out in the Bay of Biscay, I have +not the most remote idea. By the way the water went past us, I +should say that we had been going at pretty nearly the same rate as +we did when we were sailing; say, four miles an hour. We have been +running for forty-eight hours, so that we must have got nearly two +hundred miles from Santander. The question is: would it be best to +make for England, now, or for Portugal? We have been going nearly +northwest, so I should think that we are pretty nearly north of +Finisterre, which may lie a hundred and twenty miles from us; and I +suppose we are two or three times as much as that from England. The +wind is pretty nearly due east again now, so we can point her head +either way. We must be nearly in the ship course, and are likely to +be picked up, long before we make land. Which do you vote for?" + +"I vote for the nearest. We may get another storm, and one of them +is quite enough. At any rate, Spain will be the shortest, by a +great deal and, if we are picked up, it is just as likely to be by +a French privateer as by an English vessel." + +"I am quite of your opinion, and am anxious to be back again, as +soon as I can. If we got to England and reported ourselves, we +might be sent to the depot and not get out again, for months; so +here goes for the south." + +The sail was hoisted, and the boat sped merrily along. In a couple +of hours their clothes were dry. + +"I think we had better put ourselves on short rations," Terence +said. "We may be farther off than we calculate upon and, at any +rate, we had better hold on to the mouth of the Tagus, if we can; +there are sure to be some British officials there, and we shall be +able to get money, and rejoin our regiment without loss of time; +while we might have all sort of trouble with the Spaniards, were we +to land at Corunna or Vigo." + +No sail appeared in sight during the day. + +"I should think we cannot have come as far west as we calculated," +Terence said, "or we ought to have seen vessels in the distance; +however, we will keep due south. It will be better to strike the +coast of Spain, and have to run along the shore round Cape +Finisterre, than to risk missing land altogether." + +That night they kept regular watches. The wind was very light now, +and they were not going more than two knots an hour through the +water. Ryan was steering when morning broke. + +"Wake up, Terence!" he exclaimed suddenly, "here is a ship within a +mile or so of us. As she is a lugger, I am afraid she is a French +privateer." + +Terence sprang to his feet. The light was still faint, but he felt +sure that his companion was right, and that the vessel was a French +privateer. + +"We have put our foot in it now, and no mistake," Ryan said. "It is +another French prison and, this time, without a friendly soldier to +help us to get out." + +"It looks like it, Dicky. In another hour it will be broad +daylight, and they cannot help seeing us. Still, there is a hope +for us. We must give out that we are Spanish fishermen, who have +been blown off the coast. It is not likely they have anyone on +board that speaks Spanish, and our Portuguese will sound all right +in their ears; so very likely, after overhauling us, they will let +us go on our way. At any rate, it is of no use trying to escape; we +will hold on our course for another few minutes, and then head +suddenly towards her, as if we had only just seen her. I will hail +her in Portuguese, and they are sure to tell us to come on board; +and then I will try to make them understand by signs, and by using +a few French words, that we have been blown out to sea by the gale, +and want to know the course for Santander. As the French have been +there for some time, it would be natural enough for us to have +picked up a little of their language." + +In a few minutes they altered their course and sailed towards the +lugger, which also soon turned towards them. When they approached +within the vessel's length, Terence stood up, and shouted in +Portuguese: + +"What is the bearing of Santander?" + +The reply was in French, "Come alongside!" given with a gesture of +the arm explaining the words. They let the sail run down as they +came alongside. Terence climbed up, by the channels, to the deck. + +"Espagnol," he said to the captain, who was standing close to him +as he jumped down on to the deck; "Espagnoles, Capitaine; Poisson, +Santander; grand tempete," and he motioned with his arms to signify +that they had been blown offshore at Santander. Then he pointed in +several directions towards the south, and looked interrogatively. + +"They are Spanish fishermen who have been blown off the coast," the +captain said to another officer. "They have been lucky in living it +out. Well, we are short of hands, having so many away in prizes; +and the boat will be useful, in place of the one we had smashed up +in the gale. Let a couple of men throw the nets and things +overboard, and then run her up to the davits." + +Then he said to Terence: "Prisoners! Go forward and make yourself +useful;" and he pointed towards the forecastle. + +Terence gave a yell of despair, threw his hat down on the deck and, +in a volley of Portuguese, begged the captain to let them go. The +latter, however, only waved his hand angrily; and two sailors, +coming up, seized Terence by the arms and dragged him forward. Ryan +was called upon deck, and also ordered forward. He too remonstrated, +but was cut short by a threatening gesture from the captain. + +For a time they preserved an appearance of deep dejection, Terence +tugging his hair as if in utter despair, till Ryan whispered: + +"For heaven's sake, Terence, don't go on like that, or I shall +break out in a shout of laughter." + +"It is monstrous, it is inhuman!" Terence exclaimed, in Portuguese. +"Thus to seize harmless fishermen, who have so narrowly escaped +drowning; the sea is less cruel than these men. They have taken our +boat, too, our dear good boat. What will our mothers think, when we +do not return? That we have been swallowed up by the sea. How they +will watch for us, but in vain!" + +Fortunately for the success of their story, the lugger hailed from +a northern French port and, as not one on board understood either +Spanish or Portuguese, they had no idea that the latter was the +language in which the prisoners were speaking. After an hour of +pretended despair, both rose from the deck on which they had been +sitting and, on an order being given to trim the sails, went to the +ropes and aided the privateersmen to haul at them and, before the +end of the day, were doing duty as regular members of the crew. + +"They are active young fellows," the captain said to his first +mate, as he watched the supposed Spaniards making themselves +useful. "It was lucky for them that they had a fair store of +provisions and water in their boat. We are very short handed, and +they will be useful. I would have let them go if it had not been +for the boat but, as we have only one left that can swim, it was +too lucky a find to give up." + +The craft had been heading north when Ryan had first seen her, and +she held that course all day. Terence gathered from the talk of the +sailors that they were bound for Brest, to which port she belonged. +The Frenchmen were congratulating themselves that their cruise was +so nearly over, and that it had been so successful a one. From time +to time a sailor was sent up into the cross trees, and scanned the +horizon to the north and west. In the afternoon he reported that he +could make out the upper sails of a large ship going south. The +captain went up to look at her. + +"I think she is an English ship of war," he said, when he descended +to the deck, "but she is a long way off. With this light wind we +could run away from her. She will not trouble herself about us. She +would know well enough that she could not get within ten miles of +us, before it got dark." + +This turned out to be the case, for the lookout from time to time +reported that the distant sail was keeping on her course, and the +slight feeling of hope that had been felt by Terence and Ryan faded +away. They were placed in the same watch, and were below when, as +daylight broke, they heard sudden exclamations, tramping of feet +overhead, and a moment later the watch was summoned on deck. + +"I hope that they have had the same luck that we had, and have run +into the arms of one of our cruisers," Terence whispered in +Portuguese to Ryan, as they ran up on deck together. + +As he reached the deck the boom of a cannon was heard, and at the +same instant a ball passed through the mainsail. Half a mile away +was a British sloop of war. She had evidently made out the lugger +before the watch on board the latter had seen her. The captain was +foaming with rage, and shouting orders which the crew hurried to +execute. On the deck near the foremast lay the man who had been on +the lookout, and who had been felled with a handspike by the +captain when he ran out on deck, at the first alarm. Although at +first flurried and alarmed, the crew speedily recovered themselves, +and executed with promptitude the orders which were given. + +There was a haze on the water, but a light wind was stirring, and +the vessel was moving through the water at some three knots an +hour. As soon as her course had been changed, so as to bring the +wind forward of the beam, which was her best point of sailing, the +men were sent to the guns; the first mate placing himself at a long +eighteen pounder, which was mounted as a pivot gun aft, a similar +weapon being in her bows. All this took but four or five minutes, +and shot after shot from the sloop hummed overhead. + +The firing now ceased, as the change of course of the lugger had +placed the sloop dead astern of her; and the latter was unable, +therefore, to fire even her bow chasers without yawing. It was now +the turn of the lugger. The gun in the stern was carefully trained +and, as it was fired, a patch of white splinters appeared in the +sloop's bulwarks. A cheer broke from the French. The effect of the +shot, which must have raked her from stem to stern, was at once +evident. The sloop bore off the wind, until her whole broadside +could be seen. + +"Flat on your faces!" the captain shouted. + +There was a roar of ten guns, and a storm of shot screamed +overhead. Four of them passed through the sails. One ploughed up +the deck, killing two sailors and injuring three others with the +splinters. Two or three ropes of minor importance were cut, but no +serious damage inflicted. + +The crew, as they leapt to their feet, gave a cheer. They knew +that, with this light wind, their lugger could run away from the +heavier craft; and that the latter could only hope for success by +crippling her. + +"Steady with the helm!" the captain went on, as the pivot gun was +again ready to deliver its fire. "Wait till her three masts show +like one. + +"Jacques, aim a little bit higher. See if you cannot knock away a +spar." + +The sloop was coming up again to the wind and, as she was nearly +stem on, the gun cracked out again. A cheer broke from the lugger +as her opponent's foretop mast fell over her side, with all its +hamper. Round the sloop came, and delivered the other broadside. +Two shots crashed through the bulwarks, one of them dismounting a +gun which, in its fall, crushed a man who had thrown himself down +beside it. Another shot struck the yard of the foresail, cutting it +asunder; and the lugger at once ran up into the wind. + +"Lower the foresail!" the captain shouted. "Quick, men! and lash a +spare spar to the yard. They are busy cutting away their topmast, +but we shall be off again before they are ready to move. They have +lost nearly half a mile; we shall soon be out of range. Be sharp +with that gun again!" + +The sloop had indeed fallen greatly astern while delivering her +broadsides; but her commander had evidently seen that, unless the +wind sprang up, the lugger would get away from him unless he could +cripple her; and that she might seriously damage him, and perhaps +knock one of the masts out of him by her stern chaser. His only +chance, therefore, of capturing her was to take a spar out of her. +He did not attempt to come about again, after firing the second +broadside; but kept up his fire as fast as his guns could be +loaded. + +The lugger, however, was stealing rapidly away from him and, in ten +minutes, had increased her lead by another half mile, without +having suffered any serious damage; and the sloop soon ceased fire, +as she was now almost out of range. Seven or eight of the crew had +been more or less injured by splinters but, with the exception of +the three killed, none were badly hurt. The lugger was now put on +her former course, the guns lashed into their places again, and the +three men killed sewn up in hammocks and laid between two of the +guns, in order to be handed to their friends on arrival in port. + +"That is another slip between the cup and the lip," Terence +remarked to his companion, as the sloop ceased firing. "I certainly +thought, when we came on deck, that our troubles were over. I must +say for our friend, the French captain, he showed himself a good +sailor, and got out of the scrape uncommonly well." + +"A good deal too well," Ryan grumbled; "it was very unpleasant +while it lasted. It is all very well to be shot at by an enemy, but +to be shot at by one's friends is more than one bargained for." + +The coolness under fire displayed by the two Spaniards he had +carried off pleased the captain, who patted them on the shoulder as +he came along, his good temper being now completely restored by his +escape. + +"You are brave fellows," he said, "and will make good +privateersmen. You cannot do better than stay with us. You will +make as much money, in a month, as you would in a year's fishing." + +Terence smiled vaguely, as if he understood that the captain was +pleased with them, but did not otherwise catch his meaning. They +arrived at Brest without further adventure. As they neared the +port, the captain asked Terence if he and his companion would enter +upon the books of the privateer and after much difficulty made, as +he believed, Terence understand his question. The latter affected +to consult Ryan, and then answered that they would be both willing +to do so. The captain then put the names they gave him down on the +ship's roll, and handed each of them a paper, certifying that Juan +Montes and Sebastian Peral belonged to the crew of the Belle +Jeanne, naming the rate of wages that they were to receive, and +their share in the value of the prizes taken. He then gave them +eighty francs each, as an advance on their pay from the date of +their coming on board, and signified to them that they must buy +clothes similar to those worn by the crew, instead of the heavy +fishermen's garments they had on. + +"They will soon learn our language," he said to the mate, "and I am +sure they will make good sailors. I have put down their wages and +share of prize money at half that of our own men, and I am sure +they will be well worth it, when they get to speak the language and +learn their duties." + +As soon as they were alongside, the greater portion of the men went +ashore and, in the evening, the boatswain landed with Terence and +Ryan, and proceeded with them to a slop shop, where he bought them +clothes similar to those worn by the crew. Beyond the fact that +these were of nautical appearance, there was no distinctive dress. +They then returned to the lugger and changed their clothes at once, +the boatswain telling them to stow away their boots and other +things, as these would be useful to them in bad weather. + +The next day the privateer commenced to unload, for the most +valuable portions of the cargoes of the captured ships had been +taken on board when the vessels themselves, with the greater +portion of the goods they carried, had been sent into port under +the charge of prize crews. They remained on board for ten days, +going freely into the town, sometimes with the sailors and +sometimes alone. Terence pretended to make considerable progress in +French, and was able, though with some difficulty, to make himself +understood by the crew. The first mate had gone with them to the +mairie, where the official stamp had been affixed to their ship +papers. + +They found that no questions were asked of persons entering or +leaving the town, on the land side; and twice strolled out and went +some distance into the country. They had agreed that it would be +better to defer any attempt to escape until the day before the +lugger sailed, as there would then be but little time for the +captain to make inquiries after them, or to institute a search. +They bought a pocket map of the north of France, and carefully +studied the roads. + +"It is plain enough what our best course is, Dick. We must go along +this projecting point of Brittany through Dinan to Avranches, and +then follow the coast up till we get to Coutances. You see it is +nearly opposite Jersey, and that island does not look to be more +than fifteen miles away so that, if we can get hold of a boat +there, we should be able to run across in three hours or so, with +favourable wind." + +"That looks easy enough," Ryan agreed. "It seems to be about one +hundred and twenty miles from here to Avranches, and another thirty +or forty up to Coutances, so we should do it in a week, easily. +What stories shall we make up, if we are questioned?" + +"I don't suppose the peasants we may meet on the road are likely to +question us at all, for most of the Bretons speak only their own +language. We had better always sleep out in the open. If we do run +across an official, we can show our papers and give out that we +have been ill treated on board the lugger, and are going to Saint +Malo, where we mean to ship on another privateer. I know that is a +port from which lots of them sail. I don't think we shall have any +difficulty in buying provisions at small villages. My French will +pass muster very well in such places, and I can easily remark that +we are on our way to Saint Malo to join a ship there and, if any +village functionary questions us, these papers will be good enough +for him. + +"Or we can say that we got left ashore by accident, when our craft +sailed from Brest, and are going to rejoin her at Saint Malo, where +she was going to put in. I think, perhaps, that that would be a +better story than that we had run away. I don't know that the +authorities interest themselves in runaway seamen from privateers +but, at any rate, it is a likely tale. Drunken seamen, no doubt, +often do get left ashore." + +"Yes, that would be a very good story, Terence, and I think that +there would be no great fear, even if we were to go boldly into a +town." + +"I don't think there would; still, it is better to be on the safe +side, and avoid all risks." + +Accordingly, the afternoon before the Belle Jeanne was to sail they +went ashore, bought enough bread and cold meat to last them for a +couple of days; and two thick blankets, as it was now November and +the nights were bitterly cold; and then left the town and followed +the road for Dinan. On approaching the village of Landerneau they +left the road, and lay down until it was quite dark. Then they made +a detour through the fields, round the village, came down on the +road again, walked all night--passing through Huelgoat--and then, +as morning was breaking they left the road again and, after going a +quarter of a mile through the fields, lay down in a dry ditch by +the side of a thick hedge, ate a meal, and went to sleep. + +They did not start again until it was getting dusk, when they +returned to the road, which they followed all night. In the morning +they went boldly into a little village, and Terence went into a +shop and bought a couple of loaves. His French was quite good +enough for so simple an operation. + +"I suppose you are going to Saint Malo," the woman said. + +"Yes. We have had a holiday to see some friends at Brest, and are +going to rejoin." + +This was the only question asked and, after walking another two +miles, they lay up for the day as before. They had met several +peasants on the road, and had exchanged salutations with them. They +found by their map that they were now within twenty miles of Dinan, +having made over thirty miles each night and, as both were somewhat +footsore from their unaccustomed exercise, they travelled only some +sixteen or seventeen miles the following night. + +The next evening, at about ten o'clock, they walked boldly through +Dinan. Most of the inhabitants were already asleep, and the few who +were still in the streets paid no heed to two sailors; going, they +had no doubt, to Saint Malo. Crossing the river Rance by the +bridge, they took the road in the direction of the port but, after +following it for a mile or two, struck off to the east and, before +morning, arrived on the river running up from the bay of Mount +Saint Michaels. They lay down until late in the afternoon, and then +crossed the river at a ferry, and kept along by the coast until +they reached the Sebine river. + +"We are getting on first rate," Ryan said, as they lay down for a +few hours' sleep. "We have only got Avranches to pass, now." + +"I hope we sha'n't be questioned at all, Dick, for we have now no +good story to tell them; for we are going away from Saint Malo, +instead of to it. Of course, as long as they don't question us we +are all right. We are simply two sailors on our way home for a +time; but if we have to show our papers, with those Spanish names +on them, we should be in a fix. Of course, we might have run away +from our ship at Saint Malo, but that would not explain our coming +up this way. However, I hope my French is good enough to answer any +casual questions without exciting attention. We will cross by the +ferry boat, as soon as it begins to ply and, as Avranches stands +some little distance up the river, we can avoid it altogether by +keeping along the coastline." + +A score of peasants had assembled by the time the ferry boat man +made his appearance from his cottage, and Terence and his +companion, who had been lying down 200 yards away, joined them just +as they were going down to the boat. + +"You are from Saint Malo, I suppose?" an old peasant said to +Terence. + +The latter nodded. + +"We have got a month's leave from our ship," he said. "She has been +knocked about by an English cruiser, and will be in the +shipwright's hands for five or six weeks, before she is ready for +sea again." + +"You are not from this part of the country," the peasant, who was +speaking in the patois of Normandy, remarked. + +"No, we come from the south; but one of our comrades comes from +Cherbourg and, as he cannot get away, we are going to see his +friends and tell them that he is well. It is a holiday for us, and +we may as well go there as anywhere else." + +The explanation was simple enough for the peasant, and Terence +continued chatting with him until they landed. + +"You do not need to go through Avranches," the latter said. "Take +the road by the coast through Granville to Coutances." + +"How far is it to Coutances?" + +"About twenty miles. At least, so I have heard, for I have never +been there." + +After walking a few miles, they went down on to the seashore and +lay down among some rocks until evening. At eight o'clock they +started again and walked boldly through Granville, where their +sailor's dress would, they felt sure, attract no attention. It was +about nine o'clock when they entered the place. Their reason for +doing so at this hour was that they wished to lay in a stock of +provisions, as they did not intend to enter Coutances until late at +night; when they hoped to be able to get hold of a boat, at once. +They had just made their purchases when they met a fat little man, +with a red sash--which showed him to be the Maire of the place, or +some other public functionary. + +"Where are you going, and what ship do you belong to?" he asked +pompously. + +"We are sailors on our way from Saint Malo to Cherbourg," Terence +replied. + +"You have papers, of course?" + +"Of course, Monsieur le Maire." + +"I must see them," the Maire said. "Come with me to my house, close +by." + +There were several persons near, and a man in civil uniform was +with the Maire. Therefore Terence gave an apparently willing assent +and, followed by the functionary, they went into a house close by. +A lamp was burning on the table in the hall. + +"Light these candles in my office," the Maire said. "The women have +gone up to bed." + +The man turned a key, went in and, bringing out two candles, +lighted them at the lamp; and they then went into the room. The +Maire seated himself in an armchair at the table. The minor +functionary placed the two suspected persons on the side facing +him, and took his place standing by their side. + +As they were going in, Terence whispered: + +"If there is trouble, I will take this fellow, and you manage the +Maire." + +"Now," that functionary said, "let me see your papers. + +"Why," he exclaimed, looking at the names, "you are not Frenchmen!" + +"No," Terence said quietly. "We do not pretend to be but, as you +see, we are sailors who have done service on board a French +privateer." + +"But where is this privateer?" + +"I don't know, Monsieur le Maire. We were not satisfied with our +treatment, so we left her at Brest." + +"This is very serious," the Maire said. "You are Spaniards. You +have deserted your ship at Brest. You have travelled a hundred and +fifty miles through France, and now what are you doing here?" + +"We are, as you say, monsieur, travelling through France. We desire +to see France. We have heard that it is the greatest country in the +world. Frenchmen visit Spain in large numbers. Why should not +Spaniards visit France?" + +The tone of sarcasm in which Terence spoke was not lost upon the +Maire, who rose from his seat, purple with anger. + +"You will take these men into custody," he said to his assistant. +"This is a very grave business." + +"Now, Dick!" Terence exclaimed and, turning to the man who stood +next to him, he grasped him suddenly by the throat. + +At the same moment Ryan caught up a heavy inkstand and threw it +across the table at the Maire, striking that functionary in the +stomach, and doubling him completely up. Then he ran round the table +and bound the man--who had not yet recovered his breath--tightly in +his chair, and thrust his handkerchief into his mouth. + +The man whom Terence was holding had scarcely struggled. Terence, +as he gripped him, had said, "Keep quiet or I will choke you!" and +the prisoner felt that his assailant could do so in a moment, if he +chose. + +His hands were fastened tightly behind him, with his own belt, by +Ryan. A short ruler was thrust between his teeth, and fastened +there by a handkerchief going round the back of his head. + +"So far so good, Dick. Now look round for something with which we +can bind them more firmly." + +Several hanks of red tape lay upon the table. With a portion of one +of these, the back of the chair in which the Maire sat was lashed +to the handle of a heavy bureau. Then his feet were fastened to the +two legs of the chair, so that he could neither kick nor upset +himself. The other man was then fastened as securely. This done +they blew out the candles, left the room, locked the door behind +them--taking the key--and then sallied out into the street. + +"That was a good shot of yours with the inkstand," Terence said. + +"I had my eye on it, all the time he was speaking," Ryan replied. +"I saw that, if I were to move to get round the table at him, the +little man would have time to shout; but that if I could hit him in +the wind, it would be all right." + +"Well, there must be no more stopping, now. I don't know whether +there is a Mrs. Maire; if not, there will certainly be no alarm +until morning. If there is, it depends upon what sort of woman she +is as to how long a start we shall get. If she is a sleepy woman +she is probably dreaming by this time, and may not discover until +morning that her lord and master is not by her side. If she is a +bad-tempered woman, she will probably lie for an hour or two, +thinking over what she shall say to him when he comes in. If she is +a nervous woman, she will get up and go downstairs. + +"I left the lamp burning in the hall on purpose. Seeing it there, +she will naturally think that he has not come in, and will go +upstairs again for an hour or two; then she will probably call up +the servants, and may send them out to look for him; finally, she +may go to the police office and wake up a constable. It is not +probable there are any of them on night duty, in a quiet place like +this. Altogether, I calculate that it will be at least four hours +before they think of breaking open the door of the office, to see +if he is there; so at the worst we have got four hours' start; at +the best, ten hours. + +"It is only half-past nine now. We shall be at the mouth of the +Sienne in three hours, or less. It does not look above nine or ten +miles on the map and, directly we get fairly out of the town, we +will go as quickly as we can, for every minute is of importance. + +"If we can get hold of a boat at once, we ought to be at Jersey +soon after daybreak; although I am not very sure of that, for I +believe there are all sorts of strong currents along this coast. I +remember one of the officers saying so, as we came down the Channel +on the voyage out. Of course, it will make a difference whether we +can get a boat with a sail, or not. If we cannot find a boat, we +shall have to hide up; but you may be sure that there will be a hot +search for us in the morning, and we must get off tonight, if we +can. Most likely there is a fishing village somewhere near the +mouth of the river." + +As soon as they were out of the town they broke into a trot; which +they continued, with scarcely any intermission, until they +approached a small village. + +"I expect this stands on the bank of the river," Terence said. +"There is no chance of anyone being up, so we can go through +fearlessly." + +A couple of hundred yards farther they reached the river. A large +ferry boat was moored here. Keeping along the bank to the left, +they were not long before they came upon several boats hauled up on +the shore; while three or four others lay at their moorings, a +short distance out. + +"Thank goodness," Terence exclaimed. "We shall have no difficulty, +now!" + +They selected the boat lying nearest the water's edge. The moon was +half full, but was now sinking towards the west. Its light, +however, was of some assistance to them. There was a mast and sail +in the boat, as well as a pair of oars. + +At first they were unable to move her down to the water but, +getting some oars out of the other boats, they laid them down as +rollers and, with these, managed after great exertions to get her +afloat. + + + +Chapter 8: A Smart Engagement. + + +After pushing the boat out into the stream, Terence and his +companion allowed it to drift quietly for some distance; and then, +getting out the oars, rowed hard until they were beyond the mouth +of the river. The tide was, they thought, by the level of the water +where they had embarked, within an hour or two of flood. They +therefore determined to shape their course to the north of the +point where they believed Jersey to lie, so that when tide turned, +it would sweep them down upon it. The wind was too light to be of +any assistance, but the stars were bright, and the position of the +north star served as a guide to the direction they should take. + +It had taken them some considerable time to launch the boat, and +they calculated that it was nearly midnight when they left the +mouth of the river. There was no occasion to row hard for, until it +became daylight and they could see the island of Jersey, they could +not shape their course with any certainty; and could only hope that +by keeping to the north of it they would not find, in the morning, +that the tide had taken them too far to the south. + +"We are very lucky in our weather," Terence said as, after +labouring at the heavy oars for a couple of hours, they paused for +a few minutes' rest. "If it had been a strong wind, it would never +have done for us to have started. I believe in bad weather there +are tremendous currents about the islands, and desperately rough +water. A fog would have been even worse for us. As it is, it seems +to me we cannot go very far wrong. I suppose the tide is about +turning now; but if by daylight we find that we have been carried a +long way past the island, we shall soon have the tide turning +again, which will take us back to it. + +"I am more afraid of falling in with a French privateer than I am +of missing the island. There are sure to be some of them at +Granville, to say nothing of Saint Malo. I don't suppose any of +those at Granville will put out in search of us, merely to please +the Maire; but if any were going to sea, they would be sure to keep +a lookout for us." + +"If they did see us, we should have no chance of getting away, +Terence. This boat is not so big as the one we stole at Bayonne, +but it rows much heavier." + +"There is one thing--even a privateer could not sail very fast in +this light wind and, if it freshens in the morning, we can get up +the sail." + +"Then I hope it will get up a bit," Ryan said, "for after another +five or six hours' rowing, with these beastly oars, my hands will +be raw; and I am sure my back and arms will be nearly broken." + +"We must risk that, Dick. We calculated fifteen miles in a straight +line across to Jersey, so that we must jog along at the rate of a +couple of miles an hour to get far enough to the west. Now then, +let us be moving again." + +The night seemed interminable to them; and they felt relieved, +indeed, when morning began to break. In another half hour it would +be light enough for them to see for a considerable distance. +Unshipping their oars, they stood up and looked round. + +"That must be Jersey," Terence exclaimed, pointing to the north. +"The current must have taken us past it, as I was afraid it would. +What time is it, Dick?" + +"Nearly eight." + +"Then tide must be turning already. The island must be six miles +away now. If we row hard we shall know, in half an hour, whether we +are being carried north or south." + +"But we must be going north if tide has turned, Terence?" + +"I don't know--I remember that the mate of the Sea Horse said that, +in the Channel, the course of the current did not change at high +and low water; so there is no saying what way we are going, at +present. Well, there is a little more wind, and I suppose we had +better get up our sail. There is Jersey, and whether we get there a +little sooner or a little later cannot make much difference. I am +sure we are both too tired to row her much faster than we can +sail." + +Terence agreed, and they accordingly stepped the mast and hoisted +the sail. At first the boat moved but slowly through the water, but +the wind was freshening and, in half an hour, she was foaming +along. + +"Tide is against us, still," Terence said presently. "I don't think +we are any nearer Jersey that when we first saw it." + +"Look there!" Ryan exclaimed, a few minutes later, "there is a +lugger coming out from the direction of Granville." + +"So there is, Dick, and with the wind behind her, she won't be very +long before she is here. I should say that she is about six or +seven miles off, and an hour will bring her up to us." + +"I will get out an oar, Terence. That will help us a bit. We can +change about, occasionally." + +Terence was steering with the other oar, while he held the sheet. +The boat was travelling at a good rate, but the lugger was fast +running down towards them. + +"There is a schooner coming out from Jersey!" Terence exclaimed, +joyously. "If she is a British privateer we may be saved yet. I had +just made up my mind that we were in for another French prison." + +Ryan looked over his shoulder. + +"She is farther off than the lugger," he said. + +"Yes, but the current that is keeping us back is helping her on +towards us. It will be a close thing; but I agree with you, I am +afraid that the lugger will be here first. + +"Change seats with me. I will have a spell at the oar." + +He was a good deal stronger than Ryan, and he felt comparatively +fresh after his hour's rest, so there was a perceptible increase in +the boat's speed after the change had been effected. When the +lugger was within a mile of them, and the schooner about double +that distance, the former changed her course a little, and bore up +as if to meet the schooner. + +"Hurrah!" Ryan shouted. "The Frenchman is making for the schooner +and, if the Jersey boat don't turn and run, there will be a fight." + +"The lugger looks to me the bigger boat," Terence said, as he +stopped rowing for a moment. "However, we are likely to be able to +slip off while they are at it." + +Rapidly the two vessels approached each other and, when within a +mile, a puff of smoke broke out from the lugger's bow; and was +answered almost instantly by one from the schooner. Running fast +through the water, the vessels were soon within a short distance of +each other. Terence had ceased rowing, for there was no fear that +the lugger, which was now abeam of them, would give another thought +to the small boat. + +The fight was going on in earnest, and the two vessels poured +broadsides into each other as they passed; the lugger wearing round +at once, and engaging the schooner broadside to broadside. + +"The Frenchman has the heavier metal," Terence said. "I am afraid +the schooner will get the worst of it. The lugger is crowded with +men, too. What do you say, Dick? Shall we do our best to help the +schooner?" + +"I think we ought to," Ryan agreed, at once. "She has certainly +saved us, and I think we ought to do what we can." + +Accordingly he brought the boat nearer to the wind. The two vessels +were now close-hauled, and were moving but slowly through the +water. The boat passed two or three hundred yards astern of the +lugger, sailed a little farther; and then, when able to lay her +course for the schooner, went about and bore down towards her. Just +as they did so, the halliards of the schooner's mainsail were shot +asunder, and the sail ran down the mast. There was a shout of +triumph from the lugger, and she at once closed in towards her +crippled adversary. + +"They are going to try and carry the schooner by boarding," Terence +exclaimed. "Keep her as close as she will go, Dick," and, seizing +his oar again, he began to row with all his might. + +By the time they came up, the two vessels were side by side. The +guns had ceased their fire, but there was a rattle of pistol shots, +mingled with the clash of arms and the shouts of the combatants. +Running up to the schooner's side, Terence and Ryan clambered on +the channel and sprung on to the deck of the schooner. + +A desperate fight was going on forward, where the two vessels +touched each other. There was no one aft. Here some fifteen or +twenty feet of water separated the ships, and even the helmsmen had +left the wheel to join in the fight. About half of the lugger's +crew had made their way on to the deck of the schooner, but the +Jersey men were still fighting stoutly. The rest of the lugger's +crew were gathered in the bow of their own vessel, waiting until +there should be a clear enough space left for them to join their +comrades. + +"Things look bad," Terence exclaimed. "The French crew are a great +deal stronger. Lend me a hand to turn two of these eight-pounders +round. There are plenty of cartridges handy." + +They drew the cannon back from their places, turned them round, +loaded them with a charge of powder, and then rammed in two of the +bags of bullets that were lying beside them. The schooner stood +higher out of the water than the lugger, and they were able to +train the two cannon so that they bore upon the mass of Frenchmen +in the latter's bow. + +"Take steady aim," Terence said. "We are only just in time; our +fellows are being beaten back." + +A moment later the two pieces were fired. Their discharge took +terrible effect among the French, sweeping away more than half of +those gathered in the lugger's bow. + +"Load again!" Terence exclaimed. "They are too strong for the +Jersey men, still." + +For a moment the French boarders had paused; but now, with a shout +of fury, they fell upon the crew of the schooner, driving them back +foot by foot towards the stern. The cannon were now trained +directly forward and, when the crowd of fighting men approached +them, Terence shouted in French to the Jersey men to fall back on +either side. + +The captain, turning round and seeing the guns pointing forward, +repeated the order in a stentorian shout. The Jersey men leapt to +one side or the other, and the moment they were clear the two +cannon poured their contents into the midst of the French; who had +paused for a moment, surprised at the sudden cessation of +resistance. + +Two clear lanes were swept through the crowd; and then, with a +shout, the captain of the schooner and his crew fell upon the +Frenchmen. Ryan was about to rush forward, when Terence said: + +"No, no, Ryan, load again; better make sure." + +The heavy loss they had suffered, however, so discouraged the +French that many at once turned and, running back, jumped on to the +deck of the lugger; while the others, though still resisting, were +driven after them. + +As soon as the guns were reloaded they were trained, as before, to +bear on the lugger's bow and, as the French were driven back, they +were again fired. This completed the discomfiture of the enemy and, +with loud shouts, the Jersey men followed them on to the deck of +their own ship. + +Terence and Ryan now ran forward, snatched up a couple of +cutlasses, and joined their friends; and were soon fighting in the +front line. But the French resistance was now almost over. Their +captain had fallen and, in five minutes, the last of them threw +down their arms and surrendered; while a great shout went up from +the crew of the schooner. The French flag was hauled down and, as +soon as the prisoners had been sent below, an ensign was brought +from the schooner, fixed to the flag halliards above the tricolor, +and the two hoisted together. + +The captain had already turned to the two men who had come so +opportunely to his assistance. + +"I do not know who you are, or where you come from, men, but you +have certainly saved us from capture. I did not know it was the +Annette until it was too late to draw off, or I should not have +engaged her; for she is the strongest lugger that sails out of +Granville, and carries double our weight of metal, with twice as +strong a crew; but whoever you are, I thank you most heartily. I am +half owner of the schooner, and should have lost all I was worth, +to say nothing of perhaps having to pass the next five years in a +French prison." + +"We are two British officers," Terence said. "We have escaped from +a French prison, and were making our way to Jersey when we saw that +lugger coming after us, and should certainly have been captured had +you not come up; so we thought the least we could do was to lend +you a hand." + +"Well, gentlemen, you have certainly saved us. Jacques Bontemps, +the captain of the Annette, was an old acquaintance of mine. He +commanded a smaller craft before he got the Annette, and we have +had two or three fights together. + +"So it was you whom I saw in that little boat! Of course, we made +out that the lugger was chasing you, though why they should be +doing so we could not tell; but we thought no more about you after +the fight once began, and were as astonished as the Frenchmen when +you swept their bow. I just glanced round and saw what looked like +two French fishermen, and thought that you must be two of the +lugger's crew who, for some reason or other, had turned the guns +against their own ship. + +"It will be a triumph, indeed, for us when we enter Saint Helier. +The Annette has been the terror of our privateers. Fortunately she +was generally away cruising, and many a prize has she taken into +Granville. I have had the luck to recapture two of them, myself; +but when she is known to be at home we most of us keep in port, for +she is a good deal more than a match for any craft that sails out +from Saint Helier. + +"She only went into Granville yesterday, and I thought that there +was no fear of her being out again, for a week or so. When I saw +her, I took her for a smaller lugger that sails from that port, and +which is no more than a match for us. The fact is, we were looking +at her chasing you, and wondering if we should be in time, instead +of noticing her size. It was not until she fired that first +broadside that we found we had caught a tartar. We should have run, +if there had been a chance of getting away; but she is a +wonderfully fast boat, and we knew that our only chance was to +knock away one of her masts. + +"And now, we will be making sail again. You must excuse me for a +few minutes." + +In half an hour the main halliards had been repaired, and the sail +hoisted. When other damages were made good the captain, with half +his crew, went on board the lugger; and the two vessels sailed +together for Jersey. Terence and his companion had accompanied the +captain. + +"Now, gentlemen, you may as well come down with me into the cabin. +It is likely enough that you will be able to find some clothes, in +Bontemps' chest, that will fit you. He was a dandy, in his way. At +any rate, his clothes will suit you better than those you have on." + +They found, indeed, that the lugger's captain had so large a store +of clothing that they had no difficulty, whatever, in rigging +themselves out. While they were changing, the captain had left +them. He returned, presently, with a beaming face. + +"She is a more valuable prize than I hoped for," he said. "She is +full almost to the hatches with the plunder she had taken in her +last cruise. I cannot make out what led her to come out of +Granville, unless it was in pursuit of you." + +"I expect it was that," Terence said. "We were arrested by the +Maire of Granville, and had to tie him and one of his officials up. +He was a pompous little man; and no doubt, when he got free, went +down to the port and persuaded the captain of the lugger to put +out, at once, to endeavour to find us. I expect he told him that we +were prisoners of importance, either English spies or French +emigres. + +"Well, Captain, I am glad that the capture has turned out well for +you." + +"You certainly ought to share it," the captain said; "for if it had +not been for you, matters would have gone all the other way, and we +should have undoubtedly been captured." + +"Oh, we don't want to share it! We have helped you to avoid a +French prison, but you have certainly saved us from the same thing, +so we are fairly quits." + +"Well, we shall have time to talk about that when we get into port. +In the meantime we will search Jacques' lockers. Like enough there +may be something worth having there. Of course, he may have taken +it ashore, directly he landed; but it is hardly likely and, as he +has evidently captured several British merchantmen while he has +been out, he is sure to have some gold and valuables in the +lockers." + +The search, indeed, brought to light four bags of money, each +marked with the name of an English ship. They contained, in all, +over 800 pounds; with several gold watches, rings, and other +valuables. + +"Now, gentlemen," the captain said, "at least you will divide this +money with me. The Annette and the cargo below hatches are +certainly worth ten times as much, and I must insist upon your +going shares with me. I shall feel very hurt if you will not do +so." + +"I thank you, Captain," Terence said, "and will not refuse your +offer. We shall have to provide ourselves with new uniforms, and +take a passage out to Portugal, which is where our regiments are, +at present; so the money will be very useful." + +"And I see you have not a watch, monsieur. You had better take one +of these." + +"Thanks! I parted with mine to a good woman, who helped me to +escape from Bayonne; so I will accept that offer, also." + +In two hours the schooner entered the port of Saint Helier; the +lugger, under easy sail, following in her wake. They were greeted +with enthusiastic cheers by the crowd that gathered on the quays, +as soon as it was seen that the prize was the dreaded Annette--which +had, for some months past, been a terror to the privateers and +fishermen of the place--and that she should have been captured by +the Cerf seemed marvellous, indeed. + +A British officer was on the quay when they got alongside. He came +on board at once. + +"The governor has sent me to congratulate you, in his name, Captain +Teniers," he said, "on having captured a vessel double your own +size, which has for some time been the terror of these waters. He +will be glad if you will give me some particulars of the action; +and you will, when you can spare time afterwards, go up and give +him a full report of it." + +"I owe the capture entirely to these two gentlemen, who are +officers in your army. They had escaped from a French prison, and +were making for this port when I first saw them this morning, with +the Annette in hot chase after them. It did not strike me that it +was her, for it was only last night that the news came in that she +had been seen, yesterday, sailing towards Granville; and I thought +that she was the Lionne, which is a boat our own size. I came up +before she had overhauled the boat and, directly the fight began, I +could see the mistake I had made. But as she was a good deal faster +than we were, it was of no use running. There was just a chance +that I might cripple her, and get away." + +He then related the incidents of the fight. + +"Well, I congratulate you, gentlemen," the officer said, heartily. +"You have indeed done a good turn to Captain Teniers. To whom have +I the pleasure of speaking?" + +"My name is O'Connor," replied Terence. "I have the honour to be on +Sir Arthur Wellesley's staff; and have the rank of captain in our +army, but am a colonel in the Portuguese service. This is +Lieutenant Ryan, of His Majesty's Mayo Fusiliers." + +The officer looked a little doubtful, while Terence was speaking. +It was difficult to believe that the young fellow, of one or two +and twenty, at the outside, could be a captain on Lord Wellington's +staff--for Sir Arthur had been raised to the peerage, after the +battle of Talavera--still less that he should be a colonel in the +Portuguese service. However, he bowed gravely, and said: + +"My name is Major Chalmers, of the 35th. I am adjutant to the +governor. If it will not be inconvenient, I shall be glad if you +will return with me, and report yourselves to him." + +"We are quite ready," Terence said. "We have nothing to do in the +way of packing up, for we have only the clothes we stand in; which +were, indeed, the property of the captain of the lugger, who was +killed in the action." + +Telling Captain Teniers that they would be coming down again, when +they had seen the governor, the two friends accompanied the +officer. Very few words were said on the way, for the major +entertained strong doubts whether Terence had not been hoaxing him, +and whether the account he had given of himself was not altogether +fictitious. On arriving at the governor's he left them for a few +minutes in the anteroom; while he went in and gave the account he +had received, from the captain, of the manner in which the lugger +had been captured; and said that the two gentlemen who had played +so important a part in the matter were, as they said, one of them +an officer on the staff of Lord Wellington and a colonel in the +Portuguese army, and the other a subaltern in the Mayo Fusiliers. + +"Why do you say, as they said, major? Have you any doubt about +it?" + +"My only reason for doubting is that they are both young fellows of +about twenty, which would accord well enough with the claim of one +of them to be a lieutenant; but that the other should be a captain +on Lord Wellington's staff, and a colonel in the Portuguese +service, is quite incredible." + +"It would seem so, certainly, major. However, it is evident that +they have both behaved extraordinarily well in this fight with the +Annette, and I cannot imagine that, whatever story a young fellow +might tell to civilians, he would venture to assume a military +title to which he had no claim, on arrival at a military station. +Will you please ask them to come in? At any rate, their story will +be worth hearing." + +"Good day, gentlemen," he went on, as Terence and Ryan entered. "I +have to congratulate you, very heartily, upon the very efficient +manner in which you assisted in the capture of the French privateer +that has, for some time, been doing great damage among the islands. +She has been much more than a match for any of our privateers here +and, although she has been chased several times by the cruisers, +she has always managed to get away. + +"And now, may I ask how you happened to be approaching the island, +in a small boat, at the time that the encounter took place?" + +"Certainly, sir. We were both prisoners at Bayonne. I myself had +been captured by the French, when endeavouring to cross the +frontier into Portugal with my regiment; while Lieutenant Ryan was +wounded at Talavera, and was in the hospital there when the +Spaniards left the town, and the French marched in." + +"What is your regiment, Colonel O'Connor?" + +"It is called the Minho regiment, sir, and consists of two +battalions. We have had the honour of being mentioned in general +orders more than once; and were so on the day after the first +attack of Victor upon Donkin's brigade, stationed on the hill +forming the left of the British position at Talavera." + +The governor looked at his adjutant who, rising, went to a table on +which were a pile of official gazettes. Picking out one, he handed +it to the governor, who glanced through it. + +"Here is the general order of the day," he said, "and assuredly +Lord Wellington speaks, in the very highest terms, of the service +that Colonel O'Connor and the Minho regiment, under his command, +rendered. Certainly very high praise, indeed. + +"You will understand, sir, that we are obliged to be cautious here; +and it seemed so strange that so young an officer should have +attained the rank of colonel, that I was curious to know how it +could have occurred." + +"I am by no means surprised that it should seem strange, to you, +that I should hold the rank I claim. I was, like my friend +Lieutenant Ryan, in the Mayo Fusiliers; when I had the good fortune +to be mentioned, in despatches, in connection with an affair in +which the transport that took us out to Portugal was engaged with +two French privateers. In consequence of the mention, General Fane +appointed me one of his aides-de-camp; and I acted in that capacity +during the campaign that ended at Corunna. I was left on the field, +insensible, on the night after that battle. + +"When I came to myself, the army was embarking; so I made my way +through Galicia into Portugal and, on reaching Lisbon, was +appointed by Sir John Craddock to his staff; and was sent by him on +a mission to the northern frontier of Portugal. + +"On the way I took the command of a body of freshly-raised +Portuguese levies, who were without an officer or leader of any +kind. With the aid of a small escort with me, I formed them into a +reliable regiment, and had the good fortune to do some service with +them. I was therefore confirmed in my command, and was given +Portuguese rank. Sir Arthur Wellesley, on succeeding Sir John +Craddock in the supreme command, still kept my name on the +headquarter staff, thereby adding greatly to my authority; and +continued me in the independent command of my regiment. + +"After Talavera we were despatched to aid the Spaniards in holding +the pass of Banos but, before we arrived there, Soult had crossed +the pass and, being cut off by his force from rejoining the army, I +determined to cross the mountains into Portugal. In so doing we +came upon a French division, on its march to Plasencia, and the +company of my regiment with which I was were cut off, and taken +prisoners." + +"Forgive me for having doubted you, Colonel O'Connor. I should, of +course, have remembered your name. In his report of his operations, +before and subsequent to the battle of Talavera, Lord Wellington +mentions, more than once, that his left during his advance was +covered by the partisan corps of Wilson and O'Connor; and mentions, +too, that it was by messengers from Colonel O'Connor that he first +learned how formidable a force was in his rear, and was therefore +able to cross the Tagus and escape from his perilous position. Of +course, it never entered my mind that the officer who had rendered +such valuable service was so young a man. + +"There is only one mystery left. How was it, when you and Mr. Ryan +escaped from Bayonne, that you are found in a boat in the Bay of +Saint Malo?" + +"It does seem rather a roundabout way of rejoining," Terence said, +with a smile. "We escaped in a boat and made along the north coast +of Spain but, when off Santander, were blown out to sea in a gale, +and were picked up by a French privateer. We were supposed to be +two Spanish fishermen and, as the privateer was short of boats, +they took ours and enrolled us among their crew. They were on their +way to Brest, and we took an opportunity to desert, and made our +way on foot until we reached the mouth of the river Sienne; and +made off in a boat, last night. This morning we saw the privateer +in chase of us, and should certainly have been recaptured had not +the Cerf come up and engaged her. While the fight was going on we +had gone on board the schooner, unperceived by either party, and +took what seemed to us the best way of aiding our friends; who were +getting somewhat the worst of it, the crew of the lugger being very +much stronger than the crew of the schooner." + +"Well, I hope that you will both, at once, take up your quarters +with me as long as you stay here; and I shall then have an +opportunity of hearing of your adventures more in detail." + +"Thank you very much, sir. We shall be very happy to accept your +kind invitation; but I hope we shall not trespass upon your +hospitality long, for we are anxious to be off, as soon as +possible, so as to rejoin without loss of time. I am particularly +so for, although it will be two or three months before there is any +movement of the troops, I am afraid of finding someone else +appointed to the command of my regiment; and I have been so long +with it, now, that I should be sorry indeed to be put to any other +work." + +"That I can quite understand. Well, there is no regular +communication from here, but there is not a week passes without +some craft or other sailing from here to Weymouth." + +"We would rather, if possible, be put on board some ship on her way +to Portugal," Terence said. "If we landed in England, we should +have to report ourselves, and might be sent to a depot, and be +months before we got out there again. I spoke to the captain of the +Cerf about it, this morning; and he was good enough to promise +that, as soon as he had repaired damages, he would run out into the +Bay, and put us on board the first ship he overhauled bound for the +Peninsula." + +"That would be an excellent plan, from your point of view," the +governor said. "Teniers is one of the best sailors on the island, +and has several times carried despatches for me to Weymouth. You +could not be in better hands." + +Four days later the schooner was ready to sail again. + +"This will be my last voyage in her," the captain said. "I have had +an offer for her, and shall sell her as soon as I come back again, +as I shall take the command of the Annette. I ought to do well in +her, for her rig and build are so evidently French that I shall be +able to creep up close to any French vessel making along the coast, +or returning from abroad, without being suspected of being an +enemy. Of course, I shall have to carry a much stronger crew than +at present; and I hope to clip the wings of some of these French +privateers, before long." + +They had, on the day of their landing, ordered new uniforms, and +had purchased a stock of underclothing. They were fortunate in +being able to pick up swords and belts, and all were now ready for +them and, on the fifth day after landing, they said goodbye to the +governor, and sailed on board the Cerf. + +When twenty-four hours out the vessel lay to, being now on the +track of ships bound south. On the following day they overhauled +six vessels and, as the last of these was bound with military +stores for Lisbon, Terence and Ryan were transferred to her. With a +hearty adieu to the skipper, they took their places in the boat and +were rowed to the vessel; being greeted, on their departure, by a +loud and hearty cheer from the crew of the privateer. There were no +passengers on board the store ship, and they had an uneventful +voyage, until she dropped anchor in the Tagus. + +After paying the captain the small sum he charged for their +passage, they landed. They first went to a hotel and put up. On +sallying out, Ryan had no difficulty in learning that the Mayo +Fusiliers were at Portalegre. + +Terence took his way to headquarters. The first person he met, on +entering, was his old acquaintance Captain Nelson, now wearing the +equipments of a major. The latter looked at him inquiringly, and +then exclaimed: + +"Why, it is O'Connor! Why, I thought you were a prisoner! I am +delighted to see you. Where have you sprung from?" + +"I escaped from Bayonne and, after sundry adventures, landed an +hour ago. In the first place, what has been done with my regiment?" + +"It is with Hill's division, which is at Abrantes and Portalegre." + +"Who is in command?" + +"Your friend Herrara. No British officer has been appointed in your +place. There was some talk of handing it over to Trant in the +spring but, as nothing can be done before that, no one has yet been +nominated." + +"I am glad, indeed, to hear it. I have been fidgeting about it, +ever since I went away." + +"Well, I will take you in to the adjutant general, at once. I heard +him speak, more than once, of the services you rendered by sending +news that Soult and Ney were both in the valley, and so enabling +Lord Wellington to get safely across the Tagus. He said it was an +invaluable service. Of course Herrara reported your capture, and +that you had sacrificed yourself, and one of the companies, to +secure the safety of the rest. Now, come in." + +[Illustration: 'This is Colonel O'Connor, sir.'] + +"This is Colonel O'Connor, sir," Major Nelson said, as he entered +the adjutant general's room. "I could not resist the pleasure of +bringing him in to you. He has just escaped from Bayonne, and +landed an hour ago." + +"I am glad to see you, indeed," the adjutant general said, rising +and shaking Terence warmly by the hand. "The last time we met was +on the day when Victor attacked us, in the afternoon, after sending +the Spaniards flying. You rendered us good service that evening, +and still greater by acquainting the commander-in-chief of the +large force that had gathered in his rear--a force at least three +times as strong as we had reckoned on. A day later, and we should +have been overwhelmed. As it was, we had just time to cross the +Tagus before they were ready to fall upon us. + +"I am sure Lord Wellington will be gratified, indeed, to hear that +you are back again. I suppose you will like to return to your +command of the Minho regiment?" + +"I should prefer that to anything else," Terence said, "though, of +course, I am ready to undertake any other duty that you might +intrust to me." + +"No, I think it would be for the good of the service that you +should remain as you are. The difficulty of obtaining anything like +accurate information, of the strength and position of the enemy, is +one of the greatest we have to contend with; and indeed, were it +not for Trant's command and yours, we should be almost in the dark. + +"Please sit down for a minute. I will inform Lord Wellington of +your return." + + + +Chapter 9: Rejoining. + + +The adjutant general returned in two or three minutes. + +"Will you please come this way, Colonel O'Connor," he said, as he +re-entered the room; "the commander-in-chief wishes to speak to +you." + +"I am glad to see you back, Colonel O'Connor," Lord Wellington said +cordially, but in his usual quick, short manner; "the last time I +saw you was at Salamende. You did well at Talavera; and better +still afterwards, when the information I received from you was the +only trustworthy news obtained during the campaign, and was simply +invaluable. Sir John Craddock did me no better service than by +recognizing your merits, and speaking so strongly to me in your +favour that I retained you in command of the corps that you had +raised. I shall be glad to know that you are again at their head, +when the campaign reopens; for I know that I can rely implicitly +upon you for information. Of course, your name has been removed +from the list of my staff, since you were taken prisoner; but it +shall appear in orders tomorrow again. I shall be glad if you will +dine with me, this evening." + +"I wish I had a few more young officers like that," he said to the +adjutant general, when Terence had bowed and retired. "He is full +of energy, and ready to undertake any wild adventure, and yet he is +as prudent and thoughtful as most men double his age. I like his +face. He has a right to be proud of the position he has won, but +there is not the least nonsense about him, and he evidently has no +idea that he has done anything out of the ordinary course. At first +sight he looks a mere good-tempered lad, but the lower part of his +face is marked by such resolution and firmness that it goes far to +explain why he has succeeded." + +There were but four other officers dining with the +commander-in-chief that evening. Lord Wellington asked Terence +several questions as to the route the convoy of prisoners had +followed, the treatment they had received, and the nature of the +roads, and whether the Spanish guerillas were in force. Terence +gave a brief account of the attack that had been made on the French +convoy, and the share that he and his fellow prisoners had taken in +the affair; at which Lord Wellington's usually impassive face +lighted up with a smile. + +"That was a somewhat irregular proceeding, Colonel O'Connor." + +"I am afraid so, sir; but after their treatment by the Spaniards +when in the hospital at Talavera, our men were so furious against +them that I believe they would have fought them, even had I +endeavoured to hold them back; which, indeed, being a prisoner, I +do not know that I should have had any authority to do." + +"And how did you escape from Bayonne?" the general asked. + +"Through the good offices of some of the soldiers who had been our +escort, sir. They were on duty as a prison guard and, being +grateful for the help that we had given them in the affair with the +guerillas, they aided me to escape." + +"And how did you manage afterwards?" + +Terence related very briefly the adventures that he and his +companion had had, before at last reaching Jersey. + +On leaving, the adjutant general requested him to call in the +morning before starting to rejoin his regiment, as he expressed his +intention of doing. The talk was a long and friendly one, the +adjutant general asking many questions as to the constitution of +his corps. + +"There is one thing I should like very much, sir," Terence said, +after he had finished, "it would be a great assistance to me if I +had an English officer, as adjutant." + +"Do you mean one for each battalion, or one for the two?" + +"I think that one for both battalions would answer the purpose, +sir. It would certainly be of great assistance to me, and take a +great many details off my hands." + +"I certainly think that you do need assistance. Is there any one +you would specially wish to be appointed?" + +"I should be very glad to have Lieutenant Ryan, who has been with +me on my late journey. We are old friends, as I was in the Mayo +regiment with him. He speaks Portuguese very fairly. Of course, it +would be useless for me to have an officer who did not do so. I +should certainly prefer him to anyone else." + +"That is easily managed," the officer replied. "I will put him in +orders, today, as appointed adjutant to the Minho Portuguese +regiment, with the acting rank of captain. I will send a note to +Lord Beresford, stating the reason for the appointment for, as you +and your officers owe your local rank to him, he may feel that he +ought to have been specially informed of Ryan's appointment; +although your corps is in no way under his orders, but acting with +the British army." + +"I am very much obliged to you, indeed, sir. It will be a great +comfort to me to have an adjutant, and it will naturally be much +more pleasant to have one upon whom I know I can depend absolutely. +Indeed, I have been rather in an isolated position, so far. The +majors of the two battalions naturally associate with their own +officers, consequently Colonel Herrara has been my only intimate +friend and, although he is a very good fellow, one longs sometimes +for the companionship of a brother Englishman." + +Terence had not told Dick Ryan of his intention to ask for him as +his adjutant. When he joined him at the hotel, he saluted him with: + +"Well, Captain Ryan, have you everything ready for the start?" + +"I have, General," Dick replied with a grin, "or perhaps I ought to +say Field Marshal." + +"Not yet, Dicky, not yet; and indeed, possibly I am premature +myself, in addressing you as Captain." + +"Rather; I should say I have a good many steps to make, before I +get my company." + +"Well, Dick, I can tell you that, when the orders come out today, +you will see your name among them as appointed adjutant to the +Minho Portuguese regiment, with acting rank as captain." + +"Hurrah!" Ryan shouted. "You don't say that you have managed it, +old fellow? I am delighted. This is glorious. I am awfully obliged +to you." + +"I think, Dick, we will make up our minds not to start until this +evening. You know we had arranged to hire a vehicle, and that I +should get a horse when I joined; but I think now we may as well +buy the horses at once, for of course you will be mounted, too. We +might pay a little more for them, but we should save the expense of +the carriage." + +"That would be much better," Dick said. "Let us go and get them, at +once. There must be plenty of horses for sale in a place like this +and, as we are both flush of money, I should think that a couple of +hours would do it." + +"I hope it will. As I told them at headquarters that I was going to +start today, I should not like any of them to run across me here +this evening. No doubt the landlord of the hotel can tell us of +some man who keeps the sort of animals we want. The saddlery we +shall have no difficulty about." + +Two hours later a couple of serviceable horses had been bought; +with saddles, bridles, holsters, and valises. In the last named +were packed necessaries for the journey, and each provided himself +with a brace of double-barrelled pistols. The rest of their effects +were packed in the trunks they had bought at Jersey, and were +handed over to a Portuguese firm of carriers, to be sent up to the +regiment. + +At two o'clock they mounted and rode to Sobral. The next day they +rode to Santarem, and on the following evening to Abrantes. They +here learned that their corps was in camp, with two other +Portuguese regiments, four miles higher up the river. As it was +dark when they arrived at Abrantes, they agreed to sleep there and +go on the next morning; as Terence wished to report himself to +General Hill, to whose division the regiment was attached, until +operations should commence in the spring. + +They put up at an inn and, having eaten a meal, walked out into the +town, which was full of British soldiers. They were not long before +they found the cafe that was set apart for the use of officers and, +on entering, Terence at once joined a party of three, belonging to +a regiment with all of whose officers he was acquainted, as they +had been encamped next to the Mayo Fusiliers during the long months +preceding the advance up the valley of the Tagus. Ryan was, of +course, equally known to them; and the three officers rose, with an +exclamation of surprise, as the newcomers walked up to the table. + +"Why, O'Connor! How in the world did you get here? How are you, +Ryan? I thought that you were both prisoners." + +"So we were," Terence said, "but as you see, we gave them the slip, +and here we are." + +They drew up chairs to the little table. + +"You may consider yourself lucky in your regiment being on the +river, O'Connor. You will be much better off than Ryan will be, at +Portalegre." + +"I am seconded," Ryan said, "and have been appointed O'Connor's +adjutant, with the temporary rank of captain." + +"I congratulate you. The chances are you will have a much better +time of it than if you were with your own regiment. I don't mean +now, but when the campaign begins in the spring. O'Connor always +seems to be in the thick of it, while our division may remain here, +while the fighting is going on somewhere else. Besides, he always +manages to dine a good deal better than we do. His fellows, being +Portuguese, are able to get supplies, when the peasants are all +ready to take their oath that they have not so much as a loaf of +bread or a fowl in their village. + +"How will you manage to get on with them, Ryan, without speaking +their language? Oh! I remember, you were grinding up Portuguese all +the spring, so I suppose you can get on pretty well, now." + +"Yes; O'Connor promised that he would ask for me, as soon as I +could speak the language, so I stuck at it hard; and now, you see, +I have got my reward." + +"I can tell you that the troops, here, are a good deal better off +than they are elsewhere. There is a fearful want of land carriage, +but we get our supplies up by boats. That is why the Portuguese +regiments are encamped on the river. + +"Well, how did you get away from the French? It is curious that +when I saw O'Grady last--which was a fortnight ago, when he came in +to get a conveyance to take over sundry cases of whisky that had +come up the river, for the use of his mess--he said: + +"'I expect that O'Connor and Dick Ryan will turn up here, before +the spring. I am sure they will, if they have got together.'" + +"It is too long a story to tell, here," Ryan said. "It is full of +hairbreadth escapes, dangers by sea and land, and ends up with a +naval battle." + +The officers laughed. + +"Well, will you come to our quarters?" one of them said. "We have +got some decent wine, and some really good cigars which came up +from Lisbon last week, and there are lots of our fellows who will +be glad to see you." + +They accordingly adjourned to a large building where the officers +of the regiment were quartered and, in the apartment that had been +turned into a mess room, they found a dozen officers, all of whom +were known both to Terence and Ryan. After many questions were +asked and answered on both sides, Ryan was requested to tell the +story of their adventures after being taken prisoners. He told it +in an exaggerated style that elicited roars of laughter, making the +most of what he called The Battle of the Shirt Sleeves with the +guerillas; exaggerating the dangers of his escape, and the horrors +of their imprisonment, for a week, among the sails and nets. + +"O'Connor," he said, "has hardly got back his sense of smell yet. +The stink of tar, mixed with fishy odours, will be vivid in my +remembrance for the rest of my life." + +When he had at last finished, one of them said: + +"And now, how much of all this is true, Ryan?" + +"Every fact is just as I have told it," he replied gravely. "You +may think that I have exaggerated, for did an Irishman ever tell a +story, without exaggeration? But I give you my honour that never +did one keep nearer to the truth than I have done. I don't say that +the fisherman's wife took quite such a strong fancy to me as I have +stated, although she can hardly have been insensible to my personal +advantages; but really, otherwise, I don't know that I have +diverged far from the narrow path of truth. I tell you, those two +days that we were running before that gale was a thing I never wish +to go through again." + +"And you really tied up the Maire of Granville, Ryan?" + +"We did so," Dicky said, "and a miserable object the poor little +fat man looked, as he sat in his chair trussed up like a fowl." + +"And now, about the sea fight, Ryan?" + +"Every word was as it happened. O'Connor and I turned gunners, and +very decent shots we made, too; and a proof of it was that, if we +would have taken it, I believe the captain of the schooner would +have given us half the booty found in the lugger's hold; but we +were modest and self denying, and contented ourselves with a third, +each, of the cash found in the captain's cabin; which we could not +have refused if we wanted to, the captain made such a point of it. +It came to nearly three hundred pounds apiece; and mighty useful it +was, for we had, of course, to get new uniforms and rigs out, and +horses and saddlery at Lisbon. I don't know what I should have done +without it, for my family's finances would not have stood my +drawing upon them; and another mortgage would have ruined them, +entirely." + +"Well, certainly, that is a substantial proof of the truth of that +incident in your story; but I think that, rather than have passed +forty-eight hours in that storm, I would have stopped at Bayonne +and taken my chance of exchange." + +"Then I am afraid, Forester, that you are deficient in martial +ardour," Terence said gravely. "Our desire to be back fighting the +French was so great that no dangers would have appalled us." + +There was a general laugh. + +"Well, at any rate, you managed uncommonly well, Ryan, whether it +was martial ardour that animated you or not; and O'Grady was not +far wrong when he said that you and O'Connor would creep out +through a mouse's hole, if there was no other way of doing it." + +"Now, what has been doing since we have been away?" Terence asked. + +"Well, to begin with, all Andalusia has been captured by Soult. +Suchet has occupied Valencia. Lerida was captured by him, after a +scandalously weak resistance; for there were over nine thousand +troops there, and the place surrendered after only 1000 had fallen. +Gerona, on the other hand, was only captured by Augereau after a +resistance as gallant as that of Saragossa. + +"That is the extraordinary thing about these Spaniards. Sometimes +they show themselves cowardly beyond expression, at others they +fight like heroes. Just at present, even the Juntas do not pretend +that they have an army capable of driving the French out of the +Pyrenees; which is a comfort, for we shall have to rely upon +ourselves and not be humbugged by the Spaniards, the worthlessness +of whose promises, Lord Wellington has ascertained, by bitter +experience. The Portuguese government is as troublesome and as +truthless as that of Spain, but Wellington is able to hold his own +with them; and there is little doubt that the regular regiments +will fight, and be really of valuable assistance to us; but these +have been raised in spite of the constant opposition of the Junta +at Lisbon. + +"There is no doubt that the next campaign will be a hot one for, +now that Spain has been as completely subdued as such vainglorious, +excitable people can be subdued, the French marshals are free to +join against us; and it is hard to see how, with but 30,000 men, we +are going to defend Portugal against ten times that number of +French. Still, I suppose we shall do it, somehow. The French have a +large army on the other side of the Aqueda, and there is no doubt +they will besiege Ciudad Rodrigo, as soon as winter is over. I +doubt whether we shall be strong enough to march to its relief, and +I fancy that in that direction the Coa will be about our limit. At +any rate, it is likely to be a stirring campaign. + +"The absurdity of the thing is, that we have an army in Sicily +which might as well be at Jericho, for any use it is. If it joined +us here, it would make all the difference in the world; though +certainly till the campaign opens it would have to be quartered at +Lisbon, for it is as much as the wretched transport can do to feed +us. Now the truth is, Portugal is a miserably poor country at the +best of times, and does not produce enough for the wants of the +people. Of course, it has been terribly impoverished by the war. +The fields in most places have been untilled and, in fact, the +greater portion of the population, as well as our army, has to be +fed from England. + +"Altogether, Wellington must have enough worry to drive an ordinary +man out of his mind. I never heard of such difficulties as those he +has to meet. We come to help a people who won't help themselves, to +fight for people who not only won't fight for themselves, but want +to dictate how we shall fight. Instead of being fed by the country, +we have to feed it; and the whole object of the Juntas, both in +Spain and Portugal, seems to be to throw every difficulty in our +way, and to thwart us at every turn. The first step towards success +would be to hang every member, of every Junta, in every place we +occupy." + +A general chorus of "Hear, hear!" showed how deeply was the feeling +excited by the conduct of the Portuguese and Spanish authorities. + +After chatting until a late hour, Terence and his companion +returned to their inn. The next morning, Terence reported himself +to General Hill. + +"I am glad to see you again, Colonel O'Connor," the general said. +"The last time we met was when the surgeons were dressing my +wounds, on the heights near Talavera. That was a hot business, for +a time." + +"Yes, sir; and I have to thank you, very much, for the very kind +report you sent in as to the conduct of my regiment." + +"They deserved it," the general said. "If they had not come up at +the time they did, we should have had hard work to retake that +hill. + +"Your regiment has been behaving very well, since they have been +here. They, like the other Portuguese regiments, have often been on +short rations, and their pay is very much in arrear, but there has +been no grumbling. I know Herrara will be extremely glad to have +you back again in command. He has said as much, several times, when +he has been in here. He is a good man, but not strong enough for +his position; and I can see that he feels that, himself, and is +conscious that he is not equal to the responsibility. I intended to +recommend that a British officer should be placed in command of the +regiment, before the campaign opens in the spring. Your two majors +do their best, but they have scarcely sufficient weight; for their +men know that they were but troopers when the regiment was first +raised." + +"I shall be glad to be back again, sir; and I am pleased to say +that I have been given an adjutant--Lieutenant Ryan, of the Mayo +Fusiliers. He has the acting rank of captain. He is an old friend +of mine, and is a good officer. He has just effected an escape from +Bayonne with me." + +"Yes, that will be of great assistance to you," the general said. +"With two battalions to command, you must want a right-hand man +very much. I shall be glad if your regiment remains in my division, +when the campaign reopens; but I suppose that, as before, you will +be sent ahead. At present, it is only attached to my command for +convenience of rationing and pay. I have inspected it twice, and it +is by far the finest of the Portuguese regiments here. But I can +see a certain deterioration, and I am sure that they want you back +badly. Still, it is not your loss only that is telling on them. No +soldiers like to go without their pay. Lord Wellington himself is +always kept short of funds. The Portuguese Ministry declare that +they have none. Of course that is all a lie but, true or false, it +is certain that all the Portuguese regiments are greatly in arrears +of pay, ill-provided with clothes, and indeed would be starved, +were it not that they are fed by our commissariat." + +After his interview with the general, Terence went back to the inn +and, five minutes later, started with Ryan to join the regiment. +The two battalions were engaged in drill when they rode up, but as +the men recognized Terence there was a sudden movement, then a +tremendous cheer and, breaking their ranks, they ran towards him, +waving their shakos and shouting loudly; while Herrara, Bull, and +Macwitty galloped up to shake him by the hand. + +"This is not a very military proceeding," Terence laughed, "but I +cannot help being gratified." + +He held up his hands for silence. + +"Form the men into a hollow square," he said to the majors. + +In a very short time the order was carried out, and then Terence +addressed them. + +"My men," he said, "I am deeply gratified by your hearty reception, +and I can assure you that I am quite as glad to be back in the +regiment as the regiment can be to have me with it again. While I +was a prisoner, one of the things that troubled me most was that, +when I returned, I might find that someone else had been appointed +your commander; and I was glad indeed when, upon landing at Lisbon, +I heard that this had not been the case, and that I could resume my +command of a body of men of whom I am proud; and at no time more +proud than when you beat off the attacks of a whole brigade of +French cavalry, and made good your escape to the mountains. I +regret that some of your comrades failed to do this, but the manner +in which they did their duty, and sacrificed themselves to cover +your retreat, was worthy of all praise, and reflects the highest +credit upon the regiment. + +"I have been fortunate enough to make my escape from a French +prison, in company with my friend here, Captain Ryan; who has, at +my request, been appointed by the commander-in-chief to be your +adjutant. I am sorry to hear that there have been difficulties in +the way of rations, and that your pay is in arrears. However, I +know well that you are not serving for the sake of pay, but to +defend your country from invasion by the French; and that whether +you get your pay day by day, or receive it in a lump sum later on, +will make no difference to you; and indeed, in some respects, you +will be better off for the delay for, getting it daily, it is spent +as soon as obtained; whereas, if it comes in a lump sum, it will be +useful to you when you return to your homes, after your work is +done. I am confident that, in this regiment at least, which has +borne itself so well from the day that it was raised, there will be +neither grumbling nor discontent; but that you will suffer any +hardship or privation that may come in your way as trifling +incidents in the great work that you have undertaken: to defend, at +the cost of your lives if need be, your country from the invader. +The regiment is dismissed drill for the day." + +Loud cheers at once broke from the men and, falling out, they +proceeded to their tents. + +"Well, Terence, there is no doubt about the enthusiasm of your +fellows," Ryan remarked. "As you said, it was hardly military, but +it was better. It was real affection, and I am sure the men would +follow you anywhere." + +Ryan shook hands with Herrara, Bull, and Macwitty; all of whom he +knew well, from his frequent visits to Terence in the spring. + +"I am very glad that you have come to us, Captain Ryan," Bull said. +"A regiment don't seem like a regiment without an adjutant, and it +will take a lot of work off the colonel's hands. I wish there could +have been one for each battalion." + +"How has the regiment been going on, Bull?" + +"Nothing much to grumble about, sir; but I must say that it has +been more slack than it was. We have all done our best, but we have +missed you terribly; and the men don't seem to take quite as much +pains with their drill as they used to do, when you were in +command. However, that will be all right now that you have come +back again. I have always found that when the battalion was not +working well, the men have pulled themselves together at once when +I said: + +"'This won't do, lads. The colonel will be grievously disappointed, +when he comes back again, if he finds that you have lost your +smartness.' + +"It was as much as we could do to hold them in hand, when they saw +you surrounded by the French. They would have rushed back again, to +a man, if we would have let them. I own I felt it hard, myself, to +be marching away and leaving you behind." + +In a few minutes, a couple of tents were erected by the side of +that of Herrara and, while these were being got ready for +occupation, Terence and Ryan, with the two majors, entered that of +Herrara; and the latter produced two or three bottles of wine from +his private store, and a box of cigars. So for some time they sat +chatting, Terence giving an outline of the events that had happened +since he had been away from the regiment. He and Ryan had ordered +half a dozen small casks of wine, and two cases of whisky, to be +sent up with their trunks by water; and now asked regarding the +rations of the men. + +"They get their bread regularly," Herrara said. "They have put up +some large bakeries at Abrantes and, as the flour is brought up in +boats, there is no difficulty that way. They get their meat pretty +regularly, and their wine always. There is no ground of complaint, +whatever, as to rations here; though, from what I hear, it is very +different at the stations where everything has to be taken up by +waggons or mules. + +"The difficulty is with the uniforms. Not one has been served out, +and it is really difficult to get the men to look smart, when many +of them are dressed almost in rags. It is still worse in the matter +of boots. A great many of them were badly cut, when we were in the +mountains; and especially in the rough march we had over the hills, +after you left us. The men themselves would greatly prefer sandals +to boots, being more accustomed to them; and could certainly march +farther in them than in stiff English boots. But of course, it +would be of no use sending in any requisition for them." + +"I don't see why they should not wear sandals," Terence said; "at +any rate, until there is an issue of boots. I suppose the men can +make them, themselves." + +"In most cases, no doubt, they could. At any rate, those who could, +would make them for the others. Of course they will all have to +wear them of one colour; but as most of the cattle are black, there +would be no difficulty about that. I have no doubt that we could +get any number of hides, at a nominal price, from the commissariat. +At any rate, I will see about it. I suppose they are made a good +deal like Indian moccasins. I noticed that many of the Spanish +troops wore them, but I did not examine them particularly." + +"They are very easily made," Herrara said. "You put your foot on a +piece of hide of the right size. It is drawn right up over the +foot, and laced. Another thickness of hide is sewn at the bottom, +to form the sole, and there it is. Of course, for work in the hills +it might be well to use a double thickness of hide for the sole. +The upper part is made of the thinnest portion of the hide and, if +grease is rubbed well inside, so as to soften the leather as much +as possible, it makes the most comfortable footgear possible." + +"Well, we will try it, anyhow," Terence said. "It mayn't look so +soldierly but, at any rate, it would look as well as boots with the +toes out; and if any general inspects us, and objects to them, we +can say that we shall be perfectly ready to give them up, as soon +as boots are issued to us. But by using all black hides, I really +do not think that it will look bad; and there would certainly be +the advantage that, for a night attack, the tread would be much +more noiseless than that of a heavy boot. + +"I really like the idea, very much. The best plan will be to pick +out two or three score of men who are shoemakers by trade, and pay +them a trifle for the making of each pair. In that way we could get +much greater uniformity than were each man to make his own. + +"As to the clothes, I don't see that anything can be done about it, +beyond getting a supply of needles and thread, and seeing that +every hole is mended as well as possible. I daresay new uniforms +will be served out, before the spring. It does not matter much in +camp, and I suppose we are no worse than the other Portuguese +regiments." + +The next week was spent in steady drill and, by the end of that +time, the exercises were all done as smartly as before. Terence had +already tried the experiment of sandals. The commissariat at +Abrantes were glad enough to supply hides, at a nominal price. He +began by taking a dozen. These were first handed to a number of men +relieved from other duties who, after scraping the under side, +rubbed them with fat, and kneaded them until they were perfectly +soft and pliable. The shoemakers then took them in hand and, after +a few samples of various shapes were tried, one was fixed upon, in +which the sandal was bound to the foot by straps of the same +material, with a double thickness of sole. Terence tried these +himself, and found them extremely comfortable for walking; and gave +orders that one company should be entirely provided with them. As +to appearance, they were vastly superior to the cracked and bulged +boots the men were wearing. + +After a week of sharp drill Terence was satisfied, and proposed to +Ryan that they should now ride over to Portalegre, and pay a visit +to their friends of the Fusiliers and, accordingly, the next day +they went over. They were most heartily received. + +"Sure, Terence, I knew well enough that you and Dicky Ryan would be +back here, before long. And so you have taken him from us! Well, it +is a relief to the regiment; and I only hope that now he is an +adjutant he will learn manners, and behave with a little more +discretion than he has ever shown before. How you could have +saddled yourself with such a hare-brained lad is more than I can +imagine." + +"That is all very well, O'Grady," Ryan laughed, "but it is a +question of the pot calling the kettle black; only in this case the +pot is a good deal blacker than the kettle. There may be some +excuse for a subaltern like me, but none for a war-scarred veteran +like yourself." + +"Dick will do very well, O'Grady," Terence said. "I can tell you he +sits in his tent, and does his office work, as steadily as if he +had been at it all his life; and if you had seen him drilling a +battalion, you would be delighted. It is just jealousy that makes +you run him down, O'Grady--you were too lazy to learn Portuguese, +yourself." + +"Is it lazy you say that I am, Terence? There is no more active +officer in the regiment, and you know it. As for the heathen +language, it is not fit for an honest tongue. They ought to have +sent over a supply of grammars and dictionaries, and taught the +whole nation to speak English. + +"When did you get back?" + +"A week ago; but we have been too busy drilling the regiment to +come over, before. + +"How are you getting on here, Colonel?" + +"We are not getting on at all, O'Connor. It is worse than +stationary we are. They ought to put on double the number of carts +they allow us. Half the time we are on short rations; except wine +which, thank Heaven, the commissariat can buy in the country. It is +evil times that we have fallen upon, and how we shall do, when the +snow begins to fall heavily, is more than I can tell you." + +"At any rate, Colonel, from what I hear you are a good deal better +off than the division at Guarda, for you are but a day's march from +the river." + +"The carts take two days over it," the colonel said, "and then +bring next to nothing; for the poor bastes that draw them are half +starved, and it is as much as they can do to crawl along. They +might just as well keep the whole division at Abrantes, instead of +sticking half of them out here, just as if the French were going to +attack us now. + +"There is the luncheon bugle. After we have done, you may tell us +how you and Ryan got out of the hands of the French, for I suppose +you were not exchanged." + + + +Chapter 10: Almeida. + + +The winter was long and tedious but, whenever the weather +permitted, Terence set his men at work; taking them twice a week +for long marches, so as to keep their powers in that direction +unabated. The sandals turned out a great success. The men had no +greatcoats, but they supplied the want by cutting a slit in the +centre of their black blankets and passing the head through it. +This answered all the purposes, and hid the shabby condition of +their uniforms. + +General Hill occasionally rode over to inspect this and the other +Portuguese regiments encamped near them. + +"That is a very good plan of yours, Colonel O'Connor," he said, the +first time the whole regiment turned out in their sandals. "It is a +much more sensible footgear than the boots." + +"I should not have adopted them, General, if the men had had any +boots to put on; but those they had became absolutely unwearable. +Some of the soles were completely off, the upper leathers were so +cut and worn that they were literally of no use and, in many cases. +they were falling to pieces. The men like the sandals much better, +and certainly march with greater ease. Yesterday they did thirty +miles, and came in comparatively fresh." + +"I wish the whole army were shod so," the general said. "It would +improve their marching powers, and we should not have so many men +laid up, footsore. I should say that the boots supplied to the army +are the very worst that soldiers were ever cursed with. They are +heavy, they are nearly as hard as iron when the weather is dry, and +are as rotten as blotting paper when it is wet. It is quite an +accident if a man gets a pair to fit him properly. I believe it +would be better if they were trained to march barefooted. Their +feet would soon get hardened and, at any rate, it would be an +improvement on the boots now served out to them. + +"I wish the other Portuguese regiments were as well drilled and as +well set up as your fellows. Of course, your men don't look smart, +at present, and would not make a good show on a parade ground; but +I hear that there are a large quantity of uniforms coming out, +shortly; and I hope, long before the campaign opens, they will all +be served out. The British regiments are almost as badly off as the +native ones. However, I suppose matters will right themselves +before the spring; but they are almost as badly off, now, as they +were when they marched into Corunna. The absurdity of the whole +thing is that all the newly-raised Portuguese levies, who will +certainly not be called upon to cross the frontier until next year, +have got uniforms; while the men who have to do the work are almost +in rags." + +Two or three of the officers of the Fusiliers rode over frequently, +to stop for a night or so with Terence; and the latter found time +pass much more pleasantly than he had done before Ryan had joined +him. During the day both their hands were full; but the evenings +were very pleasant, now that he had Dick as well as Herrara to talk +to. The feeling of the responsibility on his shoulders steadied +Ryan a good deal, and he was turning out a far more useful +assistant than Terence had expected; but when work was over, his +spirits were as high as ever, and the conversation in Terence's +tent seldom languished. + +Spring came, but there was no movement on the part of the troops. +Ney, with 50,000 men, began the siege of Ciudad Rodrigo in earnest. +The Agueda had now become fordable; and Crawford, with his light +brigade, 2500 strong, was exposed to a sudden attack at any time. +On the 1st of June Terence received orders to march with his +regiment to Guarda, where Wellington was concentrating the greater +portion of his army; leaving Hill, with 12,000 men, to guard the +southern portion of the frontier. + +Both the Spanish and Portuguese urged the general to relieve Ciudad +Rodrigo; but Wellington refused, steadily, to hazard the whole +fortune of the campaign on an enterprise which was unlikely to +succeed. His total force was but 56,000 men, of whom 20,000 were +untried Portuguese. Garrisons had to be placed at several points, +and 8000 Portuguese were posted at Thomar, a day's march from +Abrantes, as a reserve for Hill. + +It was not only the 50,000 infantry and 8000 cavalry of Massena, +who now commanded in front of Ciudad Rodrigo, that he had to reckon +with. Regnier's division was at Coria; and could, in three easy +marches, reach Guarda; or in four fall on Hill at Abrantes; and +with but 26,000 men in line, it would have been a desperate +enterprise, indeed, to attack 60,000 veteran French soldiers merely +for the sake of carrying off the 5000 undisciplined Portuguese +besieged at Ciudad. + +The Minho regiment had only received their new uniforms a month +before the order came, and made a good show as they marched into +Guarda, where Wellington's headquarters were now established. When +Terence reported himself to the adjutant general, the latter said: + +"At present, Colonel O'Connor, you cannot be employed in your +former work of scouting. The French are altogether too powerful for +a couple of battalions to approach them and, with 8000 cavalry, +they would make short work of you. Crawford must soon fall back +behind the Coa. His position already is a very hazardous one. It +has therefore been decided to place 1500 of your men along on this +side of the Coa and, with half a battalion, you will march at once +to Almeida to strengthen the garrison of that place which, as soon +as Crawford retires, is certain to be besieged. It should be able +to offer a long and stout resistance. + +"You will, of course, be under the general orders of the +commandant; but you will receive an authorization to take +independent action, should you think fit: that is to say, if you +find the place can be no longer defended, and the commandant is +intending to surrender, you are at liberty to withdraw your +command, if you find it possible to do so." + +On the following morning the corps left Guarda and, leaving a +battalion and a half on the Coa, under Herrara; Terence, with 500 +men, after a long march, entered Almeida that night. The town, +which was fortified, was occupied only by Portuguese troops. It was +capable of repulsing a sudden attack, but was in no condition to +withstand a regular siege. It was deficient in magazines and bomb +proofs; and the powder, of which there was a large supply, was +stored in an old castle in the middle of the town. On entering the +place, Terence at once called upon Colonel Cox, who was in command. + +"I am glad that you have come, Colonel O'Connor," the latter said. +"I know that Lord Wellington expects me to make a long defence, and +to keep Massena here for at least a month but, although I mean to +do my best, I cannot conceal from myself that the defences are +terribly defective. Then, too, more than half my force are +newly-levied militia, in whom very little dependence can be placed. +Your men will be invaluable, in case of assault; but it is not +assault I fear, so much as having the place tumbling about our ears +by their artillery, which can be so placed as to command it from +several points. We are very short of artillery, and the guns are +well nigh as old as the fortifications." + +"We will do our best, Colonel, in any direction you may point out; +and I think that we could defend a breach against any reasonable +force brought against it. I may say that I have been ordered, if +the worst comes to the worst, to endeavour to make my way out of +the town before it surrenders." + +For a fortnight the place was left unmolested. Crawford's division +still kept beyond the Coa, and his cavalry had had several +engagements with French reconnoitring parties. On the 2nd of July, +however, the news came that, after a most gallant resistance, +Ciudad Rodrigo had surrendered; and it was now certain that the +storm would roll westward, in a very short time. Massena, however, +delayed strangely; and it was not until daylight on the 24th that a +sudden roll of musketry, followed almost immediately by a heavy +artillery fire, told the garrison of Almeida that the light +division was suddenly attacked by the enemy. + +Crawford had received the strictest orders not to fight beyond the +Coa; but he was an obstinate man, and had so long maintained his +position across the river that he believed that, if attacked, he +should be able to withdraw over the bridge before any very strong +force could be brought up to attack him. In this he was mistaken. +The country was wooded, and the French march was unsuspected until +they were close upon Crawford's force. The light division had, +however, been well trained; indeed, it was composed of veteran +regiments, and had been practised to get under arms with the least +possible delay. They were, therefore, already drawn up when the +French fell upon them and, fighting hard and sternly, repelled all +the efforts of the enemy's cavalry to cut them off from the bridge. +Driving back the French light infantry, the Light Division crossed +in safety, although with considerable loss; and repulsed, with +great slaughter, every attempt of the French to cross the bridge. + +Almeida was now left to its fate. Again Massena delayed, and it was +not until the 18th of August that the siege was begun. On the 26th +sixty-five heavy guns, that had been used in the siege of Ciudad +Rodrigo, opened fire upon the town. The more Terence saw of the +place, the more convinced was he that it could not long be held, +after the French siege guns had been placed in position. Moreover, +there was great lukewarmness on the part of several of the +Portuguese officers, while the rank and file were dispirited by the +fate of Ciudad Rodrigo, and by the fact that they had, as it seemed +to them, been deserted by the British army. + +"I don't like the look of things, at all," he had said to Bull and +Ryan, the evening before the siege guns began their work. "In the +first place the defences will crumble, in no time, under the French +fire. In the second place, I don't think that the Portuguese, with +the exception of our own men, have any fight in them. Da Costa, the +lieutenant governor, openly declares that the place is indefensible, +and that it is simply throwing away the lives of the men to resist. +He is very intimate, I observe, with Bareiros, the chief of the +artillery. Altogether, things look very bad. Of course, we shall +stay here as long as the place resists; but I am afraid that won't +be for very long. + +"I was speaking to Colonel Cox this afternoon. He is a brave man, +and with trustworthy troops would, I am sure, hold the town until +the last; but, unsupported as he is, he is in the hands of these +rascally Portuguese officers. I told him that, if he ordered me to +do so, I would undertake with my men to arrest the whole of them; +but he said that that would bring on a mutiny of all their troops; +and this, bad as the situation already was, would only make matters +much worse. I then suggested that, as the French are driving their +trenches towards those two old redoubts outside the wall, I would, +if he liked, place our force in them; and would undertake to hold +them, pointing out that if they fell into the hands of the enemy +they would soon mount their cannon there, and bring down the whole +wall facing in that direction. + +"He quite agreed with that view of the case, but said that it would +be a very exposed position; still, as our fellows were certainly +the only trustworthy troops he had, he should be very glad if I +would undertake the defence at once, as the French were pushing +their approaches very fast towards them. I said that I was sure we +could hold them for some little time; and that, indeed, it seemed +to me that the French intended to bombard the town rather than to +breach the walls, knowing the composition of the garrison and, +perhaps, having intelligence that their courage would be so shaken, +by a heavy fire, that the place would surrender in a much shorter +time than it would take to breach the walls. Accordingly, he has +given me leave to march our men up there, at daybreak tomorrow; +taking with us ten days' provisions. + +"I said that if he had trouble with the other Portuguese regiments +I would, on his hoisting a red flag on the church steeple, march in +at once to seize and shoot the leaders of the mutiny, if he wished +it. Of course, one of my reasons for wanting to take charge of the +redoubts was that we should have more chance of withdrawing, from +them, than we should of getting out of the town, itself, in the +confusion and panic of an approaching surrender." + +Bull and Ryan both agreed with Terence and, at daybreak the next +morning, the half battalion marched out, relieved the Portuguese +troops holding the two redoubts, and established themselves there. +They had brought with them a number of intrenching tools, and were +accompanied by an engineer officer. So, as soon as they reached the +redoubts, several parties of men were set to work, to begin to sink +pits for driving galleries in the direction of the approaches that +the French were pushing forward; while others assisted a party of +artillerymen to work the guns. Some of the best shots in the corps +took their places on the rampart, and were directed to maintain a +steady fire on the French working parties. + +The roar of cannon, when the French batteries opened fire on the +town, was prodigious; and it was not long before it was evident +that there was no present design, on the part of the French, to +effect a breach. + +"I expect they have lots of friends in the town," Terence said to +Dick Ryan, as they watched the result of the fire; "and they make +sure that the garrison will very soon lose heart. Do you see how +many shots are striking the old castle? That looks as if the French +knew that it was the magazine. They are dropping shell there, too; +and that alone is enough to cause a scare in the town, for if one +of them dropped into the magazine, the consequences would be +terrific. They are not pushing on the trenches against us with +anything like the energy with which they have been working for the +past week; and it is certainly curious that they should not keep up +a heavier fire from their batteries upon us, for it is evident that +they cannot make an assault, on this side of the town, at any rate, +until they have captured our redoubts." + +"I wish we were well out of it," Ryan exclaimed. "It is quite +certain that the place must fall, sooner or later; and though we +might beat the French back several times, it must come to the same, +in the end. The thing I am most concerned about, at present, is how +we are to get away." + +"I quite agree with you, Dick; and you know, we have had several +looks at the French lines, from the roof of the church. Their +batteries are chiefly on this side of the town; but most of their +troops are encamped on the other side, so as to be in readiness to +meet any attempt of Wellington to succour the place; and also to +show the garrison that there is no chance, whatever, of their being +able to draw off. We agreed that the chances would be much better +of getting out on this side than on the other." + +"Yes; but we also agreed, Terence, that there would be a good deal +more difficulty in getting safely back; for practically the whole +of their army would be between us and Wellington." + +"It will be a difficult business, Dicky, whichever way we go; and I +suppose that, at last, we shall have to be guided by circumstances." + +In a very short time, fires broke out at several points in the +town. The guns on the walls made but a very feeble reply to the +French batteries; and one or two bastions, where alone a brisk fire +was at first maintained, drew upon themselves such a storm of +missiles from the French guns that they were soon silenced. + +"It is quite evident that the Portuguese gunners have not much +fight in them," Bull said. + +"I am afraid it is the disaffection among their officers that is +paralysing them," Terence said. "But I quite admit that it may be +good policy to keep the men under cover. They really could do no +good against the French batteries; which have all the advantage of +position, as well as numbers and weight of metal; and it would +certainly be well to reserve the troops till the French drive their +trenches close up. If I thought that the silence of the guns on the +walls were due to that, I should be well content; but I am afraid +it is nothing of the sort. If the French keep up their fire, as at +present, for another forty-eight hours, the place will throw open +its gates. The inhabitants must be suffering frightfully. Of +course, if Colonel Cox had men he could thoroughly rely upon, he +would be obliged to harden his heart and disregard the clamour of +the townspeople for surrender; but as the garrison is pretty +certain to make common cause with them, it seems to me that the +place is lost, if the bombardment continues." + +In a short time, seeing that the working parties in the enemy's +trenches made no attempt to push them farther forward, Terence +withdrew the men from their exposed position on the ramparts--leaving +only a few there on the lookout--and told the rest to lie down on the +inner slopes, so as to be in shelter from the French fire. Bull was +in command of the force in the other redoubt, which was a quarter of +a mile away. The redoubts were, however, connected by a deep ditch, +so that communication could be kept up between them, or reinforcements +sent from one to the other, unobserved by the enemy, except by those +on one or two elevated spots. + +All day the roar of the cannon continued. From a dozen points, +smoke and flame rose from the city, and towards these the French +batteries chiefly directed their fire, in order to hinder the +efforts of the garrison to check the progress of the conflagration. + +Just after dark, as Ryan and Terence were sitting down in an angle +of the bastion to eat their supper, there was a tremendous roar; +accompanied by so terrible a shock that both were thrown prostrate +upon the ground with a force that, for the moment, half stunned +them. A broad glare of light illuminated the sky. There was the +rumble and roar of falling buildings and walls; and then came dull, +crashing sounds as masses of brickwork, hurled high up into the +air, fell over the town and the surrounding country. Then came a +dead silence, which was speedily broken by the sound of loud +screams and shouts from the town. + +"It is just as we feared," Terence said as, bruised and bewildered, +he struggled to his feet. "The magazine in the castle has +exploded." + +He ordered the bugler to sound the assembly and, as the men +gathered, it was found that although many of them had been hurt +severely, by the violence with which they had been thrown down, +none had been killed either by the shock or the falling fragments. +An officer was at once sent to the other redoubt, to inquire how +they had fared; and to give orders to Bull to keep his men under +arms, lest the French should take advantage of the catastrophe, and +make a sudden attack. + +"Ryan, do you take the command of the men, here, until I come back. +I will go into the town and see Colonel Cox. I fear that the damage +will be so great that the town will be really no longer defensible +and, even if it were, the Portuguese troops will be so cowed that +there will be no more fight left in them." + +It was but five hundred yards to the wall. Terence was unchallenged +as he ran up. The gate was open and, on entering, he saw that the +disaster greatly exceeded his expectations. The castle had been +shattered into fragments, the church levelled to the ground and, of +the whole town, only six houses remained standing. Five hundred +people had been killed. + +The wildest confusion prevailed. The soldiers were running about +without object or purpose, apparently scared out of their senses. +Women were shrieking and wringing their hands, by the ruins of +their houses. Men were frantically tugging at beams, and masses of +brickwork, to endeavour to rescue their friends buried under the +ruins. Presently he came upon Colonel Cox, who had just been joined +by Captain Hewitt, the only British officer with him; who had +instantly gone off to see the amount of damage done to the +defences, and had brought back news that the walls had been +levelled in several places, and the guns thrown into the ditch. + +Da Costa, Bareiros, and several other Portuguese officers were +loudly clamouring for instant surrender and, the French shells +again beginning to fall into the town, added to the prevailing +terror. In vain the commandant endeavoured to still the tumult, and +to assure those around him that the defence might yet be continued, +for a short time; and better terms be obtained than if they were, +at once, to surrender. + +"Can I do anything, Colonel?" Terence said. "My men are still +available." + +The officer shook his head. + +"Massena will see, in the morning," he said, "that he has but to +march in. If these men would fight, we could still, perhaps, defend +the breaches for a day or two. But it would only be useless +slaughter. However, as they won't fight, I must send a flag of +truce out, and endeavour to make terms. At any rate, Colonel +O'Connor, if you can manage to get off with your command, by all +means do so. Of course, I shall endeavour to obtain terms for the +garrison to march out; but I fear that Massena will hear of nothing +but unconditional surrender." + +"Thank you, Colonel. Then I shall at once return to my corps, and +endeavour to make my way through." + +On returning to the redoubt, Terence sent a message to Bull to come +to him at once and, when he arrived, told him and Ryan the state of +things in the town, and the certainty that it would surrender, at +once. + +"The Portuguese are so clamorous," he said, "that a flag of truce +may be despatched to Massena, in half an hour's time. The +Portuguese are right so far that, if the place must be surrendered, +there is no reason for any longer exposing the troops and the +townsfolk to the French bombardment. Therefore it is imperative +that, if we are to make our way out, we must do so before the place +surrenders. + +"We agreed, yesterday, as to the best line to take. The French +force here is by no means considerable, their main body being +between this and the Coa. Massena, knowing the composition of the +garrison here, did not deem it requisite to send a larger force +than was necessary to protect the batteries; and the major portion +of these are on the heights behind the city. Between the road +leading to Escalon and that through Fort Conception there is no +French camp, and it is by that line we must make our escape. + +"We know that there are considerable forces, somewhere near Villa +Puerca; but when we reach the river Turones we can follow its banks +down, with very little fear. It is probable that they have a force +at the bridge near San Felices; but I believe the river is fordable +in many places, now. At any rate, they are not likely to be keeping +a sharp watch anywhere, tonight. They must all know that that +tremendous explosion will have rendered the place untenable and, +except at the batteries which are still firing, there will be no +great vigilance; especially on this side, for it would hardly be +supposed that, even if the garrison did attempt to escape, they +would take the road to the east, and so cut themselves off from +their allies and enter a country wholly French. + +"Of course, with us the case is different. We can march farther and +faster than any French infantry. The woods afford abundant places +of concealment, and we are perfectly capable of driving off any +small bodies of cavalry that we may meet. Fortunately we have eight +days' provision of biscuit. Of course, it was with a view to this +that I proposed that we should bring out so large a supply with us. + +"Now, I think we had better start at once." + +"I quite agree with you, Colonel," Bull said. "I will return to the +other redoubt, and form the men up at once. I shall be ready in a +quarter of an hour." + +"Very well, Bull. I will move out from here, in a quarter of an +hour from the present time, and march across and join you as you +come out. We must move round between your redoubt and the town. In +that way we shall avoid the enemy's trenches altogether." + +The men were at once ordered to fall in. Fortunately, none were so +seriously disabled as to be unfit to take their places in the +ranks. The necessity for absolute silence was impressed upon them, +and they were told to march very carefully; as a fall over a stone, +and the crash of a musket on the rocks, might at once call the +attention of a French sentinel. As the troops filed out through the +entrance to the redoubt, Terence congratulated himself upon their +all having sandals, for the sound of their tread was faint, indeed, +to what it would have been had they been marching in heavy boots. + +At the other redoubt they were joined by Bull, with his party. +There was a momentary halt while six men, picked for their +intelligence, went on ahead, under the command of Ryan. They were +to move twenty paces apart. If they came upon any solitary +sentinel, one man was to be sent back instantly to stop the column; +while two others crawled forward and surprised and silenced the +sentry. Should their way be arrested by a strong picket, they were +to reconnoitre the ground on either side; and then one was to be +sent back, to guide the column so as to avoid the picket. + +When he calculated that Ryan must be nearly a quarter of a mile in +advance, Terence gave orders for the column to move forward. When a +short distance had been traversed, one of the scouts came in, with +the news that there was a cordon of sentries across their path. +They were some fifty paces apart, and some must be silenced before +the march could be continued. + +Ten minutes later, another scout brought in news that four of the +French sentries had been surprised and killed, without any alarm +being given; and the column resumed its way, the necessity for +silence being again impressed upon the men. As they went forward, +they received news that two more of the sentries had been killed; +and that there was, in consequence, a gap of 350 yards between +them. A scout led the way through the opening thus formed. It was +an anxious ten minutes, but the passage was effected without any +alarm being given; the booming of the guns engaged in bombarding +the town helping to cover the sound of their footsteps. + +It had been settled that Ryan and the column were both to march +straight for a star, low down on the horizon, so that there was no +fear of either taking the wrong direction. In another half hour +they were sure that they were well beyond the French lines; whose +position, indeed, could be made out by the light of their bivouac +fires. + +For three hours they continued their march, at a rapid pace, +without a check. Then they halted for half an hour, and then held +on their way till daybreak, when they entered a large village. They +had left the redoubts at about nine o'clock, and it was now five; +so that they had marched at least twenty-five miles, and were +within some ten miles of the Aqueda. + +Sentries were posted at the edge of the wood, and the troops then +lay down to sleep. Several times during the day parties of French +cavalry were seen moving about; but they were going at a leisurely +pace, and there was no appearance of their being engaged in any +search. At nightfall the troops got under arms again, and made +their way to the Aqueda. + +A peasant, whom they fell in with soon after they started, had +undertaken to show them a ford. It was breast deep, but the stream +was not strong, and they crossed without difficulty, holding their +arms and ammunition well above the water. They learned that there +was, indeed, a French brigade at the bridge of San Felices. +Marching north now, they came before daybreak upon the Douro. Here +they again lay up during the day and, that evening, obtained two +boats at a village near the mouth of the Tormes, and crossed into +the Portuguese province of Tras os Nontes. + +The 500 men joined in a hearty cheer, on finding themselves safe in +their own country. After halting for a couple of days, Terence +marched to Castel Rodrigo and then, learning that the main body of +the regiment was at Pinhel, marched there and joined them; his +arrival causing great rejoicing among his men, for it had been +supposed that he and the half battalion had been captured, at the +fall of Almeida. The Portuguese regular troops at that place had, +at the surrender at daybreak after the explosion, all taken service +with the French; while the militia regiments had been disbanded by +Massena, and allowed to return to their homes. + +From here Terence sent off his report to headquarters, and asked +for orders. The adjutant general wrote back, congratulating him on +having successfully brought off his command, and ordering the corps +to take post at Linares. He found that another disaster, similar to +that at Almeida, had taken place--the magazine at Albuquerque +having been blown up by lightning, causing the loss of four hundred +men. + +The French army were still behind the Coa, occupied in restoring +the fortifications of Almeida and Ciudad Rodrigo, and it was not +until the 17th of September that Massena crossed the Coa, and began +the invasion of Portugal in earnest; his march being directed +towards Coimbra, by taking which line he hoped to prevent Hill, in +the south, from effecting a junction with Wellington. + +The latter, however, had made every preparation for retreat and, as +soon as he found that Massena was in earnest, he sent word to Hill +to join him on the Alva, and fell back in that direction himself. + +Terence received orders to co-operate with 10,000 of the Portuguese +militia, under the command of Trant. Wilson and Miller were to +harass Massena's right flank and rear. Had Wellington's orders been +carried out, Massena would have found the country deserted by its +inhabitants and entirely destitute of provisions; but as usual his +orders had been thwarted by the Portuguese government, who sent +secret instructions to the local authorities to take no steps to +carry them out; and the result was that Massena, as he advanced, +found ample stores for provisioning his army. + +The speed with which Wellington fell back baffled his calculations +and, by the time he approached Viseu, the whole British army was +united, near Coimbra. His march had been delayed two days, by an +attack made by Trant and Terence upon the advanced guard, as it was +making its way through a defile. A hundred prisoners were taken, +with some baggage; and a serious blow would have been struck at the +French, had not the new Portuguese levies been seized with panic +and fled in confusion. Trant was, consequently, obliged to draw +off. The attack, however, had been so resolute and well-directed +that Massena, not knowing the strength of the force opposing him, +halted for two days until the whole army came up; and thus afforded +time for the British to concentrate, and make their arrangements. + +[Illustration: Plan of the Battle of Busaco.] + +The ground chosen by Wellington to oppose Massena's advance was on +the edge of the Sierra Busaco; which was separated, by a deep and +narrow valley, from the series of hills across which the French +were marching. There were four roads by which the French could +advance. The one from Mortagao, which was narrow and little used, +passed through Royalva. The other three led to the position +occupied by the British force between the village of Busaco and +Pena Cova. Trant's command was posted at Royalva. Terence with his +regiment took post, with a Portuguese brigade of cavalry, on the +heights above Santa Marcella, where the road leading south to +Espinel forked; a branch leading from it across the Mondego, in the +rear of the British position, to Coimbra. Here he could be aided, +if necessary, by the guns at Pena Cova, on the opposite side of the +river. + +While the British were taking up their ground between Busaco and +Pena Cova, Ney and Regnier arrived on the crest of the opposite +hill. Had they attacked at once, as Ney wished, they might have +succeeded; for the divisions of Spenser, Leith, and Hill had not +yet arrived. But Massena was ten miles in the rear, and did not +come up until next day, with Junot's corps; by which time the whole +of the British army was ranged along the opposite heights. + +Their force could be plainly made out from the French position, and +so formidable were the heights that had to be scaled by an +attacking force that Ney, impetuous and brave as he was, no longer +advocated an attack. Massena, however, was bent upon fighting. He +had every confidence in the valour of his troops, and was averse to +retiring from Portugal, baffled, by the long and rugged road he had +travelled; therefore dispositions were at once made for the attack. +Ney and Regnier were to storm the British position, while Junot's +corps was to be held in reserve. + +At daybreak on the 29th the French descended the hill; Ney's +troops, in three columns of attack, moving against a large convent +towards the British left centre; while Regnier, in two columns, +advanced against the centre. Regnier's men were the first engaged +and, mounting the hill with great gallantry and resolution, pushed +the skirmishers of Picton's division before them and, in spite of +the grape fire of a battery of six guns, almost gained the summit +of the hill--the leading battalions establishing themselves among +the rocks there, while those behind wheeled to the right. +Wellington, who was on the spot, swept the flank of this force with +grape; and the 88th and a wing of the 45th charged down upon them +furiously. + +The French, exhausted by their efforts in climbing the hill, were +unable to resist the onslaught; and the English and French, mixed +up together, went down the hill; the French still resisting, but +unable to check their opponents who, favoured by the steep descent, +swept all before them. + +In the meantime, the battalions that had gained the crest held +their own against the rest of the third division and, had they been +followed by the troops who had wheeled off towards their right, the +British position would have been cut in two. General Leith, seeing +the critical state of affairs had, as soon as he saw the third +division pressed back, despatched a brigade to its assistance. It +had to make a considerable detour round a ravine; but it now +arrived and, attacking with fury, drove the French grenadiers from +the rocks; and pursued them, with a continuous fire of musketry, +until they were out of range. The rest of Leith's division soon +arrived, and General Hill moved his division to the position before +occupied by Leith. Thus, so formidable a force was concentrated at +the point where Regnier made his effort that, having no reserves, +he did not venture to renew the attack. + +On their right the French had met with no better success. In front +of the convent, but on lower ground, was a plateau; and on this +Crawford posted the 43rd and 52nd Regiments of the line, in a +slight dip, which concealed them from observation by the French. A +quarter of a mile behind them, on the high ground close to the +convent, was a regiment of German infantry. These were in full +sight of the enemy. The other regiment of the light division was +placed lower down the hill, and supported by the guns of a battery. + +Two of Ney's columns advanced up the hill with great speed and +gallantry; never pausing for a moment, although their ranks were +swept by grape from the artillery, and a heavy musketry fire by the +light troops. The latter were forced to fall back before the +advance. The guns were withdrawn, and the French were within a few +yards of the edge of the plateau, when Crawford launched the 43rd +and 52nd Regiments against them. + +Wholly unprepared for such an attack, the French were hurled down +the hill. Only one of their columns attempted to retrieve the +disaster, and advanced against the right of the light division. +Here, however, they met Pack's brigade; while Crawford's artillery +swept the wood through which they were ascending. Finally, they +were forced to retire down the hill, and the action came to an end. +Never did the French fight more bravely; but the position, held by +determined troops, was practically impregnable. The French loss in +killed and wounded was 4500, that of the allies only 1300; the +difference being caused by the fact that the French ranks, +throughout the action, were swept with grape by the British +batteries; while the French artillery could do nothing to aid their +infantry. + + + +Chapter 11: The French Advance. + + +As there were no signs of any French force approaching the position +held by the Portuguese, Terence moved his regiment a short distance +forward, to a point which enabled them to obtain a view right down +the valley in which the conflict was taking place. He then allowed +them to fall out of their ranks; knowing that in less than a minute +from the call being sounded they would be under arms again, and in +readiness to move in any direction required. Then, with Herrara and +his three English officers, he moved a short distance away and +watched the scene. + +As soon as Regnier's columns had crossed the bottom of the ravine, +their guns along the crest opened fire on the British position +facing them. + +"They are too far off for grape," Terence said. "You remember, +Ryan, at Corunna, how those French batteries pounded us from the +crest, and how little real damage they did us. A round shot does +not do much more harm than a bullet, unless it strikes a column in +motion, or troops massed in solid formation. + +"Those fellows are mounting the hill very fast." + +"They are, indeed," Ryan agreed. "You can see how the line of smoke +of our skirmishers on the hillside gets higher and higher." + +"I wish our regiment was there, Colonel," Bull said. "We might do +some good; while here we are of no more use than if we were a +hundred miles away." + +"No, no, Bull, that is not the case. If the French had not seen +that this position was strongly held, they might have moved a +division by this road and, if they had done so, they would have +turned the main position altogether, and forced Wellington to fall +back, at once. So you see, we are doing good here; though I do not +say that I should not like to be over there." + +"The French will soon be at the top of the hill," Herrara +exclaimed. "See how they are pushing upwards." + +"They certainly are gaining ground fast," Macwitty said. "They are +within a hundred yards of the top. Our men don't seem to be able to +make any stand against them at all. + +"Colonel, the lower column is turning off more towards their left." + +"They had better have kept together, Macwitty. It is evident that +Picton's division is hard pressed, as it is and, if those two +columns had united and thrown themselves upon him, they would have +broken right through our line. As it is, the second party will have +Leith's division to deal with. Do you see one of his brigades +marching swiftly to meet them, and some guns sweeping the French +flank? I wish we were nearer." + +The scene had become too exciting for further conversation, and +they watched almost breathlessly. The line of smoke on the top of +the crest showed that the head of the column had made good its +footing there; while the quick puffs of smoke, and the rattle of +musketry, denoted that the other column was also within a short +distance of the summit. But Leith's regiments were approaching the +spot at the double. Presently there was the crash of a tremendous +volley, and then the leading regiment disappeared over the brow of +the hill, and into brushwood. The roar of musketry was heavy and +continuous, and then Ryan gave a joyous shout, as it could be seen +that the two long smoke wreaths were becoming mixed together, and +that the movement was downwards and, ere long, the dark masses of +troops could be seen descending the hill even more rapidly than +they had climbed it. Leith's second brigade was now approaching the +scene of the struggle, and was near at hand; Hill's division was +seen in motion towards the same spot. + +"That is all right now," Terence said; "but there is another big +fight going on, further up the valley." + +It was too far off to make out the movements of the troops but, +even at that distance, the smoke rolling up from the hillside gave +some idea of the course of the fight. Here, too, after mounting +more than halfway up the slope, it could be seen that the tide of +war was rolling down again; though more slowly, and with harder +fighting than it had done in the struggle nearer to them. And when +at last the firing gradually ceased, they knew that the French had +been repulsed, all along the line. + +"The men had better open their haversacks and eat a meal," Terence +said. "We may get an order to move, at any moment." + +No orders came, however, and the troops remained in the positions +that they occupied until the following morning. Then a heavy +skirmishing fire broke out and, for some time, it seemed as if the +battle was to be renewed. No heavy masses of the French, however, +came down from the hill on their side to support the light troops +in the valley and, in the afternoon, the firing died away. Towards +evening a staff officer rode up, at full speed, and handed a note +to Terence. + +"The French have turned our left by the Royalva Pass. Trant has +failed to check them, and the whole army must fall back. These are +your instructions." + +The mishap had not been Trant's fault. He had been sent by the +Portuguese general on a tremendous detour and, when he arrived at +the position assigned to him, his troops were utterly exhausted by +their long and fatiguing march. A large proportion had deserted or +fallen out and, with but 1500 wearied and dispirited men, he could +offer but little resistance to the French advance and, being +attacked by their cavalry, had been driven away with loss. Terence +opened the note. + +"You will march at once. Keep along on this side of the Mondego, +breaking up your command into small parties, who will visit every +village within reach. All of their inhabitants who have not obeyed +the proclamations, and retired, are to leave at once. Destroy all +provisions that you can find. Set fire to the mills and, where this +is not practicable, smash the machinery and, bearing south as you +go, spread out over the country between the Zezere and the sea, and +continue to carry on the duty assigned to you, compelling the +peasants to drive their animals before them, along the roads to +Lisbon." + +"I understand, sir," Terence said, after reading the note, "and +will carry out the orders to the best of my ability." + +Five minutes later the regiment was under arms. Terence called the +whole of the officers together, and explained the instructions that +he had received. The two battalions were broken up into half +companies which, as they marched along the Mondego, were to be left +behind, one by one; each party, when left, turning south, and +proceeding to carry out the orders received. In a few cases, only, +were companies to keep intact as, although a hundred men would be +ample for the duty at the large villages, two hundred would not be +too much in a town like Leiria. + +On reaching Foz d'Aronce, half a battalion moved to the east, to +work down by the river Zezere. The rest turned to the right, to +follow the course of the Mondego down to the sea. For convenience, +and in order to keep the troops in hand, Bull, Macwitty, Ryan, and +Herrara each took the command of half a battalion; with orders to +supervise the work of the companies belonging to it, and to keep in +touch with the nearest company of the next battalion, so that the +two thousand men could advance, to a certain extent, abreast of +each other. + +Foz d'Aronce had already been evacuated by its inhabitants, but in +all other villages the orders were carried out. By daybreak the +last company in the two battalions reached the sea coast and, after +two hours' rest, began its march south. The others had long been at +work. + +It was a painful duty. The frightened villagers had to be roused in +the darkness, and told that the French were approaching, and that +they must fly at once, taking their animals and what they could +carry off in carts away with them. While the terrified people were +harnessing horses to their carts, piling their few valuables into +them, and packing their children on the top, the troops went from +house to house, searching for and destroying provisions, setting +fire to barns stored with corn, and burning or disabling any flour +mills they met with. + +Then, as soon as work was done, they forced the villagers to take +the southern road. There was no difficulty in doing this for, +although they had stolidly opposed all the measures ordered by +Wellington, trusting that the French would not come; now that they +had heard they were near, a wild panic seized them. Had an orderly +retreat been made before, almost all their belongings might have +been saved. Now but little could be taken, even by the most +fortunate. The children, the sick, the aged had to be carried in +carts and, in their haste and terror, they left behind many things +that might well have been saved. + +The peasantry in the villages suffered less than the townspeople, +as their horses and carts afforded means of transport: but even +here the scenes were most painful. In the towns, however, they were +vastly more so. The means for carriage for such a large number of +people being wanting, the greater number of the inhabitants were +forced to make their way on foot, along roads so crowded with +vehicles of every kind that the British divisions were frequently +brought to a standstill, for hours, where the nature of the country +prevented their quitting the road and making their way across the +fields. + +On the 29th, the greater portion of the British troops passed the +Mondego. Hill retired upon Thomar, and the rest of the troops were +concentrated at Milheada. The commissariat stores followed the +coast road down to Peniche, and were embarked there. The light +division and the cavalry remained, after the main body had been +drawn across the Mondego, north of that river. + +Soon after starting on his work, Terence learned that the British +troops had passed through Pombal, Leiria, and Thomar. It was +consequently unnecessary for him to endeavour to clear those towns. + +The delays caused at every village rendered the work slow, as well +as arduous. The French drove the light division through Coimbra +and, following, pressed so hotly that a number of minor combats +took place between their cavalry and the British rear guards. +Before Leiria the rear guards had to fight strongly, to enable the +guns to quit the town before the French entered it. + +Terence presently received orders to collect his regiment again +and, crossing the Zezere, to endeavour to join Trant and the other +leaders of irregular bands, and to harass Massena's rear. He had +already, knowing that great bodies of French cavalry had crossed +the Mondego, called in the companies that were working Leiria and +the coast; as they might otherwise have been cut up, in detail, by +the French cavalry. With these he marched east, picking up the +other companies as he went and, on the same evening, the regiment +was collected on the Zezere. + +Having followed the river up, he reached Foz d'Aronce and then, +finding that several bodies of French troops had already passed +through that village, he turned to the left and camped close to the +Mondego; sending ten of his men over the river, in peasants' +clothes, to ascertain the movements of the enemy. One of them +returned with news that he had come upon a party of Trant's men, +who told him that their main body were but two miles away, and that +there were no French north of Coimbra. + +The regiment had made a march of upwards of forty miles that day. +Therefore, leaving them to rest, Terence forded the Mondego and +rode, with Ryan, to Trant's village. + +"I am glad, indeed, to see you, O'Connor," the partisan leader +said, as Terence entered the cottage where he had established +himself. "Is your regiment with you?" + +"Yes, it is three miles away, on the other side of the river. We +have marched something like eighty miles, in two days. We have been +busy burning mills and destroying provisions, but the French +cavalry are all over the country, so I was ordered to join you, and +aid you to harass the French line of communication, and to do them +what damage we could." + +"There is not much to be done in the way of cutting their +communications; at least, there is nothing to be done to the north +and east of this place, for Massena brought all his baggage and +everything else with him; and cut himself loose, altogether, from +his base at Ciudad. If the people had but carried out Wellington's +orders, Massena would have suffered a fearful disaster. We have +learned, from stragglers we have taken, that the fourteen days' +provisions with which they marched were altogether exhausted; and +that they had been unable to obtain any here. They would have had +to retreat, instantly; but I hear that, in Coimbra alone, there is +enough food for their whole army, for at least two months." + +"But could we not have destroyed it, as we retreated?" + +"Of course, we ought to have done so," Trant said; "but from what I +hear, the affair was very badly managed. Instead of the first +division that went through burning all the magazines and stores, it +was left to Crawford to do so; and he, as usual, stopped so long +facing the enemy that, at last, he was regularly chased through +Coimbra and, the roads being blocked with carts, his brigade would +have been destroyed had the French infantry pushed strongly after +him. + +"Things are just as bad, in the way of provisions, on the other +side of the river. We have done a great deal in the way of +destroying mills and magazines. I am afraid Massena will find +enough provisions to last his army all the winter." + +"That is bad." + +"Had it only been Coimbra, no very great harm would have been done; +for the French troops got altogether out of hand when they entered, +plundered the place and, as I hear, destroyed enough provisions to +have lasted them a month." + +"Of course, they hold the town?" + +"Oh yes! It is full of their sick and wounded." + +"What force have you?" Terence asked. + +"I have 1500 men of my own. Miller and Wilson, with some of the +Northern militias, will be here shortly; and I expect, in a few +days, we shall have eight thousand men." + +"The great thing would be to act before the French know that there +is so strong a force in the neighbourhood," Terence said, "because +as soon as they hear that, they are sure to send a strong force +back to Coimbra." + +"How do you mean, to act?" Trant asked in some surprise. + +"I propose that we should capture Coimbra, at once. I have 2000 men +and you have 1500. I don't suppose they have left above a couple of +thousand in the town, perhaps even less and, if we take them by +surprise, I should think we ought to be able to manage that number, +without difficulty. I certainly consider my own men to be a match +for an equal number of French." + +"It is a grand idea," Trant said, "and I don't see why we should +not carry it out. As you say, the sooner the better. They may know +that I am here, but they will never dream of my making such attempt +with a force which, I must own, is not always to be relied upon. +They are always shifting and changing. After a long march, half of +them will desert; then in a few days the ranks swell again. +Consequently, the men have little discipline and no confidence in +each other, and are little better than raw levies; but for rough +street fighting I have no doubt they would be all right, especially +when backed by good troops like yours. + +"How would you proceed? As yours is the real fighting body, you +should have the command." + +"Not at all," Terence said warmly. "You are my senior officer, not +only in rank but in age and experience. My orders were to assist +you as far as I could and, while we are together, I am ready to +carry out your orders in any way." + +"Will your men be able to attack in the morning?" + +"Certainly. They will have a good night's rest, and will be quite +ready for work, say, at four o'clock in the morning. It is not more +than two hours' march to Coimbra, so that we shall be there by +daybreak. Have they any troops between us and the town?" + +"They have a post at a village, a mile this side, O'Connor. Do you +know how far their army is, on the other side of the river?" + +"I know that they had a division close to Leiria, the day before +yesterday; but whether they have any large body just across the +Mondego, I cannot say." + +"Then we will first surprise their post. I will undertake that. +Will you march your force down the river, close to the town? I have +a hundred cavalry and, as soon as I have captured the post, I will +send them on at a gallop; with orders to ride straight through to +the bridge, and prevent any mounted messengers passing across it. +As soon as you hear them come along the road, do you at once enter +the town. I will bring my men on at the double, and we shall not be +many minutes after you. + +"It would be as well for you to enter it by several streets, as +that will cause greater confusion than if you were in a solid body. +The principal point is the great convent of Santa Clara, which has +been converted into a hospital. No doubt a portion of the garrison +are there; the rest will be scattered about in the public +buildings, and can be overpowered in detail. + +"I think we are certain of success. I hope you will stop for a time +and take supper with me and, in the meantime, I will send down +orders for my men to be under arms, here, at half-past three." + +[Illustration: 'Good news. We are going to take Coimbra.'] + +Terence and Ryan remained for an hour, and then rode back to the +regiment. The men were all sound asleep, but Herrara and the two +majors were sitting round a campfire. + +"What news, Colonel?" the former asked, as Terence rode up. + +"Good news. We are going to take Coimbra, tomorrow morning. All +Massena's sick and wounded, and his heavy baggage are there. They +have no suspicion that any force is yet assembled in the +neighbourhood and, I expect, we shall have easy work of it. They +have a post a mile out of the town. Trant will surprise and capture +that, at five in the morning. Just before daybreak we shall enter +the town. We must march from here at half-past three." + +"That is something like news, Colonel," Macwitty exclaimed. "It +will cut the French off from this line of retreat, altogether, and +they must either fall back by the line of the Tagus, or through +Badajoz and Merida." + +Terence laughed. + +"You are counting your chickens before they are hatched, Macwitty. +At the present moment, it seems more likely that Wellington will +have to embark his troops than that Massena will have to retreat. +He must have nearly a hundred thousand men, counting those who +fought with him at Busaco and the two divisions that marched down +through Foz d'Aronce; while Wellington, all told, cannot have above +40,000. Certainly some of the peasants told me they had heard that +a great many men were employed in fortifying the heights of Torres +Vedras, and Wellington may be able to make a stand there; but as we +have never heard anything about them before, I am afraid that they +cannot be anything very formidable. + +"However, just at present we have nothing to do with that. If we +can take Coimbra it will certainly hamper Massena and, if the worst +comes to the worst, we can fall back across the Douro. + +"Don't let the bugles sound in the morning. It is not likely, but +it is possible that the French may send out cavalry patrols at +night. If a bugle were heard they might ride back and report that a +force was in the neighbourhood, and we should find the garrison +prepared for us. Now we had better do no more talking. It is past +eleven, and we have but four and a half hours to sleep." + +At half-past three the troops were roused. They were surprised at +the early call, for they had expected two or three days' rest, +after the heavy work of the last eight days; but the company +officers soon learned the news from their majors and, as it quickly +spread through the ranks, the men were at once alert and ready. +Fording the river, they marched at a rapid pace by the road to +Coimbra and, soon after five o'clock, arrived within a few hundred +yards of the town. Then they were halted and broken up into four +columns, which were to enter the town at different points. The +signal for moving was to be the sound of a body of cavalry, +galloping along the road. Terence listened attentively for the +rattle of musketry in the distance, but all was quiet; and he had +little doubt that the French had been surprised, and captured, +without a shot being fired. + +Soon after half-past five he heard a dull sound which, before long, +grew louder and, in five minutes, a body of horsemen swept past at +a gallop. The troops at once got into motion, and entered the town. +There was no longer any motive for concealment. The bugles sounded +and, with loud shouts, the Portuguese ran forward. French officers +ran out of private houses, and were at once seized and captured. +Several bodies of troops were taken, in public buildings, before +they were fairly awake. Some of the inhabitants--of whom many, +unable to make their escape, had remained behind; or who had +returned from the villages to which they had at first fled--came +out and acted as guides to the various buildings where the French +troops were quartered and, in little over a quarter of an hour, the +whole town, with the exception of the convent of Santa Clara, was +in their hands. + +By this time Trant had come up, with his command. The troops +rapidly formed up again and, issuing from several streets, advanced +against the convent. The astonished enemy fired a few shots; then, +on being formally summoned to surrender, laid down their arms. +Thus, on the third day after Massena quitted the Mondego his +hospitals, depots, and nearly 6000 prisoners, wounded and +unwounded, among them a company of the Imperial Guard, fell into +the hands of the Portuguese. + +The next day Miller and Wilson came up; and their men, crossing the +bridge and spreading over the country, gathered in 300 more +prisoners; while Trant marched, with those he had captured, to +Oporto. + +[Illustration: Plan of the Lines of Torres Vedras.] + +On the 10th of October the whole of Wellington's army was safely +posted on the tremendously strong position that he had, unknown to +the army, carefully prepared and fortified for the protection of +Lisbon. It consisted of three lines of batteries and intrenchments. +The second was the most formidable; but the first was so strong, +also, that Wellington determined to defend this, instead of falling +back to the stronger line. At the foot of the line of mountains on +which the army was posted, stretching from the Tagus to the sea, +ran two streams; the Zandre, a deep river, which extended nearly +halfway along the twenty-nine miles of lines, covered the left of +the position; while a stream running into the Tagus protected the +right. The centre, therefore, was almost the only part at which the +line could be attacked with any chance of success; and this was +defended by such tremendous fortifications as to be almost +impregnable. + +Massena, who had only heard vague rumours of the existence of these +fortifications, four days before, was astounded at the unexpected +obstacle which barred his way. The British troops, as soon as they +arrived, were set to work to strengthen the intrenchments. Trees +were felled, and every accessible point was covered by formidable +abattis. The faces of the rocks were scarped, so that an enemy who +won his way partly up the hill would find his farther progress +arrested by a perpendicular wall of rock. Soon the eminences on the +crest bristled with guns; and Massena, after carefully reconnoitring +the whole position, came to the conclusion that it could not be +attacked; and disposed his troops in permanent positions, facing the +British centre and right, from Sobral to Villafranca on the Tagus; +and sent his cavalry out over the country, to bring in provisions. + +To lessen the district available for this operation, Wellington +sent orders for the northern militia to advance and, crossing the +Mondego, to drive in the foraging parties. Trant, Wilson and the +other partisan corps were also employed in the work. A strong force +took up its position between Castello Branco and Abrantes, while +the militia and partisans occupied the whole country north of +Leiria; and the French were thus completely surrounded. +Nevertheless, the store of provisions left behind in the towns and +villages was so large that the French cavalry were able to bring in +sufficient supplies for the army. + +During the week that followed, the Minho regiment was engaged in +watching the defiles by which Massena might communicate with Ciudad +Rodrigo, or through which reinforcements might reach him. Wilson +and Trant were both engaged on similar service, the one farther to +the north; while the other, who was on the south bank of the Tagus +with a number of Portuguese militia and irregulars, endeavoured to +prevent the French from crossing the river and carrying off the +flocks, herds, and corn which, in spite of Wellington's entreaties +and orders, the Portuguese government had permitted to remain, as +if in handiness for the French foraging parties. + +Owing to the exhausted state of both the British and Portuguese +treasuries, it was impossible to supply the corps acting in rear of +the French with money for the purchase of food. But Terence had +received authority to take what provisions were absolutely +necessary for the troops, and to give orders that would, at some +time or other, be honoured by the military chest. A comparatively +small proportion of his men were needed to guard the defiles, +against such bodies of troops as would be likely to traverse them, +in order to keep up Massena's communications. Leaving, therefore, a +hundred men in each of the principal defiles; and ordering them to +entrench themselves in places where they commanded the road, and +could only be attacked with the greatest difficulty; while the road +was barred by trees felled across it, so as to form an impassable +abattis, behind which twenty men were stationed; Terence marched, +with 1500 men, towards the frontier. + +Five hundred of these were placed along the Coa, guarding the roads +and, with the remainder, he forded the river and placed himself in +the woods, in the plain between Almeida and Ciudad Rodrigo. Here he +captured several convoys of waggons, proceeding with provisions for +the garrison of the former place. A portion of these he despatched, +under guard, for the use of the troops on the Coa, and for those in +the passes; thus rendering it unnecessary to harass the people, who +had returned to their villages after Massena had advanced against +Lisbon. + +Growing bolder with success, he crossed the Aqueda and, marching +round to the rear of Ciudad Rodrigo, cut off and destroyed convoys +intended for that town, causing great alarm to the garrison. These +were absolutely ignorant of the operations of Massena, for so +active were the partisans, in the French rear, that no single +messenger succeeded in getting through and, even when accompanied +by strong escorts, the opposition encountered was so determined +that the French were obliged to fall back, without having +accomplished their purpose. Thus, then, the garrison at Ciudad +Rodrigo were ignorant both of Massena's whereabouts, and of the +nature of the force that had thrown itself in his rear. Several +times, strong parties of troops were sent out. When these were +composed of cavalry only, they were boldly met and driven in. When +it was a mixed force of cavalry, infantry, and artillery, they +searched in vain for the foe. + +So seriously alarmed and annoyed was the governor that 3000 troops +were withdrawn, from Salamanca, to strengthen the garrison. In +December Massena, having exhausted the country round, fell back to +a very strong position at Santarem; and Terence withdrew his whole +force, save those guarding the defiles, to the neighbourhood of +Abrantes; so that he could either assist the force stationed there, +should Massena retire up the Tagus; and prevent his messengers +passing through the country between the river and the range of +mountains, south of the Alva, by Castello Branco or Velha; posting +strong parties to guard the fords of the Zezere. + +So thoroughly was the service of watching the frontier line carried +out, that it was not until General Foy, himself, was sent off by +Massena, that Napoleon was informed of the state of things. He was +accompanied by a strong cavalry force and 4000 French infantry +across the Zezere, and ravaged the country for a considerable +distance. + +Before such strength, Terence was obliged to fall back. Foy was +accompanied by his cavalry, until he had passed through Castello +Branco; and was then able to ride, without further opposition, to +Ciudad Rodrigo. + +Beresford was guarding the line of the Tagus, between the mouth of +the Zezere and the point occupied on the opposite bank by +Wellington, sending a portion of his force up the Zezere; and these +harassed the French marauding parties, extending their devastations +along the line of the Mondego. + +Although the Minho regiment had suffered some loss, during these +operations, their ranks were kept up to the full strength without +difficulty. Great numbers of the Portuguese army deserted during +the winter, owing to the hardships they endured, from want of food +and the irregularity of their pay. Many of these made for the Minho +regiment, which they had learned was well fed, and received their +pay with some degree of regularity, the latter circumstance being +due to the fact that Terence had the good luck to capture, with one +of the convoys behind Ciudad Rodrigo, a considerable sum of money +intended for the pay of the garrison. From this he had, without +hesitation, paid his men the arrears due to them; and had still +30,000 dollars, with which he was able to continue to feed and pay +them, after moving to the line of the Zezere. + +He only enrolled sufficient recruits to fill the gaps made by war +and disease; refusing to raise the number above 2000, as this was +as many as could be readily handled; for he had found that the +larger number had but increased the difficulties of rationing and +paying them. + + + +Chapter 12: Fuentes D'Onoro. + + +In the early spring Soult, who was besieging Cadiz, received orders +from Napoleon to cooperate with Massena and, although ignorant of +the latter's plans, and even of his position, prepared to do so at +once. He crushed the Spanish force on the Gebora; captured Badajoz, +owing to the treachery and cowardice of its commander; and was +moving north, when the news reached him that Massena was falling +back. The latter's position had, indeed, become untenable. His army +was wasted by sickness; and famine threatened it, for the supplies +obtainable from the country round had now been exhausted. +Wellington was, as he knew from his agents in the Portuguese +government, receiving reinforcements; and would shortly be in a +position to assume the offensive. + +The discipline in the French army under Massena had been greatly +injured by its long inactivity. The only news he received as to +Soult's movements was that he was near Badajoz; therefore, the +first week in March he began his retreat, by sending off 10,000 +sick and all his stores to Thomar. Then he began to fall back. +Thick weather favoured him, and Ney assembled a large force near +Leiria, as if to advance against the British position. Two other +corps left Santarem, on the night of the fifth, and retired to +Thomar. The rest of the army moved by other routes. + +For four days Wellington, although discovering that a retreat was +in progress, was unable to ascertain by which line Massena was +really retiring. As soon as this point was cleared up, he ordered +Beresford to concentrate near Abrantes; while he himself followed +the line the main body of the French army seemed to be taking. It +was soon found that they were concentrating at Pombal, with the +apparent intention of crossing the Mondego at Coimbra; whereby they +would have obtained a fresh and formidable position behind the +Mondego, with the rich and untouched country between that river and +the Douro, upon which they could have subsisted for a long time. + +Therefore, calling back the troops that were already on the march +to relieve Badajos, which had not yet surrendered, he advanced with +all speed upon Pombal, his object being to force the French to take +the line of retreat through Miranda for the frontier, and so to +prevent him from crossing the Mondego. + +Ney commanded the rear guard, and carried out the operation with +the same mixture of vigour, valour, and prudence with which he, +afterwards, performed the same duty to the French army on its +retreat from Moscow. He fought at Pombal and at Redinha, and that +so strenuously that, had it not been for Trant, Wilson, and other +partisans who defended all the fords and bridges, Massena would +have been able to have crossed the Mondego. Wellington however +turned, one by one, the positions occupied by Ney; and Massena, +believing that the force at Coimbra was far stronger than it really +was, changed his plans and took up a position at Cazal Nova. + +Here he left Ney and marched for Miranda but, although Ney covered +the movement with admirable skill, disputing every ridge and post +of vantage, the British pressed forward so hotly that Massena was +obliged to destroy all his baggage and ammunition. Ney rashly +remained on the east side of the river Cerra, in front of the +village of Foz d'Aronce and, being attacked suddenly, was driven +across the river with a loss of 500 men; many being drowned by +missing the fords, and others crushed to death in the passage. +However, Ney held the line of the river, blew up the bridge, and +his division withdrew in good order. + +Massena tarnished the reputation, gained by the manner in which he +had drawn off his army from its dangerous position, by the ruthless +spirit with which the operation was conducted; covering his retreat +by burning every village through which he passed, and even ordering +the town of Leiria to be destroyed, although altogether out of the +line he was following. + +After this fight the British pursuit slackened somewhat, for +Wellington received the news of the surrender of Badajoz and, +seeing that Portugal was thus open to invasion by Soult, on the +south, despatched Cole's division to join that of Beresford; +although this left him inferior in force to the army he was +pursuing. The advance was retarded by the necessity of making +bridges across the Cerra, which was now in flood, and the delay +enabled Massena to fall back unmolested to Guarda; where he +intended to halt, and then to move to Coria, whence he could have +marched to the Tagus, effected a junction with Soult, and be in a +position to advance again upon Lisbon, with a larger force than +ever. He had, however, throughout been thwarted by the factious +disobedience of his lieutenants Ney, Regnier, Brouet, Montbrun, and +Junot; and this feeling now broke into open disobedience and, while +Ney absolutely defied his authority, the others were so disobedient +that fierce and angry personal altercations took place. + +Massena removed Ney from his command. His own movements were, +however, altogether disarranged by two British divisions, marching +over the mountains by paths deemed altogether impassable for +troops; which compelled him to abandon his intention of marching +south, and to retire to Sabuga on the Coa. Here he was attacked. +Regnier's corps, which covered the position, was beaten with heavy +loss but, owing to the combinations--which would have cut Massena +off from Ciudad Rodrigo--failing, from some of the columns going +altogether astray in a thick fog, Massena gained that town with his +army. He had lost in battle, from disease, or taken prisoners, +30,000 men since the day when, confident that he was going to drive +Wellington to take refuge on board his ships, he had advanced from +that town. + +Even now he did not feel safe, though rejoined by a large number of +convalescents; and, drawing rations for his troops from the stores +of the citadel, he retired with the army to Salamanca. Having +reorganized his force, procured fresh horses for his guns, and +rested the troops for a few days; Massena advanced to cover Ciudad +Rodrigo, and to raise the siege of Almeida--which Wellington had +begun without loss of time--and, with upwards of 50,000 men, +Massena attacked the British at Fuentes d'Onoro. + +[Illustration: Plan of the Battle of Fuentes d'Onoro.] + +The fight was long and obstinate, and the French succeeded in +driving back the British right; but failed in a series of desperate +attempts to carry the village of Fuentes. Both sides claimed the +battle as a victory, but the British with the greater ground; for +Massena fell back across the Aqueda, having failed to relieve +Almeida; whose garrison, by a well-planned night march, succeeded +in passing through the besieging force, and effected their retreat +with but small loss, the town falling into the possession of the +British. + +Terence had come up, after a series of long marches, on the day +before the battle. His arrival was very opportune, for the +Portuguese troops with Wellington were completely demoralized, and +exhausted, by the failure of their government to supply them with +food, pay, or clothes. So deplorable was their state that +Wellington had been obliged to disband the militia regiments, and +great numbers of desertions had taken place from the regular +troops. + +The regiment had been stationed on the British right. Here the +fighting had been very severe. The French cavalry force was +enormously superior to the British, who had but a thousand troopers +in the field. These were driven back by the French, and Ramsay's +battery of horse artillery was cut off. But Ramsay placed himself +at the head of his battery and, at full gallop, dashed through the +French infantry and cavalry, and succeeded in regaining his +friends. + +The two battalions of the Minho regiment, who were posted in a +wood, defended themselves with the greatest resolution against an +attack by vastly superior numbers; until the French, advancing on +each side of the wood, had cut them off from the rest of the +division. Then a bugle call summoned the men to assemble at the +rear of the wood and, forming squares, the two battalions marched +out. + +Twelve French guns played upon them and, time after time, masses of +cavalry swept down on them but, filling up the gaps in their ranks, +they pressed on; charged two French regiments, at the double, that +endeavoured to block their way; burst a path through them, and +succeeded in rejoining the retiring division, which received them +with a burst of hearty cheering. Two hundred had fallen, in the +short time that had elapsed since they left the wood. + +Terence had been in the centre of one of the squares but, just as +they were breaking through the French ranks, he had ridden to the +rear face; and called upon the men to turn and repulse a body of +French cavalry, that was charging down upon them. At this moment a +bullet struck his horse in the flank. Maddened with the sudden +pain, the animal sprang forward, broke through the ranks of the +Portuguese in front of it and, before Terence could recover its +command, dashed at full speed among the French cavalry. Before he +could strike a blow in defence, Terence was cut down. As he fell +the cavalry passed over him but, fortunately, the impetus of his +charge had carried him nearly through their ranks before he fell; +and the horses of the rear rank leapt over his body, without +touching him. It was the force of the blow that had felled him for, +in the hurry of striking, the trooper's sword had partly turned, +and it was with the flat rather than the edge that he was struck. + +Although half stunned with the blow and the heavy fall, he did not +altogether lose consciousness. He heard, as he lay, a crashing +volley; which would, he felt sure, repulse the horsemen and, +fearing that in their retreat they might ride over him, trampling +him to death, he struggled to his feet. The French, however, though +repulsed, did not retire far, but followed upon the retreating +regiment until it joined the British; when a battery opened upon +them, and their commander called upon them to fall back. This was +done in good order, and at a steady trot. + +On seeing Terence standing in their path, an officer rode up to +him. + +"I surrender," Terence said. + +A trooper was called out, and ordered to conduct him to the rear; +where many other prisoners, who had been taken during the French +advance, were gathered. Here an English soldier bound up Terence's +wound, from which the blood was streaming freely, a portion of the +scalp having been shorn clean off. + +"That was a narrow escape, sir," the man said. + +"Yes; I don't know how it was that it did not sever my skull; but I +suppose that it was a hasty blow, and the sword must have turned. +It might have been worse, by a good deal. I am afraid things are +going badly with us." + +"Badly enough, here," the soldier said; "but I think we are holding +our own, in the centre. There is a tremendous roar of fire going +on, round that village there. I was captured half an hour ago, and +it has been growing louder and louder, ever since." + +For another two hours the battle continued and, as it still centred +round the village, the spirits of the prisoners rose; for it was +evident that, although the right had been driven back, the centre +was at least holding its position, against all the efforts of the +French. In the afternoon the fire slackened, and only a few shots +were fired. + +The next morning at daybreak the prisoners, 300 in number, were +marched away under a strong escort. Both armies still occupied the +same positions they had held the day before, and there seemed every +probability of the battle being renewed. When, however, they had +marched several miles, and no sound of heavy firing was heard, the +prisoners concluded that either Wellington had retired; or that +Massena, seeing his inability to drive the British from their +position, intended himself to fall back upon Ciudad. + +The convoy marched twenty miles, and then halted for the night. Two +hours after they did so a great train of waggons containing wounded +came up, and halted at the same place. The wounded were lifted out +and laid on the ground, where the surgeons attended to the more +serious cases. + +"Pardon, monsieur," Terence said in French, to one of the doctors +who was near him, "are there any of our countrymen among the +wounded?" + +"No, sir, they are all French," the doctor replied. + +"That is a good sign," Terence said, to an English officer who was +standing by him when he asked the question. + +"Why so, Colonel?" + +"Because, if Massena intended to attack again tomorrow, he would +have sent the British wounded back, as well as his own men. The +French, like ourselves, make no distinction between friends and +foes; and that he has not sent them seems, to me, to show that he +intends himself to fall back, and to leave the British wounded to +the care of their own surgeons, rather than embarrass himself with +them." + +"Yes, I have no doubt that is the case," the officer said. "It +seems, then, that we must have won the day, after all. That is some +comfort, anyhow, and I shall sleep more soundly than I expected. If +we had been beaten, there would have been nothing for it but for +the army to fall back again to the lines of Torres Vedras; and +Wellington would have had to fight very hard to regain them. If +Massena does fall back, Almeida will have to surrender." + +"I was inside last time it surrendered," Terence said, "but I +managed to make my way out with my regiment, after the explosion." + +"I wonder whether Massena means to leave us at Ciudad, or to send +us on to Salamanca?" + +"I should think that he would send us on," Terence replied; "he +will not want to have 300 men eating up the stores at Ciudad, +besides requiring a certain portion of the garrison to look after +them." + +Terence's ideas proved correct and, without stopping at Ciudad, the +convoy of prisoners and wounded continued their march until they +arrived at Salamanca. Terence could not help smiling, as he was +marched through the street, and thought of the wild panic that he +and Dicky Ryan had caused, when he was last in that town. The +convent which the Mayo Fusiliers had occupied was now turned into a +prison, and here the prisoners taken at Fuentes d'Onoro were +marched, and joined those who had fallen into the hands of the +French during Massena's retreat. Among these were several officers +of his acquaintance and, as discipline was not very strict, they +were able to make themselves fairly comfortable together. + +The French, indeed, along the whole of the Portuguese frontier, had +their hands full; and the force at Salamanca was so small that but +few men could be spared for prison duties and, so long as their +captives showed no signs of giving trouble, their guards were +satisfied to leave them a good deal to their own devices; watching +the gate carefully, but leaving much of the interior work of the +prison to be done by Spanish warders for, violent as the natives +were in their expressions of hatred for the French, they were +always ready to serve under them, in any capacity in which money +could be earned. + +"There can be no difficulty, whatever, in making one's escape from +here," Terence said, to a party of four or five officers who were +lodged with him in a room, from whose window a view over the city +was obtainable. "It is not the getting out of this convent that is +difficult, but the making one's way across this country to rejoin. +I have no doubt that one could bribe one of those Spaniards to +bring in a rope and, even if that could not be obtained, we might +manage to make one from our blankets; but the question is, what to +do when we have got out? Massena lies between us and Ciudad and, +from what I hear the French soldiers say, the whole line is guarded +down to Badajoz, where Soult's army is lying. Victor is somewhere +farther to the south, and their convoys and cavalry will be +traversing the whole country. I speak Portuguese well, and know +enough of Spanish to pass as a Spaniard, among Frenchmen, but to +anyone who does not speak either language it would be next to +impossible to get along." + +"I quite see that," one of the officers said, "and for my part I +would rather stay where I am, than run the risk of such an attempt. +I don't know a word of Spanish, and should be recaptured before I +had been out an hour. If I got away from the town I should be no +better off, for I could not obtain a disguise. As to making one's +way from here to Almeida, it would be altogether hopeless." + +The others agreed, and one of them said: + +"But don't let us be any hindrance to you, O'Connor. If you are +disposed to try, by all means do so and, if we can help you in any +way, we will." + +"I shall certainly try," Terence said; "but I shall wait a little +to see how things go. It may be by this time Wellington has fallen +back again and, in that case, no doubt Massena will advance. We +heard as we came along that Marmont, with six divisions, is +approaching the frontier and, even if Wellington could maintain +himself on the Aqueda, Soult is likely to crush Beresford, and may +advance from Badajoz towards Lisbon, when the British will be +obliged to retire at once. + +"To make one's way across the open country between this and Ciudad +would be easy enough; while it would be dangerous in the extreme to +enter the passes, while the French troops are pressing through them +on Wellington's rear. My Portuguese would, of course, be a +hindrance rather than a benefit to me on this side of the frontier; +for the Spaniards hate the Portuguese very much more heartily than +they do the French. You know that, when they were supplying our +army with grain, the Spanish muleteers would not bring any for the +use of the Portuguese brigades; and it was only by taking it as if +for the British divisions, and distributing it afterwards to the +Portuguese, that the latter could be kept alive. As a British +officer I should feel quite safe, if I fell into the hands of +Spanish guerillas; but as a Portuguese officer my life would not be +worth an hour's purchase." + +Two days later came the news that a desperate battle had been +fought by Beresford at Albuera, near Badajoz. He had been attacked +by Soult but, after tremendous fighting, in which the French first +obtained great advantages, they had been at last beaten off by the +British troops; and it ended a drawn battle, the losses on both +sides being extraordinarily heavy. It was not until some time +afterwards that Terence learned the particulars of this desperate +engagement. Beresford had 30,000 infantry, 2000 cavalry, and 38 +guns; but the British infantry did not exceed 7000. Soult had 4000 +veteran cavalry, 19,000 infantry, and 40 guns. + +The battle began badly. Blake with his Spaniards were soon disposed +of by the French and, in half an hour, the battle was all but lost; +a brigade of the British infantry being involved in the confusion +caused by the Spanish retreat, and two-thirds of its number being +destroyed. The whole brunt of the battle now fell upon the small +British force remaining. French columns pushed up the hill held by +them. The cannon on both sides swept the ground with grape. The +heavy French columns suffered terribly from the fire from the +English lines; but they pressed forward, gained the crest of the +rise and, confident of victory, were still advancing; when Cole and +Houghton's brigades came up and restored the battle, and the +British line, charging through a storm of grape and musketry, fell +upon the French columns and drove them down the hill again, in +confusion. + +The Portuguese battalions had fought well, as had the German +regiment; but it was upon the British that the whole brunt of the +fight had fallen. In the four hours that the combat lasted, 7000 of +the allies and over 8000 of the French had been killed or wounded. +Of the 6000 British infantry, only 1800 remained standing when the +battle was over, 4200 being killed or wounded; 600 Germans and +Portuguese were placed hors de combat; while of the Spaniards, who +formed the great mass of the army, 2000 were killed or wounded by +the French artillery and musketry, or cut down while in disorder by +the French cavalry. + +Never was the indomitable valour of British infantry more markedly +shown than at the battle of Albuera. The battle had been brought +on, in no small degree, by their anxiety for action. The regiments +had been disappointed that, while their comrades were sharing in +Wellington's pursuit of Massena, they were far away from the scene +of conflict; and when Beresford would have fallen back, as it would +have been prudent to do, they became so insubordinate that he gave +way to their desire to meet the French; and so fought a battle +where defeat would have upset all Wellington's plans for the +campaign, and victory would have brought no advantages with it. +Like Inkerman, it was a soldiers' battle. Beresford's dispositions +were faulty in the extreme and, tactically, the day was lost before +the fighting began. + +The Spanish portion of the army did no real fighting and, in their +confusion, involved the loss of nearly the whole of a British +brigade; and it was only by the unconquerable valour of the +remainder of the British force that victory was gained, against +enormous odds, and that against some of the best troops of France. + +Terence was in the habit of often going down and chatting with the +French guard at the gate. Their duties were tedious, and they were +glad of a talk with this young British officer, who was the only +prisoner in their keeping who spoke their language fluently; and +from them he obtained what news they had of what was going on. A +fortnight later, he gathered that the British force on the Aqueda +had been greatly weakened, that there was no intention of laying +siege to Ciudad, and it was believed that Wellington's main body +had marched south to join Beresford. + +This was, indeed, the only operation left open to the British +general. Regnier's division of Marmont's army had joined Massena, +and it would be impossible to besiege Ciudad while a force, greatly +superior to his own, was within easy striking distance. On the +other hand, Beresford was in no position to fight another battle +and, as long as Badajoz remained in the hands of the French, they +could at any time advance into Portugal; and its possession was +therefore of paramount importance. + +Marmont had succeeded Massena in command, the latter marshal having +been recalled to France; and the great bulk of the French army was +now concentrated round Salamanca, from which it could either march +against the British force at Ciudad; or unite with Soult and, in +overwhelming strength, either move against Cadiz or advance into +Portugal. Wellington therefore left Spencer to guard the line of +the Coa, and make demonstrations against Ciudad; while with the +main body of his army he marched south. + +The news decided Terence to attempt to make his escape in that +direction. He did not know whether his own regiment would be with +Spencer, or Wellington; but it was clear that more important events +would be likely to take place near Badajoz than on the Coa. The +French would be unlikely to choose the latter route for an advance +into Portugal. The country had been stripped bare by the two armies +that had marched across it. The roads were extremely bad, and it +would be next to impossible for an army to carry with it sustenance +for the march; still less for maintaining itself after it had +traversed the passes. Moreover Spencer, falling back before them, +would retire to the lines of Torres Vedras; and the invaders would +find themselves, as Massena had done, baffled by that tremendous +line of fortifications, where they might find also Wellington and +his army, who would have shorter roads to follow, established +before they arrived. + +Some of the townspeople were allowed to pass in and out of the +convent, to sell fruit and other articles to the British prisoners; +and Terence thought it better to open negotiations with one of +these, rather than one of the warders in French pay. He was not +long in fixing upon one of them as an ally. She was a good-looking +peasant girl, who came regularly with grapes and other fruit. From +the first, Terence had made his purchases from her, and had stood +chatting with her for some time. + +"I want to get away from here, Nita," he said, on the day he +received the news of Wellington's march to the south. + +"I dare say, senor," she laughed. "I suppose all the other +prisoners want the same." + +"No doubt; but you see, they would not have much chance of getting +away, because none of them understand Spanish. I talk it a little, +as you see. So if I got out and had a disguise, I might very well +make my way across the country." + +"There are many brigands about," she said, "and it is not safe for +a single man to travel anywhere. What do you want me to do?" + +"I want a rope fifty feet long; not a very thick one, but strong +enough to bear my weight. That is the first thing. Then I want a +disguise; but that I could get, if a friend would be in readiness +to give it to me, after I had slid down the rope into the street." + +"How could I give you a rope, senor, with all these people about?" + +"You could put it into the bottom of your basket, and cover it over +with fruit. You could take your stand near the door, at the foot of +the stairs leading up to my room. Then I could, in the hearing of +the rest, say that it was my fete day; and that I was going to give +the others a treat, so that I would buy all your grapes. After we +had bargained for them, I could hand you the money and say: + +"'Give me your basket. I will run upstairs, empty it, and bring it +down to you.' + +"As this would save my making five or six journeys upstairs, there +would be nothing suspicious about that." + +"I will think it over," the girl said, gravely. "I do not see that +there would be much danger. I will give you an answer tomorrow." + +The next day she said, when Terence went up to her, "I will do it, +senor. I have a lover who is a muleteer. I spoke to him last night, +and he will help you. Tomorrow I will give you the rope. In the +afternoon you are to hang something out of your window; not far, +but so that it can be just seen from the street. That red sash of +yours will do very well. Do not let it go more than an inch or two +beyond the window sill, so that it will not attract any attention. + +"When the clock strikes ten, Garcia and I will be in the street +below that window. This is a quiet neighbourhood, and no one is +likely to be about. Garcia will have a suit of muleteer's clothes +for you, and you can change at once. I will carry those you have on +to our house, and destroy them. Garcia will take you to his +lodging. He starts at daybreak with his mules, and you can travel +with them." + +"Thank you most heartily, Nita. Here are five gold pieces, for the +purchase of the ropes and clothes." + +"Oh, they will not cost anything like as much as that!" the girl +said. + +"If they don't, you must buy yourself a little keepsake, Nita, in +remembrance of me; but I will send you something better worth +having, by Garcia, when I reach our army, and am able to get money +with which I can pay him for his labour and loss of time." + +"I don't want money," the girl said, drawing herself up proudly. "I +am helping you because I like you, and because you have come here +to drive the French away." + +"I should not think of offering you money, Nita. I know that it is +out of pure kindness that you are doing it; but you could not +refuse some little trinket to wear, on your wedding day." + +"I may never get married," the girl said, with a pout. + +"Oh, I know better than that, Nita! A girl with as pretty a face as +yours would never remain single, and I should not be surprised if +you were to tell me that the day is fixed already." + +"It is not fixed, and is not likely to be, senor. I have told +Garcia that I will never marry, as long as the French are here. He +may go out with one of the partisan forces. He often talks about +doing so, and might get shot any day by these brigands. When I am +married, I am not going to stay at home by myself, while he is away +among the mountains." + +"Ah! Well, the war cannot last for ever. You may have Wellington +here before the year is out. Give me your address, so that when we +come, I may find you out." + +"Callao San Salvador, Number 10. It is one of my uncles I am living +with there. My home is in Burda, six miles away. It is a little +village, and there are so many French bands ranging over the +country that, a month ago, my father sent me in here to stay with +my uncle; thinking that I should be safer in the city than in a +little village. He brings fruit in for me to sell, twice a week." + +"Very well. If we come here, I shall go to your uncle's and inquire +for you and, if you have left him, I will go out to your village +and find you." + +All passed off as arranged, without the slightest hitch. Terence +took the girl's basket and ran upstairs with it, emptied the fruit +out on the table, thrust the rope under his bed, and ran down again +and gave Nita the basket. At ten o'clock at night he slung himself +from the window and after a hearty goodbye to his fellow +prisoners--several of whom, now that it was too late, would gladly +have shared in his adventure. + +"I should be very glad if you were going with me, but at the same +time I own that I do not think we should get through. I question, +indeed, if the muleteer would take anyone who did not understand +enough Spanish to pass, if he were questioned by French soldiers; +and if he would do so, it would greatly increase the risk. At the +same time, if one of you would like to take my place, I will +relinquish it to you; and will, after you have gone off with the +muleteer, go in another direction, and take my chance of getting +hold of a disguise, somehow, and of making my way out." + +None of the others would hear of this and, after extinguishing the +light, so as to obviate the risk of anyone noticing him getting out +of the window, Terence slipped down to the ground just as the clock +struck ten. + +"Good evening, senor!" a voice said, as his feet touched the +ground. "Here is your disguise. Nita is watching a short distance +away, and will give us notice if anyone approaches. You had best +change, at once." + +Terence took off his uniform and, with the assistance of the +muleteer, donned the garments that he had brought for him. Then he +rolled the others into a bundle, and the muleteer gave a low +whistle, whereupon Nita came running up. + +"Thanks be to the saints that no one has come along!" she said, as +the rope, which Terence had forgotten, fell at their feet; his +companions having, as agreed, untied the upper end. + +"That will come in useful," Garcia said, coiling it up on his arm. +"Now, senor, do not let us stand talking. Nita will take the +uniform and burn it." + +"I will hide it, if you like," the girl said. "There can be no +reason for their searching our house." + +"Thank you, Nita, but it would be better to destroy it, at once. It +may be a long time before I come this way again; besides, the +things have seen their best days, and I have another suit I can put +on, when I join my regiment. Thanks very much for your kindness, +which I shall always remember." + +"Goodbye, senor! May the saints protect you!" and without giving +him time to say more, she took the bundle from Garcia's hand and +sped away down the street. + +"Now, senor, follow me," he said, and turned to go in the other +direction. + +"You had best call me Juan, and begin at once," Terence said. "If +by accident you were to say senor, in the hearing of anyone, there +would be trouble at once." + +"I shall be careful, never fear," the man said. "However, there +would only be harm done if there happened to be a Frenchman--or one +of their Spaniards, who are worse--present. As to my own comrades, +it would not matter at all. We muleteers are all heart and soul +against the French, and will do anything to injure them. We are all +obliged to work for them; for all trade is at an end, and we must +live. Many have joined the partisans, but those who have good mules +cannot go away and give up their only means of earning a living; +for although the French pay for carriage by mules or carts, if they +come upon animals that are not being used, they take them without a +single scruple. + +"Besides, there are not many partisans in this part of Spain. The +French have been too long in the valley here, and are too strong in +the Castiles for their operations. It is different in Navarre, +Aragon, and Catalonia; and in Valencia and Mercia. There the French +have never had a firm footing, and most of the strong places are +still in Spanish hands. In all the mountainous parts, in fact, +there are guerillas; but here it is too dangerous. There are bands +all over the country, but these are really but robbers, and no +honest man would join them. + +"This is the house." + +He turned in at a small doorway and unlocked the door, closing it +after them. + +"Put your hand on my shoulder, Juan," he said. "I have a light +upstairs." + +He led the way in darkness up a stone staircase, then unlocked +another door and entered a small room, where a candle was burning. + +"This is my home, when I am here," he said. "Most of us sleep at +the stables where our mules are put up; but I like having a place +to myself, and my mate looks after the mules." + +Nothing could have been simpler than the furniture of the room. It +consisted of a low pallet, a small table, and a single chair. In a +corner were a pair of saddlebags and two or three coloured +blankets. A thick coat, lined with sheepskin, hung against the +wall. In a corner was a brightly-coloured picture of a saint, with +two sconces for candles by the side of it. The muleteer had crossed +himself and bowed to it as he came in, and Terence doubted not that +it was the picture of a saint who was supposed to take a special +interest in muleteers. + +From a small cupboard, the man brought out a flask of wine and two +drinking cups. + +"It is good," he said, as he placed them on the table. "I go down +to Xeres sometimes, and always bring up a half octave of something +special for my friends, here." + +After pouring out the two cups, he handed the chair politely to +Terence, and sat himself down on the edge of the pallet. Then, +taking out a tobacco bag and a roll of paper, he made a cigarette +and handed it to Terence, and then rolled one for himself. + + + +Chapter 13: From Salamanca To Cadiz. + + +"Now, let us talk about our journey," the muleteer said, when he +had taken two or three whiffs at his cigarette. "Nita tells me that +you wish, if possible, to join your army near Badajoz. That suits +me well, for I have orders from a merchant here to fetch him twelve +mule loads of sherry from Xeres; and Badajoz is, therefore, on my +way. The merchant has a permit, signed by Marmont, for me to pass +unmolested by any French troops; saying that the wine is intended +for his use, and that of his staff. If it were not for that, there +would be small chance, indeed, of his ever getting it. There is so +little trade, now, that it is scarce possible to buy a flask of the +white wine of the south, here. Of course, the pass will be equally +useful going down to fetch it for, without it, my mules would be +certain to be impressed for service, by the French. + +"So you see, nothing could have happened more fortunately for, +anywhere between the Tagus and Badajoz, we can turn off from +Estremadura into Portugal. It would not be safe to try near +Badajoz, for Soult's army is scattered all over there and, though +the pass would be doubtless respected by superior officers, if we +fell in with foraging parties they would have no hesitation in +shooting me, tearing up the pass, and carrying off my mules. For +your sake as well as my own, therefore, I would turn off and cross +the mountains--say, to Portalegre--and go down to Elvas. There you +would be with your friends; and I could cross again, further south, +and make my way down to Xeres." + +"They say that two of Marmont's divisions started south, +yesterday." + +"That is unfortunate, for they will leave little behind them in the +way of food and drink; and we shall find it better to travel by +by-roads. I should not mind being impressed, if it were only for +the march down to Badajoz; but once with an army, there is no +saying how long one may be kept." + +"If we find any difficulty in crossing into Portugal this side of +Badajoz, I shall not mind going down to Cadiz. I should have no +difficulty, there, in getting a ship to Lisbon." + +"Well, we shall see," the muleteer said. "We will go the short way, +if we can. I hate the Portuguese, and they are no fonder of us; but +with you with me, of course, I should not be afraid of interference +from them." + +"But the Portuguese are fighting on our side, and aiding us to help +you." + +"Yes, because they think it is better that the war should be +carried on here than in their own country. Besides, from what I +hear, it is with no goodwill that they fight under your British +general; but only because he tells them that, unless they furnish +so many troops, he will have nothing more to do with them, but will +sail away with his army to England." + +"That may be true, Garcia; but you know that when we were here--for +I was with the British army that marched through Salamanca--the +Spanish authorities were no more willing to assist than were the +Portuguese; and not a single soldier--with the exception of two or +three thousand half-armed men under Romana--joined, from the day we +crossed the frontier to that on which we embarked to Corunna." + +"The authorities are all bad," Garcia said scornfully. "They only +think of feathering their own nests, and of quarrelling among +themselves. The people are patriots, but what can they do when the +Juntas keep the arms the English have sent us in their magazines, +and divide the money among themselves? Then our generals know +nothing of their business, and have their own ambitions and +rivalries. We are all ready to fight; and when the drum is beaten +and we are called out, we go willingly enough. But what do we do +when we go out? We are marched backwards and forwards without +motive; the officers are no good; and when at last we do see the +French we are always beaten, and the generals and the officers are +the first to run away. + +"We ought in the first place to rise, not against the French, but +against the Juntas, and the councillors, and the hidalgos. Then, +when we have done with them, we ought to choose officers from among +ourselves, men that have done good service as leaders of partisans. +Then we could meet the French. We are brave enough, when we are +well led. See how the people fought at Saragossa, and since then at +Gerona, and many other places. We are not afraid of being killed, +but we have no confidence in our chiefs." + +"I have no doubt that is so, Garcia; and that, if the regiments +were trained by British officers, as some of the Portuguese now +are, you would fight well. Unfortunately, as you say, your generals +and officers are chosen, not for their merits, but from their +influence with the Juntas, whose object is to have the army filled +with men who will be subservient to their orders. + +"Then there is another thing against you: that is, the jealousy of +the various provinces. There is no common effort. When Valencia is +invaded, for example, the Valencians fight; but they have no idea +of going out from their homes to assist Castile or Catalonia and +so, one after another, the provinces are conquered by the French." + +"That is so," Garcia said thoughtfully. "If they were to rise here +I would fight, and take my chance of being killed; but I should not +care to risk my life in defence of Valencia, with which I have +nothing whatever to do. I don't see how you are to get over that, +so long as we are divided into provinces." + +"Nor do I, Garcia. In times of peace these various governments may +work well enough; but nothing could be worse than the system, when +a country is invaded. + +"What time do you start, tomorrow?" + +"As soon as the gates are open. That will be at five o'clock. It is +eleven now, so we had better get some sleep. In the morning I must +see that your dress is all right. Nita has given me a bottle of +walnut juice, to stain your face and hands. + +"Do you lie down on the bed, senor. I will wrap myself up in this +cloak. I am more accustomed to sleep on that than on the bed." + +Terence removed his outer garments and, in a few minutes, was sound +asleep. At four o'clock Garcia roused him. The morning was breaking +and, with the assistance of the muleteer, he made his toilet and +stained his face, neck, and hands, and darkened his hair. Then they +each ate a piece of bread with a bunch of grapes, took a drink of +red wine, and then sallied out; Garcia carrying his sheepskin +cloak, and Terence the three coloured blankets. A quarter of a mile +farther, they came to an inn frequented by muleteers. + +"I have told my mate about you," Garcia said, "so you need not be +afraid of him; nor indeed of any of us. There is not a muleteer who +would not do what he could to aid the escape of a British officer." + +Most of the mules were already saddled, and Garcia went up with +Terence to a man who was buckling a strap. + +"Sanchez," he said, "this is our new comrade, Juan, who I told you +would accompany us this journey." + +The man nodded. + +"It will be all the better," he said. "Twelve mules are rather too +much for two men to manage, when we get among the mountains." + +Garcia and Terence at once set to work to assist, and in ten +minutes the cavalcade started. Garcia rode the leading mule, three +others being tied in single file behind it. Terence came next, and +Sanchez brought up the rear. The animals were fine ones, and Garcia +was evidently proud of them; showing their good points to Terence, +and telling him their names. The mules were all very fond of their +master, turning their heads at once when addressed by name; and +flapping their long ears in enjoyment, as he rubbed their heads or +patted their necks. + +The town was already astir and, as they reached the gates, country +carts were pouring in, laden with fruits and vegetables for the +market. Garcia stopped for a moment, as an old man came along with +a cart. + +"How are you, father?" + +"How are you, Garcia? Off again?" + +"Yes; I am going to Xeres for wine, for the French general." + +"I see that you have got a new comrade." + +"Yes; the journey is a long one, and I thought that it was as well +to have another mate." + +"Yes, it is dangerous travelling," the old man said. "Well, +goodbye, and good fortune to you!" + +Garcia put his mules in motion again, and they passed through the +gate and soon left Salamanca behind. There was little conversation +on the way. The two Spaniards made and smoked cigarettes +continually; and Terence endeavoured to imitate them, by addressing +the endearing words they used to their animals, having learned the +names of the four of which he was in charge. At first they did not +respond to this strange voice but, as they became accustomed to it, +each answered, when its name was called, by quickening its pace and +by a sharp whisk of the tail, that showed it understood that it was +addressed. + +Terence knew that his escape would not be discovered until eight +o'clock, when the doors were opened and the prisoners assembled in +the yard for the roll call. Should any pursuit be organized, which +was unlikely, it would be in the direction of Ciudad; as it might +be supposed that an escaped prisoner would naturally make for the +nearest spot where he could join his friends. One prisoner more or +less would, however, make but little difference; and the +authorities would probably content themselves with sending a +message by a trooper, to all the towns and villages on that road, +to arrest any suspicious persons travelling without proper papers. + +On the line they were pursuing, the risk of interference was very +small. The marshal's pass would be certainly respected by the +officers of the corps under his command; and it was not until they +fell in with parties of Soult's troops that any unpleasantness was +to be apprehended; though even here the worst that could be looked +for, if they met any large body of troops, would be that the mules +might be taken, for a time, for service in the army. + +After a long day's journey they halted, for the night, at a +village. Here they found that the troops marching south had +encamped close at hand for the night, and the resources of the +place had been completely exhausted. This mattered but little, as +they carried a week's store of bread, black sausage, cheese, +onions, garlic, and capsicums. The landlord of the little inn +furnished them with a cooking pot; and a sort of stew, which +Terence found by no means unpalatable, was concocted. The mules +were hobbled and turned out on to the plain to graze; for the whole +of the forage of the village had been requisitioned, for the use of +the cavalry and baggage animals of the French column. + +On the following morning they struck off from the road they had +been following and, travelling for sixteen hours, came down on it +again at the foot of the pass of Bejar; and learned from some +peasants that they had got ahead of the French column, which was +encamped two or three miles down the road. Before daybreak they +were on their way again, and reached Banos in the afternoon. There +were but few inhabitants remaining here; for the requisitions for +food and forage, made by the troops that had so frequently passed +through the defiles, were such that the position of the inhabitants +had become intolerable and, when they learned from Garcia that two +divisions of French troops would most probably arrive that evening, +and that Marmont's whole army would follow, most of the inhabitants +who remained hastily packed their most valuable belongings in +carts, and drove away into the hills. + +The landlord of the largest inn, however, stood his ground. He was +doing well; and the principal officers of troops passing through +always took up their quarters with him, paid him fairly for their +meals and saw that, whatever exactions were placed upon the town, +he was exempted from them. Therefore the muleteers were able to +obtain a comfortable meal and, after resting their animals for +three hours, and giving them a good feed of corn, went on a few +miles farther; and then, turning off, encamped among the hills. +They were about to wrap themselves in their cloaks and blankets, +and to lie down for the night, when a number of armed men suddenly +appeared. + +"Who are you, and whither are you going?" one, who appeared to be +their leader, asked. + +"We are bound for Xeres," Garcia replied, rising to his feet. "We +are commissioned by Senor Moldeno, the well-known wine merchant of +Salamanca, to procure for him--as much good Xeres wine as our mules +will carry." + +"It is a pity that we did not meet you on the way back, instead of +on your journey there. We should appreciate the wine quite as +thoroughly as his customers would do. But how do you propose to +bring your wine back, when the whole country south swarms with +Soult's cavalry?" + +"Don Moldeno obtained a pass for us from Marmont; who, I suppose, +is one of his customers." + +"We could not think of allowing wine to pass for the use of a +French marshal," the man said. + +"It is not likely that he will drink it for some time," Garcia +said, carelessly; "for he is marching in this direction himself. +Two of his divisions have probably, by this time, reached Banos; +and we heard at Salamanca that he himself, with the rest of them, +will follow in a day or two." + +"That is bad news," the man said. "There will be no travellers +along here, while the army is on its march. Are your mules carrying +nothing now?" + +"Nothing at all. The mules would have been requisitioned two days +ago, as were most of the others in Salamanca; but Marmont's pass +saved us." + +"Are you carrying the money to buy the wine with?" + +"No, Don Moldeno knew better than that. I have only a letter from +him to the house of Simon Peron, at Xeres. He told me that that +would be sufficient, and they would furnish me with the wine, at +once, on my handing the letter to them." + +"Well, comrades," the man said, to the others gathered round, "it +is evident that we shall get no booty tonight; and may as well be +off to our own fires, where supper is waiting for us; and move away +from here at daybreak. The French may have parties of horse all +over the hills, tomorrow, searching for provisions, cattle, and +sheep." + +"That was a narrow escape," Garcia said, as the brigands moved off. +"I wonder they did not take our mules; but I suppose they had as +many as they want--three or four would be sufficient to carry their +food, and anything they may have stolen--more than that would only +be a hindrance to them in moving about, especially now they know +that the French may be in the neighbourhood in a few hours, if they +have not arrived already. + +"Well, senor, what is the next thing to be done?" + +Terence did not answer for some little time. + +"It is not easy to say," he replied at length. "Seeing that Marmont +and Soult are practically united, there can be no doubt that our +troops will have to fall back again to Portugal. The whole country +is covered with French cavalry and, in addition, we have to run +risks from these brigands; who may not always prove so easy to deal +with as the men who have just left us. What do you think yourself? +You know the country, and can judge far better than I can as to our +chance of getting through." + +"I don't think it will be possible, senor, to carry out the plan of +trying to cross into Portugal, in this direction. It seems to me, +now that Soult is engaged, and there can be no large bodies of +French near Seville, our best plan would be to make for that town; +whence, so far as we know, the country is clear of the enemy down +to Cadiz; and when we reach that port, you can take ship to +Lisbon." + +"But in that case I shall not be able to get the money to pay you, +for I shall not be known; and although I could doubtless get a +passage, I do not think that I could obtain any funds." + +"Do not speak of it, senor. The British will be in Salamanca one of +these days, and then you will be able to pay me; or, if I should +not be there at the time, you can leave the money for me with Nita, +or her father. It was for her sake that I undertook the business; +and I have no doubt, whatever, that you will discharge the debt +when you enter Salamanca." + +"That I certainly will, and to make it more certain I will ask one +of the officers of my old regiment to undertake to find her out, +and to pay the money; in case I may be with my own men, in some +other part of the country." + +"That will be quite enough, senor. Do not trouble yourself further +on the matter. We will start for Seville at daybreak." + +Travelling rapidly, the little party kept along the range of the +sierras; and then proceeded by the valley of the Tagus and crossed +the river at Talavera; and then, keeping nearly due south, struck +the Guadiana at Ciudad Real and, crossing La Mancha, gained the +Sierra Morena; held west for some distance along the southern +slopes; and then turned south and struck the Guadalquivir between +Cordova and Seville, and arrived safely at the latter town. They +had been obliged to make a great number of detours, to avoid bodies +of the enemy; but the muleteer had no difficulty in obtaining +information, from the peasants, as to the whereabouts of the French +and, after reaching the plains, always travelled at night. They +fell in twice with large parties of guerillas; but these were not +brigands for, as the country was still unconquered, and the French +only held the ground they occupied, the bands had not degenerated +into brigandage; but were in communication with the local +authorities, and acted in conformity with their instructions, in +concert with the Spanish troops. + +It was, however, nearly a month from the date of their leaving +Salamanca before they arrived at Cadiz. Terence had, during the +journey, greatly improved his knowledge of Spanish by his +conversation with the muleteers and, as the language was so similar +to the Portuguese, he soon acquired facility in speaking it. They +put up at a small fonda, or inn, frequented by muleteers; and +Terence at once made his way to the house where he heard that the +British agent resided. The latter, on hearing his story, was +surprised, indeed, that he should have made his way through Spain +from a point so far away as Salamanca; and occupied, for the +greater portion of the distance, by the French. + +"A sloop-of-war is sailing tomorrow for the Tagus," he said, "and I +will give you a letter to her captain; who will, of course, give +you a passage." + +Terence informed him of the great services the muleteer had +rendered him, and asked him if he could advance him sufficient +money to repay the man. + +"I certainly have no funds at my disposal for such a purpose, +Captain O'Connor,"--for Terence had said nothing about his +Portuguese rank, finding that its announcement always caused a +certain amount of doubt--"but I will strain a point, and grant you +thirty pounds, on your bill upon your agent at Lisbon. I have no +doubt that it will be met on presentation. But should, for example, +your vessel be wrecked or captured, which I am by no means +contemplating as likely, the amount must go down among subsidies to +Spaniards who have rendered good service." + +"Thank you, sir. That will be sufficient, not to reward the man for +the risk he has run and the fidelity that he has shown, but it will +at least pay him for the service of his mules. I do not suppose +that he would earn more, and it will be a satisfaction, to me, to +know that he is at least not out of pocket." + +The agent at once handed him a bag of silver, together with a +letter to the officer in command of the Daphne. He hired a boat and +was rowed off to the ship; which was lying, with several other +small British warships, in the port. When he ascended the side the +officer on duty asked him somewhat roughly, in bad Spanish, what he +wanted. + +"I have a letter for Captain Fry," he replied in English, to the +surprise of the lieutenant. "I am a British officer, who was taken +prisoner at the battle of Fuentes d'Onoro." + +"You must not blame me for having taken you for a Spaniard," the +lieutenant said in surprise, as he handed the letter Terence held +out to the midshipman, with a request to deliver it to the captain. +"Your disguise is certainly excellent and, if you speak Spanish as +well as you look the part, I can quite understand your getting +safely through the country." + +"Unfortunately, I do not. I speak it quite well enough for ordinary +purposes, but not well enough to pass as a native. I travelled with +a muleteer, who did all the talking that was necessary. I have been +a month on the journey, which has greatly improved my Spanish. I +knew little of it when I started, but I should not have got on so +quickly had I not been thoroughly up in Portuguese; which, of +course, helped me immensely." + +The midshipman now came up and requested Terence to follow him to +the captain's cabin. The captain smiled as he entered. + +"It is well that Mr. Bromhead vouched for you, Captain O'Connor; +for I certainly should have had difficulty in bringing myself to +believe that you were a British officer. I shall, of course, be +very glad to give you a passage; and to hear the story of your +adventures, which ought to be very interesting." + +"I have had very few adventures," Terence replied. "The muleteer +knew the country perfectly; and had no difficulty in obtaining, +from the peasants, news of the movements of the French. When I +started I had no idea of making such a long journey; but had +intended to join Lord Beresford in front of Badajos, if I could not +manage to cross the frontier higher up; but Marmont's march south +rendered that impossible, and I thought that the safer plan would +be to keep well away from the frontier; as of course things are +much more settled in the interior, and two or three muleteers with +their animals would excite little attention, even if we passed +through a town with a large French garrison; except that the mules +might have been impressed and, as I had no means of recompensing my +guide in that case, I was anxious to avoid all risk. + +"When do you sail, sir?" + +"At eight o'clock tomorrow. You cannot very well go in that +attire," the captain said, smiling. "I shall be glad to advance any +sum that you may require to procure clothes. You can, no doubt, pay +me on your arrival at Lisbon." + +Terence gladly accepted a loan of ten pounds and, with it, returned +to shore. On reaching the little inn, he at once handed thirty +pounds to Garcia. The man, however, absolutely refused to accept +it. + +"No, senor; since you have got money, I will take fifty dollars to +pay for food and forage on my way back; although really you have +cost me nothing, for I had to make the journey on business. But +even did you owe me the money, I would not take it now. I may not +be so lucky on my way back as we have been in coming, and might be +seized by brigands; therefore I would, in any case, rather that you +left the matter until you come to Salamanca." + +"But that may not be for a long time. It is quite as likely that we +may be obliged to quit Portugal, and embark for England, as that we +shall ever get to Salamanca." + +"Who knows, senor! Luck may turn. However, I would rather that it +were so. I have had the pleasure of your having made the journey +with me, and I shall have pleased Nita. If you come, well and good. +If not, it cannot be helped, and I shall not grieve over it. If I +had money with me I might lose it, and it might cost me my life." + +Terence had again gone out, and purchased a suit of clothes +befitting a Spanish gentleman. He took the muleteer with him. They +had no longer any reason for concealing their identity and, should +he find it necessary to announce himself to be a British officer, +it might be useful to have corroboration of his story. He also laid +in a fresh stock of linen, of which he was greatly in need and, +next morning, after a hearty farewell to Garcia, he went down to +the port in his new attire and, carrying a small valise containing +his purchases, took a boat to the ship. + +The evening before he had called in at the agent's, to thank him +again, when the latter told him that he had some urgent despatches +from the junta of Cadiz to that of Seville; and some despatches of +his own to persons at Cordova, and others in Madrid, who were in +communication with the British government; and he offered a sum, +for their safe delivery, that would recompense the muleteer for the +whole of his journey. This Garcia had gladly acceded to, on +condition that he might stop for a day, to get the wine at Xeres. + +The voyage to Lisbon lasted three days, and was a very pleasant one +to Terence. On his arrival there he at once repaid the captain the +loan he had received from him, having over thirty pounds still in +hand. He next saw the agent, and requested him to pay the bill when +presented and, after waiting three days to obtain a fresh uniform, +started up the country and rejoined Wellington, who had been +compelled to fall back again behind the Coa. He reported himself to +the adjutant general. + +"You have just arrived in time, Captain O'Connor," the latter said, +"for your regiment is under orders to start, tomorrow, to join the +force of the guerilla Moras who, with two thousand men, is in the +mountains on our frontier near Miranda; and intends to threaten +Zamora, and so compel Marmont to draw off some of his troops facing +us here. Your regiment is at present on the Douro, fifteen miles +away. How have you come here?" + +"I travelled by a country conveyance, sir. I am at present without +a horse, but no doubt I can pick one up, when I have obtained funds +from the paymaster." + +"I will give you an order on him for fifty pounds," the adjutant +said. "Of course, there is a great deal more owing to you; but it +will save trouble to give you an order for that sum, on account. I +don't suppose you will want more. I will have inquiries made about +a horse. If you return here in an hour, I daresay I shall hear of +one for sale. + +"Your regiment has not done much fighting since you left it, but they +behaved well at Banos, where we had a very sharp fight. They came up +just at the critical moment, and they materially assisted us in beating +off the attack of the French; who were in greatly superior force, and +nearly succeeded in capturing, or exterminating, the light division." + +On his return, Terence found that one of the officers on the +adjutant general's staff knew of a horse that had been captured, by +a trooper, in a skirmish with French dragoons three days before. It +was a serviceable animal and, as the soldier was glad to take ten +pounds for it, Terence at once purchased it. The adjutant told him +that, on mentioning his return, Lord Wellington had requested him +to dine with him; and to come half an hour before the usual time, +as he wished to question him with reference to the state of the +country he had passed through, and of the strength and probable +movements of the French troops in those districts. + +"I am glad to see you back again, Colonel O'Connor," the general +said, when he entered. "Of course, I heard how you had been captured, +and have regretted your absence. Colonel Herrara is a good officer +in many ways, and the regiment has maintained its state of efficiency; +but he does not possess your energy and enterprise, nor the readiness +to assume responsibilities and to act solely upon his own initiative--a +most valuable quality," he said, with one of his rare smiles, "when +combined with sound judgment, for an officer commanding a partisan +corps like your own; but which, if general, would in a very short time +put an end to all military combinations, and render the office of a +commander-in-chief a sinecure. + +"Now, sir, will you be good enough to point out, on this map, +exactly the line you followed in travelling from Salamanca to +Cadiz: and give me any information you gained concerning the roads, +the disposition of the people, and the position and movements of +the French troops." + +Terence had anticipated that such information would be required of +him; and had, every evening when they halted, jotted down every +fact that he thought could be useful and, on the voyage to Lisbon, +had written from them a full report, both of the matters which the +general now inquired about, and of the amount of supplies which +could probably be obtained in each locality, the number of houses +and accommodation available for troops, the state and strength of +the passes, and the information that Garcia had obtained for him of +mountain tracks by which these passes could be turned, by infantry +and cavalry in single file. + +"I have brought my report, sir," he said, producing it. "I +endeavoured to make the most of my opportunities, to gain all the +information possible that might be useful to myself, or the +commander of any column moving across the same country. I fear that +it is far from being perfect but, as I wrote it from my notes, made +at the end of each day, I think it will answer its purpose, as far +as it goes." + +Attached to each day's journey was a rough sketch map showing the +crossroads, rivers, bridges, and other particulars. The general +took the bulky report, sat down and read a page here and there, and +glanced at the maps. He looked up approvingly. + +"Very good, indeed, Colonel O'Connor. If all officers would take +advantage of their opportunities, as you have done, the drudgery my +staff have to do would be very much lightened, and they would not +be constantly working in the dark." + +He handed the report to the adjutant general. + +"This may be of great utility when an advance begins," he said. +"You had better have two or three copies of it made. It will be +useful to the quartermaster's department, as well as to yourself; +and of great assistance to the officers in command of any detached +parties that may be despatched to gather in supplies, or to keep in +check an enemy advancing on our flank. Some day, when I can find +time, I will read the whole report myself. + +"It will be well to have a dozen copies made of the first five or +six pages, and the maps, for the perusal of any officer sent out +with a detachment on scouting duty, as a model of the sort of +report that an officer should send in of his work, when on such +duty." + +The party at dinner was a small one, consisting only of some five +or six officers of the headquarter staff, and two generals of +divisions. After dinner, Lord Wellington asked Terence how he +escaped from Salamanca, and the latter briefly related the +particulars of his evasion. + +"This is the second time you have escaped from a French prison," +Lord Wellington said, when he had finished. "The last time, if I +remember rightly, you escaped from Bayonne in a boat." + +"But you did not get to England in that boat, surely, Colonel +O'Connor?" one of the generals laughed. + +"No, sir; we were driven off shore by a gale, and picked up by a +French privateer. We escaped from her as she was lying in port at +Brest, made our way to the mouth of the river Sienne, about nine +miles north of Granville; and then, stealing another boat, started +for Jersey. We were chased by a French privateer but, before she +came up to us, a Jersey privateer arrived and engaged her. While +the fight was going on we got on board the Jersey boat, which +finally captured the Frenchman, and took her into port." + +"And from there, I suppose, you found your way to England, and +enjoyed a short rest from your labours?" + +"No, sir. The captain of the privateer, who thought that we had +rendered him valuable assistance in the fight, sailed out with us +on to the ship track, and put us on board a transport bound for +Lisbon." + +"Well, you are more heart and soul in it than I am," the general +laughed. "I should not have been able to deny myself a short run in +England." + +"I was anxious to get back to my regiment, sir, as I was afraid +that, if I did not return before the next campaign opened, some +other officer might be appointed to its command." + +"You need not trouble yourself on that score, in future, Colonel +O'Connor," Lord Wellington said. "If you have the bad luck to be +captured again, I shall know that your absence will be temporary +and, if it became necessary to appoint anyone else to your command, +it would only be until your return." + +On leaving the commander-in-chief's quarters, the adjutant general +asked Terence when he thought of rejoining his regiment. + +"I am going to start at once, sir. I ordered my horse to be saddled +and in readiness, at ten o'clock." + +"You must not think of doing so," the adjutant said. "The road is +very bad, and not at all fit to be traversed on a dark night like +this. Besides, you would really gain nothing by it. If you leave at +daybreak, you will overtake your regiment before it has marched +many miles." + + + +Chapter 14: Effecting A Diversion. + + +At twelve o'clock the next day Terence rode up to his regiment, +just as it had halted for two hours' rest. As soon as he was +recognized the men leapt to their feet, cheering vociferously, and +gathered round him; while, a minute or two later, Herrara, Ryan and +the two majors ran up to greet him. + +[Illustration: The men leapt to their feet, cheering vociferously.] + +"I have been expecting you for the last month," Ryan exclaimed, +"though how you were to get through the French lines was more than +I could imagine. Still, I made sure you would do it, somehow." + +"You gave me credit for more sharpness than I possess, Dick. I felt +sure it could not be done, and so I had to go right down to Cadiz, +and back to Lisbon by ship. It was a very much easier affair than +ours was, and I met with no adventures and no difficulties on the +way. + +"Well, Herrara, I heard at headquarters that the regiment is going +on well, and they fought stoutly at Banos. Your loss was not heavy, +I hope?" + +"We had fifty-three killed, and a hundred more or less seriously +wounded. More than half of them have rejoined. The vacancies have +been filled up, and the two battalions are both at their full +strength. + +"Two of the captains, Fernandez and Panza, were killed. I have +appointed two of the sergeants temporarily, pending your +confirmation, on your return." + +"It is well that it is no worse. They were both good men, and will +be a loss to us. Whom have you appointed in their places?" + +"Gomes and Mendoza, the two sergeant majors. They are both men of +good family, and thoroughly know their duty. Of course I filled +their places, for the time, with two of the colour sergeants." + +"I suppose you have ridden from headquarters, Terence," Ryan put +in, "and must be as hungry as a hunter. We were just going to sit +down to a couple of chickens and a ham, so come along." + +While they were taking their meal, Terence gave them an account of +the manner in which he had escaped from Salamanca. + +"So you were in our old quarters, Terence! Well, you certainly have +a marvellous knack of getting out of scrapes. When we saw your +horse carrying you into the middle of the French cavalry, I thought +for a moment that the Minho regiment had lost its colonel; but it +was not for long, and soon I was sure that, somehow or other, you +would give them the slip again. Of course I have been thinking of +you as a prisoner at Ciudad, and I was afraid that they would keep +a sharper watch over you, there, than they did at Bayonne. Still, I +felt sure that you would manage it somehow, even without the help +we had. + +"What are your orders?" + +"I have none, save that we are to march to Miranda, where we shall +find a guerilla force under Moras; and we are to operate with him, +and do all we can to attract the attention of the French. That is +all I know, for I have not had time to look at the written +instructions I received from the adjutant general when I said +goodbye to him, last night; but I don't think there are any precise +orders. + +"What were yours, Herrara?" + +"They are that I was to consult with Moras; to operate carefully, +and not to be drawn into any combat with superior or nearly equal +French forces; which I took to mean equal to the strength of the +regiment, for the guerillas are not to be depended upon, to the +smallest extent, in anything like a pitched combat." + +"There is no doubt about that," Terence agreed. "For cutting off +small parties, harassing convoys, or anything of that sort, they +are excellent; but for down-right hard fighting, the guerillas are +not worth their salt. The great advantage of them is that they +render it necessary for the French to send very strong guards with +their baggage and convoys; and occasionally, when they are +particularly bold and numerous, to despatch columns in pursuit of +them. If it were not for these bands, they would be able to +concentrate all their troops, and would soon capture Andalusia and +Valencia, and then turn their attention to other work. As it is, +they have to keep the roads clear, to leave strong garrisons +everywhere, and to keep a sufficient force in each province to make +head against the guerillas; for if they did not do so, all their +friends would be speedily killed, and the peasantry be constantly +incited to rise." + +"Do you know anything of this Moras?" + +"He is said to be a good leader," Herrara replied, "and to have +gathered under him a number of other bands. He has the reputation +of being less savage and cruel than the greater part of these +partisan leaders; and though, no doubt, he kills prisoners--for in +that he could hardly restrain his men--he does not permit the +barbarous cruelties that are a disgrace to the Spanish people. In +fact, I believe his orders are that no prisoners are to be taken." + +"I will look at my instructions," Terence said, drawing out the +paper he had received the night before. + +"Yes," he said, when he had read them; "my instructions are a good +deal like yours, but they leave my hands somewhat more free. I am +to consult with Moras, to operate with him when I think it +advisable, and in all respects to act entirely upon my own judgment +and discretion; the main object being to compel the French to +detach as many men as possible from this neighbourhood, in order to +oppose me; and I am to take every advantage the nature of the +country may afford to inflict heavy blows upon them." + +"That is all right," Ryan said cheerfully. "I had quite made up my +mind that we should always be dependent upon Moras; and be kept +inactive, owing to his refusal to carry out anything Herrara might +propose; but as you can act independently of him, we are sure to +have plenty of fun." + +"We will make it as hot for them as we can, Dick; and if we cannot +do more, we can certainly oblige the French to keep something like +a division idle, to hold us in check. With the two battalions, and +Moras's irregulars, we ought to be able to harass them amazingly; +and to hold any of these mountain passes against a considerable +force." + +After two hours' halt the march was renewed and, two days later, +the regiment arrived at Miranda. The frontier ran close to this +town, the Douro separating the two countries. They learned that +Moras was lying four miles farther to the north, and across the +frontier line; doubtless preferring to remain in Spain, in order to +prevent a quarrel between his followers and the Portuguese. + +The next morning Terence, accompanied by Ryan and four mounted +orderlies, rode into the glen where he and his followers were +lying. They had erected a great number of small arbours of boughs +and bushes and, as Terence rode up to one of these, which was +larger and better finished than the rest, Moras himself came to the +entrance to meet them. + +He did not at all correspond with Terence's ideas of a guerilla +chief. He was a young man, of three or four and twenty; of slim +figure and with a handsome, thoughtful face. He had been a student +of divinity at Salamanca, but had killed a French officer in a +duel, brought on by the insolence of the latter; and had been +compelled to fly. A few men had gathered round him, and he had at +once raised his standard as a guerilla chief. + +At first his operations had been on a very small scale; but the +success that had attended these enterprises, and the reports of his +reckless bravery, had speedily swelled the number of his followers; +and although as a rule he kept only a hundred with him, he could at +any time, by sending round a summons, collect five times that +number, in a few hours. + +When Terence introduced himself as the colonel of the two +battalions that had arrived, at Miranda, to operate in conjunction +with him, Moras held out his hand frankly. + +"I am very glad indeed to meet you, Colonel O'Connor," he said. "I +received a despatch four days ago from your general, saying that +the Minho regiment would shortly arrive at Miranda, to act in +concert with me. I was glad indeed when I heard of this, for the +name of the regiment is well known, on this side of the frontier as +well as on the other, having been engaged in many gallant actions; +and your name is equally well known, in connection with it; but I +hardly expected to meet you, for the despatch said the Minho +regiment under Lieutenant Colonel Herrara." + +"Yes. I only rejoined it two days ago, having been taken prisoner +at Fuentes d'Onoro, and having made my escape from Salamanca." + +"Your aid will be invaluable, senor. My own men are brave enough, +but they are irregulars in the full sense of the word;" and he +smiled. "And although they can be relied upon for a sudden attack, +or for the defence of a pass, they could not stand against a French +force of a quarter of their strength, in the plain. We want a +backbone, and no better one could be found than your regiment. + +"I am the more glad that you are in command, because you know, +unhappily, we and the Portuguese do not get on well together and, +while my men would hesitate to obey a Portuguese commander, and +would have no confidence in him, they would gladly accept your +leadership." + +"I hope that there will be no difficulties on the ground of race," +Terence said. "We are fighting in a common cause, against a common +enemy; and dissensions between ourselves are as absurd as they are +dangerous. + +"Let me introduce Captain Ryan, adjutant of the regiment." + +Moras shook hands with Ryan; who had been looking on, with some +surprise, at the colloquy between him and Terence. Moras then asked +them into his arbour. + +"I have little to offer you," he said, with a smile, "save black +bread and wine. The latter, however, is good. I obtained a large +supply of it from a convoy we captured, a few days since." + +The wine was indeed excellent and, accustomed as they were to the +coarse bread of the country, Terence and Ryan were able to eat it +with satisfaction. + +"Now, Colonel," Moras said, "beyond the fact that we are to act in +concert, I know nothing of the plans. Please to remember that, +while it is said that we are to discuss our plans of operations +together, I place myself unreservedly under your orders. Of +irregular warfare I have learned something; but of military +science, and anything like extensive operations, I am as ignorant +as a child; while you have shown your capacity for command. I may +be of advantage to you, from my knowledge of the country; and +indeed, there is not a village track that someone or other of my +followers is not well acquainted with." + +"That, of course, will be of great advantage to us," Terence +replied courteously, "and I thank you much for what you have said; +but I am sure, from what I have heard, you underrate your +abilities. Beyond regimental drill, I knew very little of warfare +until I, quite by an accident, came to assume the command of my +regiment; and it was only because I drilled and disciplined it +thoroughly that I had the good fortune to obtain some successes +with it. Your acquaintance with the country will be fully a set off +to any superior knowledge that I may have of military matters, and +I have no doubt that we shall get on well together. + +"The instructions that I have received are to the effect that we +are to make incursions and attacks in various directions; +concealing, as far as possible, our strength; and so to oblige the +French to detach a considerable number of troops to hold us in +check. This would relieve the pressure upon Lord Wellington's army, +and would deter the enemy from making any offensive movement into +Portugal; until our general has received the reinforcements +expected shortly, and is in a position to take the offensive." + +"It will be just the work to suit us," the guerilla chief said. +"And as I received a subsidy from your political agent at Lisbon, a +few days since, I am in a position to keep the whole force I have +together; which is more than I can do generally for, even if +successful in an attack on a convoy, the greater portion of the men +scatter and return to their homes and, as long as their share of +the booty lasts, they do not care to come out again." + +Terence now produced a map with which he had been supplied, and a +considerable time was spent in obtaining full particulars of the +country through which the troops might have to march; ascertaining +the best spots for resistance when retreating, or for attacking +columns who might be despatched in pursuit of them; and in +discussing the manner and direction in which their operations would +most alarm and annoy the enemy. + +It was finally agreed that Terence should break up his battalions +into three parties. Two of these consisted each of half a +battalion, 500 strong, and would be under the command of Bull and +Macwitty. Each of them would be accompanied by 300 guerillas, who +would act as scouts and, in case opportunity should offer, join in +any fighting that might take place. + +The other two half battalions formed the third body, under the +command of Terence, himself; and would, with the main force of the +guerillas, occupy the roads between Zamora, Salamanca, and +Valladolid. In this way the French would be harassed at several +points, and would find it so difficult to obtain information as to +the real strength of the foe that was threatening them, that they +would be obliged to send up a considerable force to oppose them; +and would hesitate to undertake any serious advance into Portugal +until the question was cleared up, and their lines of communication +assured again. + +It was agreed, in the first place, that the forces should unite in +the mountains west of Braganza, between the river Esla on the east +and Tera on the north; affording a strong position from which, in +case of any very large force mustering against them, they could +retire across the frontier into Portugal. Terence had been supplied +with money, and an authority to give orders on the paymaster's +department for such purchases as were absolutely necessary. Moras +was also well supplied, having not only the money that had been +sent him, but the proceeds of a successful attack upon a convoy +proceeding to Salamanca; in which he had captured a commissariat +chest, with a considerable sum of money, besides a large number of +cattle and several waggon loads of flour. All these provisions, +with some that Terence had authority to draw from the stores at +Miranda, were to be taken to the spot they had chosen as their +headquarters in the hills. + +"You beat me altogether, Terence," Ryan said as, after all these +matters had been arranged, they rode out from the guerilla's camp. +"It is only about three months since I saw you. Then you could only +just get along in Spanish. Now you are chattering away in it as if +you had never spoken anything else, all your life." + +"Well, you see, Dick, I knew just enough, when I was taken +prisoner, to be able to, as you say, get along in it; and that made +all the difference to me. If I had known nothing at all of it, I +should not have been able to benefit by my trip with the muleteers +in Spain. As it was, I was able to talk with them and, as we rode +side by side all day; and sat together by a fire for hours, after +we had halted when the day's journey was over, we did a tremendous +lot of talking; and as you see, I came out, at the end of the +month, able to get along really fluently. I, no doubt, make a good +many mistakes, and mix a good many Portuguese words with my +Spanish; but that does not matter in the least, so long as one is +with friends; although it would matter a good deal if I were trying +to pass as a Spaniard, among people who might betray me if they +found out that I was English. + +"I see that you have improved in Portuguese almost as much as I +have in Spanish. It is really only the first drudgery that is +difficult, in learning a language. When once one makes a start one +gets on very fast; especially if one is not afraid of making +mistakes. I never care a rap whether I make blunders or not, so +that I can but make myself understood." + +Three days later the two bodies were assembled in a valley, about +equally distant from Miranda and Braganza. It had the advantage of +being entered, from the east, only through a narrow gorge, which +could be defended against a very superior force; while there were +two mountain tracks leading from it, by which the force there could +be withdrawn, should the entrance be forced. A day was spent by the +leaders in making their final arrangements; while the men worked at +the erection of a great wall of rocks, twelve feet high and as many +thick, across the mouth of the gorge; collecting quantities of +stones and rocks, on the heights on either side, to roll down upon +any enemy who might endeavour to scale them; while another very +strong party built a wall, six feet high, in a great semicircle +round the upper mouth of the gorge, so that a column forcing its +way through, thus far, would be met by so heavy a fire that they +could only debouch into the valley with immense loss. + +Two hundred men of the Minho regiment, drawn from Terence's party, +were to occupy the valley; with three hundred of the guerillas, who +would be able to do good service by occupying the heights, while +the regular infantry held the newly-erected walls. One of Moras' +most trusted lieutenants was to command them while, after some +discussion, it was arranged that Herrara should be in general +command of the garrison. + +The brave fellow was reluctant to remain inactive; but he had been, +for some time, seriously unwell, having been laid up for a time +with a severe attack of dysentery; and was really unfit for any +continued exertion, although he had made light of his illness, and +refused to go on the sick list. Terence pointed out to him that the +command was a very important one. Here all the plunder that they +might obtain from the enemy would be carried; and if, by means of +spies or traitors, the French obtained news of the situation of the +post, he might be attacked in great force before the other +detachments could arrive to his assistance. + +As there were four thousand French troops at Zamora, it was agreed +that no direct attack could be made upon the town. Bull with his +force was to watch the garrison, attack any detachments that might +be sent out--leaving them severely alone when they sallied out in +force, and to content himself with outmarching their infantry, and +beating off any cavalry attacks. He was, if necessary, to retreat +in the direction of their stronghold. + +Macwitty was to occupy the road between Zamora and Valladolid, +while the main body held the roads between both the latter town, +and Zamora, to Salamanca. Frequent communication was to be kept up +between them, so that either column might speedily be reinforced, +if necessary. + +In the course of a week, the whole country was in a state of alarm. +Bridges were broken down, roads blocked by deep cuttings across +them, convoys attacked, small French posts at Tordesillas, +Fuentelapena, and Valparaiso captured--the French soldiers being +disarmed, and then taken under an escort to within ten miles of +Salamanca. Toro was entered suddenly, and a garrison of three +hundred men taken by surprise, and forced to lay down their arms. +The powder, bullocks, and waggons with their stores were sent, by +circuitous routes, to the bridge across the Douro at Miranda, and +then up to their stronghold. + +So vigilant a watch was kept on the roads that no single courier +was able to make his way from Valladolid to Salamanca or Zamora +and, beyond the fact that the whole country seemed swarming with +enemies, the French commanders were in absolute ignorance of the +strength of the force that had so suddenly invaded Leon. + +One day a messenger rode in from Macwitty to Fuentelapena, where +Terence had his headquarters; saying that a body of 4000 French +infantry, with 1000 cavalry, were on the march from Valladolid +towards Zamora. Strong positions had already been selected for the +defence, and a bridge broken down at a point where the road crossed +a tributary of the Douro. + +Terence at once sent Ryan with 200 men to reinforce Macwitty, and +despatched several mounted messengers to find Bull, and to tell him +to join him on the road, four miles to the east of the point where +Macwitty was defending the passage of the river. He himself marched +directly on that point, crossing the river at Tordesillas. He +arrived there early in the morning, and found that the French +column had passed, late the evening before. + +At this point the road ran between two hills, several times +crossing a stream that wound along the valley. A large number of +men were at once set to work, breaking down the bridges and +throwing up a breastwork along the bank, where the river made a +sharp bend, crossing the valley from the foot of the hills on one +side to that of those on the other. While this work was being done +cannon shots were heard, then a distant rattle of musketry. + +Terence knew that by this time Ryan would have joined Macwitty; and +Moras at once started, with his men and 400 of the Portuguese, to +threaten the French rear, and make a dash upon their baggage. +Terence's orders to the officers in command of these two companies +were that they were to keep their men well together, and to cover +the retreat of the guerillas from cavalry attacks. The firing +continued for the next hour and a half, then it suddenly swelled in +volume, and amid the rattle could be heard the sound of heavy +volleys of musketry. + +Terence had, half an hour before, ridden forward at full speed with +four mounted orderlies. When he arrived at a spot where he could +survey the scene of combat, he saw that it was more serious than he +had anticipated. The guerillas were falling back rapidly, but as +soon as they gained the high ground they halted and opened fire +upon the cavalry who, scattered over the plain, were pursuing them. +His own men were retreating steadily and in good order, facing +round and pouring heavy volleys into the French cavalry, as they +charged them. + +The French attack on Macwitty had ceased, and Terence saw bodies of +infantry moving towards the right where, on rising ground, a body +of troops about a thousand strong were showing themselves +menacingly. He had no doubt for a moment that this was Bull's +command who, hearing the firing, and supposing that Terence was +engaged there, had led his command straight to the scene of action. + +He at once sent an orderly back, at full gallop, to order the men +in the valley to come on at the top of their speed; and then rode +along the hillside and joined Bull, who was now closely engaged +with the advancing columns of French. So hot was the fire, from +Bull's own men and the guerillas, that the two French battalions +wavered and came to a halt; and then, breaking into skirmishing +order, advanced up the hill. + +"Don't wait too long, Bull," Terence said. "There is a steeper +slope behind you. However, I don't think they will come up very +far--not, at least, until they are reinforced. There is another +body just starting, and I think we can hold on here until they join +the skirmishing line. As soon as they do so, sound the order for +the men to fall back." + +"Where are your men, sir?" + +"They are four miles away, at the spot where I told you to join me. +However, the mistake is of no importance. I have sent off for them +and, as soon as they arrive and show themselves, I fancy the French +will retreat." + +He tore out a leaf from his pocketbook, and wrote out an order to +Macwitty: + +"Leave Captain Ryan with his command to hold the river; and march +at once, with the rest of your men, to the ford which we heard of, +a mile down the river. Cross there, and ascend the hills on the +French right; scattering your men so as to make as much show as +possible, and menacing the French with attack. Tell Captain Ryan to +redouble his fire, so as to prevent the French noticing the +withdrawal of your force." + +This he gave to one of his orderlies, and told him to swim the +river and deliver it to Major Macwitty. + +When Terence had done this, he was able to give his attention to +what was passing. Across the valley his men had now ascended the +hill, and joined the guerillas. The French cavalry, unable to +charge up the heights, had fallen back. A column of French, some +fifteen hundred strong, were marching in that direction. + +As he had expected, the skirmishers in front of him were making but +little way; evidently halting for the arrival of the reinforcement, +which was still more than half a mile distant. The French gunners +had been withdrawn from the bank of the river, and were taking up +positions to cover the advance of their infantry; and their shot +presently came singing overhead--doing no harm, however, to the +Portuguese, who were lying down on the crest of the swell, and +keeping up a steady fire on the French skirmishers. + +Ten minutes later the column was within a short distance of the +line of defenders. Terence gave the word, and his men retired up +another and steeper slope behind; while the guerillas were ordered +to remain to keep up a brisk fire, until the French were within +thirty yards of the crest, and were then to run back at full speed, +and join him above. + +The Portuguese had scarcely taken up their position when a +tremendous fire broke out below. A minute later the guerillas were +seen rushing up the hill, and close behind them came the French +line, cheering loudly. As they appeared the Portuguese opened fire, +and with such steadiness and precision that the leading files of +the French were almost annihilated. But the wave swept upwards and, +encouraged by the shouts of their officers, they advanced against +the second position. + +For half an hour an obstinate fight was maintained, the strength of +the position neutralizing the effect of the superior numbers of the +French. The Spaniards fought well, imitating the steadiness of the +Portuguese and, being for the most part good marksmen, their fire +was very deadly; and several determined attacks of the French were +beaten off with heavy loss. + +Then, from the valley below, was heard the sound of a bugle. The +call was repeated by the bugles of the assailants and, slowly and +reluctantly, the French began to fall back. + +Terence looked round. He had from time to time glanced across to +the hills opposite, and had seen his men there retiring steadily, +and in good order, before the assault of the French; and now he saw +that his force from the valley was marching rapidly along the +hilltop to their assistance; while away on the French right, +Macwitty's command, spread out to appear of much greater strength +than it really possessed, was moving down the slope, as if to the +assault. + +Below, in the valley, a battalion of French infantry with their +cavalry and artillery were drawn up, and were evidently only +waiting for the return of the two assaulting columns, to join in +their retreat. The French commander doubtless supposed that he was +caught in a trap. Unable to effect the passage of the river, and +seeing the stubborn resistance his troops were meeting with on the +hills, the arrival of two fresh bodies of the enemy on the scene +induced him to believe that the foe were in great force; and that, +ere long, he might be completely surrounded. He moved forward +slowly, by the road he had come, and was presently joined by the +two detached parties. + +As soon as they moved on, Terence sent an orderly at a gallop +across the valley, to order Macwitty and Moras to follow the French +along on the hills on their side of the valley, and to harass them +as much as possible; while he, with Bull's command, kept parallel +with them on his side. + +The French cavalry kept ahead of their column. The leading +battalion was thrown out as skirmishers, on the lower slopes of the +hills; while the artillery, in the rear, kept up a heavy fire upon +the Portuguese and Spanish, as soon as they were made out on the +hills above them. Terence kept his men on the crest, and signalled +to Macwitty to do the same; but the guerillas swarmed down the +hillside, and maintained a galling fire on the French column. +Terence took his men along at the double and, heading the column, +descended into the valley at the point they had fortified. + +Here there was a sharp fight. The French cavalry fell back, after +suffering heavily. Their infantry advanced gallantly and, after a +fierce fight, drove the Portuguese from their wall and up the +hillside. Here they maintained a heavy fire, until the column +opened out and the French artillery came to the front; when Terence +at once ordered the men to scatter, and climb the hill at full +speed. + +Without attempting to repair the broken bridges, the French +infantry crossed the stream breast high, and the cavalry and +artillery followed; and Terence, seeing that their retreat could +not be seriously molested, and that if he attempted to do so, he +should suffer very heavily from their artillery, sounded a halt; +and the French continued their retreat to Valladolid, leaving +behind them all their baggage, which they had been unable to get +across the stream. + +Terence's force came down from the hills and assembled in the +valley. Congratulations were exchanged on the success that had +attended their efforts. Then the roll was at once called, and it +was found that a hundred and three men of the Minho regiment were +missing. There was no roll among the guerillas; but Moras's +estimate, after counting the number assembled, was, that upwards of +two hundred were absent from the ranks, fully half of these having +been overtaken and killed by the French cavalry. + +Terence at once sent off two parties of his own men, to the points +where the fight had been fiercest. They were to collect the +wounded, including those of the French, and to carry them down into +the valley; while parties of guerillas searched the hillsides, down +to the scene of action, for their comrades who had fallen from the +fire of the French artillery and musketry. + +When the wounded were collected, it was found there were upwards of +two hundred French infantry, fifty-nine guerillas, and twenty-four +Portuguese. The smaller proportion of wounded of the latter being +accounted for by the fact that so many had been shot through the +head, while lying down to fire at the French as they climbed the +hill. Two hundred and thirty French soldiers had been killed. +Terence at once set his men to dig wide trenches, in which the +soldiers of the three nationalities were laid side by side. + +A considerable amount of reserve ammunition being captured in the +waggons, the men's cartridge boxes were filled up again, and the +rest was packed in a waggon. Some of the drivers had cut their +traces, but others had neglected to do this, and there were +sufficient waggons to carry all the wounded, both friends and +enemies, together with a considerable amount of flour. + +The French wounded were taken to the ford by which Macwitty had +crossed; and then some of them who had been wounded in the leg and, +although unable to walk, were fit to drive, were given the reins +and told to take the waggons to Zamora, a distance of twelve miles. +Fifty men were told off to march with them, until within sight of +the town; as otherwise they would have assuredly been attacked, and +the whole of the wounded massacred by the Spanish peasants. + +The force then broke up again, each column taking as much flour and +meat as the men could carry. The remaining waggons and stores were +heaped together, and set on fire. + +Long before this was done, they had been rejoined by Ryan and his +command. He had remained guarding the river until the French had +disappeared up the valley, and had then crossed at the ford but, +though using all haste, he did not rejoin the force until the whole +of the fighting was over. + +"This has been a good day's work, Terence," he said when, that +evening, the force had entered Tordesillas and quartered themselves +there for the night. "You may be sure that the general at +Valladolid will send messengers to Salamanca, giving a greatly +exaggerated account of our force; and begging them to send down to +Marmont, at once, for a large reinforcement. If the couriers make a +detour, in the first place, we shall not be able to cut them off." + +"No, Dick, and we wouldn't, if we could. I have no doubt that he +will report the force with which his column was engaged as being +nearly double what it really is. Besides, sharp as we have been, I +expect some messengers will, by this time, have got through from +Zamora. The commandant there will report that a large force is in +the neighbourhood of that town; and that, without leaving the place +entirely undefended, he has not strength enough to sally out +against them. They cannot know that this force and ours have joined +hands in the attack on the Valladolid column, nor that this +represented anything like the whole of the force that have been +harrying the country and cutting off detached posts. The fact, too, +that this gathering was not a mere collection of guerillas, or of +the revolted peasantry; but that there were regular troops among +them, in considerable numbers, will have a great effect; and +Marmont will feel himself obliged, when he gets the news, to send +some fifteen or twenty thousand troops up here to clear the +country. + +"Now, the first thing to do is to draw up a report of the +engagement, and to send it off to Wellington. I think that it will +be a good thing, Dick, for you to carry it yourself. I don't think +that there is any fear of your being interrupted on your way to +Miranda, and as an officer you will be able to get fresh horses, +and take the news quicker than an orderly could do; and it is of +great importance that the chief should know, as soon as possible, +what has taken place here. I shall speak very strongly of your +services during the past week, and it is always a good thing for an +officer selected to carry the news of a success; and lastly, you +can give a much better account of our operations, since we crossed +the frontier, than an orderly could do, and Wellington may want to +send orders back for our future work." + +"I am game," Ryan said, "and thank you for the offer. How long will +you be?" + +"Well, it is eight o'clock now, and if you start at midnight it +will be soon enough; so if you have finished your supper, you had +better lie down on that bed in the next room and get a sleep; for +you were marching all last night, and will want some rest before +starting on such a journey." + + + +Chapter 15: Dick Ryan's Capture. + + +Terence wrote two despatches, one giving a full account of the +engagement, the other a detail of the work that had been performed +since they crossed the frontier. He wrote them in duplicate, so +that he might send off another messenger, three hours later; in +case, by any chance, Ryan failed to reach Miranda. He carefully +abstained from giving any real account of the strength of the +various columns, in each case putting the number at five times +their actual strength so that, if the despatches should miscarry, +not only would no information be conveyed to the French, but they +would be led to believe that the invading force was vastly stronger +than they had hitherto supposed. Ryan was, of course, to explain, +when he delivered the despatches, that the figures must in all +cases be divided by five, and the reason why false numbers had been +inserted. + +Terence let him sleep until one o'clock, and then roused him. +Several French horses had been found, straying riderless along the +valley; and the best of these was picked out for him. A few minutes +later, Dick was on his way to Miranda. The road by which he was to +travel would take him some six miles south of Zamora, and the +distance to be ridden was between fifty and sixty miles. He knew +that he could not do this at a gallop, and went along at a steady +pace, sometimes trotting and sometimes cantering. It was now late +in September and, at half-past five, it was still dark when Ryan +approached the spot where the road he was following crossed the +main road between Zamora and Salamanca. + +He was riding at a canter, when suddenly, to his surprise and +consternation, he rode into the midst of a body of cavalry, halted +on the main road. The sound of his horse's feet had been heard and, +before he could even draw his sword, he was seized and taken +prisoner. A French officer rode down the line. + +"What is the matter?" he asked. + +"We have taken a prisoner, sir," the sergeant answered. "We heard +him coming by this crossroad, and seized him as he rode in among +us. He is a soldier--an officer, I should think, from what I can +see of him." + +"Who are you, sir?" the French officer said to Ryan. + +The latter saw that concealment was useless. It would soon be light +enough for his scarlet uniform to be seen. He therefore replied, in +broken French: + +"My name is Ryan. I hold the rank of captain. I was riding to +Miranda when, unfortunately, I fell in with your troopers as they +were halted. I did not hear and, of course, could not see them +until I was among them." + +[Illustration: 'Search him at once.'] + +"Riding with despatches, no doubt," the officer said. "Search him +at once, men. He might destroy them." + +"Here they are, sir," Ryan said, taking the despatches from inside +his jacket. "You need not have me searched. I give you my word of +honour, as a British officer, that I have no others on me." + +"Put him in the middle of the troop, sergeant," the officer said. +"Put a trooper in special charge of him, on each side. Unbuckle his +reins, and buckle them on to those of the troopers. Do you ride +behind him, and keep a sharp lookout upon him. It is an important +capture." + +Five minutes later, the squadron again started on their way south. +Ryan, after silently cursing his bad luck at having arrived at the +spot just as this body of cavalry were crossing, wondered what evil +fortune had sent them there, at that precise moment. He was not +long in arriving at a conclusion. The convoy of the French wounded +had arrived at Zamora, late in the evening; and the commandant, +thinking it likely that the enemy, who had hitherto blocked the +roads, might have concentrated for the attack on the column, had +decided upon sending off a squadron of cavalry to carry the +important news he had learned, from the wounded, of the defeat of +the column, five thousand strong, coming to his relief from +Valladolid. + +The party proceeded at a brisk trot, and, meeting with no +resistance, arrived at Salamanca by ten o'clock in the morning. The +officer in command at once rode with Ryan, the latter guarded by +four troopers, to the residence of the general. Leaving Dick with +his escort outside, he entered the house, and sent in his name, and +the duty with which he was charged, to the general. He was at once +shown into his room. + +"I congratulate you on having got through, Captain D'Estrelles," +the general said, as he entered. "It is ten days since we heard +from Zamora. We have sent off six messengers, I don't know whether +any of them have arrived." + +"No, sir, none of them. The commandant sent off one or two, every +day; and I suppose they, like those you sent, were all stopped." + +"The whole country seems on fire," the general said. "We have had +five or six parties come in here disarmed, who had been captured by +the enemy; and it would seem that all our posts on the road to +Zamora, and on that to Valladolid, have been captured. The men +could only report that they were suddenly attacked by such +overwhelming forces that resistance was impossible. They say that +the whole country seems to swarm with guerillas, but there are +certainly a considerable number of regular troops among them. What +has happened at Zamora?" + +"These despatches will inform you, sir; but I may tell you that we +are virtually beleaguered. The country round swarms with the enemy. +Two or three reconnaissances in force met with the most determined +opposition." + +"Are you in communication with Valladolid?" + +"No, sir. Our communications were stopped at the same time as those +to this town; but I am sorry to say that you will see, by the +general's despatch, that a severe disaster has happened to the +column coming from Valladolid to our relief." + +The general took the despatch and rapidly perused its contents. + +"A column five thousand strong, with cavalry and guns, repulsed! +The enemy must be in force, indeed. From the estimates we have +received from prisoners they released, I thought they must be fully +ten thousand strong. I see that the wounded who were sent by Moras +estimate those engaged with him at twelve thousand; and it is +hardly probable that they could, at such short notice, have +assembled in anything like their full strength." + +"I have also to report, general, that we, this morning before +daybreak, captured a British officer on his way to Miranda, with +despatches. We were fortunately halted for the moment, so that he +was unaware of our presence until he rode into the midst of us. +These are his despatches. I have not opened them." + +"It is an important capture, indeed," the general said; "that is, +if the report contains details of the fighting. Its contents may +enable us to form a clearer idea than we can, at present, of their +numbers." + +He broke the seal and read the account of the battle. + +"It is signed T. O'Connor, colonel," he said. "The name is +well-known to us as that of a very active partisan leader. Three of +the columns appear to have been commanded by British officers. Here +we have them: Major Bull, Major Macwitty, and Captain Ryan." + +"It is Captain Ryan whom we have made prisoner, sir." + +"Their dispositions appear to have been good, and ably worked out. +The bridge across the river had been destroyed, and our crossing +was opposed by one column. While we were attempting to force the +passage, three more columns attacked us, one on each flank and +rear; while a fourth, composed of a portion of the force defending +the passage who, as soon as we were fairly engaged with the other +columns, crossed the ford lower down, leaving a thousand men to +face us on the river bank, advanced against our left. Finding +themselves thus greatly outnumbered, the column fell back, leaving +behind them some five hundred dead and wounded. Their passage was +closed by the enemy, who had broken down some bridges and thrown a +breastwork across the valley; but after sharp fighting they made +their way through." + +He then turned to the other despatch. + +"This is still more useful," he said. "It is a general report of +their proceedings since they crossed the frontier, and gives the +number of each column. They total up to twenty-five thousand men; +of which some ten thousand seem to be regular troops, the rest +guerillas." + +"Do you wish to see the prisoner, sir? He is waiting with the +guard, outside." + +"Yes, I might as well see him though, as a point of fact, he can +give us no more information than that contained in these reports, +which are very full and detailed." + +"So, sir," he said when Ryan was brought in, "you are a British +officer." + +"I am, sir," Dick replied quietly. "At present on detached duty, +serving on the staff of Colonel O'Connor." + +"Who is with the guerilla chief, Moras," the general said. + +"Yes, sir. The troops under Colonel O'Connor have been acting in +concert with Moras, and other forces; much to the advantage of such +of your soldiers as fell into our hands, not one of whom has +suffered insult or injury; and all have been permitted to go free, +after being deprived of their arms. Colonel O'Connor also sent away +all the French wounded who fell into our hands after the battle, in +waggons, escorted by a strong body of his troops to within a mile +of Zamora; in order to protect them from massacre by the peasants." + +"He behaved, sir, as a British officer would be expected to +behave," the general said warmly. "Were the war always conducted on +the same principle, it would be better for both armies and for the +people of this country. I will place you on parole, if you choose." + +"I thank you, General, but I would rather have my hands free, +should I see any opportunity of escaping." + +"That you are not likely to do," the general said, "for if you +refuse to be bound by your parole, I must take measures against +your having any of these opportunities that you speak of, until the +country is cleared and you can be sent with a convoy to France. I +am sorry that you refuse but, as I should do so myself, under +similar circumstances, I cannot blame you." + +Accordingly, Ryan was taken to a strong prison in the heart of the +city; where, however, he was assigned comfortable quarters, a +sentry being placed at his door and, as the window that looked into +the courtyard was strongly barred, his chances of escape seemed +slight, indeed; and he was almost inclined to regret that he had +not accepted the general's offer, and given his parole not to +attempt to escape. + +Two days later one of Moras's men, who belonged to Salamanca, went +into the town to see some friends, and brought back the news that a +British officer had been captured by a party of French dragoons, +coming from Zamora. He had been seen by many of the townspeople as +he sat on his horse, with four troopers round him, at the door of +the governor's house. He had been lodged in the city prison. A +comparison of dates showed that there could be no doubt that the +prisoner was Dick Ryan, and Terence was greatly vexed at his loss. + +"So far as the despatches go," he said to Herrara--who had, on the +day before, arrived from their stronghold, which was now safe from +attack, "there can be no doubt that it is fortunate rather than +otherwise that they have fallen into the hands of the French; for +they will give them an altogether exaggerated impression of our +strength, and I have no doubt that the orderly who left, two hours +later, has got through in safety. Still, I am greatly annoyed that +Ryan has been made prisoner. I miss his services and companionship +very much and, if I can possibly get him out, I will do so. I will +see Moras, and ask him to send the man who brought the news back +again, to gather further particulars. I would take the matter in +hand myself but, being in command here, I must consider the duty +with which I am intrusted before a question of private friendship." + +Moras presently came in to see Terence and, when the latter told +him what he wanted, he undertook at once to obtain every detail +possible as to the place of Ryan's confinement. + +"A number of my men come from the town," he said, "and I will cause +inquiries to be made among them, at once; and choose half a dozen, +with connections who may be able to assist, and send them into +Salamanca; with instructions to act in concert, to ascertain +whether it is possible to do anything by bribery, to endeavour to +communicate with the prisoner, and to devise some plan for his +escape from the gaol. + +"It was a strong place before the French came. It was the city +prison; but they took it over, and have used it not only for +prisoners of war, but for persons suspected of being in +communication with your people, and even for officers of their own +army who have been convicted of insubordination or disobedience of +orders, or other offences. One of the men I will send, and to whom +I shall intrust the general arrangement of the matter, is one of my +lieutenants, Leon Gonzales. He has been a friend of mine since +boyhood, and entered as a law student when I went into the college +for divinity. He is daring and fearless. He has an excellent head, +and a large acquaintance among the young men at the university and, +indeed, in all classes of society. He belongs to one of our best +families." + +"Yes, of course I know him," Terence said. "He has several times +come with you, when you have ridden over; and was in command of the +detachment that was with me, when we captured the French garrison +at Tordesillas. I was much pleased with him and, although too +occupied to see much of him, I conceived a great liking for him. I +should say that he is just the man to manage this business +successfully, if it is possible to do so." + +"At all events, I will despatch him with six other men, whom he may +choose himself, this afternoon," Moras said. "I had intended him to +remain in command of the party we leave here when we march, +tonight; but I will hand that over to another." + +That night the force, with the exception of 500 guerillas and as +many of the Minho regiment, marched away from the station they +occupied to take up a new position, between Valladolid and +Valencia. Herrara was to remain behind, in command of the 500 +Portuguese. These, in conjunction with the guerillas, were to +occupy their old positions; stopping all lines of communication, +showing themselves in villages and towns hitherto unvisited and, +divided into parties of two or three hundred, march rapidly about +the country, so that the fact that the main body had moved +elsewhere should be unknown to the French authorities, who would +therefore believe that the force that was to cut the road north of +Valladolid was a newly-arrived one. + +Thirty-six hours later Terence, with a battalion and a half of his +regiment and 1500 of Moras's guerillas, took up their position in +the mountains lying to the east of Valencia, between the rivers +Esqueva and Arlanza. From this position they could, with equal +facility, come down on the road between Valladolid and Valencia, or +between the latter town and Burgos. Here for some weeks they +maintained themselves, in the first place falling upon convoys from +Valladolid south and, when these only moved forward under escorts +too strong to be attacked, carrying on their operations on the road +to Burgos. In these raids they obtained an abundance of provisions, +a considerable number of arms and much ammunition and, in two or +three instances, a large amount of treasure that was being taken +forward for the payment of the troops. + +The provisions and wine were amply sufficient for the support of +the force. Half the money was set aside for future needs, being +divided between the regimental chest of Moras and that of the Minho +regiment. The other half was similarly divided as prize money among +the men, a proportion being sent down to Herrara, for his command. + +The operations of the band caused immense annoyance and difficulty +to the French. It was no longer possible to travel by the main road +from France between Burgos and Valladolid, and thence down to +Salamanca or Zamora, without the convoys being accompanied by +strong bodies of troops. Several incursions into the mountains were +organized from Burgos, which was always a great military centre, +aided by detachments from Valencia; but these met with no success +whatever. On entering the passes they were assailed by a heavy fire +from invisible foes. Great rocks were rolled down upon them; and +when, after much loss, they succeeded in forcing their way up to +the hills, no traces of their foe could be discovered. + +As among Moras's guerillas were natives of both Burgos and +Valencia, and these had put themselves in communication with their +friends, the band was kept well informed of every movement of the +French, and received early intelligence when a convoy, or an +expedition into the hills, was on the point of setting out, and of +the exact strength of the military force employed. They were, +therefore, always prepared either to sally out for an attack on the +convoy, or to oppose an expedition as soon as it entered the +mountains. Their stores were hidden away among rocks, being divided +into several portions so that, should the French by fortune or +treachery discover one of these, the loss would not cripple them. + +Their greatest enemy was cold. It was now the end of October, and +several times snow had fallen, and it was necessary to keep up +large fires. This was a double inconvenience. In the first place, +the smoke by day and the flames by night might betray the position +of their camp; and in the second place, their tracks in the snow, +which would speedily cover the hills, would enable the enemy to +follow them wherever they moved. It was therefore determined that +they could no longer maintain their position there, but must return +to the plains. + +Frequent communication had been kept up with Herrara, who reported +that Salamanca was now occupied by so large a force that he was no +longer able to maintain his position; and that he had fallen back +across the Douro, and had established himself in the stronghold, +from which he made frequent excursions towards Zamora and +Benavente. + +To Dick Ryan, in his prison, the first fortnight had passed slowly. +That Terence would, as soon as he learned of his capture, make +every effort to free him he knew well; but he could not see how he +could give him any material aid. The French force at Salamanca was +far too strong to admit of a possibility of any attempt to rescue +him by force, and the barred windows and the sentry seemed to close +every chance of communication from without. On the tenth day of his +imprisonment, he noticed that the sergeant who brought his food had +been changed. + +"What has become of Sergeant Pipon?" he asked the non-commissioned +officer who filled his place. + +"He was killed yesterday evening, in the streets," the man replied. +"It was not an ordinary broil, for he had half-a-dozen dagger +stabs. It is some time since those dogs of Spaniards have killed a +French soldier in the town, and there is a great fuss over it. The +municipality will have to pay 10,000 dollars, if they cannot +produce his murderer. It is curious, too, for Pipon was not a man +to get drunk. He did not speak a word of the language, and +therefore could not have had a dispute with a Spaniard. + +"We have been ordered to be more vigilant than before. I suppose +the authorities think that perhaps there was some attempt to bribe +him and, on his seizing the man who made it, some of the fellow's +comrades rushed upon him, and killed him." + +Ryan wondered whether the supposition was a correct one, and +whether the men concerned had been set at work by Terence, in order +to effect his release. Two days later, on cutting the loaf that +formed his day's ration of bread, he found a small piece of paper +in its centre. It had evidently been put there before the bread was +baked for, although he examined it very closely, he could find no +sign in the crust of an incision by which the note might have been +inserted. It contained only the words: + +"Keep your eyes open, and be in readiness. Friends are working for +your release." + +So Terence was at work. Evidently the baker had been gained over, +but how it had been contrived that this special loaf should have +been handed to him he could not imagine; unless one of the men in +charge of the distribution of the prison rations had been bribed. +That something of the sort must have taken place he was certain +and, although he was still unable to imagine how he could be got +out of the prison, he felt that, in some way or another, Terence +would manage it. He thought over the means by which the latter had +escaped from the convent, but the laxity that had there prevailed, +in allowing people to come in to sell their goods to the prisoners, +was not permitted in the prison where he was confined. The +prisoners were, indeed, allowed to take exercise for an hour in the +courtyard, but no civilian ever entered it, and twelve French +soldiers watched every movement of those in the yard, and did not +permit a single word to be exchanged. + +Another week passed, and Ryan began to fear that his friends +outside had abandoned the scheme as impossible, when one day he +received another message: + +"Do not undress tonight. On reaching the courtyard, take the first +passage to the right. Follow it to the end. The bars of the window +there have been nearly sawn through. Inclosed with this is a saw. +Finish the work on the middle bars. You will find a cord hanging +down outside. Friends will be awaiting you." + +With the note was a very fine steel saw, coiled round and round, +and a tiny phial of oil. Ryan gave a cry of delight as he read it; +and then hid the saw and the oil bottle in his bed, made up the +tiny note into a pellet, and swallowed it. As he ate his dinner, he +pondered over how so much could have been managed. The courtyard of +the prison was, he knew, some ten feet higher than the ground +outside. Some one must, after nightfall, have climbed up to the +passage window and sawn the bars almost asunder, with a saw as fine +as the one he had received. The cuts could hardly have been +perceptible, and had probably been filled in with dust or black +lead, each night, after the work was done. The difficulty must have +been great, for he had learned that sentries patrolled the street +outside the prison, and the work could only have been carried on +for two or three minutes at a time. How he was to get down to the +courtyard he knew not, but probably a sentry had been found more +amenable to a bribe than the old sergeant had been. + +To his bitter disappointment the night passed without anything +unusual taking place, and the scheme had evidently failed. He broke +up his loaf eagerly the next morning; and found, as he expected, +another message: + +"Authorities suspicions. Sentries changed. Must wait till vigilance +subsides. Keep yourself in readiness." + +A fortnight passed; and then, in the middle of the night, he leapt +suddenly from the bed on which he had thrown himself, without +undressing, as he heard the key grating in the door. For a minute +or two the sound continued, and his heart sank again. + +"They have got a key, but it won't fit," he muttered. + +Suddenly he heard the bolt shoot back, and the door quietly opened. + +"Are you ready?" a voice asked in a whisper. + +"Quite ready." + +"Then follow me." + +Ryan had caught up his boots as he leapt from the bed. The man +outside had evidently taken the precaution to remove his, for his +step was perfectly noiseless. Dick followed him downstairs and out +into the courtyard. He could then see that the man was not, as he +had expected, in uniform; but wore a long cloak and a sombrero, +like those in general use among the peasantry. He turned in at the +passage that had been indicated to Ryan, and stopped at the grated +opening at the end. + +Ryan at once took out the saw, poured some oil on it, and passed +his nail down the bar until he found a fine nick. Clearing this out +with the saw, he began to cut. The task was far easier than he had +expected, for the bar had been already almost sawn through and, in +five minutes, the cut was completed. A couple of feet higher up he +found the other incision, and completed it as quietly as before. +Then he removed the piece cut out, and handed it to the man, who +laid it quietly down on the pavement of the passage. + +In ten minutes the other bar was removed. + +"I have the cord," the man said, and unwound some ten feet of stout +rope from his waist. + +Ryan put his head out through the hole, and looked down. In the +darkness he could see nothing, but he heard the heavy tread of two +sentries. As the sound of their footsteps faded away in the +distance, he heard a sudden exclamation and a slight movement and, +a few seconds later, a voice below asked in a whisper: + +"Are you there?" + +"Yes," Ryan replied joyfully. + +Putting a noose which was at one end of the rope over the stump of +one of the bars, he at once slid down. A moment later, the other +man descended after him. + +"This way, senor," the voice said and, taking his hand, led him +across the street; and then, after a quarter of a mile's walk, +stopped at the door of a large house. He opened this with a key, +and led the way up the stairs to the second floor; opened another +door, and said: + +"Enter, senor, you are at home." + +Ryan had noticed that the man who had released him had not followed +them, but had turned away as soon as they left the prison. + +"You are most welcome, senor," his guide said as, opening another +door, he led the way into a handsome apartment, where a lamp was +burning on the table. + +"First let me introduce myself," he said. "My name is Alonzo +Santobel, by profession an advocate. I am a friend of Don Leon +Gonzales, one of Moras's officers, whom I believe you know. He will +be here in a minute or two. He has followed us at a distance, to be +sure that we were not watched. He enlisted me in this enterprise, +and I have gladly given my assistance, which indeed was confined to +bringing you here. All the rest he has managed himself, with the +aid of six of his men who accompanied him here. He has been longer +over it than he had expected, but we had difficulties that we did +not anticipate." + +He spoke in French, but added: "I understand sufficient Portuguese +to follow anything that you say, senor." + +"I am indeed grateful to you all," Ryan said warmly. "It is good of +you, indeed, to run so great a risk for a stranger." + +"Not exactly a stranger, senor, since you are a friend of my +friend, Leon Gonzales." + +At this moment the door of the room opened, and the officer named +entered and warmly shook hands with Ryan, and congratulated him +cordially on his release. + +"Thanks to you, senor," Dick said gratefully. + +"It has been a matter of duty, as well as pleasure," the other +replied courteously; "for Moras committed the task of freeing you +to my hands." + +"I have just been telling Senor Ryan," the other said, "that you +found it somewhat more difficult than you expected." + +"Yes, indeed. In the first place, my face is known to so many here +and, unhappily, so many Spaniards are friends of the French, that I +dared not show myself in the streets, in the daytime. And before I +tell my story, Alonzo, please open a bottle of wine, and produce a +box of cigars. Our friend has not had a chance of a decent smoke +since he has been shut up. + +"Now, senor, I will tell you all about it," he went on, as soon as +the glasses were filled and the cigars lighted. "In the first +place, one of the men with me has a cousin who works for the baker +who contracts for the supply of bread to the prison and, +fortunately, it was one of his duties to go with the bread, to hand +it over and see it weighed. That simplified affairs amazingly. In +the next place, it was necessary to get hold of the soldier who +usually handed the bread to the non-commissioned officers, who each +took the rations for the prisoners under their special charge. I +had been well provided with money and, when the soldier came out +one evening, I got into conversation with him. He assented +willingly enough to my offer to have a bottle of good wine +together. Then I opened the subject. + +"'I believe you distribute the bread rations to the prisoners?" I +said. + +"He nodded. + +"'I want one special loaf which is rather better bread than the +rest, though it looks the same, to reach a prisoner who is a friend +of mine. It may be that I shall want two or three such loaves to +reach him, and I will not mind paying a hundred francs for each +loaf.' + +"'A hundred francs is a good sum,' he said, 'especially as our pay +is generally some months in arrear; and there can be no harm in a +prisoner getting one loaf, more than another. But how am I to know +which is the loaf?' + +"'It will be the last the baker's man will deliver to you, my +friend. He will give you a wink as he hands it to you, and you will +only have to put it on the tray intended for the English prisoner, +Ryan, when the sergeant comes down to the kitchen for it. But mind, +don't make any mistake and put it on the wrong tray.' + +"'I will be careful,' the soldier said, 'and I don't mind how many +loaves you send in, at the same price.' + +"'Very well,' I said. 'Here are the hundred francs for the first +loaf, which will come not tomorrow morning, but the day after.' + +"So that part of the business was arranged easily enough; but +another attempt, which I had set on foot at the same time, had +already failed. My men had discovered who was the sergeant under +whose charge you were. He was an old soldier, and I had my doubts +whether he could be bribed. One of the men who spoke a little +French undertook it, but took the precaution of having three of the +others near him, when he attempted it. It was two or three evenings +before he could get speech with him in a quiet place, but he +managed at last to do so. + +"'Sergeant,' he said, 'do you want to earn as much money, in a day, +as your pay would amount to in a year?' + +"'It depends how it would have to be earned,' the sergeant said +cautiously. + +"'We want to get a friend of ours out of that prison,' the man +said, 'and would pay a thousand francs for your assistance.' + +"The sergeant at once grasped him by the throat. + +"'You attempt to bribe me!' he exclaimed. 'Parbleu! we will hear +what the governor says about it;' and he began to drag him along. + +"There was nothing to be done, and the three other men, who had +been standing hidden in a doorway, ran out and poniarded the +Frenchman before he had time to give the alarm. It was unfortunate, +but it was unavoidable. + +"However, two days later the loaf got safely to you; at least we +were assured that it had done so, by the soldier in the kitchen. In +the meantime I learned from a man who had been a warder in the +prison, before the French took possession of it, that the passage +close to the bottom of your staircase terminated at the barred +window in the street behind. Two of my men undertook to cut the +bars. It was no easy matter, for there were sentries outside, and +one came along the back every two or three minutes. The men had a +light ladder and, directly he had passed, ran across the street, +placed it in position, and fell to work. But the constant +interferences by the passing of the sentinel annoyed them, and +greatly hindered the work. + +"You see, the sentry had to patrol the lane down one side of the +prison, then along behind, and back; so they had only the time +taken by him from the corner to the end of the lane, and back, to +work. They were so annoyed at this that one night, when the sentry +came to be relieved, he was found stabbed to the heart and, as this +misfortune happened just after he went on duty, the men managed to +file one of the bars that night. Curiously enough, the same +accident happened two nights later; just as I had arranged, with a +Spaniard who had enlisted in the French army, that he would aid you +to escape. He was a sharp fellow, and had managed to get the key of +your room from the peg where it hung, and to take an impression of +it in wax, from which we had a key made. + +"Everything was now ready. The other bar was sawn on, the night the +accident happened to the second sentry. The next night the Spaniard +was to be on guard on your staircase, and I sent you a loaf with a +message to be in readiness. Unfortunately, the second accident +aroused the suspicion of the authorities that these affairs had +something to do with the escape of a prisoner. Accordingly, the +sentries outside were doubled, two men patrolling together and, +that evening, the guards were suddenly changed. + +"It was evident that, for a time, nothing could be done. For nearly +a fortnight this dodging about of the guard continued; then, as all +was quiet, things went back to their old course. Four sentries were +taken off, the others going about two together, each pair taking +two sides of the prison. This morning my Spaniard who, as he was on +duty at night, was able to come out into the town early, told the +man who had arranged the affair with him that he would be on night +duty; and would manage to take his place among the guards so that, +when they arrived at your door, he should be the one to be left +there. As the bread had been already sent in, I had no opportunity +to warn you." + +"I suppose the Spanish soldier you bribed has deserted?" + +"Certainly. There was nothing else for him to do. He had that long +cloak under his military greatcoat, and the sombrero flattened +inside it so that, before opening your door, he had only to stand +his musket in the corner, laying his greatcoat and shako by it, and +he was in a position to go through the streets, anywhere, as a +civilian. He has been well paid and, as he was already heartily +tired of the French service, he jumped at the offer we made him." + +After chatting for some time longer, and obtaining some more +details of the proceedings of the rescue party, Ryan and Gonzales +lay down for a few hours' sleep on the couches in the room; while +their host turned into his bed, which he had vainly attempted to +persuade one or other to accept. + + + +Chapter 16: Back With The Army. + + +Ryan remained four days in the flat occupied by Don Alonzo +Santobel. Leon Gonzales had left, before daybreak, to regain the +house where he was staying, with one of his friends, before the +discovery of the escape of a prisoner was made. The affair was +certain to cause great excitement, and there was no doubt that +everyone leaving the town would be strictly examined at the gates +and, not improbably, every house would be searched, and an order +issued that no one would be allowed to be out at night, after ten +o'clock, without a military pass. Three soldiers had been in turn +assassinated, and one had deserted, a prisoner had been released; +and there were evidently several persons concerned in the matter, +and it would not improbably be guessed, by the authorities, that +the actors in the plot were agents of the British officer in +command of the troops that had given them such trouble over the +whole province between Burgos and Salamanca. + +Don Alonzo gave his manservant, on whose fidelity he could rely, +permission to go into the country for ten days to visit his +relations; and Ryan was installed in his place, and dressed in a +suit of his clothes; but was not to open the door to visitors, the +Spaniard himself doing so, and mentioning to those who called that +his servant had gone on his holiday. The French, indeed, instituted +a strict search among the poorer quarters. But the men who had +accompanied Don Leon were all dressed as villagers, who had come +into the town from fear of being attacked by the guerillas and +their allies and, as the people with whom they stayed all vouched +for their story, and declared with truth that they were relatives, +none of them were molested. For four days all persons passing out +of the gates were examined but, at the end of that time, matters +resumed their ordinary course; and Don Leon and his followers all +quitted the town soon after the market closed, carrying with them +empty baskets, as if they were countrymen who had disposed of the +produce they had brought in. + +Clothes of the same kind were procured for Ryan and, the day after +his friends had left he, too, went through the gate, going out with +several peasants who were returning home. One of Leon's followers +had taken out his uniform in his basket; with a cloth thrown over +it, on which were placed some articles of crockery which he had +apparently bought for his use at home. Ryan had been carefully +instructed as to the road he should follow and, four miles out from +the city, he turned down a by-path. He kept on for a mile and a +half, and then came to a farmhouse, standing alone. As he +approached, Leon came out to meet him, and shook him warmly by the +hand. + +"I have been feeling very anxious about you," he said. "We got +through yesterday unquestioned, but the officer at the gate today +might have been a more particular sort of fellow, and might have +taken it into his head to question any of those who came out. The +others all went on at once, but we will keep quiet until nightfall. +I left my horse here when I came in; which I could do safely, for +the farm belongs to me, and the farmer has been our tenant for the +last thirty years. There is a horse for you here, also. + +"I have got the latest intelligence as to where the French are +lying. They have a strong force at Tordesillas; but this won't +matter to us, for I got a message from Moras, yesterday, saying +that the hills are now all covered with snow, and that the whole +force would march, today, for their old quarters in the valley near +Miranda. So we sha'n't have to cross the river to the north, but +will keep on this side and cross it at Miranda, or at some ford +near. The column that was operating round Zamora fell back behind +the Esla, a fortnight since; for four thousand of the French +reinforcements from the south had reached Zamora, and strong +parties of their cavalry were scouting over the whole of the +country round." + +Ryan had already heard how the road between Valladolid and Burgos +had been interrupted, and several convoys cut off and captured. He +was glad to find, however, that no serious fighting had taken place +while he had been a prisoner. + +After nightfall they started on their journey. They travelled sixty +miles that night. The farmer's son, a young fellow of twenty, who +knew the country thoroughly, accompanied them on horseback for the +first twenty miles, to set them on their way. The road they +followed ran almost parallel to the Tormes, all the bridges over +that river being, as they learned, held by strong parties of French +troops; posted there to prevent any bodies of the Spaniards +crossing it, and placing themselves between Salamanca and Ciudad +Rodrigo. + +When morning broke they were within five miles of the Douro, and +entered the wood where they intended to pass the day, as they were +unaware whether any French troops were stationed along the river. +Both were still dressed as countrymen, and Leon went in the +afternoon to a little hamlet, half a mile from the wood. There he +learned that 2000 French were encamped at a village, a mile from +the bridge at Miranda. But one of the peasants, on Leon's telling +him that he was a lieutenant of Moras, offered to guide them to a +ford, of whose existence he did not think the French were aware. + +It was seldom used, as it could only be forded in very dry seasons; +but as the water now was, it would only be necessary to swim their +horses a distance of a few yards. The two friends slept a great +part of the day and, as the sun set, finished the provisions they +had brought with them, and were ready to start when, two hours +later, their guide arrived from the village. His information proved +correct. He led them straight to the ford, which they found +unguarded and, rewarding him handsomely for his trouble, swam +across and, an hour later, entered Miranda and put up at a small +inn. + +They mounted early the next morning and, in the afternoon, after a +three hours' ride across the mountains, came down into the valley; +where their arrival excited much enthusiasm among the troops, the +garrison having been joined by Macwitty's column. + +"I cannot say that I was not expecting to see you, Captain Ryan," +Macwitty said, as he shook hands heartily; "for I heard, from the +colonel, that Don Leon had started with a party to try and get you +out of prison, and that he was sure he would accomplish it, if it +were at all possible. I am expecting him here in a day or two, with +the rest of the regiment; for I had a message two days ago from +him, saying that it was too cold to remain on the hills any longer, +and that he should start on the day after the messenger left. Of +course the messenger was mounted; but our men can march as far, in +a day, as a man can ride, and are sure to lose no time. They would +take the Leon road for some distance, then strike off and cross the +upper Esla at Maylorga, follow the road down, avoiding Benavente, +cross the Tera at Vega, take the track across the mountains, and +come down into the valley from above. He said that he should only +bring such stores as they would be able to carry on the march, and +that he hoped to get here before the French were aware that he had +left the mountains." + +Late in the afternoon Leon's followers arrived. They had travelled +at night, so as to avoid being questioned by the French cavalry, +who were scattered all over the country. Ryan was glad to see the +men who had risked so much for him, and very pleased to be able to +exchange his peasant's clothes for his uniform. The next morning, +he and Leon mounted and rode by the track by which Terence would +arrive, and met him halfway between Vega and the camp. The greeting +was a hearty one, indeed and, as Ryan shook hands with Moras, he +said: + +"I cannot tell you, senor, how much I am indebted to Don Leon for +the splendid way in which he managed my rescue. Nothing could have +been more admirably contrived, or better carried out. It certainly +seemed to me, after I had been there a day or two, that a rescue +was simply impossible; though I knew that Colonel O'Connor would do +his best to get me out, as soon as he learned that I was captured." + +"I gave you credit for better sense, Dick, than to ride right into +the hands of the French," Terence said, as he and Ryan rode on +together at the head of the column. + +"I think you would have done it yourself, Terence. The night was +dark, and I could not see ten yards ahead of me. If they had been +on the march, of course, I should have heard them; but by bad luck +they had halted just across the road I was following. It was very +fortunate that you put all the numbers wrong in your despatches, +and I can tell you it was a mighty comfort to me to know that you +had done so; for I should have been half mad at the thought that +they had got at your real strength, which would have entirely +defeated the object of our expedition. As it was, I had the +satisfaction of knowing that the capture of the despatches would do +more good than harm. + +"Did the man who followed me get through?" + +"Yes, he kept his eyes open, Dicky," Terence said. "He returned ten +days later, with a letter from the adjutant general, saying that +the commander-in-chief was highly satisfied with my reports; and +that the forward movement of the French had ceased and, at several +points, their advanced troops had been called in. Spies had brought +news that ten thousand men, under General Drouet, had marched for +Salamanca; and that reports were current in the French camp that a +very large force had crossed the frontier, at the northeastern +corner of Portugal, with the evident design of recovering the north +of Leon, and of cutting the main line of communication with France. + +"He added that he trusted that I should be able to still further +harass the enemy, and cause him to send more reinforcements. He +said that, doubtless, I should be very shortly driven back into +Portugal again; but that he left the matter entirely to my +judgment, but pointed out that, if I could but maintain myself for +another fortnight, the winter would be at hand; when the passes +would be blocked with snow, and Marmont could no longer think of +invading Portugal in force. As it is now more than a month since +that letter was written, and certainly further reinforcements have +arrived, I think the chief will be well satisfied with what we have +done. I have sent off two letters since then, fully reporting on +the work we have been at between Burgos and Valladolid; but whether +they have reached him, I cannot tell." + +"Macwitty has one despatch for you. He tells me it came nearly a +fortnight ago; but that he had, at that time, been compelled to +fall back behind the Esla; and that, as the country beyond swarmed +with parties of the French cavalry, he thought that no messenger +could get through, and that great harm might result were the +despatches to fall into the hands of the enemy." + +"Well, I daresay it will keep, Dick, and that no harm will have +been done by my not receiving it sooner. + +"Now, tell me all about your escape. Were you lodged in our old +convent?" + +"I had no such luck, Terence. I was in the city prison, in the +centre of the town; and my window, instead of looking out into the +street, was on the side of the courtyard. The window was strongly +barred, no civilians were allowed to enter the prison, and I think +that even you, who have a sort of genius for escapes, would have +found it, as I did, simply impossible to get away." + +"No, the lookout was certainly bad; and you had none of the +advantages we had, at Bayonne, of being guarded by friendly +soldiers. If I had, at Salamanca, not been able to make friends +with a Spanish girl-- + +"Well, tell me all about it." + +Ryan gave full details of the manner in which Don Gonzales had +contrived his escape. + +"That was well managed, indeed," Terence said. "Splendidly done. +Leon is a trump. He ought to have been born an Irishman, and to +have been in our regiment. I don't know that I can give him higher +praise than that." + +On their arrival in the valley, they found that another courier had +returned, half an hour before. Both despatches expressed the +commander-in-chief's extreme satisfaction with the manner in which +Terence had carried out his instructions. + +"The employment of your force in cutting the main road between +Valladolid and Valencia, and between the latter place and Burgos; +while at the same time you maintained a hold on the country south +of the Douro, thus blocking the roads from Salamanca both to Zamora +and Valladolid, was in the highest degree deserving of commendation. +The garrisons of all the towns named were kept in a state of constant +watchfulness, and so great was the alarm produced that another +division followed that of Drouet. This has paralyzed Marmont. As snow +has already begun to fall among the mountains, it is probable that he +will soon go into winter quarters. Your work, therefore, may be +considered as done and, as your position in the mountains must soon +become untenable, it would be well if you, at once, withdraw all your +forces into Portugal." + +Moras also received a despatch signed by Lord Wellington himself, +thanking him warmly for the services he had rendered. + +"I may say, sir, that yours is the first case, since I have had the +honour to command the British force in the Peninsula, that I have +received really valuable assistance from a body of irregular +troops; and that I am highly sensible of the zeal and ability which +you have shown in cooperating with Colonel O'Connor, a service +which has been of extreme value to my army. I must also express my +high gratification, not only with the conduct of the men under your +command when in action, but at the clemency shown to French +prisoners; a clemency, unfortunately, very rare during the present +war. I shall not fail to express, to the central Spanish +authorities, my high appreciation of your services. I have given +orders to the officer commanding the detachment of British troops +at Miranda that, should you keep your force together near the +frontier, he will, as far as possible, comply with any request you +may make for supplies for their use." + +Moras was highly gratified with this despatch. + +"I shall," he said, "stay in this valley for the winter; but I +shall not keep more than a hundred, or a hundred and fifty men with +me. The peasants will disperse to their homes. Those remaining with +me will be the inhabitants of the towns; who could not safely +return, as they might be denounced by the Spanish spies, in French +pay, as having been out with me. We have plenty of supplies stored +up here to last us through the winter." + +Terence at once sent off a report of his return, and an +acknowledgment of the receipt of the despatches from headquarters +and, the next day, in obedience to his orders, marched with his +regiment across the frontier, and established himself in Miranda. + +The answer came in five days. It was brief. + +"On receipt of this Colonel O'Connor will march, with the regiment +under his command, to Pinhel; and there report himself to General +Crawford." + +Terence had ridden over, the afternoon before, to the valley; where +he found that but two hundred of the guerillas remained. Fifty of +these were on the point of leaving, the rest would remain with +Moras through the winter. + +On arrival at Pinhel after three days' marching, he reported +himself to General Crawford. The general himself was absent but, +from the head of his staff, he received an order on the +quartermaster's department. Tents for his men were at once given +him, and a spot pointed out for their encampment. Six regiments +were, he heard, in the immediate neighbourhood; and among them he +found, to his great joy, were the Mayo Fusiliers. As soon as the +tents were erected, rations drawn, and a party despatched to obtain +straw for bedding from the quartermaster's department, Terence left +Herrara and the two majors to see that the troops were made +comfortable, and then rode over with Ryan to the camp of the +Fusiliers. + +They were received with the heartiest welcome by the colonel and +officers; in whose ranks, however, there were several gaps, for the +regiment had suffered heavily at Fuentes d'Onoro. + +"So you have been taken prisoner again, Terence!" Captain O'Grady +exclaimed; "sure, it must be on purpose you did it. Anyone may get +taken prisoner once; but when it happens twice, it begins to look +as if he was fonder of French rations than of French guns." + +"I didn't think of it in that light, O'Grady; but now you put it +so, I will try and not get caught for the third time." + +"We heard of your return, of course, and that you had gone straight +with your regiment to Miranda. We had a line from Dicky, the day +before he started; and mighty unkind we have thought it that neither +of you have sent us a word since then, and you with nothing to do at +all, at all; while we have been marching and countermarching, now +here and now there, now backwards and now forwards, ever since +Fuentes d'Onoro, till one's legs were ready to drop off one." + +"Give someone else a chance to put in a word, O'Grady," the colonel +said. "Here we are, all dying to know how O'Connor slipped through +the hands of the French again; and sorra a word can anyone get in, +when your tongue is once loosened. If you are not quiet, I will +take him away with me to my own quarters; and just ask two or three +men, who know how to hold their tongue, to come up and listen to +his story." + +"I will be as silent as a mouse, colonel dear," O'Grady said, +humbly; "though I would point out that O'Connor, being a colonel +like yourself, and in no way under your orders, might take it into +his head to prefer to stop with us here, instead of going with you. + +"Now, Terence, we are all waiting for your story. Why don't you go +on?" + +"Because, as you see, I am hard at work eating, just at present. We +have marched twenty miles this morning, with nothing but a crust of +bread at starting; and the story will keep much better than +luncheon." + +Terence did not hurry himself over his meal but, when he had +finished, he gave them particulars of his escape from Salamanca, +his journey down to Cadiz, and then round by Lisbon. + +"I thought there would be a woman in it, Terence," O'Grady +exclaimed. "With a soft tongue, and a presentable sort of face, and +impudence enough for a whole regiment, it was aisy for you to put +the comhether on a poor Spanish girl, who had never had the good +luck to meet an officer of the Mayo Fusiliers before. Sure, I have +always said to meself that, if I was ever taken prisoner, it would +not be long before some good-looking girl would take a fancy to me, +and get me out of the French clutches. Sure, if a young fellow like +yourself, without any special recommendations except a bigger share +of impudence than usual, could manage it; it would be aisy, indeed, +for a man like meself, with all the advantages of having lost an +arm in battle, to get round them." + +There was a shout of laughter round the table, for O'Grady had, as +usual, spoken with an air of earnest simplicity, as if the +propositions he was laying down were beyond question. + +"You must have had a weary time at Miranda, since you came back, +O'Connor," the colonel said, "with no one there but a wing of the +65th." + +"I don't suppose they were to be pitied, colonel," Doctor +O'Flaherty laughed. "You may be sure that they kept Miranda lively, +in some way or other. Trust them for getting into mischief of some +sort." + +"There is no saying what we might have done if we had, as you +suppose, been staying for the last two months at Miranda; but in +point of fact that has not been the case. We have been across the +frontier, and have been having a pretty lively time of it--at least +I have, for Dick has spent a month of it inside a French prison." + +"What!" the major exclaimed, "were you with that force that has +been puzzling us all, and has been keeping the French in such hot +water that, as we hear, Marmont was obliged to give up his idea of +invading Portugal, and had to hurry off twenty thousand men, to +save Salamanca and Valladolid from being captured? Nobody has been +able to understand where the army sprung from, or how it was +composed. The general idea was that a division from England must +have landed, at either Oporto or Vigo, or that it must have been +brought round from Sicily; for none of our letters or papers said a +word about any large force having sailed from England. Not a soul +seemed to know anything about it. I know a man on Crawford's staff, +and he assured me that none of them were in the secret. + +"A French officer, who was brought in a prisoner a few days since, +put their numbers down at twenty-five thousand, at least; +including, he said, a large guerilla force. He said that Zamora had +been cut off for a long time, that the country had been ravaged, +and posts captured almost at the gates of Salamanca; and that +communications had been interrupted, and large convoys captured +between Burgos and Valladolid; and that one column, five thousand +strong, had been very severely mauled, and forced to fall back. +This confirmed the statements that we had before heard, from the +peasantry and the French deserters. Now there is a chance of +penetrating the mystery, which has been a profound puzzle to us +here, and indeed to the whole army. + +"The officer taken seemed to consider that the regular soldiers +were Portuguese; but of course that was nonsense. Beresford's +troops were all with him down south and, as to any other Portuguese +army, unless Wellington has got one together as secretly as he got +up the lines of Torres Vedras, the thing is absurd. Besides, who +had ever heard of Portuguese carrying on such operations as these, +without having a lot of our men to stiffen them, and to set them a +good example?" + +Terence did not, at once, answer. Looking round the table he saw +that, in place of the expressions of amusement with which the +previous conversation had been listened to, there was now, on every +face, a deep and serious interest. He glanced at Ryan, who was +apparently absorbed in the occupation of watching the smoke curling +up from his cigar. At last he said: + +"I fear, major, that I cannot answer your question. I may say that +I have had no specific orders to keep silence but, as it seems that +the whole matter has been kept a profound secret, I do not think +that, unless it comes out in some other way, I should be justified +in saying anything about it. + +"I think that you will agree with me, Ryan." + +Dick nodded. + +"Yes, I agree with you that it would be best to say nothing about +it, till we hear that the facts are known. What has been done once, +may be done again." + +"Quite so, Dick. I am glad that you agree with me. + +"However, there can be no objection to your giving an account of +your gallant charge into the middle of the French cavalry, and the +story of your imprisonment and escape. + +"I am sure, colonel, that it will be a source of gratification to +you, to know that one of your officers dashed, single handed, right +into the midst of a French squadron." + +Ryan laughed. + +"I am afraid the interest in the matter will be diminished, +colonel, when I mention that the charge was executed at night, and +that I was ignorant of the vicinity of the French until I rode into +the middle of them." + +There was again a general laugh. + +"I was on my way with despatches for Lord Wellington," he went on, +"when this unfortunate business happened." + +"That was unfortunate, indeed, Ryan," the colonel said. "They did +not capture your despatches, I hope?" + +"Indeed and they did, colonel. They had fast hold of me before I +could as much as draw my sword. They, however, gained very little +by them for, knowing that it was possible I might be captured, the +despatches had been so worded that they would deceive, rather than +inform, anyone into whose hands they might fall; though of course, +I had instructions to explain the matter, when I delivered them +safely." + +Then he proceeded to give a full account of his rescue from the +prison of Salamanca. This was listened to with great interest. + +"It was splendidly managed," the colonel said, when he had brought +his story to an end. "It was splendidly managed. Terence himself +could not have done it better. Well, you are certainly wonderfully +handy at getting into scrapes. Why, you have both been captured +twice, and both times got away safely. + +"When I gave you your commission, Terence, I thought that you and +Ryan would keep things alive; but I certainly did not anticipate +that you would be so successful, that way, as you have been." + +"I have had very little to do with it, colonel," Ryan said. + +"No, I know that at Athlone Terence was the ringleader of all the +mischief that went on. Still, you were a good second, Ryan; that +is, if that position does not really belong to O'Grady." + +"Is it me, colonel?" O'Grady said, in extreme surprise, and looking +round the table with an air of earnest protest, "when I was always +lecturing the boys?" + +"I think, O'Grady, your manner of lecturing was akin to the +well-known cry: + +"'Don't throw him into the pond, boys.'" + +At this moment there was a sound of horses drawing up in front of +the house. + +"It is the general and his staff," one of the ensigns said, as he +glanced through the window. + +The table had been cleared, but there was a sudden and instant rush +to carry away bottles and glasses to hiding places. Newspapers were +scattered along the table and, when the door opened half a minute +later and the general entered, followed by his staff, the officers +of the Mayo Fusiliers presented an orderly and even studious +appearance. They all rose and saluted, as the general entered. + +"I hope I am not disturbing you, gentlemen," General Crawford said +gravely, but with a sly look of amusement stealing across his +rugged face; "I am glad to see you all so well employed. There is +no doubt that the Irish regiments are greatly maligned. On two or +three occasions, when I have happened to call upon their officers, +I have uniformly found them studying the contents of the +newspapers. Your cigars, too, must be of unusually good quality, +for their odour seems mingled with a faint scent of--what shall I +say? It certainly reminds me of whisky though, as I see, that must +be but fancy on my part. However, gentlemen, I have not come in to +inspect your mess room, but to speak to Colonel O'Connor," and he +looked inquiringly round. + +Terence at once stepped forward, and again saluted. The general, +whom Terence had not before met, looked him up and down, and then +held out his hand. + +"I have heard of you many times, Colonel O'Connor. General Hill has +talked to me frequently of you and, not long since, when I was at +headquarters, Lord Wellington himself spoke to me for some time +about you, and from his staff I learned other particulars. That you +were young, I knew; but I was not prepared to find one who might +well pass as a junior lieutenant, or even as an ensign. This was +the regiment that you formerly belonged to; and as, on sending +across to your corps, I learned that you were here, I thought it as +well to come myself to tell you, before your comrades and friends, +that I have received from headquarters this morning a request from +the adjutant general to tell you personally, when you arrived, the +extreme satisfaction that the commander-in-chief feels at the +services that you have rendered. + +"When I was at headquarters the other day, I was shown the reports +that you have, during the last six weeks, sent in; and am therefore +in a position to appreciate the work you have done. It is not too +much to say that you have saved Portugal from invasion, have +paralyzed the movements of the French, and have given to the +commander-in-chief some months in which to make his preparations +for taking the field in earnest, in the spring. + +"Has Colonel O'Connor told you what he has been doing?" he said +suddenly, turning to Colonel Corcoran. + +"No, general. In answer to our questions he said that, as it seemed +the matter had been kept a secret, he did not feel justified in +saying anything on the subject, until he received a distinct +intimation that there was no further occasion for remaining +silent." + +"You did well, sir," the general said, again turning to Terence, +"and acted with the prudence and discretion that has, with much +dash and bravery, distinguished your conduct. As, however, the +armies have now gone into winter quarters; and as a general order +will appear, today, speaking of your services, and I have been +commissioned purposely to convey to you Lord Wellington's approval, +there is no occasion for further mystery on the subject. + +"The force whose doings have paralyzed the French, broken up their +communications, and compelled Marmont to detach twenty thousand men +to assist at least an equal force in Salamanca, Zamora, Valladolid, +and Valencia, has consisted solely of the men of Colonel O'Connor's +regiment; and about an equal number of guerillas, commanded by the +partisan Moras. I need not tell you that a supreme amount of +activity, energy, and prudence, united, must have been employed +thus to disarrange the plans of a French general, commanding an +army of one hundred thousand men, by a band of two battalions of +Portuguese, and a couple of thousand undisciplined guerillas. It is +a feat that I, myself, or any other general in the British army, +might well be proud to have performed; and too much praise cannot +be bestowed upon Colonel O'Connor, and the three British officers +acting under his command; of all whose services, together with +those of his Portuguese officers, he has most warmly spoken in his +reports. + +"And now, colonel, I see that there are on your mess table some +dark rings that may, possibly, have been caused by glasses. These, +doubtless, are not very far away, and I have no doubt that, when I +have left, you will very heartily drink the health of your former +comrade--I should say comrades, for I hear that Captain Ryan is +among you. + +"Which is he?" + +Ryan stepped forward. + +"I congratulate you also, sir," he said. "Colonel O'Connor has +reported that you have rendered great services, since you were +attached to him as adjutant; and have introduced many changes which +have added to the efficiency and discipline of the regiment. My +staff, as well as myself, will be very pleased to make the personal +acquaintance of Colonel O'Connor and yourself, and I shall be glad +if you will both dine with me today-- + +"And if you, Colonel Corcoran, will accompany them. + +"Tomorrow I will inspect the Minho regiment, at eleven o'clock; and +you will then introduce to me your lieutenant colonel and your two +majors, who have all so well carried out your instructions." + +So saying, he shook hands with the colonel, Terence, and Ryan and, +with an acknowledgment of the salutes of the other officers, left +the room with his staff. + +"If a bullet does not cut short his career in some of his adventures," +he said to Colonel Corcoran, who had accompanied him, "O'Connor has an +extraordinary future before him. His face is a singular mixture of +good temper, energy, and resolute determination. There are many +gallant young officers in the army, but it is seldom that reckless +bravery and enterprise are joined, as in his case, with prudence and a +head to plan. He cannot be more than one-and-twenty, so there is no +saying what he may be, when he reaches forty. Trant is an excellent +leader, but he has never accomplished a tithe of what has been done by +that lad." + +The general having left the room, the officers crowded round +Terence. But few words were said, for they were still so surprised, +at what they had heard, as to be incapable of doing more than shake +him warmly by the hand, and pat him on the shoulder. Ryan came in +for a share in this demonstration. + +The colonel returned at once, after having seen the general ride +off. + +"Faith, Terence," he said, "if justice were done, they would make +me a general for putting you into the army. I have half a mind to +write to Lord Wellington, and put in a claim for promotion on that +ground. + +"What are you doing, O'Grady?" he broke off, as that officer walked +round and round Terence, scrutinizing him attentively, as if he had +been some unknown animal. + +"I am trying to make sure, colonel, that this is really Terence +O'Connor, whom I have cuffed many a time when he was a bit of a +spalpeen, with no respect for rank; as you yourself discovered, +colonel, in the matter of that bird he fastened in the plume of +your shako. He looks like him, and yet I have me doubts. + +"Is it yerself, Terence O'Connor? Will you swear to it on the +testiments?" + +"I think I can do that, O'Grady," Terence laughed. "You see, I have +done credit to your instructions." + +"You have that. I always told you that I would make a man of you, +and it is my instruction that has done it. + +"How I wish, lad," he went on, with a sudden change of voice, "that +your dear father had been here this day! Faith, he would have been +a proud man. Ah! It was a cruel bullet that hit him, at Vimiera." + +"Ay, you may well say that, O'Grady," the colonel agreed. + +"Have you heard from him lately, Terence?" + +"No, colonel. It's more than four months since I have had a letter +from him. Of course, he always writes to me to headquarters but, as +I only stopped there a few hours, on my way from Lisbon to join the +regiment, I stupidly forgot to ask if there were any letters for +me; and of course there has been no opportunity for them to be +forwarded to me, since. However, they will know in a day or two +that I have arrived here, and will be sure to send them on, at +once." + +"Now, let's hear all about it, O'Connor, for at present we have +heard nothing but vague rumours about the doings of this northern +army of yours, beyond what the general has just said." + +"But first, colonel, if you will permit me to say so," O'Grady put +in, "I would propose that General Crawford's suggestion, as to the +first thing to be done, should be carried out; and that the whisky +keg should be produced again. + +"We have a good stock, Terence, enough to carry us nearly through +the winter." + +"Then it must be a good stock, indeed, O'Grady," Terence laughed. +"You see, the general was too sharp for us." + +"That he was but, as a Scotchman, he has naturally a good nose for +whisky. He is a capital fellow. Hot tempered and obstinate as he +undoubtedly is, he is as popular with his division as any general +out here. They know that, if there is any fighting to be done, they +are sure to have their share and more and, except when roused, he +is cheery and pleasant. He takes a great interest in his men's +welfare, and does all that he can to make them as comfortable as +possible; though, as they generally form the advanced guard of the +army, they necessarily suffer more than the rest of us." + +By this time the tumblers were brought out, from the cupboards into +which they had been so hastily placed on the general's arrival. +Half a dozen black bottles were produced, and some jugs of water, +and Terence's health was drunk with all the honours. Three cheers +were added for Dicky Ryan, and then all sat down to listen to +Terence's story. + + + +Chapter 17: Ciudad Rodrigo. + + +"Before O'Connor begins," the colonel said, "you had better lay, on +the table in front of you, the pocket maps I got from Lisbon for +you last year, after O'Connor had lectured us on the advantages of +knowing the country. + +"I can tell you, Terence, they have been of no small use to us +since we left Torres Vedras; and I think that even O'Grady could +pass an examination, as to the roads and positions along the +frontier, with credit to himself. + +"I think, gentlemen, that you who have not got your maps with you +would do well to fetch them. You will then be able to follow +Colonel O'Connor's story, and get to know a good deal more about +the country where, I hope, we shall be fighting next spring, than +we should in any other way." + +Several of the officers left the room, and soon returned with their +maps. + +"I feel almost like a schoolmaster," Terence laughed. "But indeed, +as our work consisted almost entirely of rapid marching, which you +would scarcely be able to follow without maps, it may really be +useful, if we campaign across there, to know something of the +roads, and the position of the towns and villages." + +Then he proceeded to relate all that had taken place, first +describing the incidents of the battle, and their work among the +mountains. + +"You understand," he said, "that my orders were not so much to do +injury to the enemy, as to deceive him as to the amount of our +force, and to lead them to believe it to be very much stronger than +it really was. This could only be done by rapid marches and, as you +will see, the main object was to cut all his lines of communication, +and at the same time to show ourselves, in force, at points a +considerable distance apart. To effect this we, on several occasions, +marched upwards of sixty miles in a day; and upwards of forty, +several days in succession; a feat that could hardly be accomplished +except by men at once robust, and well accustomed to mountain work, +and trained to long marches; as those of my regiment have been, since +they were first raised." + +Then taking out a copy of his report, he gave in much fuller detail +than in the report, itself, an account of the movements of the +various columns and flying parties, during the first ten days; and +then, more briefly, their operations between Burgos and Valladolid, +ending up by saying: + +"You see, colonel, there was really nothing out of the way in all +this. We had the advantage of having a great number of men who knew +the country intimately; and the cutting of all their communications, +the exaggerated reports brought to them by the peasants, and the +maintenance of our posts round Salamanca and Zamora while we were +operating near Burgos and Valladolid, impressed the commanders of +these towns with such an idea of our strength, and such uneasiness +as to their communications that, after the reverse to their column, +none of them ever ventured to attack us in earnest." + +"That is no doubt true," the colonel said, "but to have done all +this when--with the reinforcements sent up, and the very strong +garrison at four of the towns, to say nothing of the division of +Burgos--they had forty thousand men disposable, is a task that +wanted a head well screwed on. I can see how you did it; but that +would be a very different thing to doing it, oneself. + +"However, you have taught us a great deal of the geography of the +country between the frontier and Burgos, and it ought to be useful. +If I had received an order, this afternoon, to march with the +regiment to Tordesillas, for example, I should have known no more +where the place stood, or by what road I was to go to it, than if +they had ordered me to march to Jericho. Now I should be able to go +straight for it, by the shortest line. I should cross the roads at +points at which we were not likely to be attacked, and throw out +strong parties to protect our flanks till we had passed; and should +feel that I was not stumbling along in the dark, and just trusting +to luck." + +"Now, colonel, we must be off to our own quarters," Terence said. +"We have been too long away now and, if I had not known that +Herrara and the majors were to be trusted to do their work--and in +fact they did it well, without my assistance, all the time I was +away prisoner--I could not have left them, as I did, half an hour +after they had encamped." + +The next morning Terence received a copy of the orders of the day +of the division, at present, under General Crawford's command; +together with the general orders of the whole army, from +headquarters. In the latter, to which Terence first turned, was a +paragraph: + +"Lord Wellington expresses his great satisfaction at the +exceptional services rendered by the Minho Portuguese regiment, +under its commander Captain T. O'Connor, of the headquarter staff, +bearing the rank of colonel in the Portuguese army. He has had +great pleasure in recommending him to the commander-in-chief for +promotion in the British army. He has also to report very +favourably the conduct of Lieutenant Ryan, of the Mayo Fusiliers, +and Ensigns Bull and Macwitty, all attached for service to the +Minho regiment; and shall bring before General Lord Beresford that +of Lieutenant Colonel Herrara, of the same regiment." + +In the divisional orders of the day appeared the words: + +"In noticing the arrival of the Minho Portuguese regiment, under +the command of Colonel Terence O'Connor, to join the division +temporarily under his command, General Crawford takes this +opportunity of congratulating Colonel O'Connor on the most +brilliant services that his regiment has performed, in a series of +operations upon the Spanish side of the frontier." + +Four days later, Terence received two letters from home. These were +written after the receipt of that sent off by him on his arrival at +Cadiz, narrating his escape. His father wrote: + +"My dear Terence, + +"Your letter, received this morning, has taken a heavy load off our +minds. Of course, we saw the despatches giving particulars of the +battle of Fuentes d'Onoro--which, by the way, seems to have been +rather a confused sort of affair, and the enemy must have blundered +into it just as we did; only as they were all there, and we only +came up piecemeal, they should have thrashed us handsomely, if they +had known their business. Well, luck is everything and, as you have +had a good deal more than your share of it since you joined, one +must not grumble if the jade has done you a bad turn this time. + +"However, as you have got safely out of their hands, you have no +reason for complaint. Still, you had best not try the thing too +often. Next time you may not find a good-looking girl to help you +out. By the way, you don't tell us whether she was good looking. +Mention it in your next; Mary is very curious about it. + +"We are getting on capitally here and, I can tell you, the old +place looks quite imposing, and I was never so comfortable in my +life. We have as much company as I care for, and scarce a day +passes but some young fellow or other rides over, on the pretence +of talking over the war news with me. But I am too old a soldier to +be taken in, and know well enough that Mary is the real attraction. + +"My leg has now so far recovered that I can sit a horse; but though +I ride with your cousin, when the hounds meet anywhere near, I +cannot venture to follow; for if I got a spill, it might bring on +the old trouble again, and lay me up for a couple of years. I used +to hope that I should get well enough to be able to apply to be put +on full pay again. But I feel myself too comfortable, here, to +think of it; and indeed, until I have handed Mary to someone else's +keeping, it would of course be impossible, and I have quite made up +my mind to be moored here for the rest of my life. But to return. + +"Of course, as soon as I saw you were missing, I wrote to an old +friend on the general staff at Dublin, and asked him to write to +the Horse Guards. The answer came back that it was known that you +had been taken prisoner, and that you were wounded, but not +severely. You were commanding the rear face of the square into +which your regiment had been thrown, when your horse, which was +probably hit by a bullet, ran away with you into the ranks of the +enemy's cavalry. After that we were, of course, more comfortable +about you, and Mary maintained that you would very soon be turning +up again, like a bad penny. + +"I need not say that we are constantly talking about you. Now, take +care of yourself, Terence. Bear in mind that, if you get yourself +killed, there will be no more adventures for you--at least, none +over which you will have any control. Your cousin has just +expressed the opinion that she does not think you were born to be +shot; she thinks that a rope is more likely than a bullet to cut +short your career. She is writing to you herself; and as her tongue +runs a good deal faster than mine, I have no doubt that her pen +will do so, also. As you say, with your Portuguese pay and your +own, you are doing well; but if you should get pinched at any time, +be sure to draw on me, up to any reasonable amount. + +"It seems to me that things are not going on very well, on the +frontier; and I should not be surprised to hear that Wellington is +in full retreat again, for Torres Vedras. Remember me to the +colonel, O'Driscoll, and all the others. I see, by the Gazette, +that Stokes, who was junior ensign when the regiment went into +action at Vimiera, has just got his step. That shows the changes +that have taken place, and how many good fellows have fallen out of +the ranks. Again I say, take care of yourself. + +"Your affectionate Father." + +His cousin's letter was, as usual, long and chatty; telling him +about his father, their pursuits and amusements, and their +neighbours. + +"You don't deserve so long a letter," she said, when she was +approaching the conclusion, "for although I admit your letters are +long, you never seem to tell one just the things one wants to know. +For example, you tell us exactly the road you travelled down to +Cadiz, with the names of the villages and so on, just as if you +were writing an official report. Your father says it is very +interesting, and has been working it all out on the map. It is very +interesting to me to know that you have got safely to Cadiz but, as +there were no adventures by the way, I don't care a snap about the +names of the villages you passed through, or the exact road you +traversed. + +"Now, on the other hand, I should like to know all about this young +woman who helped you to get out of prison. You don't say a word +about what she is like, whether she is pretty or plain. You don't +even mention her name, or say whether she fell in love with you, or +you with her; though I admit that you do say that she was engaged +to the muleteer Garcia. I think, if I had been in his place, I +should have managed to let you fall into the hands of the French +again. I should say a man was a great fool to help to rescue anyone +his girl had taken all sorts of pains to get out of prison. + +"At any rate, sir, I expect you to give me a fair and honest +description of her the next time you write, for I consider your +silence about her to be, in the highest degree, suspicious. +However, I have the satisfaction of knowing that you are not likely +to be in Salamanca again, for a very long time. Your father says he +does not think anything will be done, until the present Ministry +are kicked out here; and Wellington hangs the principal members of +all the Juntas in Portugal, and all that he can get at, in Spain. + +"He is the most bloodthirsty man that I have ever come across, +according to his own account, but in reality he would not hurt a +fly. He is always doing kind actions among the peasantry, and the +'Major' is quite the most popular man in this part of the country. + +"I have not yet forgiven you for having gone straight back to +Spain, instead of running home for a short time when you were so +close to us, at Jersey. I told you when I wrote that I should never +forgive you, and I am still of the same opinion. It was too bad. + +"Your father has just called to ask if I am going on writing all +night; and it is quite time to close, that it may go with his own +letter, which a boy is waiting to carry on horseback to the post +office, four miles away; so goodbye. + +"Your very affectionate cousin, Mary." + +The next two months passed quietly at Pinhel. Operations continued +to be carried on at various points but, although several encounters +of minor importance took place, the combatants were engaged rather +in endeavouring to feel each other's positions, and to divine each +other's intentions, than to bring about a serious battle. Marmont +believed Wellington to be stronger than he was, while the latter +rather underestimated the French strength. Thus there were, on both +sides, movements of advance and retirement. + +During the time that had elapsed since the battles of Fuentes +d'Onoro and Albuera, Badajos had been again besieged by the +British, but ineffectually; and in August Wellington, taking +advantage of Marmont's absence in the south, advanced and +established a blockade of Ciudad Rodrigo. This had led to some +fighting. The activity of General Hill, and the serious menace to +the communications effected by Terence's Portuguese and the +guerillas, had prevented the French from gathering in sufficient +strength, either to drive the blockading force across the frontier +again, or from carrying out Napoleon's plans for the invasion of +Portugal. Wellington, on his part, was still unable to move; owing +to the absence of transport, and the manner in which the Portuguese +government thwarted him at every point: leaving all his demands +that the roads should be kept in good order, unattended to; +starving their own troops to such an extent that they were +altogether unfit for action; placing every obstacle to the calling +out of new levies; and in every way hindering his plans. + +He obtained but little assistance or encouragement at home. His +military chest was empty. The muleteers, who kept up the supply of +food for the army, were six months in arrears of pay. The British +troops were also unpaid, badly supplied with clothes and shoes; +while money and stores were still being sent in unlimited +quantities to the Spanish Juntas, where they did no good whatever, +and might as well have been thrown into the sea. But in spite of +all these difficulties, the army was daily improving in efficiency. +The men were now inured to hardships of all kinds. They had, in +three pitched battles, proved themselves superior to the French; +and they had an absolute confidence in their commander. + +Much was due to the efforts of Lord Fitzroy Somerset, Wellington's +military secretary who, by entering into communication with the +commanders of brigades and regiments, most of whom were quite young +men--for the greater part of the army was but of recent +creation--was enabled not only to learn something of the state of +discipline in each regiment, but greatly to encourage and stimulate +the efforts of its officers; who felt that the doings of their +regiment were observed at headquarters, that merit would be +recognized without favouritism, and that any failure in the +discipline or morale of those under their orders would be noted +against them. Twice, during the two months, Terence had been sent +for to headquarters, in order that he might give Lord Fitzroy +minute information concerning the various roads and localities, +point out natural obstacles where an obstinate defence might be +made by an enemy, or which could be turned to advantage by an +advancing army. The route maps that he had sent were frequently +turned to, and fully explained. + +The second visit took place in the last week in November and, on +his arrival, the military secretary began the conversation by +handing a Gazette to him. + +"This arrived yesterday, Colonel O'Connor; and I congratulate you +that, upon the very strong recommendation of Lord Wellington, you +are gazetted to a majority. Now that your position is so well +assured, there will be no longer occasion for you to remain +nominally attached to the headquarter staff. Of course, it was +before I came out that this was done; and I learned that the +intention was that you would not act upon the staff, but it was to +be merely an honorary position, without pay, in order to add to +your authority and independence, when you happen to come in contact +with Portuguese officers of a higher rank." + +"That was so, sir. I was very grateful for the kindness that Lord +Wellington showed, in thus enabling me to wear the uniform of his +staff, which was of great assistance to me at the time; and indeed, +I am deeply conscious of the kindness with which he has, on every +occasion, treated me; and for his recommending me for promotion." + +"I should have been personally glad," Lord Fitzroy went on, "to +have had you permanently attached to our staff; as your knowledge +of the country might, at times, be of great value, and of your zeal +and energy you have given more than ample proofs. I spoke of the +matter to the general, this morning. He agreed with me that you +would be a great addition to the staff but, upon the other hand, +such a step would very seriously diminish the efficiency of the +regiment that you raised, and have since commanded. The regiment +has lately rendered quite exceptional services and, under your +command, we reckon it to be as valuable in the fighting line as if +it were one of our own; which is more than can be said for any +other Portuguese battalion, although some of them have, of late, +fought remarkably well. + +"I do not say that Colonel Herrara, aided by his three English +officers--who, by the way, are all promoted in this Gazette, the +two ensigns to the rank of lieutenants, and Mr. Ryan to that of +captain--would not keep the regiment in a state of efficiency, so +far as fighting is concerned; but without your leading, it could +not be relied upon to act for detached service such as it has +performed under you." + +"Thank you, sir. Of course, it would be a great honour to me to be +on the general's staff, but I should be very sorry to leave the +regiment and, frankly, I do not think that it would get on well +without me. Colonel Herrara is ready to bestow infinite pains on +his work, but I do not think that he would do things on his own +responsibility. Bull and Macwitty have both proved themselves +zealous and active, and I can always rely upon them to carry out my +orders to the letter; but I doubt if they would get on as well, +with Herrara, as they do with me. I am very glad to hear that they +and Mr. Ryan have got their steps. The latter makes an admirable +adjutant, and if I had to choose one of the four for the command I +should select him; but he has not been very long with the regiment, +is not known personally, and would not, I think, have the same +influence with the Portuguese officers and men. Moreover I am +afraid that, having been in command so long, I should miss my +independence, if I had only to carry out the orders of others." + +"I can quite understand that," the military secretary said, with a +smile. "I can quite realize the fascination of the life of a +partisan leader; especially when he has, which Trant and the others +have not, a body of men whom he has trained himself, and upon whom +he can absolutely rely. You can still, of course, wear the uniform +of a field officer on the general's staff, and so will have very +little alteration to make, save by adding the proper insignia of +your rank. I will write you a line, authorizing you to do so. + +"Now, let us have a turn at your maps. I may tell you in confidence +that, if an opportunity offers, we shall at once convert the +blockade of Ciudad into a siege; and hope to carry it before the +enemy can march, with sufficient force, to its relief. + +"To do so he would naturally collect all his available forces from +Salamanca, Zamora, and Valladolid, and would probably obtain +reinforcements from Madrid and Estremadura; and I want to +ascertain, as far as possible, the best means of checking the +advance of some of these troops, by the blowing up of bridges, or +the throwing forward of such a force as your regiment to seize any +defile, or other point, that could be held for a day or two, and an +enemy's column thus delayed. Even twenty-four hours might be of +importance." + +"I understand, sir. Of course, the passes between Madrid and Avila +might be retained for some little time, especially if the defenders +had a few guns; but they would be liable to be taken in the rear by +a force at Avila, where there were, when I went down south, over +five thousand men. As to the troops coming from the north, they +would doubtless march on Salamanca. From that town they would cross +the Huebra and Yeltes so near their sources that no difficulty +would be caused by the blowing up of bridges, if any exist; but the +pass over the Sierra de Gatta, on the south of Ciudad, might be +defended by a small force, without difficulty." + +The maps were now got out, and the matter gone into minutely. After +an hour's conversation, Lord Fitzroy said: + +"Thank you, Colonel O'Connor. Some of the information that you have +given me will assuredly be very useful, if we besiege Ciudad. From +what we hear, there are a good many changes being made in the +French command. Napoleon seems about to engage in a campaign with +Russia, and is likely to draw off a certain portion of the forces +here and, while these changes are being made, it would seem to +offer a good opportunity for us to strike a blow." + +On the last day of December, Terence received the following order: + +"Colonel O'Connor will draw six days' rations from the commissariat +and, at daybreak tomorrow, march to the river Aqueda and, on the +following day, will ford that river and will post himself along the +line of the Yeltes, from its junction with the Huebra to the +mountains; and will prevent any person or parties crossing from +this side. It is of the highest importance that no intelligence of +the movements of the army should be sent, either by the garrison of +Ciudad or by the peasantry, to Salamanca. When his provisions are +exhausted, he is authorized to hire carts and send in to the army +round Ciudad but, if possible, he should obtain supplies from the +country near him, and is authorized to purchase provisions, and to +send in accounts and vouchers, for such purchases, to the +paymaster's department." + +"Hurrah, Ryan," he exclaimed on reading the order, "things are +going to move, at last! This means, of course, that the army is +going to besiege Ciudad at once; and that we are to prevent the +French from getting any news of it, until it is too late for them +to relieve it. For the last month, guns and ammunition have been +arriving at Almeida; and I thought that this weary time of waiting +was drawing to an end." + +"I am glad, indeed, Terence. I must say that I was afraid that we +should not be moving until the spring. Shall we go in and say +goodbye to our fellows?" + +"Yes, we may as well; but mind, don't say where we are going to, +only that we are ordered away. I don't suppose that the regiments +will know anything about it, till within an hour of the time they +march. There can be no doubt that it is a serious business. Ciudad +held out for weeks against Massena; and with Marmont within a few +days' march, with an army at least as strong as ours, it will be a +tough business, indeed, to take it before he can come up to its +relief; and I can well understand that it is all important that he +shall know nothing about the siege, till it is too late for him to +arrive in time." + +"We have come in to say goodbye, colonel," Terence said, as he and +Ryan entered the mess room of the Mayo Fusiliers that evening. + +"And where are you off to, O'Connor?" + +"Well, sir, I don't mind mentioning it in here, but it must go no +further. The chief, knowing what we are capable of, proposes that I +shall make a rapid march to Madrid, seize the city, and bring King +Joseph back a prisoner." + +There was a roar of laughter. + +"Terence, my boy," Captain O'Grady said, "that is hardly a mission +worthy of a fighting man like yourself. I expect that you are +hiding something from us, and that the real idea is that you should +traverse Spain and France, enter Germany, and seize Boney, and +carry him off with you to England." + +"I dare not tell you whether you are right or not, O'Grady. Things +of this sort must not even be whispered about. It is a wonderfully +good guess that you have made and, when it is all over, you will be +able to take credit for having divined what was up; but for mercy's +sake don't talk about it. Keep as silent as the grave and, if +anyone should ask you what has become of us, pretend that you know +nothing about it." + +"But you are going, O'Connor?" the colonel said, when the laughter +had subsided. + +"Yes, colonel. We march tomorrow morning. I daresay you will hear +of us before many days are over; and may, perhaps, be able to make +even a closer guess than O'Grady as to what we are doing. I am +heartily glad that we are off. We are now at our full strength +again. Most of the wounded have rejoined, and I could have filled +up the vacancies a dozen times over. The Portuguese know that I +always manage to get food for my men, somehow; which is more than +can be said for the other Portuguese regiments, though those of +Trant and Pack are better off than Beresford's regulars. Then, too, +I think they like fighting, now that they feel that they are a +match for the French, man for man. They get a fair share of it, at +any rate. The three months that we have been idle have been useful, +as the new recruits know their work as well as the others." + +"Then you don't know how much longer we are going to stop in this +bastely hole?" O'Grady asked. + +"Well, I will tell you this much, O'Grady: I fancy that, before +this day week, you will all have work to do; and that it is likely +to be hot." + +"That is a comfort, Terence. But, my dear boy, have a little pity +on us and don't finish off the business by yourselves. Remember +that we have come a long way, and that it will be mighty hard for +us if you were to clear the French out of Spain, and leave nothing +for us to do but to bury their dead and escort their army, as +prisoners, to the port." + +"I will bear it in mind, O'Grady; but don't you forget the past. +You know how desperately you grumbled at Rolica, because the +regiment was not in it; and how you got your wish at Vimiera, and +lost an arm in consequence. So even if I do, as you say, push the +French out of Spain, you will have the consolation of knowing that +you will be able to go back to Ireland, without leaving any more +pieces of you behind." + +"There is something in that, Terence," O'Grady said gravely. "I +think that when this is over I shall go on half pay, and there may +as well be as much of me left, as possible, to enjoy it. It's an +ungrateful country I am serving. In spite of all that I have done +for it, and the loss of my arm into the bargain; here am I, still a +captain, though maybe I am near the top of the list. Still, it is +but a captain I am, and here are two gossoons, like yourself and +Dick Ryan, the one of you marching about a field officer, and the +other a captain. It is heart-breaking entirely, and me one of the +most zealous officers in the service. But it is never any luck I +have had, from the day I was born." + +"It will come some day, never fear, O'Grady; and perhaps it may not +be so far off as you fear. + +"Well, colonel, we will just take a glass with you for luck, and +then say good night; for I have a good many things to see after, +and must be up very early, so as to get our tents packed and handed +over, to draw our rations, eat our breakfast, and be off by seven." + +It was close upon that hour when the regiment marched. It was known +that there were no French troops west of the Huebra but, after +fording the Aqueda, the force halted until nightfall; and then +moved forward and reached the Huebra at midnight, lay down to sleep +until daybreak, and then extended along the bank of the Yeltes, as +far as its source among the mountains; thus cutting the roads from +Ciudad to Salamanca and the North. The distance to be watched was +some twenty miles but, as the river was in many places unfordable, +it was necessary only to place patrols here; while strong parties +were posted, not only on the main roads, but at all points where +by-roads or peasants' tracks led down to the bank. + +On that day a bridge was thrown across the Aqueda, six miles below +Ciudad, for the passage of artillery but, owing to the difficulties +of carriage, it was five days later before the artillery and +ammunition could be brought over; and this was only done by the aid +of 800 carts, which Wellington had caused to be quietly constructed +during the preceding three months. + +On the 8th, the light division and Pack's Portuguese contingent +forded the Aqueda three miles above Ciudad and, making a long +detour, took up their position behind a hill called the Great +Teson. They remained quiet during the day and, the garrison +believing that they had only arrived to enable the force that had +long blockaded the town to render the investment more complete, no +measures of defence were taken; but at night the light division +fell suddenly on the redoubt of San Francisco, on the Great Teson. + +The assault was completely successful. The garrison was a small +one, and had not been reinforced. A few of them were killed, and +the remainder taken; with a loss, to the assailants, of only +twenty-four men and officers. A Portuguese regiment, commanded by +Colonel Elder, then set to work; and these--in spite of a heavy +fire, kept up all night by the French forts--completed a parallel, +600 yards in length, before day broke. + + + +Chapter 18: The Sack Of A City. + + +For the next four days the troops worked night and day, the +operations being carried on under a tremendous fire from the French +batteries. The trenches being carried along the whole line of the +Small Teson, on the night of the 13th the convent of Santa Cruz was +captured and, on the 14th, the batteries opened fire against the +town and, before morning, the 40th regiment carried the convent of +San Francisco; and thus established itself within the suburb, which +was inclosed by an entrenchment that the Spanish had thrown up +there, during the last siege. The French artillery was very +powerful and, at times, overpowered that of the besiegers. Some +gallant sorties were also made but, by the 19th, two breaches were +effected in the ramparts, and preparations were made for an +assault. + +That evening Terence received an order to march at once to the +place, and to join Pack's Portuguese. The assault was to be made by +the 3rd and light divisions, aided by Pack's command and Colonel +O'Toole's Portuguese riflemen. The main British army lay along the +Coa, in readiness to advance at once and give battle, should +Marmont come up to the assistance of the besieged town. + +On the 19th both the breaches were pronounced practicable and, +during the day, the guns of the besiegers were directed against the +artillery on the ramparts, while the storming parties prepared for +their work. The third division was to attack the great breach. The +light division was to make for the small breach and, upon entering +the inclosure known as the fausse braye, a portion were to turn and +enter the town by the Salamanca gate; while the others were to +penetrate by the breach. + +Colonel O'Toole, with his Portuguese, was to cross the river and to +aid the right attack; while Pack's Portuguese were to make a false +attack on the San Jago gate, on the other side of the town, and to +convert this into a real assault if the defence should prove +feeble. + +The French scarcely appeared conscious that the critical moment was +at hand, but they had raised breastworks along the tops of both +breaches, and were perfectly prepared for the assault. When the +signal was given, the attack was begun on the right. The 5th, 77th, +and 94th Regiments rushed from the convent of Santa Cruz, leapt +down into the fausse braye, and made their way to the foot of the +great breach; which they reached at the same moment as the rest of +the third division, who had run down from the Small Teson. A +terrible fire was opened upon them but, undismayed by shell, grape, +and musketry from the ramparts and houses, they drove the French +behind their new work. + +Here, however, the enemy stood so stoutly that no progress could be +made. Unable to cross the obstacle, the troops nevertheless +maintained their position, although suffering terrible losses from +the French fire. + +Equally furious was the attack on the small breach, by the light +division. After a few minutes' fighting, they succeeded in bursting +through the ranks of the defenders; and then, turning to the right, +fought their way along the ramparts until they reached the top of +the great breach. The French there wavered, on finding that their +flank was turned; and the third division, seizing the opportunity, +hurled themselves upon them, and this breach was also won. + +O'Toole's attack was successful and, on the other side of the town, +Pack's Portuguese, meeting with no resistance, had blown open the +gate of San Jago, and had also entered the town. Here a terrible +scene took place, and the British troops sullied their victory by +the wildest and most horrible excesses. They had neither forgotten +nor forgiven the treatment they had experienced at the hands of the +Spanish, both before and after the battle of Talavera; when they +were almost starved, while the Spaniards had abundant supplies, and +yet left the British wounded unattended, to die of starvation in +the hospitals, when they evacuated the city. From that time their +animosity against the Spaniards had been vastly greater than their +feeling against the French, who had always behaved as gallant +enemies, and had treated their wounded and prisoners with the +greatest kindness. + +Now this long-pent-up feeling burst out, and murder, rapine, and +violence of all sorts raged for some hours, wholly without check. +Officers who endeavoured to protect the hapless inhabitants were +shot down, all commands were unheeded, and abominable atrocities +were perpetrated. + +Some share of the blame rests with Wellington and his staff, who +had taken no measures whatever for maintaining order in the town, +when possession should be gained of it--a provision which should +never be omitted, in the case of an assault. The Portuguese, whose +animosity against the Spaniards was equally bitter, imitated the +example of their British comrades. Fires broke out in several +places, which added to the horror of the scene. The castle was +still held by the French, the troops having retreated there as soon +as the breach had been carried. There was not, therefore, even the +excuse of the excitement of street fighting to be made for the +conduct of the victors. + +In vain, Terence and his officers endeavoured to keep their men +together. By threes and fours these scattered down the side +streets, to join the searchers for plunder; until at last, he +remained alone with his British and Portuguese officers. + +"This is horrible," he said to Ryan, as the shouts, shrieks, and +screams told that the work of murder, as well as plunder, was being +carried on. "It is evident that, single handed, nothing can be +done. I propose that we divide into two parties, and take these two +houses standing together under our protection. We will have two +English officers with each, as there is no chance of the soldiers +listening to a Portuguese officer. How many are there of us?" + +There were the twelve captains, and twenty subalterns. + +"Bull and Macwitty, do you take half of them; Colonel Herrara, +Ryan, and I will take the other half. When you have once obtained +admission, barricade the door and lower windows with furniture. +When the rioters arrive, show yourselves at the windows, and say +that you have orders to protect the houses from insult and, if any +attack is made, you will carry out your orders at whatever cost. +When they see four British officers at the windows, they will +suppose that special instructions have been given us with respect +to these two houses. + +"If they attack we must each defend ourselves to the last, holding +the stairs if they break in. If only our house is attacked, come +with half your force to our assistance; and we will do the same to +you. We can get along by those balconies, without coming down into +the street." + +The force was at once divided. Terence knocked at the door of one +house, and his majors at that of the other. No answer was received +but, as they continued to knock with such violence that it seemed +as if they were about to break down the doors, these were presently +opened. Terence entered. A Spanish gentleman, behind whom stood a +number of trembling servants, advanced. + +"What would you have, senor?" he asked. "I see that you are an +officer. Surely you cannot menace with violence those who are your +allies?" + +"You are right, senor; but unfortunately our troops have shaken off +all discipline, and are pillaging and, I am afraid, murdering. The +men of my own regiment have joined the rest, and I with my +officers, finding ourselves powerless, have resolved at least to +protect your mansion, and the next, from our maddened troops. I can +give you my word of honour that I and these gentlemen, who are all +my officers, have come as friends, and are determined to defend +until the last your mansion, which happened to be the first we came +to. A similar party is taking charge of the next house and, if +necessary, we can join forces." + +"I thank you indeed, sir. I am the Count de Montego. I have my wife +and daughters here and, in their name as well as my own, I thank +you most cordially. I have some twenty men, sir. Alone we could do +nothing, but they will aid you in every way, if you will but give +orders." + +"In the first place, count, we will move as many articles of heavy +furniture as possible against the doors. I see that your lower +windows are all barred. We had better place mattresses behind them, +to prevent shot from penetrating. I hope, however, that it will not +come to that; and that I shall be able to persuade any that may +come along that these houses are under special protection." + +The count at once ordered his servants to carry out the British +officer's instructions, and the whole party were soon engaged in +piling heavy furniture against the door. The count had gone up to +allay the fears of his wife and daughters who, with the female +servants, were gathered in terrible anxiety in the drawing room +above. As soon as the preparations were completed, Terence, Ryan, +and Herrara went upstairs and, after being introduced to the +ladies, who were now to some extent reassured, Terence went out on +to the balcony with Ryan; leaving Herrara in the drawing room, as +he thought it was best that only British officers should show +themselves. + +Terrible as the scene had been before, it was even worse now. The +soldiers had everywhere broken into the cellars, and numbers of +them were already drunk. Many discharged their muskets recklessly, +some quarrelled among themselves as to the spoil they had taken, +and fierce fights occurred. + +In two or three minutes Bull and Macwitty appeared on the balcony +of the next house. + +"I see it is too far to get across," Terence said. "If you cannot +find a plank, set half a dozen men to prise up a couple from the +floor." + +Presently a number of soldiers came running along down the street. + +"Here are two big houses," one shouted. "There ought to be plenty +of plunder here." + +"Halt!" Terence shouted. "These houses are under special protection +and, as you see, I myself and three other British officers are +placed here, to see that no one enters. I have a strong force under +my orders, and anyone attempting to break down the doors will be +shot instantly, and all who aid him will be subsequently tried and +hung." + +The men, on seeing the four British officers--three of them in the +dress of field officers, and one, the speaker, in the uniform of +the staff--at once drew back. + +"Come on, mates," one said, as they stood indecisive; "we shall +only lose time here, while others are getting as much plunder as +they can carry. Let us go on." + +But as the wine took effect, others who came along were less +disposed to listen to orders. Gradually gathering, until they were +in considerable numbers, several shots were fired at the officers; +and one man, advancing up the steps, began to hammer at the door +with the butt end of his musket. Terence leaned over the balcony +and, drawing his pistol and taking a steady aim, fired, and the man +fell with a sharp cry. A number of shots were fired from below, but +the men were too unsteady to take aim, and Terence was uninjured. + +[Illustration: The man fell, with a sharp cry.] + +Again he stood up. + +"Men," he shouted, "you have shown yourselves to be brave soldiers +today. Are you now going to disgrace yourselves, by mutiny against +officers who are doing their duty, thereby running the risk of +being tried and hung? I tell you again that these houses are both +defended by a strong force, and that we shall protect them at all +hazard. Go elsewhere, where booty is to be more easily obtained." + +His words, however, were unheeded. Some more shots were fired, and +then there was a general rush at the doors; while another party +attacked that of the next house. The officers were all provided +with pistols, and Terence hurried below with Ryan. + +"Do not fire," he said to the others, "until they break down the +door. It will take them some time and, at any moment, fresh troops +may be marched in to restore order." + +The door was a strong one and, backed as it was, it resisted for a +considerable time. Those who first attacked it speedily broke the +stocks of their guns, and had to make way for others. Presently the +attack ceased suddenly. + +"Run upstairs, Dicky, and see what they are doing, and how things +are going on next door." + +Ryan soon returned. + +"They are bringing furniture and a lot of straw from houses +opposite. They have broken down the next door, but they have not +got in yet." + +"Let the servants at once set to work, to draw pails of water from +the well in the courtyard, and carry them upstairs. + +"Ryan, you had better go into the next house and see if they are +pressed. Tell them that they must hold out without my help for a +short time. I am going to send six officers out by the back of the +house, to collect some of our men together. Another will be in +readiness to open the back door, as soon as they return. + +"I shall keep them from firing the pile as long as I can. The count +has two double-barrelled guns. I don't want to use them, if I can +help it; but they shall not get in here. Do you stop, and help next +door. There can be no fighting here yet for, if they do burn the +door, it will be a long time before they can get in." + +The native officers started at once. They were of opinion that they +would soon be able to bring in a good many of their men; for the +Portuguese are a sober race, and few would have got intoxicated. +Most of the men would soon find that there was not much booty to be +obtained, and that even what they got would probably be snatched +from them by the English soldiers; and would consequently be glad +to return to their duty again. + +An officer took his place at the back door, in readiness to remove +the bars; another went up with Terence to the first floor; and the +remainder stopped in the hall, with six of the menservants. + +Terence went upstairs and looked down into the street. There was a +lot of furniture, with bundles of faggots and straw, piled there. + +"Now," he said to the officer, "empty these pails at once; the +servants will soon bring some more up. I will stand here with these +guns, and fire at any one who interferes with you. Just come out +into the balcony, empty your pails over, and go back at once. You +need scarcely show yourself, and there is not much chance of your +being hit by those drunken rascals." + +Yells and shouts of rage were heard below, as the water was thrown +over. As fast as the pails were emptied, the servants carried them +off and refilled them. At last, two soldiers appeared from a house +opposite, with blazing torches. + +The guns had been loaded by the count with small shot, as Terence +was anxious not to take life. As soon as the two men appeared, he +raised the fowling piece to his shoulder and fired both barrels, in +quick succession. With a yell of pain, the soldiers dropped their +torches. One fell to the ground, the other clapped his hands to his +face and ran down the street in an agony, as if half mad. Half a +dozen muskets were discharged, but Terence had stepped back the +moment he had fired, and handed the gun to the count, who was +standing behind him, to recharge. + +Two other soldiers picked up the torches, but dropped them as +Terence again fired. Another man snatched up one of them, and flung +it across the street. It fell upon some straw that had been +thoroughly soaked by the water, and burned out there harmlessly. + +It was not long before the servants began to arrive with the full +buckets and, when these also had been emptied, Terence, glancing +over, had little fear that the pile could now be lighted. The pails +were sent down again, and he waited for the next move. + +The fighting had ceased at the other door. The soldiers having +drawn back from the barricade, to see the effect of the fire. Ryan +ran across the plank and rejoined Terence. + +"Things are quiet there, for the present," he said. "There has not +been much harm done. When they had partly broken down the door, +they began firing through it. Bull and Macwitty kept the others +back from the line of fire, and not a pistol has been discharged +yet. Bull cut down one fellow who tried to climb over the +barricade, but otherwise no blood has been shed on either side." + +Help was coming now. One of the Portuguese officers was admitted, +with twenty-four men that he had picked up. The others came in +rapidly and, within a quarter of an hour, three hundred men were +assembled. All were sober, and looked thoroughly ashamed of +themselves as they were formed up in the courtyard. + +Terence went down to them. He said no word of blame. + +"Now, men," he said, "you have to retrieve your characters. Half of +you will post yourselves at the windows, from the ground floor to +the top of the house. You are not to show yourselves, till you +receive orders to do so. You are not to load your guns but, as you +appear at the windows, point them down into the street. The +officers will post you, five at each window. + +"The rest of you are at once to clear away the furniture in the +hall; and, when you receive the order, throw open the door and pour +out, forming across the street as you do so. Captain Ryan will be +in command of you. You are not to load, but to clear the street +with your bayonets. If any of the soldiers are too drunk to get out +of your way, knock them down with the butt end of your muskets; but +if they rush at you, use your bayonets." + +He went round the house, and saw that five men were in readiness at +each window looking into the street. He ordered them to leave the +doors open. + +"A pistol will be fired from the first landing," he said; "that +will be the signal, then show yourselves at once." + +He waited until Ryan's party had cleared away the furniture. He +then went out on to the balcony, and addressed the crowd of +soldiers who were standing, uncertain what step to take next, many +of them having already gone off in search of plunder elsewhere. + +"Listen to me, men," he shouted. "Hitherto I have refrained from +employing force against men who, after behaving as heroes, are now +acting like madmen; but I shall do so no longer. I will give you +two minutes to clear off, and anyone who remains at the end of that +time will have to take his chance." + +Derisive shouts and threats arose in reply. He turned round and +nodded to the count, who was standing at the door of the room with +a pistol in his hand. He raised it and fired and, in a moment, +soldiers appeared at every window, menacing the crowd below with +their rifles. At the same moment the door opened, and the +Portuguese poured out, with Ryan at their head, trampling over the +pile raised in front of it. + +There was a moment of stupefied dismay amongst the soldiers. +Hitherto none had believed that there were any in the houses, with +the exception of a few officers; and the sudden appearance of a +hundred men at the windows, and a number pouring out through the +door, took them so completely by surprise that there was not even a +thought of resistance. + +Men who had faced the terrors of the deadly breaches turned and +fled and, save a few leaning stupidly against the opposite wall, +none remained by the time Ryan had formed up the two lines across +the street. Each of these advanced a short distance, and were at +once joined by the defenders of the other house, and by those at +the windows. + +"Do you take command of one line, Bull; and you of the other, +Macwitty. I don't think that we shall be meddled with but, should +any of them return and attack you, you will first try and persuade +them to go away quietly. If they still attack, you will at once +fire upon them. + +"Herrara, will you send out all your officers, and bring the men in +at the back doors, as before. We shall soon have the greater part +of the regiment here, and with them we can hold the street, if +necessary, against any force that is likely to attack it." + +In half an hour, indeed, more than fifteen hundred men had been +rallied and, while two lines, each a hundred strong, were formed +across the street, some eighty yards apart, the rest were drawn up +in a solid body in the centre; Terence's order being that, if +attacked in force, half of them were to at once enter the houses on +both sides of the street, and to man the windows. He felt sure, +however, that the sight of so strong a force would be sufficient to +prevent the rioters interfering with them; the soldiers being, for +the most part, too drunk to act together, or with a common object. + +This, indeed, proved to be the case. Parties at times came down the +street but, on seeing the dark lines of troops drawn up, they +retired immediately, on being hailed by the English officers, and +slunk off under the belief that a large body of fresh troops had +entered the town. An hour later a mounted officer, followed by some +five or six others and some orderlies, rode up. + +"What troops are these?" the officer asked. + +"The Minho Portuguese Regiment, general," Bull answered, "commanded +by Colonel O'Connor." + +The general rode on, the line opened, and he and his staff passed +through. Terence, who had posted himself in the balcony so as to +have a view of the whole street, at once ran down. Two of the men +with torches followed him. + +On approaching, he at once recognized the officer as General +Barnard, who commanded one of the brigades of the light division. + +"So your regiment has remained firm, Colonel O'Connor?" the general +said. + +"I am sorry to say, sir, that it did not, at first, but scattered +like the rest of the troops. My officers and myself, for some time, +defended these two large houses from the attack of the soldiery. +Matters became very serious, and I then sent out some of my +officers, who soon collected three hundred men, which sufficed to +disperse the rioters without our being obliged to fire a shot. The +officers then again went out, and now between fifteen and sixteen +hundred men are here. + +"I am glad that you have come, sir, for I felt in a great +difficulty. It was hard to stay here inactive, when I was aware +that the town was being sacked, and atrocities of every kind +perpetrated but, upon the other hand, I dared not undertake the +responsibility of attempting to clear the streets. Such an attempt +would probably end in desperate fighting. It might have resulted in +heavy loss on both sides, and have caused such ill feeling between +the British and Portuguese troops as to seriously interfere with +the general dispositions for the campaign." + +"No doubt you have taken the best course that could be pursued, +Colonel O'Connor; but I must take on myself the responsibility of +doing something. My appearance, at the head of your regiment, will +have some effect upon the men of the light division; and those who +are sober will, no doubt, rally round me, though hitherto my +efforts have been altogether powerless. All the officers will, of +course, join us at once. I fear that many have been killed in +trying to protect the inhabitants but, now that we have at least +got a nucleus of good troops, I have no doubt that we shall be +successful. + +"Have you any torches?" + +"There is a supply of them in the house, sir." + +"Get them all lighted, and divide them among the men. As soon as +you have done this, form the regiment into column." + +"Are they to load, sir?" + +"Yes," the general said shortly; "but instruct your officers that +no one is to fire without orders, and that the sound of firing at +the head of the column is not to be considered as a signal for the +rest to open fire; though it may be necessary to shoot some of +these insubordinate scoundrels. By the way, I think it will be best +that only the leading company should load. The rest have their +bayonets, and can use them if attacked." + +Some forty torches were handed over, by the count. These were +lighted and distributed along the line, ten being carried by the +leading company. + +"You have bugles, colonel?" + +"Yes, sir. There is one to each company." + +"Let them all come to the front and play the Assembly, as they +march on. + +"Now, will you ride at their head by my side, sir? Dismount one of +my orderlies, and take his horse." + +By the time all the preparations were completed, they had been +joined by nearly two hundred more men. Just before they started, +Terence said: + +"Would it not be well, general, if I were to tell off a dozen +parties of twenty men, each under the command of a steady +non-commissioned officer, to enter the houses on each side of the +road as we go along, and to clear out any soldiers they may find +there?" + +"Certainly. But I think that when they see the regiment marching +along, and hear the bugles, they will clear out fast enough of +their own accord." + +With bugles blowing, the regiment started. Twenty men, with an +officer, had been left behind at each of the houses they had +defended; in case parties of marauders should arrive, and endeavour +to obtain an entrance. + +As they marched by, men appeared at the windows. Most of these were +soldiers who, with an exclamation of alarm when they saw the +general, followed by two battalions in perfect order, hastily ran +down and made their escape by the backs of the houses; or came +quietly out and, forming in some sort of order, accompanied the +regiment. Several shots were heard behind, as the search parties +cleared out those who had remained in the houses and, presently, +the force entered the main square of the town and halted in its +centre, the bugles still blowing the Assembly. Numbers of officers +at once ran up, and many of the more sober soldiers. + +"Form them up as they arrive," the general said to the officers. + +In a few minutes, some five hundred men had gathered. + +"Do you break your regiment up into four columns, Colonel O'Connor. +A fourth of these men shall go with each, with a strong party of +officers. The soldiers will be the less inclined to resist, if they +see their own comrades and officers with your troops, than if the +latter were alone. I will take the command of one column myself, do +you take that of another. + +"Colonel Strong, will you join one of the majors of Colonel +O'Connor's regiment; and will you, Major Hughes, join the other? + +"All soldiers who do not, at once, obey your summons to fall in +will be taken prisoners; and those who use violence you will shoot, +without hesitation. All drunken men are to be picked up and sent +back here. Place a strong guard over them, and see that they do not +make off again." + +Five minutes later, the four columns started in different +directions. A few soldiers who, inflamed by drink, fired at those +who summoned them to surrender, were instantly shot and, in half an +hour, the terrible din that had filled the air had quietened down. + +Morning was breaking now. In the great square, officers were busy +drawing up the men who had been brought in, in order of their +regiments. The inhabitants issued from their houses, collected the +bodies of those who had been killed in the streets, and carried +them into their homes; and sounds of wailing and lamentation rose +from every house. + +Lord Wellington now rode in, with his staff. The regiments that had +disgraced themselves were at once marched out of the town, and +their places taken by those of other divisions. But nothing could +repair the damage that had been done; and the doings of that night +excited, throughout Spain, a feeling of hostility to the British +that has scarcely subsided to this day; and was heightened by the +equally bad conduct of the troops at the storming of Badajoz. + +Long before the arrival of Lord Wellington, the whole of the Minho +regiment had rejoined. Terence ordered that the late comers should +not be permitted to fall in with their companies, but should remain +as a separate body. He marched the regiment to a quiet spot in the +suburbs, and ordered them to form in a hollow square, with the men +who had last joined in the centre. These he addressed sternly. + +"For the first time," he said, "since this regiment was formed, I +am ashamed of my men. I had thought that I could rely upon you +under all circumstances. I find that this is not so, and that the +greed for plunder has, at once, broken down the bonds of +discipline. Those who, the moment they were called upon, returned +to their colours, I can forgive, seeing that the British regiments +set them so bad an example; but you men, who to the last remained +insubordinate, I cannot forgive. You have disgraced not only +yourselves, but your regiment, and I shall request Lord Wellington +to attach you to some other force. I only want to command men I can +rely upon." + +A loud chorus of lament and entreaty rose from the men. + +"It is as painful to me as it is to you," Terence went on, raising +his hands for silence. "How proud I should have been if, this +morning, I could have met the general and said that the regiment he +had been good enough to praise so highly, several times, had proved +trustworthy; instead of having to report that every man deserted +his officers, and that many continued the evil work of pillage, and +worse, to the end." + +Many of the men wept loudly, others dropped upon their knees and +implored Terence to forgive them. He had already instructed his two +majors what was to be done, and they and the twelve captains now +stepped forward. + +"Colonel," Bull said, in a loud voice that could be heard all over +the square, "we, the officers of the Minho regiment, thoroughly +agree with you in all that you have said, and feel deeply the +disgrace the conduct of these men has brought upon it; but we trust +that you will have mercy on them, and we are ready to promise, in +their name, that never again will they so offend, and that their +future conduct will show how deeply they repent of their error." + +There was a general cry from the men of: + +"Indeed we do. Punish us as you like, colonel, but don't send us +away from the regiment!" + +Terence stood as if hesitating, for some time; then he said: + +"I cannot resist the prayer of your officers, men; and I am willing +to believe that you deeply regret the disgrace you have brought +upon us all. Of one thing I am determined upon; not one man in the +regiment shall be any the better for his share in this night's +work, and that this accursed plunder shall not be retained. A +blanket will be spread out here in front of me, and the regiment +will pass along before me by twos. Each man, as he files by, will +empty out the contents of his pockets, and swear solemnly that he +has retained no object of spoil, whatever. After that is over, I +shall have an inspection of kits and, if any article of value is +found concealed, I will hand over its owner to the provost marshal, +to be shot forthwith." + +The operation took upwards of two hours. At Herrara's suggestion a +table was brought out, a crucifix placed upon it, and each man as +he came up, after emptying out his pockets, swore solemnly, laying +his hand upon the table, that he had given up all the spoil he had +collected. + +Terence could not help smiling at the scene the regiment presented, +before the men began to file past. No small proportion of the men +stripped off their coats, and unwound from their bodies rolls of +silk, costly veils, and other stuffs of which they had taken +possession. All these were laid down by the side of the blanket, on +which a pile of gold and silver coins, a great number of rings, +brooches, and bracelets, had accumulated by the time the whole had +passed by. + +"The money cannot be restored," Terence said to Herrara, "therefore +set four non-commissioned officers to count it out. Have the jewels +all placed in a bag. Let all the stuffs and garments be made into +bundles. I shall be obliged if you will take a sufficient number of +men to carry them, and go down yourself, with a guard of twenty +men, to the syndic, or whatever they call their head man, and hand +them over to him. Say that the Minho regiment returns the spoil it +had captured, and deeply regrets its conduct. + +"Will you say that I beg him to divide the money among the +sufferers most in need of it, and to dispose the jewels and other +things where they can be seen, and to issue a notice to the +inhabitants that all can come and inspect them, and those who can +bring proof that any of the articles belong to them can take them +away." + +The regiment was by this time formed up again, and Terence, +addressing them, told them of the orders that he had given; saying +that, as the regiment had made all the compensation in their power, +and had rid itself of the spoils of a people whom they had +professedly come to aid, it could now look the Spaniards in the +face again. Just as he had concluded, a staff officer rode up. + +"Lord Wellington wishes to speak to you, colonel," he said. "We +have been looking about for you everywhere, but your regiment +seemed to have vanished." + +"Then I must leave the work of inspecting the kits to you, Herrara. +You will see that every article is unfolded and closely examined, +and place every man in whose kit anything is discovered under +arrest, at once. I trust that you will not find anything but, if +you do, place a strong guard over the prisoners, with loaded +muskets, and orders to shoot any one of them who tries to escape." + +Walking by the side of the staff officer--for he had returned the +horse lent him by General Barnard--he accompanied him to a house in +the great square, where Lord Wellington had taken up his quarters. + + + +Chapter 19: Gratitude. + + +"Your regiment has been distinguishing itself again, Colonel +O'Connor, I have heard from three sources. First, General Barnard +reported to me that he, and the other officers, were wholly unable +to restrain the troops from their villainous work last night; until +he found you and your regiment drawn up in perfect order, and was +able, with it, to put an end to the disorder everywhere reigning. +In the second place, the Count de Montego and the Marquis de +Valoroso, two of the wealthiest nobles in the province, have called +upon me to return thanks for the inestimable service, as they +expressed it, rendered by Colonel O'Connor and his officers, in +defending their houses, and protecting the lives and honour of +their families, from the assaults of the soldiers. They said that +the defenders consisted entirely of officers. How was that?" + +"I am sorry to say that my men were, at first, infected by the +general spirit of disorder. Left alone by ourselves, I thought that +we could not do anything better than save, from spoliation, two +fine mansions that happened to be at the spot where we had been +left. We had to stand a sharp siege for two or three hours; but we +abstained, as far as possible, from using our arms, and I think +that only two or three of the soldiers were wounded. However, we +should have had to use our pistols in earnest, in a short time, had +I not sent out several of my officers by the back entrance of the +house; and these were not long in finding, and persuading to return +to their duties, a couple of hundred men. + +"As soon as we sallied out the affair was at an end, and the +soldiers fled. The officers were sent out again and when, an hour +later, General Barnard came up, we had some seventeen hundred in +readiness for action; and his arrival relieved me of the heavy +responsibility of deciding what course had better be adopted." + +"Yes, he told me so, and I think that you acted very wisely in +holding your men back till he arrived; for nothing could have been +more unfortunate than a conflict in the streets between British and +Portuguese troops. There is no doubt that, had it not been for your +regiment, the disgraceful scenes of last night would have been very +much worse than they were. I should be glad if you will convey my +thanks to them." + +"Thank you, sir; but I shall be obliged if you will allow me to say +that you regret to hear that a regiment, in which you placed +confidence, should have at first behaved so badly; but that they +had retrieved their conduct by their subsequent behaviour, and had +acted as you would have expected of them. I have been speaking very +severely to them, this morning; and I am afraid that the effect of +my words would be altogether lost, were I to report your +commendation of their conduct, without any expression of blame." + +Lord Wellington smiled. + +"Do it as you like, Colonel O'Connor. However, your regiment will +be placed in orders, today, as an exception to the severe censure +passed upon the troops who entered the town last night. And do you +really think that they will behave better, another time?" + +"I am sure they will, sir. I threatened to have the three hundred, +who had not joined when General Barnard arrived, transferred to +another regiment; and it was only upon their solemn promise, and by +the whole of the officers guaranteeing their conduct in the future, +that I forgave them. Moreover, every article taken in money, +jewels, or dress has been given up; and I have sent them to the +syndic, the money for distribution among the sufferers, the +jewellery and other things to be reclaimed by those from whom they +were taken. Their kits were being examined thoroughly, when I came +away; but I think that I can say, with certainty, that no single +stolen article will be found in them." + +"You have done very well, sir, very well, and your influence with +your men is surprising. + +"Your regiment will be quartered in the convent of San Jose. Other +divisions will move in this afternoon, and take the place of the +1st and 3rd brigades. Your regiment, therefore, may consider it a +high honour that they will be retained here. + +"I daresay that it will not be long before I find work for you to +do again. Lord Somerset will give you an order, at once, to take +possession of the convent." + +Terence returned to the regiment in high spirits. The work of +inspection was still going on. At its conclusion, Colonel Herrara +reported that no single article of plunder had been found. + +"I am gratified that it is so, Herrara," he said; "now let the +regiment form up in hollow square, again. + +"Men," he went on, "I have a message for you from Lord Wellington;" +and he repeated that which he had suggested. "Thus you see, men, +that the conduct of those who at once obeyed orders, and returned +to their ranks, has caused the misconduct of the others to be +forgiven; and Lord Wellington has still confidence that the +regiment will behave well, in future. The fact that all plunder has +been given up to be restored to its owners had, of course, some +effect in inducing him to believe this. I hope that every man will +take the lesson to heart, that the misdeeds of a few may bring +disgrace on a whole regiment; and that you will, in future, do +nothing to forfeit the name that the Minho regiment has gained, for +good conduct as well as for bravery." + +A loud cheer broke from the regiment, who then marched to the +convent of San Jose, and took up its quarters there. Two hours +later, the two Spanish nobles called upon Terence. The Count de +Montego introduced his companion. + +"We have only just heard where you were quartered," he went on. "We +have both been trying in vain, all the morning, to find you; not a +soldier of your regiment was to be seen in the streets and, +although we questioned many officers, none could say where you +were. + +"You went off so suddenly, last night, that I had no opportunity of +expressing our gratitude to you and your officers." + +"You said enough, and more than enough, last night, count," Terence +replied; "and we are all glad, indeed, that we were able to protect +both your houses. Lord Wellington informed me that you had called +upon him, and spoken highly of the service we had been able to +render you. Pray say no more about it. I can quite understand what +you feel, and I can assure you that no thanks are due to me, for +having done my duty as a British officer and a gentleman on so +lamentable and, I admit, disgraceful an occasion." + +"My wife and daughters, and those of the Marquis of Valoroso, are +all most anxious to see you, and thank you and your officers. They +were too frightened and agitated, last night, to say aught and, +indeed, as they say, they scarcely noticed your features. Can you +bring your officers round now?" + +"I am sorry to say I cannot do that, senor. They have to see after +the arrangements and comfort of the men, the getting of the +rations, the cooking, and so on. Tomorrow they will, I am sure, be +glad to pay you a visit." + +"But you can come, can you not, colonel?" + +"Yes, I am at liberty now, count, and shall be happy to pay my +respects to the senoras." + +"The more I hear," the marquis said, as they walked along together, +"of the events of last night, the more deeply I feel the service +that you have rendered us. I am unable to understand how it is that +your soldiers should behave with such outrageous violence to +allies." + +"It is very disgraceful, and greatly to be regretted, senor; but I +am bound to say that, as I have now gone through four campaigns, +and remember the conduct of the Spanish authorities to our troops +during our march to Talavera, our stay there, and on our retreat, I +am by no means surprised that among the soldiers, who are unable to +draw a distinction between the people and the authorities, there +should be a deep and lasting hatred. There is no such hatred for +the French. + +"Our men fought the battle of Talavera when weak with hunger; while +the Spaniards, who engaged to supply them with provisions, were +feasting. Our men were neglected and starved in the hospitals, and +would have died to a man had not, happily for them, the French +arrived, and treated them with the greatest humanity and kindness. +Soldiers do not forget this sort of thing. They know that, for the +last three years, the promises of the Spanish authorities have +never once been kept, and that they have had to suffer greatly from +the want of transport and stores promised. We can, of course, +discriminate between the people at large and their authorities; but +the soldiers can make no such distinction and, deeply as I deplore +what has happened here, I must own that the soldiers have at least +some excuse for their conduct." + +The two Spaniards were silent. + +"I cannot gainsay your statement," the Count de Montego said. +"Indeed, no words can be too strong for the conduct of both the +central, and all the provincial juntas." + +"Then, senor, how is it that the people do not rise and sweep them +away, and choose honest and resolute men in their place?" + +"That is a difficult question to answer, colonel. It may be said, +why do not all people, when ill governed, destroy their tyrants?" + +"Possibly because, as a rule, the tyrants have armies at their +backs; but here such armies as there are, although nominally under +the orders of the juntas, are practically led by their own +generals, and would obey them rather than the juntas. + +"However, that is a matter for the Spanish people alone. Although +we have suffered cruelly by the effects of your system, please +remember that I am not in the smallest degree defending the conduct +of our troops; but only trying to show that they had, at least, +some excuse for regarding the Spaniards as foes rather than as +allies; and that they had, as they considered, a long list of +wrongs to avenge." + +"There is truth in all you say, colonel. Unfortunately, men like +ourselves, who are the natural leaders of the people, hold aloof +from these petty provincial struggles; and leave all the public +offices to be filled with greedy adventurers, and have been +accustomed to consider work of any kind beneath us. The country is +paying dearly for it, now. I trust, when the war is over, seeing +how the country has suffered by our abstention from politics, and +from the affairs of our provinces, we shall put ourselves forward +to aid in the regeneration of Spain." + +By this time they had arrived at the door of the count's house. The +street had been to some extent cleared; but shattered doors, broken +windows, portions of costly furniture, and household articles of +all sorts still showed how terrible had been the destruction of the +previous night. Large numbers of the poorer class were at work +clearing the roads, as the city authorities had been ordered, by +Lord Wellington, to restore order in all the thoroughfares. + +The count led the way up to the drawing room. The countess and her +three daughters rose. + +"I introduced our brave defender to you last night," the count +said, "but in the half-darkened room, and in the confusion and +alarm that prevailed, you could have had but so slight a view of +him that I doubt whether you would know him again." + +"I should not, indeed," the countess said. "We have been speaking +of him ever since, but could not agree as to his appearance. + +"Oh, senor, no word can tell you how grateful we feel to you for +your defence of us, last night. What horrors we should have +suffered, had it not been for your interposition!" + +"I am delighted to have been of service to you, senora. It was my +duty, and it was a very pleasurable one, I can assure you; and I +pray you to say no more about it." + +"How is it that you speak Spanish so well, senor?" the countess +asked, after her daughters had shyly expressed their gratitude to +Terence. + +"I owe it chiefly to a muleteer of Salamanca. I was a prisoner +there last year, and he accompanied me for a month, after I had +made my escape from the prison. Also, I owe much to the guerilla +chief Moras, with whom I acted for six weeks, last autumn. I had +learned a little of your language before and, speaking Portuguese +fluently, I naturally picked it up without any great difficulty." + +"Your name is not unknown to us, colonel," the count said. "Living +so close to the frontier as we do, we naturally know much of what +passes in Portugal; and heard you spoken of as a famous leader of a +strong Portuguese regiment, that seems to have been in the thick of +all the fighting. But we heard that you had been taken prisoner by +the French, at the battle of Fuentes d'Onoro." + +"Yes, I had the misfortune to be captured by them, and was sent to +Salamanca; but I escaped by the aid of a girl who sold fruit in the +prison. A muleteer took me with him on a journey to Cadiz, and +thence I came round to Lisbon by ship." + +"You seem very young to have seen so much service, if you will +excuse my saying so, colonel." + +Terence smiled. + +"I have had great luck, senor; extraordinary luck." + +"Ah, colonel! We know how well you have deserved that luck, as you +call it; and you would never have been in command of such a +regiment if you had not done something very much out of the way to +attract the attention of your commanders." + +"I was not appointed to the regiment. I raised it myself; that is +to say, I came upon a number of Portuguese who had been called out +for service, but who had neither leader nor arms. Being anxious to +fight for their country, they asked me to be their leader, and I +accepted the offer. I found them docile and obedient and, with the +aid of two British troopers with me, a Spanish officer, and twelve +of his troopers, I established something like order and discipline +and, as we were fortunate in our first affair with the enemy, they +had faith in me, and I was able to raise them to a point of +discipline which is, I think, now quite equal to that of our own +regiments. Seeing that I had made myself useful with my corps, I +was confirmed in my command, and obtained the rank of colonel in +the Portuguese service; and am now a major in our own." + +"I hope, senor, that later on you will tell us the story of some of +your adventures. Be assured that the house and all in it are yours, +and that it is not for mere curiosity that we would hear your +story; but that, as we shall ever retain a grateful memory of what +you have done for us, everything relating to you is of deep +interest to us." + +After chatting for another quarter of an hour, Terence went with +the Count de Montego to the house next door. Here he received an +equally warm welcome from the wife and son and daughter of the +marquis. + +At both houses, he was warmly urged to take up his quarters there +during his stay at Ciudad; but explained that his place was with +his regiment. He promised that he would call frequently, when his +duties permitted him to do so. + +The next day the two Spanish noblemen came to him and, after parade +was over, carried off the greater portion of the officers to be +also introduced to their families. From that time, three or four of +the officers were always invited to dinner at each house. Terence +and Ryan frequently spent their evenings there, and their hosts +introduced them to many of the leading people in the town. + +The Spanish general, Carlos d'Espagna, was appointed governor of +Ciudad. Papers having been discovered, showing that many of the +inhabitants had acted as French emissaries, these he executed +without mercy. So rigorous, however, were his measures that it was +felt that more than sufficient blood had been shed and, +accordingly, several British deserters found in the town were +pardoned. Many others of these men had fallen, fighting desperately +in the breach; believing that there was no hope of mercy being +extended to them, if taken prisoners. + +In the siege the allies lost 1200 men and 90 officers; among whom +were Generals Crawford and MacKinnon, both killed, and General +Vandeleur, badly wounded. Lord Wellington was created Duke of +Ciudad Rodrigo by the Spaniards, and Earl of Wellington by the +English. The French loss was 300 killed and wounded, 1500 +prisoners, an immense store of ammunition, and 150 guns. + +Thanks to the vigilance with which the Minho regiment had guarded +the line of the fords of the Yeltes, no news of the siege was +received by Marmont in time for him to interfere with it. The +bridge over the Aqueda had been thrown across on the 1st of +January, and the siege began on the 8th but, even on the 12th, +nothing was known at Salamanca of the advance of the British army; +and it was not until the 15th, three days after the town had +fallen, that news that the siege had begun reached Marmont at +Valladolid. He had ordered his army to concentrate on Salamanca, +but it was not until the 25th that 35,000 men were collected there +and, on the following day, the news arrived of the fall of Ciudad. + +In the meantime large numbers of labourers were being employed in +repairing and strengthening the fortifications of that town, while +Wellington laboured in making preparations for the siege of +Badajoz. These, however, progressed but slowly, owing to the +refusal of the Portuguese government to supply transport for the +guns; or to furnish any facilities, whatever, for the supply of +food for the army. Wellington maintained his headquarters on the +Coa until the first week in March, and then moved south with the +greater part of the army; Ciudad being left entirely in the hands +of the Spaniards, the general supplying the governor with +provisions and stores, and explaining to him the object and +intention of the new works. + +A very strong force was left to guard the frontier of Portugal from +an invasion by Marmont; 50,000 men, of whom 20,000 were Portuguese, +being scattered along the line and guarding all the passes--the +Minho regiment being ordered to take post, again, at Pinhel. + +Terence left Ciudad with reluctance. He had all along been treated +as a dear friend, in the houses of the two Spanish noblemen, and +spent most of his evenings at one or other of them. He had been +obliged to tell, in full detail, all his adventures since he joined +the army. The rescue of his cousin from the convent at Oporto had +particularly excited the interest of the ladies, who asked +innumerable questions about her. + +Ryan frequently accompanied him, but his very slight knowledge of +Spanish prevented him from feeling the same pleasure at the +familiar intercourse. Bull and Macwitty were absolutely ignorant of +the language and, although Herrara now and then accepted +invitations to dinner, Terence and Ryan were the only two officers +of the regiment who felt at home among the Spaniards. + +Before the regiment marched off, each of the Portuguese officers +was presented with a handsome gold watch bearing an inscription +expressing the gratitude of the two Spanish noblemen, and their +families. Bull, Macwitty, and Herrara received, in addition, heavy +gold chains. Ryan received a splendid horse, with saddle, holsters, +and a brace of finely-finished pistols; and a similar present was +made to Terence. + +On the day when he went to say goodbye, he found the ladies of both +families assembled at the Count de Montego's. His host said: + +"You must consider the horses and equipment as a special present +from myself and the marquis, Colonel O'Connor; but the ladies of +our two families wish to give you a little memorial of their +gratitude." + +"They are memorials only," his wife said, "and are feeble +testimonies, indeed, of what we feel. These are the joint presents +of the marquise and her daughter, and of myself and my girls," and +she gave him a small case containing a superb diamond ring, of +great value; and then a large case containing a magnificent parure +of diamonds and emeralds. + +"This, senor, is for your future wife. She will value it, I am +sure, not so much for what it may be worth; but as a testimony of +the gratitude, of six Spanish ladies, for the inestimable services +that you rendered them. Perhaps they will have a special value in +her eyes, inasmuch as the stones all formed a small part of the +jewels of the two families that you saved from plunder. We have, of +course, had them reset; and there was no difficulty in getting this +done, for at present ours are, I believe, the only jewels in +Ciudad." + +"My dear countess," Terence said, much moved, "I do not like taking +so valuable a present." + +"What is it, in comparison to what you have done for us, senor? And +please do not suppose that we have seriously diminished our store. +Nowhere, I believe, have ladies such jewels as they have in Spain; +and few families can boast of finer ones than those of the marquise +and myself. And I can assure you that we shall value our jewels all +the more, when we think that some of their companions will be worn +by the wife of the gentleman who has preserved more than our +lives." + +"That is a royal gift, indeed," Herrara said, when Terence showed +him the jewels. "I should be afraid to say what they are worth. +Many of the old Spanish families possess marvellous jewels, relics +of the day when the Spaniards owned the wealth of the Indies and +the spoils of half Europe; and I should imagine that these must +have been among the finest stones in the possession of both +families. If I were you, colonel, I should take the very first +opportunity that occurs of sending them to England." + +"You may be sure that I shall do so, Herrara. They are not the sort +of things to be carried about in a cavalry wallet, and I have no +other place to stow them. As soon as we arrive at Pinhel, I will +get a strong box made to hold the two cases, and hand them over to +the paymaster there, to be sent down to Lisbon by the next convoy. +He sent home all the money that I did not want to keep by me, when +we were at Pinhel last." + +Two other Portuguese regiments, and a brigade of British infantry, +were stationed at Pinhel in readiness, at any moment, to march to +Almeida or Guarda, should Marmont make a forward movement; which +was probable enough, for it was evident, by the concentration of +his troops at Salamanca and Valladolid, that he had no intention of +marching south; but intended to leave it to Soult, with the armies +of Estremadura, Castile, and Andalusia, to relieve Badajoz. + +From time to time, news came from that town. The siege had begun on +the 17th of March, the attack being made on a fortified hill called +the Picurina; but at first the progress was slow. Incessant rain +fell, the ground became a swamp, and all operations had, several +times, to be suspended; while Phillipon, the brave officer who +commanded the garrison, made numerous sorties from the town, with +more or less success. + +On the night of the 25th, an assault was made on the strong fort on +the Picurina; which was captured after desperate fighting, and the +loss of 19 officers and 300 men, killed and wounded. On the +following day the trenches were opened for the attack upon the town +itself. The assailants laboured night and day and, on the 6th, a +breach had been effected in the work called the Trinidad; and this +was to be attacked by the 4th and light divisions. The castle was +at the same time to be assailed by Picton's division, while General +Power's Portuguese were to make a feint on the other side of the +Guadiana, and San Roque was to be stormed by the forces employed in +the trenches. + +The enterprise was well-nigh desperate. The breaches had not been +sufficiently cleared, and it was known that the enemy had thrown up +strong intrenchments behind them. Most of the guns were still in +position to sweep the breaches, and another week, at least, should +have been occupied in preparing the way for an assault. But +Wellington was forced here, as at Ciudad, to fight against time. +Soult was close at hand, and the British had not sufficient force +to give him battle, and at the same time to continue the siege of +the town; and it was therefore necessary either to carry the place +at once, at whatever cost of life, or to abandon the fruits of all +the efforts that had been made. + +Had Wellington's instructions been carried out, there would have +been no occasion, whatever, for the assault to have been delivered +until the breaches were greatly extended, the intrenchments +destroyed, and the guns silenced. The Portuguese ministry, however, +had thwarted him at every turn; and the siege could not be +commenced until a fortnight after the date fixed by Wellington. +This fortnight's delay cost the lives of 4000 British soldiers. + +Four of the assaults on the breaches failed. On the crest of these +Phillipon had erected a massive stockade, thickly bristling with +sabre blades. On the upper part of the breach, planks, similarly +studded, had been laid; while on either side a vast number of +shells, barrels of powder, faggots soaked in oil, and other +missiles and combustibles were piled, in readiness for hurling down +on the assailants; while the soldiers behind the defences had been +supplied with four muskets each. + +Never did British soldiers fight with such dogged bravery as was +here evinced. Again and again they dashed up the breach, the centre +of a volcano of fire; shells burst among them, cannon poured +volleys of grape through their ranks, the French plied them with +musketry, fireballs lit up the scene as if by day, mines exploded +under their feet; yet again and again, they reached the terrible +breastwork. But all efforts to climb it were fruitless. Numbers of +those in front were pressed to death against the sabres, by the +eager efforts of those behind to get up and, for hours, the assault +continued. At last, seeing the impossibility of success, and +scorning to retreat, the men gathered at the foot of the breach, +and there endured, sternly and silently, the murderous fire that +was maintained by the enemy. + +Picton, however, had gained possession of the castle. Walker, with +his command, had captured the bastion of San Vincenti; and part of +his command fought their way along the battlement towards the +breaches, while another marched through the town. Finding that the +town had been entered at several points, the defenders of the +breach gave way, and the soldiers poured into the town. + +Here even more hideous scenes of murder and rapine were perpetrated +than at Ciudad Rodrigo, and went on for two days and nights, +absolutely unchecked. It has never been satisfactorily explained +why, after the events in the former town, no precautions were +taken, by the general commanding, to prevent the recurrence of +scenes that brought disgrace on the British army, and for which he +cannot be held blameless. Five thousand men and officers were +killed or wounded in the siege; of these, three thousand five +hundred fell in the assault. + +The next three months passed without any action of importance. The +discipline of the army had, as might have been expected, +deteriorated greatly as a consequence of the unbridled license +permitted to the soldiers after the capture of the two fortresses, +and the absence of any punishment, whatever, for the excesses there +committed. Lord Wellington complained bitterly, in his letters +home, of the insubordination of the troops; of the outrages +committed upon the peasantry, especially by detached parties; and +of the general disobedience of orders. But he who had permitted the +license and excesses to be carried on, unchecked and unpunished, +cannot but be considered largely responsible for the natural +consequences of such laxity. + +In May, heavy rains prevented any movement on either side; except +that the town of Almaraz, a most important position at the bridge +across the Tagus, permitting Soult and Marmont to join hands, was +captured by surprise by General Hill; the works, which had been +considered almost impregnable, being carried by assault in the +course of an hour. This was one of the most brilliant exploits of +the war. + +Wellington had moved north, and was again on the Aqueda and, on the +13th of June, rain having ceased, he crossed the river and, on the +16th, arrived within six miles of Salamanca, and drove a French +division across the Tormes. On the 17th the river was crossed, both +above and below the town, and the forts defending it were at once +invested. Marmont had, that day, retired with two divisions of +infantry and some cavalry; and was followed immediately by a strong +British division. + +The Minho regiment had been one of the first to take post on the +Aqueda, after Wellington's arrival on the Coa; and moved forward in +advance of the army, which was composed of 24,000 British troops, +with a Spanish division and several Portuguese regiments. + +As soon as Marmont had retired, Salamanca went wild with joy; +although the circle of forts still prevented the British from +entering. The chief of these was San Vincenti, which stood on a +perpendicular cliff, overhanging the Tormes. It was flanked by two +other strong forts; from which, however, it was divided by a +ravine. The battering train brought with the army was altogether +inadequate--only four eighteen-pounders and three twenty-four-pound +howitzers were available--and the forts were far stronger than +Wellington had been led to expect. + +A few guns had been sent forward by General Hill and, on the 18th, +seven pieces opened fire on San Vincenti. The next day some more +howitzers arrived, and a breach was made in the wall of the +convent; but the ammunition was exhausted, and the fire ceased +until more could be brought up. + +That day, however, Marmont, with a force of 20,000 men, was seen +advancing to the relief of the forts. The British army at once +withdrew from the neighbourhood of the convent, and took up its +position, in order of battle, on the heights of San Christoval. + +On the 21st, three divisions of infantry and a brigade of cavalry +joined Marmont, raising his force to 40,000 men. The French, the +next night, sent a portion of their force across the Tormes and, +when daylight broke, the German cavalry, which had been placed to +guard the ford, was seen retiring before 12,000 French infantry, +with twenty guns. Graham was also sent across the Tormes with his +division, which was of about the same strength as the French force +and, as the light division was also following, the French retired, +recrossed the ford, and rejoined the main body of their army. + +The next night the batteries again opened fire on San Vincenti and, +on the 27th, the fort and convent were in a blaze. One of the other +forts was breached, and both surrendered, just as the storming +parties were advancing to the assault; and Marmont retreated the +same night across the Douro, by the roads to Tordesillas and Toro. + +As soon as it was possible to enter Salamanca, Terence rode down +into the town, accompanied by Ryan. The forts had not yet +surrendered, but their hands were so full that they had no time to +devote to annoying small parties of British officers passing into +the town. Terence had noted down the address that Nita had given +him, and at once rode there; after having, with some difficulty, +discovered the lane in which the house was situated. An old man +came to the door. Terence dismounted. + +"What can I do for you, senor?" + +"I wanted to ask you if your niece, Nita, is still staying with +you?" + +The man looked greatly surprised at the question. + +"She has done no harm, I hope?" he asked. + +"Not at all, but I wish to speak to her. Is she married yet to +Garcia, the muleteer?" + +The old man looked still more surprised. + +"No, senor. Garcia is away, he is no longer a muleteer." + +"Well, you have not answered me if your niece is here." + +"She is here, senor, but she is not in the house at this moment. +She returned here from her father's, last autumn. The country was +so disturbed that it was not right that young women should remain +in the villages." + +"Will you tell her that a British officer will call to see her, in +half an hour, and beg her to remain in until I come?" + +"I will tell her, senor." + +Terence went at once to a silversmith's, and bought the handsomest +set of silver jewelry, such as the peasants wore, that he had in +his shop; including bracelets, necklaces, large filigree hairpin +and earrings, and various other ornaments. + + + +Chapter 20: Salamanca. + + +"She is a lucky girl, Terence," Ryan said, as they quitted the +shop. "She will be the envy of all the peasant girls in the +neighbourhood, when she goes to church in all that finery, to be +married to her muleteer." + +"It has only cost about twenty pounds, and I value my freedom at a +very much higher price than that, Dick. If I had not escaped, I +should not have been in that affair with Moras that got me my +promotion and, at the present time, should be in some prison in +France." + +"You would not have got your majority, I grant, Terence; but +wherever they shut you up, it is morally certain that you would +have been out of it, long before this. I don't think anything less +than being chained hand and foot, and kept in an underground +dungeon, would suffice to hold you." + +"I hope that I shall never have to try that experiment, Dicky," +Terence laughed; "and now, I think you had better go into this +hotel, and order lunch for us both. It is just as well not to +attract attention, by two of us riding to that lane. We have not +done with Marmont, yet, and it may be that the French will be +masters of Salamanca again, before long, and it is just as well not +to get the old man or the girl talked about. I will leave my horse +here, too. See that both of them get a good feed; they have not had +overmuch since we crossed the Aqueda." + +As there were a good many British officers in the town, no special +attention was given to Terence as he walked along through the +street, which was gay with flags. When he reached the house in the +lane, the old man was standing at the door. + +"Nita is in now, senor. She has not told me why you wanted to see +her. She said it was better that she should not do so, but she +thought she knew who it was." + +The girl clapped her hands, as he entered the room to which the old +man pointed. + +"Then it is you, Senor Colonello. I wondered, when we heard the +English were coming, if you would be with them. Of course, I heard +from Garcia that you had gone safely on board a ship at Cadiz. Then +I wondered whether, if you did come here, you would remember me." + +"Then that was very bad of you, Nita. You ought to have been quite +sure that I should remember you. If I had not done so, I should +have been an ungrateful rascal, and should have deserved to die in +the next French prison I got into." + +"How well you speak Spanish now, senor!" + +"Yes; that was principally due to Garcia, but partly from having +been in Spain for six weeks, last autumn. I was with Moras, and we +gave the French a regular scare." + +"Then it was you, senor! We heard that an English officer was in +command of the troops who cut all the roads, and took numbers of +French prisoners, and defeated 5000 of their troops and, as they +said, nearly captured Valladolid and Burgos." + +"That was an exaggeration, Nita. Still, we managed to do them a +good deal of damage, and kept the French in this part of the +country pretty busy. + +"And now, Nita, I have come to fulfil my promise," and he handed +her the box in which the jeweller had packed up his purchases. + +"These are for your wedding, Nita, and if it comes off while we are +in this part of the country, I shall come and dance at it." + +The girl uttered cries of delight, as she opened parcel after +parcel. + +"Oh, senor, it is too much, too much altogether!" she cried, as she +laid them all out on the table before her. + +"Not a bit of it," Terence said. "But for you, I should be in +prison now. If they had been ten times as many, and ten times as +costly, I should still have felt your debtor, all my life. + +"And where is Garcia now?" + +"He has gone to join Morillo," she said. "He always said that, as +soon as the English came to our help, he should go out; so, six +weeks ago, he sold all his mules and bought a gun, and went off." + +"I am sorry not to have seen him," Terence said. "And now, Nita, +when he returns you are to give him this little box. It contains a +present to help you both to start housekeeping, in good style. You +see that I have put your name and his both on it. No one can say +what may happen in war. Remember that this is your joint property; +and if, by ill fortune, he should not come back again, then it +becomes yours." + +"Oh, senor, you are altogether too good! Oh, I am a lucky girl! I +am sure that no maid ever went to church before with such splendid +ornaments. How envious all the girls will be of me!" + +"And I expect the men will be equally envious of Garcia, Nita. Now, +if you will take my advice, you will not show these things to +anyone at present; but will hide them in the box, in some very safe +place, until you are quite sure that the French will never come +back again. If your neighbours saw them, some ill-natured person +might tell the French that you had received them from an English +officer, and then it might be supposed that you had been acting as +a spy for us; so it is better that you should tell no one, not even +your uncle--that is, if you have not already mentioned it to him." + +"I have never told him," the girl said. "He is a good man and very +kind; but he is very timid, and afraid of getting into trouble. If +he asks me who you are and what you wanted, I shall tell him that +you are an English officer who was in prison, in the convent; that +you always bought your fruit of me, and said, if you ever came to +Salamanca again, you would find me out." + +"That will do very well. Now I will say goodbye, Nita. If we remain +here after the French have retreated, I will come and see you +again; for there will be so many English officers here that I would +not be noticed. But there may be a battle any day; or Marmont may +fall back, and we should follow him; so that I may not get an +opportunity again." + +"I hope you will come, I do hope you will come! I will bury all +these things, this evening, in the ground in the kitchen, after my +uncle has gone to bed." + +"Well, goodbye, Nita. I must be off now, as I have a friend with +me. When you see Garcia, you can tell him that you have given me a +kiss. I am sure he won't mind." + +"I should not care if he did," the girl said saucily, as she held +up her face. "Goodbye, senor. I shall always think of you, and pray +the Virgin to watch over you." + +After Marmont fell back across the Douro there was a pause in the +operations and, as the British army was quartered in and around +Salamanca, the city soon swarmed with British soldiers; and +presented a scene exactly similar to that which it had worn when +occupied by Moore's army, nearly four years before. + +"What fun it was, Terence," Ryan said, "when we frightened the +place out of its very senses, by the report that the French were +entering the town!" + +"That is all very well, Dick; but I think that you and I were just +as much frightened as the Spaniards were, when we saw how the thing +had succeeded, and that all our troops were called out. There is no +saying what they would have done to us, had they found out who +started the report. The very least thing that would have happened +would have been to be tried by court martial, and dismissed from +the service; and I am by no means sure that worse than that would +not have befallen us." + +"Yes, it would have been an awful business, if we had been found +out. Still, it was a game, wasn't it? What an awful funk they were +in! It was the funniest thing I ever saw. Things have changed since +then, Terence, and I am afraid we have quite done with jokes of +that sort." + +"I should hope so, Dick. I think that I can answer for myself, but +I am by no means sure as to you." + +"I like that," Ryan said indignantly. "You were always the leader +in mischief. I believe you would be, now, if you had the chance." + +"I don't know," Terence replied, a little more seriously than he +had before spoken. "I have been through a wonderful number of +adventures, since then; and I don't pretend that I have not enjoyed +them in something of the same spirit in which we enjoyed the fun we +used to have together; but you see, I have had an immense deal of +responsibility. I have two thousand men under me and, though Bull +and Macwitty are good men, so far as the carrying out of an order +goes, they are still too much troopers, seldom make a suggestion, +and never really discuss any plan I suggest; so that the +responsibility of the lives of all these men really rests entirely +upon my shoulders. It has been only when I have been separated from +them, as when I was a prisoner, that I have been able to enjoy an +adventure in the same sort of way that we used to do, together." + +"I little thought then, Terence, that in three years and a half, +for that is about what it is, I should be a captain and you a +major--for I don't count your Portuguese rank one, way or the +other." + +"Of course, you have had two more years' regimental work than I +have had. It would have been much better for me if I had had a +longer spell of it, too. Of course, I have been extraordinarily +fortunate, and it has been very jolly; but I am sure it would have +been better for me to have had more experience as a subaltern, +before all this began." + +"Well, I cannot say I see it, Terence. At any rate, you have had a +lot more regimental work than most officers; for you had to form +your regiment, teach them discipline, and everything else; and I +don't think that you would have done it so well, if you had been +ground down into the regular regimental pattern, and had come to +think that powder and pipe clay were actual indispensables in +turning out soldiers." + +The quiet time at Salamanca lasted a little over a fortnight for, +in the beginning of July, Lord Wellington heard that, in obedience +to King Joseph's reiterated orders, Marmont, having received +reinforcements, was preparing to recross the Douro; that Soult was +on the point of advancing into Portugal; and that the king himself, +with a large army, was on the way to join Marmont. + +The latter, indeed, was not to have moved till the king joined him +but, believing that his own army was ample for the purpose; and +eager to gain a victory, unhampered by the king's presence, he +suddenly crossed at Tordesillas, and it was only by his masterly +movements, and a sharp fight at Castile, that Wellington succeeded +in concentrating his army on the Aqueda. The British general drew +up his army in order of battle, on the heights of Vallesa; but the +position was a strong one, Marmont knew the country perfectly and, +instead of advancing to the attack, he started at daybreak on the +20th, marched rapidly up the river, and crossed it before any +opposition could be offered, and then marched for the Tormes. By +this movement he had turned Wellington's right flank, was as near +Salamanca as were the British, and had it in his power, unless +checked, to place himself on the road between Salamanca and Ciudad, +and so to cut their line of retreat. + +Seeing his position thus turned, Wellington made a corresponding +movement, and the two armies marched along lines of hills parallel +with each other, the guns on both sides occasionally firing. All +day long they were but a short distance apart and, at any moment, +the battle might have been brought on. But Wellington had no +opportunity for fighting, except at a disadvantage; and Marmont, +having gained the object for which he had manoeuvred, was well +content to maintain his advantage. At nightfall the British were on +the heights of Cabeca and Aldea Rubia, and so secured their former +position at San Christoval. + +Marmont, however, had reached a point that gave him the command of +the ford at Huerta; and had it in his power to cross the Tormes +when he pleased, and either to recross at Salamanca, or to cut the +road to Ciudad. He had proved, too, that his army could outmarch +the British for, although they had already made a march of some +distance, when the race began, he had gained ground throughout the +day, in spite of the efforts of the British to keep abreast of him. +Moreover, Marmont now had his junction with the king's army, +approaching from Madrid, securely established; and could either +wait for his arrival, or give battle if he saw a favourable +opportunity. + +Wellington's position was grave. He had not only to consider his +adversary's force, but the whole course of the war, which a +disaster would imperil. He had the safety of the whole Peninsula to +consider, and a defeat would not only entail the loss of the +advantage he had gained in Spain, but would probably decide the +fate of Portugal, also. He determined, however, to cover Salamanca +till the last moment, in hopes that Marmont might make some error +that would afford him an opportunity of dealing a heavy blow. + +The next morning the allies occupied their old position at San +Christoval, while the French took possession of Alba; whence the +Spaniards had been withdrawn, without notice, to Wellington. The +evening before, the British general had sent a despatch to the +Spanish commander, saying that he feared that he should be unable +to hold his position. The messenger was captured by the French +cavalry; and Marmont, believing that Wellington was about to +retreat, and fearing that he might escape him, determined to fight +rather than wait for the arrival of the king. + +The French crossed the Tormes by the fords of Huerta and Alba, the +British by other fords above Salamanca. This movement was performed +while a terrible storm raged. Many men and horses of the 5th +Dragoon Guards were killed by the lightning; while hundreds of the +picketed horses broke their ropes, and galloped wildly about. + +[Illustration: Plan of the Forts and Operations round Salamanca.] + +The position of the British army in the morning was very similar to +that occupied by a portion of it, when besieging the forts of +Salamanca; extending from the ford of Santa Marta to the heights +near the village of Arapiles. This line covered Salamanca; but it +was open to Marmont to march round Wellington's right, and so cut +his communications with Ciudad. During the night, Wellington heard +that the French would be joined, in the course of two days, by +twenty guns and 2000 cavalry; and resolved to retire before these +came up, unless Marmont afforded him some opportunity of fighting +to advantage. + +The latter, however, was too confident of victory to wait for the +arrival of this reinforcement, still less for that of the king and, +at daybreak, he took possession of a village close to the British, +thereby showing that he was resolved to force on a battle. + +Near this were two detached hills, called the Arapiles or +Hermanitos. They were steep and rugged. As the French were seen +approaching, a Portuguese regiment was sent to seize them; and +these gained the one nearest to them, while the French took +possession of the second. The 7th division assailed the height +first, and gained and captured half of it. + +Had Wellington now wished to retire, it would have been at once +difficult and dangerous to attempt the movement. His line was a +long one, and it would have been impossible to withdraw, without +running the risk of being attacked while in movement, and driven +back upon the Tormes. Ignorant of Marmont's precise intentions--for +the main body of the French army was almost hidden in the +woods--Wellington could only wait until their plans were developed. +He therefore contented himself with placing the 4th division on a +slope behind the village of Arapiles, which was held by the light +companies of the Guards. The 5th and 6th divisions were massed +behind the hill, where a deep depression hid them from the sight of +the enemy. + +For some time things remained quiet, except that the French and +British batteries, on the top of the two Hermanitos, kept up a duel +with each other. During the pause, the French cavalry had again +crossed the Tormes, by one of the fords used in the night by the +British; and had taken post at Aldea Tejarda, thus placing +themselves between the British army and the road to Ciudad. This +movement, however, had been covered by the woods. + +About twelve o'clock, fearing that Wellington would assail the +Hermanito held by him, Marmont brought up two divisions to that +point; and stood ready to oppose an attack which Wellington, +indeed, had been preparing--but had abandoned the idea, fearing +that such a movement would draw the whole army into a battle, on a +disadvantageous line. The French marshal, however, fearing that +Wellington would retreat by the Ciudad road, before he could place +a sufficient force on that line to oppose the movement, sent +General Maucune with two divisions, covered by fifty guns and +supported by cavalry, to move along the southern ridge of the basin +and menace that road; holding in hand six divisions, in readiness +to fall upon the village of Arapiles, should the British interfere +with Maucune's movement. + +The British line had now pivoted round, until its position extended +from the Hermanito to near Aldea Tejarda. + +In order to occupy the attention of the British, and prevent them +from moving, the French force attacked the village of Arapiles, and +a fierce struggle took place. Had Marmont waited until Clausel's +division, still behind, came up and occupied the ridge, so as to +connect the French main army with Maucune's division, their +position would have been unassailable; but the fear that Wellington +might escape had overcome his prudence and, as Maucune advanced, a +great gap was left between his division and that of Marmont. + +As soon as Wellington perceived the mistake, he saw that his +opportunity had come. Orders were despatched in all directions and, +suddenly, the two divisions, hidden from the sight of the French +behind the Hermanito, dashed down into the valley; where two other +divisions joined them. The 4th and 5th were in front, with +Bradford's Portuguese; and the 6th and 7th formed the second line; +while the Spanish troops marched between them and the 3rd division, +forming the extreme right at Aldea Tejarda. The light divisions of +Pack's Portuguese and the heavy cavalry remained in reserve, on +high ground behind them. In spite of a storm of bullets from +Maucune's guns, the leading divisions marched steadily forward and, +while the third division dashed across the valley and, climbing the +ridge, barred his progress, the main line advanced to attack his +flank. + +Marmont, seeing the terrible danger in which Maucune was involved, +sent officer after officer to hasten up the troops from the forest +and, with his centre, prepared to attack the English Hermanito, and +to drive them from that portion of the village they still held; but +as he was hurrying to join Maucune a shell exploded near him, +hurling him to the ground with a broken arm, and two deep wounds in +his side. This misfortune was fatal to the French chances. +Confusion ensued, and the movements of the troops were paralyzed. + +It was about five o'clock when the 3rd division, under Pakenham, +fell upon Maucune's leading division; and two batteries of +artillery suddenly opened fire, on their flank, from the opposite +height. Having no expectation of such a stroke; and believing that +the British were, ere this, in full retreat along the Ciudad road, +the French were hurrying forward, lengthening out into a long, +straggling line. + +The onslaught of Pakenham's division was irresistible, supported as +it was by guns and cavalry. Nevertheless, the French bore +themselves gallantly, forming line as they marched forward, while +their guns poured showers of grape into the approaching infantry. +Nothing, however, could stop them. Pressing forward, they broke the +half-formed lines into fragments, and drove them back in confusion +upon the columns behind. The French cavalry endeavoured to check +the British advance, by a charge on their flank; but were repulsed +by the infantry, and the British light horsemen charged, and drove +them off the field. + +Pushing forward, Pakenham came upon the second half of the division +they had defeated, formed up on the wooded heights; one face being +opposed to him, and the other to the 5th division, Bradford's +Portuguese, and a mass of cavalry moving across the basin. The +French had been already driven out of Arapiles, and were engaged in +action with the 4th division; but the battle was to some extent +retrieved, for Clausel's division had arrived from the forest and +reinforced Maucune; and spread across the basin, joining hands with +the divisions massed near the French Hermanito. + +Marmont had been carried off the field. Bonnet, who had succeeded +him, was disabled; and the chief command devolved on Clausel, a +general of talent, possessing great coolness and presence of mind. +His dispositions were excellent, but his troops were broken up into +lines, columns, and squares. A strong wind raised the sandy soil in +clouds of dust, the sinking sun shone full in the faces of his +troops and, at once, concealed the movements of their enemies from +them, and prevented them from acting with any unity. + +Suddenly, two heavy bodies of light and heavy cavalry broke from +the cloud of dust and fell upon them. Twelve hundred Frenchmen were +trampled down and, as the cavalry rode on, the third division ran +forward, at the double, through the gap that they had formed. Line +after line of the French infantry was broken and scattered, and +five of their guns captured by one of the squadrons. Two thousand +prisoners were taken, and the three divisions that Maucune had +commanded were a mass of fugitives. + +In the meantime, a terrible battle was raging in the centre. Here +Clausel had gathered three fresh divisions and, behind these, the +fugitives from the left rallied. He placed three others, supported +by the whole of the cavalry, to cover the retreat; while yet +another remained behind the French Hermanito. Pack's Portuguese +were advancing against it, and arrived nearly at the summit, when +the French reserves leapt from the rocks and opened a tremendous +fire on their front and left flank; and the Portuguese were driven +down the hill, with much loss. Almost at the same moment, one of +the regiments of the 4th division were suddenly charged by 1200 +French soldiers, hidden behind a declivity, and driven back with +heavy loss. + +For a moment, it seemed that the fate of the battle might yet be +changed; but Wellington had the strongest reserve, the sixth +division was brought up and, though the French fought obstinately, +Clausel was obliged to abandon the Hermanito; and the army began to +fall back, the movement being covered by their guns and the gallant +charges of their cavalry. + +The whole of the British reserves were now brought into action, and +hotly pressed them; but, for the most part maintaining their order, +the French fell back into the woods and, favoured by the darkness, +and nobly covered by Maucune, who had been strongly reinforced, +they drew off with comparatively little loss, thanks to the +Spaniards' abandonment of the fort guarding the ford at Alba. + +Believing that the French must make for the ford of Huerta, +Wellington had greatly strengthened his force on that side and, +after a long march to the ford, was bitterly disappointed, on +arriving there at midnight, to find that there was no sign of the +enemy; although it was not until morning that he learned that they +had passed unmolested over the ford of Alba. Had it not been for +the Spanish disobedience and folly, Marmont's whole army would have +had no resource but to surrender. + +Marmont's strength when the fight began was 42,000 infantry and +cavalry, and 74 guns. Wellington had 46,000 infantry and cavalry, +and 60 pieces; but this included a considerable Spanish force and +one of their batteries, and 10,000 Portuguese who, however, could +not be reckoned as good troops. The pursuit of the French was taken +up hotly next morning, and they were chased for forty miles that +day but, the next morning, they eluded their pursuers, marched to +Valladolid, drew off the garrison there, and left it to be occupied +by the British the following day. + +The Minho regiment had been, two days before the battle, attached +to the 6th division. For a time, being in the second line, they +looked on, impatient spectators of the fight; but, at the crisis of +the battle, they were brought up to check Clausel's impetuous +counter attack, and nowhere was the struggle fiercer. Hulse's +brigade, to which they were attached, bore more than its share of +the fighting; and the 11th and the 61st, together, had but 160 men +and officers left when the battle was over. The Portuguese fought +valiantly, and the fact that their countrymen had been defeated, in +their attempt to capture the French Hermanito, inspired them with a +fierce determination to show that Portuguese troops could fight as +well as their allies. They pushed forward well abreast of the other +regiments of the brigade, and suffered equally. + +In vain the French attempted to check their advance. Showers of +grape swept their ranks; volleys of musketry, at a distance of but +a few yards, withered up their front lines and, for a time, a +hand-to-hand fight with bayonets raged. In the terrible roar of +artillery and musketry, words of command were unheard; but the men +mechanically filled up the gaps in their ranks, and the one thought +of all was to press forward until, at length, the French yielded +and fell sullenly back, disputing every yard of the ground, and a +fresh division took up the pursuit. + +The order to halt was given. The men looked round, confused and +dazed, as if waking from a dream. Grimed with powder, soaked with +perspiration, breathless and haggard, many seemed scarcely able to +keep their feet; and every limb trembled at the sudden cessation of +the terrible strain. Then, as they looked round their ranks and to +the ground they had passed over, now so thickly dotted with the +dark uniforms, hoarse sobs broke from them; and men who had gone +unflinchingly through the terrible struggle burst into tears. The +regiment had gone into action over 2000 strong. Scarce 1200 +remained unwounded. Of the officers, Bull had fallen, desperately +wounded; Macwitty had been shot through the head. + +[Illustration: A shell had struck Terence's horse.] + +A shell had struck Terence's horse and, bursting, had carried off +the rider's leg above the knee. The men near him uttered a +simultaneous cry as he fell and, regardless of the fight, oblivious +to the storm of shot and shell, had knelt beside him. Terence was +perfectly sensible. + +"Do one of you give me my flask out of my holster," he said, "and +another cut off the leg of my trousers, as high as you can above +the wound. That is right. Now for the bandages." + +As every soldier in the regiment carried one in his hat, half a +dozen of these were at once produced. + +"Is it bleeding much?" he asked. + +"Not much, colonel." + +"That is fortunate. Now find a smooth round stone. Lay it on the +inside of the leg, just below where you have cut the trousers. + +"Now put a bandage round and round, as tightly as you can do it. +That is right. + +"Now take the ramrod of one of my pistols, put it through the +bandage, and then twist it. You need not be afraid of hurting me; +my leg is quite numbed, at present. That is right. + +"Put another bandage on, so as to hold the ramrod in its place. Now +fetch a flannel shirt from my valise, fold it up so as to make a +pad that will go over the wound, and bandage it there firmly. + +"Give me another drink, for I feel faint." + +When all was done, he said: + +"Put my valise under my head, and throw my cloak over me. Thank +you, I shall do very well now. Go forward and join the regiment. + +"I am done for, this time," he thought to himself, when the men +left him. "Still, I may pull through. There are many who have had a +leg shot off and recovered, and there is no reason why I should not +do so. There has not been any great loss of blood. I suppose that +something has been smashed up, so that it cannot bleed. + +"Ah, here comes the doctor!" + +The doctor was one of several medical students who had enlisted in +the regiment, fighting and drilling with the rest but, when +occasion offered, acting as surgeons. + +"I have just heard the news, Colonel. The regiment is heartbroken +but, in their fury, they went at the French facing them and +scattered them like sheep. Canovas, who told me, said that you were +not bleeding much, and that he and the others had bandaged you up +according to your instructions. + +"Let me see. It could not have been better," he said. + +He felt Terence's pulse. + +"Wonderfully good, considering what a smash you have had. Your +vitality must be marvellous and, unless your wound breaks out +bleeding badly, I have every hope that you will get over it. Robas +and Salinas will be here in a minute, with a stretcher for you; and +we will get you to some quiet spot, out of the line of fire." + +Almost immediately, four men came up with the stretcher and, by the +surgeon's orders, carried Terence to a quiet spot, sheltered by a +spur of the hill from the fire. + +"There is nothing more you can do for me now, doctor?" + +"Nothing. It would be madness to take the bandages off, at +present." + +"Then please go back to the others. There must be numbers there who +want your aid far more than I do. + +"You can stay with me, Leon; but first go back to where my horse is +lying, and bring here the saddle and the two blankets strapped +behind it. I don't feel any pain to speak of, but it seems to me +bitterly cold." + +The man presently returned with the saddle and blankets. Two others +accompanied him. Both had been hit too seriously to continue with +the regiment. Their wounds had been already bandaged. + +"We thought that we should like to be near you, colonel, if you do +not mind." + +"Not at all. First, do each of you take a sip at my flask. + +"Leon, I wish you would find a few sticks, and try to make a fire. +It would be cheerful, although it might not give much warmth." + +It was dark now. It was five o'clock when the 3rd division threw +itself across Maucune's line of march, and the battle had begun. It +was dark long before it ended but, during the three hours it had +lasted, the French had lost a marshal, seven generals, and 12,500 +men and officers, killed, wounded, or prisoners; while on the +British side a field marshal, four generals, and nearly 6000 +officers and soldiers were killed or wounded. Indeed, the battle +itself was concentrated into an hour's hard fighting; and a French +officer, describing it, said that 40,000 men were defeated in forty +minutes. + +Presently the din of battle died out and, as soon as it did so, +Herrara and Ryan both hurried to the side of Terence. + +"My dear Terence," Ryan said, dropping on his knees beside him, +"this is terrible. When I heard the news I was almost beside +myself. As to the men, terrible as their loss is, they talk of no +one but you." + +"I think I shall pull through all right, Ryan. At any rate, the +doctor says he thinks I shall, and I think so myself. I am heartily +glad that you and Herrara have gone through it all right. What are +our losses?" + +"I don't know, yet. We have not had time to count, but not far from +half our number. Macwitty is killed, Bull desperately wounded. +Fully half the company officers are killed." + +"That is terrible indeed, Ryan. Poor fellows! Poor fellows! + +"Well, I should say, Herrara, that if you get no orders to join in +the pursuit, you had best get all the wounded collected and brought +here, and let the regiment light fires and bivouac. There is no +chance of getting medical assistance, outside the regiment, +tonight. Of course, all the British surgeons will have their hands +full with their own men. Still, I only suggest this, for of course +you are now in command." + +The wounded had all fallen within a comparatively short distance, +and many were able to walk in. The rest were carried, each in a +blanket, with four men at the corners. Under Ryan's directions, the +unwounded scattered over the hillside and soon brought back a large +supply of bushes and faggots. A number of fires were lighted, and +the four surviving medical students, and one older surgeon, at once +began the work of attending the wounded; taking the more serious +cases first, leaving the less important ones to be bandaged by +their comrades. Many wounded men from other regiments, attracted by +the light of the fires, came up; and these, too, received what aid +the Portuguese could give them. + +The next morning Terence was carried down, at daybreak, on a +stretcher to Salamanca; where the town was in a state of the +wildest excitement over the victory. As they entered the gates, an +officer asked the bearers: + +"Who is it?" + +"Colonel O'Connor, of the Minho regiment." + +The officer knew Terence personally. + +"I am sorry, indeed, to see you here, O'Connor. Not very serious, I +hope?" + +"A leg cut clean off above the knee, with the fragment of a shell, +Percival; but I fancy that I am going to get over it." + +"Carry him to the convent of Saint Bernard," the officer said, to +the Portuguese captain who was in command of the party, which +consisted of 400 men carrying 100 wounded. "All officers are to be +taken there, the others to the San Martin convent. + +"I will look in and see you as soon as I can, O'Connor; and hope to +find you going on well." + +But few wounded officers had as yet been brought in and, as soon as +Terence was carried into a ward, two of the staff surgeons examined +his wound. + +"You are doing wonderfully well, colonel," the senior officer said. +"You must have received good surgical attention, immediately on +being wounded. Judging by your pulse, you can have lost but little +blood." + +"It hardly bled at all, Doctor, and I had it bandaged up by two of +my own men. I have seen a good many serious wounds, in the course +of the last four years; and know pretty well what ought to be +done." + +"It has been uncommonly well done, anyhow. I think we had better +not disturb the bandages, for a few days. If no bleeding sets in by +that time, clots of blood will have formed, and you will be +comparatively safe. + +"Your pulse is very quiet. Your men must have carried you down very +carefully." + +"If I had been a basket of eggs, they could not have taken more +care of me. I was scarcely conscious of any movement." + +"Well, you have youth and good health and good spirits in your +favour. If all our patients took things as cheerfully as you do, +there would not be so many of them slip through our hands." + +Bull, who had been brought in immediately after Terence, was next +attended to. He was unconscious. He had been struck by a round shot +in the shoulder, which had not only smashed the bone, but almost +carried away the upper part of the arm. + +"An ugly wound," the surgeon said to his colleague. "At any rate, +we may as well take off the arm while he is unconscious. It will +save him a second shock, and we can better bandage the wound when +it is removed." + +A low moan was the only sign that the wounded man had any +consciousness that the operation was being performed. + +"Will he get over it, Doctor?" Terence asked, when the surgeon had +finished. + +"There is just a chance, but it is a faint one. Has he been a sober +man?" + +"Very; I can answer for the last four years, at any rate. All the +Portuguese officers were abstemious men; and I think that Bull felt +that it would not do for him, commanding a battalion, to be less +sober than they were." + +"That increases his chance. Men who drink have everything against +them when they get a severe wound; but he has lost a great deal of +blood, and the shock has, of course, been a terrible one." + +An orderly was told to administer a few spoonfuls of brandy and +water, and the surgeon then moved on to the next bed. + + + +Chapter 21: Home Again. + + +The next morning, one of the surgeons brought a basketful of fruit +to Terence. + +"There is a young woman outside, colonel," he said, with a slight +smile, "who was crying so bitterly that I was really obliged to +bring this fruit up to you. She said you would know who she was, +and was heartbroken that she could not be allowed to come up to +nurse you. She said that she had heard, from one of your men, of +your wound. I told her that it was quite impossible that any +civilian should enter the hospital, but said that I would take her +fruit up and, if she would come every day at five o'clock in the +afternoon, when we went off duty for an hour, I would tell her how +you were going on." + +"She used to sell fruit to the prisoners here," Terence said, "and +it was entirely by her aid that I effected my escape, last year; +and she got a muleteer, to whom she is engaged, to take me down +from here to Cadiz. I bought her a present when we entered the town +and, the other day, told her I hoped to dance at her wedding before +long. However, that engagement will not come off. My dancing days +are over." + +The surgeon felt his pulse. + +"There is very little fever," he said. "So far you are going on +marvellously; but you must not be disappointed if you get a sharp +turn, presently. You can hardly expect to get through a wound like +this without having a touch, and perhaps a severe one, of fever." + +"Is there any harm in my eating fruit?" + +"I would not eat any, but you can drink some of the juice, mixed +with water. I hope we shall have everything comfortable by tonight; +of course, we are all in the rough, at present. Although many of +the doctors of the town have been helping us, I don't think there +is one medical officer in the army who has taken off his coat since +the wounded began to come in, yesterday morning." + +That night Terence's wound became very painful. Inflammation, +accompanied of course with fever, set in and, for a fortnight, he +was very ill. At the end of that time matters began to mend, and +the wound soon assumed a healthy appearance. An operation had been +performed, and the projecting bone cut off. + +There were dire sufferings in Salamanca. Six thousand wounded had +to be cared for, the French prisoners and their guards fed; and the +army had no organization to meet so great a strain. Numbers of +lives that might have been saved, by care and proper attention, +were lost; and the spirit of discontent and insubordination, which +had its origin in the excesses committed in the sack of the +fortresses, rapidly increased. + +The news from the front, after a time, seemed more satisfactory. +Clausel had been hotly pursued. Had the king with his army joined +him, as he might have done, he would have been in a position to +again attack the enemy with greatly superior numbers; but Joseph +hesitated, and delayed until it was no longer possible. The British +army crossed the mountains, and the king was obliged to retire from +Madrid and evacuate the capital; which was entered by Wellington on +the 25th of August. + +Early in September, the chief surgeon said to Terence: + +"There is a convoy of sick going down, at the end of the week. I +think that it would be best for you to go with them. In the first +place, the air of this town is not favourable for recoveries. In +some of the hospitals a large number of men have been carried off +by the fever, which so often breaks out when the conditions are +bad. In the next place, I am privately informed, by the governor, +that he has received orders from the general to send all who are +capable of bearing the journey across the frontier, as soon as +possible. Another battle may be fought, at any moment. The +reinforcements that have come from England are nothing like +sufficient to replace the gaps in the army. + +"The French generals are collecting their forces, and it is certain +that Wellington will not be able to withstand their combination +and, if he should be compelled to retreat, it is all important that +he should not be hampered by the necessity of carrying off huge +convoys of wounded. The difficulties of transport are already +enormous; and it is, therefore, for many reasons desirable that all +who are sufficiently convalescent to march, and all for whom +transport can be provided, should start without delay." + +"I should be very glad, Doctor. I have not seemed to gain strength, +for the last week or ten days; but I believe that, if I were in the +open air, I should gain ground rapidly." + +Nita had been allowed to come up several times to see Terence, +since his convalescence began; and the last time she had called had +told him that Garcia had returned, being altogether dissatisfied +with the feeble proceedings of the guerilla chief. She came up that +afternoon, soon after the doctor left, and he told her the news +that he had received. The next day she told Terence that Garcia had +arranged with her father for his waggon and two bullocks, and that +he himself would drive it to Lisbon, if necessary. + +"They are fine bullocks, sir," she said, "and there is no fear of +their breaking down. Last night I was talking to one of your +sergeants, who comes to me every day for news of you. He says that +he and about forty of your men are going down with the convoy. All +are able to walk. It is so difficult to get carts that only +officers who cannot walk are to be taken, this time." + +"It is very good of Garcia and your father, Nita, but I should +manage just as well as the others." + +"That may be, senor, but it is better to have a friend with you who +knows the country. There may be difficulty in getting provisions, +and they say that there is a good deal of plundering along the +roads; for troops that have lately come up have behaved so badly +that the peasants declare they will have revenge, and treat them as +enemies if they have the opportunity. Altogether, it is as well to +have a friend with you." + +Terence told the surgeon next morning what had been arranged, and +said: + +"So we shall have room for one more, Doctor. Is Major Bull well +enough to go with me? He could travel in my waggon, which is sure +to be large enough for two to lie in, comfortably." + +"Certainly he can. He is making a slow recovery, and I should be +glad to send him away, only I have no room for him. If he goes with +you, I can send another officer down, also, in the place you would +have had." + +Accordingly, on the Saturday morning the convoy started. Bull and +Terence met for the first time, since the day of the battle; as the +former had been removed to another room, after the operation. He +was extremely weak, still, and had to be carried down and placed in +the waggon by the side of Terence. Garcia had been greatly affected +at the latter's appearance. + +"I should scarce have known you again, senor." + +"I am pulled down a bit, Garcia, but by the time we get to our +journey's end, you will see that I shall be a very different man. +How comfortable you have made the waggon!" + +"I have done what I could, senor. At the bottom are six sacks of +corn, for it may be that forage will run short. Then I have filled +it with hay, and there are enough rugs to lie on, and to cover you +well over at night; and down among the sacks is a good-sized box +with some good wine, two hams of Nita's father's curing, and a +stock of sausages, and other things for the journey." + +Nita came to say goodbye, and wept unrestrainedly at the parting. +She and Garcia had opened the little box, and found in it fifty +sovereigns; and had agreed to be married, as soon as Garcia +returned from his journey. As the train of thirty waggons--of which +ten contained provisions for use on the road--issued from the +gates, they were joined by the convalescents, four hundred in +number. All able to do so carried their arms, the muskets of the +remainder being placed on the provision waggons. + +"Have you heard from the regiment, Bull?" Terence asked, after they +had talked over their time in hospital, and their comrades who had +fallen. + +"No, sir. There is no one I should expect to write to me." + +"I had a letter from Ryan, yesterday," Terence said. "He tells me +that they have had no fighting since we left. They form only one +battalion now, and he says the state of things in Madrid is +dreadful. The people are dying of hunger, and the British officers +have subscribed and started soup kitchens; and that he, with the +other Portuguese regiments, were to march the next day, with three +British divisions and the cavalry, to join General Clinton, who was +falling back before Clausel." + +"'We all miss you horribly, Terence. Herrara does his best, but he +has not the influence over the men that you had. If we have to fall +back into Portugal again, which seems to me quite possible, for +little more than 20,000 men are fit to carry arms, I fancy that +there won't be a great many left round the colours by the spring. + +"'Upon my word, I can hardly blame them, Terence. More than half of +those who originally joined have fallen and, no doubt, the poor +fellows think that they have done more than their share towards +defending their country.'" + +By very short marches, the convoy made its way to the frontier. The +British convalescents remained at Guarda, the Portuguese marched +for Pinhel, and the carts with the wounded officers continued their +journey to Lisbon. The distance travelled had been over two hundred +and fifty miles and, including halts, they had taken five weeks to +perform it. Terence gained strength greatly during the journey, and +Bull had so far recovered that he was able to get out and walk, +sometimes, by the side of the waggon. + +Garcia had been indefatigable in his efforts for their comfort. +Every day he formed an arbour over their waggon, with freshly-cut +boughs brought in by the soldiers of the regiment; and this kept +off the rays of the sun, and the flies. At the villages at which +they stopped, most of the wounded were accommodated in the houses; +but Terence and Bull preferred to sleep in the waggon, the hay +being always freshly shaken out for them, in the evening. The +supplies they carried were most useful in eking out the rations, +and Garcia proved himself an excellent cook. Altogether, the +journey had been a pleasant one. + +On arriving at Lisbon, they were taken to the principal hospital. +Here the few who would be fit for service again were admitted, +while the rest were ordered to be taken down, at once, to a +hospital transport lying in the river. At the landing place they +said goodbye to Garcia, who refused firmly any remuneration for his +services, or for the hire of the waggon; and then Terence was +lifted into a boat and, with several other wounded, was taken on +board the transport. + +The surgeon came at once to examine him. + +"Do you wish to be taken below, colonel?" he asked Terence. + +"Certainly not," Terence said. "I can sit up here, and can enjoy +myself as much as ever I could; and the air from the sea will do +more for me than any tonics you can give me, Doctor." + +He was placed in a comfortable deck chair, and Bull had another +beside him. There were many officers already on board, and Terence +presently perceived, in one who was stumping about on a wooden leg, +a figure he recognized. He was passing on without recognition, when +Terence exclaimed: + +"Why, O'Grady, is it yourself?" + +"Terence O'Connor, by the powers!" O'Grady shouted. "Sure, I didn't +know you at first. It is meself, true enough, or what there is left +of me. It is glad I am to see you, though in a poor plight. The +news came to me that you had lost a leg. There was, at first, no +one in the hospital knew where you were, and I was not able to move +about, meself, to make inquiries; and when I found out, before I +came away, they said you were very bad, and that even if I could +get to you--which I could not, for I had not been fitted with a new +leg, then--I should not be able to see you. + +"It is just like my luck. I was hit by one of the first shots +fired, and lost all the fun of the fight." + +"Where were you hit, O'Grady?" + +"Right in the shin. Faith, I went down so sudden that I thought I +had trod in a hole; and I was making a scramble to get up again, +when young Dawson said: + +"'Lie still, O'Grady, they have shot the foot off ye.' + +"And so they had, and divil a bit could I find where it had gone +to. As I was about the first man hit, they carried me off the field +at once, and put me in a waggon and, as soon as it was full, I was +taken down to Salamanca. I only stopped there three weeks, and I +have been here now more than two months, and my leg is all right +again. But I am a lop-sided creature, though it is lucky that it is +my left arm and leg that have gone. I was always a good hopper, +when I was a boy; so that, if this wooden thing breaks, I think I +should be able to get about pretty well." + +"This is Major Bull, O'Grady. Don't you know him?" + +"Faith, I did not know him; but now you tell me who it is, I +recognize him. How are you, major?" + +"I am getting on, Captain O'Grady." + +"Major," O'Grady corrected. "I got my step at Salamanca; both our +majors were killed. So I shall get a dacent pension: a major's +pension, and so much for a leg and arm. That is not so bad, you +know." + +"Well, I have no reason to grumble," Bull said. "If I had been with +my old regiment and got this hurt, a shilling a day would have been +the outside. Now I shall get lieutenant's pension, and so much for +my arm and shoulder." + +"I have no doubt you will get another step, Bull. After the way the +regiment suffered, and with poor Macwitty killed, and you and I +both badly wounded, they are sure to give you your step," and +indeed when, on their arrival, they saw the Gazette, they found +that both had been promoted. + +"I suppose it is all for the best," O'Grady said. "At any rate, I +shall be able to drink dacent whisky for the rest of me life, and +not have to be fretting meself with Spanish spirit; though I don't +say there was no virtue in it, when you couldn't get anything +better." + +Three days later, the vessel sailed for England. At Plymouth +Terence, O'Grady, and several other of the Irish officers left her; +Bull promising Terence that, when he was quite restored to health, +he would come and pay him a visit. + +Terence and his companion sailed the next day for Dublin. O'Grady +had no relations whom he was particularly anxious to see and +therefore, at Terence's earnest invitation, he took a place with +him in a coach--to leave in three days, as both had to buy civilian +clothes, and to report themselves at headquarters. + +"What are you going to do about a leg, Terence?" + +"I can do nothing, at present. My stump is a great deal too tender, +still, for me to bear anything of that sort. But I will buy a pair +of crutches." + +This was, indeed, the first thing done on landing, Terence finding +it inconvenient in the extreme to have to be carried whenever he +wanted to move, even a few yards. He had written home two or three +times from the hospital, telling them how he was getting on; for he +knew that when his name appeared among the list of dangerously +wounded, his father and cousin would be in a state of great anxiety +until they received news of him; and as soon as they had taken +their places in the coach he dropped them a line, saying when they +might expect him. + +They had met with contrary winds on their voyage home, but the +three weeks at sea had done great things for Terence and, except +for the pinned-up trousers leg, he looked almost himself again. + +"Be jabers, Terence," O'Grady said, as the coach drove into +Athlone, "one might think that it was only yesterday that we went +away. There are the old shops, and the same people standing at +their doors to see the coach come in; and I think I could swear +even to that cock, standing at the gate leading into the stables. +What games we had here. Who would have thought that, when we came +back, you would be my senior officer!" + +When fifteen miles beyond Athlone there was a hail, and the coach +suddenly stopped. O'Grady looked out of the window. + +"It's your father, Terence, and the prettiest girl I have seen +since we left the ould country." + +He opened the door and got out. + +"Hooroo, major! Here we are, safe and sound. We didn't expect to +meet you for another eight miles." + +Major O'Connor was hurrying to the door, but the girl was there +before him. + +"Welcome home, Terence! Welcome home!" she exclaimed, smiling +through her tears, as she leaned into the coach and held out both +her hands to him, and then drew aside to make room for his father. + +"Welcome home, Terence!" the latter said, as he wrung his hand. "I +did not think it would have been like this, but it might have been +worse." + +"A great deal worse, father. Now, will you and the guard help me +out? This is the most difficult business I have to do." + +It was with some difficulty he was got out of the coach. As soon as +he had steadied himself on his crutches, Mary came up again, threw +her arms round his neck, and kissed him. + +"We are cousins, you know, Terence," she said, "and as your arms +are occupied, I have to take the initiative." + +She was half laughing and half crying. + +The guard hurried to get the portmanteaus out of the boot. As soon +as he had placed them in the road he shouted to the coachman, and +climbed up on to his post as the vehicle drove on; the passengers +on the roof giving hearty cheers for the two disabled officers. By +this time, the major was heartily shaking hands with O'Grady. + +"I saw in the Gazette that you were hit again, O'Grady." + +"Yes. I left one little memento of meself in Portugal, and it was +only right that I should lave another in Spain. It has been +worrying me a good deal, because I should have liked to have +brought them home to be buried in the same grave with me, so as to +have everything handy together. How they are ever to be collected +when the time comes bothers me entirely, when I can't even point +out where they are to be found." + +"You have not lost your good spirits anyhow, O'Grady." + +"I never shall, I hope, O'Connor; and even if I had been inclined +to, Terence would have brought them back again." + +As they stood chatting, a manservant had placed the portmanteaus on +the box of a pretty open carriage, drawn by two horses. + +"This is our state carriage, Terence, though we don't use it very +often for, when I go about by myself, I ride. Mary has a pony +carriage, and drives herself about. + +"You remember Pat Cassidy, don't you?" + +"Of course I do, now I look at him," Terence said. "It's your old +soldier servant," and he shook hands with the man. "He did not come +home with you, did he, father?" + +"No, he was badly wounded at Talavera, and invalided home. They +thought that he would not be fit for service again, and so +discharged him; and he found his way here, and glad enough I was to +have him." + +Aided by his father and O'Grady, Terence took his place in the +carriage. His father seated himself by his side, while Mary and +O'Grady had the opposite seat. + +"There is one advantage in losing legs," O'Grady said. "We can stow +away much more comfortably in a carriage. Is this the nearest point +to your place?" + +"Yes. It is four miles nearer than Ballyhovey, so we thought that +we might as well meet you here, and more comfortably than meeting +you in the town. It was Mary's suggestion. I think she would not +have liked to have kissed Terence in the public street." + +"Nonsense, uncle!" Mary said indignantly. "Of course I should have +kissed him, anywhere. Are we not cousins? And didn't he save me +from being shut up in a nunnery, all my life?" + +"All right, Mary, it is quite right that you should kiss him; +still, I should say that it was pleasanter to do so when you had +not a couple of score of loafers looking on, who would not know +that he was your cousin, and had saved you from a convent." + +"You are looking well, father," Terence said, to turn the +conversation. + +"Never was better in my life, lad, except that I am obliged to be +careful with my leg; but after all, it may be that, though it +seemed hard to me at the time, it is as well that I left the +regiment when I did. Quite half the officers have been killed, +since then. Vimiera accounted for some of them. Major Harrison went +there, and gave me my step. Talavera made several more vacancies, +and Salamanca cost us ten officers, including poor O'Driscoll. I am +lucky to have come off as well as I did. It did not seem a very +cheerful lookout, at first; but since this young woman arrived, and +took possession of me, I am as happy and contented as a man can +be." + +"I deny altogether having taken possession of you, uncle. I let you +have your way very much, and only interfere for your own good." + +"You will have another patient to look after now, dear, and to fuss +over." + +"I will do my best," she said softly, leaning forward and putting +her hand on that of Terence. "I know that it will be terribly dull +for you, at first--after being constantly on the move for the last +five years, and always full of excitement and adventure--to have to +keep quiet and do nothing." + +"I shall get on very well," he said. "Just as first, of course, I +shall not be able to get about very much, but I shall soon learn to +use my crutches; and I hope, before very long, to get a leg of some +sort; and I don't see why I should not be able to ride again, after +a bit. If I cannot do it any other way, I must take to a side +saddle. I can have a leg made specially for riding, with a crook at +the knee." + +Mary laughed, while the tears came in her eyes. + +"Why, bless me, Mary," he went on, "the loss of a leg is nothing, +when you are accustomed to it. I shall be able, as I have said, to +ride, drive, shoot, fish, and all sorts of things. The only thing +that I shall be cut off from, as far as I can see, is dancing; but +as I have never had a chance of dancing, since the last ball the +regiment gave at Athlone, the loss will not be a very grievous one. + +"Look at O'Grady. There he is, much worse off than I am, as he has +no one to make any particular fuss about him. He is getting on +capitally and, indeed, stumped about the deck so much, coming home, +that the captain begged him to have a pad of leather put on to the +bottom of his leg, to save the decks. O'Grady is a philosopher, and +I shall try to follow his example." + +"Why should one bother oneself, Miss O'Connor, when bothering won't +help? When the war is over, I shall buy Tim Doolan, my soldier +servant, out. He is a vile, drunken villain; but I understand him, +and he understands me, and he blubbered so, when he carried me off +the field, that I had to promise him that, if a French bullet did +not carry him off, I would send for him when the war was over. + +"'You know you can't do without me, yer honour,' the scoundrel +said. + +"'I can do better without you than with you, Tim,' says I. 'Ye are +always getting me into trouble, with your drunken ways. Ye would +have been flogged a dozen times, if I hadn't screened you. Take up +your musket and join your regiment. You rascal, you are smelling of +drink now, and divil a drop, except water, is there in me flask.' + +"'I did it for your own good,' says he. 'Ye know that spirits +always heats your blood, and water would be the best for you, when +the fighting began; so I just sacrificed meself. + +"'For,' says I to meself, 'if ye get fighting a little wild, Tim, +it don't matter a bit; but the captain will have to keep cool, so +it is best that you should drink up the spirits, and fill the flask +up with water to quench his thirst.'" + +"'Be off, ye black villain,' I said, 'or I will strike you.'" + +"'You will never be able to do without me, Captain,' says he, +picking up his musket; and with that he trudged away and, for aught +I know, he never came out of the battle alive." + +The others laughed. + +"They were always quarrelling, Mary," Terence said. "But I agree +with Tim that his master will find it very hard to do without him, +especially about one o'clock in the morning." + +"I am ashamed of you, Terence," O'Grady said, earnestly; "taking +away me character, when I have come down here as your guest." + +"It is too bad, O'Grady," Major O'Connor said, "but you know +Terence was always conspicuous for his want of respect towards his +elders." + +"He was that same, O'Connor. I did me best for the boy, but there +are some on whom education and example are clean thrown away." + +"You are looking pale, cousin Terence," Mary said. + +"Am I? My leg is hurting me a bit. Ireland is a great country, but +its by-roads are not the best in the world, and this jolting shakes +me up a bit." + +"How stupid I was not to think of it!" she said and, rising in her +seat, told Cassidy to drive at a walk. + +They were now only half a mile from the house. + +"You will hardly know the old place again, Terence," his father +said. + +"And a very good thing too, father, for a more tumble-down old +shanty I never was in." + +"It was the abode of our race, Terence." + +"Well, then, it says mighty little for our race, father." + +"Ah! But it did not fall into the state you saw it in till my +father died, a year after I got my commission." + +"I won't blame them, then; but, at any rate, I am glad I am coming +home to a house and not to a ruin. + +"Ah, that is more like a home!" he said, as a turn of the road +brought them in sight of the building. "You have done wonders, +Mary. That is a house fit for any Irish gentleman to live in." + +"It has been altered so that it can be added to, Terence; but, at +any rate, it is comfortable. As it was before, it made one feel +rheumatic to look at it." + +On arriving at the house, Terence refused all assistance. + +"I am going to be independent, as far as I can," he said and, +slipping down from the seat into the bottom of the chaise, he was +able to put his foot on to the ground and, by the aid of his +crutches, to get out and enter the house unaided. + +"That is the old parlour, I think," he said, glancing into one of +the rooms. + +"Yes. It is your father's snuggery, now. There is scarcely any +alteration there, and he can mess about as he likes with his guns +and fishing tackle and swords. + +"This is the dining room, now." + +And she led the way along a wide passage to the new part of the +house, where a bright fire was blazing in a handsome and +well-furnished room. An invalid's chair had been placed by the +fire, and opposite it was a large, cosy armchair. + +"That is for your use, Major O'Grady," she said. "Now, Terence, you +are to lay yourself up in that chair. I will bring a small table to +your side, and put your dinner there." + +"I will lie down until the dinner is ready, Mary. But I am +perfectly capable of sitting at the table. I did so the last week +before leaving the ship." + +"You shall do that tomorrow. You may say what you like, but I can +see that you are very tired and, for today, you will take it easy. +I am going to be your nurse, and I can assure you that you will +have to obey orders. You have been in independent command quite +long enough." + +"It is of no use, Terence; you must do as you are told," his father +said. "The only way to get on with this young woman is to let her +have her own way. I have given up opposing her, long ago; and you +will have to do the same." + +Terence did not find it unpleasant to be nursed and looked after, +and even to obey peremptory orders. + +A month later, Mary came into the room quietly, one afternoon, when +he was sitting and looking into the fire; as his father and O'Grady +had driven over to Killnally. Absorbed in his own thoughts, he did +not hear her enter. + +Thinking that he was asleep, she paused at the door. A moment later +she heard a deep sigh. She came forward at once. + +"What are you sighing about, Terence? Your leg is not hurting you, +is it?" + +"No, dear, it has pretty well given up hurting me." + +"What were you sighing about, then?" + +He was silent for a minute, and then said: + +"Well you see, one cannot help sighing a little at the thought that +one is laid up, a useless man, when one is scarce twenty-one." + +"You have done your work, Terence. You have made a name for +yourself, when others are just leaving college and thinking of +choosing a profession. You have done more, in five years, than most +men achieve in all their lifetime. + +"This is the first time I have heard you grumble. I know it is +hard, but what has specially upset you, today?" + +"I suppose I am a little out of sorts," he said. "I was thinking, +perhaps, how different it might have been, if it hadn't been for +that unlucky shell." + +"You mean that you might have gone on to Burgos, and fallen in the +assault there; or shared in that dreadful retreat to the frontier +again." + +"No. I was not thinking of Spain, nor even of the army. I was +thinking of here." + +"But you said, over and over again, Terence, that you will be able +to ride, and drive, and get about like other people, in time." + +"Yes, dear. In many respects it will be the same, but not in one +respect." + +Then he broke off. + +"I am an ungrateful brute. I have everything to make me happy--a +comfortable home, a good father, and a dear little sister to nurse +me." + +"What did I tell you, sir," she said, after a pause, "when I said +goodbye to you at Coimbra? That I would rather be your cousin. You +were quite hurt, and I said that you were a silly boy, and would +understand better, some day." + +"I have understood, since," he said, "and was glad that you were +not my sister; but now, you see, things have altogether changed, +and I must be content with sistership." + +The girl looked in the fire, and then said, in a low voice: + +"Why, Terence?" + +"You know why," he said. "I have had no one to think of but you, +for the last four years. Your letters were the great pleasures of +my life. I thought over and over again of those last words of +yours, and I had some hope that, when I came back, I might say to +you: + +"'Dear Mary, I am grateful, indeed, that you are my cousin, and not +my sister. A sister is a very dear relation, but there is one +dearer still.' + +"Don't be afraid, dear; I am not going to say so now. Of course, +that is over, and I hope that I shall come, in time, to be content +to think of you as a sister." + +"You are very foolish, Terence," she said, almost with a laugh, "as +foolish as you were at Coimbra. Do you think that I should have +said what I did, then, if I had not meant it? Did you not save me, +at the risk of your life, from what would have been worse than +death? Have you not been my hero, ever since? Have you not been the +centre of our thoughts here, the great topic of our conversation? +Have not your father and I been as proud as peacocks, when we read +of your rapid promotion, and the notices of your gallant conduct? +And do you think that it would make any difference to me, if you +had come back with both your legs and arms shot off? + +"No, dear. I am just as dissatisfied with the relationship you +propose as I was three years ago, and it must be either cousin +or--" and she stopped. + +She was standing up beside him, now. + +"Or wife," he said, taking up her hand. "Is it possible you mean +wife?" + +Her face was a sufficient answer, and he drew her down to him. + +"You silly boy!" she said, five minutes afterwards. "Of course, I +thought of it all along. I never made any secret of it to your +father. I told him that our escape was like a fairy tale, and that +it must have the same ending: 'and they married, and lived happy +ever after.' He would never have let me have my way with the house, +had I not confided in him. He said that I could spend my money as I +pleased, on myself, but that not one penny should be laid out on +his house; and I was obliged to tell him. + +"I am afraid I blushed furiously, as I did so, but I had to say: + +"'Don't you see, Uncle?'--of course, I always called him uncle, +from the first, though he is only a cousin--'I have quite made up +my mind that it will be my house, some day; and the money may just +as well be laid out on it now, to make it comfortable; instead of +waiting till that time comes.'" + +"What did my father say?" + +"Oh, he said all sorts of nonsense, just the sort of thing that you +Irishmen always do say! That he had hoped, perhaps, it might be so, +from the moment he got your letter; and that the moment he saw me +he felt sure that it would be so, for it must be, if you had any +eyes in your head." + +When Major O'Connor came home he was greatly pleased, but he took +the news as a matter of course. + +"Faith," he said, "I would have disinherited the boy, if he had +been such a fool as not to appreciate you, Mary." + +O'Grady was loud in his congratulations. + +"It is just like your luck, Terence," he said. "Luck is everything. +Here am I, a battered hero, who has lost an arm and a foot in the +service of me country, and divil a girl has thrown herself upon me +neck. Here are you, a mere gossoon, fifteen years my junior in the +service, mentioned a score of times in despatches, promoted over my +head; and now you have won one of the prettiest creatures in +Ireland and, what is a good deal more to the point, though you may +not think of it at present, with a handsome fortune of her own. In +faith, there is no understanding the ways of Providence." + +A week afterwards the whole party went up to Dublin, as Terence and +O'Grady had to go before a medical board. A fortnight later a +notice appeared, in the Gazette, that Lieutenant Colonel Terence +O'Connor had retired from the service, on half pay, with the rank +of colonel. + +The marriage did not take place for another six months, by which +time Terence had thrown away his crutches and had taken to an +artificial leg--so well constructed that, were it not for a certain +stiffness in his walk, his loss would not have been suspected by a +casual observer. For three months previous to the event, a number +of men had been employed in building a small but pretty house, some +quarter of a mile from the mansion, intended for the occupation of +Majors O'Connor and O'Grady. + +"It will be better, in every way, Terence," his father insisted, +when his son and Mary remonstrated against their thus proposing to +leave them. "O'Grady and I have been comrades for twenty years, and +we shall feel more at home, in bachelor quarters, than here. I can +run in three or four times a day, if I like, and I expect I shall +be as much here as over there; whereas if I lived here, I should +often be feeling myself in the way, though I know that you would +never say so. It is better for young people to be together and, +maybe some day, the house will be none too large for you." + +The house was finished by the time the wedding took place, and the +two officers moved into it. The wedding was attended by all the +tenants, and half the country round; and it was agreed that the +bride's jewels were the most magnificent that had ever been seen in +that part of Ireland, though some objected that diamonds, alone, +would have been more suitable for the occasion than the emeralds. + +Terence, on his return, had heard from his father that his Uncle, +Tim M'Manus, had called very soon after the major had returned to +his old home. He had been very friendly, and had been evidently +mollified by Terence's name appearing in general orders; but his +opinion that he would end his career by a rope had been in no way +shaken. He had, however, continued to pay occasional visits; and +the rapid rise of the scapegrace, and his frequent mention in +despatches, were evidently a source of much gratification to him; +and it was not long after his return that his uncle again came +over. + +"We will let bygones be bygones, Terence," he said, as he shook +hands with him. "You have turned out a credit to your mother's +name, and I am proud of you; and I hold my head high when I say +Colonel Terence O'Connor, who was always playing mischief with the +French, is my great nephew, and the good M'Manus blood shines out +clearly in him." + +There was no one who played a more conspicuous part at the wedding +than Uncle Tim. At his own request, he proposed the health of the +bride and bridegroom. + +"I take no small credit to myself," he said, "that Colonel Terence +O'Connor is the hero of this occasion. Never was there a boy whose +destiny was so marked as his, and it is many a time I predicted +that it was not either by flood, or fire, or quietly in his bed +that he would die. If, when the regiment was ordered abroad, I had +offered him a home, I firmly believe that my prediction would be +verified before now; but I closed my doors to him, and the +consequence was that he expended his devilment upon the French; and +it is a deal better for him that it is only a leg that he has lost, +which is a much less serious matter than having his neck unduly +stretched. Therefore, ladies and gentlemen, I can say with pride +that I have had no small share in this matter, and it is glad I am +that, when I go, I can leave my money behind me, feeling that it +won't all go to the dogs before I have been twelve months in my +grave." + +Another old friend was present at the wedding. Bull had made a slow +recovery, and had been some time before he regained his strength. +When he was gazetted out of the service, he secured a step in rank, +and retired as a major. In after years he made frequent visits to +Terence; to whom, as he always declared, he owed it that, instead +of being turned adrift on a nominal pension, he was now able to +live in comfort and ease. + +When, four months later, Tim M'Manus was thrown out of his trap +when driving home late at night, and broke his neck, it was found +that he had left the whole of his property to Terence and, as the +rents of his estate amounted to 600 pounds a year, no inconsiderable +proportion of which had, for many years past, been accumulating, the +legacy placed Terence in a leading position among the gentry of Mayo. + +For very many years the house was one of the most popular in the +county. It had been found necessary to make additions to it, and it +had now attained the dignity of a mansion. The three officers +followed, with the most intense interest, the bulletins and +despatches from the war and, on the day when the allies entered +Paris, the services of Tim Doolan, who had been invalided home a +year after the return of his master, and had been discharged as +unfit for further service, were called into requisition, for the +first time since his return, to assist his master back to the +house. + +O'Grady, however, explained most earnestly to Mary O'Connor, the +next day, that it was not the whisky at all, at all, but his wooden +leg that had got out of order, and would not carry him straight. + +Dick Ryan went through the war unscathed and, after Waterloo, +retired from the service with the rank of lieutenant colonel; +married, and settled at Athlone; and the closest intimacy, and very +frequent intercourse, were maintained between him and his comrades +of the Mayo Fusiliers. + +Terence, in time, quite ceased to feel the loss of his leg; and was +able to join in all field sports, becoming in time master of the +hounds, and one of the most popular sportsmen in the county. His +wife always declared that his wound was the most fortunate thing +that ever happened to him for, had it not been for that, he would +most likely have fallen in some of the later battles in the +Peninsula. + +"It is a good thing to have luck," she said, "and Terence had +plenty of it. But it does not do to tempt fortune too far. The +pitcher that goes too often to the well gets broken, in the end." + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Under Wellington's Command, by G. A. Henty + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK UNDER WELLINGTON'S COMMAND *** + +***** This file should be named 20207.txt or 20207.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/0/2/0/20207/ + +Produced by Martin Robb + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/20207.zip b/20207.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..af25c73 --- /dev/null +++ b/20207.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a6145ae --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #20207 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/20207) |
